REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) FOR. Remodeling & Renovations to Villa Tranchese Apartments FOR

Transcription

1 818 S. FLORES ST. SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS Procurement Department REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) FOR Remodeling & Renovations to Villa Tranchese Apartments FOR HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS AND AFFILIATED ENTITIES RFP No Prepared by: Department of Procurement Of the San Antonio Housing Authority 818 South Flores Street San Antonio, Texas President & CEO. Lourdes Castro Ramirez June 2010 HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 1

2 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations Date Issued: June 25, 2010 Request for Proposals For Villa Tranchese Apartments Renovations The Housing Authority of the City of San Antonio, Texas and its affiliated entities d/b/a San Antonio Housing Authority ( SAHA ) hereby invites proposals from independent contractors for the remodeling & renovations to the Villa Tranchese Apartment complex common areas for SAHA as specified in this solicitation. As a part of our social mission and federal mandate, SAHA is committed to providing economic, training and educational opportunities to the low income individuals in the communities we serve. All contractors are required to recruit and hire low income individuals for new positions and provide training & educational opportunities to the greatest extent feasible for these individuals. This Request for Proposals (RFP) contains submission requirements, scope of services, period of services, terms and conditions and other pertinent information for submitting a proper and responsive proposal. Prospective proposers desiring any explanation or interpretation of the solicitation must request it at least seven (7) calendar days before the RFP submittal deadline. The request must be addressed to Charles Bode, Asst. Dir. Of Procurement, at the address stated below. Any information given to a prospective proposer about this solicitation will be furnished to all other prospective proposers as a written amendment to the solicitation. A pre-submittal meeting will be held on July 7, 2010 at 10:00 A.M. Central Time at the SAHA Central Office, 818 South Flores, San Antonio, Texas All responses to the RFP must be enclosed in a sealed envelope and labeled as follows with the specific information: RFP# , Villa Tranchese Apartments Renovations, Due Date and Time: July 14, 2010, 11:00 A.M. (CST). The RFP response must be addressed to The San Antonio Housing Authority, Procurement Department, 818 South Flores, San Antonio, Texas Late submissions will not be accepted. Submissions will be held in confidence until the opening. Submissions will be evaluated on the criteria stated in the RFP. After evaluation of the responses, the Contract will be awarded to the proposer/s representing the Best Value to SAHA after preferences for Section 3 business concerns are considered. The resulting Contract may be funded through Section 3 covered assistance and as such will be subject to Section 3, 24 CFR Part 135. SAHA and its affiliated entities reserve the right to reject any and all submissions. The SAN ANTONIO HOUSING AUTHORITY will receive proposals for the various renovations to the Villa Tranchese Apartment complex until 11:00 A.M. Central Time, July 14, 2010, at the San Antonio Housing Authority Office, 818 S. Flores, at which time and place all submittals will be opened. HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 2

3 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations The Request for Proposals can be obtained by calling or online at or Contact Person: Charles Bode Asst. Director of Procurement (210) Notice: Contact with members of the SAHA Board of Commissioners, or SAHA officers and employees other than the contact person shown above, prior to the execution of a contract with the successful proposer(s) could result in disqualification of your proposal. In fairness to all, prospective proposers during the RFP process SAHA will not meet in person with anyone representing a potential provider of these services to discuss this RFP other than at the pre-submittal meeting. This does not exclude meetings required to conduct business not related to the RFP, or possible personal presentations after written or electronic proposals have been received and evaluated. HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS By: Lourdes Castro Ramirez President and CEO HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 3

4 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations Table of Contents Introduction 5 RFP Information at a Glance 6 General Information 7 SAHA Reservation of Rights 10 Scope of Proposal 12 Conditions to Propose 19 Form of Proposal 21 Proposal Evaluation 25 Right to Protest 29 Disputes under the Contract 30 Additional Considerations 31 Attachments: Attachment A- Form of Proposal,Proposal Fee Sheet Build on Materials, Cost Analysis Attachment B HUD Form 5369 Instructions to Offerors HUD Form 5369-A (8-93) Certifications & Representations HUD Form 5370 General Conditions HUD Form 2992 Suspension & Debarment HUD Form 2530 Previous Participation Conflict of Interest Questionnaire Attachment C Profile of Firm Form Attachment D- Section 3 Guidelines and Forms Attachment E- Wage Decision Attachment F- Technical Specifications & Drawings HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 4

5 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations INTRODUCTION The San Antonio Housing Authority (SAHA) is a public housing agency created by resolution of the City of San Antonio in 1938 pursuant to the Texas Housing Authorities Law (now Chapter 392 of the Texas Local Government Code) and federal law. SAHA is a unit of government and its functions are essential governmental functions. The property of SAHA is used for essential public and governmental purposes and is exempt from all taxes, including sales tax on all its purchases of supplies and services. SAHA enters into and executes contracts and other instruments that are necessary and convenient to the exercise of its powers. SAHA maintains contractual arrangements with United States Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) to manage and operate its low rent public housing program and administers the Section 8 Housing Assistance Payments Programs. SAHA programs are federally funded along with development and modernization grants and rental income. Its primary activity is the ownership and management of over 6,300 public housing units. It also administers rental assistance for almost 12,000 privately owned rental units through the Section 8 program. It operates and manages its housing developments to provide decent, safe, sanitary and affordable housing to low income families, the elderly, and the disabled, and implements various programs designed and funded by HUD. SAHA has created a number of affiliated public facility corporations ( PFCs ) pursuant to Chapter 303 of the Texas Local Government Code (the Public Facility Corporation Act). In some instances, these PFCs own projects. In other cases, PFCs or other related entities serve as partners in partnerships that have been awarded low-income housing tax credits. SAHA s affiliated entities own and operate over 3,000 units of affordable housing. SAHA staff also manages the San Antonio Housing Finance Corporation ( Finance Corporation ), which is primarily a conduit issuer of bonds for developers of affordable housing projects. The Finance Corporation was created pursuant to Chapter 394 of the Texas Local Government Code (the Texas Housing Finance Corporations Act). When used herein, SAHA shall include its affiliated entities. HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 5

6 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations RFP INFORMATION AT A GLANCE SAHA CONTACT PERSON HOW TO OBTAIN THE RFP DOCUMENTS ON THE APPLICABLE INTERNET SITE HOW TO FULLY RESPOND TO THIS RFP BY SUBMITTING A PROPOSAL PRE-SUBMITTAL MEETING PROPOSAL SUBMITAL RETURN & DEADLINE ANTICIPATED APPROVAL BY THE BOARD Charles Bode, Asst. Director of Procurement 818 S. Flores San Antonio, TX charles_bode@saha.org Phone: Fax: Access 2. Drag your pointer over Business with SAHA and click on Current Bids. 3. Follow the listed directions or 4. Access Submit 1 original and 3 exact copies of your proposal to the SAHA Procurement Dept. following the format as described under Section 5, Proposal Format. July 7, 2010 at 10:00 A.M. SAHA Central Office, 818 S. Flores, San Antonio, TX July 14, 2010 at 11:00 A.M. SAHA Procurement Dept. 818 S. Flores, San Antonio, TX August, 2010 HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 6

7 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS 1.0 GENERAL INFORMATION 1.1 Statement of Purpose: The Housing Authority of the City of San Antonio and its affiliated entities (SAHA) are seeking proposals from independent contractors with demonstrated professional competence and experience to provide for the various renovations to the Villa Tranchese Apartment complex as specified herein. 1.2 Prospective proposers acknowledge by downloading and receiving the RFP documents and/or by submitting a proposal that the submission of a proposal to SAHA is not a right by which to be awarded a contract, but merely is an offer by the prospective proposer to perform the requirements of the RFP documents in the event SAHA decides to consider to award a contract to that proposer. 1.3 Definitions: Throughout this Request for Proposals and all resulting documents, the terms below shall be defined as follows: Best Value means that SAHA will in an evaluation of each proposal submittal, consider factors other than just cost in making the award decision Contracting Officer when named within an RFP document shall refer to the President and CEO Contract refers to the fully executed written agreement that ensues from the RFP. Whereas all RFP documents are included, by reference, as a part of the ensuing contract, when "contract" is referred to within an RFP document; such is referring to both the RFP documents and the ensuing contract document Contractor and the term "successful proposer" may be used interchangeably Day(s) unless otherwise specified, shall refer to calendar days HUD is the United States Department of Housing and Urban Development. HUD is the Federal agency from which SAHA receives funding; however, pertaining to this RFP, correspondences, including proposal submittals, received from each proposer must exhaust all provisions contained herein prior to contacting HUD (i.e. in the case of a protest) Herein shall refer to all documents issued pursuant to the noted RFP, including the RFP documents and the attachments. HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 7

8 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations President & CEO is the SAHA President and Chief Executive Officer and/or Interim President and Chief Executive Officer Offer" is the proposal submittal that the proposer delivers to SAHA in response to the RFP Offeror" or "Offerors" are the proposer or proposers Contract Administrator (CA)" is the SAHA Director of Procurement or his/her designated representative Parties When the parties, both parties or either party is stated within the RFP documents or the contract, such refers to SAHA and the successful proposer(s) Proposal, Proposal Submittal and/or Bid is the "hard copy" document that the proposer is required to, as detailed within the RFP document, deliver to SAHA Protestant is a prospective proposer or proposer(s) who feel(s) that he/she has been treated inequitably by SAHA and wishes SAHA to correct the inequitable condition or situation. To be eligible to file a protest with SAHA pertaining to an RFP or contract, the protestant must have been involved in the RFP process in some manner as a prospective proposer or proposer Prospective Proposer, Proposer or Bidder A prospective proposer is a firm or individual who has been notified of the RFP solicitation and/or who has requested and/or received the RFP documents and is considering responding with a proposal; a proposer is a firm or individual who has submitted a proposal in response to the RFP. All terms and conditions shall apply equally to all prospective proposers as well as proposers, though prospective proposers may not, after the deadline set for receiving proposals, receive further notices pertaining to that RFP-meaning, certain notices are only delivered to proposers and not to prospective proposers Request For Proposals (RFP) is the competitive proposal process allowed by HUD, especially as defined within Chapter 7 of HUD Procurement Handbook REV RFP Document(s) When stated in the singular or the plural form, such refers to the body of documents, including attachments and the information posted on the nahro.economicengine.com Internet site and that SAHA makes available to all prospective proposers wherein are detailed SAHA's requirements. HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 8

9 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations SAHA is the Housing Authority of the City of San Antonio, Texas and all its affiliated entities. Unless otherwise defined herein or within the ensuing contract, whenever the term "SAHA" is used without clearly designating a responsible SAHA staff person, the proposer(s) may assume that responsibility for that item rests with the SAHA CA. 1.4 Non-Mandatory Pre-Proposal Conference: A pre-proposal conference will be held on July 7, 2010 at 10:00 a.m. Central Time at SAHA Central Office, located at 818 South Flores, San Antonio, Texas The purpose of this conference is to assist prospective proposers in the full understanding of the RFP documents so proposers are confident in submitting an appropriate proposal; therefore, at this conference, SAHA will conduct an overview of the RFP documents, including attachments. Because the purpose of this conference is to review the RFP documents, attendees should bring a copy of the RFP documents to this conference. SAHA will not distribute at this conference any copies of the RFP documents. Questions concerning the contents of the project and procedural aspects of the RFP will be answered at this time; however, the CA may require that some questions be delivered in writing prior to a response. Any questions not answered during the conference will be responded to in writing and an addendum posted on SAHA s website: and nahro.economicengine.com. All prospective proposers are encouraged to attend; however, if proposers do not plan to attend the conference, any questions or request for information must be submitted in writing to the CA seven (7) days prior to the proposal submission deadline. 1.5 Proposal Submission Deadline: July 14, 2010 at 11:00 a.m. (Central Time) at SAHA Central Office, 818 S. Flores, San Antonio, Texas 1.6 Proposer s Responsibilities-Contact with SAHA: It is the responsibility of the proposer to address all communication and correspondences pertaining to this RFP process to the CA only. Proposers must not make inquiry or communicate with any other SAHA staff member or official (including members of the Board of Commissioners) pertaining to this RFP. Failure to abide by this requirement may be cause for SAHA to not consider a proposal submittal received from any proposer who has not followed this directive. During the RFP solicitation process, the SAHA CA will not conduct any ex parte conversations which may give one prospective proposer an advantage over other prospective proposers. 1.7 Type of Contract resulting from RFP: A Firm Fixed-Fee contract with the option to extend at the sole discretion of SAHA. HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 9

10 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations 2.0 SAHA S RESERVATION OF RIGHTS 2.1 SAHA reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, to waive any informality in the RFP process, or to terminate the RFP process at any time, if deemed by SAHA to be in its best interests. 2.2 SAHA reserves the right not to award a contract pursuant to this RFP. 2.3 SAHA reserves the right to terminate a contract awarded pursuant to this RFP, at any time for its convenience upon 14 days written notice to the successful proposer(s). 2.4 SAHA reserves the right to determine the days, hours and locations that the successful proposer(s) shall provide the services called for in this RFP. 2.5 SAHA reserves the right to retain all proposals submitted and not permit withdrawal for a period of 90 days subsequent to the deadline for receiving proposals without the written consent from the CA. 2.6 SAHA reserves the right to negotiate the fees proposed by all proposers. If such negotiations are not, in the opinion of SAHA s CA successfully concluded within a reasonable timeframe as determined by SAHA, SAHA shall retain the right to end such negotiations. 2.7 SAHA reserves the right to reject and not consider any proposal that does not meet the requirements of this RFP, including but not necessarily limited to incomplete proposals and/or proposals offering alternate or non-requested services. 2.8 SAHA shall have no obligation to compensate any proposer for any costs incurred in responding to this RFP. 2.9 SAHA reserves the right to at any time during the RFP or contract process to prohibit any further participation by a proposer or reject any proposal submitted that does not conform to any of the requirements detailed herein. Each prospective proposer further agrees that he/she will inform SAHA s CA in writing within five (5) days of the discovery of any item that is issued thereafter by SAHA that he/she feels needs to be addressed. Failure to abide by this timeframe shall relieve SAHA, but not the prospective proposer, of any responsibility pertaining to such issue SAHA reserves the right, prior to award, to revise, change, alter or amend any of the instructions, terms, conditions, and/or specifications identified within the RFP documents issued, within any attachment or drawing, or within any addenda issued. All addenda will be posted on SAHA s website and nahro.economicengine.com. Such changes that are issued before the proposal submission deadline shall be binding upon all prospective proposers. HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 10

11 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations 2.11 In the case of rejection of all proposals, SAHA reserves the right to advertise for new proposals or to proceed to do the work otherwise, if in the judgment of SAHA, the best interest of SAHA will be promoted SAHA reserves the right to, without any liability; cancel the award of any proposal(s) at any time before the execution of the contract documents by all parties SAHA reserves the right to reduce or increase estimated or actual quantities in whatever amount necessary without prejudice or liability to SAHA, if: Funding is not available, Legal restrictions are placed upon the expenditure of monies for this category of service or supplies; or, SAHA s requirements in good faith change after award of the contract SAHA reserves the right to make an award to more than one proposer based on ratings and to award with or without negotiations or a Best and Final Offer (BAFO) SAHA reserves the right to require additional information from all proposers to determine level of responsibility. Such information shall be submitted in the form required by SAHA within two (2) days of written request SAHA reserves the right to amend the contract any time prior to contract execution SAHA reserves the right to require the Contractor to keep accurate timesheets for all employees assigned to perform any project, task, or assignment resulting from this RFP and any resulting contract SAHA reserves the right to contact any individuals, entities, or organizations that have had a business relationship with the proposer regardless of their inclusion in the reference section of the proposal submittal In the event any resulting contract is prematurely terminated due to nonperformance and/or withdrawal by the Contractor, SAHA reserves the right to seek monetary restitution (to include but not limited to withholding of monies owed) from the Contractor to cover costs for interim services and/or cover the difference of a higher cost (difference between terminated Contractor s rate and new company s rate) beginning the date of Contractor s termination through the contract expiration date. HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 11

12 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations 3.0 SCOPE OF PROPOSAL/TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: The Contractor shall provide all material, labor, and equipment to remodel and renovate the interior common areas at the Villa Tranchese Apartments as specified herein. The time for completion will be 200 days from notice to proceed. 3.1 REGULATORY: Contractor(s) shall comply with all applicable federal, state and local laws, rules, regulations, ordinances and codes and obtain any licenses or permits required to provide the services under this RFP Taxes: SAHA is a governmental entity and is therefore exempt from all local, state and federal sales and excise taxes. No taxes should be paid on any items or materials used in these projects The goods and services requested in this solicitation will be funded with monies made available by the Federal American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009 (ARRA). The ARRA contains provisions, commonly known as Buy American, that require all of the iron, steel and manufactured goods used in this project be manufactured in the United States. The Contractor represents, warrants and certifies by submitting a proposal to and for the benefit of SAHA that all iron, steel and manufactured goods that will be used in this project will be or have been manufactured in the United States in a manner that complies with the Buy American Requirements. 3.2 PRODUCT QUALITY STANDARD: Contractor shall use products that meet or exceed the specifications included herein and in all cases meet or exceed the requirements of the HUD and local building codes. Contractors are hereby advised that this procurement is funded with ARRA funds and is subject to its Buy American clause. 3.3 INSPECTIONS: All renovations, replacements & repairs shall be subject to inspection and approval by a SAHA representative. The final inspection shall be conducted by all parties responsible for the job including SAHA s representative, the Contractor s representative, and the appropriate City of San Antonio Inspector. 3.4 LICENSING: Contractor/s shall be licensed as required by the jurisdiction in which the project is to be performed and the license shall be current and in good standing. Copies of the licenses shall be placed under Tab GENERAL CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS: Contractor is responsible for field verifying all quantities, dimensions, conditions and variables at this complex. Failure to verify shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations under any ensuing contract. HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 12

13 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations Contractor shall follow the manufacturer s recommendations during the installation of any equipment and/or materials unless in conflict with applicable codes and/or specifications. In case of conflict notify the Project Manager Property Location: Villa Tranchese Apartments, 307 Marshall, San Antonio, TX Agency contacts: Contractor will be provided with appropriate contacts upon award of a contract Contractor shall include in his/her proposal a Build on Materials (BOM) showing all costs for equipment, materials, hardware and labor by skill and level of expertise, profit & overhead necessary and required to accomplish the tasks specified herein and as outlined in the cost proposal forms. See attached example All products listed herein are to reference a known quality and level of performance. SAHA will consider alternate brands of equal quality and performance. The Proposer must indicate on the Proposal Form if they are proposing alternate products, and provide complete manufacturer s specification with the proposal submittal. In all cases SAHA shall be the final determiner of equality. All substitutions will be approved in writing; no oral approvals shall be recognized BONDING: All non-cash Bonds shall be issued by companies licensed to do business in the State of Texas, approved by the U.S. Treasury and A rated or better by A. M. Best. Payment & Performance Bonds shall be provided within ten (10) days after Contract execution by both parties. Individual sureties are not acceptable Bid Bond: SAHA requires a Bid Bond for this proposal in the amount of 5% of the Base Bid. The Bid Bond shall be submitted with the Cost Proposal under Tab 1 and inserted into the ORIGINAL copy of the proposal only Performance Bond: The Contractor must provide SAHA a 100% Performance Bond for the total contract value; however, if the Contractor fails to present to SAHA a performance bond that is acceptable to SAHA within ten (10) days of contract execution, then the Contractor shall be in breach of contract. HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 13

14 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations Payment Bond: The Contractor must provide SAHA a 100% Payment Bond for the total contract value; however, if the Contractor fails to present to SAHA a payment bond that is acceptable to SAHA within ten (10) days of contract execution, then the Contractor shall be in breach of contract Notice to Proceed: Start work date will be determined by the SAHA Project Manager and Contractor s Manager. Contractor shall not begin work until a Notice to Proceed is received from SAHA signed by the Contracting Officer or his/her designee Forms: The use of HUD or SAHA specific forms shall take precedence over any referenced AIA forms within the technical specifications. If no comparable HUD or SAHA form exists then the AIA form will be utilized Change Orders: With regard to change orders, the Architect will review and recommend to SAHA any necessary changes to the project. Approval for changes shall only be authorized by the SAHA Contracting Officer. No work, on a change, may proceed until the approval of the SAHA Contracting Officer or designee is received. 3.6 Hazardous Materials Abatement: SAHA has retained the services of an environmental engineering firm to prepare the plans and specifications for the abatement of identified hazardous materials. If Contractor encounters suspected hazardous or regulated materials he/she shall cease work immediately and contact the SAHA Project Manager. SAHA will contract for this service separately and abatement will be completed prior to beginning or resumption of work. 3.7 HUD Section 3 Program: Contractor shall utilize Section 3 residents as defined in Attachment D to perform the requirements under this bid to the greatest extent feasible and shall document such efforts quarterly. There is a 30% goal for hiring Section 3 residents on any contract/s resulting from this RFP. Contractors will be evaluated on his performance at achieving this goal and such evaluation shall be a factor in future awards. Contractor must submit a detailed Section 3 utilization plan with his/her bid and the number of expected new hires Contractor expects as a result of an award, failure to do so may result in disqualification of the bid. Upon award the Contractor must submit quarterly reports as the project progresses detailing the number of new hires, the number of Section 3 new hires, the hours worked and all efforts to solicit or train qualified individuals. 3.8 Value Engineering & Green Initiatives: During negotiations the Contractor is encouraged to apply the concepts of value engineering to enhance the cost effectiveness of the project and allow for greater value at the same or lower cost. The Contractor is also encouraged to investigate and offer alternatives that would increase the green or environmental efficiency of the project. Such suggestions shall be included with the Fee proposal forms. HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 14

15 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations 3.9 Responsibility for Subcontractors: All requirements for the Prime contractor shall also apply to any and all subcontractors. It is the Prime Contractors responsibility to insure the compliance by the subcontractors. At all times the Prime Contractor remains liable to SAHA for the performance and compliance of the subcontractors PROJECT OCCUPANCY: For the purposes of this project the development shall be considered fully occupied. The project site may also have various construction zones, phasing, mobilization, as well as other Contractors working on-site. Proposers must include these variables in their proposed fees. SAHA shall not pay additional sums for bidder s failure to factor these conditions into their submittal TIME FOR COMPLETION: The Contractor shall immediately mobilize and commence work at the time stipulated in the Notice to Proceed to the Contractor and shall be fully completed within the specified time. The time for completion of 200 days includes allocation for severe weather days Claims by the Contractor for delay due to unusually severe weather must be supported by climatological data covering the period and the same period for the ten (10) Preceding Years. When the weather in question exceeds the ten (10) Year Average in intensity or frequency, the excess experienced shall be considered unusually severe. Comparison shall be on a monthly basis. Whether or not unusually severe weather in fact delays the work will depend upon the effect of weather on the branches of work being performed during that time under construction SAFETY: Subject to prior approval by SAHA as to size, design, type and location, and to local regulations, the Contractor and his / her subcontractors shall erect Temporary Safety Signs for purposes of identification and controlling traffic. The Contractor shall furnish, erect, and maintain such signs as may be required by safety regulations and as necessary to safeguard life and property JOB OFFICES The Contractor may furnish and maintain a job office during execution of the project with approval by the SAHA Project Manager The Contractor and his/her subcontractors may maintain with approval by the SAHA Project Manager various Storage Facilities on the site as may be necessary in the proper conduct of the work. These shall be located to cause no interference with any work to be performed on the site by the Contractor or others. The bidder must consider that on-site storage may be limited or not permitted at the project site. The Contractor shall consult with SAHA regarding the location(s) of these facilities on each site. SAHA shall not be responsible for any off-site storage or delivery fees. HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 15

16 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations Upon completion of the project, or as directed by SAHA, the Contractor shall remove all such temporary structures and facilities from the site and leave the premises in equal or better condition than it was at turnover CALCULATIONS: Each Contractor is responsible to field verify the Installation of all Items requested on this project. This shall include demolition, disposal, preparation, installation, overhead, profit, performance bonding, general liability, labor burden, weather conditions, field verified quantities, and encumbrances. All Proposers submitted Unit Price Items must include these variables. SAHA shall not pay additional sums for a bidder s failure to factor these conditions into the bids. Failure to consider any of the factors listed below shall not negate the Contractor s responsibility to perform if awarded a contract and assigned a project Verify Approximations: The proposer must Field Verify All Grades, and Conditions. Please visit the apartment complex to get a better idea on how these variables may impact the bid price and unit pricing Demolition Approximations: The proposer s fees must include for the possibility of removal and disposal of all existing material supporting or attached to the material to be replaced or repaired on any project assigned by SAHA WARRANTIES: All items installed under any contract resulting from this RFP must include both a Manufacturer s Warranty, if applicable, plus a minimum of a one (1) year Warranty from the Contractor for labor and installation except as specified otherwise herein. This period will begin on the date of FINAL acceptance by SAHA Builders Risk: Contractor is encouraged to acquire Builder s Risk Insurance for any project or projects resulting from this solicitation. In any case SAHA will not be responsible for any loss to Contractor s tools, materials, supplies or any other coverage normally covered under Builder s Risk Insurance COMMUNICATIONS: Form: All claims, notices, demands, requests, instructions, approvals and proposals must be submitted in writing Notice to Contractor: Any Notices or Demands upon the Contractor shall be sufficiently given if delivered at the office of the Contractor stated on the signature page of the Contract or at such other office as he/she may from time to time designate in writing to SAHA or deposited in the United States mail in a sealed, postage-prepaid envelope or if delivered with charges prepaid to any telegraph company for transmission and addressed to the office of the Contractor indicated on the signature page of the contract or such other address as may be subsequently specified in writing to SAHA. HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 16

17 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations Notice to SAHA: All notification papers required to be delivered to SAHA or its designated representative shall, unless otherwise specified in writing to the Contractor, be delivered to SAHA, attention Procurement Department at 818 South Flores, San Antonio, Texas, 78204; and any notice to or demand upon SAHA shall be sufficiently given if so delivered or deposited in the United States mail in a sealed, postage-prepaid envelope or delivered with charges prepaid to any telegraph company for transmission to SAHA at the above address or to such other address as SAHA may subsequently specify in writing to the Contractor for such purpose Receipt: Any such notice shall be deemed to have been given as of the time of actual delivery; or in the case of mailing, when the same should have been received in due course after the date of surrender to the Post Office; or in the case of telegrams, at the time of actual receipt, as the case may be FINAL INSPECTION Notice: The Contractor shall provide prompt written notification to SAHA when all work is completed. A final project inspection shall be made when all work is completed. Until the final inspection has been made and project accepted by SAHA, SAHA shall not advance any of the retainage or make the final payment to the Contractor Inspection Date: Upon receipt of the Contractor s notification of the date when the work has been completed, SAHA shall conduct a final Inspection within 14 calendar days Inspection Participants: The final inspection shall be conducted by all parties responsible for the job especially SAHA s representative and the Contractor s representative Inspection Conference: The inspection team shall meet after completing the final inspection to determine whether the work has been completed in accordance with the construction documents and produce a Punch List Schedule which describes any minor items of incomplete or unsatisfactory work (or seasonal work such as planting of shrubs and lawns) and document if there are any major deficiencies which must be corrected by the Contractor and additional inspections scheduled prior to contract settlement. HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 17

18 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations 3.19 SETTLEMENT DOCUMENTS Document: The settlement document shall state that the work was completed in accordance with the construction documents, including change orders except any minor items identified on SAHA s proposed certificate of completion, the total amount due the Contractor and a separately stated amount for each unsettled claim against SAHA. It shall also state that SAHA is released of all liens and all claims except those expressly stated in the Contractor s release and that wages paid to laborers or mechanics were consistent with the wage rate requirements of the contract and there are no outstanding claims for unpaid wages Assignment of Warranty: Contractor shall assign any warranties and guarantees to SAHA and provide the Contractor s Warranty for Materials and Workmanship to SAHA along with all Manufacturers Warranty documents The document shall also include documentation for all products and equipment installed to include but not limited to operating instructions, service manuals, and country of origin The work of this contract should not require the Contractor to enter into any residences/apartments. Entry and/or disruption of utility service to any apartment or group of apartments will require the Contractor to provide a minimum of 48 hour notice and to coordinate such notice by way of a weekly work schedule with Property Management and SAHA Project Manager. Contractor must maintain sufficient personnel on the site to support the weekly work schedule in order to maintain minimal disruption of services to the residences All disruption of utility service, to any resident(s), will be limited to the hours of 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday. Temporary utilities will have to be provided if disruption of services is anticipated to extend beyond any one 8 hour period ARRA REPORTING: Contractor must supply the following information on a quarterly basis to meet the ARRA requirements Contractor must report the number of jobs, in labor hours, which will be created in the United States and outlying areas, during this calendar quarter for the entire project. Jobs created by the primary contractor s workforce as well as the workforces of subcontractors should be reported. Be sure to report jobs retained separately. Labor hours refer to the number of direct hours worked (e.g.: two employees both working 100 hours would be entered as 200 labor hours). Labor hours do not include vacation, holiday, or sick day hours. As used in this instruction, United States means the 50 States and the District of Columbia, and outlying areas means Commonwealths, Territories and outlying islands. HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 18

19 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations Employment Impact of Jobs Created: Provide a narrative description of the employment impact of work done by created jobs. This narrative should be cumulative to date and must be updated for each calendar quarter and at a minimum, address the impact on both the primary contractor s workforce and the impact on the workforces of subcontractors. The report should include (a) a brief description of the types of jobs created in the United States and outlying areas terms of broad labor categories, such as Wastewater Utility Construction and (b) an estimate of the number of jobs created in the United States and outlying areas Jobs Retained: This is the number of jobs, also in labor hours, which will be retained in the United States and outlying areas, in this calendar quarter, for the entire project. Jobs retained by the primary contractor s workforce as well as the workforces of subcontractors should be reported. Be sure to report jobs created separately Employment Impact of Jobs Retained: Provide a narrative description of the employment impact of work done by retained jobs. This narrative should be cumulative to date and must be updated for each calendar quarter and at a minimum, address the impact on both the primary contractor s workforce and the impact on the workforces of subcontractors. The report should include (a) a brief description of the types of jobs created in the United States and outlying areas terms of broad labor categories, such as Wastewater Utility Construction and (b) an estimate of the number of jobs created in the United States and outlying areas. 4.0 CONDITIONS TO PROPOSE: 4.1 Pre-Qualification of Proposers: Prospective proposers will not be required to pre-qualify in order to submit a proposal. However, all proposers will be required to submit adequate information showing that the proposer is qualified to perform the required work (i.e. Profile of Firm Form (Attachment C). Failure by the prospective proposer to provide the requested information may, at SAHA s discretion, eliminate that proposer from consideration, provided that all proposers were required to submit the same information. 4.2 RFP Forms, Documents, Specifications and Drawings: Prior to submitting a proposal in response to the RFP, it shall be each prospective proposer s responsibility to examine carefully and, as may be required, properly complete all documents issued pursuant to this RFP. HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 19

20 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations Unless otherwise instructed, specifications and drawings (if provided) do not purport to show all of the exact details of the work. They are intended to illustrate the character and extent of the performance desired under the proposed contract and may be supplemented or revised from time to time Catalogs, brand names or manufacturer s references where provided are descriptive only and indicate type and quality desired. Proposals on brands of like nature and quality will be considered unless specified otherwise. If proposing other than references, proposal submittal shall show manufacturer, brand or trade name, and other description of product offered. If other than brand(s) specified is offered, illustrations and complete description of products offered must be included in the proposal submittal. Failure to take exception to specifications or referenced data will require Contractor to furnish specified brand names, numbers, etc. 4.3 Submissions and Receipt by SAHA: Time for Receiving Proposals: Proposals received prior to the proposal submittal deadline shall be securely kept, unopened, by SAHA. The CA, whose duty it is to open such proposals, will decide when the specified time has arrive. No proposal received after the designated deadline shall be considered Proposers are cautioned that any proposal submittal that is time-stamped as being received by SAHA after the exact time set as the deadline for the receiving of proposals shall not be considered. Any such proposals inadvertently opened, but shall be ruled to be invalid. No responsibility will attach to SAHA or any official or employee thereof, for the pre-opening of, or the failure to open a proposal not properly addressed and identified A total of one (1) original signature copy (marked ORIGINAL ) and three (3) exact copies, with a cover and extending tabs, of the proposal submittal, shall be placed unfolded in a sealed package with the proposer s name and return address and addressed as follows: RFP # {Insert Number} {Insert Exact Title of RFP} {Insert Month, day, year, Time of Bid Opening} The San Antonio Housing Authority Procurement Department 818 S. Flores San Antonio, Texas HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 20

21 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations Withdrawal of Proposals: Proposals may be withdrawn as detailed within Section 5(g) of Form HUD-5369 (10/2002), Late Submissions, Modifications and Withdrawal of Bids. Negligence on the part of the proposer in preparing his/her proposal confers no right of withdrawal or modification of his/her proposal after such proposal has been received and opened Procedure to withdrawal proposal submittal: A request for withdrawal of a proposal due to a purported error need not be considered by SAHA unless filed in writing by the proposer within 48 hours after the proposal deadline. Any such request shall contain a full explanation of any purported error and shall, if requested by SAHA, be supported by the original calculations on which the proposal was computed, together with a certification and notarization thereon that such computation is the original and was prepared by the proposer or his/her agent, who must be identified on the notarized form. The foregoing shall not be construed that such withdrawal will be permitted, as SAHA retains the right to accept or reject any proposed withdrawal for a mistake. 4.4 Exceptions to Specifications: A prospective proposer may take exception to any of the proposal documents or any part of the information contained therein, by submitting, in writing to the SAHA CA, at least seven (7) days prior to the proposal submission deadline, a complete and specific explanation as to what he/she is taking exception. Proposed alternate documents or information must also be included. SAHA reserves the right to agree with the prospective proposer and issue a revision to the applicable RFP requirements, or may reject the prospective proposer s request When taking exception, prospective proposers must propose services that meet the requirements of the RFP documents. Exceptions to the specification and/or approved "equal" requests may be discussed at the scheduled pre-proposal conference (if scheduled). All verbal instructions issued by the SAHA officers not already listed within the RFP documents shall only become official when issued as addenda or as a written answer issued pursuant to receipt of a written question. 5.0 FORM OF PROPOSAL: The proposal shall be submitted in the following manner. Failure to submit the proposal in the manner specified may result in a premature opening of, post-opening of, or failure to open and consider that proposal, and may, at the discretion of the SAHA CA, eliminate that proposer from consideration for award. HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 21

22 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations 5.1 Required Forms: All required forms furnished by SAHA as a part of the RFP document issued shall, as instructed, be fully completed and submitted by the proposer. Such forms may be completed in a legible hand-written fashion, by use of a typewriter, or may be downloaded and completed on a computer. If, during the download, a form becomes changed in any fashion, the proposer must edit the form back to its original form (for example, signature lines must appear on the page which the line was originally intended). 5.2 Tabbed Proposal Submittal: SAHA intends to retain the successful Proposer pursuant to a Best Value basis, not a Low Bid basis. Therefore, so that SAHA can properly evaluate the proposals received, all proposals submitted in response to this RFP must be formatted in accordance with the sequence noted below. Each category must be separated by numbered index dividers and the number on the index divider must extend so that each tab can be located without opening the proposal and labeled with the corresponding tab reference noted below. None of the proposed services may conflict with any requirement SAHA has published herein or has issued by addendum Tab 1, Form of Proposal: This Form is attached hereto as Attachment A to this RFP document. This one-page Form must be fully completed, and submitted under this tab as a part of the proposal submittal. The proposed fee section of this form will be intentionally left blank in the proposal submittals. The Fee Proposal Sheet, Build on Materials (BOM) & Cost Analysis (Attachment A) must be completed separately and placed in a sealed envelope. DO NOT INCLUDE THE PROPOSED FEE SHEET, BOM, OR COST ANALYSIS IN THE PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL COPIES. THEY MUST BE SUBMITTED SEPARATELY IN A SEALED ENVELOPE AT THE TIME OF PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL AND ATTACHED ONLY TO THE ORIGINAL COPY Tab 2, Form HUD Forms and Conflict of Interest Questionnaire: These Forms are attached hereto as Attachment B to this RFP document and must be fully completed, executed where provided thereon and submitted under this tab as a part of the proposal submittal Tab 3, Profile of Firm Form: The Profile of Firm Form is attached hereto as Attachment C to this RFP document. This two-page Form must be fully completed, executed and submitted under this tab as a part of the proposal submittal by the Proposer and each subcontractor Tab 4, Experience, Past Performance, Managerial Capacity & Financial Viability: The Proposer must submit under this tab a concise description of its experience, past performance, managerial capacity and financial viability to deliver the proposed services, to include: Firm s experience in the operation of projects of this or greater scope, crew size, cost and timeline. HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 22

23 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations Financial ability to provide such services to include copies of most recent financial statements or balance sheets that clearly show assets, liabilities, income, credit lines, debt and/or if available the most recent audit Management & Quality Control plan for oversight of all services and the coordination of owner s personnel, subcontractors and suppliers to comply with the timeframe and safety issues Project Manager and staff s renovation expertise, include resumes of project manager and key staff. Evidence of commitment to excellence in workmanship and professionalism as evidenced by awards and certifications Tab 5, Client Information: The proposer shall submit three former or current clients, preferably other than SAHA, for whom the proposer has performed similar or like services to those being proposed herein. The list shall, at a minimum, include for each reference: The client s name; The client s current telephone number and address, Description of services provided to the client, Date of services; include completion time frame and days over/under schedule, Pictures of recent projects and completed projects, Budget, amount of Change Orders requested, and Warranty claims Tab 6, Joint Venture/Subcontractors: The proposer shall identify hereunder if this proposal is a joint venture or partnership with another entity. Please remember that all information required from the proposer under the proceeding tabs must also be included for any joint venture or partner. One entity must be designated as the primary contact for the joint venture or partnership in the proposal. Proposers must also provide SAHA with the name, contact information to include address, phone number, address, core area of business, and years of expertise for each subcontractor and supplier intended to be utilized by the Proposer to perform the services requested in this RFP. Proposer must realize that the actual usage of the subcontractor will be contingent upon SAHA s prior written approval, and Proposer remains responsible to SAHA for any and all services and goods provided pursuant to this RFP and any resulting contract. If no joint venture exists or subcontractors will not be utilized, please provide this statement, NO JOINT VENTURE/ NO SUBCONTRACTORS, in this section. HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 23

24 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations Tab 7, Section 3 Business Documentation: Proposers are required to submit a utilization plan outlining their efforts to employ qualified Section 3 businesses or persons regardless of whether or not they are seeking a preference. The plan shall detail the Proposer s good faith effort to hire, train or provide educational opportunities to Section 3 residents and the potential number of new hires if awarded a contract. FAILURE TO PROVIDE A SECTION 3 PLAN MAY CAUSE THE SUBMITTAL TO BE DISQUALIFIED AS NON- RESPONSIVE. In addition, any Proposer claiming a Section 3 Business Preference, he/she shall under this tab include the fully completed and executed Section 3 Business Preference Certification Form attached hereto as Attachment D and any documentation required by that form. Please include all supporting documentation with the bid. Supporting documentation includes but is not limited to income tax returns for lowincome employees for which Proposer is seeking the preference, verification of total number of full-time employees, names, addresses and social security numbers of low-income residents who are Proposers employees. Note: If you qualify as a Section 3 Business Concern, your bid will receive a preference over other bids as specified in Attachment D Tab 8, Small/Minority/Disadvantaged/Veteran Business Enterprise Utilization Plan: The Proposer is required to include hereunder a plan identifying the Proposer s good faith efforts to assist SAHA in its responsibility to foster the development of small and historically underutilized business enterprises. All subcontracting opportunities shall be outlined herein and subcontractors listed on the form provided in Attachment C. FAILURE TO PROVIDE A S/W/MBE PLAN MAY CAUSE THE SUBMITTAL TO BE DISQUALIFIED AS NON-RESPONSIVE Tab 9, Other Information: Include any and all licenses under this tab. The proposer may also include hereunder any other general information that the proposer believes is appropriate to assist SAHA in its evaluation. If no pertinent information is to be placed under this tab, please place hereunder a statement that NO INFORMATION IS BEING PLACED HEREUNDER. 5.3 Proposed Costs: Fee Costs: Each proposer must enter the proposed cost to SAHA for the listed project. Your proposed fee is inclusive of all necessary costs to provide the proposed services, including, but not limited to: employee costs and benefits; clerical support; overhead; profit; supplies; materials; licensing; insurance; etc. Please note that the fee proposal for this property is inclusive of all elements required to deliver the gas supply upgrades as specified herein and each fee proposed shall be fully burdened with profit, overhead and all other associated costs to deliver a complete system. HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 24

25 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations Additional Related Work that May Be Required: Please note SAHA may retain the Contractor, if it is deemed by SAHA to be in its best interest, to perform additional services at fees proposed by the Contractor in their unit price response. 5.4 Proposal Submittal Binding Method: It is preferable and recommended that the proposer bind the proposal submittals in such a manner that SAHA can, if needed, remove the binding (i.e. comb-type, etc.) or remove the pages from the cover (i.e. 3-ring binder, etc.) to make copies then return the proposal submittal to its original condition. 6.0 PROPOSAL EVALUATION: 6.1 Proposal Opening Results: It is understood by all proposers/prospective proposers that the proposals are publicly opened and the results will be a matter of public record. When SAHA has concluded all evaluations, has chosen a final top-rated proposer, has completed the award and is ready to issue such results, SAHA shall notify the successful proposer All proposal documents submitted by the proposers are generally a matter of public record unless information is deemed to be proprietary. 6.2 Evaluation: Each proposal submittal will be evaluated based upon the following information and criteria: Initial Evaluation-Responsiveness: Each proposal received will first be evaluated for responsiveness (i.e., meeting the minimum requirements as stated in the RFP) Evaluation-Responsibility: SAHA shall select a minimum of a threeperson panel, using the criteria established below, to evaluate each of the proposals submitted in response to this RFP to determine the proposer s level of responsibility. SAHA will consider capabilities or advantages that are clearly described in the proposal that may be confirmed by oral presentations, site visits, demonstrations, and references contacted by SAHA. All proposals would be evaluated as to their overall value to SAHA Restrictions: All persons having familial (including in-laws) and/or employment relationships (past or current) with principals and/or employees of a proposer will be excluded from participation on SAHA s evaluation panel. Similarly, all persons having ownership interest in and/or contract with a proposer will be excluded from participation on SAHA s evaluation panel. HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 25

26 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations Evaluation Criteria: The evaluation panel will use the following rating criteria to evaluate each of the required elements specified in the proposal. Then each element will be scored based on the weight assigned to that element and then all element scores will be added to arrive at the sum total score: 5 - Excellent 4 - Above Average 3 - Average 2 - Below Average 1 - Poor 0 - Non-Responsive NO. Weight CRITERION DESCRIPTION 1 Relevant experience & Past Performance: Firm s 20% experience in the operation of projects of this or greater scope, crew size, cost and timeline. 2 Financial Ability: Financial ability to provide such services to 15% include copies of most recent financial statements or balance sheets that clearly show assets, liabilities, income, credit lines, debt and/or if available the most recent audit. 3 Management Plan & Project Management: Plan for oversight 20% of all services and the coordination of owner s personnel, subcontractors and suppliers to comply with the timeframe. Project Manager and staff s expertise, include resumes of project manager and key staff. Evidence of commitment to excellence in workmanship and professionalism as evidenced by awards and certifications. 4 25% Price proposal: Price of the proposed remodeling. 5 20% Strength of the Section 3 and S/W/MBE plans MAX. HUD SECTION 3 Preference Points POINTS 1 5 Section 3 Preference: A firm may qualify for Section 3 status for up to an additional 5 points. a 5 Priority I: As detailed in Attachment D b 4 Priority II: As detailed in Attachment D c 3 Priority III: As detailed in Attachment D d 2 Priority IV: As detailed in Attachment D Competitive Range: Once a competitive range is established from the proposals submitted, SAHA reserves the right to require Proposers within the competitive range to make a presentation to the evaluation committee. Presentations, if requested, shall be a factor in the award recommendation. HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 26

27 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations Burden of Proof: If requested by SAHA, it shall be the responsibility of the proposer(s) to furnish SAHA with sufficient data or physical samples, within a specified time, so that SAHA may determine if the goods or services offered conform to the specifications. 6.3 Mistake in Proposal Submitted: Unless otherwise prohibited within the RFP documents, a mistake in the cost unit pricing that does not affect the total cost sum submitted may, at SAHA s discretion, be corrected by submitting a corrected cost form, together with a complete explanation in writing, of how the mistake occurred, to the SAHA CA, for his/her review. This mistake must be corrected before the issuance of any contract documents. Such correction shall not operate to give any proposer an advantage over another. 6.4 Irregular Proposal Submittal: A proposal shall be considered irregular for any one of the following reasons, any one or more of which may, at SAHA's discretion, be reason for rejection: If the forms furnished by SAHA are not used or are altered or if the proposed costs are not submitted as required and where provided If all requested completed attachments do not accompany the proposal submittal If there are unauthorized additions, conditional or alternate proposals, or irregularities of any kind which may tend to make the proposal incomplete, indefinite or ambiguous as to its meaning or give the proposer submitting the same a competitive advantage over other proposers If the proposer adds any provisions reserving the right to accept or reject any award or to enter into a contract pursuant to an award If the individual cost proposal items submitted by a specific proposer are unbalanced in the sense that the listed price of any cost item departs by more than 25% from SAHA s cost estimate for that item. 6.5 Disqualification of Proposers: Any one or more of the following shall be considered as sufficient for the disqualification of a prospective proposer and the rejection of his/her proposal: Evidence of collusion among prospective proposers. Participants in such collusion will receive no recognition as Proposers or proposers for any future work with SAHA until such participant shall have been reinstated as a qualified bidder or proposer. The names of all participants in such collusion shall be reported to HUD and any other inquiring governmental agency. HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 27

28 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations More than one proposal for the same work from an individual, firm, or corporation under the same or different name(s) Lack of competency, lack of experience and/or lack of adequate machinery, plant and/or other resources Unsatisfactory performance record as shown by past work for SAHA or with any other local, state or federal agency, judged from the standpoint of workmanship and progress Incomplete work, which in the judgment of SAHA, might hinder or prevent prompt completion of additional work, if awarded Failure to pay or satisfactorily settle all bills due on former contracts still outstanding at the time of letting Failure to comply with any qualification requirements of SAHA Failure to list, if required, all subcontractors (if subcontractors are allowed by SAHA) who will be employed by the successful proposer(s) to complete the work of the proposed contract As required by the RFP documents, failure of the successful proposer to be properly licensed by the City, County and/or the State of Texas and/or to be insured by a commercial general liability policy and/or worker's compensation policy and/or business automobile liability policy, if applicable. If a proposer receives an award unless otherwise waived in the Contract, the Contractor will be required to provide an original Certificate of Insurance confirming the following minimum requirements to SAHA within 10 days of contract signature: Remainder of this page left blank intentionally. HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 28

29 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations Professional Liability SAHA and its affiliates must be named as an Additional Insured and be a Certificate Holder. This is required for vendors who render observational services to SAHA such as appraisers, inspectors, attorneys, engineers or consultants. Business Automobile Liability SAHA and its affiliates must be named as an additional insured and as the certificate holder. Must include both owned and unowned vehicles. Workers Compensation and Employer s Liability Workers Compensation coverage is Statutory and has no pre-set limits. Employer s Liability limit is $500,000 A waiver of Subrogation in favor of SAHA must be included in the Workers Compensation policy. SAHA and its affiliates must be named as a Certificate Holder. Commercial General Liability This is required for any vendor who will be doing hands on work at SAHA properties. SAHA and its affiliates must be named as an Additional Insured and as the Certificate Holder. Required Limits $300,000 Required Limits $500,000 combined single limit, per occurrence Required Limits Statutory $500,000 Required Limits $1,000,000 per accident $2,000,000 aggregate Any reason to be determined in good faith, to be in the best interests of SAHA. 6.6 Award of Proposal(s): The award shall be to the top-rated responsive and responsible proposer(s) determined by the evaluation process, presentations (if requested), negotiations, Best & Final Offers (BAFO), SAHA s business needs, Proposer s ability to deliver within budget the specified items in a timely manner. Proposers shall be recommended for award if in SAHA s opinion, it is in the best interest to accept the proposal after preferences for Section 3 business concerns are considered. SAHA reserves the right to award multiple contracts and will not consider All or None proposals or bids. 7.0 Right to Protest: 7.1 Rights: Any prospective or actual proposer, offeror, or contractor who is allegedly aggrieved in connection with the solicitation of a proposal or award of a contract, shall have the right to protest. Such right only applies to deviations from laws, rules, regulations, or procedures. Disagreements with the evaluators judgments as to the number of points scored are not reasons for an appeal. An alleged aggrieved protestant claiming this right is hereby informed that these regulations do not provide for administrative appeal as a matter of right for that alleged aggrieved protestant. HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 29

30 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations An alleged aggrieved protestant is a prospective proposer or proposer who feels that he/she has been treated inequitably by SAHA and wishes SAHA to correct the alleged inequitable condition or situation. To be eligible to file a protest with SAHA pertaining to an RFP or contract, the alleged aggrieved protestant must have been involved in the RFP process in some manner as a prospective proposer (i.e. recipient of the RFP documents) when the alleged situation occurred. SAHA has no obligation to consider a protest filed by any party that does not meet these criteria Any actual or prospective contractor may protest the solicitation or award of a contract for material violation of SAHA s procurement policy. Any protest against a SAHA solicitation must be received before the due date for receipt of bids or proposals and any protest against the award of a contract must be received within ten calendar days after contract award or the protest will not be considered. 8.0 Disputes under the contract: All protests must be in writing and submitted to the Director of Procurement for a written decision. The Director of Procurement shall make a recommendation to the Contracting Officer who shall issue a written decision and findings to the Contractor within 30 days from receipt of the written protest. This decision is then appealable to the Board of Commissioners within 30 days of receipt of the written decision. Appeals which are not timely filed will not be considered and the decision becomes final. All appeals shall be marked and sent to the address as listed in the example below: APPEAL OF RFP NO. (insert exact number of RFP here) San Antonio Housing Authority Attn: Stacy Padgett, Director of Procurement 818 South Flores Street San Antonio, TX Procedures: In addition to the procedures detailed within Form HUD-5370 (11/2006), General Conditions for Construction Contracts, Public Housing Programs, in the event that any matter, claim, or dispute arises between the parties, whether or not related to this RFP or any resulting contract, both parties shall be subject to nonbinding mediation if agreed to by both parties within thirty days of either party making a request in writing. The parties further agree that if the matter, claim or dispute is not settled during mediation, it shall thereafter be submitted to binding arbitration. The parties shall make a good-faith attempt to mutually agree upon an arbitrator. If the parties cannot mutually agree upon an arbitrator after reasonable efforts have been exerted, then the matter, claim or dispute shall be submitted to the American Arbitration Association for final and binding arbitration. Unless extended by the arbitrator for good cause shown, HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 30

31 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations the final arbitration hearing shall begin no later than two months after selection of the arbitrator. 9.0 Additional Considerations: 9.1 Escalation: Unless otherwise specified within the RFP documents, the percentage of gross receipts reflected in the proposal shall remain firm with no provision for changes during the term of any resulting contract. 9.2 Required Permits and Licenses: Unless otherwise stated in the RFP documents, all Federal, State or local permits and licenses which may be required to provide the services ensuing from any award of this RFP, whether or not they are known to either the SAHA or the proposers at the time of the proposal submittal deadline or the award, shall be the sole responsibility of the successful proposer and all offers submitted by the proposer shall reflect all costs required by the successful proposer to procure and provide such necessary permits or licenses. 9.3 Taxes: All persons doing business with SAHA are hereby made aware that SAHA is exempt from paying Texas State Sales and Use Taxes and Federal Excise Taxes. A letter of Tax Exemption will be provided upon request. 9.4 Government Standards: It is the responsibility of the prospective proposer to ensure that all items and services proposed conform to all local, state and federal law concerning safety (OSHA) and environmental control (EPA and Bexar County Pollution Regulations) and any other enacted ordinance, code, law or regulation. The successful proposer shall be responsible for all costs incurred for compliance with any such possible ordinance, code, law or regulation. No time extensions shall be granted or financial consideration given to the successful proposer for time or monies lost due to violations of any such ordinance, code, law or regulations that may occur. 9.5 Free on Board (FOB) and Delivery: All costs submitted by the successful proposer shall reflect the cost of delivering the proposed items and/or services to the locations specified within the RFP documents or within the Contract. All costs in the proposal submittal shall be quoted as FOB Destination, Freight Prepaid and allowed unless otherwise stated in this RFP The successful proposer agrees to deliver to the designated location(s) on or before the date as specified in the finalized contract. Failure to deliver on or before the specified date constitutes an event of default by the successful proposer. Upon default, the successful proposer agrees that SAHA may, at its option, rescind the finalized contract under the termination clause herein and seek compensatory damages as provided by law. HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 31

32 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations 9.6 Work on SAHA Property: If the successful proposer s work under the contract involves operations by the successful proposer on SAHA premises, the successful proposer shall take all necessary precautions to prevent the occurrence of any injury to persons or property during the progress of such work and, shall indemnify SAHA, and their officers, agents, servants and employees against all loss which may result in any way from any act or omission of the successful proposer, its agents, employees, or subcontractors. 9.7 Estimated Quantities: Unless otherwise indicated, the quantities reflected within the RFP documents, to the best of SAHA s knowledge, reflect projected consumption data. These quantities are not meant to infer or imply actual consumption figures or quantities that will be purchased by SAHA under the finalized contract; but, pursuant to all RFP documents, these quantities will be used only as calculation figures to determine the successful proposer. SAHA makes no guarantee as to the actual quantity that will be purchased under the Contract resulting from this RFP. 9.8 Warranty: The services provided under the contract shall conform to all information contained within the RFP documents as well as applicable Industry Published Technical Specifications, and if one of the above mentioned Specifications contains more stringent requirements than the other, the more stringent requirements shall apply The liability of the successful proposer to SAHA (except as to title) arising out of the furnishing of services/goods under the terms of the contract shall not exceed the correcting of the defect(s) in the services/goods provided under the contract, and upon expiration of the warranty period all such liability shall terminate except under the warranty for merchantability and the warranty of fitness for a particular purpose. However, this limitation does not preclude SAHA from seeking indirect, consequential, incidental exemplary, and liquidated damages. 9.9 Official, Agent and Employees of the SAHA Not Personally Liable: It is agreed by and between the parties hereto that in no event shall any official, officer, employee, or agent of he SAHA in any way be personally liable or responsible for any covenant or agreement herein contained whether expressed or implied, nor for any statement, representation or warranty made herein or in any connection with this agreement Subcontractors: Unless otherwise stated within the RFP documents, the successful proposer may not use any subcontractors to accomplish any portion of the services described within the RFP documents or the contract without the prior written permission of the SAHA CA. Also, any substitution of subcontractors must be approved in writing by SAHA prior to their engagement. HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 32

33 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations 9.11 Salaries and Expenses Relating to the Successful Proposers Employees: Unless otherwise stated within the RFP documents, the successful proposer shall pay all salaries and expenses of, and all Federal, Social Security taxes, Federal and State Unemployment taxes, and any similar taxes relating to its employees used in the performance of the contract. The successful proposer further agrees to comply with all Federal, State and local wage and hour laws and all licensing laws applicable to its employees or other personnel furnished under this agreement Independent Contractor: Unless otherwise stated within the RFP documents or the contract, the successful proposer is an independent contractor. Nothing herein shall create any association, agency, partnership or joint venture between the parties hereto and neither shall have any authority to bind the other in any way Severability: If any provision of this agreement or any portion or provision hereof applicable to any particular situation or circumstance is held invalid, the remainder of this agreement or the remainder of such provision (as the case may be), and the application thereof to other situations or circumstances shall not be affected thereby Waiver of Breach: A waiver of either party of any terms or conditions of this agreement in any instance shall not be deemed or construed as a waiver of such term or condition for the future, or of any subsequent breach thereof. All remedies, rights, undertakings, obligations, and agreements contained in this agreement shall be cumulative and none of them shall be in limitation of any other remedy, right, obligation or agreement of either party Time of the Essence: Time is of the essence as to each provision in which a timeframe for performance is provided in this RFP. Failure to meet these timeframes may be considered a material breach, and SAHA may pursue compensatory and/or liquidated damages under the contract Limitation of Liability: In no event shall SAHA be liable to the successful proposer for any indirect, incidental, consequential or exemplary damages Indemnity: The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless SAHA and its officers, agents, representatives, and employees from and against all claims, losses, damages, actions, causes of action and/or expenses resulting from, brought for, or on account of any personal injury or property damage received or sustained by any persons or property growing out of, occurring, or attributable to any work performed under or related to this Agreement, resulting in whole or in part from the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, any subcontractor, or any employee, agent or representative of the Contractor or any subcontractor, AND REGARDLESS OF WHETHER CAUSED IN WHOLE OR IN PART BY THE NEGLIGENCE OF SAHA. CONTRACTOR ACKNOWLEDGES AND AGREES THAT THIS INDEMNITY CONTROLS HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 33

34 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations OVER ALL OTHER PROVISIONS IN THE AGREEMENT, SURVIVES TERMINATION OF THIS AGREEMENT, AND APPLIES TO CLAIMS AND LIABILITY ARISING OUT OF THE SOLE OR CONCURRENT NEGLIGENCE OF SAHA Public/Contracting Statutes. SAHA is a governmental entity as that term is defined in the procurement statutes. SAHA and this RFP and all resulting contracts are subject to federal, state and local laws, rules, regulations and policies relating to procurement Termination: Any contract resulting from this RFP may be terminated under the following conditions: By mutual consent of both parties, and For Termination For Cause: As detailed within Form HUD-5370 (11/2006), General Conditions for Construction Contracts, Public Housing Programs, attached hereto: SAHA may terminate any and all contracts for default at any time in whole or in part, if the contractor fails to perform any of the provisions of any contract, so fails to pursue the work as to endanger performance in accordance with the terms of the RFP or any resulting contracts, and after receipt of written notice from SAHA, fails to correct such failures within seven (7) days or such other period as SAHA may authorize or require Upon receipt of a notice of termination issued from SAHA, the Contractor shall immediately cease all activities under any contract resulting from this RFP, unless expressly directed otherwise by SAHA in the notice of termination SAHA may terminate any contract resulting from this RFP in whole or in part, if funding is reduced, or is not obtained and continued at levels sufficient to allow for the expenditure Termination for Convenience: In the sole discretion of the Contracting Officer, SAHA may terminate any and all contracts resulting from this RFP in whole or part upon fourteen days prior notice to the Contractor when it is determined to be in the best interest of SAHA The rights and remedies of SAHA provided under this section are not exclusive and are in addition to any other rights and remedies provided by law or under any contract. HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 34

35 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations In the event the resulting contract from this RFP is terminated for any reason, or upon its expiration, SAHA shall retain ownership of all work products including deliverables, source and object code, microcode, software licenses, and documentation in whatever form that may exist. In addition to any other provision, the Contractor shall transfer title and deliver to SAHA any partially completed work products, deliverables, source and object code, or documentation that the Contractor has produced or acquired in the performance of any resulting contract Examination and Retention of Contractor s Records: SAHA, HUD, or Comptroller General of the United States, or any of their duly authorized representatives shall, until three years after final payment under all contracts executed as a result of this RFP, have access to and the right to examine any of the Contractor s directly pertinent books, documents, papers, or other records involving transactions related to this contract for the purpose of making audits, examinations, excerpts and transcriptions Invoicing (If applicable): Contractor(s) will only be allowed to invoice for the cost of services/goods in compliance with his/ her proposal or best and final offer as accepted by SAHA Invoices must contain a complete description of the work or service that was performed, the contract price for each service, the purchase order number, date of service, and address of service location or delivery address Contractor(s) must submit a separate invoice for each purchase order issued by SAHA. Each service delivery must have a separate and unique purchase order number SAHA shall make progress payments approximately every 30 days as the work proceeds, on estimates of work accomplished which meets the standards of quality established under the contract, as approved by the Contracting Officer. SAHA may, subject to written determination and approval of the Contracting Officer, make more frequent payments to contractors which are qualified small businesses. For more detail on progress payments refer to the attached Form 5370 ( ) Upon the Award of Contract, Contractor shall receive a request from SAHA to process all payments electronically to insure prompt and efficient payment of all invoices If offered by Contractor, SAHA seeks a discount for early payment. SAHA shall only take such a discount if earned. HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 35

36 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations 9.22 Interlocal Participation SAHA may from time to time enter into Interlocal Cooperation Purchasing Agreements with other governmental entities or governmental cooperatives (hereafter collectively referred to as Entity or Entities ) to enhance SAHA s purchasing power. At SAHA s sole discretion and option, SAHA may inform other Entities that they may acquire items listed in this RFP. Such acquisition(s) shall be at the prices stated herein, and shall be subject to Contractor s acceptance In no event shall SAHA be considered a dealer, remarketer, agent or other representative of Contractor or Entity. Further, SAHA shall not be considered and is not an agent; partner or representative of the Entity making purchases hereunder, and shall not be obligated or liable for any such order Purchase orders shall be submitted to Contractor by the individual Entity SAHA shall not be liable or responsible for any obligation, including but not limited to, payment and for any item or service ordered by an Entity, other than SAHA Right to data and Patent Rights: SAHA shall have exclusive ownership of all, proprietary interest in, and the right to full and exclusive possession of all information, materials and documents discovered or produced by Contractor pursuant to the terms of any resulting contract, including but not limited to, reports, memoranda or letters concerning the research and reporting tasks of any resulting contract. Both parties agree to comply with HUD Bulletin , which is the Notice of Assistance Regarding Patent and Copyright Infringement Lobbying Certification: By proposing to do business with SAHA or by doing business with SAHA, each proposer certifies the following: No Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid, by or on behalf of the proposer, to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with the awarding of any Federal contract, the making of any Federal grant, the making of any Federal loan, the entering into any cooperative agreement, and the extension, continuation, renewal, amendment or modification of any Federal contract, grant, loan or cooperative agreement If any funds other than Federally appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a Member of HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 36

37 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with this Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement, the undersigned shall complete and submit Standard Form Disclosure Form to Report Lobbying, in accordance with its instructions The successful proposer shall require that the language of this certification be included in the award documents for all subawards at all tiers, (including but not limited to subcontractors, subgrants, and contracts under grants, loans, and cooperative agreements) and that all subrecipients shall certify and disclose accordingly This clause is a material misrepresentation of fact upon which reliance will be placed when the award is made or a contract is entered into. The signing of a contract or acceptance of award certifies compliance with this certification, which is a prerequisite for making or entering into a contract, which is imposed by Section 1352, Title 31, U.S. Code. Any person who fails to file the required certifications shall be subject to civil penalty of not less than $10, and not more than $100, for each such failure Executive Order 11246: For all construction contracts awarded in excess of $10,000, both parties hereby agree to comply with Executive Order of September 24, 1965, entitled Equal Employment Opportunity, as amended by Executive Order of October 13, 1967, and as supplemented in Department of Labor Regulations (41 CFR Chapter 60) Copeland Anti-Kickback Act: For all construction or repair contracts awarded, both parties hereby agree to comply with the Copeland Anti- Kickback Act (18 U.S.C. 874) as supplemented in Department of Labor Regulations (29 CFR Part 3) Davis-Bacon Act: For all construction contracts awarded in excess of $2,000 when required by Federal Grant Program legislation, both parties hereby agree to comply with the Davis-Bacon Act (40 U.S.C. 276a to 276a-7) as supplemented in Department of Labor Regulations (29 CFR Part 5) and attached wage decision Sections 103 and 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act: For all construction contracts awarded in excess of $2,000 and for other contracts, which involve the employment of mechanics or laborers awarded in excess of $2,500, both parties hereby agree to comply with the Sections 103 and 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Act (40 U.S.C ) as supplemented in Department of Labor Regulations (29 CFR Part 5). HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 37

38 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations 9.29 Clean Act Air: For all contracts in excess of $100,000, both parties hereby agree to comply with all applicable standards, orders or requirements issued under Section 306 of the Clean air Act (42 U.S.C (h), Section 508 of the Clean Water Act (33 U.S.C. 1368), Executive Order 11738, and Environmental Protection Agency regulations (40 CFR Part 15) and any amendments Energy Policy and Conservation Act: Both parties hereby agree to comply with all mandatory standards and policies relating to energy efficiency, which are contained in the state energy conservation plan issued in compliance with the Energy Policy and Conservation Act (Pub. L , 89 STAT. 871) and any amendments Executive Order 11061: Both parties agree that they will comply with this order, which directs the Secretary of HUD to take all action, which is necessary and appropriate to prevent discrimination by agencies that utilize federal funds Public Law , Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, and its amendments: Both parties agree that no person in the United States shall, on the basis of race, color, national origin or sex, be excluded from participation in, denied the benefits of, or subjected to discrimination under any program or activity which receives federal financial assistance. SAHA hereby extends this requirement to the Contractor and its subcontractors. Specific prohibited discriminatory actions and corrective action are described in Chapter 2, Subtitle C, Title V of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988 (42 U.S.C et. Seq.) Public Law , Title VIII of the Civil Rights Act of 1968 and its Amendments (Fair Housing Act): Both parties agree to comply and prohibit any person from discriminating in the sale or rental of housing, the financing of housing or the provision of brokerage services, including in any way making unavailable or denying a dwelling to any person because of race, color, religion, sex or national origin. As a result, SAHA requires that the Contractor administer all programs and activities, which are related to housing and community development in such a manner as affirmatively to further fair housing Age Discrimination Act of 1975 and its amendments: Requires the Contractor to prohibit discrimination on the basis of age Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988 (42 U.S.C et. seq.) and its amendments: SAHA requires Contractors to comply with this law HUD Information Bulletin : Contractors shall comply with the following laws and regulations: Notice of Assistance Regarding Patent and Copyright Infringement Clean Air and Water Certification Energy Policy and Conservation Act HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 38

39 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations 9.37 Copy Rights/Rights in Data SAHA has unlimited rights to any data, including computer software, developed by the Contractor in the performance of the Contract specifically: Except as provided elsewhere in this clause, SAHA shall have unlimited rights in data first produced in the performance of this Contract; form, fit, and function data delivered under this Contract; data delivered under this Contract (except for restricted computer software) that constitute manuals or instructional and training material for installation, operation, or routine maintenance and repair of items, components, or processes delivered or furnished for use under this Contract; and all other data delivered under this Contract unless provided otherwise for limited rights data or restricted computer software Contractor shall have the right to: use, release to others, reproduce, distribute, or publish any data first produced or specifically used by the Contractor in the performance of this Contract, unless provided otherwise in this contract; protect from unauthorized disclosure and use those data which are limited rights data or restricted computer software to the extent provided in this contract; substantiate use of, add or correct limited rights, restricted rights, or copyright notices and to take other appropriate action in accordance with this contract; and establish claim to copyright subsisting in data first produced in the performance of this Contract to the extent provided below For data first produced in the performance of this Contract, the contractor may establish, without prior approval of the CA, claim to copyright subsisting in scientific or technical articles based on or containing data first produced in the performance of this Contract. The Contractor grants SAHA and others acting on its behalf a paid-up, non-exclusive, irrevocable, worldwide license in such copyrighted data to reproduce, prepare derivative works, distribute copies to the public, and perform or display publicly by or on behalf of SAHA The Contractor shall not, without the prior written permission of the CA, incorporate in data delivered under this Contract any data not first produced in the performance of this Contract and which contains copyright notice, unless the Contractor identifies such data and grants SAHA a license of the same scope as identified in the preceding paragraph SAHA agrees not to remove any copyright notices placed on data and to include such notices in all reproductions of the data. If any data delivered under this Contract are improperly marked, SAHA HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 39

40 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations may either at its discretion return the data to the Contractor or cancel or ignore the markings The Contractor is responsible for obtaining from its subcontractors all data and rights necessary to fulfill the Contractor s obligations under this Contract Notwithstanding any provisions to the contrary contained in the Contractor s standard commercial license or lease contract pertaining to any restricted computer software delivered under this Contract, and irrespective of whether any such contract has been proposed prior to the award of this Contract or of the fact that such contract may be affixed to or accompany the restricted computer software upon delivery, the Contractor agrees that SAHA shall have the rights set forth below to use, duplicate, or disclose any restricted computer software delivered under this Contract. The terms and conditions of any resulting contract, including any commercial lease or licensing contract, shall be subject to the following procedures The restricted computer software delivered under a resulting contract may not be used, reproduced, or disclosed by SAHA except as provided below or as expressly stated otherwise in a resulting contract. The restricted computer software may be used accordingly: Used or copied for use in or with the computers for which it was acquired, including use at any SAHA location to which such computer may be transferred; Used or copied for use in or with backup computer if any computer for which it was acquired is inoperative; Reproduced for safekeeping (archives) or backup purposes; Modified, adapted, or combined with other computer software, provided that the modified, combined, or adapted portions of the derivative software incorporating any of the delivered, restricted computer software shall be subject to the same restrictions set forth in a resulting contract; and HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 40

41 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations Used or copied for use in or transferred to a replacement computer Additional Information: Each provision of law and each clause, which is required by law to be inserted in this RFP or any contract, shall be deemed to have been inserted herein, and this RFP and any resulting contract shall be read and enforced as though such provision or clause had been physically inserted herein. If, through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted or is inserted incorrectly, this agreement shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion or correction upon the application of either party. The fore-mentioned statutes, regulations and executive orders are not intended as an indication that such statute, regulation or executive order is necessary applicable nor is an omission of such statute, regulation or executive order intended to indicate that it is not applicable Conflicting Conditions: In the even there is a conflict between the documents comprising this RFP and any resulting contracts, the following order of precedence shall govern: (1) the more restrictive terms of either: any and all attached HUD forms and the term/conditions in the body of any resulting contract; (2) the RFP; and (3) Contractor s Response. In the event that a conflict exists between any state statute, or federal law the most restrictive terms shall apply Interpretations: No official oral interpretation can be made to any proposer as to the meaning of any instruction, condition, specifications, drawing (if any), or any other document issued pertaining to this RFP. Every request for an official interpretation shall be made by the prospective proposer, in writing at least seven (7) days prior to the submission deadline. Official interpretations will be issued in the form of addenda, which will be posted on and nahro.economicengine.com ; but it shall be the prospective proposer s responsibility to make inquiry as to addenda issued. All such addenda shall become a part of the RFP documents and the proposed contract with the successful proposer and all proposers shall be bound by such addenda, whether or not received by the prospective or successful proposer(s) Contract Form: SAHA will not execute a contract on the successful proposer s form. Contracts will only be executed on SAHA s form. By submitting a proposal, the successful proposer agrees to this condition. However, SAHA will consider any contract clauses that the proposer wishes to include therein, but the failure of SAHA to include such clauses does not give the successful proposer the right to refuse to execute SAHA s contract form. It is the responsibility of each prospective proposer to notify SAHA, in writing, with the proposal submittal of any contract clauses that he/she is not willing to include in the final executed contract. SAHA will consider such clauses and determine whether or not to amend the Contract. HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 41

42 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations 9.42 Liquidated Damages: For each day that performance under a resulting contract from this RFP is delayed beyond the time specified for completion, the successful proposer shall be liable for liquidated damages in the amount of $ per day. However, the timeframe for performance may be adjusted at SAHA s discretion in writing and received by the successful proposer prior to default under any resulting contract Force Majeure: Neither SAHA nor Contractor shall be held responsible for delays or default caused by fire, flood, riot, acts of God or war where such cause was beyond, respectively, SAHA or Contractor s reasonable control. Contractor shall make all reasonable efforts to remove or eliminate such a cause of delay or default and shall, upon the cessation of the cause, diligently pursue performance of its obligations under this Agreement Immigration Reform: By submitting a proposal Contractor certifies compliance with the Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986 regarding employment verification and retention of verification forms for any individuals hired on or after November 6, 1986 who will perform any labor or services under any resulting contract Most Favored Customer: The Contractor agrees that if during the term of any resulting contract, the Contractor enters into any agreement with any other governmental customer, or any non-affiliated commercial customer by which it agrees to provide equivalent services at lower prices, or additional services at comparable prices, the resulting Contract will at SAHA s option, be amended to accord equivalent advantage to SAHA Lapse in Insurance Coverage: In the event Contractor fails to maintain insurance as required by a resulting contract, the Contractor shall immediately cure such lapse in insurance coverage at the Contractor s expense, and pay SAHA in full for all costs and expenses incurred by SAHA under this Contract as a result of Contractor s failure to maintain insurance as required, including costs and reasonable attorney s fees relating to SAHA s attempts to cure such lapse in insurance coverage. Such costs and attorney fees, not to exceed fifteen hundred and 00/100 dollars ($1,500.00), shall be automatically deducted from monies or payments owed to Contractors. Moreover, SAHA shall retain from monies or payments owed to Contractor by SAHA five percent (5%) of the value of the Contract and place this retainage into an account to cover SAHA s potential exposure to liability during the period of such lapse. This retainage shall be held by SAHA until six (6) months after the term of the resulting contract has ended or has otherwise been terminated, cancelled or expired and shall be released if no claims are received or lawsuits filed against SAHA for any matter that should have been covered by the required insurance. HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 42

43 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations 9.46 Fair Labor Standards Act: Both parties hereby agree to comply with the provisions of the Fair Labor Standards Act (29 U.S.C. 201, et seq). Remainder of this page left blank intentionally. HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 43

44 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations ATTACHMENT A Form of Proposal Proposal Fee Sheet Build on Materials Example Cost Analysis HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 44

45 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations FORM OF PROPOSAL (Attachment A) (This Form must be fully completed and placed under Tab No. 1 of the hard copy tabbed proposal submittal.) Instructions: Unless otherwise specifically required, the items listed below must be completed and included in the proposal submittal. Please complete this form by marking an X, where provided, to verify that the referenced completed form or information has been included within the hard copy proposal submittal submitted by the proposer. Also, complete the Section 3 Statement and the Proposer s Statement as noted below: X=ITEM INCLUDED SUBMITTAL ITEMS (One (1) Original Signature Proposal and three (3) copies of the original proposal without pricing info) Tab 1 Form of Proposal (Attachment A) Tab 2 HUD Forms & Conflict of Interest Questionnaire(Attachment B) Tab 3 Profile of Firm Form (Attachment C) Tab 4 Experience, Past Performance, Managerial Capacity/Financial Viability Tab 5 Client Information Tab 6 Subcontractor/Joint Venture Information Tab 7 Section 3 Utilization Plan & Documentation Tab 8 S/W/MBE Utilization Plan Tab 9 Other Information SECTION 3 STATEMENT Are you claiming a Section 3 business preference? YES or NO. If YES, pursuant to the documentation justifying such submitted under Tab No. 7, which priority are you claiming? Priority I Priority II Priority III Priority IV HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 45

46 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations Proposal Fees PROPOSER S STATEMENT The undersigned proposer hereby states that by completing and submitting this Form and all other documents within this proposal submittal, he/she is verifying that all information provided herein is, to the best of his/her knowledge, true and accurate, and that if SAHA discovers that any information entered herein to be false, that shall entitle SAHA to not consider or make award or to cancel any award with the undersigned party. Further, by completing and submitting the proposal submittal, and by entering and submitting the costs where provided, the undersigned proposer is thereby agreeing to abide by all terms and conditions pertaining to this RFP as issued by SAHA, in hard copy. Pursuant to all RFP Documents, all attachments, and all completed Documents submitted by proposer, including these forms and all attachments, the undersigned proposes to supply SAHA with the services described herein for the fee(s) entered within the areas provided. Villa Tranchese Remodeling & Renovations Fee Item Amount Delivery Time Fee- Common Area remodeling & renovations as specified $ 200 Days Unit Price Items Item Amount Item Amount #1 Refinish Terrazo $ sq.ft. #3 Ceiling System $ sq.ft. #2 Resilient Vinyl Floor $ sq.ft. #4 Wood Wall Paneling $ ln.ft. SAHA will deduct these amounts from the base bid above if these options are not exercised. Deductive Alternate #1 $ Deductive Alternate #2 $ Deductive Alternate #3 $ In performing this contract, the contractor(s) shall comply with any and all applicable federal, state or local laws including but not limited to: Occupational Safety & Health, Equal Employment Opportunity, Immigration and Naturalization, The Americans with Disabilities Act, State Tax and Insurance Law, and the Fair Housing Act. Initials Non-Collusive Affidavit: The undersigned party submitting this bid hereby certifies that such bid is genuine and not collusive and that said Bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any Bidder or person, to put in a sham bid or to refrain from bidding, and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly sought by agreement or collusion, or communication or conference, with any person, to fix the bid price of affiant or of any other Bidder, to fix overhead, profit or cost element of said bid price, or that of any other Bidder or to secure any advantage against SAHA or any person interested in the proposed contract; and that all statements in said bid are true. Initials HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 46

47 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations Signature & Addenda Acknowledgements Addendum #1 Addendum #2 Addendum #3 Date Date Date Signature Date Printed Name Company address if available Phone Fax HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 47

48 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations Proposer s Certification By signing below, Proposer certifies that the following statements are true and correct: 1. He/she has full authority to bind Proposer and that no member of Proposer s organization is disbarred, suspended or otherwise prohibited from contracting with any federal, state or local agency, and the individual or business entity named in this bid is eligible to receive the specified payment and acknowledges that this Contract may be terminated and payment may be withheld if this certification is inaccurate, 2. Proposer proposes to furnish and deliver all items, for which bids were provided herein, as specified in the bid, in accordance with the terms, conditions, and specifications embodied herein, all of which terms, conditions, and specifications are hereby accepted and made a part of this bid, all materials and supplies, which are described on the bid worksheets herein and opposite of which prices have been entered, at the price or prices quoted, subject to valid price reductions as hereafter defined, as ordered for delivery, by SAHA, 3. Proposer agrees that this bid shall remain open and valid for at least a period of 60 days from the date of the Bid Opening, or as may be specified herein, and that this bid shall constitute an offer, which, if accepted by SAHA and subject to the terms and conditions of such acceptance, shall result in a contract between SAHA and the undersigned Proposer, 4. He/she has not given, offered to give, nor intends to give at any time hereafter any economic opportunity, future employment, gift, loan, gratuity, special discount, trip, favor, or service to a public servant in connection with this bid, 5. Proposer, nor the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by the Proposer, or anyone acting for such firm, corporation or institution has violated the antitrust laws of the State of Texas or the Federal Antitrust laws, nor communicated directly or indirectly the bid made to any competitor or any other person engaged in such line of business, and 6. Proposer has not received compensation for participation in the preparation of the specifications for this RFP, and 7. Has not been debarred, suspended or excluded from receiving Local, State or Federal awards. SIGNED: Date: (Print Name) (Print Company Name) (Company Phone & Fax &) Seal if by Corporation ( Address) HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 48

49 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations Build On Materials Example 1. EQUIPMENT: Description Quantity/Unit Unit Cost 1.1 HVAC Systems 25 each $ Electric stove 18 each $ Refrigerator 12 each $ Overhead & Profit 1 each $ MATERIALS: 2.1 Interior Latex Paint 50 gallons $ Exterior Latex Paint 12 gallons $ Painters Caulk 75 tubes $ X 4 Pre-cut studs 250 each $ Overhead & Profit 1 each $ HARDWARE: 3.1 Nuts, bolts & washers 25 pounds $ Nails 75 pounds $ Paint Brushes & rollers 10 each $ Overhead & Profit 1 each $ LABOR: 4.1 Electricians a. Master 240 hours $ b. Journeyman 1000 hours $ c. Apprentice 1500 hours $ d. Trainee/helper 2000 hours $ Overhead & Profit 1 each $ OVERHEAD & PROFIT: 5.1 Overhead $ Profit $ HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 49

50 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations Cost Analysis HUD regulations require a cost analysis prior to an award of contract. Please supply the information requested below as to how the fees on the proposal fee sheet were calculated. Calculations to be based on the complete project. DIRECT COSTS: Direct Labor (Personnel) Equipment Supplies Travel and Per Diem Subcontractors or Consultants $ $ $ $ $ Other: $ (Computer time, copying, long distance phone calls, etc) INDIRECT COSTS: Overhead General & Administrative Expenses $ $ PROFIT OR FEE $ HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 50

51 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations ATTACHMENT B HUD FORMS & Conflict Of Interest Questionnaire HUD Form (8-93) Instructions to Offerors HUD Form 5369-A (8-93) Certifications & Representations HUD Form 5370 (11-06) General Conditions HUD Form 2992 Debarment & Suspension HUD Form 2530 Previous Participation Conflict of Interest Questionnaire HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 51

52 U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development Office of Public and Indian Housing Instructions to Bidders for Contracts Public and Indian Housing Programs Previous edition is obsolete form HUD-5369 (10/2002)

53 Instructions to Bidders for Contracts Public and Indian Housing Programs Table of Contents Clause 1. Bid Preparation and Submission 1 2. Explanations and Interpretations to Prospective Bidders 1 3. Amendments to Invitations for Bids 1 4. Responsibility of Prospective Contractor 1 5. Late Submissions, Modifications, and Withdrawal of Bids 1 6. Bid Opening 2 7. Service of Protest 2 8. Contract Award 2 9. Bid Guarantee Assurance of Completion Preconstruction Conference Indian Preference Requirements 3 Page 1. Bid Preparation and Submission (a) Bidders are expected to examine the specifications, drawings, all instructions, and, if applicable, the construction site (see also the contract clause entitled Site Investigation and Conditions Affecting the Work of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction). Failure to do so will be at the bidders risk. (b) All bids must be submitted on the forms provided by the Public Housing Agency/Indian Housing Authority (PHA/IHA). Bidders shall furnish all the information required by the solicitation. Bids must be signed and the bidder s name typed or printed on the bid sheet and each continuation sheet which requires the entry of information by the bidder. Erasures or other changes must be initialed by the person signing the bid. Bids signed by an agent shall be accompanied by evidence of that agent s authority. (Bidders should retain a copy of their bid for their records.) (c) Bidders must submit as part of their bid a completed form HUD A, Representations, Certifications, and Other Statements of Bidders. (d) All bid documents shall be sealed in an envelope which shall be clearly marked with the words Bid Documents, the Invitation for Bids (IFB) number, any project or other identifying number, the bidder s name, and the date and time for receipt of bids. (e) If this solicitation requires bidding on all items, failure to do so will disqualify the bid. If bidding on all items is not required, bidders should insert the words No Bid in the space provided for any item on which no price is submitted. (f) Unless expressly authorized elsewhere in this solicitation, alternate bids will not be considered. (g) Unless expressly authorized elsewhere in this solicitation, bids submitted by telegraph or facsimile (fax) machines will not be considered. (h) If the proposed contract is for a Mutual Help project (as described in 24 CFR Part 905, Subpart E) that involves Mutual Help contributions of work, material, or equipment, supplemental information regarding the bid advertisement is provided as an attachment to this solicitation. 2. Explanations and Interpretations to Prospective Bidders (a) Any prospective bidder desiring an explanation or interpretation of the solicitation, specifications, drawings, etc., must request it at least 7 days before the scheduled time for bid opening. Requests may be oral or written. Oral requests must be confirmed in writing. The only oral clarifications that will be provided will be those clearly related to solicitation procedures, i.e., not substantive technical information. No other oral explanation or interpretation will be provided. Any information given a prospective bidder concerning this solicitation will be furnished promptly to all other prospective bidders as a written amendment to the solicitation, if that information is necessary in submitting bids, or if the lack of it would be prejudicial to other prospective bidders. (b) Any information obtained by, or provided to, a bidder other than by formal amendment to the solicitation shall not constitute a change to the solicitation. 3. Amendments to Invitations for Bids (a) If this solicitation is amended, then all terms and conditions which are not modified remain unchanged. (b) Bidders shall acknowledge receipt of any amendment to this solicitation (1) by signing and returning the amendment, (2) by identifying the amendment number and date on the bid form, or (3) by letter, telegram, or facsimile, if those methods are authorized in the solicitation. The PHA/IHA must receive acknowledgement by the time and at the place specified for receipt of bids. Bids which fail to acknowledge the bidder s receipt of any amendment will result in the rejection of the bid if the amendment(s) contained information which substantively changed the PHA s/iha s requirements. (c) Amendments will be on file in the offices of the PHA/IHA and the Architect at least 7 days before bid opening. 4. Responsibility of Prospective Contractor (a) The PHA/IHA will award contracts only to responsible prospective contractors who have the ability to perform successfully under the terms and conditions of the proposed contract. In determining the responsibility of a bidder, the PHA/IHA will consider such matters as the bidder s: (1) Integrity; (2) Compliance with public policy; (3) Record of past performance; and (4) Financial and technical resources (including construction and technical equipment). (b) Before a bid is considered for award, the bidder may be requested by the PHA/IHA to submit a statement or other documentation regarding any of the items in paragraph (a) above. Failure by the bidder to provide such additional information shall render the bidder nonresponsible and ineligible for award. Previous edition is obsolete Page 1 of 4 form HUD-5369 (10/2002)

54 5. Late Submissions, Modifications, and Withdrawal of Bids (a) Any bid received at the place designated in the solicitation after the exact time specified for receipt will not be considered unless it is received before award is made and it: (1) Was sent by registered or certified mail not later than the fifth calendar day before the date specified for receipt of offers (e.g., an offer submitted in response to a solicitation requiring receipt of offers by the 20th of the month must have been mailed by the 15th); (2) Was sent by mail, or if authorized by the solicitation, was sent by telegram or via facsimile, and it is determined by the PHA/IHA that the late receipt was due solely to mishandling by the PHA/IHA after receipt at the PHA/IHA; or (3) Was sent by U.S. Postal Service Express Mail Next Day Service - Post Office to Addressee, not later than 5:00 p.m. at the place of mailing two working days prior to the date specified for receipt of proposals. The term working days excludes weekends and observed holidays. (b) Any modification or withdrawal of a bid is subject to the same conditions as in paragraph (a) of this provision. (c) The only acceptable evidence to establish the date of mailing of a late bid, modification, or withdrawal sent either by registered or certified mail is the U.S. or Canadian Postal Service postmark both on the envelope or wrapper and on the original receipt from the U.S. or Canadian Postal Service. Both postmarks must show a legible date or the bid, modification, or withdrawal shall be processed as if mailed late. Postmark means a printed, stamped, or otherwise placed impression (exclusive of a postage meter machine impression) that is readily identifiable without further action as having been supplied and affixed by employees of the U.S. or Canadian Postal Service on the date of mailing. Therefore, bidders should request the postal clerk to place a hand cancellation bull s-eye postmark on both the receipt and the envelope or wrapper. (d) The only acceptable evidence to establish the time of receipt at the PHA/IHA is the time/date stamp of PHA/IHA on the proposal wrapper or other documentary evidence of receipt maintained by the PHA/IHA. (e) The only acceptable evidence to establish the date of mailing of a late bid, modification, or withdrawal sent by Express Mail Next Day Service-Post Office to Addressee is the date entered by the post office receiving clerk on the Express Mail Next Day Service-Post Office to Addressee label and the postmark on both the envelope or wrapper and on the original receipt from the U.S. Postal Service. Postmark has the same meaning as defined in paragraph (c) of this provision, excluding postmarks of the Canadian Postal Service. Therefore, bidders should request the postal clerk to place a legible hand cancellation bull s eye postmark on both the receipt and Failure by a bidder to acknowledge receipt of the envelope or wrapper. (f) Notwithstanding paragraph (a) of this provision, a late modification of an otherwise successful bid that makes its terms more favorable to the PHA/IHA will be considered at any time it is received and may be accepted. (g) Bids may be withdrawn by written notice, or if authorized by this solicitation, by telegram (including mailgram) or facsimile machine transmission received at any time before the exact time set for opening of bids; provided that written confirmation of telegraphic or facsimile withdrawals over the signature of the bidder is mailed and postmarked prior to the specified bid opening time. A bid may be withdrawn in person by a bidder or its authorized representative if, before the exact time set for opening of bids, the identity of the person requesting withdrawal is established and the person signs a receipt for the bid. 6. Bid Opening All bids received by the date and time of receipt specified in the solicitation will be publicly opened and read. The time and place of opening will be as specified in the solicitation. Bidders and other interested persons may be present. 7. Service of Protest (a) Definitions. As used in this provision: Interested party means an actual or prospective bidder whose direct economic interest would be affected by the award of the contract. Protest means a written objection by an interested party to this solicitation or to a proposed or actual award of a contract pursuant to this solicitation. (b) Protests shall be served on the Contracting Officer by obtaining written and dated acknowledgement from [Contracting Officer designate the official or location where a protest may be served on the Contracting Officer] (c) All protests shall be resolved in accordance with the PHA s/ IHA s protest policy and procedures, copies of which are maintained at the PHA/IHA. 8. Contract Award (a) The PHA/IHA will evaluate bids in response to this solicitation without discussions and will award a contract to the responsible bidder whose bid, conforming to the solicitation, will be most advantageous to the PHA/IHA considering only price and any price-related factors specified in the solicitation. (b) If the apparent low bid received in response to this solicitation exceeds the PHA s/iha s available funding for the proposed contract work, the PHA/IHA may either accept separately priced items (see 8(e) below) or use the following procedure to determine contract award. The PHA/IHA shall apply in turn to each bid (proceeding in order from the apparent low bid to the high bid) each of the separately priced bid deductible items, if any, in their priority order set forth in this solicitation. If upon the application of the first deductible item to all initial bids, a new low bid is within the PHA s/iha s available funding, then award shall be made to that bidder. If no bid is within the available funding amount, then the PHA/IHA shall apply the second deductible item. The PHA/IHA shall continue this process until an evaluated low bid, if any, is within the PHA s/iha s available funding. If upon the application of all deductibles, no bid is within the PHA s/iha s available funding, or if the solicitation does not request separately priced deductibles, the PHA/IHA shall follow its written policy and procedures in making any award under this solicitation. (c) In the case of tie low bids, award shall be made in accordance with the PHA s/iha s written policy and procedures. (d) The PHA/IHA may reject any and all bids, accept other than the lowest bid (e.g., the apparent low bid is unreasonably low), and waive informalities or minor irregularities in bids received, in accordance with the PHA s/iha s written policy and procedures. Previous edition is obsolete Page 2 of 4 form HUD-5369 (10/2002)

55 (e) Unless precluded elsewhere in the solicitation, the PHA/IHA may accept any item or combination of items bid. (f) The PHA/IHA may reject any bid as nonresponsive if it is materially unbalanced as to the prices for the various items of work to be performed. A bid is materially unbalanced when it is based on prices significantly less than cost for some work and prices which are significantly overstated for other work. (g) A written award shall be furnished to the successful bidder within the period for acceptance specified in the bid and shall result in a binding contract without further action by either party. 9. Bid Guarantee (applicable to construction and equipment contracts exceeding $25,000) All bids must be accompanied by a negotiable bid guarantee which shall not be less than five percent (5%) of the amount of the bid. The bid guarantee may be a certified check, bank draft, U.S. Government Bonds at par value, or a bid bond secured by a surety company acceptable to the U.S. Government and authorized to do business in the state where the work is to be performed. In the case where the work under the contract will be performed on an Indian reservation area, the bid guarantee may also be an irrevocable Letter of Credit (see provision 10, Assurance of Completion, below). Certified checks and bank drafts must be made payable to the order of the PHA/IHA. The bid guarantee shall insure the execution of the contract and the furnishing of a method of assurance of completion by the successful bidder as required by the solicitation. Failure to submit a bid guarantee with the bid shall result in the rejection of the bid. Bid guarantees submitted by unsuccessful bidders will be returned as soon as practicable after bid opening. 10. Assurance of Completion (a) Unless otherwise provided in State law, the successful bidder shall furnish an assurance of completion prior to the execution of any contract under this solicitation. This assurance may be [Contracting Officer check applicable items] [ X ] (1) a performance and payment bond in a penal sum of 100 percent of the contract price; or, as may be required or permitted by State law; [ ] (2) separate performance and payment bonds, each for 50 percent or more of the contract price; [ ] (3) a 20 percent cash escrow; [ ] (4) a 25 percent irrevocable letter of credit; or, [ ] (5) an irrevocable letter of credit for 10 percent of the total contract price with a monitoring and disbursements agreement with the IHA (applicable only to contracts awarded by an IHA under the Indian Housing Program). (b) Bonds must be obtained from guarantee or surety companies acceptable to the U.S. Government and authorized to do business in the state where the work is to be performed. Individual sureties will not be considered. U.S. Treasury Circular Number 570, published annually in the Federal Register, lists companies approved to act as sureties on bonds securing Government contracts, the maximum underwriting limits on each contract bonded, and the States in which the company is licensed to do business. Use of companies listed in this circular is mandatory. Copies of the circular may be downloaded on the U.S. Department of Treasury website or ordered for a minimum fee by contacting the Government Printing Office at (202) (c) Each bond shall clearly state the rate of premium and the total amount of premium charged. The current power of attorney for the person who signs for the surety company must be attached to the bond. The effective date of the power of attorney shall not precede the date of the bond. The effective date of the bond shall be on or after the execution date of the contract. (d) Failure by the successful bidder to obtain the required assurance of completion within the time specified, or within such extended period as the PHA/IHA may grant based upon reasons determined adequate by the PHA/IHA, shall render the bidder ineligible for award. The PHA/IHA may then either award the contract to the next lowest responsible bidder or solicit new bids. The PHA/IHA may retain the ineligible bidder s bid guarantee. 11. Preconstruction Conference (applicable to construction contracts) After award of a contract under this solicitation and prior to the start of work, the successful bidder will be required to attend a preconstruction conference with representatives of the PHA/IHA and its architect/engineer, and other interested parties convened by the PHA/IHA. The conference will serve to acquaint the participants with the general plan of the construction operation and all other requirements of the contract (e.g., Equal Employment Opportunity, Labor Standards). The PHA/IHA will provide the successful bidder with the date, time, and place of the conference. 12. Indian Preference Requirements (applicable only if this solicitation is for a contract to be performed on a project for an Indian Housing Authority) (a) HUD has determined that the contract awarded under this solicitation is subject to the requirements of section 7(b) of the Indian Self-Determination and Education Assistance Act (25 U.S.C. 450e(b)). Section 7(b) requires that any contract or subcontract entered into for the benefit of Indians shall require that, to the greatest extent feasible (1) Preferences and opportunities for training and employment (other than core crew positions; see paragraph (h) below) in connection with the administration of such contracts or subcontracts be given to qualified Indians. The Act defines Indians to mean persons who are members of an Indian tribe and defines Indian tribe to mean any Indian tribe, band, nation, or other organized group or community, including any Alaska Native village or regional or village corporation as defined in or established pursuant to the Alaska Native Claims Settlement Act, which is recognized as eligible for the special programs and services provided by the United States to Indians because of their status as Indians; and, (2) Preference in the award of contracts or subcontracts in connection with the administration of contracts be given to Indian organizations and to Indian-owned economic enterprises, as defined in section 3 of the Indian Financing Act of 1974 (25 U.S.C. 1452). That Act defines economic enterprise to mean any Indianowned commercial, industrial, or business activity established or organized for the purpose of profit, except that the Indian ownership must constitute not less than 51 percent of the enterprise; Indian organization to mean the governing body of any Indian tribe or entity established or recognized by such governing body; Indian to mean any person who is a member of any tribe, band, group, pueblo, or community which is recognized by the Federal Government as eligible for services from the Bureau of Indian Affairs and any Native as defined in the Alaska Native Claims Settlement Act; and Indian tribe to mean any Indian tribe, band, group, pueblo, or community including Native villages and Native groups (including Previous edition is obsolete Page 3 of 4 form HUD-5369 (10/2002)

56 corporations organized by Kenai, Juneau, Sitka, and Kodiak) as defined in the Alaska Native Claims Settlement Act, which is recognized by the Federal Government as eligible for services from the Bureau of Indian Affairs. (b) (1) The successful Contractor under this solicitation shall comply with the requirements of this provision in awarding all subcontracts under the contract and in providing training and employment opportunities. (2) A finding by the IHA that the contractor, either (i) awarded a subcontract without using the procedure required by the IHA, (ii) falsely represented that subcontracts would be awarded to Indian enterprises or organizations; or, (iii) failed to comply with the contractor s employment and training preference bid statement shall be grounds for termination of the contract or for the assessment of penalties or other remedies. (c) If specified elsewhere in this solicitation, the IHA may restrict the solicitation to qualified Indian-owned enterprises and Indian organizations. If two or more (or a greater number as specified elsewhere in the solicitation) qualified Indian-owned enterprises or organizations submit responsive bids, award shall be made to the qualified enterprise or organization with the lowest responsive bid. If fewer than the minimum required number of qualified Indian-owned enterprises or organizations submit responsive bids, the IHA shall reject all bids and readvertise the solicitation in accordance with paragraph (d) below. (d) If the IHA prefers not to restrict the solicitation as described in paragraph (c) above, or if after having restricted a solicitation an insufficient number of qualified Indian enterprises or organizations submit bids, the IHA may advertise for bids from non-indian as well as Indian-owned enterprises and Indian organizations. Award shall be made to the qualified Indian enterprise or organization with the lowest responsive bid if that bid is - (1) Within the maximum HUD-approved budget amount established for the specific project or activity for which bids are being solicited; and (2) No more than the percentage specified in 24 CFR (c) higher than the total bid price of the lowest responsive bid from any qualified bidder. If no responsive bid by a qualified Indian-owned economic enterprise or organization is within the stated range of the total bid price of the lowest responsive bid from any qualified enterprise, award shall be made to the bidder with the lowest bid. (e) Bidders seeking to qualify for preference in contracting or subcontracting shall submit proof of Indian ownership with their bids. Proof of Indian ownership shall include but not be limited to: (1) Certification by a tribe or other evidence that the bidder is an Indian. The IHA shall accept the certification of a tribe that an individual is a member. (2) Evidence such as stock ownership, structure, management, control, financing and salary or profit sharing arrangements of the enterprise. (f) (1) All bidders must submit with their bids a statement describing how they will provide Indian preference in the award of subcontracts. The specific requirements of that statement and the factors to used by the IHA in determining the statement s adequacy are included as an attachment to this solicitation. Any bid that fails to include the required statement shall be rejected as nonresponsive. The IHA may require that comparable statements be provided by subcontractors to the successful Contractor, and may require the Contractor to reject any bid or proposal by a subcontractor that fails to include the statement. (2) Bidders and prospective subcontractors shall submit a certification (supported by credible evidence) to the IHA in any instance where the bidder or subcontractor believes it is infeasible to provide Indian preference in subcontracting. The acceptance or rejection by the IHA of the certification shall be final. Rejection shall disqualify the bid from further consideration. (g) All bidders must submit with their bids a statement detailing their employment and training opportunities and their plans to provide preference to Indians in implementing the contract; and the number or percentage of Indians anticipated to be employed and trained. Comparable statements from all proposed subcontractors must be submitted. The criteria to be used by the IHA in determining the statement(s) s adequacy are included as an attachment to this solicitation. Any bid that fails to include the required statement(s), or that includes a statement that does not meet minimum standards required by the IHA shall be rejected as nonresponsive. (h) Core crew employees. A core crew employee is an individual who is a bona fide employee of the contractor at the time the bid is submitted; or an individual who was not employed by the bidder at the time the bid was submitted, but who is regularly employed by the bidder in a supervisory or other key skilled position when work is available. Bidders shall submit with their bids a list of all core crew employees. (i) Preference in contracting, subcontracting, employment, and training shall apply not only on-site, on the reservation, or within the IHA s jurisdiction, but also to contracts with firms that operate outside these areas (e.g., employment in modular or manufactured housing construction facilities). (j) Bidders should contact the IHA to determine if any additional local preference requirements are applicable to this solicitation. (k) The IHA [ ] does [ ] does not [Contracting Officer check applicable box] maintain lists of Indian-owned economic enterprises and Indian organizations by specialty (e.g., plumbing, electrical, foundations), which are available to bidders to assist them in meeting their responsibility to provide preference in connection with the administration of contracts and subcontracts. Previous edition is obsolete Page 4 of 4 form HUD-5369 (10/2002)

57 U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development Office of Public and Indian Housing Representations, Certifications, and Other Statements of Bidders Public and Indian Housing Programs Previous edition is obsolete form HUD-5369-A (11/92)

58 Representations, Certifications, and Other Statements of Bidders Public and Indian Housing Programs Table of Contents Clause Page 1. Certificate of Independent Price Determination 1 2. Contingent Fee Representation and Agreement 1 3. Certification and Disclosure Regarding Payments to Influence Certain Federal Transactions 1 4. Organizational Conflicts of Interest Certification 2 5. Bidder's Certification of Eligibility 2 6. Minimum Bid Acceptance Period 2 7. Small, Minority, Women-Owned Business Concern Representation 2 8. Indian-Owned Economic Enterprise and Indian Organization Representation 2 9. Certification of Eligibility Under the Davis-Bacon Act Certification of Nonsegregated Facilities Clean Air and Water Certification Previous Participation Certificate Bidder's Signature 3 1. Certificate of Independent Price Determination (a) The bidder certifies that-- (1) The prices in this bid have been arrived at independently, without, for the purpose of restricting competition, any consultation, communication, or agreement with any other bidder or competitor relating to (i) those prices, (ii) the intention to submit a bid, or (iii) the methods or factors used to calculate the prices offered; (2) The prices in this bid have not been and will not be knowingly disclosed by the bidder, directly or indirectly, to any other bidder or competitor before bid opening (in the case of a sealed bid solicitation) or contract award (in the case of a competitive proposal solicitation) unless otherwise required by law; and (3) No attempt has been made or will be made by the bidder to induce any other concern to submit or not to submit a bid for the purpose of restricting competition. (b) Each signature on the bid is considered to be a certification by the signatory that the signatory-- (1) Is the person in the bidder's organization responsible for determining the prices being offered in this bid or proposal, and that the signatory has not participated and will not participate in any action contrary to subparagraphs (a)(l) through (a)(3) above; or (2) (i) Has been authorized, in writing, to act as agent for the following principals in certifying that those principals have not participated, and will not participate in any action contrary to subparagraphs (a)(l) through (a)(3) above. [insert full name of person(s) in the bidder's organization responsible for determining the prices offered in this bid or proposal, and the title of his or her position in the bidder's organization]; (ii) As an authorized agent, does certify that the principals named in subdivision (b)(2)(i) above have not participated, and will not participate, in any action contrary to subparagraphs (a)(1) through (a)(3) above; and (iii) As an agent, has not personally participated, and will not participate in any action contrary to subparagraphs (a)(1) through (a)(3) above. (c) If the bidder deletes or modifies subparagraph (a)2 above, the bidder must furnish with its bid a signed statement setting forth in detail the circumstances of the disclosure. [ ] [Contracting Officer check if following paragraph is applicable] (d) Non-collusive affidavit. (applicable to contracts for construction and equipment exceeding $50,000) (1) Each bidder shall execute, in the form provided by the PHA/ IHA, an affidavit to the effect that he/she has not colluded with any other person, firm or corporation in regard to any bid submitted in response to this solicitation. If the successful bidder did not submit the affidavit with his/her bid, he/she must submit it within three (3) working days of bid opening. Failure to submit the affidavit by that date may render the bid nonresponsive. No contract award will be made without a properly executed affidavit. (2) A fully executed "Non-collusive Affidavit" [ ] is, [ ] is not included with the bid. 2. Contingent Fee Representation and Agreement (a) Definitions. As used in this provision: "Bona fide employee" means a person, employed by a bidder and subject to the bidder's supervision and control as to time, place, and manner of performance, who neither exerts, nor proposes to exert improper influence to solicit or obtain contracts nor holds out as being able to obtain any contract(s) through improper influence. "Improper influence" means any influence that induces or tends to induce a PHA/IHA employee or officer to give consideration or to act regarding a PHA/IHA contract on any basis other than the merits of the matter. (b) The bidder represents and certifies as part of its bid that, except for full-time bona fide employees working solely for the bidder, the bidder: (1) [ ] has, [ ] has not employed or retained any person or company to solicit or obtain this contract; and (2) [ ] has, [ ] has not paid or agreed to pay to any person or company employed or retained to solicit or obtain this contract any commission, percentage, brokerage, or other fee contingent upon or resulting from the award of this contract. (c) If the answer to either (a)(1) or (a)(2) above is affirmative, the bidder shall make an immediate and full written disclosure to the PHA/IHA Contracting Officer. (d) Any misrepresentation by the bidder shall give the PHA/IHA the right to (1) terminate the contract; (2) at its discretion, deduct from contract payments the amount of any commission, percentage, brokerage, or other contingent fee; or (3) take other remedy pursuant to the contract. 3. Certification and Disclosure Regarding Payments to Influence Certain Federal Transactions (applicable to contracts exceeding $100,000) (a) The definitions and prohibitions contained in Section 1352 of title 31, United States Code, are hereby incorporated by reference in paragraph (b) of this certification. Previous edition is obsolete Page1 of 3 form HUD-5369-A (11/92)

59 (b) The bidder, by signing its bid, hereby certifies to the best of his or her knowledge and belief as of December 23, 1989 that: (1) No Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress on his or her behalf in connection with the awarding of a contract resulting from this solicitation; (2) If any funds other than Federal appropriated funds (including profit or fee received under a covered Federal transaction) have been paid, or will be paid, to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress on his or her behalf in connection with this solicitation, the bidder shall complete and submit, with its bid, OMB standard form LLL, "Disclosure of Lobbying Activities;" and (3) He or she will include the language of this certification in all subcontracts at any tier and require that all recipients of subcontract awards in excess of $100,000 shall certify and disclose accordingly. (c) Submission of this certification and disclosure is a prerequisite for making or entering into this contract imposed by section 1352, title 31, United States Code. Any person who makes an expenditure prohibited under this provision or who fails to file or amend the disclosure form to be filed or amended by this provision, shall be subject to a civil penalty of not less than $10,000, and not more than $100,000, for each such failure. (d) Indian tribes (except those chartered by States) and Indian organizations as defined in section 4 of the Indian Self-Determination and Education Assistance Act (25 U.S.C. 450B) are exempt from the requirements of this provision. 4. Organizational Conflicts of Interest Certification The bidder certifies that to the best of its knowledge and belief and except as otherwise disclosed, he or she does not have any organizational conflict of interest which is defined as a situation in which the nature of work to be performed under this proposed contract and the bidder's organizational, financial, contractual, or other interests may, without some restriction on future activities: (a) Result in an unfair competitive advantage to the bidder; or, (b) Impair the bidder's objectivity in performing the contract work. [ ] In the absence of any actual or apparent conflict, I hereby certify that to the best of my knowledge and belief, no actual or apparent conflict of interest exists with regard to my possible performance of this procurement. 5. Bidder's Certification of Eligibility (a) By the submission of this bid, the bidder certifies that to the best of its knowledge and belief, neither it, nor any person or firm which has an interest in the bidder's firm, nor any of the bidder's subcontractors, is ineligible to: (1) Be awarded contracts by any agency of the United States Government, HUD, or the State in which this contract is to be performed; or, (2) Participate in HUD programs pursuant to 24 CFR Part 24. (b) The certification in paragraph (a) above is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when making award. If it is later determined that the bidder knowingly rendered an erroneous certification, the contract may be terminated for default, and the bidder may be debarred or suspended from participation in HUD programs and other Federal contract programs. 6. Minimum Bid Acceptance Period (a) "Acceptance period," as used in this provision, means the number of calendar days available to the PHA/IHA for awarding a contract from the date specified in this solicitation for receipt of bids. (b) This provision supersedes any language pertaining to the acceptance period that may appear elsewhere in this solicitation. (c) The PHA/IHA requires a minimum acceptance period of [Contracting Officer insert time period] calendar days. (d) In the space provided immediately below, bidders may specify a longer acceptance period than the PHA's/IHA's minimum requirement. The bidder allows the following acceptance period: calendar days. (e) A bid allowing less than the PHA's/IHA's minimum acceptance period will be rejected. (f) The bidder agrees to execute all that it has undertaken to do, in compliance with its bid, if that bid is accepted in writing within (1) the acceptance period stated in paragraph (c) above or (2) any longer acceptance period stated in paragraph (d) above. 7. Small, Minority, Women-Owned Business Concern Representation The bidder represents and certifies as part of its bid/ offer that it -- (a) [ ] is, [ ] is not a small business concern. "Small business concern," as used in this provision, means a concern, including its affiliates, that is independently owned and operated, not dominant in the field of operation in which it is bidding, and qualified as a small business under the criteria and size standards in 13 CFR 121. (b) [ ] is, [ ] is not a women-owned business enterprise. "Womenowned business enterprise," as used in this provision, means a business that is at least 51 percent owned by a woman or women who are U.S. citizens and who also control and operate the business. (c) [ ] is, [ ] is not a minority business enterprise. "Minority business enterprise," as used in this provision, means a business which is at least 51 percent owned or controlled by one or more minority group members or, in the case of a publicly owned business, at least 51 percent of its voting stock is owned by one or more minority group members, and whose management and daily operations are controlled by one or more such individuals. For the purpose of this definition, minority group members are: (Check the block applicable to you) [ ] Black Americans [ ] Asian Pacific Americans [ ] Hispanic Americans [ ] Asian Indian Americans [ ] Native Americans [ ] Hasidic Jewish Americans 8. Indian-Owned Economic Enterprise and Indian Organization Representation (applicable only if this solicitation is for a contract to be performed on a project for an Indian Housing Authority) The bidder represents and certifies that it: (a) [ ] is, [ ] is not an Indian-owned economic enterprise. "Economic enterprise," as used in this provision, means any commercial, industrial, or business activity established or organized for the purpose of profit, which is at least 51 percent Indian owned. "Indian," as used in this provision, means any person who is a member of any tribe, band, group, pueblo, or community which is recognized by the Federal Government as eligible for services from the Bureau of Indian Affairs and any "Native" as defined in the Alaska Native Claims Settlement Act. (b) [ ] is, [ ] is not an Indian organization. "Indian organization," as used in this provision, means the governing body of any Indian tribe or entity established or recognized by such governing body. Indian "tribe" means any Indian tribe, band, group, pueblo, or Previous edition is obsolete Page 2 of 3 form HUD-5369-A (11/92)

60 community including Native villages and Native groups (including corporations organized by Kenai, Juneau, Sitka, and Kodiak) as defined in the Alaska Native Claims Settlement Act, which is recognized by the Federal Government as eligible for services from the Bureau of Indian Affairs. 9. Certification of Eligibility Under the Davis-Bacon Act (applicable to construction contracts exceeding $2,000) (a) By the submission of this bid, the bidder certifies that neither it nor any person or firm who has an interest in the bidder's firm is a person or firm ineligible to be awarded contracts by the United States Government by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). (b) No part of the contract resulting from this solicitation shall be subcontracted to any person or firm ineligible to be awarded contracts by the United States Government by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). (c) The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U. S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C Certification of Nonsegregated Facilities (applicable to contracts exceeding $10,000) (a) The bidder's attention is called to the clause entitled Equal Employment Opportunity of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. (b) "Segregated facilities," as used in this provision, means any waiting rooms, work areas, rest rooms and wash rooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms and other storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and housing facilities provided for employees, that are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact segregated on the basis of race, color, religion, or national origin because of habit, local custom, or otherwise. (c) By the submission of this bid, the bidder certifies that it does not and will not maintain or provide for its employees any segregated facilities at any of its establishments, and that it does not and will not permit its employees to perform their services at any location under its control where segregated facilities are maintained. The bidder agrees that a breach of this certification is a violation of the Equal Employment Opportunity clause in the contract. (d) The bidder further agrees that (except where it has obtained identical certifications from proposed subcontractors for specific time periods) prior to entering into subcontracts which exceed $10,000 and are not exempt from the requirements of the Equal Employment Opportunity clause, it will: (1) Obtain identical certifications from the proposed subcontractors; (2) Retain the certifications in its files; and (3) Forward the following notice to the proposed subcontractors (except if the proposed subcontractors have submitted identical certifications for specific time periods): Notice to Prospective Subcontractors of Requirement for Certifications of Nonsegregated Facilities A Certification of Nonsegregated Facilities must be submitted before the award of a subcontract exceeding $10,000 which is not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Employment Opportunity clause of the prime contract. The certification may be submitted either for each subcontract or for all subcontracts during a period (i.e., quarterly, semiannually, or annually). Note: The penalty for making false statements in bids is prescribed in 18 U.S.C Clean Air and Water Certification (applicable to contracts exceeding $100,000) The bidder certifies that: (a) Any facility to be used in the performance of this contract [ ] is, [ ] is not listed on the Environmental Protection Agency List of Violating Facilities: (b) The bidder will immediately notify the PHA/IHA Contracting Officer, before award, of the receipt of any communication from the Administrator, or a designee, of the Environmental Protection Agency, indicating that any facility that the bidder proposes to use for the performance of the contract is under consideration to be listed on the EPA List of Violating Facilities; and, (c) The bidder will include a certification substantially the same as this certification, including this paragraph (c), in every nonexempt subcontract. 12. Previous Participation Certificate (applicable to construction and equipment contracts exceeding $50,000) (a) The bidder shall complete and submit with his/her bid the Form HUD-2530, "Previous Participation Certificate." If the successful bidder does not submit the certificate with his/her bid, he/she must submit it within three (3) working days of bid opening. Failure to submit the certificate by that date may render the bid nonresponsive. No contract award will be made without a properly executed certificate. (b) A fully executed "Previous Participation Certificate" [ ] is, [ ] is not included with the bid. 13. Bidder's Signature The bidder hereby certifies that the information contained in these certifications and representations is accurate, complete, and current. (Signature and Date) (Typed or Printed Name) (Title) (Company Name) (Company Address) Previous edition is obsolete Page 3 of 3 form HUD-5369-A (11/92)

61 General Conditions for Construction Contracts - Public Housing Programs U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development Office of Public and Indian Housing OMB Approval No (exp. 3/31/2010) Applicability. This form is applicable to any construction/development contract greater than $100,000. This form includes those clauses required by OMB's common rule on grantee procurement, implemented at HUD in 24 CFR 85.36, and those requirements set forth in Section 3 of the Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968 and its amendment by the Housing and Community Development Act of 1992, implemented by HUD at 24 CFR Part 135. The form is required for construction contracts awarded by Public Housing Agencies (PHAs). The form is used by Housing Authorities in solicitations to provide necessary contract clauses. If the form were not used, HAs would be unable to enforce their contracts. Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 1.0 hours per response, including the time for reviewing instructions, searching existing data sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information. Responses to the collection of information are required to obtain a benefit or to retain a benefit. The information requested does not lend itself to confidentiality. HUD may not conduct or sponsor, and a person is not required to respond to a collection of information unless it displays a currently valid OMB number. Table of Contents Clause Page Clause Page 1. Definitions 2 Administrative Requirements 2. Contractor s Responsibility for Work Contract Period 9 3. Architect s Duties, Responsibilities and Authority Order of Precedence 9 4. Other Contracts Payments 9 Construction Requirements 28. Contract Modifications Preconstruction Conference and Notice to Proceed Changes Construction Progress Schedule Suspension of Work Site Investigation and Conditions Affecting the Work Disputes Differing Site Conditions Default Specifications and Drawings for Construction Liquidated Damages As-Built Drawings Termination of Convenience Material and Workmanship Assignment of Contract Permits and Codes Insurance Health, Safety, and Accident Prevention Subcontracts Temporary Buildings and Transportation Materials Subcontracting with Small and Minority Firms, Women s 13 Business Enterprise, and Labor Surplus Area Firms 15. Availability and Use of Utility Services Equal Employment Opportunity Protection of Existing Vegetation, Structures, Equipment, 40. Employment, Training, and Contracting Opportunities for 14 Utilities, and Improvements 6 Low-Income Persons, Section 3 of the Housing and Urban Development Act of Temporary Buildings and Transportation Materials Interest of Members of Congress Clean Air and Water Interest of Members, Officers, or Employees and Former 15 Members, Officers, or Employees 19. Energy Efficiency Limitations on Payments Made to Influence Inspection and Acceptance of Construction Royalties and Patents Use and Possession Prior to Completion Examination and Retention of Contractor s Records Warranty of Title Labor Standards-Davis-Bacon and Related Acts Warranty of Construction Non-Federal Prevailing Wage Rates Prohibition Against Liens Procurement of Recovered Materials 19 Previous editions are obsolete Page 1 of 19 form HUD-5370 (11/2006) Replaces form HUD-5370-A ref Handbooks & G

62 1. Definitions (a) Architect means the person or other entity engaged by the PHA to perform architectural, engineering, design, and other services related to the work as provided for in the contract. When a PHA uses an engineer to act in this capacity, the terms architect and engineer shall be synonymous. The Architect shall serve as a technical representative of the Contracting Officer. The Architect s authority is as set forth elsewhere in this contract. (b) Contract means the contract entered into between the PHA and the Contractor. It includes the forms of Bid, the Bid Bond, the Performance and Payment Bond or Bonds or other assurance of completion, the Certifications, Representations, and Other Statements of Bidders (form HUD-5370), these General Conditions of the Contract for Construction (form HUD-5370), the applicable wage rate determinations from the U.S. Department of Labor, any special conditions included elsewhere in the contract, the specifications, and drawings. It includes all formal changes to any of those documents by addendum, change order, or other modification. (c) Contracting Officer means the person delegated the authority by the PHA to enter into, administer, and/or terminate this contract and designated as such in writing to the Contractor. The term includes any successor Contracting Officer and any duly authorized representative of the Contracting Officer also designated in writing. The Contracting Officer shall be deemed the authorized agent of the PHA in all dealings with the Contractor. (d) Contractor means the person or other entity entering into the contract with the PHA to perform all of the work required under the contract. (e) Drawings means the drawings enumerated in the schedule of drawings contained in the Specifications and as described in the contract clause entitled Specifications and Drawings for Construction herein. (f) HUD means the United States of America acting through the Department of Housing and Urban Development including the Secretary, or any other person designated to act on its behalf. HUD has agreed, subject to the provisions of an Annual Contributions Contract (ACC), to provide financial assistance to the PHA, which includes assistance in financing the work to be performed under this contract. As defined elsewhere in these General Conditions or the contract documents, the determination of HUD may be required to authorize changes in the work or for release of funds to the PHA for payment to the Contractor. Notwithstanding HUD s role, nothing in this contract shall be construed to create any contractual relationship between the Contractor and HUD. (g) Project means the entire project, whether construction or rehabilitation, the work for which is provided for in whole or in part under this contract. (h) PHA means the Public Housing Agency organized under applicable state laws which is a party to this contract. (j) Specifications means the written description of the technical requirements for construction and includes the criteria and tests for determining whether the requirements are met. (l) Work means materials, workmanship, and manufacture and fabrication of components. 2. Contractor s Responsibility for Work (a) The Contractor shall furnish all necessary labor, materials, tools, equipment, and transportation necessary for performance of the work. The Contractor shall also furnish all necessary water, heat, light, and power not made available to the Contractor by the PHA pursuant to the clause entitled Availability and Use of Utility Services herein. (b) The Contractor shall perform on the site, and with its own organization, work equivalent to at least [ ] (12 percent unless otherwise indicated) of the total amount of work to be performed under the order. This percentage may be reduced by a supplemental agreement to this order if, during performing the work, the Contractor requests a reduction and the Contracting Officer determines that the reduction would be to the advantage of the PHA. (c) At all times during performance of this contract and until the work is completed and accepted, the Contractor shall directly superintend the work or assign and have on the work site a competent superintendent who is satisfactory to the Contracting Officer and has authority to act for the Contractor. (d) The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to persons or property that occur as a result of the Contractor s fault or negligence, and shall take proper safety and health precautions to protect the work, the workers, the public, and the property of others. The Contractor shall hold and save the PHA, its officers and agents, free and harmless from liability of any nature occasioned by the Contractor s performance. The Contractor shall also be responsible for all materials delivered and work performed until completion and acceptance of the entire work, except for any completed unit of work which may have been accepted under the contract. (e) The Contractor shall lay out the work from base lines and bench marks indicated on the drawings and be responsible for all lines, levels, and measurements of all work executed under the contract. The Contractor shall verify the figures before laying out the work and will be held responsible for any error resulting from its failure to do so. (f) The Contractor shall confine all operations (including storage of materials) on PHA premises to areas authorized or approved by the Contracting Officer. (g) The Contractor shall at all times keep the work area, including storage areas, free from accumulations of waste materials. After completing the work and before final inspection, the Contractor shall (1) remove from the premises all scaffolding, equipment, tools, and materials (including rejected materials) that are not the property of the PHA and all rubbish caused by its work; (2) leave the work area in a clean, neat, and orderly condition satisfactory to the Contracting Officer; (3) perform all specified tests; and, (4) deliver the installation in complete and operating condition. (h) The Contractor s responsibility will terminate when all work has been completed, the final inspection made, and the work accepted by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor will then be released from further obligation except as required by the warranties specified elsewhere in the contract. 3. Architect s Duties, Responsibilities, and Authority (a) The Architect for this contract, and any successor, shall be designated in writing by the Contracting Officer. Previous editions are obsolete Page 2 of 19 form HUD-5370 (11/2006) Replaces form HUD-5370-A ref Handbooks & G

63 (b) The Architect shall serve as the Contracting Officer s technical representative with respect to architectural, engineering, and design matters related to the work performed under the contract. The Architect may provide direction on contract performance. Such direction shall be within the scope of the contract and may not be of a nature which: (1) institutes additional work outside the scope of the contract; (2) constitutes a change as defined in the Changes clause herein; (3) causes an increase or decrease in the cost of the contract; (4) alters the Construction Progress Schedule; or (5) changes any of the other express terms or conditions of the contract. (c) The Architect s duties and responsibilities may include but shall not be limited to: (1) Making periodic visits to the work site, and on the basis of his/her on-site inspections, issuing written reports to the PHA which shall include all observed deficiencies. The Architect shall file a copy of the report with the Contractor s designated representative at the site; (2) Making modifications in drawings and technical specifications and assisting the Contracting Officer in the preparation of change orders and other contract modifications for issuance by the Contracting Officer; (3) Reviewing and making recommendations with respect to - (i) the Contractor s construction progress schedules; (ii) the Contractor s shop and detailed drawings; (iii) the machinery, mechanical and other equipment and materials or other articles proposed for use by the Contractor; and, (iv) the Contractor s price breakdown and progress payment estimates; and, (4) Assisting in inspections, signing Certificates of Completion, and making recommendations with respect to acceptance of work completed under the contract. 4. Other Contracts The PHA may undertake or award other contracts for additional work at or near the site of the work under this contract. The Contractor shall fully cooperate with the other contractors and with PHA employees and shall carefully adapt scheduling and performing the work under this contract to accommodate the additional work, heeding any direction that may be provided by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall not commit or permit any act that will interfere with the performance of work by any other contractor or by PHA employees Construction Requirements 5. Pre-construction Conference and Notice to Proceed (a) Within ten calendar days of contract execution, and prior to the commencement of work, the Contractor shall attend a preconstruction conference with representatives of the PHA, its Architect, and other interested parties convened by the PHA. The conference will serve to acquaint the participants with the general plan of the construction operation and all other requirements of the contract. The PHA will provide the Contractor with the date, time, and place of the conference. (b) The contractor shall begin work upon receipt of a written Notice to Proceed from the Contracting Officer or designee. The Contractor shall not begin work prior to receiving such notice. 6. Construction Progress Schedule (a) The Contractor shall, within five days after the work commences on the contract or another period of time determined by the Contracting Officer, prepare and submit to the Contracting Officer for approval three copies of a practicable schedule showing the order in which the Contractor proposes to perform the work, and the dates on which the Contractor contemplates starting and completing the several salient features of the work (including acquiring labor, materials, and equipment). The schedule shall be in the form of a progress chart of suitable scale to indicate appropriately the percentage of work scheduled for completion by any given date during the period. If the Contractor fails to submit a schedule within the time prescribed, the Contracting Officer may withhold approval of progress payments or take other remedies under the contract until the Contractor submits the required schedule. (b) The Contractor shall enter the actual progress on the chart as required by the Contracting Officer, and immediately deliver three copies of the annotated schedule to the Contracting Officer. If the Contracting Officer determines, upon the basis of inspection conducted pursuant to the clause entitled Inspection and Acceptance of Construction, herein that the Contractor is not meeting the approved schedule, the Contractor shall take steps necessary to improve its progress, including those that may be required by the Contracting Officer, without additional cost to the PHA. In this circumstance, the Contracting Officer may require the Contractor to increase the number of shifts, overtime operations, days of work, and/or the amount of construction plant, and to submit for approval any supplementary schedule or schedules in chart form as the Contracting Officer deems necessary to demonstrate how the approved rate of progress will be regained. (c) Failure of the Contractor to comply with the requirements of the Contracting Officer under this clause shall be grounds for a determination by the Contracting Officer that the Contractor is not prosecuting the work with sufficient diligence to ensure completion within the time specified in the Contract. Upon making this determination, the Contracting Officer may terminate the Contractor s right to proceed with the work, or any separable part of it, in accordance with the Default clause of this contract. 7. Site Investigation and Conditions Affecting the Work (a) The Contractor acknowledges that it has taken steps reasonably necessary to ascertain the nature and location of the work, and that it has investigated and satisfied itself as to the general and local conditions which can affect the work or its cost, including but not limited to, (1) conditions bearing upon transportation, disposal, handling, and storage of materials; (2) the availability of labor, water, electric power, and roads;(3) uncertainties of weather, river stages, tides, or similar physical conditions at the site; (4) the conformation and conditions of the ground; and (5) the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during work performance. The Contractor also acknowledges that it has satisfied itself as to the character, quality, and quantity of surface and subsurface materials or obstacles to be encountered insofar as this information is Previous editions are obsolete Page 3 of 19 form HUD-5370 (11/2006) Replaces form HUD-5370-A ref Handbooks & G

64 reasonably ascertainable from an inspection of the site, including all exploratory work done by the PHA, as well as from the drawings and specifications made a part of this contract. Any failure of the Contractor to take the actions described and acknowledged in this paragraph will not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for estimating properly the difficulty and cost of successfully performing the work, or for proceeding to successfully perform the work without additional expense to the PHA. (b) The PHA assumes no responsibility for any conclusions or interpretations made by the Contractor based on the information made available by the PHA. Nor does the PHA assume responsibility for any understanding reached or representation made concerning conditions which can affect the work by any of its officers or agents before the execution of this contract, unless that understanding or representation is expressly stated in this contract. 8. Differing Site Conditions (a) The Contractor shall promptly, and before the conditions are disturbed, give a written notice to the Contracting Officer of (1) subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site which differ materially from those indicated in this contract, or (2) unknown physical conditions at the site(s), of an unusual nature, which differ materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inhering in work of the character provided for in the contract. (b) The Contracting Officer shall investigate the site conditions promptly after receiving the notice. Work shall not proceed at the affected site, except at the Contractor s risk, until the Contracting Officer has provided written instructions to the Contractor. If the conditions do materially so differ and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor s cost of, or the time required for, performing any part of the work under this contract, whether or not changed as a result of the conditions, the Contractor shall file a claim in writing to the PHA within ten days after receipt of such instructions and, in any event, before proceeding with the work. An equitable adjustment in the contract price, the delivery schedule, or both shall be made under this clause and the contract modified in writing accordingly. (c) No request by the Contractor for an equitable adjustment to the contract under this clause shall be allowed, unless the Contractor has given the written notice required; provided, that the time prescribed in (a) above for giving written notice may be extended by the Contracting Officer. (d) No request by the Contractor for an equitable adjustment to the contract for differing site conditions shall be allowed if made after final payment under this contract. 9. Specifications and Drawings for Construction (a) The Contractor shall keep on the work site a copy of the drawings and specifications and shall at all times give the Contracting Officer access thereto. Anything mentioned in the specifications and not shown on the drawings, or shown on the drawings and not mentioned in the specifications, shall be of like effect as if shown or mentioned in both. In case of difference between drawings and specifications, the specifications shall govern. In case of discrepancy in the figures, in the drawings, or in the specifications, the matter shall be promptly submitted to the Contracting Officer, who shall promptly make a determination in writing. Any adjustment by the Contractor without such a determination shall be at its own risk and expense. The Contracting Officer shall furnish from time to time such detailed drawings and other information as considered necessary, unless otherwise provided. (b) Wherever in the specifications or upon the drawings the words directed, required, ordered, designated, prescribed, or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, order, designation, or prescription, of the Contracting Officer is intended and similarly the words approved, acceptable, satisfactory, or words of like import shall mean approved by, or acceptable to, or satisfactory to the Contracting Officer, unless otherwise expressly stated. (c) Where as shown, as indicated, as detailed, or words of similar import are used, it shall be understood that the reference is made to the drawings accompanying this contract unless stated otherwise. The word provided as used herein shall be understood to mean provide complete in place that is furnished and installed. (d) Shop drawings means drawings, submitted to the PHA by the Contractor, subcontractor, or any lower tier subcontractor, showing in detail (1) the proposed fabrication and assembly of structural elements and (2) the installation (i.e., form, fit, and attachment details) of materials of equipment. It includes drawings, diagrams, layouts, schematics, descriptive literature, illustrations, schedules, performance and test data, and similar materials furnished by the Contractor to explain in detail specific portions of the work required by the contract. The PHA may duplicate, use, and disclose in any manner and for any purpose shop drawings delivered under this contract. (e) If this contract requires shop drawings, the Contractor shall coordinate all such drawings, and review them for accuracy, completeness, and compliance with other contract requirements and shall indicate its approval thereon as evidence of such coordination and review. Shop drawings submitted to the Contracting Officer without evidence of the Contractor s approval may be returned for resubmission. The Contracting Officer will indicate an approval or disapproval of the shop drawings and if not approved as submitted shall indicate the PHA s reasons therefore. Any work done before such approval shall be at the Contractor s risk. Approval by the Contracting Officer shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for any errors or omissions in such drawings, nor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of this contract, except with respect to variations described and approved in accordance with (f) below. (f) If shop drawings show variations from the contract requirements, the Contractor shall describe such variations in writing, separate from the drawings, at the time of submission. If the Architect approves any such variation and the Contracting Officer concurs, the Contracting Officer shall issue an appropriate modification to the contract, except that, if the variation is minor or does not involve a change in price or in time of performance, a modification need not be issued. (g) It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to make timely requests of the PHA for such large scale and full size drawings, color schemes, and other additional information, not already in his possession, which shall be Previous editions are obsolete Page 4 of 19 form HUD-5370 (11/2006) Replaces form HUD-5370-A ref Handbooks & G

65 required in the planning and production of the work. Such requests may be submitted as the need arises, but each such request shall be filed in ample time to permit appropriate action to be taken by all parties involved so as to avoid delay. (h) The Contractor shall submit to the Contracting Officer for approval four copies (unless otherwise indicated) of all shop drawings as called for under the various headings of these specifications. Three sets (unless otherwise indicated) of all shop drawings, will be retained by the PHA and one set will be returned to the Contractor. As required by the Contracting Officer, the Contractor, upon completing the work under this contract, shall furnish a complete set of all shop drawings as finally approved. These drawings shall show all changes and revisions made up to the time the work is completed and accepted. (i) This clause shall be included in all subcontracts at any tier. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all shop drawings prepared by subcontractors are submitted to the Contracting Officer. 10. As-Built Drawings (a) As-built drawings, as used in this clause, means drawings submitted by the Contractor or subcontractor at any tier to show the construction of a particular structure or work as actually completed under the contract. Asbuilt drawings shall be synonymous with Record drawings. (b) As required by the Contracting Officer, the Contractor shall provide the Contracting Officer accurate information to be used in the preparation of permanent as-built drawings. For this purpose, the Contractor shall record on one set of contract drawings all changes from the installations originally indicated, and record final locations of underground lines by depth from finish grade and by accurate horizontal offset distances to permanent surface improvements such as buildings, curbs, or edges of walks. (c) This clause shall be included in all subcontracts at any tier. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all as-built drawings prepared by subcontractors are submitted to the Contracting Officer. 11. Material and Workmanship (a) All equipment, material, and articles furnished under this contract shall be new and of the most suitable grade for the purpose intended, unless otherwise specifically provided in this contract. References in the contract to equipment, material, articles, or patented processes by trade name, make, or catalog number, shall be regarded as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition. The Contractor may, at its option, use any equipment, material, article, or process that, in the judgment of, and as approved by the Contracting Officer, is equal to that named in the specifications, unless otherwise specifically provided in this contract. (b) Approval of equipment and materials. (1) The Contractor shall obtain the Contracting Officer s approval of the machinery and mechanical and other equipment to be incorporated into the work. When requesting approval, the Contractor shall furnish to the Contracting Officer the name of the manufacturer, the model number, and other information concerning the performance, capacity, nature, and rating of the machinery and mechanical and other equipment. When required by this contract or by the Contracting Officer, the Contractor shall also obtain the Contracting Officer s approval of the material or articles which the Contractor contemplates incorporating into the work. When requesting approval, the Contractor shall provide full information concerning the material or articles. Machinery, equipment, material, and articles that do not have the required approval shall be installed or used at the risk of subsequent rejection. (2) When required by the specifications or the Contracting Officer, the Contractor shall submit appropriately marked samples (and certificates related to them) for approval at the Contractor s expense, with all shipping charges prepaid. The Contractor shall label, or otherwise properly mark on the container, the material or product represented, its place of origin, the name of the producer, the Contractor s name, and the identification of the construction project for which the material or product is intended to be used. (3) Certificates shall be submitted in triplicate, describing each sample submitted for approval and certifying that the material, equipment or accessory complies with contract requirements. The certificates shall include the name and brand of the product, name of manufacturer, and the location where produced. (4) Approval of a sample shall not constitute a waiver of the PHA right to demand full compliance with contract requirements. Materials, equipment and accessories may be rejected for cause even though samples have been approved. (5) Wherever materials are required to comply with recognized standards or specifications, such specifications shall be accepted as establishing the technical qualities and testing methods, but shall not govern the number of tests required to be made nor modify other contract requirements. The Contracting Officer may require laboratory test reports on items submitted for approval or may approve materials on the basis of data submitted in certificates with samples. Check tests will be made on materials delivered for use only as frequently as the Contracting Officer determines necessary to insure compliance of materials with the specifications. The Contractor will assume all costs of retesting materials which fail to meet contract requirements and/or testing materials offered in substitution for those found deficient. (6) After approval, samples will be kept in the Project office until completion of work. They may be built into the work after a substantial quantity of the materials they represent has been built in and accepted. (c) Requirements concerning lead-based paint. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements concerning lead-based paint contained in the Lead-Based Paint Poisoning Prevention Act (42 U.S.C ) as implemented by 24 CFR Part Permits and Codes (a) The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations. Notwithstanding the requirement of the Contractor to comply with the drawings and specifications in the contract, all work installed shall comply with all applicable codes and regulations as amended by any Previous editions are obsolete Page 5 of 19 form HUD-5370 (11/2006) Replaces form HUD-5370-A ref Handbooks & G

66 waivers. Before installing the work, the Contractor shall examine the drawings and the specifications for compliance with applicable codes and regulations bearing on the work and shall immediately report any discrepancy it may discover to the Contracting Officer. Where the requirements of the drawings and specifications fail to comply with the applicable code or regulation, the Contracting Officer shall modify the contract by change order pursuant to the clause entitled Changes herein to conform to the code or regulation. (b) The Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits, fees, and licenses necessary for the proper execution and completion of the work. Where the PHA can arrange for the issuance of all or part of these permits, fees and licenses, without cost to the Contractor, the contract amount shall be reduced accordingly. 13. Health, Safety, and Accident Prevention (a) In performing this contract, the Contractor shall: (1) Ensure that no laborer or mechanic shall be required to work in surroundings or under working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to his/her health and/or safety as determined under construction safety and health standards promulgated by the Secretary of Labor by regulation; (2) Protect the lives, health, and safety of other persons; (3) Prevent damage to property, materials, supplies, and equipment; and, (4) Avoid work interruptions. (b) For these purposes, the Contractor shall: (1) Comply with regulations and standards issued by the Secretary of Labor at 29 CFR Part Failure to comply may result in imposition of sanctions pursuant to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (Public Law 91-54, 83 Stat. 96), 40 U.S.C et seq.; and (2) Include the terms of this clause in every subcontract so that such terms will be binding on each subcontractor. (c) The Contractor shall maintain an accurate record of exposure data on all accidents incident to work performed under this contract resulting in death, traumatic injury, occupational disease, or damage to property, materials, supplies, or equipment, and shall report this data in the manner prescribed by 29 CFR Part (d) The Contracting Officer shall notify the Contractor of any noncompliance with these requirements and of the corrective action required. This notice, when delivered to the Contractor or the Contractor s representative at the site of the work, shall be deemed sufficient notice of the noncompliance and corrective action required. After receiving the notice, the Contractor shall immediately take corrective action. If the Contractor fails or refuses to take corrective action promptly, the Contracting Officer may issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. The Contractor shall not base any claim or request for equitable adjustment for additional time or money on any stop order issued under these circumstances. (e) The Contractor shall be responsible for its subcontractors compliance with the provisions of this clause. The Contractor shall take such action with respect to any subcontract as the PHA, the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development, or the Secretary of Labor shall direct as a means of enforcing such provisions. 14. Temporary Heating The Contractor shall provide and pay for temporary heating, covering, and enclosures necessary to properly protect all work and materials against damage by dampness and cold, to dry out the work, and to facilitate the completion of the work. Any permanent heating equipment used shall be turned over to the PHA in the condition and at the time required by the specifications. 15. Availability and Use of Utility Services (a) The PHA shall make all reasonably required amounts of utilities available to the Contractor from existing outlets and supplies, as specified in the contract. Unless otherwise provided in the contract, the amount of each utility service consumed shall be charged to or paid for by the Contractor at prevailing rates charged to the PHA or, where the utility is produced by the PHA, at reasonable rates determined by the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall carefully conserve any utilities furnished without charge. (b) The Contractor, at its expense and in a manner satisfactory to the Contracting Officer, shall install and maintain all necessary temporary connections and distribution lines, and all meters required to measure the amount of each utility used for the purpose of determining charges. Before final acceptance of the work by the PHA, the Contractor shall remove all the temporary connections, distribution lines, meters, and associated paraphernalia. 16. Protection of Existing Vegetation, Structures, Equipment, Utilities, and Improvements (a) The Contractor shall preserve and protect all structures, equipment, and vegetation (such as trees, shrubs, and grass) on or adjacent to the work site, which are not to be removed under this contract, and which do not unreasonably interfere with the work required under this contract. (b) The Contractor shall only remove trees when specifically authorized to do so, and shall avoid damaging vegetation that will remain in place. If any limbs or branches of trees are broken during performance of this contract, or by the careless operation of equipment, or by workmen, the Contractor shall trim those limbs or branches with a clean cut and paint the cut with a tree-pruning compound as directed by the Contracting Officer. (c) The Contractor shall protect from damage all existing improvements and utilities (1) at or near the work site and (2) on adjacent property of a third party, the locations of which are made known to or should be known by the Contractor. Prior to disturbing the ground at the construction site, the Contractor shall ensure that all underground utility lines are clearly marked. (d) The Contractor shall shore up, brace, underpin, secure, and protect as necessary all foundations and other parts of existing structures adjacent to, adjoining, and in the vicinity of the site, which may be affected by the excavations or other operations connected with the construction of the project. (e) Any equipment temporarily removed as a result of work under this contract shall be protected, cleaned, and replaced in the same condition as at the time of award of this contract. Previous editions are obsolete Page 6 of 19 form HUD-5370 (11/2006) Replaces form HUD-5370-A ref Handbooks & G

67 (f) New work which connects to existing work shall correspond in all respects with that to which it connects and/or be similar to existing work unless otherwise required by the specifications. (g) No structural members shall be altered or in any way weakened without the written authorization of the Contracting Officer, unless such work is clearly specified in the plans or specifications. (h) If the removal of the existing work exposes discolored or unfinished surfaces, or work out of alignment, such surfaces shall be refinished, or the material replaced as necessary to make the continuous work uniform and harmonious. This, however, shall not be construed to require the refinishing or reconstruction of dissimilar finishes previously exposed, or finished surfaces in good condition, but in different planes or on different levels when brought together by the removal of intervening work, unless such refinishing or reconstruction is specified in the plans or specifications. (i) The Contractor shall give all required notices to any adjoining or adjacent property owner or other party before the commencement of any work. (j) The Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the PHA from any damages on account of settlement or the loss of lateral support of adjoining property, any damages from changes in topography affecting drainage, and from all loss or expense and all damages for which the PHA may become liable in consequence of such injury or damage to adjoining and adjacent structures and their premises. (k) The Contractor shall repair any damage to vegetation, structures, equipment, utilities, or improvements, including those that are the property of a third party, resulting from failure to comply with the requirements of this contract or failure to exercise reasonable care in performing the work. If the Contractor fails or refuses to repair the damage promptly, the Contracting Officer may have the necessary work performed and charge the cost to the Contractor. 17. Temporary Buildings and Transportation of Materials (a) Temporary buildings (e.g., storage sheds, shops, offices, sanitary facilities) and utilities may be erected by the Contractor only with the approval of the Contracting Officer and shall be built with labor and materials furnished by the Contractor without expense to the PHA. The temporary buildings and utilities shall remain the property of the Contractor and shall be removed by the Contractor at its expense upon completion of the work. With the written consent of the Contracting Officer, the buildings and utilities may be abandoned and need not be removed. (b) The Contractor shall, as directed by the Contracting Officer, use only established roadways, or use temporary roadways constructed by the Contractor when and as authorized by the Contracting Officer. When materials are transported in prosecuting the work, vehicles shall not be loaded beyond the loading capacity recommended by the manufacturer of the vehicle or prescribed by any federal, state, or local law or regulation. When it is necessary to cross curbs or sidewalks, the Contractor shall protect them from damage. The Contractor shall repair or pay for the repair of any damaged curbs, sidewalks, or roads. 18. Clean Air and Water The contactor shall comply with the Clean Air Act, as amended, 42 USC 7401 et seq., the Federal Water Pollution Control Water Act, as amended, 33 U.S.C et seq., and standards issued pursuant thereto in the facilities in which this contract is to be performed. 19. Energy Efficiency The Contractor shall comply with mandatory standards and policies relating to energy efficiency which are contained in the energy conservation plan issued in compliance with the Energy Policy and Conservation Act (Pub.L ) for the State in which the work under the contract is performed. 20. Inspection and Acceptance of Construction (a) Definitions. As used in this clause - (1) Acceptance means the act of an authorized representative of the PHA by which the PHA approves and assumes ownership of the work performed under this contract. Acceptance may be partial or complete. (2) Inspection means examining and testing the work performed under the contract (including, when appropriate, raw materials, equipment, components, and intermediate assemblies) to determine whether it conforms to contract requirements. (3) Testing means that element of inspection that determines the properties or elements, including functional operation of materials, equipment, or their components, by the application of established scientific principles and procedures. (b) The Contractor shall maintain an adequate inspection system and perform such inspections as will ensure that the work performed under the contract conforms to contract requirements. All work is subject to PHA inspection and test at all places and at all reasonable times before acceptance to ensure strict compliance with the terms of the contract. (c) PHA inspections and tests are for the sole benefit of the PHA and do not: (1) relieve the Contractor of responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures; (2) relieve the Contractor of responsibility for loss or damage of the material before acceptance; (3) constitute or imply acceptance; or, (4) affect the continuing rights of the PHA after acceptance of the completed work under paragraph (j) below. (d) The presence or absence of the PHA inspector does not relieve the Contractor from any contract requirement, nor is the inspector authorized to change any term or condition of the specifications without the Contracting Officer s written authorization. All instructions and approvals with respect to the work shall be given to the Contractor by the Contracting Officer. (e) The Contractor shall promptly furnish, without additional charge, all facilities, labor, and material reasonably needed for performing such safe and convenient inspections and tests as may be required by the Contracting Officer. The PHA may charge to the Contractor any additional cost of inspection or test when work is not ready at the time specified by the Contractor for inspection or test, or when prior rejection makes reinspection or retest necessary. The PHA shall perform all inspections and tests in a manner that will not unnecessarily delay the work. Special, full size, and performance tests shall be performed as described in the contract. Previous editions are obsolete Page 7 of 19 form HUD-5370 (11/2006) Replaces form HUD-5370-A ref Handbooks & G

68 (f) The PHA may conduct routine inspections of the construction site on a daily basis. (g) The Contractor shall, without charge, replace or correct work found by the PHA not to conform to contract requirements, unless the PHA decides that it is in its interest to accept the work with an appropriate adjustment in contract price. The Contractor shall promptly segregate and remove rejected material from the premises. (h) If the Contractor does not promptly replace or correct rejected work, the PHA may (1) by contract or otherwise, replace or correct the work and charge the cost to the Contractor, or (2) terminate for default the Contractor s right to proceed. (i) If any work requiring inspection is covered up without approval of the PHA, it must, if requested by the Contracting Officer, be uncovered at the expense of the Contractor. If at any time before final acceptance of the entire work, the PHA considers it necessary or advisable, to examine work already completed by removing or tearing it out, the Contractor, shall on request, promptly furnish all necessary facilities, labor, and material. If such work is found to be defective or nonconforming in any material respect due to the fault of the Contractor or its subcontractors, the Contractor shall defray all the expenses of the examination and of satisfactory reconstruction. If, however, such work is found to meet the requirements of the contract, the Contracting Officer shall make an equitable adjustment to cover the cost of the examination and reconstruction, including, if completion of the work was thereby delayed, an extension of time. (j) The Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer, in writing, as to the date when in its opinion all or a designated portion of the work will be substantially completed and ready for inspection. If the Architect determines that the state of preparedness is as represented, the PHA will promptly arrange for the inspection. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, the PHA shall accept, as soon as practicable after completion and inspection, all work required by the contract or that portion of the work the Contracting Officer determines and designates can be accepted separately. Acceptance shall be final and conclusive except for latent defects, fraud, gross mistakes amounting to fraud, or the PHA s right under any warranty or guarantee. 21. Use and Possession Prior to Completion (a) The PHA shall have the right to take possession of or use any completed or partially completed part of the work. Before taking possession of or using any work, the Contracting Officer shall furnish the Contractor a list of items of work remaining to be performed or corrected on those portions of the work that the PHA intends to take possession of or use. However, failure of the Contracting Officer to list any item of work shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for complying with the terms of the contract. The PHA s possession or use shall not be deemed an acceptance of any work under the contract. (b) While the PHA has such possession or use, the Contractor shall be relieved of the responsibility for (1) the loss of or damage to the work resulting from the PHA s possession or use, notwithstanding the terms of the clause entitled Permits and Codes herein; (2) all maintenance costs on the areas occupied; and, (3) furnishing heat, light, power, and water used in the areas occupied without proper remuneration therefore. If prior possession or use by the PHA delays the progress of the work or causes additional expense to the Contractor, an equitable adjustment shall be made in the contract price or the time of completion, and the contract shall be modified in writing accordingly. 22. Warranty of Title The Contractor warrants good title to all materials, supplies, and equipment incorporated in the work and agrees to deliver the premises together with all improvements thereon free from any claims, liens or charges, and agrees further that neither it nor any other person, firm or corporation shall have any right to a lien upon the premises or anything appurtenant thereto. 23. Warranty of Construction (a) In addition to any other warranties in this contract, the Contractor warrants, except as provided in paragraph (j) of this clause, that work performed under this contract conforms to the contract requirements and is free of any defect in equipment, material, or workmanship performed by the Contractor or any subcontractor or supplier at any tier. This warranty shall continue for a period of One (1) Year (one year unless otherwise indicated) from the date of final acceptance of the work. If the PHA takes possession of any part of the work before final acceptance, this warranty shall continue for a period of (one year unless otherwise indicated) from the date that the PHA takes possession. (b) The Contractor shall remedy, at the Contractor s expense, any failure to conform, or any defect. In addition, the Contractor shall remedy, at the Contractor s expense, any damage to PHA-owned or controlled real or personal property when the damage is the result of (1) The Contractor s failure to conform to contract requirements; or (2) Any defects of equipment, material, workmanship or design furnished by the Contractor. (c) The Contractor shall restore any work damaged in fulfilling the terms and conditions of this clause. The Contractor s warranty with respect to work repaired or replaced will run for (one year unless otherwise indicated) from the date of repair or replacement. (d) The Contracting Officer shall notify the Contractor, in writing, within a reasonable time after the discovery of any failure, defect or damage. (e) If the Contractor fails to remedy any failure, defect, or damage within a reasonable time after receipt of notice, the PHA shall have the right to replace, repair or otherwise remedy the failure, defect, or damage at the Contractor s expense. (f) With respect to all warranties, express or implied, from subcontractors, manufacturers, or suppliers for work performed and materials furnished under this contract, the Contractor shall: (1) Obtain all warranties that would be given in normal commercial practice; (2) Require all warranties to be executed in writing, for the benefit of the PHA; and, (3) Enforce all warranties for the benefit of the PHA. (g) In the event the Contractor s warranty under paragraph (a) of this clause has expired, the PHA may bring suit at its own expense to enforce a subcontractor s, manufacturer s or supplier s warranty. Previous editions are obsolete Page 8 of 19 form HUD-5370 (11/2006) Replaces form HUD-5370-A ref Handbooks & G

69 (h) Unless a defect is caused by the negligence of the Contractor or subcontractor or supplier at any tier, the Contractor shall not be liable for the repair of any defect of material or design furnished by the PHA nor for the repair of any damage that results from any defect in PHA furnished material or design. (i) Notwithstanding any provisions herein to the contrary, the establishment of the time periods in paragraphs (a) and (c) above relate only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the work, and have no relationship to the time within which its obligation to comply with the contract may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor s liability with respect to its obligation other than specifically to correct the work. (j) This warranty shall not limit the PHA s rights under the Inspection and Acceptance of Construction clause of this contract with respect to latent defects, gross mistakes or fraud. 24. Prohibition Against Liens The Contractor is prohibited from placing a lien on the PHA s property. This prohibition shall apply to all subcontractors at any tier and all materials suppliers. Administrative Requirements 25. Contract Period The Contractor shall complete all work required under this contract within 200 calendar days per site of the effective date of the contract, or within the time schedule established in the notice to proceed issued by the Contracting Officer. 26. Order of Provisions In the event of a conflict between these General Conditions and the Specifications, the General Conditions shall prevail. In the event of a conflict between the contract and any applicable state or local law or regulation, the state or local law or regulation shall prevail; provided that such state or local law or regulation does not conflict with, or is less restrictive than applicable federal law, regulation, or Executive Order. In the event of such a conflict, applicable federal law, regulation, and Executive Order shall prevail. 27. Payments (a) The PHA shall pay the Contractor the price as provided in this contract. (b) The PHA shall make progress payments approximately every 30 days as the work proceeds, on estimates of work accomplished which meets the standards of quality established under the contract, as approved by the Contracting Officer. The PHA may, subject to written determination and approval of the Contracting Officer, make more frequent payments to contractors which are qualified small businesses. (c) Before the first progress payment under this contract, the Contractor shall furnish, in such detail as requested by the Contracting Officer, a breakdown of the total contract price showing the amount included therein for each principal category of the work, which shall substantiate the payment amount requested in order to provide a basis for determining progress payments. The breakdown shall be approved by the Contracting Officer and must be acceptable to HUD. If the contract covers more than one project, the Contractor shall furnish a separate breakdown for each. The values and quantities employed in making up this breakdown are for determining the amount of progress payments and shall not be construed as a basis for additions to or deductions from the contract price. The Contractor shall prorate its overhead and profit over the construction period of the contract. (d) The Contractor shall submit, on forms provided by the PHA, periodic estimates showing the value of the work performed during each period based upon the approved breakdown of the contract price. Such estimates shall be submitted not later than thirty (30) days in advance of the date set for payment and are subject to correction and revision as required. The estimates must be approved by the Contracting Officer with the concurrence of the Architect prior to payment. If the contract covers more than one project, the Contractor shall furnish a separate progress payment estimate for each. (e) Along with each request for progress payments and the required estimates, the Contractor shall furnish the following certification, or payment shall not be made: I hereby certify, to the best of my knowledge and belief, that: (1) The amounts requested are only for performance in accordance with the specifications, terms, and conditions of the contract; (2) Payments to subcontractors and suppliers have been made from previous payments received under the contract, and timely payments will be made from the proceeds of the payment covered by this certification, in accordance with subcontract agreements; and, (3) This request for progress payments does not include any amounts which the prime contractor intends to withhold or retain from a subcontractor or supplier in accordance with the terms and conditions of the subcontract. Name: Title: Date: (f) Except as otherwise provided in State law, the PHA shall retain ten (10) percent of the amount of progress payments until completion and acceptance of all work under the contract; except, that if upon completion of 50 percent of the work, the Contracting Officer, after consulting with the Architect, determines that the Contractor s performance and progress are satisfactory, the PHA may make the remaining payments in full for the work subsequently completed. If the Contracting Officer subsequently determines that the Contractor s performance and progress are unsatisfactory, the PHA shall reinstate the ten (10) percent (or other percentage as provided in State law) retainage until such time as the Contracting Officer determines that performance and progress are satisfactory. (g) The Contracting Officer may authorize material delivered on the site and preparatory work done to be taken into consideration when computing progress payments. Previous editions are obsolete Page 9 of 19 form HUD-5370 (11/2006) Replaces form HUD-5370-A ref Handbooks & G

70 Material delivered to the Contractor at locations other than the site may also be taken into consideration if the Contractor furnishes satisfactory evidence that (1) it has acquired title to such material; (2) the material is properly stored in a bonded warehouse, storage yard, or similar suitable place as may be approved by the Contracting Officer; (3) the material is insured to cover its full value; and (4) the material will be used to perform this contract. Before any progress payment which includes delivered material is made, the Contractor shall furnish such documentation as the Contracting Officer may require to assure the protection of the PHA s interest in such materials. The Contractor shall remain responsible for such stored material notwithstanding the transfer of title to the PHA. (h) All material and work covered by progress payments made shall, at the time of payment become the sole property of the PHA, but this shall not be construed as (1) relieving the Contractor from the sole responsibility for all material and work upon which payments have been made or the restoration of any damaged work; or, (2) waiving the right of the PHA to require the fulfillment of all of the terms of the contract. In the event the work of the Contractor has been damaged by other contractors or persons other than employees of the PHA in the course of their employment, the Contractor shall restore such damaged work without cost to the PHA and to seek redress for its damage only from those who directly caused it. (i) The PHA shall make the final payment due the Contractor under this contract after (1) completion and final acceptance of all work; and (2) presentation of release of all claims against the PHA arising by virtue of this contract, other than claims, in stated amounts, that the Contractor has specifically excepted from the operation of the release. Each such exception shall embrace no more than one claim, the basis and scope of which shall be clearly defined. The amounts for such excepted claims shall not be included in the request for final payment. A release may also be required of the assignee if the Contractor s claim to amounts payable under this contract has been assigned. (j) Prior to making any payment, the Contracting Officer may require the Contractor to furnish receipts or other evidence of payment from all persons performing work and supplying material to the Contractor, if the Contracting Officer determines such evidence is necessary to substantiate claimed costs. (k) The PHA shall not; (1) determine or adjust any claims for payment or disputes arising there under between the Contractor and its subcontractors or material suppliers; or, (2) withhold any moneys for the protection of the subcontractors or material suppliers. The failure or refusal of the PHA to withhold moneys from the Contractor shall in nowise impair the obligations of any surety or sureties under any bonds furnished under this contract. 28. Contract Modifications (a) Only the Contracting Officer has authority to modify any term or condition of this contract. Any contract modification shall be authorized in writing. (b) The Contracting Officer may modify the contract unilaterally (1) pursuant to a specific authorization stated in a contract clause (e.g., Changes); or (2) for administrative matters which do not change the rights or responsibilities of the parties (e.g., change in the PHA address). All other contract modifications shall be in the form of supplemental agreements signed by the Contractor and the Contracting Officer. (c) When a proposed modification requires the approval of HUD prior to its issuance (e.g., a change order that exceeds the PHA s approved threshold), such modification shall not be effective until the required approval is received by the PHA. 29. Changes (a) The Contracting Officer may, at any time, without notice to the sureties, by written order designated or indicated to be a change order, make changes in the work within the general scope of the contract including changes: (1) In the specifications (including drawings and designs); (2) In the method or manner of performance of the work; (3) PHA-furnished facilities, equipment, materials, services, or site; or, (4) Directing the acceleration in the performance of the work. (b) Any other written order or oral order (which, as used in this paragraph (b), includes direction, instruction, interpretation, or determination) from the Contracting Officer that causes a change shall be treated as a change order under this clause; provided, that the Contractor gives the Contracting Officer written notice stating (1) the date, circumstances and source of the order and (2) that the Contractor regards the order as a change order. (c) Except as provided in this clause, no order, statement or conduct of the Contracting Officer shall be treated as a change under this clause or entitle the Contractor to an equitable adjustment. (d) If any change under this clause causes an increase or decrease in the Contractor s cost of, or the time required for the performance of any part of the work under this contract, whether or not changed by any such order, the Contracting Officer shall make an equitable adjustment and modify the contract in writing. However, except for a adjustment based on defective specifications, no proposal for any change under paragraph (b) above shall be allowed for any costs incurred more than 20 days (5 days for oral orders) before the Contractor gives written notice as required. In the case of defective specifications for which the PHA is responsible, the equitable adjustment shall include any increased cost reasonably incurred by the Contractor in attempting to comply with the defective specifications. (e) The Contractor must assert its right to an adjustment under this clause within 30 days after (1) receipt of a written change order under paragraph (a) of this clause, or (2) the furnishing of a written notice under paragraph (b) of this clause, by submitting a written statement describing the general nature and the amount of the proposal. If the facts justify it, the Contracting Officer may extend the period for submission. The proposal may be included in the notice required under paragraph (b) above. No proposal by the Contractor for an equitable adjustment shall be allowed if asserted after final payment under this contract. (f) The Contractor s written proposal for equitable adjustment shall be submitted in the form of a lump sum proposal supported with an itemized breakdown of all increases and decreases in the contract in at least the following details: Previous editions are obsolete Page 10 of 19 form HUD-5370 (11/2006) Replaces form HUD-5370-A ref Handbooks & G

71 (1) Direct Costs. Materials (list individual items, the quantity and unit cost of each, and the aggregate cost); Transportation and delivery costs associated with materials; Labor breakdowns by hours or unit costs (identified with specific work to be performed); Construction equipment exclusively necessary for the change; Costs of preparation and/ or revision to shop drawings resulting from the change; Worker s Compensation and Public Liability Insurance; Employment taxes under FICA and FUTA; and, Bond Costs when size of change warrants revision. (2) Indirect Costs. Indirect costs may include overhead, general and administrative expenses, and fringe benefits not normally treated as direct costs. (3) Profit. The amount of profit shall be negotiated and may vary according to the nature, extent, and complexity of the work required by the change. The allowability of the direct and indirect costs shall be determined in accordance with the Contract Cost Principles and Procedures for Commercial Firms in Part 31 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation (48 CFR 1-31), as implemented by HUD Handbook , in effect on the date of this contract. The Contractor shall not be allowed a profit on the profit received by any subcontractor. Equitable adjustments for deleted work shall include a credit for profit and may include a credit for indirect costs. On proposals covering both increases and decreases in the amount of the contract, the application of indirect costs and profit shall be on the netchange in direct costs for the Contractor or subcontractor performing the work. (g) The Contractor shall include in the proposal its request for time extension (if any), and shall include sufficient information and dates to demonstrate whether and to what extent the change will delay the completion of the contract in its entirety. (h) The Contracting Officer shall act on proposals within 30 days after their receipt, or notify the Contractor of the date when such action will be taken. (i) Failure to reach an agreement on any proposal shall be a dispute under the clause entitled Disputes herein. Nothing in this clause, however, shall excuse the Contractor from proceeding with the contract as changed. (j) Except in an emergency endangering life or property, no change shall be made by the Contractor without a prior order from the Contracting Officer. 30. Suspension of Work (a) The Contracting Officer may order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay, or interrupt all or any part of the work of this contract for the period of time that the Contracting Officer determines appropriate for the convenience of the PHA. (b) If the performance of all or any part of the work is, for an unreasonable period of time, suspended, delayed, or interrupted (1) by an act of the Contracting Officer in the administration of this contract, or (2) by the Contracting Officer s failure to act within the time specified (or within a reasonable time if not specified) in this contract an adjustment shall be made for any increase in the cost of performance of the contract (excluding profit) necessarily caused by such unreasonable suspension, delay, or interruption and the contract modified in writing accordingly. However, no adjustment shall be made under this clause for any suspension, delay, or interruption to the extent that performance would have been so suspended, delayed, or interrupted by any other cause, including the fault or negligence of the Contractor or for which any equitable adjustment is provided for or excluded under any other provision of this contract. (c) A claim under this clause shall not be allowed (1) for any costs incurred more than 20 days before the Contractor shall have notified the Contracting Officer in writing of the act or failure to act involved (but this requirement shall not apply as to a claim resulting from a suspension order); and, (2) unless the claim, in an amount stated, is asserted in writing as soon as practicable after the termination of the suspension, delay, or interruption, but not later than the date of final payment under the contract. 31. Disputes (a) Claim, as used in this clause, means a written demand or written assertion by one of the contracting parties seeking, as a matter of right, the payment of money in a sum certain, the adjustment or interpretation of contract terms, or other relief arising under or relating to the contract. A claim arising under the contract, unlike a claim relating to the contract, is a claim that can be resolved under a contract clause that provides for the relief sought by the claimant. A voucher, invoice, or other routine request for payment that is not in dispute when submitted is not a claim. The submission may be converted to a claim by complying with the requirements of this clause, if it is disputed either as to liability or amount or is not acted upon in a reasonable time. (b) Except for disputes arising under the clauses entitled Labor Standards - Davis Bacon and Related Acts, herein, all disputes arising under or relating to this contract, including any claims for damages for the alleged breach thereof which are not disposed of by agreement, shall be resolved under this clause. (c) All claims by the Contractor shall be made in writing and submitted to the Contracting Officer for a written decision. A claim by the PHA against the Contractor shall be subject to a written decision by the Contracting Officer. (d) The Contracting Officer shall, within 60 (unless otherwise indicated) days after receipt of the request, decide the claim or notify the Contractor of the date by which the decision will be made. (e) The Contracting Officer s decision shall be final unless the Contractor (1) appeals in writing to a higher level in the PHA in accordance with the PHA s policy and procedures, (2) refers the appeal to an independent mediator or arbitrator, or (3) files suit in a court of competent jurisdiction. Such appeal must be made within (30 unless otherwise indicated) days after receipt of the Contracting Officer s decision. (f) The Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of this contract, pending final resolution of any request for relief, claim, appeal, or action arising under or relating to the contract, and comply with any decision of the Contracting Officer. 32. Default (a) If the Contractor refuses or fails to prosecute the work, or any separable part thereof, with the diligence that will insure its completion within the time specified in this contract, or any extension thereof, or fails to complete said work within this time, the Contracting Officer may, by written notice to the Contractor, terminate the right to Previous editions are obsolete Page 11 of 19 form HUD-5370 (11/2006) Replaces form HUD-5370-A ref Handbooks & G

72 proceed with the work (or separable part of the work) that has been delayed. In this event, the PHA may take over the work and complete it, by contract or otherwise, and may take possession of and use any materials, equipment, and plant on the work site necessary for completing the work. The Contractor and its sureties shall be liable for any damage to the PHA resulting from the Contractor s refusal or failure to complete the work within the specified time, whether or not the Contractor s right to proceed with the work is terminated. This liability includes any increased costs incurred by the PHA in completing the work. (b) The Contractor s right to proceed shall not be terminated or the Contractor charged with damages under this clause if (1) The delay in completing the work arises from unforeseeable causes beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor. Examples of such causes include (i) acts of God, or of the public enemy, (ii) acts of the PHA or other governmental entity in either its sovereign or contractual capacity, (iii) acts of another contractor in the performance of a contract with the PHA, (iv) fires, (v) floods, (vi) epidemics, (vii) quarantine restrictions, (viii) strikes, (ix) freight embargoes, (x) unusually severe weather, or (xi) delays of subcontractors or suppliers at any tier arising from unforeseeable causes beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of both the Contractor and the subcontractors or suppliers; and (2) The Contractor, within days (10 days unless otherwise indicated) from the beginning of such delay (unless extended by the Contracting Officer) notifies the Contracting Officer in writing of the causes of delay. The Contracting Officer shall ascertain the facts and the extent of the delay. If, in the judgment of the Contracting Officer, the findings of fact warrant such action, time for completing the work shall be extended by written modification to the contract. The findings of the Contracting Officer shall be reduced to a written decision which shall be subject to the provisions of the Disputes clause of this contract. (c) If, after termination of the Contractor s right to proceed, it is determined that the Contractor was not in default, or that the delay was excusable, the rights and obligations of the parties will be the same as if the termination had been for convenience of the PHA. 33. Liquidated Damages (a) If the Contractor fails to complete the work within the time specified in the contract, or any extension, as specified in the clause entitled Default of this contract, the Contractor shall pay to the PHA as liquidated damages, the sum of $ Contracting Officer insert amount] for each day of delay. If different completion dates are specified in the contract for separate parts or stages of the work, the amount of liquidated damages shall be assessed on those parts or stages which are delayed. To the extent that the Contractor s delay or nonperformance is excused under another clause in this contract, liquidated damages shall not be due the PHA. The Contractor remains liable for damages caused other than by delay. (b) If the PHA terminates the Contractor s right to proceed, the resulting damage will consist of liquidated damages until such reasonable time as may be required for final completion of the work together with any increased costs occasioned the PHA in completing the work. (c) If the PHA does not terminate the Contractor s right to proceed, the resulting damage will consist of liquidated damages until the work is completed or accepted. 34. Termination for Convenience (a) The Contracting Officer may terminate this contract in whole, or in part, whenever the Contracting Officer determines that such termination is in the best interest of the PHA. Any such termination shall be effected by delivery to the Contractor of a Notice of Termination specifying the extent to which the performance of the work under the contract is terminated, and the date upon which such termination becomes effective. (b) If the performance of the work is terminated, either in whole or in part, the PHA shall be liable to the Contractor for reasonable and proper costs resulting from such termination upon the receipt by the PHA of a properly presented claim setting out in detail: (1) the total cost of the work performed to date of termination less the total amount of contract payments made to the Contractor; (2) the cost (including reasonable profit) of settling and paying claims under subcontracts and material orders for work performed and materials and supplies delivered to the site, payment for which has not been made by the PHA to the Contractor or by the Contractor to the subcontractor or supplier; (3) the cost of preserving and protecting the work already performed until the PHA or assignee takes possession thereof or assumes responsibility therefore; (4) the actual or estimated cost of legal and accounting services reasonably necessary to prepare and present the termination claim to the PHA; and (5) an amount constituting a reasonable profit on the value of the work performed by the Contractor. (c) The Contracting Officer will act on the Contractor s claim within days (60 days unless otherwise indicated) of receipt of the Contractor s claim. (d) Any disputes with regard to this clause are expressly made subject to the provisions of the Disputes clause of this contract. 35. Assignment of Contract The Contractor shall not assign or transfer any interest in this contract; except that claims for monies due or to become due from the PHA under the contract may be assigned to a bank, trust company, or other financial institution. Such assignments of claims shall only be made with the written concurrence of the Contracting Officer. If the Contractor is a partnership, this contract shall inure to the benefit of the surviving or remaining member(s) of such partnership as approved by the Contracting Officer. 36. Insurance (a) Before commencing work, the Contractor and each subcontractor shall furnish the PHA with certificates of insurance showing the following insurance is in force and will insure all operations under the Contract: (1) Workers Compensation, in accordance with state or Territorial Workers Compensation laws. (2) Commercial General Liability with a combined single limit for bodily injury and property damage of not less than $1,000,000 Previous editions are obsolete Page 12 of 19 form HUD-5370 (11/2006) Replaces form HUD-5370-A ref Handbooks & G

73 per occurrence to protect the Contractor and each subcontractor against claims for bodily injury or death and damage to the property of others. This shall cover the use of all equipment, hoists, and vehicles on the site(s) not covered by Automobile Liability under (3) below. If the Contractor has a claimsmade policy, then the following additional requirements apply: the policy must provide a retroactive date which must be on or before the execution date of the Contract; and the extended reporting period may not be less than five years following the completion date of the Contract. (3) Automobile Liability on owned and non -owned motor vehicles used on the site(s) or in connection therewith for a combined single limit for bodily injury and property damage of not less than $500,00 [Contracting Officer insert amount] per occurrence. (b) Before commencing work, the Contractor shall furnish the PHA with a certificate of insurance evidencing that Builder s Risk (fire and extended coverage) Insurance on all work in place and/or materials stored at the building site(s), including foundations and building equipment, is in force. The Builder s Risk Insurance shall be for the benefit of the Contractor and the PHA as their interests may appear and each shall be named in the policy or policies as an insured. The Contractor in installing equipment supplied by the PHA shall carry insurance on such equipment from the time the Contractor takes possession thereof until the Contract work is accepted by the PHA. The Builder s Risk Insurance need not be carried on excavations, piers, footings, or foundations until such time as work on the superstructure is started. It need not be carried on landscape work. Policies shall furnish coverage at all times for the full cash value of all completed construction, as well as materials in place and/or stored at the site(s), whether or not partial payment has been made by the PHA. The Contractor may terminate this insurance on buildings as of the date taken over for occupancy by the PHA. The Contractor is not required to carry Builder s Risk Insurance for modernization work which does not involve structural alterations or additions and where the PHA s existing fire and extended coverage policy can be endorsed to include such work. (c) All insurance shall be carried with companies which are financially responsible and admitted to do business in the State in which the project is located. If any such insurance is due to expire during the construction period, the Contractor (including subcontractors, as applicable) shall not permit the coverage to lapse and shall furnish evidence of coverage to the Contracting Officer. All certificates of insurance, as evidence of coverage, shall provide that no coverage may be canceled or nonrenewed by the insurance company until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to the Contracting Officer. 37. Subcontracts (a) Definitions. As used in this contract - (1) Subcontract means any contract, purchase order, or other purchase agreement, including modifications and change orders to the foregoing, entered into by a subcontractor to furnish supplies, materials, equipment, and services for the performance of the prime contract or a subcontract. (2) Subcontractor means any supplier, vendor, or firm that furnishes supplies, materials, equipment, or services to or for the Contractor or another subcontractor. (b) The Contractor shall not enter into any subcontract with any subcontractor who has been temporarily denied participation in a HUD program or who has been suspended or debarred from participating in contracting programs by any agency of the United States Government or of the state in which the work under this contract is to be performed. (c) The Contractor shall be as fully responsible for the acts or omissions of its subcontractors, and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them as for the acts or omissions of persons directly employed by the Contractor. (d) The Contractor shall insert appropriate clauses in all subcontracts to bind subcontractors to the terms and conditions of this contract insofar as they are applicable to the work of subcontractors. (e) Nothing contained in this contract shall create any contractual relationship between any subcontractor and the PHA or between the subcontractor and HUD. 38. Subcontracting with Small and Minority Firms, Women s Business Enterprise, and Labor Surplus Area Firms The Contractor shall take the following steps to ensure that, whenever possible, subcontracts are awarded to small business firms, minority firms, women s business enterprises, and labor surplus area firms: (a) Placing qualified small and minority businesses and women s business enterprises on solicitation lists; (b) Ensuring that small and minority businesses and women s business enterprises are solicited whenever they are potential sources; (c) Dividing total requirements, when economically feasible, into smaller tasks or quantities to permit maximum participation by small and minority businesses and women s business enterprises; (d) Establishing delivery schedules, where the requirements of the contract permit, which encourage participation by small and minority businesses and women s business enterprises; and (e) Using the services and assistance of the U.S. Small Business Administration, the Minority Business Development Agency of the U.S. Department of Commerce, and State and local governmental small business agencies. 39. Equal Employment Opportunity During the performance of this contract, the Contractor agrees as follows: (a) The Contractor shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, sex, national origin, or handicap. (b) The Contractor shall take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, color, religion, sex, national origin, or handicap. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, (1) employment, (2) upgrading, (3) demotion, (4) transfer, (5) recruitment or recruitment advertising, (6) layoff or termination, (7) rates of pay or other forms of compensation, and (8) selection for training, including apprenticeship. Previous editions are obsolete Page 13 of 19 form HUD-5370 (11/2006) Replaces form HUD-5370-A ref Handbooks & G

74 (c) The Contractor shall post in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment the notices to be provided by the Contracting Officer that explain this clause. (d) The Contractor shall, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the Contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex, national origin, or handicap. (e) The Contractor shall send, to each labor union or representative of workers with which it has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, the notice to be provided by the Contracting Officer advising the labor union or workers representative of the Contractor s commitments under this clause, and post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment. (f) The Contractor shall comply with Executive Order 11246, as amended, and the rules, regulations, and orders of the Secretary of Labor. (g) The Contractor shall furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order 11246, as amended, Section 503 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended, and by rules, regulations, and orders of the Secretary of Labor, or pursuant thereto. The Contractor shall permit access to its books, records, and accounts by the Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules, regulations, and orders. (h) In the event of a determination that the Contractor is not in compliance with this clause or any rule, regulation, or order of the Secretary of Labor, this contract may be canceled, terminated, or suspended in whole or in part, and the Contractor may be declared ineligible for further Government contracts, or Federally assisted construction contracts under the procedures authorized in Executive Order 11246, as amended. In addition, sanctions may be imposed and remedies invoked against the Contractor as provided in Executive Order 11246, as amended, the rules, regulations, and orders of the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise provided by law. (i) The Contractor shall include the terms and conditions of this clause in every subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by the rules, regulations, or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued under Executive Order 11246, as amended, so that these terms and conditions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. The Contractor shall take such action with respect to any subcontract or purchase order as the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development or the Secretary of Labor may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions, including sanctions for noncompliance; provided that if the Contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or vendor as a result of such direction, the Contractor may request the United States to enter into the litigation to protect the interests of the United States. (j) Compliance with the requirements of this clause shall be to the maximum extent consistent with, but not in derogation of, compliance with section 7(b) of the Indian Self-Determination and Education Assistance Act and the Indian Preference clause of this contract. 40. Employment, Training, and Contracting Opportunities for Low-Income Persons, Section 3 of the Housing and Urban Development Act of (a) The work to be performed under this contract is subject to the requirements of section 3 of the Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968, as amended, 12 U.S.C. 1701u (section 3). The purpose of section 3 is to ensure that employment and other economic opportunities generated by HUD assistance or HUD-assisted projects covered by section 3, shall, to the greatest extent feasible, be directed to low- and very low-income persons, particularly persons who are recipients of HUD assistance for housing. (b) The parties to this contract agree to comply with HUD's regulations in 24 CFR Part 135, which implement section 3. As evidenced by their execution of this contract, the parties to this contract certify that they are under no contractual or other impediment that would prevent them from complying with the Part 135 regulations. (c) The contractor agrees to send to each labor organization or representative of workers with which the contractor has a collective bargaining agreement or other understanding, if any, a notice advising the labor organization or workers' representative of the contractor's commitments under this section 3 clause, and will post copies of the notice in conspicuous places at the work site where both employees and applicants for training and employment positions can see the notice. The notice shall describe the section 3 preference, shall set forth minimum number and job titles subject to hire, availability of apprenticeship and training positions, the qualifications for each; and the name and location of the person(s) taking applications for each of the positions; and the anticipated date the work shall begin. (d) The contractor agrees to include this section 3 clause in every subcontract subject to compliance with regulations in 24 CFR Part 135, and agrees to take appropriate action, as provided in an applicable provision of the subcontract or in this section 3 clause, upon a finding that the subcontractor is in violation of the regulations in 24 CFR Part 135. The contractor will not subcontract with any subcontractor where the contractor has notice or knowledge that the subcontractor has been found in violation of the regulations in 24 CFR Part 135. (e) The contractor will certify that any vacant employment positions, including training positions, that are filled (1) after the contractor is selected but before the contract is executed, and (2) with persons other than those to whom the regulations of 24 CFR Part 135 require employment opportunities to be directed, were not filled to circumvent the contractor's obligations under 24 CFR Part 135. (f) Noncompliance with HUD's regulations in 24 CFR Part 135 may result in sanctions, termination of this contract for default, and debarment or suspension from future HUD assisted contracts. (g) With respect to work performed in connection with section 3 covered Indian housing assistance, section 7(b) of the Indian Self-Determination and Education Assistance Act (25 U.S.C. 450e) also applies to the work to be performed under this contract. Section 7(b) requires that to the greatest extent feasible (i) preference and opportunities for training and employment shall be given to Indians, and (ii) preference in the award of contracts and subcontracts shall be given to Indian organizations and Indian-owned Economic Enterprises. Parties to this contract that are subject to the provisions of section 3 and section 7(b)agree to comply with section 3 to the maximum extent feasible, but not in derogation of compliance with section 7(b). Previous editions are obsolete Page 14 of 19 form HUD-5370 (11/2006) Replaces form HUD-5370-A ref Handbooks & G

75 41. Interest of Members of Congress No member of or delegate to the Congress of the United States of America shall be admitted to any share or part of this contract or to any benefit that may arise therefrom. 42. Interest of Members, Officers, or Employees and Former Members, Officers, or Employees No member, officer, or employee of the PHA, no member of the governing body of the locality in which the project is situated, no member of the governing body of the locality in which the PHA was activated, and no other public official of such locality or localities who exercises any functions or responsibilities with respect to the project, shall, during his or her tenure, or for one year thereafter, have any interest, direct or indirect, in this contract or the proceeds thereof. 43. Limitations on Payments made to Influence Certain Federal Financial Transactions (a) The Contractor agrees to comply with Section 1352 of Title 31, United States Code which prohibits the use of Federal appropriated funds to pay any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, and officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with any of the following covered Federal actions: the awarding of any Federal contract; the making of any Federal grant; the making of any Federal loan; the entering into of any cooperative agreement; or the modification of any Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement. (b) The Contractor further agrees to comply with the requirement of the Act to furnish a disclosure (OMB Standard Form LLL, Disclosure of Lobbying Activities) if any funds other than Federal appropriated funds (including profit or fee received under a covered Federal transaction) have been paid, or will be paid, to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with a Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement. 44. Royalties and Patents The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. It shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall save the PHA harmless from loss on account thereof; except that the PHA shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified and the Contractor has no reason to believe that the specified design, process, or product is an infringement. If, however, the Contractor has reason to believe that any design, process or product specified is an infringement of a patent, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Contracting Officer. Failure to give such notice shall make the Contractor responsible for resultant loss. 45. Examination and Retention of Contractor s Records (a) The PHA, HUD, or Comptroller General of the United States, or any of their duly authorized representatives shall, until 3 years after final payment under this contract, have access to and the right to examine any of the Contractor s directly pertinent books, documents, papers, or other records involving transactions related to this contract for the purpose of making audit, examination, excerpts, and transcriptions. (b) The Contractor agrees to include in first-tier subcontracts under this contract a clause substantially the same as paragraph (a) above. Subcontract, as used in this clause, excludes purchase orders not exceeding $10,000. (c) The periods of access and examination in paragraphs (a) and (b) above for records relating to (1) appeals under the Disputes clause of this contract, (2) litigation or settlement of claims arising from the performance of this contract, or (3) costs and expenses of this contract to which the PHA, HUD, or Comptroller General or any of their duly authorized representatives has taken exception shall continue until disposition of such appeals, litigation, claims, or exceptions. 46. Labor Standards - Davis-Bacon and Related Acts If the total amount of this contract exceeds $2,000, the Federal labor standards set forth in the clause below shall apply to the development or construction work to be performed under the contract. (a) Minimum Wages. (1) All laborers and mechanics employed under this contract in the development or construction of the project(s) involved will be paid unconditionally and not less often than once a week, and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions as are permitted by regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor under the Copeland Act (29 CFR Part 3)), the full amount of wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents thereof) due at time of payment computed at rates not less than those contained in the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor which is attached hereto and made a part hereof, regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between the Contractor and such laborers and mechanics. Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under Section 1(b)(2) of the Davis-Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions of 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv); also, regular contributions made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less often than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs which cover the regular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively made or incurred during such weekly period. Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits in the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed, without regard to skill, except as provided in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(4). Laborers or mechanics performing work in more than one classification may be compensated at the rate specified for each classification for the time actually worked therein; provided, that the employer s payroll records accurately set forth the time spent in each classification in which work is performed. The wage determination (including any additional classification and wage rates conformed under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(ii) and the Davis-Bacon poster (WH-1321) shall Previous editions are obsolete Page 15 of 19 form HUD-5370 (11/2006) Replaces form HUD-5370-A ref Handbooks & G

76 be posted at all times by the Contractor and its subcontractors at the site of the work in a prominent and accessible place where it can be easily seen by the workers. (2) (i) Any class of laborers or mechanics, including helpers, which is not listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under the contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. HUD shall approve an additional classification and wage rate and fringe benefits therefor only when all the following criteria have been met: (A) The work to be performed by the classification requested is not performed by a classification in the wage determination; and (B) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry; and (C) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination. (ii) If the Contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be employed in the classification (if known), or their representatives, and HUD or its designee agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by HUD or its designee to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employee Standards Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, DC The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification action within 30 days of receipt and so advise HUD or its designee or will notify HUD or its designee within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (iii) In the event the Contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the classification or their representatives, and HUD or its designee do not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate), HUD or its designee shall refer the questions, including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation of HUD or its designee, to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division for determination. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a determination within 30 days of receipt and so advise HUD or its designee or will notify HUD or its designee within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (iv) The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate) determined pursuant to subparagraphs (a)(2)(ii) or (iii) of this clause shall be paid to all workers performing work in the classification under this contract from the first day on which work is performed in classification. (3) Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the Contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof. (4) If the Contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other third person, the Contractor may consider as part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or program; provided, that the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request of the Contractor, that the applicable standards of the Davis-Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may require the Contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting of obligations under the plan or program. (b) Withholding of funds. HUD or its designee shall, upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor, withhold or cause to be withheld from the Contractor under this contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime Contractor, or any other Federally-assisted contract subject to Davis-Bacon prevailing wage requirements, which is held by the same prime Contractor, so much of the accrued payments or advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and mechanics, including apprentices, trainees, and helpers, employed by the Contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages required by the contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanic, including any apprentice, trainee, or helper, employed or working in the construction or development of the project, all or part of the wages required by the contract, HUD or its designee may, after written notice to the Contractor, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such violations have ceased. HUD or its designee may, after written notice to the Contractor, disburse such amounts withheld for and on account of the Contractor or subcontractor to the respective employees to whom they are due. (c) Payrolls and basic records. (1) Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be maintained by the Contractor during the course of the work and preserved for a period of three years thereafter for all laborers and mechanics working in the construction or development of the project. Such records shall contain the name, address, and social security number of each such worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made, and actual wages paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found, under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv), that the wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act, the Contractor shall maintain records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, that the plan or program is financially responsible, and that the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing such benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees under approved programs shall maintain written evidence of the registration of apprenticeship programs and certification of trainee programs, the registration of the apprentices and trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs. Previous editions are obsolete Page 16 of 19 form HUD-5370 (11/2006) Replaces form HUD-5370-A ref Handbooks & G

77 (2) (i) The Contractor shall submit weekly for each week in which any contract work is performed a copy of all payrolls to the Contracting Officer for transmission to HUD or its designee. The payrolls submitted shall set out accurately and completely all of the information required to be maintained under subparagraph (c)(1) of this clause. This information may be submitted in any form desired. Optional Form WH-347 (Federal Stock Number ) is available for this purpose and may be purchased from the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C The Contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all subcontractors. (Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under OMB Control Number ) (ii) Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a Statement of Compliance, signed by the Contractor or subcontractor or his or her agent who pays or supervises the payment of the persons employed under the contract and shall certify the following: (A) That the payroll for the payroll period contains the information required to be maintained under paragraph (c) (1) of this clause and that such information is correct and complete; (B) That each laborer or mechanic (including each helper, apprentice, and trainee) employed on the contract during the payroll period has been paid the full weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or indirectly, and that no deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the full wages earned, other than permissible deductions as set forth in 29 CFR Part 3; and (C) That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less than the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits or cash equivalents for the classification of work performed, as specified in the applicable wage determination incorporated into the contract. (iii) The weekly submission of a properly executed certification set forth on the reverse side of Optional Form WH-347 shall satisfy the requirements for submission of the Statement of Compliance required by subparagraph (c)(2)(ii) of this clause. (iv) The falsification of any of the above certifications may subject the Contractor or subcontractor to civil or criminal prosecution under Section 1001 of Title 18 and Section 3729 of Title 31 of the United States Code. (3) The Contractor or subcontractor shall make the records required under subparagraph (c)(1) available for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of HUD or its designee, the Contracting Officer, or the Department of Labor and shall permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job. If the Contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the required records or to make them available, HUD or its designee may, after written notice to the Contractor, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthermore, failure to submit the required records upon request or to make such records available may be grounds for debarment action pursuant to 29 CFR (d) (1) Apprentices. Apprentices will be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work they performed when they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Office of Apprenticeship and Training, Employer and Labor Services (OATELS), or with a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by OATELS, or if a person is employed in his or her first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program, who is not individually registered in the program, but who has been certified by OATELS or a State Apprenticeship Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen on the job site in any craft classification shall not be greater than the ratio permitted to the Contractor as to the entire work force under the registered program. Any worker listed on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise employed as stated in this paragraph, shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a contractor is performing construction on a project in a locality other than that in which its program is registered, the ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman s hourly rate) specified in the Contractor s or subcontractor s registered program shall be observed. Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the registered program for the apprentice s level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the apprenticeship program does not specify fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination for the applicable classification. If the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that a different practice prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be paid in accordance with that determination. In the event OATELS, or a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by OATELS, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship program, the Contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (2) Trainees. Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, trainees will not be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a program which has received prior approval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration. The ratio of trainees to journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than permitted under Previous editions are obsolete Page 17 of 19 form HUD-5370 (11/2006) Replaces form HUD-5370-A ref Handbooks & G

78 the plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration. Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the approved program for the trainee s level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed in the wage determination unless the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that there is an apprenticeship program associated with the corresponding journeyman wage rate in the wage determination which provides for less than full fringe benefits for apprentices. Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered and participating in a training plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate in the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any trainee performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate in the wage determination for the work actually performed. In the event the Employment and Training Administration withdraws approval of a training program, the Contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize trainees at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (3) Equal employment opportunity. The utilization of apprentices, trainees, and journeymen under this clause shall be in conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and 29 CFR Part 30. (e) Compliance with Copeland Act requirements. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR Part 3, which are hereby incorporated by reference in this contract. (f) Contract termination; debarment. A breach of this contract clause may be grounds for termination of the contract and for debarment as a Contractor and a subcontractor as provided in 29 CFR (g) Compliance with Davis-Bacon and related Act requirements. All rulings and interpretations of the Davis- Bacon and related Acts contained in 29 CFR Parts 1, 3, and 5 are herein incorporated by reference in this contract. (h) Disputes concerning labor standards. Disputes arising out of the labor standards provisions of this clause shall not be subject to the general disputes clause of this contract. Such disputes shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 CFR Parts 5, 6, and 7. Disputes within the meaning of this clause include disputes between the Contractor (or any of its subcontractors) and the PHA, HUD, the U.S. Department of Labor, or the employees or their representatives. (i) Certification of eligibility. (1) By entering into this contract, the Contractor certifies that neither it (nor he or she) nor any person or firm who has an interest in the Contractor s firm is a person or firm ineligible to be awarded contracts by the United States Government by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). (2) No part of this contract shall be subcontracted to any person or firm ineligible for award of a United States Government contract by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). (3) The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U. S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C (j) Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. As used in this paragraph, the terms laborers and mechanics include watchmen and guards. (1) Overtime requirements. No contractor or subcontractor contracting for any part of the contract work which may require or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics, including watchmen and guards, shall require or permit any such laborer or mechanic in any workweek in which the individual is employed on such work to work in excess of 40 hours in such workweek unless such laborer or mechanic receives compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of 40 hours in such workweek. (2) Violation; liability for unpaid wages; liquidated damages. In the event of any violation of the provisions set forth in subparagraph (j)(1) of this clause, the Contractor and any subcontractor responsible therefor shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such Contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States (in the case of work done under contract for the District of Columbia or a territory, to such District or to such territory), for liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic (including watchmen and guards) employed in violation of the provisions set forth in subparagraph (j)(1) of this clause, in the sum of $10 for each calendar day on which such individual was required or permitted to work in excess of the standard workweek of 40 hours without payment of the overtime wages required by provisions set forth in subparagraph (j)(1) of this clause. (3) Withholding for unpaid wages and liquidated damages. HUD or its designee shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld, from any moneys payable on account of work performed by the Contractor or subcontractor under any such contract or any Federal contract with the same prime Contractor, or any other Federally-assisted contract subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, which is held by the same prime Contractor, such sums as may be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such Contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages as provided in the provisions set forth in subparagraph (j)(2) of this clause. (k) Subcontracts. The Contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts all the provisions contained in this clause, and such other clauses as HUD or its designee may by appropriate instructions require, and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these provisions in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime Contractor shall be responsible for the compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with all these provisions. Previous editions are obsolete Page 18 of 19 form HUD-5370 (11/2006) Replaces form HUD-5370-A ref Handbooks & G

79 47. Non-Federal Prevailing Wage Rates (a) Any prevailing wage rate (including basic hourly rate and any fringe benefits), determined under State or tribal law to be prevailing, with respect to any employee in any trade or position employed under the contract, is inapplicable to the contract and shall not be enforced against the Contractor or any subcontractor, with respect to employees engaged under the contract whenever such non-federal prevailing wage rate exceeds: (1) The applicable wage rate determined by the Secretary of Labor pursuant to the Davis-Bacon Act (40 U.S.C et seq.) to be prevailing in the locality with respect to such trade; (b) An applicable apprentice wage rate based thereon specified in an apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. Department of Labor (DOL) or a DOLrecognized State Apprenticeship Agency; or (c) An applicable trainee wage rate based thereon specified in a DOL-certified trainee program. 48. Procurement of Recovered Materials. (a) In accordance with Section 6002 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act, as amended by the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, the Contractor shall procure items designated in guidelines of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) at 40 CFR Part 247 that contain the highest percentage of recovered materials practicable, consistent with maintaining a satisfactory level of competition. The Contractor shall procure items designated in the EPA guidelines that contain the highest percentage of recovered materials practicable unless the Contractor determines that such items: (1) are not reasonably available in a reasonable period of time; (2) fail to meet reasonable performance standards, which shall be determined on the basis of the guidelines of the National Institute of Standards and Technology, if applicable to the item; or (3) are only available at an unreasonable price. (b) Paragraph (a) of this clause shall apply to items purchased under this contract where: (1) the Contractor purchases in excess of $10,000 of the item under this contract; or (2) during the preceding Federal fiscal year, the Contractor: (i) purchased any amount of the items for use under a contract that was funded with Federal appropriations and was with a Federal agency or a State agency or agency of a political subdivision of a State; and (ii) purchased a total of in excess of $10,000 of the item both under and outside that contract. Previous editions are obsolete Page 19 of 19 form HUD-5370 (11/2006) Replaces form HUD-5370-A ref Handbooks & G

80 Certification Regarding Debarment and Suspension U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development Certification A: Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, and Other Responsibility Matters - Primary Covered Transactions 1. The prospective primary participant certifies to the best of its knowledge and belief that its principals; a. Are not presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from covered transactions by any Federal debarment or agency; b. Have not within a three-year period preceding this proposal, been convicted of or had a civil judgment rendered against them for commission of fraud or a criminal offense in connection with obtaining, attempting to obtain, or performing a public (Federal, State, or local) transaction or contract under a public transaction; violation of Federal or State antitrust statutes or commission of embezzlement, theft, forgery, bribery, falsification, or destruction of records, making false statements, or receiving stolen property; c. Are not presently indicted for or otherwise criminally or civilly charged by a governmental entity (Federal, State, or local) with commission of any of the offenses enumerated in paragraph (1)(b) of this certification; and d. Have not within a three-year period preceding this application/ proposal had one or more public transactions (Federal, State, or local) terminated for cause or default. 2. Where the prospective primary participant is unable to certify to any of the statements in this certification, such prospective participant shall attach an explanation to this proposal. Instructions for Certification (A) 1. By signing and submitting this proposal, the prospective primary participant is providing the certification set out below. 2. The inability of a person to provide the certification required below will not necessarily result in denial of participation in this covered transaction. The prospective participant shall submit an explanation of why it cannot provide the certification set out below. The certification or explanation will be considered in connection with the department or agency s determination whether to enter into this transaction. However, failure of the prospective primary participant to furnish a certification or an explanation shall disqualify such person from participation in this transaction. 3. The certification in this clause is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was place when the department or agency determined to enter into this transaction. If it is later determined that the prospective primary participant knowingly rendered an erroneous certification, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal Government, the department or agency may terminate this transaction for cause of default. 4. The prospective primary participant shall provide immediate written notice to the department or agency to whom this proposal is submitted if at any time the prospective primary participant learns that its certification was erroneous when submitted or has become erroneous by reason of changed circumstances. 5. The terms covered transaction, debarred, suspended, ineligible, lower tier covered transaction, participant, person, primary covered transaction, principal, proposal, and voluntarily excluded, as used in this clause, have the meanings set out in the Definitions and Coverage sections of the rules implementing Executive Order You may contact the department or agency to which this proposal is being submitted for assistance in obtaining a copy of these regulations. 6. The prospective primary participant agrees by submitting this proposal that, should the proposed covered transaction be entered into, it shall not knowingly enter into any lower tier covered transaction with a person who is debarred, suspended, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this covered transaction, unless authorized by the department or agency entering into this transaction. 7. The prospective primary participant further agrees by submitting this proposal that it will include the clause titled Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion - Lower Tier Covered Transaction, provided by the department or agency entering into this covered transaction, without modification, in all lower tier covered transactions and in all solicitations for lower tier covered transactions. 8. A participant in a covered transaction may rely upon a certification of a prospective participant in a lower tier covered transaction that it is not debarred, suspended, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from the covered transaction, unless it knows that the certification is erroneous. A participant may decide the method and frequency by which it determines this eligibility of its principals. Each participant may, but is not required to, check the Nonprocurement List. 9. Nothing contained in the foregoing shall be construed to require establishment of a system of records in order to render in good faith the certification required by this clause. The knowledge and information of a participant is not required to exceed that which is normally possessed by a prudent person in the ordinary course of business dealings. 10. Except for transactions authorized under paragraph (6) of these instructions, if a participant in a covered transaction knowingly enters into a lower tier covered transaction with a person who is suspended, debarred, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this transaction, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal Government, the department or agency may terminate this transaction for cause of default. Page 1 of 2 form HUD-2992 (3/98)

81 Certification B: Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion - Lower Tier Covered Transactions 1. The prospective lower tier participant certifies, by submission of this proposal, that neither it nor its principals is presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this transaction by any Federal department or agency. 2. Where the prospective lower tier participant is unable to certify to any of the statements in this certification, such prospective participant shall attach an explanation to this proposal. Instructions for Certification (B) 1. By signing and submitting this proposal, the prospective lower tier participant is providing the certification set out below. 2. The certification in this clause is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when this transaction was entered into. If it is later determined that the prospective lower tier participant knowingly rendered an erroneous certification, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal Government, the department or agency with which this transaction originated may pursue available remedies, including suspension and/or debarment. 3. The prospective lower tier participant shall provide immediate written notice to the person to which this proposal is submitted if at any time the prospective lower tier participant learns that its certification was erroneous when submitted or has become erroneous by reason of changed circumstances. 4. The terms covered transaction, debarred, suspended, ineligible, lower tier covered transaction, participant, person, primary covered transaction, principal, proposal, and voluntarily excluded, as used in this clause, have the meanings set out in the Definitions and Coverage sections of rules implementing Executive Order You may contact the person to which this proposal is submitted for assistance in obtaining a copy of these regulations. 5. The prospective lower tier participant agrees by submitting this proposal that, should the proposed covered transaction be entered into, it shall not knowingly enter into any lower tier covered transaction with a person who is debarred, suspended, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this covered transaction, unless authorized by the department or agency with which this transaction originated. 6. The prospective lower tier participant further agrees by submitting this proposal that it will include this clause titled Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion - Lower Tier Covered Transaction, without modification, in all lower tier covered transactions and in all solicitations for lower tier covered transactions. 7. A participant in a covered transaction may rely upon a certification of a prospective participant in a lower tier covered transaction that it is not debarred, suspended, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from the covered transaction, unless it knows that the certification is erroneous. A participant may decide the method and frequency by which it determines the eligibility of its principals. Each participant may, but is not required to, check the Nonprocurement List. 8. Nothing contained in the foregoing shall be construed to require establishment of a system of records in order to render in good faith the certification required by this clause. The knowledge and information of a participant is not required to exceed that which is normally possessed by a prudent person in the ordinary course of business dealings. 9. Except for transactions authorized under paragraph (5) of these instructions, if a participant in a lower covered transaction knowingly enters into a lower tier covered transaction with a person who is suspended, debarred, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this transaction, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal Government, the department or agency with which this transaction originated may pursue available remedies including suspension and/or debarment. Applicant Date Signature of Authorized Certifying Official Title Page 2 of 2 form HUD-2992 (3/98)

82 Previous Participation Certification U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development Office of Housing/Federal Housing Commissioner Part I To be completed by Principals of Multifamily Projects. See Instructions Reason for Submitting Certification For HUD HQ/FmHA use only U.S. Department of Agriculture Farmers Home Administration OMB Approval No (exp. 9/30/2009) 1. Agency Name and City where the application is filed 2. Project Name, Project Number, City and Zip Code contained in the application 3. Loan or Contract Amount 4. Number of Units or Beds 5. Section of Act 6. Type of Project (check one) Existing Rehabilitation Proposed (New) LIst of All Proposed Principal Participants 7. Names and Addresses of All Known Principals and Affiliates (people, businesses & organizations) 8. Role of Each 9. Expected % Owner 10. Social Security or IRS proposing to participate in the project described above. (list names alphabetically; last, first, middle initial) Principal in Project ship Interest in Project Employer Number Certifications: I (meaning the individual who signs as well as the corporations, partnerships or other parties listed above who certify) hereby apply to HUD or USDA-FmHA, as the case may be, for approval to participate as a principal in the role and project listed above based upon my following previous participation record and this Certification. I certify that all the statements made by me are true, complete and correct to the best of my knowledge and belief and are made in good faith, including the data contained in Schedule A and Exhibits signed by me and attached to this form. Warning: HUD will prosecute false claims and statements. Conviction may result in criminal and/ or civil penalties. (18 U.S.C. 1001, 1010, 1012; 31 U.S.C. 3729, 3802) I further certify that: 1. Schedule A contains a listing of every assisted or insured project of HUD, USDA-FmHA and State and local government housing finance agencies in which I have been or am now a principal. 2. For the period beginning 10 years prior to the date of this certification, and except as shown by me on the certification. a. No mortgage on a project listed by me has ever been in default, assigned to the Government or foreclosed, nor has mortgage relief by the mortgagee been given; b. I have not experienced defaults or noncompliances under any Conventional Contract or Turnkey Contract of Sale in connection with a public housing project; c. To the best of my knowledge, there are no unresolved findings raised as a result of HUD audits, management reviews or other Governmental investigations concerning me or my projects; d. There has not been a suspension or termination of payments under any HUD assistance contract in which I have had a legal or beneficial interest; e. I have not been convicted of a felony and am not presently, to my knowledge, the subject of a complaint or indictment charging a felony. (A felony is defined as any offense punishable by imprisonment for a term exceeding one year, but does not include any offense classified as a misdemeanor under the laws of a State and punishable by imprisonment of two years or less); f. I have not been suspended, debarred or otherwise restricted by any Department or Agency of the Federal Government or of a State Government from doing business with such Department or Agency. g. I have not defaulted on an obligation covered by a surety or performance bond and have not been the subject of a claim under an employee fidelity bond. 3. All the names of the parties, known to me to be principals in this project(s) in which I propose to participate, are listed above. 4. I am not a HUD/FmHA employee or a member of a HUD/FmHA employee's immediate household as defined in Standards of Ethical Conduct for Employees of the Executive Branch in 5 C.F.R. Part 2635 (57 FR 35006) and HUD's Standard of Conduct in 24 C.F.R. Part O and USDA's Standard of Conduct in 7 C.F.R. Part O Subpart B. 5. I am not a principal participant in an assisted or insured project as of this date on which construction has stopped for a period in excess of 20 days or which has been substantially completed for more than 90 days and documents for closing, including final cost certification have not been filed with HUD or FmHA. 6. To my knowledge I have not been found by HUD or FmHA to be in noncompliance with any applicable civil rights laws. 7. I am not a Member of Congress or a Resident Commissioner nor otherwise prohibited or limited by law from contracting with the Government of the United States of America. 8. Statements above (if any) to which I cannot certify have been deleted by striking through the words with a pen. I have initialed each deletion (if any) and have attached a true and accurate signed statement (if applicable) to explain the facts and circumstances which I think helps to qualify me as a responsible principal for participation in this project. Typed or Printed Name of Principal Signature of Principal Certification Date (mm/dd/yyyy) Area Code and Telephone No. This form was prepared by (Please print name) Previous editions are obsolete Page 1 of 2 Area Code and Telephone No. ref Handbook form HUD-2530 (5/2001)

83 Schedule A: List of Previous Projects and Section 8 Contracts. By my name below is the complete list of my previous projects and my participation history as a principal; in Multifamily Housing programs of HUD/FmHA, State, and Local Housing Finance Agencies. Note: Read and follow the instruction sheet carefully. Abbreviate where possible. Make full disclosure. Add extra sheets if you need more space. Double check for accuracy. If you have no previous projects write, by your name, "No previous participation, First Experience." 1. List each Principal's Name 2. List Previous Projects 3. List Principals' Role(s) 4. Status of Loan 5. Was Project ever in Default, 6. Last Mgmt. (give the I.D. number, project name, city location, (current, defaulted, during your participation? and/or (list in alphabetical order, & government agency involved (indicate dates participated, and assigned, or. Physical Inspctn last name first) if other than HUD) if fee or identity of interest participant) foreclosed) Yes No If "Yes," explain Rating Part II For HUD Internal Processing Only Received and checked by me for accuracy and completeness; recommend approval or transferral to Headquarters as checked below: Date (mm/dd/yyyy) Telephone Number and Area Code A. No adverse information; form HUD-2530 C. Disclosure or Certification problem approval is recommended. Staff Processing and Control B. Name match in system D. Other, our memorandum is attached. Supervisor Director of Housing / Director, Multifamily Division Approved Date (mm/dd/yyyy) Yes No Previous editions are obsolete Page 2 of 2 ref Handbook form HUD-2530 (5/2001)

84 Instructions for Completing the Previous Participation Certificate, form HUD-2530 Carefully read these instructions and the applicable regulations. A copy of those regulations published at 24 C.F.R to can be obtained from the Multifamily Housing Representative at any HUD Office. Type or print neatly in ink when filling out this form. Mark answers in all blocks of the form. If the form is not filled completely, it will delay approval of your application. Attach extra sheets as you need them. Be sure to indicate "Continued on Attachments" wherever appropriate. Sign each additional page that you attach if it refers to you or your record. If you have many projects to list (20 or more) and expect to be applying frequently for participation in HUD projects, you should consider filing a Master List. See Master List instructions below under "Instructions for Completing Schedule A." Carefully read the certification before you sign it. Any questions regarding the form or how to complete it can be answered by your HUD Office Multifamily Housing Representative. Purpose: This form provides HUD with a certified report of all previous participation in HUD multifamily housing projects by those parties making application. The information requested in this form is used by HUD to determine if you meet the standards established to ensure that all principal participants in HUD projects will honor their legal, financial and contractual obligations and are acceptable risks from the underwriting standpoint of an insurer, lender or governmental agency. HUD requires that you certify your record of previous participation in HUD/USDA-FmHA, State and Local Housing Finance Agency projects by completing and signing this form, before your project application or participation can be approved. HUD approval of your certification is a necessary precondition for your participation in the project and in the capacity that you propose. If you do not file this certification, do not furnish the information requested accurately, or do not meet established standards, HUD will not approve your certification. Note that approval of your certification does not obligate HUD to approve your project application, and it does not satisfy all other HUD program requirements relative to your qualifications. Who Must Sign and File Form HUD-2530: Form HUD-2530 must be completed and signed by all parties applying to become principal participants in HUD multifamily housing projects, including those who have no previous participation. The form must be signed and filed by all principals and their affiliates who propose participating in the HUD project. Use a separate form for each role in the project unless there is an identity of interest. Principals include all individuals, joint ventures, partnerships, corporations, trusts, nonprofit organizations, any other public or private entity, that will participate in the proposed project as a sponsor, owner, prime contractor, turnkey developer, managing agent, nursing home administrator or operator, packager, or consultant. Architects and attorneys who have any interest in the project other than an arms length fee arrangement for professional services are also considered principals by HUD. In the case of partnerships, all general partners regardless of their percentage interest and limited partners having a 25 percent or more interest in the partnership are considered principals. In the case of public or private corporations or governmental entities, principals include the president, vice president, secretary, treasurer and all other executive officers who are directly responsible to the board of directors, or any equivalent governing body, as well as all directors and each stockholder having a 10 percent or more interest in the corporation. Affiliates are defined as any person or business concern that directly or indirectly controls the policy of a principal or has the power to do so. A holding or parent corporation would be an example of an affiliate if one of its subsidiaries is a principal. Exception for Corporations All principals and affiliates must personally sign the certificate except in the following situation. When a corporation is a principal, all of its officers, directors, trustees and stockholders with 10 percent or more of the common (voting) stock need not sign personally if they all have the same record to report. The officer who is authorized to sign for the corporation or agency will list the names and title of those who elect not to sign. However, any person who has a record of participation in HUD projects that is separate from that of his or her organization must report that activity on this form and sign his or her name. The objective isfull disclosure. Exemptions The names of the following parties do not need to be listed on form HUD- 2530: Public Housing Agencies, tenants, owners of less than five condominium or cooperative units and all others whose interests were acquired by inheritance or court order. Where and When Form HUD-2530 Must Be Filed: The original of this form must be submitted to the HUD Office where your project application will be processed at the same time you file your initial project application. This form must be filed with applications for projects, or when otherwise required in the situations listed below: Projects to be financed with mortgages insured under the National Housing Act (FHA). Projects to be financed according to Section 202 of the Housing Act of 1959 (Elderly and Handicapped). Projects in which 20 percent or more of the units are to receive a subsidy as described in 24 C.F.R Purchase of a project subject to a mortgage insured or held by the Secretary of HUD. Purchase of a Secretary-owned project. Proposed substitution or addition of a principal, or principal participation in a different capacity from that previously approved for the same project. Proposed acquisition by an existing limited partner of an additional interest in a project resulting in a total interest of 25 percent or more, or proposed acquisition by a corporate stockholder of an additional interest in a project resulting in a total interest of 10 percent or more. Projects with U.S.D.A., Farmers Home Administration, or with state or local government housing finance agencies that include rental assistance under Section 8 of the Housing Act of For projects of this type, form HUD-2530 should be filed with the appropriate applications directly to those agencies. Review of Adverse Determination: If approval of your participation in a HUD project is denied, withheld, or conditionally granted on the basis of your record of previous participation, you will be notified by the HUD Office. You may request reconsideration by the HUD Review Committee. Alternatively, you may request a hearing before a Hearing Officer. Either request must be made in writing within 30 days from your receipt of the notice of determination. If you do request reconsideration by the Review Committee and the reconsideration results in an adverse determination, you may then request a hearing before a Hearing Officer. The Hearing Officer will issue a report to the Review Committee. You will be notified of the final ruling by certified mail. Specific Line Instructions: Reason for submitting this Certificatioin: e.g., refinance, management, change in ownership, transfer of physical assets, etc. Block 1: Fill in the name of the agency to which you are applying. For example: HUD Office, Farmers Home Administration District office, or the name of a State or local housing finance agency. Below that, fill in the name of the city where the office is located. Block 2: Fill in the name of the project, such as "Greenwood Apts." If the name has not yet been selected, write "Name unknown." Below that, enter the HUD contract or project identification number, the Farmers Home Administration project number, or the State or local housing finance agency project or contract number. Include all project or contract identification numbers that are relevant to the project.also enter the name of the city in which the project is located, and the ZIP Code of the site location. Block 3: Fill in the dollar amount requested in the proposed mortgage, or the annual amount of rental assistance requested. Block 4: Fill in the number of apartment units proposed, such as "40 units." For hospital projects or nursing homes, fill in the number of beds proposed, such as "100 beds." Block 5: Fill in the section of the Housing Act under which the application is filed. Block 7: Definitions of all those who are considered principals and affiliates are given above in the section titled "Who Must Sign and File..." Block 8: Beside the name of each principal, fill in the role that each will perform. The following are possible roles that the principals may perform: Sponsor, Owner, Prime Contractor, Turnkey Developer, Managing Agent, Packager, Consultant, General Partner, Limited Partner (include percentage), Executive Officer, Director, Trustee, Major Stockholder, or Nursing Home Administrator. Beside the name of each affiliate, write the name of the person or firm of affiliation, such as "Affiliate of Smith Construction Co." Previous editions are obsolete ref Handbook form HUD-2530 (5/2001)

85 Block 9: Fill in the percentage of ownership in the proposed project that each principal is expected to have. Also specify if the participant is a general or limited partner. Beside the name of those parties who will not be owners, write "None." Block 10: Fill in the Social Security Number or IRS employer number of every party listed, including affiliates. Instructions for Completing Schedule A: Be sure that Schedule A is filled-in completely, accurately and the certification is properly dated and signed, because it will serve as a legal record of your previous experience. All Multifamily Housing projects involving HUD/ FmHA, and State and local Housing Finance Agencies in which you have previously participated must be listed. Applicants are reminded that previous participation pertains to the individual principal within an entity as well as the entity itself. A newly formed company may not have previous participation, but the principals within the company may have had extensive participation and disclosure of that activity is required. To avoid duplication of disclosure, list the project and then the entities or individuals involved in that project. You may use the name or a number code to denote the entity or individual that participated. The number code can then be used in column 3 to denote role. Column 2 List the project or contract identification of each previous project.all previous projects must be included or your certification cannot be processed. Include the name of all projects, the cities in which they are located and the government agency (HUD, USDA-FmHA or State or local housing finance agency) that was involved. At the end of your list of projects, draw a straight line across the page to separate your record of projects from that of others signing this form who have a different record to report. Column 3 List the role(s) of your participation, dates participated, and if fee or identity of interest with owners. Column 4 Indicate the current status of the loan. Except for current loans, the date associated with the status is required. Loans under a workout arrangement are considered assigned. An explanation of the circumstances surrounding the status is required for all noncurrent loans. Column 5 Explain any project defaults during your participation. Column 6 Enter the latest Management and/ or Physical Inspection Review rating. If either of the ratings are below average, the report issued by HUD is required to be submitted along with the applicant's explanation of the circumstances surrounding the rating. No Previous Record: Even if you have never participated in a HUD project before, you must complete form HUD If you have no record of previous projects to list, fill in your name in column 1 of Schedule A, and write across the form by your name "No previous participation, first experience." Master List System: If you expect to file this form frequently and you have a long list of previous projects to report on Schedule A, you should consider filing a Master List. By doing so, you will avoid having to list all your previous projects each time you file a new application. To make a Master List, use form HUD On page 1, in block 1, enter (in capital letters) the words "Master List." In blocks 2 through 6 enter in "N.A." meaning Not Applicable. Complete blocks 7 through 10. In the box below the statement of certification, fill in the names of all parties who wish to file a Master List together (type or print neatly). Beside each name, every party must sign the form. In the box titled "Proposed Role," fill in "N.A." Also, fill in the date you sign the form and provide a telephone number where you can be reached during the day. No determinations will be made on these certificates. File one copy of the Master List with each HUD Office where you do business and mail one copy to the following address: HUD-2530 Master List Participation and Compliance Division Housing U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development 451 Seventh Street, S.W. Washington, D.C Once you have filed a Master List, you do not need to complete Schedule A when you submit form HUD Instead, write the name of the participant in column 1 of Schedule A and beside that write "See Master List on file." Also give the date that appears on the Master List that you submitted. Below that, report all changes and additions that have occurred since that date. Be sure to include any mortgage defaults, assignments or foreclosures not listed previously. If you have withdrawn from a project since the date the Master List was filed, be sure to name the project. Give the project identification number, the month and year your participation began and/or ended. Certification: After you have completed all other parts of form HUD-2530, including Schedule A, read the Certification carefully. In the box below the statement of certification, fill in the name of all principals and affiliates (type or print neatly). Beside the name of each principal and affiliate, each party must sign the form, with the exception in some cases of individuals associated with a corporation (see "Exception for Corporations" in the section of the instructions titled "Who Must Sign and File form HUD-2530"). Beside each signature, fill in the role of each party (the same as shown in block ). 8 In addition, each person who signs the form should fill in the date that he or she signs, as well as providing a telephone number where he or she can be reached during business hours. By providing a telephone number where you can be reached, you will help to prevent any possible delay caused by mailing and processing time in the event HUD has any questions. If you cannot certify and sign the certification as it is printed because some statements do not correctly describe your record, use a pen and strike through those parts that differ with your record, then sign and certify to that remaining part which does describe you or your record. Attach a signed letter, note or an explanation of the items you have struck out on the certification and report the facts of your correct record. Item A(2)(e) relates to felony convictions within the past 10 years. If you have been convicted of a felony within 10 years, strike out all of A(2)(e) on the certificate and attach your statement giving your explanation. A felony conviction will not necessarily cause your participation to be disapproved unless there is a criminal record or other evidence that your previous conduct or method of doing business has been such that your participation in the project would make it an unacceptable risk from the underwriting standpoint of an insurer, lender or governmental agency. The Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) is authorized to collect this information by law (42 U.S.C. 3535(d) and 24 C.F.R ) and by regulation at 24 CFR This informat is needed so that principals applying to participate in multifamily programs can become HUD-approved participants. The information you provide will enable HUD to evaluate your record with respect to established standards of performance, responsibility and eligibility. Without prior approval, a principal may not participate in a proposed or existing multifamily project. HUD uses this information to evaluate whether or not principals pose an unsatisfactory underwriting risk. The information is used to evaluate the potential principals and approve only individuals and organizations who will honor their legal, financial and contractual obligations. Privacy Act Statement: The Housing and Community Development Act of 1987, 42 U.S.C requires persons applying for a Federally-insured or guaranteed loan to furnish his/her Social Security Numbe (SSN). HUD must have your SSN for identification of your records. HUD may use your SSN for automated processing of your records and to make requests for information about you and your previous rec with other public agencies and private sector sources. HUD may disclose certain information to Federal, State and local agencies when relevant to civil, criminal, or regulatory investigations and prosecutions. It will not be otherwise disclosed or released outside of HUD, except as required and permitted by law. You must provide all of the information requested in this application, including your SSN. Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 1 hour per response, including the time for reviewing instructions, searching existing data sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information. This agency may not collect this information, and you are not required to complete this form, unless it displays a currently valid OMB control number. A response is mandatory. Failure to provide any of the information will result in your disapproval for participation in this HUD program. Previous editions are obsolete ref Handbook form HUD-2530 (5/2001)

86 CONFLICT OF INTEREST QUESTIONNAIRE For vendor or other person doing business with local governmental entity FORM CIQ This questionnaire reflects changes made to the law by H.B. 1491, 80th Leg., Regular Session. This questionnaire is being filed in accordance with Chapter 176, Local Government Code by a person who has a business relationship as defined by Section (1-a) with a local governmental entity and the person meets requirements under Section (a). By law this questionnaire must be filed with the records administrator of the local governmental entity not later than the 7th business day after the date the person becomes aware of facts that require the statement to be filed. See Section , Local Government Code. A person commits an offense if the person knowingly violates Section , Local Government Code. An offense under this section is a Class C misdemeanor. OFFICE USE ONLY Date Received 1 Name of person who has a business relationship with local governmental entity. 2 Check this box if you are filing an update to a previously filed questionnaire. (The law requires that you file an updated completed questionnaire with the appropriate filing authority not later than the 7th business day after the date the originally filed questionnaire becomes incomplete or inaccurate.) 3 Name of local government officer with whom filer has employment or business relationship. Name of Officer This section (item 3 including subp arts A, B, C & D) must be completed for each of ficer with whom the filer has an employment or other business relationship as defined by Section (1-a), Local Government Code. Attach additional pages to this Form CIQ as necessary. A. Is the local government officer named in this section receiving or likely to receive taxable income, other than investment income, from the filer of the questionnaire? Yes No B. Is the filer of the questionnaire receiving or likely to receive taxable income, other than investment income, from or at t he direction of the local government of ficer named in this section AND the t axable income is not received from the local governmental entity? Yes No C. Is the filer of this questionnaire employed by a corporation or other business entity with respect to which the local government officer serves as an of ficer or director, or holds an ownership of 10 percent or more? Yes No D. Describe each employment or business relationship with the local government officer named in this section. 4 Signature of person doing business with the governmental entity Date Adopted 06/29/2007

87 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations ATTACHMENT C PROFILE OF FIRM FORM SUBCONTRACTOR LISTING HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 52

88 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations PROFILE OF FIRM FORM (Attachment C) (This Form must be fully completed and placed under Tab No. 3 of the tabbed proposal submittal.) (1) Joint Venture Partnership Prime Sub-contractor (This form must be completed by/for each). (2) Name of Firm: Telephone: Fax: (3) Street Address, City, State, Zip: (4) Please attached a brief biography/resume of the company, including the following information: (a) Year Firm Established; (b) Year Firm Established in [JURISDICTION]; (c) Former Name and Year Established (if applicable); (d) Name of Parent Company and Date Acquired (if applicable). (5) Identify Principals/Partners in Firm (Provide resumes for each under Tab No. 3) NAME TITLE % OF OWNERSHIP (6) Identify the individual(s) that will act as project manager and any other supervisory personnel that will work on project; please submit under Tab No. 3 a brief resume for each. (Do not duplicate any resumes required above): NAME TITLE (7) Offerer s Diversity Statement: You must check all of the following that apply to the ownership of this firm and enter where provided the correct percentage (%) of ownership of each: Caucasian Public-Held Government Non-Profit American (Male) Corporation Agency Organization % % % % Resident- (RBE), Minority- (MBE), or Woman-Owned (WBE) Business Enterprise (Qualifies by virtue of 51% or more ownership and active management by one or more of the following: Resident- African Native Hispanic Asian/Pacific Hasidic Asian/Indian Owned* American American American American Jew American % % % % % % % Woman-Owned Woman-Owned Disabled Other (Specify): (MBE) (Caucasian) Veteran % % % % SWMBE Certification Number: Certified by (Agency): (NOTE: A CERTIFICATION/NUMBER NOT REQUIRED TO PROPOSE ENTER IF AVAILABLE) HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 53

89 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations PROFILE OF FIRM FORM continued (Attachment C) (This Form must be fully completed and placed under Tab No. 3 of the tabbed proposal submittal.) (8) Federal Tax ID No.: (9) City of San Antonio Business License No.: (10) State of Texas License Type and No.: (11) Has your firm or any member of your firm been a party to litigation with a public entity? If yes, when, with whom and state the circumstances and any resolution. (12) Has your firm or any member of your firm ever sued or been sued by the San Antonio Housing Authority or its affiliated entities? If yes, when and state the circumstances and any resolution of the lawsuit. (13) Has your firm or any member of your firm ever had a claim brought against because of breech of contract or nonperformance? If yes, when and state the circumstances and any resolution of the matter. (14) Debarred Statement: Has this firm, or any principal(s) ever been debarred from providing any services by the Federal Government, any state government, the State of Texas, or any local government agency within or without the State of Texas? Yes No Initials If "Yes," please attach a full detailed explanation, including dates, circumstances and current status. (15) Disclosure Statement: Does this firm or any principals thereof have any current, past personal or professional relationship with any Commissioner or Officer of SAHA? Yes No Initials If "Yes," please attach a full detailed explanation, including dates, circumstances and current status. (16) Non-Collusive Affidavit: The undersigned party submitting this proposal hereby certifies that such proposal is genuine and not collusive and that said Offerer has not colluded, conspired, connived or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any Offerer or person, to put in a sham proposal or to refrain from proposing, and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly sought by agreement or collusion, or communication or conference, with any person, to fix the proposal price of affiant or of any other Offerer, to fix overhead, profit or cost element of said proposal price, or that of any other Offerer or to secure any advantage against SAHA or any person interested in the proposed contract; and that all statements in said proposal are true. Initials (17) Verification Statement: The undersigned Offerer hereby states that by completing and submitting this form he/she is verifying that all information provided herein is, to the best of his/her knowledge, true and accurate, and agrees that if the SAHA discovers that any information entered herein is false, that shall entitle SAHA to not consider nor make award or to cancel any award with the undersigned party. Initials (18) In performing this contract, the contractor(s) shall comply with any and all applicable federal, state or local laws including but not limited to: Occupational Safety & Health, Equal Employment Opportunity, Immigration and Naturalization, The Americans with Disabilities Act, State Tax and Insurance Law, and the Fair Housing Act. Initials Signature Date Printed Name Company Seal if by Corporation HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 54

90 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations Proposed Subcontractors Item Specialty Company Name Section3/SWMBE 1 Demolition 2 Site Work 3 Concrete Supplier 4 Concrete Placement 5 Concrete Finishing 6 Drilled Piers 7 Masonry 8 Structural Steel Supplier 9 Carpentry 10 Millwork 11 Insulation 12 Roofing 13 Sealants and Caulking 14 Windows 15 Metal Doors and Frames 16 Wood Doors and Frames 17 Finish Hardware 18 Plaster 19 Ceramic Tile 20 Resilient Floors 21 Painting 22 Accessories 23 Plumbing 24 Electrical 25 HVAC I understand and agree that if awarded a contract as a result of this solicitation that the use of the above subcontractors is subject to the approval of SAHA and becomes a part of the contract. I further understand that any change in subcontractors also requires the pre-approval of SAHA. (Signature) (Printed Name & Title) (Date) Note: A completed Profile of Firm Form must be submitted for each subcontractor. HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 55

91 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations ATTACHMENT D SECTION 3 GUIDELINES AND FORMS HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 56

92 SAN ANTONIO HOUSING AUTHORITY Procurement and Contract Administration Board Resolution No and Program Plan for Compliance with Requirements of Section 3 of the Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968 (12 U.S.C. 1701u) (Section 3) Part 135 Economic Opportunities for Low- and Very Low-Income Persons. Purpose: The purpose of Section 3 of the Housing and Urban Development of 1968 (12 U.S.C. 1701u) (Section 3) is to ensure that employment and other economic and business opportunities generated by HUD Financial Assistance shall be directed to San Antonio Housing Authority (SAHA) Residents and other low- and very low-income persons, particularly those who are recipients of government housing assistance and to business concerns which provide economic opportunities to SAHA Residents and other lowand very low-income persons. General Policy Statement: It is the declared policy of the San Antonio Housing Authority (SAHA) that Equal Employment Opportunities shall be provided for every employee and applicant for employment regardless of race, color, religion, sex, national origin, handicap, or economic status; and, that through the award of contracts to contractors, vendors, and suppliers, that employment and business opportunities be created for residents of SAHA properties and other qualified low- and very low income persons residing within the geographical boundaries of City of San Antonio. This policy does not end with the mere prohibition of discriminatory practices by programs receiving HUD financial assistance or contractors, subcontractors, and vendors contracting with SAHA. SAHA recognizes its obligation as well as the obligation of potential contractors, subcontractors, to develop practical steps to achieve the goal of providing meaningful, full-time permanent employment opportunities, as well as business opportunities to SAHA Residents and other Section 3 eligible persons. Such obligation shall be demonstrated not merely through inclusion of positive or best effort steps, but shall result in a reasonable level of success in the recruitment, employment, and utilization of SAHA Residents and other Section 3 eligible persons and businesses in the workforce and subcontracting of work resulting out of the expenditure of HUD funding. The SAHA s Contracting Officer, through official resolution, shall examine and consider a contractor/vendor s success in providing employment and business opportunities to SAHA Residents prior to acting on any proposed contract award. Numerical Goals for Section 3 Compliance: Consistent with 24 CFR (c)(2), Section 3 is a federal statute that expressly encourages, to the maximum extent feasible. To that end, SAHA has adopted the following numerical goals for meeting the greatest extent feasible requirement to provide economic opportunities to section 3 Residents and Section 3 Business Concerns in the procurement and awarding of modernization-funded construction, maintenance and professional service contracts: NUMERICAL GOALS FOR SECTION 3 COMPLIANCE Areas of Focus (Applies to all contracts) Contractor and Sub-contractor Hiring (full-time, part-time, temporary, Seasonal) applies to construction and maintenance service contracts. Contract Awards (applies to construction contracts). All other Contract Awards (i.e., services, and professional services). Numerical Goal 10% 10% 3% These goals apply to all Contractors as well as any tier Sub-contractor Recipients and Contractors may demonstrate compliance with the greatest extent feasible requirement of Section 3 by meeting the numerical goals set forth in this Section 3 Program for providing training, employment, and contracting opportunities to Section 3 Residents and Section Business Concerns. Efforts to employ Section 3 Residents to the greatest extent feasible should be made at all job levels. SAHA, in its own operations, shall endeavor to achieve the goals of Section 3 and shall provide equal responsibility to its contractors, vendors and suppliers to implement progressive efforts to also attain compliance. In doing so, SAHA shall evaluate contractors compliance towards achieving the goals of Section 3 and ensure a system of leveling sanctions against contractor, vendor, or supplier for non-compliance. Section 3 Program

93 SAN ANTONIO HOUSING AUTHORITY Procurement and Contract Administration The numerical goals established above represent minimum numerical targets and all prospective contractors shall be advised and encouraged to seek Section 3 participation to the greatest extent feasible. Any contractor that meets the minimum numerical goals set forth above will be considered to have complied with the Section 3 requirements. Any contractor that does not meet the numerical goals set forth above has the burden of demonstrating why it was not feasible to meet the numerical goals. In the event no competing contractors were successful in meeting the minimum goals set forth above, SAHA shall consider documentation provided by the contractor evidencing impediments encountered despite actions taken to comply with the Section 3 requirements. Such evidence shall be subject to the satisfaction of the Authority. All contractors submitting bids/proposals to the Housing Authority shall be required to complete certifications, as appropriate, as acknowledgment of the Section 3 contracting and employment provisions as required by this selection. Such certifications shall be supported with adequate evidence to support representations made. The certifications required to be submitted with the bid/proposal consist of the following: h. Certification for business concerns seeking Section 3 preference. e. Contractor certification of efforts to fully comply with Employment and training provisions of Section 3. Prior to the award of any contract, the contractor shall enter into negotiations with SAHA for the purpose of incorporating into the contract a provision, to the greatest extent possible, hiring of Public Housing residents or other Section 3 residents to be trained or employed on the contract. Such resulting provision shall obligate the contractor toward the greatest extent possible, achieving the numerical goals listed above and shall be based on a detailed workforce analysis to be compiled by the contractor and submitted to the Authority prior to award of contract. Definitions: Annual Contributions Contract (ACC) means the contract under the U.S. Housing Act of 1937 (1937 Act) between HUD and the PHA, or between HUD and the IHA that contains the terms and conditions under which HUD assists the PHA or IHA in providing decent, safe, and sanitary housing for low-income families. The ACC must be in the form prescribed by HUD under which HUD agrees to provide assistance in the development, modernization, and/or operation of a low-income housing project under the 1937 Act, and the PHA or IHA agrees to develop, modernize and operate the project in compliance with all provisions of the ACC and the 1937 Act, and all HUD regulations and implementing requirements and procedures. Applicant means any entity which makes an application for section 3 covered assistance, and includes, but is not limited to, and State, unit of local government, public housing agency, Indian housing authority, Indian tribe, or other public body, public or private nonprofit organization, private agency or institution, mortgagor, developer, limited dividend sponsor, builder, property manager, community housing development organization (CHOO), resident manage corporation, resident council, or cooperative association. Contractor means any entity which contracts to perform work generated by the expenditure of section 3 covered assistance, or for work in connection with a section 3 covered project. Department or HUD means the Department of Housing and Urban Development, including its field offices to which authority has been delegated to perform functions under this part. Employment opportunities generated by section 3 covered assistance means all employment opportunities generated by the expenditure of section 3 covered public and Indian housing assistance (i.e., operating assistance, development assistance and modernization assistance, as described in (a) (1)). Housing development means low-income housing owned, developed, or operated by public housing agencies or Indian housing authorities in accordance with HUD s public and Indian housing program regulations codified in 24 CFR Chapter IX. HUD Youth build programs means programs that receive assistance under subtitle D of Title IV of the National Affordable Housing Act, as amended by the Housing and Community Development Act of 1992 (42 U.S.C ), and provide disadvantaged youth with opportunities of employment, education, leadership development, and training in the construction or rehabilitation of housing for homeless individuals and members of low- and very lowincome families. TPA means the Job Training Partnership Act (29 U.S.C. 1579(a)). Metropolitan area means a metropolitan statistical area (MSA), as established by the Office of Management and Budget. Section 3 Program

94 SAN ANTONIO HOUSING AUTHORITY Procurement and Contract Administration New hires mean full-time employees for permanent, temporary or seasonal employment opportunities. Other HUD programs means HUD programs, other than HUD public and Indian housing programs, that provide housing and community development assistance for section 3 covered projects, as defined in this section. Public housing resident has the meaning given this term in 24 CFR part 963. Recipient means any entity, which receives section 3 covered assistance, directly from HUD or from another recipient and includes, but is not limited to, any State, unit of local government, PHA, IHA, Indian tribe, or other public body, public or private nonprofit organization, private agency or institution, mortgagor, developer, limited dividend sponsor, builder, property manager, community housing development organization, resident management corporation, resident council, or cooperative association. Section 3 means section 3 of the Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968, as amended (12 U.S.C. 1701u). Section 3-business concern means a business concern, as defined in this section: (1) That is 51 percent or more owned by section 3 residents; or (2) Whose permanent, full-time employees include persons, at least 30 percent of whom are currently section 3 residents, or within three years of the date of first employment with the business concern were section 3 residents; or (3) That provides evidence of a commitment to subcontract in excess of 25 percent of the dollar award of all subcontracts to be awarded to business concerns that meet the qualifications set forth in paragraphs (1) or (2) in this definition of section 3 business concern. Section 3 covered assistance means: (1) Public and Indian housing development assistance provided pursuant to section 5 of the 1937 Act; (2) Public and Indian housing operating assistance provided pursuant to section 9 of the 1937 Act; (3) Public and Indian housing modernization assistance provided pursuant to section 14 of the 1937 Act. Section 3 covered contract means a contract or subcontract (including a professional service contract) awarded by a recipient or contractor for work generated by the expenditure of section 3 covered assistance, or for work arising in connection with section 3-covered project. Section 3-covered project means the construction, reconstruction, conversion, rehabilitation of housing (including reduction and abatement of lead-based paint hazards), other public construction which includes buildings, maintenance or improvements (regardless of ownership) assisted with housing or community development assistance. Section 3 resident means: (1) A public housing resident; or (2) An individual who resides in the metropolitan area or non-metropolitan county in which the section 3 covered assistance is expended, and who is: I. A low-income person, as this term is defined in section 3(b)(2) of the 1937 Act (42 U.S.C. 1437a(b)(2)). Section 3(b)(2) of the 1937 Act defines this term to mean families (including single persons) whose incomes do not exceed 80% of the median family income for the area, as determined by the Secretary, with adjustments for smaller and larger families, except that the Secretary may establish income ceilings higher or lower than 80% of the median for the area on the basis of the Secretary s findings that such variations are necessary because of prevailing levels of construction costs or unusually high or lowincome families; or II. A very low-income person, as this term is defined in section 3(b)(2) of the 1937 Act (42 U.S.C. 1437a(b)(2). Section 3(b)(2) of the 1937 Act (42 U.S.C. 1437a(b)(2) defines this term to mean families (including single persons) whose incomes do not exceed 50% of the median family income for the area, as determined by the Secretary with adjustments made for smaller or larger families, except that the Secretary may establish income ceilings higher or lower than 50% of the median for the area on the basis of the Secretary s findings that such variations are necessary because of unusually high or low family incomes. (3) A person seeking the training and employment preference provided by section 3 bears the responsibility of providing evidence (if requested) that the person is eligible for the preference. Service area means the geographical area in which the persons benefiting from the section 3-covered project reside. Subcontractor means any entity (other than a person who is an employee of the contractor) which has a contract with a contractor to undertake a portion of the contractor s obligation for the performance of work generated by the Section 3 Program

95 SAN ANTONIO HOUSING AUTHORITY Procurement and Contract Administration expenditure of section covered assistance, or arising in connection with a section 3 covered project. Section 3 joint venture means an association of business concerns, one of which qualifies as a section 3 business concern, formed by written joint venture agreement to engage in and carry out a specific business venture for which purpose the business concerns combine their efforts, resources, and skills for joint profit, but not necessarily on a continuing or permanent basis for conducting business generally, and for which the section 3 business concern: (1) Is responsible for a clearly defined portion of the work to be performed and holds management responsibilities in the joint venture; and (2) Performs at least 25% of the work and is contractually entitled to compensation proportionate to its work. Preference for Section 3 Business Concerns (Contracting) SAHA in accordance with Section 3 of the Housing and Urban development Act of 1968, requires contractors and sub-contractors (including professional service contracts) to direct their efforts towards awarding contracts to section 3 business concerns in the following order of priority and expend greatest extent feasible efforts to achieve, at minimum, the numerical goals established in this section: 1 st Priority Category 1 Section 3 Businesses Business concerns that are 51% or more owned by residents of the housing development(s) for which work is performed, or whose full-time, permanent workforce includes 30% of these persons as employees. 2 nd Priority Category 2 Section 3 Businesses Business concerns that are 51% or more owned by residents of other San Antonio Housing Authority Public Housing developments other than the development(s) where the work is performed or whose full-time permanent workforce includes 30% of these person(s) as employees. 3 rd Priority Category 3 Section 3 Businesses Business concerns that are designated HUD Youth-build programs being carried out in the City of San Antonio. 4 th Priority Category 4 Section Businesses Business concerns that are 51% or more owned by a section 3 resident(s), or whose permanent, full-time workforce includes no less than 30% Section 3 residents (category 4 businesses), or that subcontract in excess of 25% of the total amount of sub-contracts to Section 3 business concerns. A section 3-business concern seeking a contract for a sub-contract shall submit evidence to SAHA, if requested, sufficient to demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer that the business concern is responsible and has the ability to perform successfully under the terms and conditions of the proposed contract. Federal Regulations at 24CFR85.36, concerning the ability of the contractor to perform successfully, requires consideration of the contractor s record in complying with Public Policy requirements, technical capacity, financial capacity and integrity. Section 3 compliance is a matter of properly considered as part of this determination. Preference in Award of Section 3 Contracts Preference in the award of Section 3 contracts that are awarded under the sealed bid procurement process shall be provided in accordance with the following: Sealed bids shall be solicited from all businesses (Section 3 business concerns, and non-section 3 business concerns). An award will be made to the qualified Section 3 business concern with the highest priority ranking and with the lowest responsive bid, provided that bid is; A. Within the maximum total contract price established in the Authority s budget for the project for which bids are being taken. And B. It is not more than X higher than the total bid price of the lowest responsive bid from any responsive bidder. X IS DETERMINED AS FOLLOWS: When the lowest responsive bid is less than $100,000 WHEN THE LOWEST RESPONSIVE BID IS: At least $100,000, but less than $200,000 At least $200,000, but less than $300,000 At least $300,000, but less than $400,000 At least $400,000, but less than $500,000 At least $500,000, but less than $1 Million At least $1 Million, but less than $2 Million At least $2 Million, but less than $4 Million At least $4 Million, but less than $7 Million $7 Million or more X = Lesser of: 10% of that bid or $9,000 9% of that bid or $16,000 8% of that bid or $21,000 7% of that bid or $24,000 6% of that bid or $25,000 5% of that bid or $40,000 4% of that bid or $60,000 3% of that bid or $80,000 2% of that bid or $105, /2% of the lowest bid with no dollar limit Section 3 Program

96 SAN ANTONIO HOUSING AUTHORITY Procurement and Contract Administration Preference in the award of Section 3 contracts that are awarded under the competitive negotiation (qualification based) method of procurement shall be accomplished by providing an evaluation criteria specific to the Section 3 rule and assigning a value equivalent to not more than fifteen (15) percent of the total number of available rating points. Such Section 3 evaluation criteria shall be for the provision of the preference for Section 3 business concerns. Preference for Section 3 Residents (Employment & Training) SAHA, in accordance with Section 3 of the Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968, requires contractors and sub-contractors (including professional service contracts) to direct their efforts toward providing training and employment opportunities to Section 3 residents in the following order of priority and expend greatest extent feasible efforts to achieve at minimum, the numerical goals established in this section: 1 st Priority Category 1 Section 3 Residents Residents of the development for which work is performed. 2 nd Priority Category 2 Section 3 Residents Residents of other Public Housing developments outside of the development(s) where the work is performed. 3 rd Priority Category 3 Section 3 Residents Residents of the City of San Antonio who are participants in HUD Youthbuild programs being carried out in the City. 4 th Priority Category 4 Section 3 Residents Other Section 3 Residents. Certification Procedure: SAHA has its own program of self- certification for individuals and business concerns seeking recognition as a Section 3 resident or Section 3 business concern as defined in this Section 3 Program. SAHA s Procurement and Contract Administration department is charged with administering SAHA s Section 3-certification program. Any Individual or business concern seeking Section 3 preferences in the awarding of contracts or purchase agreements shall complete appropriate certification forms and provide adequate documentation as evidence of eligibility for preference under the Section 3 program. An individual or business concern may apply for certification as a Section 3 resident or Section 3 business concern either prior to bidding for SAHA work or during the actual bidding process. Any business concern that submits certification for preference after receipt of bid will not be considered eligible for Section 3 preference in the evaluation of that specific bid award. Certifications for Section 3 preference for business concerns must be received by SAHA prior to the submission of bids or along with the bid. Certifications for eligibility as a Section 3 resident may be made at any time. Individuals or business concerns seeking to file for Section 3 preference shall contact: A resident seeking preference in training and employment shall certify that he/she is a Section 3 resident by completing the appropriate certification form and attaching adequate proof of Section 3 eligibility. A business concern seeking preference in the awarding of a contract or purchase shall certify that the business concern is a Section 3 business by completing the appropriate certification form and attaching adequate proof of Section 3 eligibility as required. Protest Procedure: SAHA desires to offer to concerned parties a procedure whereby complaints alleging non-compliance with the Section 3 Statute can receive prompt and equitable hearing and resolution. Protest surrounding SAHA s Section 3 program may be submitted in writing to the Section 3 Coordinator: All complaints of non-compliance with the Section 3 Statue shall conform with the following requirements: 6. Complaints shall be filed in writing and shall contain the name, address, and phone number of the person filing the complaint, and a brief description of the alleged violation of the regulations. Complaints shall be filed within thirty (30) calendar days after the complaint becomes aware of the alleged violation. 7. An investigation as may be appropriate, will follow the filing of a complaint. The investigation will be conducted by SAHA s Section 3 Coordinator. These rules contemplate informal, but thorough investigations, affording all interested persons and their representative, if any, an opportunity to submit testimony and/or evidence as may be available and relevant to the complaint. g. Written documentation as to the validity of the complaint and a description of the findings or resolution, if any, will be issued by the Section 3 Coordinator no later than thirty (30) days after the filing of a complaint. In cases where concerned parties wish to have its complaint considered outside of SAHA, a complaint may be filed with the Assistant Secretary for Fair Housing and Equal Opportunity, Department of Housing and Urban Development, Washington, D.C., A complaint must be received no later than 180 days from the date of the action or omission upon which the complaints based, unless the time for filing is extended by the Assistant Secretary for good cause shown. Section 3 Program

97

98 Contractor's Section 3 Compliance Report For The San Antonio Housing Authority Prime Contractor: Contract No: Sub-Contractor: Sub-Contractor ID No: Address: Contract Start Date: Contract Completion Date: Telephone No: Contact Person: For Months Of: Reporting Quarter: Prime Contractor ID No: Date of Report: Contract Amount: Type of Service: Methods undertaken to achieve the employment objectives of Section 3 Compliance. (A) (B) (C) (D) No. of New Hires Job Category Total No. of Hours that are New Hires No. of New Hires that are Section 3 Residents Total No. of Hours that are Section 3 Residents No. of Section 3 Employee's and Trainees Total No. of Hours that are Section 3 Employee's and Trainees Certified this day of Totals for This Reporting Period: By: Totals from Contract Start to Date: * Total No. Of all Employees at the beginning of this Contract * Total No. Of all Employees for this Reporting Quarter * Estimated Total No. Of All Employee Hours for this Reporting Quarter Section 3 of the Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968, as amended, 12 U.S.C. 1701u., mandates that the Department ensure that employment and other economic activities generated by its housing and community development assistance programs are directed toward Low- and very low-income persons, particularly those who are recipients of government assistance for housing. The regulations are found at 24 CFR Part 135. The information will be used by the Department to monitor program recipients' compliance with Section 3, to assess the results of the Department's efforts to meet the statutory objectives of Section 3, to prepare reports to HUD, and by recipients as a self-monitoring tool. SAHA Form S b Rev. 05/03/02

99

100

101

102

103 APPLICANT SECTION 3 CERTIFICATION FORM Name: Legal Address: City: State: Zip: Phone: or fax: Position Applied For: (All applicants are required to complete and sign this form.) In general, Section 3 gives applicants whose household income in the past year was less than 80% of the area median income a preference in the hiring process so long as they are qualified for the position for which they are applying. Only those applicants who complete the disclosure and meet the Section 3 requirements will be eligible for the preference, HOWEVER, employment offers for applicants claiming a Section 3 preference will be conditional upon providing proof of eligibility at the time of hire. CAUTION: Any applicant falsely claiming a Section 3 preference will immediately be removed from consideration of employment Option 1: I choose not to disclose this information and understand that I will not be granted a Section 3 preference in the hiring process OR Option 2: I choose to disclose the following information to determine if I am eligible for a Section 3 preference (complete questions below) 1. Are you a resident of public housing or Section 8? (Check One) Yes No 2. The number of persons in my household is. 3. From the chart below, locate the number of persons in your household and enter the dollar amount from that box here. # of persons in Household % Area Median Income (FY 2009 Income Limits) $32,050 $36,600 $41,200 $45,750 $49,400 $53,050 $56,750 $60,400 Section 3 Preference Eligibility Test Yes No My legal address is within Bexar County, TX. Yes No My household income last year was equal to or less than the amount listed on Line 3. If the answers to both questions are YES, you are entitled to a Section 3 preference By signing, I certify that all of the information given above is true and accurate and that if found to be inaccurate, I understand that I may be disqualified as an applicant and/or a certified section 3 resident and may be grounds for termination of any employment or contract that resulted from this application and/or certification. Signature DATE: S3-6003b

104 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations ATTACHMENT E WAGE DECISION HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 57

105 General Decision Number: TX /04/2010 TX3 Superseded General Decision Number: TX State: Texas Construction Type: Building County: Bexar County in Texas. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family homes and apartments up to and including 4 stories). (Use current heavy & highway general wage determination for Paving & Utilities Incidental to Building Construction). Modification Number Publication Date 0 03/12/ /04/2010 ASBE /01/2009 Rates Fringes Asbestos/Insulator Worker (Includes application of all insulating materials, protective coverings, coatings, and finishings to all types of mechanical systems.)...$ BRTX /01/2009 BRICKLAYER...$ * ELEC /01/2010 Rates Fringes CABLE SPLICER...$ % ELECTRICIAN...$ % ELEC /01/2009 Rates Fringes ELECTRICIAN (Low Voltage including pulling & installing cable through conduit)... $ % ELEV /01/2010 Rates Fringes Elevator Constructor MECHANIC... $ A FOOTNOTE; A = UNDER 5 YEARS EMPLOYMENT, 6% BHR; OVER 5 YEARS EMPLOYMENT, 8% BHR. PAID HOLIDAYS : New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Friday after Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day ENGI /01/2009 Rates Fringes Power equipment operators: Cranes... $

106 IRON /01/2009 Rates Fringes IRONWORKER (Excluding metal building erectors) Structural... $ MARB /01/2005 Rates Fringes TILE SETTER... $ PLUM /01/2009 Rates Fringes Plumbers and Pipefitters (Including HVAC WORK)... $ SFTX /01/2010 Rates Fringes SPRINKLER FITTER (Fire Sprinklers)... $ SHEE /01/2009 Rates Fringes Sheet metal worker (Including HVAC Duct Work)... $ SUTX /01/1988 Rates Fringes Acoustical Ceiling Installer... $ CARPENTER (Excluding Acoustical Ceiling Installer & Drywall Hanger)... $ CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER... $ DRYWALL HANGER... $ GLAZIER... $ IRONWORKER (Excluding Metal Building Assemblers) Reinforcing... $ Laborers: Mason Tenders... $ Mortar Mixers... $ 8.99 PLASTERER'S TENDERS... $ 8.68 Unskilled... $ 7.25 LATHER... $ PAINTER (Excluding Tapers/Finishers)... $ 8.01 PLASTERER... $ Power equipment operators: Front End Loader... $ 7.36

107 Roofers: Kettlemen... $ 8.85 Roofers... $ 8.14 Waterproofers... $ 7.25 Sheet Metal Worker Other Work... $ Taper/Finisher... $ 7.99 TRUCK DRIVER... $ WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ================================================================ Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)) In the listing above, the "SU" designation means that rates listed under the identifier do not reflect collectively bargained wage and fringe benefit rates. Other designations indicate unions whose rates have been determined to be prevailing WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to:

108 Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC ) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC ) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. ================================================================ END OF GENERAL DECISION

109 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS (RFP) NO Villa Tranchese Apartments Remodeling & Renovations ATTACHMENT F TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS & OTHER DATA HOUSING AUTHORITY OF THE CITY OF SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ( ) Page 58

110

111 SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS DIVISION PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUMMARY PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES ALLOWANCES UNIT PRICES ALTERNATES ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATOR CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE SECURITY PROCEDURES QUALITY REQUIREMENTS REFERENCE STANDARDS TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS TEMPORARY UTILITIES VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS TRENCH AND EXCAVATION SAFETY PROGRAM PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING DIVISION EXISTING CONDITIONS DEMOLITION DIVISION 03 CONCRETE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE EXISTING CONCRETE FLOORS TO RECEIVE POLISHED CONCRETE FINISH DIVISION 04 MASONRY NOT USED DIVISION 05 METALS STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING METAL FABRICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS

112 DIVISION WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES ROUGH CARPENTRY ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK WOOD-VENEER PANELING DIVISION THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION METAL ROOF PANELS JOINT SEALERS DIVISION OPENINGS HOLLOW METAL FRAMES FLUSH WOOD DOORS COILING COUNTER DOORS AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS STRUCTURED POLYCARBONATE PANEL ASSEMBLIES DOOR HARDWARE GLAZING DIVISION FINISHES GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES CERAMIC TILING ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS RESILIENT FLOORING RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING REFINISHING EXISTING TERRAZZO FLOORING PAINTING AND COATING DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT NOT USED DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS WINDOW SHADES DIVISION SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT USED DIVISION CONVEYING EQUIPMENT NOT USED DIVISION FIRE SUPPRESSION NOT USED DIVISION 22 PLUMBING [SEE SEPARATE TABLE OF CONTENTS] DIVISION HEATING, VENTILATING, & AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) [SEE SEPARATE TABLE OF CONTENTS] TABLE OF CONTENTS

113 DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL [SEE SEPARATE TABLE OF CONTENTS] DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS [SEE SEPARATE TABLE OF CONTENTS] DIVISION ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY NOT USED DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK NOT USED DIVISION EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS LANDSCAPE PROTECTION DIVISION 33 UTILITIES NOT USED END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS

114

115 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Divsion 1 Specification Sections, apply to this and all other Specification Sections whether specifically referenced within the section or not PROJECT A. Project Name:SAHA Villa Tranchese Renovations. B. Owner's Name: San Antonio Housing Authority (SAHA). C. Architect's Name: OCO Architects CONTRACT DESCRIPTION A. Contract Type: A single contract with the San Antonio Housing Authority (SAHA) SCOPE OF WORK A. The SAHA Villa Tranchese Renovations project consists of interior renovation to first floor spaces totaling approximately 4,000 sq. ft. Work includes renovation of dining area, community kitchen, residents mail area and entries. Additional work includes MEP modifications and addition of airlock entry vestibules WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. Abatement: SAHA will award separate contracts for asbestos abatement if necessary. B. Separate Contract: The Owner may award separate contracts for performance of certain construction operations at the site. Those operations may be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract. C. Cooperate fully with separate contractors so that work under those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract OWNER OCCUPANCY A. SAHA intends to continue to occupy adjacent portions of the existing building during the entire construction period. B. SAHA intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial Completion. C. SAHA intends to occupy a certain portion of the Project prior to the completion date for the conduct of normal operations. D. Cooperate with SAHA to minimize conflict and to facilitate SAHA's operations. E. Schedule the Work to accommodate SAHA occupancy CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Construction Operations: Limited to areas approved by SAHA and Architect. 1. Limit use of the premises to work in areas indicated. Confine apparatus, operations of workmen and storage of materials to areas within contract phase limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of the site beyond the areas in which the Work is indicated. B. Arrange use of site and premises to allow: 1. Full Owner occupancy. 2. Work by Others. 3. Work by SAHA. SUMMARY

116 4. Use of site for the disabled. Maintain accessibility to the degree it was available prior to the start of construction activities. C. Use of the Existing Building: Maintain the existing building in a weathertight condition throughout the construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Take all precautions necessary to protect the building and its occupants during the construction period. D. Additional Requirements for Contractor's Use of Premises and Adjacent Facilities: 1. All building materials shall be stored within setback lines inside locked construction fencing. 2. All debris, trash and garbage shall be stored in enclosed containers inside locked construction fencing and shall be removed at least once a week. E. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by SAHA: 1. Required Exits: Keep required exits serving all occupied portions of the building clear and functional at all times. Where required exits must of neccessity be obstructed during actual execution of the work, provide alternate means of exiting and provide lighted exit signs as required by applicable codes and ordinances. 2. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available to the Owner, the Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site DEFINITIONS A. The Work under this Contract includes selective demolition, cutting, patching, and alterations to existing construction where required by the Contract Documents, and protection of existing construction to remain in place. 1. Requirements for cutting and patching new Work also apply to cutting and patching of existing construction. 2. Work specified in each section includes cutting, fitting, and patching for that trade, including cutting, fitting, and patching to accommodate the Work of other trades and including cutting, fitting, and patching related to existing construction. Patches and repairs shall exactly match existing adjacent Work in all visual respects and shall not be obvious as patching B. The Work under this Contract includes repair, salvage, alteration, or refabrication of indicated existing materials for reuse on the Project. 1. Reuse of existing materials shall comply with the applicable portions of the specifications as for new work. Workmanship for reuse of existing materials, not otherwise specified, shall conform to original workmanship at the time building was constructed as evidenced on similar installations still in place WORK SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULE A. Requirements for Sequence of Work or Scheduling: To the greatest extent possible, the Contractor shall coordinate the sequence of Work with the Owner's calendar. B. Work included in the Contract Documents may be scheduled at the Contractor's option, provided that the requirements of the Contract Documents are met and project is completed by the contracted date. C. The Work may begin upon issuance of a notice to proceed PRODUCTS ORDERED IN ADVANCE A. General: The Owner may negotiate purchase orders with suppliers of material and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. The Owner may assign these purchase orders to the Contractor. Costs for receiving, handling, storage, and installation will be included in the Contract Sum. 1. The Contractor's responsibilities are the same as if the Contractor negotiated the purchase orders. If necessary, the Contractor shall renegotiate purchase and execute final purchase-order agreements OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS SUMMARY

117 A. The Owner may furnish mechanical or electrical equipment, fixtures, or furniture to the Project. The Work of this contract includes providing support systems as indicated in the Contract Documents to receive Owner's equipment, and mechanical and electrical connections. 1. The Owner will arrange for and deliver necessary shop drawings, product data, and samples to the Contractor. 2. The Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner-furnished items according to the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Following delivery, the Owner will inspect items delivered for damage. 4. If Owner-furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing, the Owner will arrange for replacement. 5. The Owner will arrange for manufacturer's field services and for the delivery of manufacturer's warranties to the appropriate Contractor. 6. The Contractor shall designate delivery dates of Owner-furnished items in the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 7. The Contractor shall review shop drawings, product data, and samples and return them to the Architect noting discrepancies or problems anticipated in use of the product. 8. The Contractor is responsible for receiving, unloading, and handling Owner-furnished items at the site. 9. The Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner-furnished items from damage, including damage from exposure to the elements. The Contractor shall repair or replace items damaged as a result of his operations WORK SEQUENCE A. Coordinate construction schedule and operations with SAHA. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION SUMMARY

118 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments. B. Documentation of changes in Contract Sum and Contract Time. C. Change procedures. D. Correlation of Contractor submittals based on changes. E. Procedures for preparation and submittal of application for final payment RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Document Agreement Form: Contract Sum, retainages, payment period, monetary values of unit prices. B. Document General Conditions and Document Supplementary Conditions, HUD 5370: Additional requirements for progress payments, final payment, changes in the Work. C. Document Supplementary Conditions: Percentage allowances for's overhead and profit. D. Section Allowances: Payment procedures relating to allowances. E. Section Unit Prices: Monetary values of unit prices, payment and modification procedures relating to unit prices SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form specified; submit sample to OCO Architects for approval. B. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. C. Submit a printed schedule on AIA Form G703 - Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation Sheet. Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be considered. D. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement. E. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the specification Section. Identify site mobilization. F. Include in each line item, the amount of Allowances specified in this section. For unit cost Allowances, identify quantities taken from Contract Documents multiplied by the unit cost to achieve the total for the item. G. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment Waivers of Mechanics Lien: A. With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanics lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanics lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for the amount requested, prior to deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. Submit final Applications for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. 3. The Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, and executed in a manner, acceptable to the Owner. PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

119 1.05 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement. B. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form specified; submit sample to OCO Architects for approval. C. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. D. Form: HUD Form and including continuation sheets when required. E. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer. F. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item for portion of work performed and for stored Products. G. List each authorized Change Order as a separate line item, listing Change Order number and dollar amount as for an original item of Work. H. Submit three copies of each Application for Payment. I. Include the following with the application: 1. Construction progress schedule, revised and current as specified in Section Partial release of liens from major Subcontractors and vendors. 3. Affidavits attesting to off-site stored products. J. When OCO Architects requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Show application number and date, and line item by number and description. K. Incomplete applications will be returned without action MODIFICATION PROCEDURES A. For minor changes not involving an adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Time, OCO Architects will issue instructions. B. OCO Architects will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum or Contract Time as authorized by the Conditions of the Contract by issuing supplemental instructions on AIA Form G710. C. For other required changes, OCO Architects will issue a document instructing the contractor to proceed with the change, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. The document will describe the required changes and will designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. D. For changes for which advance pricing is desired, OCO Architects will issue a document that includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised drawings and specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change. The contractor shall prepare and submit a fixed price quotation within 14 days. E. The Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to OCO Architects, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section F. Computation of Change in Contract Amount: As specified in the Agreement and Conditions of the Contract. 1. For change requested by OCO Architects for work falling under a fixed price contract, the amount will be based on the accepted price quotation as approved by A/E and Owner. 2. For change requested by the contractor, the amount will be based on the accepted price quotation as approved by A/E and Owner. 3. For pre-determined unit prices and quantities, the amount will based on the fixed unit prices. PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

120 G. Substantiation of Costs: Provide full information required for evaluation. 1. On request, provide following data: a. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment. b. Taxes, insurance, and bonds. c. Overhead and profit. d. Justification for any change in Contract Time. e. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented. 2. Support each claim for additional costs with additional information: a. Origin and date of claim. b. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom. c. Time records and wage rates paid. d. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarly documented. 3. For Time and Material work, submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. H. Execution of Change Orders: OCO Architects will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract. I. After execution of Change Order, promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Sum. J. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub-schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit. K. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: A. Following issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment B. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. C. Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or coincide with this application include: 1. Certificate of Occupancy and similar approvals. 2. Warranties (guarantees) and maintenance agreements. 3. Record Documents. 4. Test/adjust/balance records. 5. Maintenance instructions. 6. Meter readings. 7. Startup performance reports. 8. Changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 9. Final cleaning. 10. Advice on shifting insurance coverages. 11. List of incomplete Work (punch list), recognized as exceptions to Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT A. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. B. Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been accomplished: 1. All closeout procedures specified in Section Completion of items specifed for completion after Substantial Completion. 3. Ensure that unsettled claims will be settled. 4. Ensure that incomplete Work is not accepted and will be completed without undue delay. 5. Transmittal of required Project construction records to the Owner. 6. Proof that taxes, fees and similar obligations were paid. 7. Removal of temporary facilities and services. 8. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish and similar elements. PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

121 9. Change of door locks to Owner's access. 10. SAHA requirements for final payment have been completed. END OF SECTION PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

122 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cash allowances. B. Inspecting and testing allowances. SECTION ALLOWANCES C. Payment and modification procedures relating to allowances RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section Price and Payment Procedures: Additional payment and modification procedures COSTS INCLUDED IN ALLOWANCES A. Cost of product to Contractor or Subcontractor, less applicable trade discounts. B. Delivery to site. C. Labor required under allowance, only when labor is specified to be included. D. Applicable taxes CONTRACTOR COSTS INCLUDED IN CONTRACT SUM A. Products handling at site, including unloading, uncrating, and storage. B. Protection of products from elements and from damage. C. Labor for installation and finishing, except when installation is specified as part of allowance. D. Other expenses required to complete installation. E. Contractor overhead and profit ALLOWANCES A. OCO Architects Responsibilities: 1. Consult with for consideration and selection of products, suppliers, and installers. 2. Select products in consultation with SAHA and transmit decision to. 3. Prepare Change Order. B. Responsibilities: 1. Assist OCO Architects in selection of products, suppliers, and installers. 2. Obtain proposals from suppliers and installers and offer recommendations. 3. On notification of which products have been selected, execute purchase agreement with designated supplier and installer. 4. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data, and samples. Arrange for delivery. 5. Promptly inspect products upon delivery for completeness, damage, and defects. Submit claims for transportation damage. 6. Install, adjust and finish products 7. Provide warranties for prodcuts and installations. 8. Verify actual costs incurred for final Change Order to adjust Contract Amount before Contract close out CORRELATION WITH CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Schedule shop drawings, product data, samples, and delivery dates, in Construction Schedule for products selected under allowances ALLOWANCES WITH A NOT TO EXCEED PRICE ALLOWANCES

123 A. Contractor's costs for products, delivery, installation, labor, insurance, payroll, taxes, bonding, equipment rental, overhead and profit will be included in Change Orders authorizing expenditure of funds from this Allowance. B. At closeout of Contract, funds remaining in Allowances will be credited to Owner by Change Order BETTERMENT ALLOWANCE A. Contractor's costs for products, delivery, installation, labor, insurance, payroll, taxes, bonding, equipment rental, overhead and profit will be included in Change Orders authorizing expenditure of funds from this Betterment Allowance. B. Use the Betterment allowance only as directed for the Owner's purposes and only by Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance. C. At closeout of Contract, funds remaining in Betterment Allowance will be credited to Owner by Change Order INSPECTING AND TESTING ALLOWANCES A. Costs Included in Inspecting and Testing Allowances: Cost of engaging an inspecting or testing agency; execution of inspecting and tests; and reporting results. B. Costs Not Included in the Inspecting and Testing Allowances: 1. Costs of incidental labor and facilities required to assist inspecting or testing agency. 2. Costs of testing services used by separate from Contract Document requirements. 3. Costs of retesting upon failure of previous tests as determined by OCO Architects UNUSED MATERIALS A. Return unused materials to the manufacturer or supplier for credit to the Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted. 1. When requested by the Architect, prepare unused material for storage by Owner where it is not economically practical to return the material for credit. When directed by the Architect, deliver unused material to the Owner's storage space. Otherwise, disposal of unused material is the Contractor's responsibility. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION ALLOWANCES

124 PART 1 GENERAL SECTION UNIT PRICES 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices SECTION INCLUDES A. Measurement and payment criteria applicable to Work performed under a unit price payment method. B. Defect assessment and non-payment for rejected work COSTS INCLUDED A. Unit Prices included on the Bid Form shall include full compensation for all required labor, products, tools, equipment, plant, transportation, services and incidentals; erection, application or installation of an item of the Work; overhead and profit UNIT QUANTITIES SPECIFIED A. Quantities indicated in the Bid Form are for bidding and contract purposes only. Quantities and measurements of actual Work will determine the payment amount MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES A. Measurement methods delineated in the individual specification sections complement the criteria of this section. In the event of conflict, the requirements of the individual specification section govern. B. Take all measurements and compute quantities. Measurements and quantities will be verified by OCO Architects. C. Assist by providing necessary equipment, workers, and survey personnel as required PAYMENT A. Payment for Work governed by unit prices will be made on the basis of the actual measurements and quantities of Work that is incorporated in or made necessary by the Work and accepted by the OCO Architects, multiplied by the unit price DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of OCO Architects, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, OCO Architects will direct one of the following remedies: 1. The defective Work may remain, but the unit price will be adjusted to a new unit price at the discretion of OCO Architects. 2. The defective Work will be partially repaired to the instructions of the OCO Architects, and the unit price will be adjusted to a new unit price at the discretion of OCO Architects. C. The individual specification sections may modify these options or may identify a specific formula or percentage price reduction. D. The authority of OCO Architects to assess the defect and identify payment adjustment is final. E. Schedule: A "Unit Price Schedule" will be developed jointly with the Owner and the Architects as recommended by the Construction Manager. Specification Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price. UNIT PRICES

125 1.09 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES A. Unit Price No. 1: Refinishing of terrazzo flooring; $ per square foot. B. Unit Price No. 2: Provide and install resilient vinyl flooring designated RV; $ per square foot. C. Unit Price No. 3: Provide and install acoustical suspended ceiling system; $ square foot. D. Unit Price No 4: provide and install and finish wood wall paneling; $ 7' tall per lineal foot. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION UNIT PRICES

126 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures for pricing alternates. SECTION ALTERNATES B. Documentation of changes to Contract Sum and Contract Time ACCEPTANCE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at SAHA's option. Accepted alternates will be identified in the Owner-Contractor Agreement. B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate the Work of each alternate DEFINITIONS A. Definition: An alternate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate the Alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent Work as necessary to completely and fully integrate that Work into the Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the Alternate. 2. Include as part of each alternate, costs coordination, modification, and/or adjustment to accommodate the accepted alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following the award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate whether alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other Work of this Contract SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternative No. 1 - DEDUCT - Plastic laminate covered plywood kitchen counters in lieu of Solid Surfacing Material. B. Alternative No. 2 - DEDUCT - VCT in lieu of Resilient Vinyl flooring, designated RV. C. Alternative No. 3 - DEDUCT - Delete refinishing of Terazzo flooring PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION ALTERNATES

127 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preconstruction meeting. B. Progress meetings. C. Progress photographs. D. Coordination drawings. SECTION ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS E. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout. F. Number of copies of submittals. G. Submittal procedures RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section Summary: Stages of the Work, Work covered by each contract, occupancy,. B. Section Construction Progress Schedule: Form, content, and administration of schedules. C. Section Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination requirements. D. Section Closeout Submittals: Project record documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. SAHA and O'Neill Conrad Oppelt Architects, Inc. will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award. B. Attendance Required: 1. SAHA. 2. OCO Architects. 3. Contractor with key personnel. C. Agenda: 1. Execution of SAHA- Agreement. 2. Distribution and discussion of SAHA requirements. 3. Contractor's safety procedures. 4. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 5. Distribution of Contract Documents. 6. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, schedule of values, and progress schedule. 7. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract, and OCO Architects. 8. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract, SAHA and OCO Architects. 9. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 10. Scheduling. D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with copies to OCO Architects, SAHA, participants, and those affected by decisions made PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at regular intervals. B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

128 C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and supplier, SAHA, OCO Architects and consultants, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Other business relating to Work. E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with copies to OCO Architects, SAHA, participants, and those affected by decisions made CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days. B. Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete schedule for review. 1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed schedule. C. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule. D. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. E. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS A. Photography Type: Digital; electronic files. B. Take photographs as evidence of existing project conditions. C. Digital Photographs: 24 bit color, minimum resolution of 1024 by 768, in JPG format; provide files unaltered by photo editing software. 1. Delivery Medium: Via File Naming: Include project identification, date and time of view, and view identification. 3. PDF File: Assemble all photos into printable pages in PDF format, with 2 to 3 photos per page, each photo labeled with file name; one PDF file per submittal COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Provide information required by Project Coordinator for preparation of coordination drawings. B. Review drawings prior to submission to OCO Architects SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: 1. Product data. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Samples for selection. 4. Samples for verification. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

129 B. Submit to OCO Architects for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article below and for record documents purposes described in Section CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information: 1. Design data. 2. Certificates. 3. Test reports. 4. Inspection reports. 5. Manufacturer's instructions. 6. Manufacturer's field reports. 7. Other types indicated. B. Submit for OCO Architects's knowledge as contract administrator or for SAHA. No action will be taken SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout: 1. Project record documents. 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Warranties. 4. Bonds. 5. Video recorded training sessions on DVD format. 6. Other types as indicated. B. Submit for SAHA's benefit during and after project completion NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS A. Documents for Review: 1. Small Size Sheets, Not Larger Than 8-1/2 x 11 inches: Submit the number of copies which the contractor requires, plus three copies which will be retained by the OCO Architects, Owner and consultants. 2. Larger Sheets, Not Larger Than 36 x 48 inches: Submit one reproducible transparency and three opaque reproductions. Only the transparency will be returned, Contractor shall make his own copies from the original. B. Documents for Information: Submit three copies. C. Documents for Project Closeout: Make two reproduction of submittal originally reviewed. Submit one extra of submittals for information. D. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be retained by OCO Architects and one which will be retained by Owner. 1. After review, produce duplicates. 2. Retained samples will not be returned to unless specifically so stated SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Transmit each submittal with approved form. B. Submittals to be numbered by specification division and by sequential suffix. C. Re-submittals to be named with original number and a sequential alphabetic suffix. D. Identify Project, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate on each copy. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

130 E. Apply's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. F. Submittals not reviewed by the Contractor will be rejected. G. Deliver submittals to OCO Architects at business address. H. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items. I. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. J. Provide space for and OCO Architects review stamps. K. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission. L. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements. M. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed ARCHITECT/ENGINEERS' REVIEW A. Architect/Engineer will review submittal and mark with comments as noted in 3.10 B, C, D or E. When possible, architect will return submittal within two (2) weeks of receipt of submittal and within three (3) weeks for submittals requiring engineer or other consultant review. Where submittal must be held for coordination, architect/engineer will process submittal as soon as possible after all coordination information and material is provided by contractor. NOTE: CONTRACTOR SHALL HOLD ALL COLOR SELECTION SUBMITTALS UNTIL CONTRACTOR CAN SUBMIT ALL COLOR SUBMITTALS AS A PACKAGE FOR ARCHITECT TO PROCESS. A COLOR BOARD PRESENTATION WIL THEN BE PREPARED BY ARCHITECT FOR OWNER'S REVIEW AND APPROVAL; ALLOW SIX (6) WEEKS FOR THIS PROCESS. B. Marking "Reviewed. No exceptions Noted": Work may proceed provided it complies with contract documents. C. Marking "Reviewed. Exceptions Noted": Work mayh proceed provided it complies with notations and corrections on submittal and with contract documents. D. Marking "Rejected. Returned for Resubmittal": Do not proceed with work. Revise submittal in accordance with contract documents and resubmit without delay to obtain a different marking. Do not allow these submittals to be used in connection with performance of the work ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. Except for submittals for the record or information, where action and return is required, the Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly. 1. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility. B. Where a submittal is for information, record purposes, special procesing or other activity, the Architect will return the submittal marked "Action Not Required". C. Unsolicited Submittals: The Architect will return unsolicited submittals to the sender witnout action. END OF SECTION ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

131 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATOR A. Services of a coordinator for facility services construction. B. Coordination documents RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section Summary: Responsibilities of separate contractors. B. Section Administrative Requirements: Additional requirements for coordination. C. Section Product Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance materials. D. Section Execution and Closeout Requirements: Starting of Systems. Systems Demonstration. E. Section Closeout Submittals: Project record documents MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATOR A. Employ and pay for services of a person, technically qualified and administratively experienced in field coordination of the type of work required to be coordinated, for the duration of the Work SUBMITTALS A. Submit name, address, and telephone number of coordinator and name of principal officer for review CONTRACT DRAWINGS A. The Drawings are schematic in nature, and do not show every connection in detail or every pipe or conduit in its exact location. The Drawings indicate how the various components are integrated with other parts of the building. B. Determine exact locations by job measurement, by determining and verifying the requirements of other trades, and by review of Contract Documents. Coordination installation of work for proper fit to the building structure and to accommodate the work of all trades. Verify all dimensions and working conditions in the field. Advise the Architect of any discrepancy before performing any work. Adjust the work as required in order to facilitate coordinated installation at no additional cost to the Owner, Architect or Engineer. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for fitting his material and apparatus into the building and shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the structural conditions, to avoid all obstructions, to comply with Codes, to facilitate the work of other trades, to conform to the details of the installation supplied by the manufacturer of the equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an integrated satisfactory operating installation. D. The Drawings indicate general routing of the various parts of the systems, but do not indicate all sizes, fittings, offsets, and runouts which are required. Provide correct sizes, fittings, offsets, and runouts required to fit the system into spaces allocated to them. E. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to provide an installation complete in every respect. In the event that additional details or special construction may be required for work indicated or required, provide such work, material and equipment usually furnished with such systems or required to complete the installation, whether mentioned or not. MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATOR

132 F. The Contractor shall be responsible for fitting his material and apparatus into the building and shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the structural conditions, to avoid all obstructions, to comply with Codes, to facilitate the work of other trades, to conform to the details of the installation supplied by the manufacturer of the equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an integrated satisfactory operating installation. G. The Contractor shall carefully investigate structural and finish conditions and shall coordinate the separate trades in order to avoid interference between the various phases of work. Work shall be laid out so that it will be concealed in furred chases and above suspended ceilings, etc., in finished portions of the building, unless specifically noted to be exposed. Work shall be installed to avoid crippling of structural members; therefore, inserts to accommodate hangers shall be set before concrete is poured, and proper openings through floor, walls, beams, etc., shall be provided as hereinafter specified or as otherwise indicated or required. All work shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building unless otherwise noted. H. When the mechanical and electrical drawings do not give exact details as to the elevation of pipe, conduit and ducts, physically arrange the systems to fit in the space available at the elevations intended with the proper grades for the functioning of the system involved. Piping, exposed conduit and the duct systems are generally intended to be installed true and square to the building construction, and located as high as possible against the structure in a neat and workmanlike manner. The plans do not show all required offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other location details. Work shall be concealed in all finished areas. Piping specified to be insulated shall be supported in a manner that will allow the insulation to be installed without gaps. Insulated piping in concealed areas shall be offset with fittings as necessary to permit installation of insulation. Bending of pipes or installing pipes in a strain to insulate will not be permitted. I. Locate oiling devices and other parts of equipment requiring adjustment to be easily accessible. Locate and install equipment to permit convenient and safe maintenance and future replacement. Do not block service space with piping, conduit, valve stems, etc. The trade furnishing the equipment shall be responsible for notifying the Contractor, who shall notify the Owner's Representative prior to ordering same in the event that equipment specified and/or proposed is incompatible with this requirement. J. Location of Outlets in Rooms: 1. All plumbing, acoustical tile, modular lighting outlets, diffusers, sprinkler heads, grilles, registers, and other devices shall be referenced to coordinated, established data points and shall be located to present symmetrical arrangements with these points and to facilitate the proper arrangements of acoustical tile panels and other similar panels with respect to the mechanical and electrical outlets and devices. Those mechanical and electrical outlets shall be referenced to such features as wall and ceiling furrings, balanced border widths, masonry joints, etc. Locate outlets in acoustical tile symmetrically in tile joints or in the centers of whole tiles. The final determination of the exact location of each outlet and the arrangements to be followed shall be acceptable to the Owner's Representative. 2. The drawings show diagrammatically the locations of the various outlets and apparatus. Exact locations of these outlets and apparatus shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing-in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with the other trades. The Architect reserves the right to make any reasonable change in location of any outlet or apparatus before installation, without additional cost to the Owner or the Architect COORDINATION SUBMITTALS A. Conform to the requirements of Section Submittals. B. Review shop drawings, product data, and samples for compliance with Contract Documents and for coordination among work of all sections of the Project Manual. Transmit to Contractor for review, then transmit to Architect. C. Check field dimensions and clearances and relationship to available space and anchors. MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATOR

133 D. Check compatibility with equipment and Work of other sections, electrical characteristics, and operational control requirements. E. Check motor voltages and control characteristics. F. Coordinate controls, interlocks, and relays. G. Coordinate wiring and control diagrams. H. Review the effect of any changes on work of other sections. I. Equipment and material submittals shall show sufficient data to indicate complete compliance with Contract Documents as follows: 1. Proper sizes and capabilities. 2. Ability to fit in the available space in a manner that will allow proper service. 3. Construction methods, materials, and finishes. 4. List of accessories. J. Product data shall include the contract item designation, building, and proposed model number. K. If proposed air devices are different than models specified, indicate the specified model and beside it the proposed model for each type of device. Do not list quantities. L. For any item to be installed in or on a finished surface (such as tee bar, acoustical ceiling, plaster wall) certify that applicable Contract Documents have been checked and that the item submitted is compatible with the surface finish on which it is to be installed. M. All Submittals shall be bound into three ring binders with hard plastic covers, with a table of contents listing all items in that specific submittal. Loose catalog sheets or drawings will not be acceptable. A separate submittal will be required for each type of equipment; e.g., lighting fixtures, switchgear, lighting panels, mechanical equipment, plumbing items, and ductwork accessories, each in a separate brochure. Miscellaneous apparatuses such as transformers, contactors, time switches, and safety switches may be contained in one submittal. N. Auxiliary system submittals shall contain sufficient information to show conformance with the specifications and shall include a description of the operation of each system to aid the consultant in the evaluation of each submittal. O. Verify and coordinate maintenance of Record Documents COORDINATION DOCUMENTS A. Shop Drawings: Sheetmetal, piping, mechanical, and electrical fabrication Shop Drawings shall show equipment, ductwork, and piping, including piping in plumbing chases, sized and drawn in exact location to be installed. Produce Drawings at 1/4 inch scale with all ductwork and piping sized accordingly. Ductwork and piping larger than 3 inches shall be shown with double lines. B. Coordination Drawings: 1. Coordination Drawings are Drawings which indicate relationships between the various systems and other components of the building such as beams, columns, ceilings, foundations, and walls. Draw components to scale and include plans, elevations, sections, and other details as required to clearly define the relationships of the various components. Indicate ducts, conduits, sprinkler systems, light fixtures, piping, and miscellaneous equipment on one Drawing for each floor or level. Refer to Mechanical and Electrical Specifications for additional requirements. 2. Prepare coordination drawings to organize installation of Products for efficient use of available space, for proper sequence of installation, clearances for servicing equipment including space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance and major component removal, and to identify potential conflicts. Include penetrations through weatherproof surfaces and foundations, fire-rated walls and floors, and sizes and locations of required concrete pads and bases. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment during construction. 3. Prepare a master schedule to identify responsibilities under each section of Divisions 1 through MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATOR

134 16 of the Specifications for activities which directly relate to this work, including submittals and temporary utilities. Identify electrical power characteristics and control wiring required for each item of equipment. 4. Maintain documents for the duration of the Work, recording changes due to site instructions, modifications or adjustments. 5. After Architect/Engineer review of original and revised documents, reproduce and distribute copies to concerned parties. C. Interference Drawings: 1. Interference Drawings are supplementary to Coordination Drawings and indicate conflict between the various systems and other components of the building such as beams, columns, and walls. They shall be drawn to large scale and shall include plans, elevations, sections, and other details as required to clearly define the interference and to indicate the Contractor's proposed solution. 2. Submit Drawings for approval whenever job measurements and an analysis of the Drawings and specifications by the Contractor indicate that the various systems cannot be installed without significant deviation from the intent of the Contract. When such an interference is encountered, Work shall cease in the general areas of the conflict until a solution to the question has been approved by the Architect/Engineer OPERATING MANUALS, SERVICE DATA, AND WARRANTIES A. Upon completion of the project, provide three copies of service manual for each type unit of equipment. Bind manuals in three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers. B. Prepare binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. C. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. D. Contents: 1. Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system description identified, type on 30 pound white paper. 2. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 3. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: 4. Significant design criteria. 5. List of equipment. 6. Wiring diagrams for electrical items and components. 7. Parts list for each component. Identify each major part of the unit by the manufacturer's part number. 8. Operating instructions. 9. Information required for performing periodic minor and major maintenance on the equipment and systems. 10. Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. 11. List of necessary service parts and equipment for maintenance. 12. Separate spare parts list stating the estimated quantities of spare parts normally required to service the equipment for a period of one year. 13. Manufacturer's catalogs containing optional accessory items available for the equipment. 14. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: a. Shop drawings and product data. b. Air and water balance reports. c. Certificates. d. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATOR

135 E. Warranties: In addition to the one year warranty specified in the Conditions of the Contract, assume all responsibility for special guarantees which may be required concerning installation, operation or performance of equipment, materials, and systems provided by a distributor, manufacturer or subcontractor OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. At the completion of the Project, arrange and conduct instructional classes on the mechanical, electrical, and plumbing systems for the Owner's operating personnel. The instruction shall be categorized into layout and orientation, operation, and maintenance of each system. B. Reference operating manuals, illustrating were operating instructions, trouble shooting instructions, service data, and warranties are filed MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS AND SUPERVISION A. Follow manufacturer's directions for installation, testing, and operation of all apparatuses and equipment provided. B. Where supervision by a manufacturer is required in the specification, pay all costs and follow all instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer, who shall supervise the installation, connection, startup adjustment, instruction of the Owner, and final tests of equipment and systems. Where two or more manufacturer's equipment is interrelated, coordinate the Work and supervision. C. Provide a letter from the manufacturers whose supervision is required stating that they have supervised the installation and their equipment or system is operating satisfactorily in detail and in every respect and that the Owner's representative has been instructed in the operation and maintenance REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT A. Provide equipment with necessary parts and accessories required for proper installation and operation even though the parts and accessories are not specifically mentioned herein. B. Provide a factory applied finish on all exterior surfaces. Touch up or refinish items which have the finish marred, before final acceptance. C. Rotating parts shall be in static and dynamic balance. D. Electrical materials shall bear the stamp of approval of the Underwriter's Laboratory. E. Noise: Eliminate any abnormal noises, which are not an inherent part of the systems as designed. Abnormal buzzing and rattling of equipment, piping, ducts, and air devices and squeaks in rotating equipment components are not acceptable PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT A. Do not deliver equipment to jobsite until progress of construction has reached the stage where equipment is actually needed, or until equipment can be stored inside building to protect equipment from the weather. Equipment allowed to stand in weather will be rejected, and new equipment of a like kind shall be provided. B. Adequately protect equipment from damage after delivery to job site. Cover with heavy tarps or drop cloths as required to protect from plaster, dirt, paint, water, adverse environmental conditions, and physical damage. C. Equipment which has been damaged by construction activities will be rejected, and new equipment of a like kind shall be provided. D. At time of Substantial Completion, equipment and filters shall be clean. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATOR

136 3.01 COORDINATION REQUIRED A. Coordinate the work listed below: 1. Fire Suppression: Division Plumbing: Division Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning: Division Electrical: Division Communications: Division Electronic Safety and Security: Division Site Utilities: Division 33. B. Coordinate progress schedules, including dates for submittals and for delivery of products. C. Conduct meetings among Subcontractors and others concerned, to establish and maintain coordination and schedules, and to resolve coordination matters in dispute. D. Participate in progress meetings. Report on progress of work to be adjusted under coordination requirements, and any required changes in schedules. Transmit minutes of meetings and reports to concerned parties COORDINATION A. Coordinate the mechanical and electrical Work with that of other trades in order that the various components of the systems shall be installed at the proper time, shall fit the available space, and shall allow proper service access to those requiring maintenance, including equipment specified in other Divisions. B. Coordinate progress schedules, including dates for submittals and for delivery of products. C. Conduct conferences among Subcontractors and others concerned with the Work, to establish and maintain coordination and schedules, and to resolve coordination matters in dispute. D. Participate in progress meetings. Report on progress of Work to be adjusted under coordination requirements, and any required changes in schedules. Transmit minutes of meetings and reports to concerned parties. E. Remove and relocate items which are installed without regard to proper access as directed by the Architect/Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Provide materials with trim to match and fit properly with the types of adjacent ceiling, wall, and floor finishes actually installed. Model numbers in specifications or scheduled on Drawings are not intended to designate the required trim. G. Provide mechanical equipment with electrical characteristics compatible with that shown on Electrical Drawings and described in Electrical Division of the specifications. H. Prior to the fabrication of ductwork or the installation of devices in the ceilings, review the Drawings to ascertain that the locations of devices in the ceilings create a pattern which is compatible with the reflected ceiling plan and the spacings of the various ceiling mounted devices. I. In certain instances, the Architect may require relocation of sprinkler heads, outlets and switches. Where relocation is within 3 feet of location shown on Drawings, and when Contractor is informed of necessary relocation before Work is begun on this portion of the job, no additional compensation will be allowed COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS A. Review shop drawings, product data, and samples for compliance with Contract Documents and for coordination with related work. Transmit copies of reviewed documents to OCO Architects. B. Check field dimensions and clearances and relationship to available space and anchors. C. Check compatibility with equipment and work of other sections, electrical characteristics, and operational control requirements. MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATOR

137 D. Check motor voltages and control characteristics. E. Coordinate controls, interlocks and relays. F. Coordinate wiring and control diagrams. G. When changes in the work are made, review their effect on other work. H. Verify information and coordinate maintenance of record documents COORDINATION OF SUBSTITUTIONS AND MODIFICATIONS A. Review proposals and requests for substitution prior to submission to OCO Architects. B. Verify compliance with Contract Documents and for compatibility with work of other sections. C. Submit with recommendation for action OBSERVATION OF WORK A. Observe work for compliance with Contract Documents. B. Maintain a list of observed deficiencies and defects; promptly submit DOCUMENTATION A. Observe and maintain a record of tests. Record: 1. Specification section number and product name. 2. Name of subcontractor. 3. Name of testing agency and name of inspector. 4. Name of manufacturer's representative present. 5. Date, time, and duration of tests. 6. Type of test, and results. 7. Retesting required. B. Assemble background documentation for dispute and claim settlement. C. Submit copies of documentation to OCO Architects upon request EQUIPMENT START-UP A. Verify utilities, connections, and controls are complete and equipment is in operable condition as required by Section B. Observe start-up and adjustments, test run, record time and date of start-up, and results. C. Observe equipment demonstrations made to SAHA; record times and additional information required for operation and maintenance manuals INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE OF EQUIPMENT A. Prior to inspection, verify that equipment is tested, operational, clean, and ready for operation. B. Assist OCO Architects with review. Prepare list of items to be completed and corrected. END OF SECTION MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATOR

138 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preliminary schedule. SECTION CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE B. Construction progress schedule, bar chart type RELATED SECTIONS A. Section Summary: Work sequence REFERENCES A. AGC (CPSM) - Construction Planning and Scheduling Manual; Associated General Contractors of America; B. M-H (CPM) - CPM in Construction Management - Project Management with CPM, O'Brien, McGraw-Hill Book Company; SUBMITTALS A. Within 14 days after date of Agreement, submit preliminary schedule defining planned operations for the first 60 days of Work, with a general outline for remainder of Work. B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days. C. Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete schedule for review. D. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. E. Submit the number of opaque reproductions that requires, plus two copies that will be retained by OCO Architects QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Scheduler:'s personnel or specialist Consultant specializing in CPM scheduling with five years minimum experience in scheduling construction work of a complexity comparable to this Project, and having use of computer facilities capable of delivering a detailed graphic printout within 48 hours of request. B. 's Administrative Personnel: five] years minimum experience in using and monitoring CPM schedules on comparable projects SCHEDULE FORMAT A. Listings: In chronological order according to the start date for each activity. Identify each activity with the applicable specification section number. B. Scale and Spacing: To allow for notations and revisions. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE A. Prepare preliminary schedule in the form of a horizontal bar chart CONTENT A. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

139 B. Identify each item by specification section number. C. Identify work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. D. Provide sub-schedules for each stage of Work identified in Section E. Provide sub-schedules to define critical portions of the entire schedule. F. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of Work completed, as of the first day of each month. G. Provide legend for symbols and abbreviations used BAR CHARTS A. Include a separate bar for each major portion of Work or operation. B. Identify the first work day of each week NETWORK ANALYSIS A. Prepare network analysis diagrams and supporting mathematical analyses using the Critical Path Method. B. Illustrate order and interdependence of activities and sequence of work; how start of a given activity depends on completion of preceding activities, and how completion of the activity may restrain start of subsequent activities. C. Mathematical Analysis: Tabulate each activity of detailed network diagrams, using calendar dates, and identify for each activity: 1. Preceding and following event numbers. 2. Activity description. 3. Estimated duration of activity, in maximum 15 day intervals. 4. Earliest start date. 5. Earliest finish date. 6. Actual start date. 7. Actual finish date. 8. Latest start date. 9. Latest finish date. 10. Total and free float; float time shall accrue to SAHA and to SAHA's benefit. 11. Monetary value of activity, keyed to Schedule of Values. 12. Percentage of activity completed. 13. Responsibility. D. Analysis Program: Capable of compiling monetary value of completed and partially completed activities, accepting revised completion dates, and recomputation of all dates and float. E. Required Reports: List activities in sorts or groups: 1. By preceding work item or event number from lowest to highest. 2. By amount of float, then in order of early start REVIEW AND EVALUATION OF SCHEDULE A. Participate in joint review and evaluation of schedule with OCO Architects at each submittal. B. Evaluate project status to determine work behind schedule and work ahead of schedule. C. After review, revise as necessary as result of review, and resubmit within 10 days UPDATING SCHEDULE A. Maintain schedules to record actual start and finish dates of completed activities. B. Indicate progress of each activity to date of revision, with projected completion date of each activity. C. Annotate diagrams to graphically depict current status of Work. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

140 D. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in Work, and other identifiable changes. E. Indicate changes required to maintain Date of Substantial Completion. F. Submit reports required to support recommended changes DISTRIBUTION OF SCHEDULE A. Distribute copies of updated schedules to's project site file, to Subcontractors, suppliers, OCO Architects, SAHA, and other concerned parties. B. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections shown in schedules. END OF SECTION CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

141 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION SECURITY PROCEDURES A. Security measures including formal security program, entry control, personnel identification, guard service, and miscellaneous restrictions RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section Summary: use of premises and occupancy. B. Section Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary lighting SECURITY PROGRAM A. Protect Work, existing premises and SAHA's operations from theft, vandalism, and unauthorized entry. B. Initiate program at project mobilization. C. Maintain program throughout construction period until SAHA occupancy ENTRY CONTROL A. Restrict entrance of persons and vehicles into Project site and existing facilities. B. Allow entrance only to authorized persons with proper identification. C. Maintain log of workers and visitors, make available to SAHA on request. D. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure of partially completed areas of construction. Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. 1. Storage: Where materials and equipment must be stored, and are of value or attractive for theft, provide a secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with the installation and release of material to minimize the opportunity for theft and vandalism. 2. The Contractor solely shall be responsible for the security of that portion of the building in which construction work is taking place, erecting suitable barricades, or providing watchman service, where necessary to prevent unauthorized access into the building at night and over weekends and holidays PERSONNEL IDENTIFICATION A. Provide identification badge to each person authorized to enter premises. B. Badge To Include: Personal photograph, name, assigned number, expiration date and employer. C. Require return of badges at expiration of their employment on the Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION SECURITY PROCEDURES

142 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quality assurance submittals. B. Mock-ups. C. Control of installation. D. Tolerances. E. Testing and inspection services. F. Manufacturers' field services RELATED REQUIREMENTS SECTION QUALITY REQUIREMENTS A. Document General Conditions: Inspections and approvals required by public authorities. B. Section Allowances: Allowance for payment of testing services. C. Section Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures. D. Section Reference Standards. E. Section Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged Construction Inspection and/or Testing; B. ASTM E Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing; SUBMITTALS A. Design Data: Submit for OCO Architects's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents, or for SAHA's information. B. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and or installation/application subcontractor to OCO Architects, in quantities specified for Product Data. 1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. 2. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to OCO Architects. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the SAHA's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation REFERENCES AND STANDARDS - See Section TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES A. SAHA will employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform specified construction materials and HVAC test and balance testing. B. Employment of agency in no way relieves of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

143 C. Employed Agency: 1. Testing agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM E 329, ASTM E 543, ASTM C 1021, ASTM C 1077, and ASTM C Inspection agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM D3740 and ASTM E Laboratory: Authorized to operate in State of Texas. 4. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review services. 5. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals either by NIST or using an NIST established Measurement Assurance Program, under a laboratory measurement quality assurance program. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from OCO Architects before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement MOCK-UPS A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective product specification sections. B. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices,materials, flashings, seals, and finishes. Block and brace as required for safety. C. Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work. D. Where mock-up has been accepted by OCO Architects and is specified in product specification sections to be removed, remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from OCO Architects before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place TESTING AND INSPECTION A. See individual specification sections for testing required. B. Testing Agency Duties: 1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with OCO Architects and in performance of services. 2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

144 4. Promptly notify OCO Architects and of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or products. 5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by OCO Architects. 6. Attend progress meetings where applicable. 7. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified. C. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work. D. Responsibilities: 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs. 2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers' facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected. c. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples. 4. Notify OCO Architects and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services. 5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by beyond specified requirements. 6. Arrange with SAHA's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by beyond specified requirements. E. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by OCO Architects. F. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by. G. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by OCO Architects. Payment for re testing will be charged to the by deducting testing charges from the Contract Price MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment and systems as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Submit qualifications of observer to OCO Architects 30 days in advance of required observations. 1. Observer subject to approval of OCO Architects. 2. Observer subject to approval of SAHA. C. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of OCO Architects, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, OCO Architects will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. END OF SECTION QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

145 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Requirements relating to referenced standards. B. Reference standards full title and edition date DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Indicated": The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings; or to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used to help the user locate the reference. Location is not limited. C. "Directed": Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" mean directed by the Architect, requested by the Architect, and similar phrases. D. "Approved": The term "approved," when used in conjunction with the Architect's action on the Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. E. "Regulations": The term "regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": The term "furnish" means to supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": The term "install" describes operations at the Project site including the actual unloading, temporary storage, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide": The term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Installer": An installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application, or similar operations. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform. 1. The term "experienced," when used with the term "installer," means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project except where individual specifications sections provide more stringent criteria; being familiar with the special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Trades: Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespersons of the corresponding generic name. 3. Assigning Specialists: Certain Sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by specialists who are recognized experts in those operations. The specialists must be engaged for those activities, and their assignments are requirements over which the Contractor has no option. However, the ultimate responsibility for fulfilling contract requirements remains with the Contractor. a. This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with enforcing building codes and similar regulations governing the Work. It is also not intended to interfere with local trade-union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions. REFERENCE STANDARDS

146 J. "Project site" is the space available to the Contractor for performing construction activities, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of the Project. The extent of the Project site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which the Project is to be built. K. "Testing Agencies": A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests, either at the Project site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests. L. Not-In-Contract (NIC) - Work not included in this Contract INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents unless date of referenced standard is indicated. C. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of the requirements. Refer uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project must be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, the Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source and make them available on request. E. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. The following abbreviations and acronyms, as referenced in the Contract Documents, mean the associated names. Names and addresses are subject to change and are believed, but are not assured, to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents QUALITY ASSURANCE A. For products or workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from the OCO Architects before proceeding. C. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of the OCO Architects shall be altered by the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document GOVERNING REGULATIONS AND AUTHORITIES A. Copies of Regulations: Obtain copies of required regulations and retain at the Project site to be available for reference by parties who have a reasonable need SUBMITTALS REFERENCE STANDARDS

147 A. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. PART 2 CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY ORGANIZATION DOCUMENTS 2.01 AA -- ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION, INC AABC -- ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCE COUNCIL 2.03 AAMA -- AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION 2.04 AASHTO -- AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS 2.05 AATCC -- AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF TEXTILE CHEMISTS & COLORISTS 2.06 ABMA -- AMERICAN BEARING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION, INC ACGIH -- AMERICAN COUNCIL OF GOVERNMENTAL INDUSTRIAL HYGIENISTS 2.08 ACI -- AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE INTERNATIONAL 2.09 ACPA -- AMERICAN CONCRETE PIPE ASSOCIATION 2.10 ACT 2.11 ADC -- AIR DIFFUSION COUNCIL 2.12 AFPA -- AMERICAN FOREST AND PAPER ASSOCIATION 2.13 AGA -- AMERICAN GALVANIZERS ASSOCIATION, INC AGA -- AMERICAN GAS ASSOCIATION 2.15 AGC -- ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA 2.16 AHA -- AMERICAN HARDBOARD ASSOCIATION 2.17 AI -- THE ASPHALT INSTITUTE 2.18 AIHA - AMERICAN INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE ASSOCIATION 2.19 AISC -- AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC AISI -- AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL INSTITUTE 2.21 AITC -- AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 2.22 ALSC -- AMERICAN LUMBER STANDARDS COMMITTEE 2.23 AMCA -- AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL, INC ANSI -- AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE 2.25 AOSA -- ASSOCIATION OF OFFICIAL SEED ANALYSTS 2.26 APA -- APA - THE ENGINEERED WOOD ASSOCIATION 2.27 APHA -- AMERICAN PUBLIC HEALTH ASSOCIATION 2.28 API -- AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE 2.29 API - ALLIANCE FOR THE POLYURETHANES INDUSTRY, AMERICAN PLASTICS COUNCIL 2.30 ARI -- AIR-CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (See AHRI) 2.31 ARRA -- ASPHALT RECYCLING AND RECLAIMING ASSOCIATION 2.32 ASA -- ACOUSTICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA REFERENCE STANDARDS

148 2.33 ASCA -- ARCHITECTURAL SPRAY COATERS ASSOCIATION 2.34 ASCE -- AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS 2.35 ASHRAE -- AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING ENGINEERS, INC ASME -- THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS 2.37 ASPA -- AMERICAN SOD PRODUCERS ASSOCIATION (see Turfgrass Producers International) 2.38 ASSE -- AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING 2.39 ASTM A Series -- ASTM INTERNATIONAL A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; ASTM B Series -- ASTM INTERNATIONAL 2.41 ASTM C Series -- ASTM INTERNATIONAL 2.42 ASTM D Series -- ASTM INTERNATIONAL 2.43 ASTM E Series -- ASTM INTERNATIONAL 2.44 ASTM F Series -- ASTM INTERNATIONAL 2.45 ASTM G Series -- ASTM INTERNATIONAL 2.46 AWCI -- ASSOCIATION OF THE WALL AND CEILING INDUSTRIES INTERNATIONAL 2.47 AWI -- ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK INSTITUTE 2.48 AWPA -- AMERICAN WOOD-PRESERVERS' ASSOCIATION 2.49 AWPB -- AMERICAN WOOD PRESERVERS BUREAU 2.50 AWS -- AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY 2.51 AWWA -- AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION 2.52 BHMA -- BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION 2.53 BIA -- BRICK INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION 2.54 BIFMA - BUSINESS AND INDUSTRY FURNITURE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION 2.55 BOCA -- BUILDING OFFICIALS & CODE ADMINISTRATORS INTERNATIONAL, INC BS -- BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION 2.57 CAN -- STANDARDS COUNCIL OF CANADA (NATIONAL STANDARDS OF CANADA) 2.58 CBMA -- CERTIFIED BALLAST MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION 2.59 CCMC -- CANADA CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS CENTRE 2.60 CDA -- COPPER DEVELOPMENT ASSOCIATION, INC CGA -- CANADIAN GAS ASSOCIATION 2.62 CGA -- COMPRESSED GAS ASSOCIATION 2.63 CGSB -- CANADIAN GENERAL STANDARDS BOARD 2.64 CISCA -- CEILINGS & INTERIOR SYSTEMS CONSTRUCTION ASSOCIATION 2.65 CISPI -- CAST IRON SOIL PIPE INSTITUTE 2.66 CLFMI -- CHAIN LINK FENCE MANUFACTURERS INSTITUTE REFERENCE STANDARDS

149 2.67 CPSC -- CONSUMER PRODUCTS SAFETY COMMISSION 2.68 CRA -- CALIFORNIA REDWOOD ASSOCIATION 2.69 CRI -- CARPET AND RUG INSTITUTE 2.70 CRSI -- CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL INSTITUTE 2.71 CSA - CSA INTERNATIONAL (formerly Canadian Standards Association) 2.72 CSFM -- CALIFORNIA STATE FIRE MARSHAL 2.73 CSSB -- CEDAR SHAKE AND SHINGLE BUREAU 2.74 CTI -- CERAMIC TILE INSTITUTE 2.75 CTI -- COOLING TECHNOLOGY INSTITUTE 2.76 DASMA -- DOOR & ACCESS SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS' ASSOCIATION, INTERNATIONAL 2.77 DHI -- DOOR AND HARDWARE INSTITUTE 2.78 DIN -- DEUTSCHES INSTITUT FUR NORMUNG 2.79 EC - EUROPEAN COMMISSION 2.80 EIA - ELECTRONIC INDUSTRIES ASSOCIATION 2.81 EIMA -- EXTERIOR INSULATION MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION 2.82 EJMA - EXPANSION JOINT MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION 2.83 ESD - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ASSOCIATION 2.84 ETL - ETL TESTING LABORATORY 2.85 FBC - FLORIDA BUILDING CODE 2.86 FM -- FACTORY MUTUAL RESEARCH CORPORATION 2.87 FRSA - FLORIDA ROOFING, SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION 2.88 GA -- GYPSUM ASSOCIATION 2.89 GANA -- GLASS ASSOCIATION OF NORTH AMERICA 2.90 GRI - GEOSYNTHETIC RESEARCH INSTITUTE 2.91 HI -- THE HYDRONICS INSTITUTE (See AHRI) 2.92 HPVA -- HARDWOOD PLYWOOD VENEER ASSOCIATION 2.93 HPW -- H.P. WHITE LABORATORY, INC IAPMO -- INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF PLUMBING AND MECHANICAL OFFICIALS 2.95 ICBO -- INTERNATIONAL CONFERENCE OF BUILDING OFFICIALS 2.96 ICBO-ES -- ICBO EVALUATION SERVICE, INC ICC - INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL, INC ICC-ES - ICC EVALUATION SERVICE, INC ICEA - INSULATED CABLE ENGINEERS ASSOCIATION ICPA - INTERNATIONAL CAST POLYMERS ALLIANCE OF THE COMPOSITES FABRICATORS ASSOCIATION ICRI - INTERNATIONAL CONCRETE REPAIR INSTITUTE IEC - INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION REFERENCE STANDARDS

150 2.103 IEEE -- INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC ENGINEERS IESNA -- ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY OF NORTH AMERICA IGCC -- INSULATING GLASS CERTIFICATION COUNCIL IGMA - INSULATING GLASS MANUFACTURERS ALLIANCE IGSHPA -- INTERNATIONAL GROUND SOURCE HEAT PUMP ASSOCIATION IIAR -- INTERNATIONAL INSTITUTE OF AMMONIA REFRIGERATION ILI -- INDIANA LIMESTONE INSTITUTE OF AMERICA, INC IMIAWC -- INTERNATIONAL MASONRY INDUSTRY ALL-WEATHER COUNCIL ISA -- INSTRUMENT SOCIETY OF AMERICA ISDI -- INSULATED STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE ISS -- IRON AND STEEL SOCIETY ISSFA - INTERNATIONAL SOLID SURFACE FABRICATORS ASSOCIATION ISO -- INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS ORGANIZATION ITS -- INTERTEK TESTING SERVICES NA, INC IWCA - INTERNATIONAL WINDOW CLEANING ASSOCIATION KCMA -- KITCHEN CABINET MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION CFSEI - COLD-FORMED STEEL ENGINEERS INSTITUTE LIA -- LEAD INDUSTRIES ASSOCIATION, INC LPI -- LIGHTNING PROTECTION INSTITUTE MBMA -- METAL BUILDING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION M-H -- MCGRAW-HILL BOOK COMPANY MFMA -- MAPLE FLOORING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION MFMA -- METAL FRAMING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION MIA -- MARBLE INSTITUTE OF AMERICA, INC MICA -- MIDWEST INSULATION CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION ML/SFA -- METAL LATH/STEEL FRAMING ASSOCIATION - See NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS MPI - MASTER PAINTERS INSTITUTE (MASTER PAINTERS AND DECORATORS ASSOCIATION) MMSA -- MATERIALS AND METHODS STANDARDS ASSOCIATION MSS -- MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY, INC NAA -- NATIONAL ARBORIST ASSOCIATION NAAMM -- THE NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS NACE -- NACE INTERNATIONAL NAGDM -- NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF GARAGE DOOR MANUFACTURERS NAIMA - NORTH AMERICAN INSULATION MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION NAMM -- NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF MIRROR MANUFACTURERS REFERENCE STANDARDS

151 2.138 NBGQA -- NATIONAL BUILDING GRANITE QUARRIES ASSOCIATION, INC NCMA -- NATIONAL CONCRETE MASONRY ASSOCIATION NCWPB - NATIONAL CERTIFIED PIPE WELDING BUREAU NCRP -- NATIONAL COUNCIL ON RADIATION PROTECTION AND MEASUREMENTS NEBB -- NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU NECA -- NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION NEII -- NATIONAL ELEVATOR INDUSTRY, INC NELMA -- NORTHEASTERN LUMBER MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION, INC NEMA -- NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION NETA -- INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION NFPA -- NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NFRC -- NATIONAL FENESTRATION RATING COUNCIL, INC NGA -- NATIONAL GAS ASSOCIATION NHLA -- NATIONAL HARDWOOD LUMBER ASSOCIATION NLA -- NATIONAL LIME ASSOCIATION NLGA -- NATIONAL LUMBER GRADES AUTHORITY NOFMA -- NATIONAL OAK FLOORING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION NPA -- NATIONAL PARTICLEBOARD ASSOCIATION NPCA -- NATIONAL PAINT AND COATINGS ASSOCIATION NSPI -- NATIONAL SPA AND POOL INSTITUTE NRCA -- NATIONAL ROOFING CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION NSF -- NSF INTERNATIONAL (National Sanitation Foundation) NSWMA -- NATIONAL SOLID WASTES MANAGEMENT ASSOCIATION NTMA -- NATIONAL TERRAZZO AND MOSAIC ASSOCIATION, INC., THE NTMA -- NATIONAL TILE AND MARBLE ASSOCIATION NWWDA -- NATIONAL WOOD WINDOW AND DOOR ASSOCIATION (name changed to WDMA) OWMA -- OPERABLE WALL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION PCA -- PORTLAND CEMENT ASSOCIATION PCI -- PRECAST/PRESTRESSED CONCRETE INSTITUTE PDCA -- PAINTING AND DECORATING CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA PDI -- PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTITUTE PECI - PORTLAND ENERGY CONSERVATION, INC PEI -- PORCELAIN ENAMEL INSTITUTE PIMA -- POLYISOCYANURATE INSULATION MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION PPI -- PLASTICS PIPE INSTITUTE PTI -- POST-TENSIONING INSTITUTE REFERENCE STANDARDS

152 2.174 RIS -- REDWOOD INSPECTION SERVICE RFCI -- RESILIENT FLOOR COVERING INSTITUTE RTI - ROOF TILE INSTITUTE SBCCI -- SOUTHERN BUILDING CODE CONGRESS INTERNATIONAL, INC SCMA -- SOUTHERN CYPRESS MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION SDI -- STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE SDI -- STEEL DECK INSTITUTE, INC SEFA - SCIENTIFIC EQUIPMENT AND FURNITURE ASSOCIATION SGCC -- SAFETY GLAZING CERTIFICATION COUNCIL SIGMA - SEALED INSULATING GLASS MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (See IGMA) SJI -- STEEL JOIST INSTITUTE SMA -- SCREEN MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION SMA -- STUCCO MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION, INC SMACNA -- SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS' NATIONAL ASSOCIATION, INC SPFA - SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM ALLIANCE SPIB -- SOUTHERN PINE INSPECTION BUREAU, INC SPRI -- SINGLE PLY ROOFING INSTITUTE SSINA - SPECIALTY STEEL INDUSTRY OF NORTH AMERICA SSPC -- THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS SSPMA -- SUMP AND SEWAGE PUMP MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION STI -- STEEL TANK INSTITUTE SWI - STEEL WINDOW INSTITUTE SWRI -- SEALANT, WATERPROOFING AND RESTORATION INSTITUTE TAPPI (Textile Association of the Pulp and Paper Industries) TCA -- TILE COUNCIL OF AMERICA, INC TEMA -- TUBULAR EXCHANGER MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION, INC TIA -- TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION TIMA -- TIMA TPI -- TRUSS PLATE INSTITUTE TPI - TURFGRASS PRODUCERS INTERNATIONAL TRI - TILE ROOFING INSTITUTE UL -- UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC ULC - UNDERWRITERS' LABORATORIES OF CANADA USG -- UNITED STATES GYPSUM VSI - VINYL SIDING INSTITUTE, A DIVISION OF THE SOCIETY OF THE PLASTICS INDUSTRY, INC WASTEC -- WASTE EQUIPMENT TECHNOLOGY ASSOCIATION REFERENCE STANDARDS

153 2.210 WCLIB -- WEST COAST LUMBER INSPECTION BUREAU WCMA -- WINDOW COVERING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION WDMA -- WINDOW AND DOOR MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (formerly NWWDA) WI -- WOODWORK INSTITUTE WILEY -- JOHN WILEY AND SONS (Publishers) WMMPA -- WOOD MOULDING AND MILLWORK PRODUCERS ASSOCIATION WRCLA - WESTERN RED CEDAR LUMBER ASSOCIATION WWPA -- WESTERN WOOD PRODUCTS ASSOCIATION PART 3 UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT AND RELATED AGENCIES DOCUMENTS 3.01 UNITED STATES CODE 3.02 CFR -- CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS 3.03 CPSC - CONSUMER PRODUCTS SAFETY COMMISSION 3.04 EPA - ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY 3.05 FS -- FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS (General Services Administration) 3.06 GSA - U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION 3.07 NIJ - NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF JUSTICE (Dept. of Justice) 3.08 NILECJ - NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF LAW ENFORCEMENT AND CRIMINAL JUSTICE (Dept. of Justice) 3.09 PS - PRODUCT STANDARDS 3.10 USGS - UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY END OF SECTION REFERENCE STANDARDS

154 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary utilities. B. Temporary telecommunications services. C. Temporary telephone and facsimile service. SECTION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS D. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing. E. Security requirements. F. Waste removal facilities and services. G. Project identification sign RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section Temporary Utilities. B. Section Field Offices and Sheds. C. Section Vehicular Access and Parking. D. Section Security Procedures TEMPORARY UTILITIES - See Section TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telecommunications services to field office at time of project mobilization. B. Telecommunications services shall include: 1. Windows-based personal computer dedicated to project telecommunications, with necessary software and laser printer. 2. Telephone Land Lines: One line, minimum; one handset per line. 3. Internet Connections: Minimum of one; DSL modem or faster Account/address reserved for project use. C. Provide, maintain and pay for facsimile service and a dedicated telephone line to field office at time of project mobilization INTERNET SERVICE A. Provide, maintain and pay for internet service to field office at time of project mobilization. Service must be DSL or cable TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of the types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers" and NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations." 1. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose, but not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell. 2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations. 3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire-protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for fighting fires. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire-exposure areas. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

155 4. Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition. B. At the earliest feasible date in each area of the Project, complete installation of the permanent fire-protection facility, including connected services, and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public, to allow for owner's use of site and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way and for public access to existing building. C. Covered Walkway: Erect a structurally adequate, protective covered walkway for passage of persons along the adjacent public street. Coordinate with entrance gates, other facilities, and obstructions. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage FENCING A. Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence. B. Provide 6 foot high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks. C. Enclosure Fence: Before excavation begins, install an enclosure fence with lockable entrance gates. Locate where indicated, or enclose the entire site or the portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. Install in a manner that will prevent people, dogs, and other animals from easily entering the site, except by the entrance gates EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary insulated weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks. B. Provide temporary roofing as specified in Division INTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary partitions and ceilings as indicated to separate work areas from SAHA-occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into SAHA-occupied areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment. B. Construction: Framing and gypsum board materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces: 1. STC rating of 35 in accordance with ASTM E Maximum flame spread rating of 75 in accordance with ASTM E 84. C. Paint surfaces exposed to view from SAHA-occupied areas SECURITY - See Section VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING - See Section WASTE REMOVAL A. See Section Waste Management, for additional requirements. B. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

156 C. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site weekly or every 3 days when the temperature is expected to rise above 80 degrees. D. Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by containerizing properly. Dispose of material lawfully. E. If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction. F. Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers with lids PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide project identification sign of design and construction indicated on Drawings. B. Erect on site at location indicated. C. No other signs are allowed without SAHA permission except those required by law FIELD OFFICES - See Section A. Office: Weathertight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling equipment, and equipped with sturdy furniture, drawing rack and drawing display table. B. Provide space for Project meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate 10 persons. C. Locate offices a minimum distance of 30 feet from existing and new structures REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion inspection. B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet. Grade site as indicated. C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

157 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, and water RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section Temporary Facilities and Controls: Telephone service for administrative purposes TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Engage the appropriate local utility company to install temporary service. Pay all fees or deposits necessary to obtain the use of such utilities and pay for utility consumed. 1. Arrange with company and existing users for a time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. 2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Prior to temporary utility availability, provide trucked-in services. 3. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to the site where the Owner's easements cannot be used for that purpose. 4. Use Charges: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to the Owner or Architect. Neither the Owner nor Architect will accept cost or use charges as a basis of claims for Change Orders TEMPORARY ELECTRIC POWER SERVICE A. Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include meters, transformers, overload-protected disconnects, automatic ground-fault interrupters, and main distribution switch gear. 1. Install electric power service underground, except where overhead service must be used. 2. Power Distribution System: Install wiring overhead and rise vertically where least exposed to damage. Where permitted, wiring circuits not exceeding 125 Volts, ac 20 Ampere rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable where overhead and exposed for surveillance. 3. Verify with Owner s Representative, duplex outlets that may be used during construction. Do not use Dedicated Outlets during construction for any reason. Verify with Owner s Representative local designation for Dedicated Outlets. B. Cost: By General Contractor TEMPORARY LIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES A. Install and operate temporary lighting that will fulfill security and protection requirements without operating the entire system. Provide temporary lighting that will provide adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions. B. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required. C. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. D. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction TEMPORARY HEATING A. Cost of Energy: By General Contractor. B. Provide heating devices and heat as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. C. Provide temporary heat required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protection of installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high TEMPORARY UTILITIES

158 humidity. Select safe equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce the ambient condition required and minimize consumption of energy. D. Except where the Owner authorizes use of the permanent system, provide vented, self-contained, LP-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open flame, or salamander heating units is prohibited. E. Existing facilities shall not be used TEMPORARY COOLING AND DEHUMIDIFICATION A. Cost of Energy: By General Contractor. B. Provide cooling devices and cooling as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. C. Provide dehumidification as needed to maintain specifed conditions for construction operations and climate control required by product manufacturers TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Cost of Water Used: By General Contractor. B. Provide and maintain suitable quality water service for construction operations at time of project mobilization. C. Connect to existing water source. 1. Exercise measures to conserve water Provide backflow preventers where existing water service is tapped is such a manner that contamination of service is possible. D. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with threaded connections. Provide temporary pipe insulation to prevent freezing OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses to minimize waste and abuse. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage by freezing temperatures and similar elements. C. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. D. Protection: Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations. E. Termination and Removal: Unless the Architect requests that it be maintained longer, remove each temporary facility when the need has ended, when replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with the temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the Contractor's property. The Owner reserves the right to take possession of project identification signs. 2. Immediately prior to Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during the construction period including, but not limited to, the following: a. Replace air filters and clean inside of ductwork and housings. b. Replace significantly worn parts and parts subject to unusual operating conditions. c. Replace lamps burned out or noticeably dimmed by hours of use. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED TEMPORARY UTILITIES

159 PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION TEMPORARY UTILITIES

160 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Access roads. B. Parking. C. Existing pavements and parking areas. D. Permanent pavements and parking facilities. E. Construction parking controls. F. Flag persons. G. Haul routes. H. Maintenance. I. Removal, repair. J. Mud from site vehicles RELATED REQUIREMENTS SECTION VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING A. Section Summary: access to site, work sequence, and occupancy. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Temporary Construction:'s option contingent upon approval by Owner and Architect SIGNS, SIGNALS, AND DEVICES A. Flag Person Equipment: As required by local jurisdictions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clear areas, provide surface and storm drainage of road, parking, area premises, and adjacent areas ACCESS ROADS A. Use of designated existing on-site streets and driveways for construction traffic is permitted. B. Construct new temporary all-weather access roads from public thoroughfares to serve construction area, of a width and load bearing capacity to provide unimpeded traffic for construction purposes. C. Extend and relocate as Work progress requires, provide detours as necessary for unimpeded traffic flow. D. Provide unimpeded access for emergency vehicles. Maintain 20 foot width driveways with turning space between and around combustible materials. E. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants free of obstructions PARKING A. Use of designated areas of existing parking facilities by construction personnel is permitted. B. Do not allow heavy vehicles or construction equipment in parking areas. C. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off-site parking. Coordinate with the owner and authorities with the local jurisdiction. VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING

161 3.04 NEW PERMANENT PAVEMENTS A. Prior to Substantial Completion the base for permanent roads and parking areas may be used for construction traffic. B. Avoid traffic loading beyond paving design capacity CONSTRUCTION PARKING CONTROL A. Control vehicular parking to prevent interference with public traffic and parking, access by emergency vehicles, and Owner's operations. B. Prevent parking on or adjacent to access roads or in non-designated areas FLAG PERSONS A. Provide trained and equipped flag persons to regulate traffic when construction operations or traffic encroach on public traffic lanes HAUL ROUTES A. Consult with authority having jurisdiction, establish public thoroughfares to be used for haul routes and site access. B. Confine construction traffic to designated haul routes. C. Provide traffic control at critical areas of haul routes to regulate traffic, to minimize interference with public traffic MAINTENANCE A. Maintain traffic and parking areas in a sound condition free of excavated material, construction equipment, Products, mud, snow, and ice. B. Maintain existing paved areas used for construction; promptly repair breaks, potholes, low areas, standing water, and other deficiencies, to maintain paving and drainage in original, or specified, condition REMOVAL, REPAIR A. Repair existing facilities damaged by use, to original condition. B. Remove equipment and devices when no longer required. C. Repair damage caused by installation MUD FROM SITE VEHICLES A. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. END OF SECTION VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING

162 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS A. Construction procedures to promote adequate indoor air quality after construction. B. Building flush-out after construction and before occupancy. C. Testing indoor air quality before commencement of construction; existing building areas only. D. Testing indoor air quality after completion of construction PROJECT GOALS A. See Section Green Building Requirements, for overall project goals relating to environment and energy. B. Dust and Airborne Particulates: Prevent deposition of dust and other particulates in HVAC ducts and equipment. 1. Cleaning of ductwork is not contemplated under this Contract. 2. shall bear the cost of cleaning required due to failure to protect ducts and equipment from construction dust. 3. Establish condition of existing ducts and equipment prior to start of alterations. C. Airborne Contaminants: Procedures and products have been specified to minimize indoor air pollutants. 1. Furnish products meeting the specifications. 2. Avoid construction practices that could result in contamination of installed products leading to indoor air pollution RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section LEED Requirements REFERENCE STANDARDS A. SMACNA (OCC) - IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings Under Construction; DEFINITIONS A. Adsorptive Materials: Gypsum board, acoustical ceiling tile and panels, carpet and carpet tile, fabrics, fibrous insulation, and other similar products. B. Contaminants: Gases, vapors, regulated pollutants, airborne mold and mildew, and the like, as specified. C. Particulates: Dust, dirt, and other airborne solid matter. D. Wet Work: Concrete, plaster, coatings, and other products that emit water vapor or volatile organic compounds during installation, drying, or curing SUBMITTALS A. See Section Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Indoor Air Quality Management Plan: Describe in detail measures to be taken to promote adequate indoor air quality upon completion; use SMACNA IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction as a guide. 1. Submit not less than 60 days before enclosure of building. 2. Identify potential sources of odor and dust. 3. Identify construction activities likely to produce odor or dust. 4. Identify areas of project potentially affected, especially occupied areas. INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS

163 5. Evaluate potential problems by severity and describe methods of control. 6. Describe construction ventilation to be provided, including type and duration of ventilation, use of permanent HVAC systems, types of filters and schedule for replacement of filters. 7. Describe cleaning and dust control procedures. C. Interior Finishes Installation Schedule: Identify each interior finish that either generates odors, moisture, or vapors or is susceptible to adsorption of odors and vapors, and indicate air handling zone, sequence of application, and curing times. D. Duct and Terminal Unit Inspection Report. E. Air Contaminant Test Plan: Identify: 1. Testing agency qualifications. 2. Locations and scheduling of air sampling. 3. Test procedures, in detail. 4. Test instruments and apparatus. 5. Sampling methods. F. Air Contaminant Test Reports: Show: 1. Location where each sample was taken, and time. 2. Test values for each air sample; average the values of each set of HVAC operating conditions. 4. Certification of test equipment calibration. 5. Other conditions or discrepancies that might have influenced results. G. Ventilation Effectiveness Test Plan: Identify: 1. Testing agency qualifications. 2. Description of test spaces, including locations of air sampling. 3. Test procedures, in detail; state whether tracer gas decay or step-up will be used. 4. Test instruments and apparatus; identify tracer gas to be used. 5. Sampling methods. H. Ventilation Effectiveness Test Reports: Show: 1. Include preliminary tests of instruments and apparatus and of test spaces. 2. Calculation of ventilation effectiveness, E. 3. Location where each sample was taken, and time. 4. Test values for each air sample. 5. HVAC operating conditions. 6. Other information specified in ASHRAE Other conditions or discrepancies that might have influenced results QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing and Inspection Agency Qualifications: Independent testing agency having minimum of 5 years experience in performing the types of testing specified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Low VOC Materials: See other sections for specific requirements for materials with low VOC content. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES A. Prevent the absorption of moisture and humidity by adsorptive materials by: 1. Sequencing the delivery of such materials so that they are not present in the building until wet work is completed and dry. 2. Delivery and storage of such materials in fully sealed moisture-impermeable packaging. 3. Provide sufficient ventilation for drying within reasonable time frame. B. Begin construction ventilation when building is substantially enclosed. INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS

164 C. If extremely dusty or dirty work must be conducted inside the building, shut down HVAC systems for the duration; remove dust and dirt completely before restarting systems. D. When working in a portion of an occupied building, prevent movement of air from construction area to occupied area. E. HVAC equipment and ductwork may NOT be used for ventilation during construction: 1. Provide temporary ventilation equivalent to 1.5 air changes per hour, minimum. 2. Exhaust directly to outside. 3. Seal HVAC air inlets and outlets immediately after duct installation. F. Do not store construction materials or waste in mechanical or electrical rooms. G. Prior to use of return air ductwork without intake filters clean up and remove dust and debris generated by construction activities. 1. Inspect duct intakes, return air grilles, and terminal units for dust. 2. Clean plenum spaces, including top sides of lay-in ceilings, outsides of ducts, tops of pipes and conduit. 3. Clean tops of doors and frames. 4. Clean mechanical and electrical rooms, including tops of pipes, ducts, and conduit, equipment, and supports. 5. Clean return plenums of air handling units. 6. Remove intake filters last, after cleaning is complete. H. Do not perform dusty or dirty work after starting use of return air ducts without intake filters. I. Use other relevant recommendations of SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings Under Construction for avoiding unnecessary contamination due to construction procedures BUILDING FLUSH-OUT A. Contractor's Option: Either full continuous flush-out OR satisfactory air contaminant testing is required, not both. B. Perform building flush-out before occupancy. C. Do not start flush-out until: 1. All construction is complete. 2. HVAC systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced for proper operation. 3. Inspection of inside of return air ducts and terminal units confirms that cleaning is not necessary. 4. New HVAC filtration media have been installed. D. Building Flush-Out: Operate all ventilation systems at normal flow rates with 100 percent outside air until a total air volume of 14,000 cubic feet per square foot of floor area has been supplied. 1. Obtain SAHA's concurrence that construction is complete enough before beginning flush-out. 2. Maintain interior temperature of at least 60 degrees F and interior relative humidity no higher than 60 percent. 3. If additional construction involving materials that produce particulates or any of the specified contaminants is conducted during flush-out, start flush-out over. 4. If interior spaces must be occupied prior to completion of the flush-out, supply a minimum of 25 percent of the total air volume prior to occupancy, and: a. Begin ventilation at least three hours prior to daily occupancy. b. Continue ventilation during all occupied periods. c. Provide minimum outside air volume of 0.30 cfm per square foot or design minimum outside air rate, whichever is greater. E. Install new HVAC filtration media after completion of flush-out and before occupancy or further testing AIR CONTAMINANT TESTING A. Contractor's Option: Either full continuous flush-out OR satisfactory air contaminant testing is required, not both. INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS

165 B. Perform air contaminant testing before starting construction, as base line for evaluation of post-construction testing. C. Perform air contaminant testing before occupancy. D. Do not start air contaminant testing until: 1. All construction is complete, including interior finishes. 2. HVAC systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced for proper operation. 3. New HVAC filtration media have been installed. E. Indoor Air Samples: Collect from spaces representative of occupied areas: 1. Collect samples while operable windows and exterior doors are closed, HVAC system is running normally as if occupied, with design minimum outdoor air, but with the building unoccupied. 2. Collect samples from spaces in each contiguous floor area in each air handler zone, but not less than one sample per 25,000 square feet; take samples from areas having the least ventilation and those having the greatest presumed source strength. 3. Collect samples from height from 36 inches to 72 inches above floor. 4. Collect samples from same locations on 3 consecutive days during normal business hours; average the results of each set of 3 samples. 5. Exception: Areas with normal very high outside air ventilation rates, such as laboratories, do not need to be tested. 6. When retesting the same building areas, take samples from at least the same locations as in first test. F. Outdoor Air Samples: Collect samples at outside air intake of each air handler at the same time as indoor samples are taken. G. Analyze air samples and submit report. END OF SECTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS

166 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED SECTION TRENCH AND EXCAVATION SAFETY PROGRAM A. Development of trench and excavation safety programs B. Implementation of safety programs C. Monitoring of safety program D. RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1. Section Applications for Payment: Submittal requirements for schedule of values. 2. Section Submittals: Submittal procedures. 3. Section Testing Laboratory Services: Review and inspection of safety program. 4. Section Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Additional safety requirements and control of surface water. E. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1. Develop trench and excavation protection programs as required for safety, as required by state law and in conformance with the provisions of CFR 29, Part 1926, Subpart P - Excavations, Trenching and Shoring of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standard and Interpretations. Referenced OSHA standards shall serve as minimum requirements and shall in no way relieve the Contractor from the responsibility to provide additional protection as required for safety. 2. Obtain a copy of the current referenced OSHA standards and maintain at project site for duration of project. 3. Obtain a copy of the subsurface geotechnical investigation report from the Owner's geotechnical consultant (See Section 00220). Develop trench and excavation protection program, in part, based on information contained in the report. If report is incomplete or fails to include adequate information for Contractor or Contractor's consultant to design protection program, obtain services necessary to provide information required to properly design protection program. F. SUBMITTALS 1. Submit safety program to testing laboratory for review and comment. Submit one copy for Owner s information. 2. Submit trenching and excavation safety program within 30 days of the award of the Contract and before any trenching or excavating is undertaken. 3. Develop safety program under the direction and seal of registered professional engineer licensed to practice in the State of Texas. 4. Identify in safety program Contractor's employee specifically designated as the "Project Safety Officer" and charged with the responsibility of implementing and enforcing the safety program. 5. Submit Schedule of Values as required by Section Denote one line item in Schedule of Values as "Trench and Excavation Safety Program". PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install trench and excavation protection in accordance with written safety program as work progresses and before dangerous or potentially dangerous conditions develop. 1. If soil conditions not described in or addressed by the safety program are encountered, discontinue work and consult with program designer for directions for protection of new conditions. Modify system as required due to changes in weather and/or soil conditions. 2. Prevent damage to sides and bottoms of excavations due to weather. Prevent ponding, washouts, wall collapse, settling and other forms of failure. TRENCH AND EXCAVATION SAFETY PROGRAM

167 B. INSPECTIONS 1. Continuously inspect trenching and excavations to ensure that safety program is being implemented and installed in accordance with the requirements of the designing engineer. END OF SECTION TRENCH AND EXCAVATION SAFETY PROGRAM

168 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General product requirements. B. Re-use of existing products. SECTION PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS C. Transportation, handling, storage and protection. D. Substitution limitations and procedures. E. Procedures for SAHA-supplied products. F. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section Summary: Lists of products to be removed from existing building. B. Section Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring DEFINITIONS A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents, such as "specialties," "systems," "structure," "finishes," "accessories," and similar terms. Such terms are self-explanatory and have well-recognized meanings in the construction industry. 1. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased for the Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. a. "Named Products" are items identified by the manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation, shown or listed in the manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of the date of the Contract Documents. b. "Foreign Products," as distinguished from "domestic products," are items substantially manufactured (50 percent or more of value) outside the United States and its possessions. Products produced or supplied by entities substantially owned (more than 50 percent) by persons who are not citizens of, nor living within, the United States and its possessions are also considered to be foreign products. 2. "Materials" are products substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work. 3. "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that requires service connections, such as wiring or piping. 4. Substitution is a change in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by the Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor. The following are not considered to be requests for substitutions: a. Substitutions requested during the bidding period, and accepted by Addendum prior to award of the Contract, are included in the Contract Documents and are not subject to requirements specified in this Section for substitutions. b. Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect. c. Specified options of products and construction methods included in the Contract Documents. d. The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders issued by governing authorities SUBMITTALS A. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

169 B. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. C. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns. D. Indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. E. Refer to Section 01300, 3.10 and 3.11 for Architect's action VERIFICATION OF NON-CONTAMINATION A. For each of the following materials provided, submit a letter from the manufacturer certifying that products are totally free of all forms of polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) or asbestos, including actinolite, amosite, anthophyllite, chrysotile, crocidolite, and tremolite. 1. Fireproofing. 2. Dampproofing. 3. Waterproofing. 4. Sealants. 5. Prefabricated wall panels or siding. 6. Vinyl composition flooring. 7. Mechanical cooling tower liners. 8. Mechanical insulation. 9. Electrical isolators. 10. Other products indicated in the specification. B. Do not use products containing lead in any form in the manufacture of any component or for installation of the potable water supply. C. Construction Manager to provide certificate of Non Asbestos containing materials used in construction PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products according to the manufacturer's recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Store materials, over and beyond those are immediately required for construction, outside of the existing District buildings unless otherwise approved by the School District. 3. Coordinate delivery with installation time to assure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 4. Do not schedule delivery and do not receive material or equipment at the job site until there is suitable space provided to properly protect equipment from dust, humidity and deterioration from humidity or moisture, and physical impact damage. 5. Deliver products to the site in an undamaged condition in the manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. a. When special makes or grades of material are specified or approved, such materials shall be delivered to the project site in their original packages or cans with seals unbroken and labels attached and shall not be opened until inspected and approved by the School District. 6. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. 7. Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

170 8. Store heavy materials away from the Project structure in a manner that will not endanger the supporting construction. 9. Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover in a weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions. 10. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. 11. Store inflammable or combustible materials with care. Store paint, paint supplies, brushes, rollers, drops and related painting materials that are combustible in a manner to prevent spontaneous combustion, in well ventilated areas and in a neat and clean condition. Limit storage with District property to maximum of 24 hours. B. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT SELECTION A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, new at the time of installation. 1. All materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be of current U.S. (United States) manufacture, new, free from all defects, and of the best quality of their respective kinds. Foreign goods specifically approved for use by the Architect prior to bidding may be furnished. 2. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and the intended use and effect. 3. Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 4. On projects involving remodeling, where existing products will be retained, match existing products as closely as possible with new materials. 5. All equipment installed on this project shall have local (within 125 miles) representation, local factory authorized service, and a local stock of repair parts. This requirement is essential and will be strictly reviewed prior to concurrence with the Contractor's approval for all submittals. B. Product Selection Procedures: The Contract Documents and governing regulations govern product selection. Procedures governing product selection include the following: 1. Proprietary Specification Requirements: Wherever in these specifications or drawings an article or material is defined by describing a proprietary product, or by using a trade name, or the name of the manufacturer or vendor, the term "or equal" if not inserted therewith shall be implied. 2. Semiproprietary Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name 2 or more products or manufacturers, provide 1 of the products indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. a. Where Specifications specify products or manufacturers by name, accompanied by the term "or equal" or "or approved equal," or or equivalent, comply with the Contract Document provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 3. Nonproprietary Specifications: When Specifications list products or manufacturers that are available and may be incorporated in the Work, but do not restrict the Contractor to use of these products only, the Contractor may propose any available product that complies with Contract requirements. Comply with Contract Document provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 4. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product or assembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or without use of a brand or trade name, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract requirements. 5. Compliance with Standards, Codes, and Regulations: Where Specifications only require compliance with an imposed code, standard, or regulation, select a product that complies with the standards, codes, or regulations specified. 6. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, the Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

171 a. Where no product available within the specified category matches satisfactorily and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract Documents concerning "substitutions" for selection of a matching product in another product category. 7. Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase "... as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures..." or a similar phrase, select a product and manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements. The Architect will select the color, pattern, and texture from the product line selected. 8. Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. a. Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product literature or by the manufacturer's certification of performance. 9. Allowances: Refer to individual Specification Sections and "Allowance" provisions in Division 1 for allowances that control product selection and for procedures required for processing such selections EXISTING PRODUCTS A. Unforeseen historic items encountered remain the property of the SAHA; notify SAHA promptly upon discovery; protect, remove, handle, and store as directed by SAHA. B. Reused Products: Reused products include materials and equipment previously used in this or other construction, salvaged and refurbished as specified NEW PRODUCTS A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. B. Do not use products having any of the following characteristics: 1. Made outside the United States, its territories, Canada, or Mexico MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver to Owner and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. OCO Architects will consider requests for substitutions only within 30 days after date of Agreement. Requests received more than 30 days after commencement of the Work may be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Architect. B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. C. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to SAHA. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. 5. Will reimburse SAHA and OCO Architects for review or redesign services associated with re-approval by authorities. D. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

172 Contract Documents. E. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed substitution. Request for substitution must be accompanied by Substitution Request form available from Architect. 2. Identify the product or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request. Include related Specification Section and Drawing numbers. 3. Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate: a. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by the Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution. b. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include elements, such as performance, weight, size, durability, and visual effect. c. Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. d. Samples, where applicable or requested. e. A statement indicating the substitution's effect on the Contractor's Construction Schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the substitution. Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on overall Contract Time. f. Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the Contract Sum. g. The Contractor's certification that the proposed substitution conforms to requirements in the Contract Documents in every respect and is appropriate for the applications indicated. h. The Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately. 4. Architect's Action: If necessary, the Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within two weeks of receipt of a request for substitution. The Architect will notify the Contractor of acceptance or rejection of the substitution within 2 weeks of receipt of the request, or one week of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. Acceptance will be in the form of a change order if a change in cost or time for construction is required, otherwise acceptance will be in the form of written acceptance. a. Use the product specified if the Architect cannot make a decision on the use of a proposed substitute within the time allocated. 5. Should a substitution be approved and subsequently prove to be defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service for which it was intended, the Contractor shall without cost to the Owner, and without obligation on the part of the Architect, replace the same with the material originally specified. 6. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. The Architect's dcision of aproval or disapproval or a proposed substitution shall be final OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS A. SAHA's Responsibilities: 1. Arrange for and deliver SAHA reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples, to. 2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site. 3. On delivery, inspect products jointly with. 4. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient items. 5. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, inspections, and service. B. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Review SAHA reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 2. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage jointly with SAHA. 3. Handle, store, install and finish products. 4. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

173 3.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. B. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas. D. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. F. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product. E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. F. Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. G. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. H. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. I. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. J. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. K. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS A. Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations for preparing, assembling, installing, erecting, and cleaning manufacturer materials or equipment, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other Work. B. Promptly notify the Architect in writing of any conflict between the requirements of the Contract Documents and the manufacturers' instructions. Obtain clarification from the Architect before proceeding with the work. Should the Contractor perform any such work that does not comply with the manufacturer's directions or such clarification by the Owner's Representative, he shall bear all costs arising in connection with the correction of the deficiencies. C. All work shall be executed by mechanics skilled in their respective trades. Install in a neat, precise manner with a finished appearance. D. Protect materials and equipment from damage from the time of delivery until the completion of the work. Erect required temporary shelters and supports to adequately protect any items stored in the PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

174 open on the site from the weather, the ground and surrounding work. Provide cribbing of any items above the floor of the construction. Cover items in the uncompleted building with tarpaulins or other protective covering. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with the above will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the items in question. E. Protect equipment and materials from rust both before and after installation. Clean materials of any rust discovered, treat and repaint as specified elsewhere in specification. F. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. Clean in conformance with requirements of Section END OF SECTION PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

175 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures. B. Requirements for alterations work, including selective demolition. C. Pre-installation meetings. D. Cutting and patching. E. Surveying for laying out the work. F. Cleaning and protection. G. Starting of systems and equipment. H. Demonstration and instruction of SAHA personnel. I. Closeout procedures, except payment procedures RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section Summary: Limitations on working in existing building; continued occupancy; work sequence; identification of salvaged and relocated materials. B. Section Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures. C. Section Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection procedures. D. Section Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary exterior enclosures. E. Section Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary interior partitions SUBMITTALS A. See Section Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work. 1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work. 2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and locations of the work are in conformance with Contract Documents. 3. Submit surveys and survey logs for the project record. C. Demolition Plan: Submit demolition plan as specified by OSHA and local authorities. 1. Indicate extent of demolition, removal sequence, bracing and shoring, and location and construction of barricades and fences. 2. Identify demolition firm and submit qualifications. 3. Include a summary of safety procedures. 4. Submit completed Demolition/Renovation Notification form to Texas Department of Health. Copy Owner/Architect. Form located at end of section. D. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of SAHA or separate Contractor. 6. Include in request: a. Identification of Project. b. Location and description of affected work. EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

176 c. Necessity for cutting or alteration. d. Description of proposed work and products to be used. e. Alternatives to cutting and patching. f. Effect on work of SAHA or separate Contractor. g. Written permission of affected separate Contractor. h. Date and time work will be executed. E. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities QUALIFICATIONS A. For demolition work, employ a firm specializing in the type of work required. 1. Minimum of 5 years of documented experience. B. For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in Texas and acceptable to OCO Architects. Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment. B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. C. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. D. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and over adjacent property. E. Erosion and Sediment Control: Plan and execute work by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation. 1. Minimize amount of bare soil exposed at one time. 2. Provide temporary measures such as berms, dikes, and drains, to prevent water flow. 3. Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts or clays. 4. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation; promptly apply corrective measures. F. Noise Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction operations. G. Pest and Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects from damaging the work. H. Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents from accessing or invading premises. I. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations COORDINATION A. See Section for occupancy-related requirements. B. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. C. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements. EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

177 D. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. E. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. F. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. G. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections. H. After SAHA occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of SAHA's activities. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work. B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where necessary, referring to existing work as a standard. C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution described in Section PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication. E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations. F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at the site prior to commencing work of the section. EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

178 B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section. C. Notify OCO Architects four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to OCO Architects, SAHA, participants, and those affected by decisions made LAYING OUT THE WORK A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work. B. Promptly notify OCO Architects of any discrepancies discovered. C. shall locate and protect survey control and reference points. D. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during construction. E. Promptly report to OCO Architects the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons. F. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written notice to OCO Architects. G. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. H. Establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on site, referenced to established control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on project record documents. I. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including but limited to pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations; and concrete flatwork. 2. Grid or axis for structures. 3. Building elements including but limited to building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations, and other new construction indicated. J. Periodically verify layouts by same means. K. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. L. On completion of foundation walls and major site improvements, prepare a certified survey illustrating dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and site work GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement. B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated. D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated. E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance ALTERATIONS A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only. 1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown. EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

179 2. Report discrepancies to OCO Architects before disturbing existing installation. 3. Beginning of alterations work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. B. Keep areas in which alterations are being conducted separated from other areas that are still occupied. 1. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary dustproof partitions of construction specified in Section and as required.. 2. Provide sound retardant partitions of construction indicated on drawings in locations indicated on drawings. C. Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptions required for replacement or modifications; take care to prevent water and humidity damage. 1. Where openings in exterior enclosure exist, provide construction to make exterior enclosure weatherproof. 2. Insulate existing ducts or pipes that are exposed to outdoor ambient temperatures by alterations work. D. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. 1. Remove rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete; replace with new construction specified. 2. Remove items indicated on drawings. 3. Relocate items indicated on drawings. 4. Where new surface finishes are to be applied to existing work, perform removals, patch, and prepare existing surfaces as required to receive new finish; remove existing finish if necessary for successful application of new finish. 5. Where new surface finishes are not specified or indicated, patch holes and damaged surfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces as closely as possible. E. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, and Telecommunications): Remove, relocate, and extend existing systems to accommodate new construction. 1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment and operational components; if necessary, modify installation to allow access or provide access panel. 2. Where existing systems or equipment are not active and Contract Documents require reactivation, put back into operational condition; repair supply, distribution, and equipment as required. 3. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service. a. Disable existing systems only to make switchovers and connections; minimize duration of outages. b. See Section for other limitations on outages and required notifications. c. Provide temporary connections as required to maintain existing systems in service. 4. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities. 5. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification; patch holes left by removal using materials specified for new construction. F. Protect existing work to remain. 1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary. 2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work. 3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work. 4. Patch as specified for patching new work. G. Adapt existing work to fit new work: Make as neat and smooth transition as possible. 1. When existing finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to OCO Architects. 2. Where removal of partitions or walls results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors, EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

180 walls, and ceilings to a smooth plane without breaks, steps, or bulkheads. 3. Where a change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs in existing work, submit recommendation for providing a smooth transition for OCO Architects review and request instructions. 4. Trim existing wood doors as necessary to clear new floor finish. Refinish trim as required. H. Patching: Where the existing surface is not indicated to be refinished, patch to match the surface finish that existed prior to cutting. Where the surface is indicated to be refinished, patch so that the substrate is ready for the new finish. I. Refinish existing surfaces as indicated: 1. Where rooms or spaces are indicated to be refinished, refinish all visible existing surfaces to remain, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes. 2. If mechanical or electrical work is exposed accidentally during the work, re-cover and refinish to match. 3. Patch as specified for patching new work. 4. Where walls, ceilings etc. are affected by new construction refinish all visible existing surfaces to remain, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes. J. Clean existing systems and equipment. K. Remove demolition debris and abandoned items from alterations areas and dispose of off-site; do not burn or bury. L. Do not begin new construction in alterations areas before demolition is complete. M. Comply with all other applicable requirements of this section CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching. B. See Alterations article above for additional requirements. C. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to: 1. Complete the work. 2. Fit products together to integrate with other work. 3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services. 4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work. 5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition. 6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work. 7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. 8. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work. D. Execute cutting and patching including excavation and fill to complete the work, to uncover work in order to install improperly sequenced work, to remove and replace defective or non-conforming work, to remove samples of installed work for testing when requested, to provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work, to execute patching to complement adjacent work, and to fit products together to integrate with other work. E. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition. F. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces. G. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval. H. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. I. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. J. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with Section , to full thickness of the penetrated element. EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

181 K. Patching: 1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. 2. Match color, texture, and appearance. 3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing finish. L. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. M. Make neat transitions. Patch work to match adjacent work in texture and appearance. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. N. Patch or replace surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. Repair substrate prior to patching finish. Finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest finish as approved by Architect PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from roofs. C. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. D. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. E. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site; do not burn or bury PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations. B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. G. When possible prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. H. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible SYSTEM STARTUP A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify OCO Architects and owner seven days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage. D. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

182 E. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. F. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable personnel and manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. H. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION A. See Section Demonstration and Training ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. B. Testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems: See Section FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment. 1. Clean areas to be occupied by SAHA prior to final completion before SAHA occupancy. B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous. C. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. D. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned. E. Replace filters of operating equipment. F. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. G. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. H. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury. I. Clean SAHA-occupied areas of work CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities. 1. Provide copies to OCO Architects and SAHA. B. Accompany A/E and Owner on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for completion or correction in's Notice of Substantial Completion. C. Notify OCO Architects when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion. D. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for OCO Architects's review. E. Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion and comply with requirements for access to SAHA-occupied areas. F. Transmit written documentation that punchlist items have been corrected. G. Accompany A/E and Owner on preliminary final inspection. H. Notify OCO Architects when work is considered finally complete. EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

183 I. Complete items of work determined by OCO Architects's final inspection. END OF SECTION EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

184 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project Record Documents. B. Operation and Maintenance Data. C. Warranties and bonds RELATED REQUIREMENTS SECTION CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section General Conditions: Performance bond and labor and material payment bonds, warranty, and correction of work. B. Section Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples. C. Section Execution and Closeout Requirements: Contract closeout procedures. D. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. E. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to OCO Architects with claim for final Application for Payment. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. OCO Architects will review draft and return one copy with comments. 2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by SAHA, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance. 3. Submit one copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with OCO Architects comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission. 4. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection. C. Warranties and Bonds: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with SAHA's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. 3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

185 B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by SAHA. C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D. Record information concurrent with construction progress. E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications. F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original Contract drawings OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information. C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish: B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. C. Moisture protection and weather-exposed products: Include product data listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair. D. Additional information as specified in individual product specification sections. E. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System: 1. Description of unit or system, and component parts. 2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests. 4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts. B. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications; typed. C. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

186 D. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. E. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. F. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. G. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. H. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. I. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. J. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed. K. Provide's coordination drawings, with color coded piping diagrams as installed. L. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. M. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. N. Include test and balancing reports. O. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. B. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual. C. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers; 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. D. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents. E. Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment. F. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 24 pound paper. G. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. H. Arrange content by systems under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this Project Manual. I. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description identified, in three parts as follows: 1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of OCO Architects,, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: a. Significant design criteria. b. List of equipment. c. Parts list for each component. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

187 d. Operating instructions. e. Maintenance instructions for equipment, systems and/or sub-systems. f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. 3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: a. Shop drawings and product data. b. Air and water balance reports. c. Certificates. d. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. J. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed dividers and space for insertion of data. K. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of OCO Architects, Consultants, and with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of the volume WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with SAHA's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined. B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co-execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. E. Include originals of each in operation and maintenance manuals, indexed separately on Table of Contents. END OF SECTION CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

188 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY SECTION DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Demonstration of products and systems to be commissioned and where indicated in specific specification sections. B. Training of SAHA personnel in operation and maintenance is required for: 1. All software-operated systems. 2. HVAC systems and equipment. 3. Plumbing equipment. 4. Electrical systems and equipment. 5. Conveying systems. 6. Landscape irrigation. 7. Items specified in individual product Sections. C. Training of SAHA personnel in care, cleaning, maintenance, and repair is required for: 1. Roofing, waterproofing, and other weather-exposed or moisture protection products. 2. Finishes, including flooring, wall finishes, ceiling finishes. 3. Fixtures and fittings RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section Closeout Submittals: Operation and maintenance manuals SUBMITTALS A. See Section Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures; except: 1. Make all submittals specified in this section, and elsewhere where indicated for commissioning purposes, directly to the Commissioning Authority. 2. Submit one copy to the Commissioning Authority, not to be returned. 3. Make commissioning submittals on time schedule specified by Commissioning Authority. 4. Submittals indicated as "Draft" are intended for the use of the Commissioning Authority in preparation of overall Training Plan; submit in editable electronic format, Microsoft Word 2003 preferred. B. Draft Training Plans: SAHA will designate personnel to be trained; tailor training to needs and skill-level of attendees. 1. Submit to OCO Architects for transmittal to SAHA. 2. Submit to Commissioning Authority for review and inclusion in overall training plan. 3. Submit not less than four weeks prior to start of training. 4. Revise and resubmit until acceptable. 5. Provide an overall schedule showing all training sessions. 6. Include at least the following for each training session: a. Identification, date, time, and duration. b. Description of products and/or systems to be covered. c. Name of firm and person conducting training; include qualifications. d. Intended audience, such as job description. e. Objectives of training and suggested methods of ensuring adequate training. f. Methods to be used, such as classroom lecture, live demonstrations, hands-on, etc. g. Media to be used, such a slides, hand-outs, etc. h. Training equipment required, such as projector, projection screen, etc., to be provided by. C. Training Manuals: Provide training manual for each attendee; allow for minimum of two attendees per training session. 1. Include applicable portion of O&M manuals. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

189 2. Include copies of all hand-outs, slides, overheads, video presentations, etc., that are not included in O&M manuals. 3. Provide one extra copy of each training manual to be included with operation and maintenance data. D. Training Reports: 1. Identification of each training session, date, time, and duration. 2. Sign-in sheet showing names and job titles of attendees. 3. List of attendee questions and written answers given, including copies of and references to supporting documentation required for clarification; include answers to questions that could not be answered in original training session. 4. Include Commissioning Authority's formal acceptance of training session. E. Video Recordings: Submit digital video recording of each demonstration and training session for SAHA's subsequent use. 1. Format: DVD Disc. 2. Label each disc and container with session identification and date QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Instructor Qualifications: Familiar with design, operation, maintenance and troubleshooting of the relevant products and systems. 1. Provide as instructors the most qualified trainer of those contractors and/or installers who actually supplied and installed the systems and equipment. 2. Where a single person is not familiar with all aspects, provide specialists with necessary qualifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DEMONSTRATION - GENERAL A. Demonstrations conducted during system start-up do not qualify as demonstrations for the purposes of this section, unless approved in advance by SAHA. B. Demonstrations conducted during Functional Testing need not be repeated unless SAHA personnel training is specified. C. Demonstration may be combined with SAHA personnel training if applicable. D. Operating Equipment and Systems: Demonstrate operation in all modes, including start-up, shut-down, seasonal changeover, emergency conditions, and troubleshooting, and maintenance procedures, including scheduled and preventive maintenance. 1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion. 2. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months. E. Non-Operating Products: Demonstrate cleaning, scheduled and preventive maintenance, and repair procedures. 1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion TRAINING - GENERAL A. Commissioning Authority will prepare the Training Plan based on draft plans submitted. B. Conduct training on-site unless otherwise indicated. C. SAHA will provide classroom and seating at no cost to. D. Do not start training until Functional Testing is complete, unless otherwise specified or approved by the Commissioning Authority. E. Provide training in minimum two hour segments. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

190 F. The Commissioning Authority is responsible for determining that the training was satisfactorily completed and will provide approval forms. G. Training schedule will be subject to availability of SAHA's personnel to be trained; re-schedule training sessions as required by SAHA; once schedule has been approved by SAHA failure to conduct sessions according to schedule will be cause for SAHA to charge for personnel "show-up" time. H. Review of Facility Policy on Operation and Maintenance Data: During training discuss: 1. The location of the O&M manuals and procedures for use and preservation; backup copies. 2. Typical contents and organization of all manuals, including explanatory information, system narratives, and product specific information. 3. Typical uses of the O&M manuals. I. Product- and System-Specific Training: 1. Review the applicable O&M manuals. 2. For systems, provide an overview of system operation, design parameters and constraints, and operational strategies. 3. Review instructions for proper operation in all modes, including start-up, shut-down, seasonal changeover and emergency procedures, and for maintenance, including preventative maintenance. 4. Provide hands-on training on all operational modes possible and preventive maintenance. 5. Emphasize safe and proper operating requirements; discuss relevant health and safety issues and emergency procedures. 6. Discuss common troubleshooting problems and solutions. 7. Discuss any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation. 8. Discuss warranties and guarantees, including procedures necessary to avoid voiding coverage. 9. Review recommended tools and spare parts inventory suggestions of manufacturers. 10. Review spare parts and tools required to be furnished by. 11. Review spare parts suppliers and sources and procurement procedures. J. Be prepared to answer questions raised by training attendees; if unable to answer during training session, provide written response within three days. END OF SECTION DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

191 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Selective demolition of built site elements. SECTION DEMOLITION B. Selective demolition of building elements for alterations purposes. C. Abandonment and removal of existing utilities and utility structures RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section Available Project Information: Existing building survey conducted by SAHA; information about known hazardous materials. B. Section Summary: Limitations on's use of site and premises. C. Section Summary: Sequencing and staging requirements. D. Section Summary: Description of items to be salvaged or removed for re-use by. E. Section Temporary Facilities and Controls: Site fences, security, protective barriers, and waste removal. F. Section Product Requirements: Handling and storage of items removed for salvage and relocation. G. Section Execution and Closeout Requirements: Project conditions; protection of bench marks, survey control points, and existing construction to remain; reinstallation of removed products. H. Section Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 29 CFR U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition. B. NFPA Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations; SUBMITTALS A. See Section Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Demolition Plan: Submit demolition plan as specified by OSHA and local authorities. 1. Indicate extent of demolition, removal sequence, bracing and shoring, and location and construction of barricades and fences. 2. Identify demolition firm and submit qualifications. 3. Include a summary of safety procedures. 4. Submit completed Demolition/Renovation Notification from to the Texas Department of Health. Copy Owner/Architect. Form is located at end of Section Execution Requirements. C. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities and subsurface construction QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: Company specializing in the type of work required. 1. Minimum of 5 years of documented experience PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Minimize production of dust due to demolition operations; do not use water if that will result in ice, flooding, sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution. DEMOLITION

192 B. Comply with other requirements specified in Section PART 3 EXECUTION 2.01 SCOPE A. Remove portions of building and sitework as indicated in documents. B. Remove paving and curbs as required to accomplish new work. C. Remove other items indicated, for relocation and store in secure area. Store items indicated for relocation in a manner and climate to preserve item. D. Fill excavations, open pits, and holes in ground areas generated as result of removals, using specified fill; compact fill as required so that required rough grade elevations do not subside within one year after completion GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent structures and the public. 1. Obtain required permits. 2. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of unstable structures. 3. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. 4. Use physical barriers to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public. 5. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and occupants. 6. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit. 7. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operations. 8. Obtain written permission from owners of adjacent properties when demolition equipment will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property. B. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from SAHA. C. Do not begin removal until built elements to be salvaged or relocated have been removed. D. Do not begin removal until vegetation to be relocated has been removed and specified measures have been taken to protect vegetation to remain. E. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed. 1. Provide bracing and shoring. 2. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. 3. Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. F. If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations, stop work and notify OCO Architects and SAHA; hazardous materials include regulated asbestos containing materials, lead, PCB's, and mercury. G. Partial Removal of Paving and Curbs: Neatly saw cut at right angle to surface EXISTING UTILITIES A. Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their requirements; obtain required permits. B. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage. C. Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction. D. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use without at least 7 days prior written notification to SAHA. DEMOLITION

193 E. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing utility branches or take-offs that are in use without at least 3 days prior written notification to SAHA. F. Locate and mark utilities to remain; mark using highly visible tags or flags, with identification of utility type; protect from damage due to subsequent construction, using substantial barricades if necessary. G. Remove exposed piping, valves, meters, equipment, supports, and foundations of disconnected and abandoned utilities. H. Prepare building demolition areas by disconnecting and capping utilities outside the demolition zone; identify and mark utilities to be subsequently reconnected, in same manner as other utilities to remain SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only. 1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown. 2. Report discrepancies to OCO Architects before disturbing existing installation. 3. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would be apparent upon examination prior to starting demolition. B. Separate areas in which demolition is being conducted from other areas that are still occupied. 1. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary dustproof partitions of construction specified in Section C. Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptions required for replacement or modifications; take care to prevent water and humidity damage. D. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. 1. Remove rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete; replace with new construction specified. 2. Remove items indicated on drawings. E. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Electrical, and Telecommunications): Remove existing systems and equipment as indicated. 1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment and operational components. 2. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service. 3. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities before removal. 4. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification. F. Protect existing work to remain. 1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary. 2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work. 3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work. 4. Patch as specified for patching new work DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site. B. Remove from site all materials not to be reused on site; comply with requirements of Section Waste Management. C. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work. D. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands. END OF SECTION DEMOLITION

194 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete formwork. B. Elevated concrete slabs. C. Floors and slabs on grade. D. Concrete reinforcement. E. Joint devices associated with concrete work. SECTION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE F. Miscellaneous concrete elements, including equipment pads, light pole bases, flagpole bases, thrust blocks, and manholes REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; American Concrete Institute International; B. ACI Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002). C. ACI Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; D. ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute International; 2004 (Errata 2007). E. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; F. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; G. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1988 (Reapproved 2002). H. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2001 (Reapproved 2008). I. ACI Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International; J. ACI Guide to Formwork for Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; K. ASTM A 185/A 185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete; L. ASTM A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; M. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; N. ASTM C 39/C 39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; O. ASTM C 94/C 94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; P. ASTM C 143/C 143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; Q. ASTM C Standard Specification for Portland Cement; R. ASTM C Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; S. ASTM C 173/C 173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

195 Volumetric Method; 2008a. T. ASTM C Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; U. ASTM C Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; V. ASTM C 494/C 494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2008a. W. ASTM C Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete; 2008a. X. ASTM C 685/C 685M - Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing; Y. ASTM C 881/C 881M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete; Z. ASTM C Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete; AA. ASTM C Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete; 1999 (Reapproved 2008). AB. ASTM C 1107/C 1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink); AC. ASTM D Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type); 1998 (Reapproved 2003). AD. ASTM D Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2004 (Reapproved 2008) SUBMITTALS A. See Section Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with specified requirements. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and interface required with adjacent construction for concrete accessories QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI Maintain one copy of each document on site. B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK A. Formwork Design and Construction: Comply with guidelines of ACI 347 to provide formwork that will produce concrete complying with tolerances of ACI 117. B. Form Materials: Contractor's choice of standard products with sufficient strength to withstand hydrostatic head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances. 1. Form Facing for Exposed Finish Concrete: Contractor's choice of materials that will provide smooth, stain-free final appearance. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

196 2. Form Coating: Release agent that will not adversely affect concrete or interfere with application of coatings. 3. Form Ties: Cone snap type that will leave no metal within 1-1/2 inches of concrete surface REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60 (420). 1. Type: Deformed billet-steel bars. 2. Finish: Unfinished, unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain type. 1. Mesh Size and Wire Gage: As indicated on drawings. C. Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage. 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during concrete placement. 3. Provide stainless steel, galvanized, plastic, or plastic coated steel components for placement within 1-1/2 inches of weathering surfaces CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I - Normal portland type. 1. Acquire all cement for entire project from same source. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C Acquire all aggregates for entire project from same source. C. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. D. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of cement. B. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C 260. C. High Range Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type G. D. High Range Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type F. E. Water Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type E. F. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type D. G. Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type C. H. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type B. I. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type A ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Chemical Hardener: Fluosilicate solution designed for densification of cured concrete slabs. B. Non-Shrink Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M; premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents. C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171; regular curing paper, white curing paper, clear polyethylene, white polyethylene, or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. D. Liquid Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, clear or translucent BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS A. Latex Bonding Agent: Non-dispersible acrylic latex, complying with ASTM C 1059 Type II. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

197 B. Epoxy Bonding System: Complying with ASTM C 881/C 881M and of Type required for specific application. C. Joint Filler: Nonextruding, resilient asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, complying with ASTM D 1751, 1/4 inch thick and 4 inches deep; tongue and groove profile. D. Joint Filler: Compressible asphalt mastic with felt facers, complying with ASTM D 994, 1/4 inch thick and 4 inches deep. E. Slab Construction Joint Devices: Combination keyed joint form and screed, galvanized steel, with minimum 1 inch diameter holes for conduit or rebars to pass through at 6 inches on center; ribbed steel stakes for setting. 1. Provide removable plastic cap strip that forms wedge-shaped joint for sealant installation CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI recommendations. B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI and at rates recommended by manufacturer. D. Normal Weight Concrete: 1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M at 28 days: As indicated on drawings. 2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 25 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 3. Total Air Content: 4 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C 173/C 173M. 4. Maximum Slump: 5 inches. 5. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1 inch. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section PREPARATION A. Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design and fabricate forms to support all applied loads until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete. B. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent. C. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. D. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Use epoxy bonding system for bonding to damp surfaces, for structural load-bearing applications, and where curing under humid conditions is required. 2. Use latex bonding agent only for non-load-bearing applications INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and accurately position, support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverage required for protection. B. Install welded wire reinforcement in maximum possible lengths, and offset end laps in both directions. Splice laps with tie wire. C. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with concrete placement. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

198 3.04 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R. C. Notify Architect not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations. D. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement. E. Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with joint filler. F. Place joint filler in floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. G. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/2 inch of finished slab surface. Conform to Section for finish joint sealer requirements. H. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. I. Install construction joint devices in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. J. Install joint device anchors for expansion joint assemblies specified in Section Maintain correct position to allow joint cover to be flush with floor and wall finish. K. Apply sealants in joint devices in accordance with Section L. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. M. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints. N. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur. O. Screed floors level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/4 inch in 10 ft CONCRETE FINISHING A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork. B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. C. Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. Provide finish as follows: 1. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Wet concrete and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive, not more than 24 hours after form removal. 2. Grout Cleaned Finish: Wet areas to be cleaned and apply grout mixture by brush or spray; scrub immediately to remove excess grout. After drying, rub vigorously with clean burlap, and keep moist for 36 hours. D. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows: 1. Surfaces to Receive Thick Floor Coverings: "Wood float" as described in ACI 302.1R; thick floor coverings include quarry tile, ceramic tile, and terrazzo with full bed setting system. 2. Surfaces to Receive Thin Floor Coverings: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 301.1R; thin floor coverings include carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring, thin set quarry tile, and thin set ceramic tile. 3. Decorative Exposed Surfaces: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 302.1R; use steel-reinforced plastic trowel blades instead of steel blades to avoid black-burnish marks; decorative exposed surfaces include surfaces to be stained or dyed, pigmented concrete, surfaces to be polished, and all other slab surfaces. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

199 a. Steel-Reinforced Plastic Trowel Blade Manufacturer: Wagman Metal Products Inc: CURING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308R. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. 1. Normal concrete: Not less than 7 days. 2. High early strength concrete: Not less than 4 days. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period. D. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: 1. Slabs and Floors To Receive Adhesive-Applied Flooring: Curing compounds and other surface coatings are usually considered unacceptable by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. If such materials must be used, either obtain the approval of the flooring and adhesive manufacturers prior to use or remove the surface coating after curing to flooring manufacturer's satisfaction. 2. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep continuously moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water-saturated sand, water-fog spray, or saturated burlap. 3. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry. a. Moisture-Retaining Cover: Seal in place with waterproof tape or adhesive. b. Curing Compound: Apply in two coats at right angles, using application rate recommended by manufacturer FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm. C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of concrete operations. D. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance with specified requirements. E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 150 cu yd or less of each class of concrete placed. F. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. G. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTM C 143/C 143M DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor within 24 hours of test. B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified. D. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect for each individual area. END OF SECTION CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

200 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY SECTION EXISTING CONCRETE FLOORS TO RECEIVE POLISHED CONCRETE FINISH A. Section Includes: All equipment and labor, tools and training for the contracted work including a surface survey and a report resulting in the determination of the extent of the repairs required. B. Base Bid: Polished Concrete - L&M/FGS PermaShine Concrete Finishing System at designated areas Related Sections: A. Section Joint Sealants 1.03 REFERENCES A. Valid and current certificate of training for FGS PermaShine installer. B. ACI Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute. C. ACI 302.1R -- Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute. D. NFSI Test Method 101-A - National Floor Safety Institute Standard for evaluating high traction flooring materials, coatings and finishes.. E. ASTM C779, Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01300, Administrative Requirements. B. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer s descriptive literature, product specifications and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for each product. 2. Submit a letter of certification from the National Floor Safety Institute confirming the system has been tested and passed phase two level of certification when tested by method 101-A. 3. Preparation and concrete polishing procedures. 4. Number of applications of the FGS Hardener Plus liquid. 5. Joint filling, crack repair and/or surface repair products and protocols. 6. Maintenance Data: provide data on maintenance renewal of applied coatings. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate typical layout including dimensions and floor polishing schedule. 2. Plan view of the floor and joists clearly marked for the work and the sealer QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer s Qualification: Company specializing in products and procedures specified in this Section. B. Installer Qualifications: Acceptable to Manufacturer with documented current FGS certificate and performance on projects of a similar nature. C. Mock up 1. Provide mock-up area under conditions similar to the existing concrete that is to be ground and polished, at least 50 square feet. 2. Locate where directed. 3. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work if satisfactory and protected from damage. EXISTING CONCRETE FLOORS TO RECEIVE POLISHED CONCRETE FINISH

201 1.06 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene pre-installation meeting seven days prior to commencing work of this section. Assure purchase of specified materials for fielding sample work or mock-ups DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Prevent damage of contamination of materials by water, freezing, foreign matter and other causes in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Protect packaging and product and from damage and loss WARRANTY A. Warrant installed units to be free from defects in material and workmanship for one year. B. Include coverage for the use of FGS Conditioner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with this specification acceptable manufacturers are, but not limited to the following: 1. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc Calhoun Road, Omaha, NE Toll Free (800) Mr. C.M. Deke Rife.. B. Substitutions: Section Product Requirements MANUFACTURER, PRODUCTS AND INSTALLER A. Acceptable Products and Manufacturers: 1. FGS Hardener Plus, Alkaline siliconate, liquid type, hardener, sealer and densifier by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. Omaha, NE. 2. Joint Tite 750, polyurea polymer, semi-rigid joint filler by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. Omaha, NE. 3. Petrotex, Oil repellent sealer by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. Omaha, NE. 4. FGS Concrete Conditioner, liquid type, by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. Omaha, NE. 5. FGS Installer: StoneCare of Texas, Lookout Run, San Antonio, Texas 78233; Telephone (210) , Fax (210) , , website:. B. Substitutions: Section Product Requirements EQUIPMENT A. As approved by the system manufacturer. B. Mechanical plural component pumps for joint and crack filler material CONCRETE POLISHING PROCEDURES (Existing Concrete Floors) A. First grind to be done by coarse grit metal bond diamond that will be dependant on condition and hardness of concrete. B. Grind with 150 metal bond diamonds. C. Grind with 300 metal bond diamonds. D. Polish with 400 grit phenolic diamonds. E. Polish with 800 grit phenolic diamonds. F. Two applications of FGS Hardener Plus liquid as applied by certified FGS installers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION EXISTING CONCRETE FLOORS TO RECEIVE POLISHED CONCRETE FINISH

202 A. Examine conditions and proceed with work only when acceptable to installer and manufacturer. B. Verify that concrete surfaces are acceptable to receive the work of this section. Acceptance of consistency of Pre-Polished concrete surfaces to be mutually agreed upon by all parties including FGS Installer before work is to commence PREPARATION A. Work to be done after completion of demolition and before the start of renovation. B. Examine the surface to determine soundness of the concrete for polishing. C. Remove all surface contamination to permit effective polishing FLOOR SURFACE TREATMENT A. Install in accordance with manufacturer s printed instructions and approved drawings. B. Install with waterless polishing and airborne concrete dust-free conditions. C. Install hardener/sealer to treated floor surfaces in accordance with manufacturer s instructions FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection by manufacturer s representative for proper installation CLEANING A. Early in the life of a FGS PermaShine treated floor, scrub daily with white pads, tampico-palmyra bristles or similar. B. Cleaning solution is FGS Concrete Conditioner liquid by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. Omaha, NE, recommended. END OF SECTION EXISTING CONCRETE FLOORS TO RECEIVE POLISHED CONCRETE FINISH

203 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING A. Structural steel framing members, support members and struts. B. Base plates, shear stud connectors and expansion joint plates. C. Grouting under base plates RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section Metal Fabrications: Steel fabrications affecting structural steel work. B. Section Painting and Finishes: Finished paint coat for exterior and interior structural steel PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. See Section Unit Prices, for additional unit price requirements. B. Structural Steel Framing: 1. Basis of Payment: Includes structural members fabricated, placed and anchored REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AISC (MAN) - Steel Construction Manual; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; B. AISC S303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; C. AISC S348 - Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts; D. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; E. ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; F. ASTM A Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold Finished; G. ASTM A 123/A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; H. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; I. ASTM A Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, PSI Tensile Strength; 2007b. J. ASTM A Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; K. ASTM A Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat-Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2008b. L. ASTM A 500/A 500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; M. ASTM A 529/A 529M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural Quality; N. ASTM A Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts; 2007a. O. ASTM A 572/A 572M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel; P. ASTM A 992/A 992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes; 2006a. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

204 Q. ASTM C 1107/C 1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink); R. ASTM E 94 - Standard Guide for Radiographic Examination; S. ASTM E Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Contact Examination of Weldments; T. ASTM E Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination; U. ASTM E Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing; V. ASTM F Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers; W. ASTM F Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners; 2007a. X. ASTM F Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength; 2007a. Y. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; American Welding Society; Z. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; AA. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004) SUBMITTALS A. See Section Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of structural members, openings, attachments, and fasteners. 2. Connections not detailed. 3. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. C. Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC "Steel Construction Manual." B. Comply with Section 10 of AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for architecturally exposed structural steel. C. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years of documented experience. D. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years of documented experience. E. Design connections not detailed on the drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel Angles and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel W Shapes and Tees: ASTM A 992/A 992M. C. Rolled Steel Structural Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M. D. Cold-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. E. Steel Plate: ASTM A 514/A 514M. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

205 F. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Designation SS, Grade 30 hot-rolled, or ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation SS, Grade 30 cold-rolled. G. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B, Finish black. H. Structural Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, ASTM A 307, Grade A galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C. I. High-Strength Structural Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, medium carbon, galvanized. J. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, plain, with matching ASTM A 563 or A 563M nuts and ASTM F 436 Type 1 washers. K. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, plain. L. Load Indicator Washers: Provide washers complying with ASTM F 959 at all connections requiring high-strength bolts. M. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. N. Grout: Non-shrink, non-metallic aggregate type, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M and capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 28 days. O. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. P. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible. B. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. Grind exposed welds smooth. C. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors FINISH A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 2. B. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field welded, in contact with concrete, or high strength bolted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that the work may properly proceed ERECTION A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges". B. Allow for erection loads, and provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure in safe condition, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. C. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings. D. Use carbon steel bolts only for temporary bracing during construction, unless otherwise specifically permitted on drawings. Install high-strength bolts in accordance with AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts". E. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect. F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

206 with concrete. G. Grout solidly between column plates and bearing surfaces, complying with manufacturer's instructions for nonshrink grout. Trowel grouted surfaces smooth, splaying neatly to 45 degrees TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section B. High-Strength Bolts: Provide testing and verification of field-bolted connections in accordance with AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts", testing at least 10 percent of bolts at each connection. C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect all field-welded connections and test at least 10 percent of welds using one of the following: 1. Radiographic testing performed in accordance with ASTM E Ultrasonic testing performed in accordance with ASTM E Liquid penetrant inspection performed in accordance with ASTM E Magnetic particle inspection performed in accordance with ASTM E 709. END OF SECTION STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

207 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION METAL FABRICATIONS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Metal Bar Grating 2. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 3. Loose steel lintels. 4. Steel framing and supports for countertops. 5. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 6. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 7. Metal edgings. 8. Miscellaneous metal trim. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for structural-steel framing system components. 2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for metal framing anchors and other rough hardware SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Paint products. 2. Grout. B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 1. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." 3. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other construction, verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. METAL FABRICATIONS

208 1.06 COORDINATION Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting. A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Plates: ASTM: A283 C. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304. D. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304. E. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D. F. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793. G. Steel Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing. H. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. I. Slotted Channel Framing: ASTM A 653, Grade 33 J. Malleable-Iron Castings: ASTM A 47, Grade K. Gray-Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. L. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials capable of sustaining, without failure, the load imposed within a safety factor of 4, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M. M. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded PAINT A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 Section "Painting." B. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. METAL FABRICATIONS

209 C. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Organic zinc-rich primer, complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Carboline 621; Carboline Company. b. Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer ; PPG Industries, Inc. c. Tnemec-Zinc 90-97; Tnemec Company, Inc. D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except containing no asbestos fibers, or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D FASTENERS A. General: Provide Type 304 or 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. D. Machine Screws: ASME B E. Lag Bolts: ASME B F. Wood Screws: Flat head, carbon steel, ASME B G. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ASME B H. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ASME B I. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. J. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble-wing type, class and style as needed GROUT A. Nonshrink, Metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, ferrous-aggregate grout complying with ASTM C 1107, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy-duty loading applications. B. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications CONCRETE FILL A. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. METAL FABRICATIONS

210 B. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs. C. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. E. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. G. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening up of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. I. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. J. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces. K. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. B. Galvanize plates after fabrication LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A. Fabricate loose structural-steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. B. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated. C. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to one-twelfth of clear span, but not less than 8 inches, unless otherwise indicated. D. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports that are not a part of structural-steel framework as necessary to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. METAL FABRICATIONS

211 1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors 1-1/4 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 8 inches long at 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 3. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed. C. Fabricate supports for operable partitions as follows: 1. Beams: Continuous steel shapes of sizes indicated with attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as indicated. Drill bottom flanges of beams to receive partition track hanger rods; locate holes where indicated on operable partition Shop Drawings. D. Supports for gymnasium equipment and gym divider curtain: 1. Fabricate supports in profiles and size recommended by gym equipment and gym divider curtain manufacturer. 2. Verify size and attachment of members with structural engineer registered in State of Texas prior to fabrication and installation MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints, and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. Provide anchors, welded to trim, for embedding in concrete or masonry construction, spaced not more than 6 inches from each end, 6 inches from corners, and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. C. Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim in the following locations: 1. Exterior. 2. Interior, where indicated FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below: 1. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES A. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. B. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece. METAL FABRICATIONS

212 C. Bright, Directional Polish: No. 4 finish. D. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, unspecified). C. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating mm or thicker) complying with AAMA PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal fabrications to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. E. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint SETTING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings, if any. B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure. METAL FABRICATIONS

213 C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns. 1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated at girders supported on concrete or masonry, install as specified above for setting and grouting bearing and leveling plates. D. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column baseplates as specified above for setting and grouting bearing and leveling plates. 1. Do not grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders until girders are installed and leveled ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness. B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION METAL FABRICATIONS

214 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preservative treated wood materials. B. Fire retardant treated wood materials. C. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing. SECTION ROUGH CARPENTRY D. Communications and electrical room mounting boards. E. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports. F. Miscellaneous wood nailers, furring, and grounds RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section Toilet Accessories: Accessories requiring blocking REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AFPA (WFCM) - Wood Frame Construction Manual for One- and Two-Family Dwellings; American Forest and Paper Association; B. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; C. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; D. AWPA C2 - Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties -- Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood Protection Association; E. AWPA C9 - Plywood -- Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood Protection Association; F. AWPA C27 - Plywood -- Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood-Protection Association; G. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood-Protection Association; H. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; I. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); SUBMITTALS A. See Section Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that wood products supplied for rough carpentry meet or exceed specified requirements QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection agencies. B. Exposed-to-View Rough Carpentry: Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements, in lieu of grade stamping. C. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating compliance with specified requirements. ROUGH CARPENTRY

215 D. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, or installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements. 2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee ( and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated. B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted DIMENSION LUMBER A. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. B. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. C. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3. D. Miscellaneous Blocking, Furring, and Nailers: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Wall Sheathing: Plywood, PS 1, Grade C-D, Exposure I. B. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood, or medium density fiberboard; 3/4 inch thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. C. Other Applications: 1. Plywood Concealed From View But Located Within Exterior Enclosure: PS 1, C-C Plugged or better, Exterior grade. 2. Plywood Exposed to View But Not Exposed to Weather: PS 1, A-D, or better. 3. Other Locations: PS 1, C-D Plugged or better. 4. Electrical Component Mounting: APA rated sheathing, fire retardant treated ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of sheathing. 3. Anchors: toggle bolt, expansion anchor or other means of anchorage required to provide secure and permanent installation as required by substrate. ROUGH CARPENTRY

216 2.05 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards. B. Preservative Treatment: 1. Manufacturers: a. Arch Wood Protection, Inc: b. Chemical Specialties, Inc: c. Osmose, Inc: d. Substitutions: See Section Product Requirements. C. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category UC3B, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft retention. 1. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. 2. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Treat lumber less than 18 inches above grade. 4. Treat lumber when used as blocking for exterior doors, windows and storefront systems. 5. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Plywood Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category UC2 and UC3B, Commodity Specification F using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft retention. a. Kiln dry plywood after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. b. Treat plywood in contact with masonry or concrete. c. Treat plywood less than 18 inches above grade. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. C. Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and spacing indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes and AFPA Wood Frame Construction Manual BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm bearing and staggered, using nails, screws, or staples. B. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center on all edges and into studs in field of board. ROUGH CARPENTRY

217 1. At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire-rated assembly. 2. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board parallel to studs. 3. Install adjacent boards without gaps TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum. B. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum CLEANING A. Waste Disposal: Comply with the requirements of Section Comply with applicable regulations. 2. Do not burn scrap on project site. 3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated. 4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation facilities or waste-to-energy facilities. B. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill. C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system. END OF SECTION ROUGH CARPENTRY

218 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wood Cabinets B. Plastic Laminate Countertops. C. Cabinet hardware. D. Factory finishing RELATED REQUIREMENTS SECTION ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK A. Section Painting and Coating: Site finishing of miscellaneous shelving exterior REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A American National Standard for Basic Hardboard; B. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2005, 8th Ed., Version 2.0. C. BHMA A American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2003 (ANSI/BHMA A156.9). D. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; E. NHLA G Rules for the Measurement & Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress; National Hardwood Lumber Association; F. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; G. WI (MAN) - Manual of Millwork; Woodwork Institute; SUBMITTALS A. See Section Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes. C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories. D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material indicated. 1. Shop-applied transparent finishes. 2. Plastic laminates. E. Samples for Verification: Submit actual samples of architectural cabinet construction, minimum 12 inches square, illustrating proposed cabinet, countertop, and shelf unit substrate and finish. F. Samples: Submit actual sample items of proposed pulls, hinges, shelf standards, and locksets, demonstrating hardware design, quality, and finish QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Custom quality, unless other quality is indicated for specific items. ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

219 B. Perform cabinet construction in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Custom quality, unless other quality is indicated for specific items, and also as indicated on drawings (i.e. solid plywood construction of all cabinets and shelving). C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. E. NO PARTICLE BOARD OR MEDIUM DENSITY FIBERBOARD ALLOWED. F. Manufacturer Qualifications: Member in good standing of the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) and familiar with the AWI/AWMAC QSI. G. Quality Certification: Provide inspection and quality certification of completed custom cabinets in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Quality Certification Program MOCK-UP A. Provide mock-up of typical base cabinet, wall cabinet, and countertop, including hardware, finishes, and plumbing accessories. B. Locate where directed. C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene not less than one week before starting work of this section DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect units from moisture damage FIELD CONDITIONS A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy. B. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

220 1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, fabricators offering interior architectural woodwork that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Terrill Manufacturing 2. Timber Casework 3. The Koehler Company 4. The Roy Baring Company B. Substitutions: See Section Product Requirements WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted LUMBER MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: White Birch or White Maple, plain sawn C. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Eastern white pine, or western white pine D. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay. 2. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1. E. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Per Fabricator PANEL MATERIALS A. Exposed Surfaces: NIST PS 1; APA A-A Grade, plain-sliced white birch or white maple face veneer, Interior rated adhesives, core of plywood, thickness as indicated. 1. Concealed Surfaces: NIST PS 1; APA A-B Grade, plain-sliced white birch or white maple face veneer, Interior rated adhesives, core of plywood, thickness as required. B. Hardboard: AHA A135.4; Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, Class 1 - Tempered, 1/4 inch thick, smooth two sides (S2S); use for drawer bottoms, dust panels, and other components indicated on drawings LAMINATE MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Formica Corporation: 2. Panolam Industries International, Inc\Nevamar: 3. Wilsonart International, Inc: 4. Substitutions: See Section Product Requirements. B. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): NEMA LD 3, types as recommended for specific applications and as follows: 1. Horizontal Surfaces: HGS, inch nominal thickness, color as selected, finish as selected. 2. Vertical Surfaces: VGS, inch nominal thickness, color as selected, finish as selected. 3. Post-Formed Horizontal Surfaces: HGP, inch nominal thickness, color as selected, finish as selected. ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

221 2.06 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for high-pressure decorative laminate countertops. B. Preformed countertops with integral backsplash and end pieces. C. Grade: Custom D. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGP. E. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes in the following categories: F. Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts. G. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces H. Core Material: Exterior-grade plywood I. Core Material at Sinks: exterior-grade plywood. J. Edge Treatment: Pre formed cove splash and front ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application. B. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized or chrome-plated finish in concealed locations and stainless steel, or chrome-plated finish in exposed locations. D. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. E. Grommets: Standard plastic, painted metal, or rubber grommets for cut-outs, in color to match adjacent surface HARDWARE A. Hardware: BHMA A156.9, types as recommended by fabricator for quality grade specified. B. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using recessed metal shelf standards and coordinated self rests, polished chrome finish, for nominal 1 inch spacing adjustments. C. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch (70-mm), 5-knuckle satin chrome steel hinges made from inch- (2.4-mm-) thick metal allowing 270 degree swing D. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard back-mounted system using surface mounted metal shelf standards and coordinated cantilevered shelf brackets, satin chrome finish, for nominal 1 inch spacing adjustments. E. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, steel with satin finish, 4 inch centers. F. Catches: Magnetic. G. Drawer Slides: 1. Type: Standard extension. 2. Static Load Capacity: 75 lb capacity or greater. 3. Mounting: Side mounted. 4. Stops: Integral type. 5. Manufacturers: a. Accuride International, Inc: ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

222 b. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company: c. Substitutions: See Section Product Requirements WOOD CABINETS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for wood cabinets. B. Grade: Custom C. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay D. Reveal Dimension: 1/2 inch. E. Wood Species and Cut for Exposed Surfaces: White birch, plain sawn or sliced 1. Grain Matching: Run and match grain vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels 2. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Random match. 3. Retain subparagraph below in addition to one option in subparagraph above only for large pieces or decorative, four-way matching. See Evaluations. 4. Vertical Matching of Veneer Leaves: End match. 5. Veneer Matching within Panel Face: Center match. 6. Veneer Matching within Room: Provide cabinet veneers in each room or other space from a single flitch with doors, drawer fronts, and other surfaces matched in a sequenced set with continuous match where veneers are interrupted perpendicular to the grain. F. Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Compatible species to that indicated for exposed surfaces, stained to match. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber, stained to match species indicated for exposed surfaces 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood G. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers, unless located directly under tops. H. I. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Prime paint cut edges FACTORY FINISHING A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. B. For opaque finishes, apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations and sand smooth. C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler matching or blending with surrounding surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes. D. Finish work in accordance with WIC Manual of Millwork, Section 5, System #1a - Nitrocellulose Lacquer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming INSTALLATION ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

223 A. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level. B. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. C. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units. D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. E. Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. F. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces. G. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. 2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 3. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. and to walls with adhesive. 4. Caulk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust installed work. B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly CLEANING A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures. B. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. C. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. END OF SECTION ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

224 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Custom wood veneer paneling. B. Site finishing RELATED REQUIREMENTS SECTION WOOD-VENEER PANELING A. Section Rough Carpentry: Grounds and concealed blocking. B. Section Painting and Coating: Site finishing of wood veneer faced paneling REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; B. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2005, 8th Ed., Version 2.0. C. HPVA HP-1 - American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood; Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; 2004 (ANSI/HPVA HP-1) SUBMITTALS A. See Section Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, surface graining elevations of sheet paneling, fastening methods, joining methods, and interruptions to other work, to a minimum scale of 1-1/2 inch to 1 ft. Include plan of panel number sequencing. C. Product Data: Provide data on fire retardant treatment materials and application instructions. D. Samples: Submit two samples of finished plywood, 12 x 12 inch in size, illustrating wood grain and specified finish QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire retardant requirements MOCK-UP A. Construct mock-up, 4 feet long by 7 feet tall, illustrating full panel sheet, edge trim, joint trim, applied finish, and reglets. B. Locate where directed. C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect work from moisture damage. B. Do not deliver wood materials to project site until building is fully enclosed and interior temperature and humidity are in accordance with recommendations of AWI Quality Standards Illustrated. PART 2 PRODUCTS WOOD-VENEER PANELING

225 2.01 WOOD-BASED MATERIALS - GENERAL A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted SHEET MATERIALS A. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1 Grade B Type II; Graded in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Quality Standards Illustrated, Economy quality; veneer core, type of glue recommended for application; White maple face species, plain sliced; of grain quality suitable for transparent finish ADHESIVES AND FASTENERS A. Adhesives: Type suitable for intended purpose, complying with applicable air quality regulations. B. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application; exposed finish in concealed locations and concealed finish in exposed locations ACCESSORIES A. Aluminum Reglets: Reglets to match profiles and sizes indicated. B. Wood Filler: Tinted to match surface finish color WOOD TREATMENT PROCESSES A. Fire Retardant Treatment (FR-S Type) for Lumber: Chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing flame spread index of 25, maximum, and smoke developed index of 450, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E SHOP TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIALS A. Provide UL approved identification on fire retardant treated material FABRICATION A. Fabricate to AWI/AWMAC Quality Standards Illustrated Custom quality, of Flush design. B. Fabricate panels with book matching between adjacent leaves. C. Prepare panels for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings. D. Finish exposed edges of panels as specified by grade requirements. E. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting and scribing. F. Sand work smooth, ready for finishing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. C. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work INSTALLATION A. Install work in accordance with requirements of AWI/AWMAC Quality Standards Illustrated for specified grade. B. Do not begin installation until wood materials have been fully acclimated to interior conditions as recommended by AWI/AWMAC Quality Standards Illustrated. C. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. WOOD-VENEER PANELING

226 D. Where necessary to cut and fit on site, scribe work abutting other components. Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal gaps. E. Set exposed fasteners, fill with wood filler, and finish to match panel finish. F. Touch up damaged finish to match original, using materials provided by fabricator; replace components that cannot be refinished like new PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING A. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth. B. Site Finishing: Refer to Section TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch. END OF SECTION WOOD-VENEER PANELING

227 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION METAL ROOF PANELS A. Structural roofing system of preformed steel panels. B. Fastening system. C. Factory finishing. D. Accessories and miscellaneous components RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section Structural Steel Framing: Roof framing and purlins. B. Section Joint Sealers: Field-installed sealants REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; B. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; C. ASTM A 792/A 792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process; 2006a. D. ASTM E Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; E. ASTM E Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 1995 (Reapproved 2003). F. ASTM E Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems; 1995 (Reapproved 2003). G. UL Standard for Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies; SUBMITTALS A. See Section Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 2. Installation methods. 3. Specimen warranty. C. Shop Drawings: Include layouts of roof panels, details of edge and penetration conditions, spacing and type of connections, flashings, underlayments, and special conditions. 1. Show work to be field-fabricated or field-assembled. 2. Include structural analysis signed and sealed by qualified structural engineer, indicating conformance of roofing system to specified loading conditions. D. Selection Samples: For each roofing system specified, submit color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. E. Verification Samples: For each roofing system specified, submit samples of minimum size 12 inches square, representing actual roofing metal, thickness, profile, color, and texture. F. Test Reports: Indicate compliance of preformed metal roofing system to specified requirements. METAL ROOF PANELS

228 G. Warranty: Submit specified manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in SAHA's name and are registered with manufacturer QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of roofing systems similar to those required for this project, with not less than 5 years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company trained and authorized by roofing system manufacturer DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide strippable plastic protection on prefinished roofing panels for removal after installation. B. Store roofing panels on project site as recommended by manufacturer to minimize damage to panels prior to installation WARRANTY A. See Section Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Finish Warranty: Provide manufacturer s special warranty covering failure of factory-applied exterior finish on metal roof panels and agreeing to repair or replace panels that show evidence of finish degradation, including significant fading, chalking, cracking, or peeling within specified warranty period of 5 year period from date of Substantial Completion. C. Waterproofing Warranty: Provide manufacturer s warranty for weathertightness of roofing system, including agreement to repair or replace roofing that fails to keep out water within specified warranty period of 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers are: 1. Architectural Building Components Series 200 DL 2. AEP Span, SpanSeam 3. MBCI, SuperLok InterLok. B. Substitutions: See Section Product Requirements STRUCTURAL ROOF PANELS A. Engineering: Provide panel assemblies designed to safely support design loads at support spacing indicated, with deflection not to exceed 1/180 of the span when tested in accordance with ASTM E Dead Loads: Weight of roofing system. 2. Live Loads: As required by ASCE 7. B. Performance Requirements: Provide complete roofing assemblies, including roof panels, clips, fasteners, connectors, and miscellaneous accessories, tested for conformance to the following minimum standards: 1. Overall: Complete weathertight system tested and approved in accordance with ASTM E Wind Uplift: Class 90 wind uplift resistance of UL Air Infiltration: Maximum 0.06 cfm/sq ft at air pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq ft, when tested according to ASTM E Water Penetration: No water penetration when tested according to procedures and recommended test pressures of ASTM E Perform test immediately following air infiltration test. 5. Thermal Movement: Design system to accommodate without deformation anticipated thermal movement over ambient temperature range of 100 degrees F. C. Metal Roofing: Factory-formed panels with factory-applied finish. 1. Steel Panels: METAL ROOF PANELS

229 a. Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated SS (structural steel) sheet conforming to ASTM A 792/A 792M; minimum AZ50 coating. b. Steel Thickness: Minimum inch. 2. Profile: Standing seam, with minimum 1.0 inch seam height; concealed fastener system for field seaming with special tool. 3. Texture: Smooth. 4. Length: Full length of roof slope, without lapped horizontal joints. 5. Width: Maximum panel coverage of 16 inches ATTACHMENT SYSTEM A. Concealed System: Provide manufacturer's standard stainless steel or nylon-coated aluminum concealed anchor clips designed for specific roofing system and engineered to meet performance requirements, including anticipated thermal movement PANEL FINISH A. 24-Gauge Galvalume steel, treated, primed and finished under precision conditions ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS A. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Items: Provide flashings, gutters, downspouts, trim, moldings, closure strips, preformed crickets, caps, and equipment curbs of the same material, thickness, and finish as used for the roofing panels. Items completely concealed after installation may optionally be made of stainless steel. B. Rib and Ridge Closures: Provide prefabricated, close-fitting components of steel with corrosion resistant finish, closed-cell synthetic rubber, neoprene, or PVC, or combination steel and closed-cell foam. C. Sealants: As specified in Section Exposed sealant must cure to rubber-like consistency. 2. Concealed sealant must be non-hardening type. 3. Seam sealant must be factory-applied, non-skinning, non-drying type FABRICATION A. Panels: Fabricate panels and accessory items at factory, using manufacturer s standard processes as required to achieve specified appearance and performance requirements. B. Joints: Factory-install captive gaskets, sealants, or separator strips at panel joints to provide weathertight seals, eliminate metal-to-metal contact, and minimize noise from panel movements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation of preformed metal roof panels until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify OCO Architects of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding PREPARATION A. Coordinate roofing work with provisions for roof drainage, flashing, trim, penetrations, and other adjoining work to assure that the completed roof will be free of leaks. B. Remove protective film from surface of roof panels immediately prior to installation. Strip film carefully, to avoid damage to prefinished surfaces. C. Separate dissimilar metals by applying a bituminous coating, self-adhering rubberized asphalt sheet, or other permanent method approved by roof panel manufacturer. D. Where metal will be in contact with wood or other absorbent material subject to wetting, seal joints with sealing compound and apply one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint. METAL ROOF PANELS

230 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Overall: Install roofing system in accordance with approved shop drawings and panel manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, as applicable to specific project conditions. Anchor all components of roofing system securely in place while allowing for thermal and structural movement. 1. Install roofing system with concealed clips and fasteners, except as otherwise recommended by manufacturer for specific circumstances. 2. Minimize field cutting of panels. Where field cutting is absolutely required, use methods that will not distort panel profiles. Use of torches for field cutting is absolutely prohibited. B. Accessories: Install all components required for a complete roofing assembly, including flashings, gutters, downspouts, trim, moldings, closure strips, preformed crickets, caps, equipment curbs, rib closures, ridge closures, and similar roof accessory items. C. Roof Panels: Install panels in strict accordance with manufacturer s instructions, minimizing transverse joints except at junction with penetrations. 1. Form weathertight standing seams incorporating concealed clips, using an automatic mechanical seaming device approved by the panel manufacturer CLEANING A. Clean exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove grease and oil films, excess joint sealer, handling marks, and debris from installation, leaving the work clean and unmarked, free from dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, or other damage to the finish PROTECTION A. Do not permit storage of materials or roof traffic on installed roof panels. Provide temporary walkways or planks as necessary to avoid damage to completed work. Protect roofing until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged roof panels or accessories before date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION METAL ROOF PANELS

231 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sealants and joint backing RELATED REQUIREMENTS SECTION JOINT SEALERS A. Section Concrete Paving: Sealants required in conjunction with paving. B. Section Cast Stone for location of joints to receive sealant. C. Division 15 and 16 - Firestopping: Firestopping sealants. D. Section Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories. E. Section Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic sealant. F. Section Tiling: Sealant used as tile grout REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; B. ASTM C Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; C. ASTM C Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; D. ASTM D Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Foam (Closed-Cell); SUBMITTALS A. See Section Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics. C. Samples: Submit two samples, 1x1 inch in size illustrating sealant colors for selection. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of each referenced document covering installation requirements on site. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years experience MOCK-UP A. Provide mock-up of sealant joints in conjunction with window under provisions of Section B. Construct mock-up with specified sealant types and with other components noted. C. Locate where directed. D. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation COORDINATION JOINT SEALERS

232 A. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section WARRANTY A. See Section Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Silicone Sealants: 1. GE Plastics; Product Ultrapruf: 2. Pecora Corporation; Product 864,890: 3. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems; Product Omniseal: 4. Substitutions: See Section Product Requirements. B. Polyurethane Sealants: 1. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems; Product NP1, NP2, SL1, SL2: 2. Tremco; Product Vulkem 921, Dymeric Substitutions: See Section Product Requirements. C. Acrylic Sealants: 1. Tremco Global Sealants; Product Mono 555: 2. Substitutions: See Section Product Requirements. D. Butyl Sealants: 1. Tremco; Product Butyl. 2. Substitutions: See Section Product Requirements. E. Acrylic Emulsion Latex Sealants: 1. Tremco; Product Tremflex Substitutions: See Section Product Requirements SEALANTS A. General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Acrylic, solvent release curing; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M, G, and A; single or multi- component. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Applications: Use for: a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry. b. Joints between concrete and other materials. c. Joints in cast stone. d. Joints between metal frames and other materials. e. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated. B. Exterior Metal Lap Joint Sealant: Butyl or polyisobutylene, nondrying, nonskinning, noncuring. 1. Product: Butyl manufactured by Tremco. 2. Applications: Use for: a. Concealed sealant bead in sheet metal work. b. Concealed sealant bead in siding overlaps. C. General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF single component, paintable. 1. Product: Tremflex 834 manufactured by Tremco. 2. Applications: Use for: a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints. b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces. JOINT SEALERS

233 c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated. D. Bathtub/Tile Sealant: White silicone; ASTM C 920, Uses I, M and A; single component, mildew resistant. 1. Applications: Use for: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces. b. Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces. E. Concrete Paving Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C 920, Class 25, Uses T, I, M and A; single component. 1. Color: Gray. 2. Applications: Use for: a. Joints in sidewalks and vehicular paving. F. Acrylic Emulsion Latex: ASTM C 834, single component, non-staining, non-bleeding, non-sagging. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces, Type OP (opaque). 2. Movement Capability: 2 to 5 percent. 3. Grade: ASTM C 834 Grade minus 18 degrees C 4. Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to Applications: Use for: a. Painted interior joints. G. Acrylic Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses NT, M, A, O; single component, solvent curing, non-staining, non-bleeding, non-sagging. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 12-1/2 percent. 3. Service Temperature Range: -13 to 180 degrees F. 4. Shore A Hardness Range: 25 to Applications: Use for: a. Window perimeter interior. H. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses NT, M, A, G, O; single component, solvent release, non-skinning, non-sagging. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Product: Butyl Sealant manufactured by Tremco. 3. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 12-1/2 percent. 4. Service Temperature Range: -13 to 180 degrees F. 5. Shore A Hardness Range: 10 to Applications: Use for: a. Secondary glazing. b. Bedding Thresholds. c. Metal laps and flashings ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. JOINT SEALERS

234 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C C. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Width/depth ratio of 2:1. 2. Neck dimension no greater than 1/3 of the joint width. 3. Surface bond area on each side not less than 75 percent of joint width. D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. G. Tool joints concave. H. Precompressed Foam Sealant: Do not stretch; avoid joints except at corners, ends, and intersections; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface CLEANING A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces PROTECTION A. Protect sealants until cured. END OF SECTION JOINT SEALERS

235 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non-fire-rated steel frames RELATED REQUIREMENTS SECTION HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. Section Door Hardware: Hardware and weatherstripping REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI/ICC A American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; B. ANSI A SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; C. ANSI A Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 1998 (R2004). D. BHMA A Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; E. DHI A115 Series - Specifications for Steel Doors and Frame Preparation for Hardware; Door and Hardware Institute; 2000 (ANSI/DHI A115 Series). F. NAAMM HMMA Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; SUBMITTALS A. See Section Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of referenced grade standard. C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and identifying location of different finishes, if any QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Frames: 1. Assa Abloy Ceco, Curries, or Fleming: 2. Ceco Door Products; Product : 3. Substitutions: See Section Product Requirements STEEL DOOR FRAMES A. Requirements for All Frames: 1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSI/ICC A HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

236 2. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with bhma a , with reinforcement welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard. 3. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent. B. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire-Rated: Knock-down type. 1. Grade: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250.8 for Level 1, 18 gage 2. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions. B. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop-assembled frames FINISH MATERIALS A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. C. Coordinate installation of hardware TOLERANCES A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edges, crossed corner to corner. END OF SECTION HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

237 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION FLUSH WOOD DOORS A. Flush wood doors; flush configuration; non-rated RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section Hollow Metal Frames. B. Section Door Hardware. C. Section Glazing. D. Section Painting and Coating: Site finishing of doors REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Quality Standards: 1. WDMA Industry Standard I.S. 1-A-97 (Window & Door Manufacturers Association). 2. AWI Quality Standards 7th Edition, Version ANSI A115. W Series, Wood Door Hardware Standards. (American National Standard Institute) 4. WIC - Wood Work Institute of California (1998) B. Labeling Agencies 1. Intertek Testing Services-Warnock Hersey (ITS-WH) C. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition SUBMITTALS A. See Section Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics. C. Specimen warranty. D. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts required, special beveling, special blocking for hardware, factory machining criteria, factory finishing criteria, identify cutouts for glazing. E. Samples for Initial Selection: Color charts consisting of actual materials in small sections for the following: 1. Faces of Factory-Finished Doors: Show the full range of colors available for stained finishes. F. Samples for Verification: 1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the finished work. G. Manufacturer's Full Lifetime Warranty, executed in SAHA's name QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of the specified door quality standard on site for review during installation and finishing. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. C. Meet or exceed WDMA I.S.1-A Premium Grade and/or AWI Version 7 Custom Grade DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING FLUSH WOOD DOORS

238 A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products under provisions of WDMA, AWI and manufacturer's instructions. B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's standard packaging. Inspect for damage upon receipt. C. Do not store in damp or wet areas or in areas where light might cause oxidization. D. HVAC systems should be operating and balanced prior to arrival of doors. Acceptable humidity shall be no less than 25% nor greater than 55%. E. Break seal on packages while at site to permit ventilation PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period WARRANTY A. See Section Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. B. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation. C. Provide warranty for the following term: 1. Interior Doors: Life of installation. D. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, telegraphing core construction, and construction. E. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 1. Eggers Industries: 2. Graham 3. Algoma 4. VT Industries 5. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc; Product : 6. Buell Door Co.. 7. Substitutions: See Section Product Requirements DOORS A. All Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements. 1. Quality Level: Premium Grade with A grade veneer, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Section Wood Veneer Faced Doors: White Birch or White Maple, 5-ply unless otherwise indicated. B. Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction. 1. Provide solid core doors at all locations. 2. Wood veneer facing for field transparent finish DOOR AND PANEL CORES A. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type bonded particleboard, 33 lb density core, plies and faces as indicated above DOOR FACINGS FLUSH WOOD DOORS

239 A. Wood Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: Species as specified above, veneer grade as specified by quality standard, rotary cut, book veneer match pairs, running assembly match; unless otherwise indicated. 1. Vertical Edges: Any option allowed by quality standard for grade DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified. B. Cores Constructed with stiles and rails: C. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing. D. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing. E. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. F. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge clearances in accordance with specified quality standard. 1. Exception: Doors to be field finished. G. Provide edge clearances in accordance with AWI Quality Standards Illustrated Section FACTORY FINISHING - WOOD VENEER DOORS A. Factory finish doors in accordance with specified quality standard: 1. Transparent Finish: Transparent catalyzed polyurethane, Premium quality, satin sheen. B. Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Reject doors with defects. D. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard. B. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door. C. Field-Finished Doors: Trimming to fit is acceptable. D. Adjust width of non-rated doors by cutting equally on both jamb edges. 1. Trim maximum of 3/4 inch off bottom edges. E. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4 inch (19 mm). F. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware. G. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware TOLERANCES A. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances. B. Conform to specified quality standard for maximum diagonal distortion. C. Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, top to bottom, over an imaginary 36 by 84 inches surface area. FLUSH WOOD DOORS

240 D. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, edge to edge, over an imaginary 36 by 84 inches surface area ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement. B. Adjust closers for full closure SCHEDULE - See Drawings END OF SECTION FLUSH WOOD DOORS

241 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION COILING COUNTER DOORS A. Non-fire-rated coiling counter doors and operating hardware RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section Rough Carpentry: Openings. B. Section Gypsum Board Assemblies: Openings REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; B. ASTM A 123/A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; C. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; D. ASTM A Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; E. ASTM B Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; F. ASTM B 221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; SUBMITTALS A. See Section Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's standard literature showing materials and details of construction and finish. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate rough and actual opening dimensions, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and installation details. D. Samples: Submit two slats, 4 inches long illustrating shape, color and finish texture. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation sequence and installation, adjustment, and alignment procedures. F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Indicate modes of operation, lubrication requirements and frequency, and periodic adjustments required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Coiling Counter Doors: 1. Cornell Iron Works 2. Overhead Door Company 3. Substitutions: See Section Product Requirements COILING COUNTER DOORS A. Coiling Counter Doors, Non-Fire-Rated: Stainless steel slat curtain. 1. Mounting: Exterior face mounted. 2. Nominal Slat Size: 1-1/4 inches wide. COILING COUNTER DOORS

242 2.03 MATERIALS 3. Slat Profile: Flat. 4. Finish: No. 4. A. Curtain Construction: Interlocking, single thickness slats. 1. Slat Ends: Alternate slats fitted with end locks to act as wearing surface in guides and to prevent lateral movement. 2. Curtain Bottom: Fitted with angles to provide reinforcement and positive contact in closed position. 3. Stainless Steel Slats: ASTM A 666, Type 304; minimum thickness 22 gage, 0.03 inch. B. Guide Construction: Continuous, of profile to retain door in place, with mounting brackets of same metal. 1. Guides for Galvanized Curtains: ASTM A 36/A 36M steel angles, size as indicated, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 123/A 123M. C. Hood Enclosure: Internally reinforced to maintain rigidity and shape. D. Latching: Inside mounted, sliding deadbolt. E. Roller Shaft Counterbalance: Steel pipe and torsion steel spring system, capable of producing torque sufficient to ensure smooth operation of curtain from any position and capable of holding position at mid-travel; with adjustable spring tension; requiring 25 lb nominal force to operate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable INSTALLATION A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress. C. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural members only. D. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation TOLERANCES A. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Variation From Level: 1/16 inch. D. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 ft straight edge ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation CLEANING A. Clean installed components. B. Remove labels and visible markings. END OF SECTION COILING COUNTER DOORS

243 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Automatic sliding doors, with frames. B. Actuators and safety devices. C. Maintenance REFERENCE STANDARDS SECTION AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES A. BHMA A American National Standard for Power Operated Pedestrian Doors; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2005 (ANSI/BHMA A156.10). B. BHMA A American National Standard for Power Assist and Low Energy Power Operated Doors; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2007 (ANSI/BHMA A156.19). C. ANSI Z Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings. D. UL (ECMD) - Electrical Construction Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. E. UL Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; SUBMITTALS A. See Section Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate layout and dimensions; head, jamb, and sill conditions; elevations; components, anchorage, recesses, materials, and finishes, electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 2. Identify installation tolerances required, assembly conditions, routing of service lines and conduit, and locations of operating components and boxes. C. Product Data: Provide data on system components, sizes, features, and finishes. D. Samples: Submit two samples of exposed to view hardware, and attachment hardware. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and manufacturer's hardware and component templates. F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of concealed equipment, services, and conduit. G. Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's parts list and maintenance instructions for each type of hardware and operating component. H. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports from UL and ICBO indicating doors comply with specified performance requirements. I. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit manufacturer's field reports from AAADM certified technician of inspection and approval of doors for compliance with ANSI/BHMA after completion of installation. J. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in SAHA's name and registered with manufacturer. K. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for SAHA's use in maintenance of project. 1. Wrenches and other tools required for maintenance of equipment QUALITY ASSURANCE AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES

244 A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. B. Member: American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (AAADM). C. Door, frame, operator, and sensor components from same manufacturer. D. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than ten years of documented experience. E. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum two years of experience. 1. AAADM certified. 2. Approved by manufacturer for installations of the type indicated DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site protected from damage. B. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Handling: Protect materials and finish from damage during handling and installation ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not install product until all environmental conditions specified in writing by the manufacturer are met WARRANTY A. See Section Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a year period after Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Automatic Entrance Door Manufacturers are but not limited to: 1. Besam Entrance Solutions: 2. Horton Automatics: 3. NABCO Entrances Inc: 4. Substitutions: See Section Product Requirements SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Doors Powered to Open Position: 1. Doors powered by DC electric motor and mechanical gear assembly transmitted to active leaves by fiberglass-reinforced tooth drive belt for silent operation. Doors using roller chain, cable, or hydraulic devices shall not be accepted. 2. Power door to open position by signals received by microprocessor from the actuation controls. 3. The last portion of the opening cycle shall be controlled by a microprocessor generated signal that electronically reduces voltage to motor until door is fully open. Door systems that use microswitches shall not be accepted. 4. To permit safe passage if an obstruction is detected between opening doors and surrounding walls or interior fittings, the doors shall immediately stop and after a delay go to the full closed position. Door systems that only monitor the door travel while closing shall not be acceptable. B. Doors Powered to Closed Position: 1. The active leafs will only be powered to closed position when all actuating devices are cleared and after remaining in the open position for a preset time delay (per ANSI ). 2. The last portion of the closing cycle shall be controlled by a microprocessor generated signal that electronically reduces voltage to the motor until door is fully closed. 3. To permit safe passage between closing doors, the doors immediately reverse to open position if an obstruction is detected, then resume their interrupted movement at low speed to check AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES

245 whether the obstruction has disappeared or not. Door systems that only monitor the door travel while opening shall not be acceptable. C. Emergency Breakaway: 1. Full Breakout System: Interior sliding active leaves and sidelites swing out from any position in sliding mode. 2. Breakaway Pressure: Field adjustable to building code requirements and in accordance with ANSI/BHMA maximum of 50 pounds. D. Watchdog Monitoring: 1. Microprocessor Software: Constantly monitor drive train system operations. 2. Watchdog Control Circuit: Assume command of system and shut down automatic function by holding doors open, should door speed, motor function, or drive train operations deviate from design criteria ranges. 3. Secondary Supervisory Circuit: Monitor main Watchdog control circuit every 255 door cycles, ready to perform as a backup. Door systems that do not monitor control circuits every 255 cycles will not be accepted. E. Energy Saving Device: 1. Switch: Recessed in interior header cover. a. Door Opening Settings: Off, exit only, 2-way traffic, partial opening, and hold fully open. b. Partial Opening Mode: Switch reduces total door opening to reduce conditioned air loss. c. Heavy Weather Pile: Between doors and sidelites and between emergency breakaway hardware and door stiles. F. Provide with After Hour locking PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide doors that have been designed and fabricated to comply with specified performance requirements, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's corresponding standard systems. B. Compliance: 1. ANSI/BHMA ANSI/UL 325 listed. 3. Air Infiltration per ASTM E Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across Specimen. a. Fixed sidelite: static pressure air infiltration conducted at 0.57 psf with a 0.6 cfm/ft² result and 1.57 psf with a 1.1 cfm/ft² result. b. Full breakout: static pressure air infiltration conducted at 0.57 psf with a.07 cfm/ft² result and 1.57 psf with a 1.3 cfm/ft² result. 4. Structural Performance (wind load) per ASTM E Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. Testing conducted at positive and negative loads. a. Fixed sidelite: 50 psf b. Full breakout: 37 psf 5. Forced Entry Resistance per AAMA Voluntary Specifications for Forced Entry Resistant Aluminum Sliding Glass Doors. C. Automatic door equipment accommodates medium to heavy pedestrian traffic. D. Automatic door equipment accommodates up to following weights for active leaf doors: 1. Bi-Part Doors: 220 pounds per active leaf. 2. Single Slide Doors: 330 pounds per active leaf. E. Operating Temperature Range: -31 F to 122 F (-35 C to 50 C). F. Motion and Presence Detection System: Uses planar K-band microwave technology to detect motion and focused active infrared technology to detect presence, in a single housing ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES

246 A. Doors and Frames: Extruded aluminum, Alloy 6063-T5. 1. Hydraulic dampers (optional): provide 90 degree stop and cushion door upon opening and closing during emergency breakout conditions. B. Glass: 1. Glazing Material: ANSI Z Active Leaves: 5/8-inch glass insulating units 3. Sidelites: 1-inch glass insulating units - fixed sidelite units only. 4. Field-glazed or preglazed. C. Door Operation: 1. Shall be Besam UniSlide Door System with UltraView Technology for bi-part or single slide directional operation. In compliance with NFPA 101, all panels shall allow breakout to the full open position to provide instant egress at any point in the door's movement. To allow safe egress, automatic operation shall be discontinued when any panels are in the breakout mode. Doors and sidelites shall be sized to prevent pinch points at meeting stiles. D. Aluminum Frame and Extrusions: 1. Shall be a consistent.125 wall thickness throughout the entire extruded member including and not exclusive to, the integral structural sections to maintain the integrity of the overall extruded shape. Glass stops shall have.062-wall thickness. Door systems with less than.125 wall thickness or with.125 nominal thicknesses will not be accepted. E. Sidelites: 1. Provide sidelites to dimension heights and widths as shown on construction documents with corresponding glazing. All sidelites shall have interlocking, nested intermediate rails to prevent twisting and separation. The sidelites shall swing out and allow the sliding doors to breakout to the full open position for instant egress at any point in the door's movement per NFPA 101. F. Header Case: Shall be a Besam 7 x 6-5/8 architecturally enhanced extruded aluminum profile with recessed UltraView sensors on each side to meet ANSI A Header shall be capable of supporting bi-parting doors of 220 pounds per leaf over a span of 14'-0 without intermediate supports when using ¼ glass. Operator shall be capable of handling doors up to 220 pounds. It shall contain door operator and door mounting components. The header shall be a closed design to reduce infiltration of airborne contaminants and debris which may inhibit proper operation and facilitate increased service requirements. Headers with visible underside carrier openings of 1/2 or greater, whether in the open or closed positions, shall not be accepted. G. Roller Composition: 1. Shall consist of two (2) steel roller wheels per door leaf having a 1-3/4 diameter with single journal sealed oil-impregnated bearings to ensure roller life on a replaceable Delrin track to reduce service cost from normal usage and incorporate self-aligning anti-risers to ensure proper panel positioning. Rollers of any urethane composition shall not be accepted. The assembly shall allow the sliding doors to swing outward and facilitate emergency egress in accordance with NFPA 101. H. Stiles: Wide - 5. I. Pivots: Top and bottom concealed pivots, extruded aluminum. J. Hardware: Breakaway. K. Exterior Glazing Stop Extrusion: Nonremovable, security-type glazing bead to prevent unauthorized entry. Doors utilizing removable exterior stops will not be accepted. AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES

247 2.05 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS A. Automatic Sliding Door: Single leaf track-mounted, electric operation, extruded aluminum glazed door, with frame, and operator concealed overhead. B. Automatic Sliding Door System: Shall be Besam UniSlide System. The system shall consist of sliding aluminum doors, header, operator, threshold track and actuating controls. The Besam header will include the UltraView Motion and Presence Sensor Control System that is self-monitoring and communicates with the UniSlide through a monitoring connection. The self-monitoring connection allows the door to go into a failsafe mode in the event of a sensor or monitoring failure. Door systems that do not employ a fail-safe self-monitoring system will not be acceptable. C. Overhead-concealed, electro-mechanical, microprocessor-controlled, sliding door operator. D. Operator housing, floor rollers, and door carriers. E. Dimensions, Field Verify actual openings: 1. Sliding Aluminum Doors: Provide door units to dimension heights and widths with corresponding stile glazing as shown on construction documents. Glass stops as specified shall be available for all door panels and transom. The bi-part sliding door system shall include a two-point lock securing the lead edges of the door stiles together and to the hanger assembly. All doors shall have horizontal door extrusions, including optional muntins, with the design characteristic to nest or interlock into the intersecting vertical member. This design feature is to restrict any twisting or movement of the horizontal member that can produce open sightlines and / or compromise the door leaf integrity. The door package shall include security ball catches that latch the swing out panels in the closed position when the sliding doors are in the fully closed position. The active sliding door shall be provided with a key cylinder on the exterior and a thumb turn on the interior in accordance with NFPA Clear Doorway Opening Width: As indicated on the drawings. 3. Overall Frame Width: As indicated on the drawings. 4. Masonry Opening Width: As indicated on the drawings. 5. Active and Sidelite Leaf Width: As indicated on the drawings. 6. Clear Door Opening Height: As indicated on the drawings. 7. Overall Frame Height: As indicated on the drawings. 8. Masonry Opening Height: As indicated on the drawings. 9. Active and Sidelite Leaf Height: As indicated on the drawings. F DOOR OPERATORS A. Door Operators - General Requirements: Comply with BHMA A156.10, BHMA A156.19, and UL 325, as applicable. B. Door Operator and Controller: 1. Shall be a Besam electro-mechanical controlled unit. The operator shall integrate a high-efficiency, energy efficient, DC motor requiring a minimum of 3 A current draw, allowing 5 door systems on one 20 A circuit. The supplied system shall have the capability to operate at full performance well beyond a brown out and high line voltage conditions (85V - 265V) sensing changes and adjusting automatically. The operator shall be of the type to allow an adjustable hold open time delay of 0 to 60 second having internal software to incorporate a self-diagnostic system. 2. Microprocessor Control Box: a. Besam factory-adjusted configuration, with opening and closing speeds set to comply with ANSI A requirements. Should the drive train operations deviate from design criteria ranges, Watchdog Control Circuit Monitoring will assume command of the system and shut down the automatic function allowing a secondary supervisory circuit to perform as a backup. C. Accessories: 1. The UniSlide Automatic Sliding Door System shall have the following accessories to reduce AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES

248 2.07 AIR INFILTRATION energy loss: Adjustable nylon sweep(s) on the bottom of the sliding door(s), double pile weather stripping for the sliding door lead edges, single pile weather stripping between the carrier and the header on the lead stile(s) of the sidelight(s) and the pivot stile(s) of the sliding door(s), and a selector switch located on the interior side of the unit to allow door(s) to open at full or reduced width according to weather and traffic conditions. A. Weatherstripping: All active door panel weatherstripping shall be concealed, finned-pile STRUCTURAL PERFORMANCE (WIND LOAD COMPLIANCE) AND FORCED ENTRY RESISTANCE A. Locking shall be independent 2 pt- locking system in each active leaf and include exterior key cylinder and interior thumb turn. B. Threshold shall be aluminum, ½ x 4-1/2 running full width of package. Lead-up: optional MOTION AND PRESENCE SENSOR CONTROL DEVICE A. Model: The BEA Wizard Sliding Door Sensing SystemBesam UltraView 1. The focused active infrared shall be used for the purpose of presence detection in and around the door threshold area. The presence technology shall overlap the motion pattern. The active infrared is comprised of 96 spots of detection made out of four rows of 24 spots of detection each (two rows on each side of the door). The system is built on numerous object-tracking algorithms. Any object is tracked while in the infrared presence zone as well as in the threshold area. The focused active infrared (safety zone) remains active even during the closing cycle of the door to EXCEED guidelines as outlined in ANSI A a. Sensors not using focused active infrared technology and object- tracking algorithms will not be accepted. b. Before EVERY closing cycle, the UltraView sensor is questioned by the door control microprocessor to assure the sensor is functioning properly. If the Ultraview sensor does not reply per pre-programmed operational settings, the doors are prevented from closing. Sensors that do not have this capability will not be accepted. B. Motion Sensor: 1. Shall be a Besam UltraView sensor utilizing K-band (24.125GHz) microwave technology to detect motion and focused active infrared technology to detect presence, in a single recessed housing within each side of the header. The microwave portion of the sensor will be capable of bi-directional, uni-directional or both sensing capabilities while having a self-monitoring ability to communicate with the sliding door through a monitoring connection. The infrared curtains shall have a self-adaptation time of 30 seconds minimum that will enable the sensor to learn permanently changed environments. The unit shall have the design characteristics to operate within a temperature range of -30 F to 131 F (-34 C to 55 C). K-band microwave technology provides prompt activation and reduces door hold open time to the minimum required by ANSI, thus reducing internal environmental temperature interference. One-way traffic applications shall use two microwave patterns on the re-entry side. One large pattern will trigger the activation circuit, and one small pattern will be routed to the safety circuit. The smaller pattern is adjustable to meet ANSI A secondary activation requirements. C. Adjustments: 1. At no additional cost to the owner, manufacturer must furnish with close out documents, any special tools or devises that may be required for setup and / or service to equipment. 2. Adjustments by remote control or manually by push button. 3. LED indications to aid in the positioning of the infrared curtain. Proper LED indication shall signify compliance to applicable ANSI standard for safety pattern ELECTRICAL A. High-Efficiency DC Motor: Maximum of 3 A current draw. Allow for 5 operators to run on one 20 Amp line. AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES

249 B. Power: Self-detecting line voltage capable control. 120 V through 240V, 50/60 Hz, 3 A incoming power with solid-earth ground connection for each door system. 5 door systems on one 20 A circuit. C. Wiring: Separate channel raceway free from moving parts. D. Brown out/high voltage capability: System has capability to operate at full performance well beyond brown out and high line voltage conditions (85V - 265V) sensing changes and adjusting automatically. E. Convenience Battery: Shall be concealed in header and capable of full operation with blackout conditions, including sensor capabilities for typically 100 cycles ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Anodized: Clear, AA-C22A31. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that electric power is available and is of the correct characteristics. C. Examine and measure areas to receive doors. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent utilization of doors. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected PREPARATION A. Ensure openings to receive frames are plumb, level, square, and in tolerance. B. Ensure proper support has been provided at operator header. C. Ensure floor is level and smooth INSTALLATION A. Ensure openings to receive frames are plumb, level, square, and in tolerance Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ANSI/BHMA See Section Execution Requirements, for additional requirements relating to maintenance service Install exterior doors to be weathertight in closed position Manufacturer's Field Services: A. Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as approved by Architect. B. Clean doors promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. ADJUSTING 4.01 Adjust door equipment for correct function and smooth operation CLEANING 4.04 Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined by Architect. REMOVE TEMPORARY PROTECTION, CLEAN EXPOSED SURFACES Provide service and maintenance of operating equipment for one year from Date of Substantial AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES

250 Completion, at no extra charge to SAHA. DEMONSTRATE OPERATION, OPERATING COMPONENTS, ADJUSTMENT FEATURES, AND LUBRICATION REQUIREMENTS. ADJUST DOORS FOR PROPER OPERATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS AND ANSI/BHMA Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage glass or finish. MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE 9.01 MAINTENANCE A. The manufacturer shall offer a dispatch procedure that shall be available 24 hours per day, 365 days per year to facilitate proper service capability. B. A geographically assigned installation provider shall be trained and certified to provide maintenance service. C. The manufacturer shall offer a dispatch procedure that shall be available 24 hours per day, 365 days per year to facilitate proper service capability. D. A geographically assigned installation provider shall be trained and certified to provide maintenance service. 1. Contact number for service provider shall be prominently displayed on header of each operator. E. Contact number for service provider shall be prominently displayed on header of each operator FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Services: 1. Manufacturer's representative shall provide technical assistance and guidance for installation of doors. 2. Before placing doors in operation, AAADM certified technician shall inspect and approve doors for compliance with ANSI/BHMA Certified technician shall be approved and trained by manufacturer ADJUSTING 9.04 CLEANING A. Clean doors promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage glass or finish PROTECTION END OF SECTION Adjust doors for proper operation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ANSI/BHMA AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES

251 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum-framed storefront, with vision glass. B. Aluminum doors. C. Weatherstripping. D. Perimeter sealant RELATED REQUIREMENTS SECTION ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS A. Section Metal Fabrications: Steel attachment devices. B. Section Metal Window Panels: Infill Panels. C. Section Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials. D. Section Door Hardware: Hardware items other than specified in this section. E. Section Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories. F. Section Horizontal Louver Blinds: Attachments to framing members REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AA DAF-45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes; The Aluminum Association, Inc.; B. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; C. AAMA Field Check of Metal Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems for Water Leakage; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2003 (part of AAMA 501). D. AAMA Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; E. AAMA Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; F. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American Society of Civil Engineers; G. ASTM B Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; H. ASTM B Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; I. ASTM B 221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; J. ASTM E Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; K. ASTM E Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; L. ASTM E Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2009) PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS

252 A. Design and size components to withstand the following load requirements without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330, using loads 1.65 the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load. 1. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of ASCE Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, with full recovery of glazing materials. 3. Deflection of framing members in a direction normal to wall plane is limited to 1/175 of clear span or 3/4 inch, whichever is smaller, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Static-Pressure Test Performance: Provide entrance and storefront systems that do not evidence material failures, structural distress, failure of operating components to function normally, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of clear span when tested according to ASTM E 330. B. Glazing: Physically and thermally isolate glazing from framing members. C. Glazing-to-Glazing Joints: Provide glazing-to-glazing joints that accommodate thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and system, prevent glazing-to-glazing contact, and maintain required edge clearances. D. Thermally Broken Construction: Provide systems that isolate aluminum exposed to exterior from aluminum exposed to interior with a material of low thermal conductance. E. Dead Loads: Provide entrance and storefront-system members that do not deflect an amount which will reduce glazing bite below 75 percent of design dimension when carrying full dead load. 1. Provide a minimum 1/8-inch clearance between members and top of glazing or other fixed part immediately below. 2. Provide a minimum 1/16-inch clearance between members and operable windows and doors. F. Live Loads: Provide entrance and storefront systems, including anchorage, that accommodate the supporting structures' deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads indicated without failure of materials or permanent deformation. G. Structural-Support Movement: Provide entrance and storefront systems that accommodate structural movements including, but not limited to, sway and deflection. H. Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and deflection of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. I. Average Thermal Conductance: Provide storefront systems with average U-values of not more than 0.63 when tested according to AAMA J. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 6.24 psf as measured in accordance with ASTM E 283. K. Condensation Resistance Factor: CRF of not less than 45 when measured in accordance with AAMA L. Water Penetration: Provide entrance and storefront systems that do not evidence water leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of inward-acting wind-load design pressure as defined by ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. Water leakage is defined as follows: 1. Uncontrolled water infiltrating systems or appearing on systems' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained back to the exterior and cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes is not water leakage. M. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system. ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS

253 N. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 180 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements. O. Dimensional Tolerances: Provide entrance and storefront systems that accommodate dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction SUBMITTALS A. See Section Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, internal drainage details. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required. D. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating that materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with sealants; include joint sealant manufacturers' written interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion. E. Samples: Submit two samples 24x24 inches in size illustrating finished aluminum surface, glass, infill panels, glazing materials. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the products supplied meet or exceed the specified requirements. G. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified requirements. H. Report of field testing for water leakage QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems with minimum five years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to assume engineering responsibility and perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing entrance and storefront systems similar to those required for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer. 1. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for entrance and storefront systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of entrance and storefront system through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Mockups: Before installing entrance and storefront systems, construct mockups for each form of construction and finish required to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for completed Work. 1. Locate mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect 7 days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before proceeding with installation of systems. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. a. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial Completion may become part of the completed Work PROJECT CONDITIONS ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS

254 A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating systems without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene at an appropriate time before starting work of this section DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10. B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation WARRANTY A. See Section Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a two year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide two year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units, including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units. Failures include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. 2. Adhesive sealant failures. 3. Cohesive sealant failures. 4. Failure of system to meet performance requirements. 5. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 6. Failure of operating components to function normally. 7. Water leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas. 8. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Vistawall Architectural Products; Product Series B. Columbia Commercial Building Products; Product: 2" X 4 1/2" Thermo Flush Glaze (1") C. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Kawneer North America: 2. United States Aluminum Corp: 3. Substitutions: See Section Product Requirements STOREFRONT A. Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with infill, and related flashings, back plates, angles, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Glazing Position: Front-set. 2. Vertical Mullion Dimensions: 2 inches wide by 4-1/2 inches deep. 3. Water Leakage Test Pressure Differential: lbf/sq ft. 4. Air Infiltration Test Pressure Differential: 1.57 psf. 5. Finish: Class II natural anodized MATERIALS ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS

255 A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). B. Exposed Flashings: inch thick aluminum sheet; finish to match framing members. C. Concealed Flashings: inch thick galvanized steel. D. Perimeter Sealant: Specified in Section E. Glass: As specified in Section FINISHES A. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. B. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating or AAMA 612 clear anodic coating with electrolytically deposited organic seal; not less than 0.7 mils thick. C. Touch-Up Materials: As recommended by coating manufacturer for field application STEEL PRIMING A. Retain this Article for steel reinforcement. Revise to suit Project. B. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying primer. C. Surface Preparation: Perform manufacturer's standard cleaning operations to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel. D. Priming: Apply manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment STEEL PRIMING A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying primer. B. Surface Preparation: Perform manufacturer's standard cleaning operations to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel. C. Priming: Apply manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment HARDWARE A. Door Hardware: As specified in Section FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. D. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals with bituminous paint. E. Fabricate components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior. F. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS

256 G. Reinforce components internally for door hardware. H. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads. I. Finishing: Apply factory finish to all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies. J. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in completed assemblies, including joint edges. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. B. Entrances: Fabricate door framing in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to support imposed loads. Factory assemble door and frame units and factory install hardware to greatest extent possible. Reinforce door and frame units as required for installing hardware indicated. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before finishing components. 1. Exterior Doors: Provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. At other locations, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge. C. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this section. D. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of entrance and storefront systems. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Interior Doors: Provide ANSI/BHMA A silencers at stops to prevent metal to metal contact. Provide 3 silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and 2 silencers on head of double-door frames INSTALLATION A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. E. Install entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack. Lubricate operating hardware and other moving parts according to hardware manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Install surface-mounted hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. F. G. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. H. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam. I. Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads to sill flashing. J. Set continuous sill members and flashing in a full sealant bed to provide weathertight construction, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." K. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. L. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS

257 M. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure. N. Install glass and infill panels in accordance with Section and Section 07420, using glazing method required to achieve performance criteria. O. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section P. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. Q. Install secondary-sealant weatherseal according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to provide weatherproof joints. Install joint fillers behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft, whichever is less Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch. A. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section Quality Requirements, for independent testing and inspection requirements. Inspection will monitor quality of installation and glazing. B. Test installed storefront for water leakage in accordance with AAMA C. Repair or remove and replace Work that does not meet requirements or that is damaged by testing; replace to conform to specified requirements ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation CLEANING A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer. END OF SECTION ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS

258 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Translucent daylighting system 1.02 REFERENCES SECTION STRUCTURED POLYCARBONATE PANEL ASSEMBLIES A. ASTM D Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position. B. ASTM E 84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. ASTM D Ignition Temperature of Plastics D. ASTM D Density of Smoke 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph. B. Exposure Category: designed to required category. 1. Maximum Allowable Deflection of Structural Members: Maximum of L/100 of clear span SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, including materials, components, fabrication, finish, and installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, including plans, elevations, sections, and details, indicating dimensions, tolerances, profiles, anchorage, connections, fasteners, hardware, provisions for expansion and contraction, drainage, flashing, finish, and attachments to supports of glazing, framing, and options. D. Samples: Submit manufacturer's samples for each glazing type, framing system, finish, and color specified. E. Manufacturer's Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification that materials comply with specified requirements and are suitable for intended application. F. Manufacturer's Project References: Submit list of completed projects including project name and location, name of architect, and type of daylighting manufactured. G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard warranty. H. Testing Reports: Submit manufacturer's test reports. 1. Fire tests 2. Air infiltration test 3. Water penetration test 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: 1. Continuously engaged in translucent insulated daylighting manufacturing with a minimum of 10 years successful experience. 2. Able to demonstrate successful performance on comparable projects. 3. Responsible for all components, including structural design. B. Installer's Qualifications: 1. Authorized by manufacturer to install translucent glazing products Trained by manufacturer's standard training methods and policies. STRUCTURED POLYCARBONATE PANEL ASSEMBLIES

259 C. Approved Manufacturers: 1. All manufacturers acceptable for use on this project must be approved prior to bid. Manufacturers must submit evidence of compliance with all performance criteria specified including test reports. Any exceptions taken from this specification must be noted on the approval request. If approval is given, product performance will be as specified. Should non-compliance be subsequently discovered, the previously given approval will be invalidated and use of the product on the project will be disallowed. Requests for approval, with all appropriate submittal data and samples must be received no less than 15 days prior to bid date. A list of all approved manufacturers and products will be issued by addendum. No other manufacturers will be acceptable. No verbal approval will be given DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name, manufacturer, and location of installation. B. Storage: 1. Store materials in a clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Keep temporary protective coverings in place. 3. Do not expose panels to direct sunlight for extended periods WARRANTY PART 2 A. Warranty Period: Ten years on weatherization starting on date of substantial completion. PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Subject to comliance with the specifications manufacturer's are but not limited to: 1. Duo-Gard Industries Inc 2.02 GLAZING A. Product: Series 2500, base plate and low profile pressure cap system glazed with 20mm polycarbonate structured sheet. Glass fiber reinforced thermoset resin (fiberglass) faces are not acceptable. 1. Sheet Thicknesses: 20 mm. 2. Profile: 6-wall 3. Color: manufacturers opal (match existing as close as possible) 4. U-Value, ASTM C 236: Light Transmission, ASTM D 1003: 40 percent (opal). 6. Fire Tests: 7. Flame Spread, ASTM E 84: Class A 8. Smoke Density, ASTM E 84: Class A 9. Smoke Developed, ASTM D 635: CC1 10. Ignition Temperature, ASTM D Density of smoke, ASTM D Water penetration, ASTM E : There shall be no penetration when tested with differential pressure of 600 Pa equal to 2.4 column of water, with water spraying of the external surface of 120 l/hm2 equal to 990 l/h total average. 13. Air infiltration, ASTM E : Total leakage shall not exceed 0.14 CFM / S.F. of surface area per the air leakage test of the total surface area at a differential positive pressure of 2.09 PSF equal to 4.01 column of water and at 1,000 Pa. Total leakage shall not exceed CFM / S.F. of surface area per the air leakage test of the total surface at a differential negative pressure of 1.46 PSF equal to 3.01 column of water and at 700 Pa. 14. Sheet widths: inches 15. UV stabilization technology on both sides (top and bottom) of the glazing sheet MATERIALS A. Glazing Panels: STRUCTURED POLYCARBONATE PANEL ASSEMBLIES

260 1. Panels: Polycarbonate structured sheets. 2. UV Stabilization: Coextruded into panels on both sides, not coated. 3. Resist Yellowing: Maximum 10 delta for a minimum of 10 years. 4. Sheet Appearance: Uniform in color. 5. Expansion and Contraction: Design and install components with provisions for expansion and contraction due to a 120 degree F temperature variation Gaskets and Dry Seals: Butyl and foam tape. B. Joint Sealant: 1. Factory-Applied Sealant: Gunnable, nonhardening, elastomeric sealant. ASTM C 920, Type S, Class 12, Grade NS. Fed Spec TT-S-1657, Type 1.n. 2. Field-Applied Sealant: Approved by translucent insulated daylighting manufacturer. As specified elsewhere in specifications. C. Field Fasteners: 1. Comply with translucent insulated daylighting manufacturer's instructions for fastener types, quantities, and usage. 2. Cadmium-plated or better. Prevent oxidation or electrolytic interaction with framing. 3. Aluminum-to-Aluminum Connections: Self-drilling screws, No. 10 and No. 12, of sufficient length for full-thread engagement, as determined by manufacturer COLOR AND FINISH A. Panel Color: 1. manufacturers opal (match existing as close as possible) B. Aluminum Finish: 1. Manufacturer's standard-clear anodized (other finishes available, please contact Duo-gard) PART 3 EXECUTIONS 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive translucent insulated daylighting. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent utilization of daylighting. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected PREPARATION A. Ensure supports to receive translucent insulated daylighting are clean, flat, level, plumb, square, accurately aligned, and correctly located INSTALLATION A. Install translucent insulated daylighting in accordance with manufacturer's instructions at locations indicated on the drawings. B. Install daylighting level, plumb, square, accurately aligned, correctly located, and without warp. C. Anchor daylighting securely in place to supports. Use attachment methods permitting adjustment for construction tolerances, irregularities, alignment, and expansion and contraction. D. Install daylighting including flashing, fasteners, hardware, gaskets, joint sealants, and glazing materials required for a complete, weathertight installation. E. Sheet Metal Flashing: Install sheet metal flashing as specified elsewhere in specifications. F. Joint Sealants: Install joint sealants as specified elsewhere in specifications. G. Repair minor damages to metal finish or glazing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as approved by Architect. Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined by Architect CLEANING STRUCTURED POLYCARBONATE PANEL ASSEMBLIES

261 A. Clean translucent insulated daylighting in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Clean inside and outside of daylighting immediately after installation and after joint sealants have cured. C. Remove temporary protective coverings at time of installation (interior) and after installation is complete (exterior). D. Remove excess joint sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions. E. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage metal finish or glazing PROTECTION A. Protect installed translucent insulated daylighting from damage during construction. B. Remove and replace damaged daylighting components as determined by Architect. END OF SECTION STRUCTURED POLYCARBONATE PANEL ASSEMBLIES

262 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION DOOR HARDWARE A. Drawings and general provisions of hte Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divsion 1 Specifications apply to this section SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Furnish and deliver all hardware necessary for all doors, also hardware as specified herein and as enumerated in "Set Numbers " and as indicated and required by actual conditions at the project. The hardware shall include the furnishing of all necessary screws, special screws, bolts, special bolts, expansion shields and all other devices necessary for the proper application of hardware to insure a complete and thorough project. B. General Requirements 1. Any door shown on the drawings and not specifically referenced in the hardware sets shall be provided with identical hardware as specified on other similar openings and shall be included in the finish hardware suppliers bid. 2. Hardware supplier shall notify the Architect in writing of any discrepancies no less than five (5) working days prior to the bid date that could result in hardware being supplied that is non-functional, that will not meet local codes, or any door that is not covered in this specification Related Sections A. Metal Door And Frames Section B. Wood Doors Section C. Aluminum Storefront Section D. Automatic Entrances Section 1.04 REFERENCES A. NFPA Life Safety 2008 B. NFPA 80 Fire Doors /Fire Windows 2008 C. NFPA 105 Smoke Door Assemblies D. Hardware For Labeled Doors 1993 E. Americans with Disabilities Act F. ANSI Accessible & Usable Buildings & Facilities G. DHI Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware H. IBC 2003 Family of Codes 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. General Requirements 1. All submittals shall be in accordance with Administrative Requirements Section B. Door Hardware Schedule 1. Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. DOOR HARDWARE

263 a. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." b. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. 1) Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission. c. Content: Include the following information: 1) Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. 2) Manufacturer of each item. 3) Fastenings and other pertinent information. 4) Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. 5) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. 6) Mounting locations for door hardware. 7) Door and frame sizes and materials. d. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule. C. Product Data 1. Include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. D. Samples 1. Furnish sample of each item proposed for project as directed by architect. All samples returned in perfect condition may be incorporated into scope of work E. Templates 1. After architectural review, supplier to furnish product templates to contractor for distribution to door, frame and electrical supplier as required for fabrication of material. F. Keying Schedule 1. Prepared under the supervision of the Owner, separate schedule detailing final keying instructions for locksets and cylinders in writing. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner to approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders. G. Operations/Maintenance Data 1. For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Upon completion of construction and building turnover, furnish two (2) complete maintenance manuals to the owner. Manuals to include the following items: a. Approved hardware schedule, catalog cuts and keying schedule. b. Hardware installation and adjustment instructions. c. Manufacturer's written warranty information QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Substitutions 1. Refer to Section Product Requirements 2. Manufacturers numbers found in Section 2.02 are to be used to obtain a level of quality, function, and design. All unlisted approved equals will be posted in addendum prior to bid opening B. Supplier Qualification 1. Door hardware supplier with warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity and who is or employs a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant or equivalent experience available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. DOOR HARDWARE

264 Supplier recognized by manufacturers to be a direct factory-authorized distributor of the specified hardware products. a. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. C. Installer Qualifications: An experienced Installer who has standard builders hardware installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of aluminum, steel and wood door hardware from the same single source manufacturer and supplier, unless otherwise indicated. E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following: 1. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)," ANSI A117.1 as follows: a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of the wrist. b. Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements indicated: 1) Interior Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. 2) Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. c. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. 2. NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors: a. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. b. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. 3. International Building Code (2009). F. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document: 1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required. 2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion. 3. Requirements for key control system. 4. Installation of permanent keys and cylinder cores. 5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys. G. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site attended by representatives of Door Hardware Manufacturers, Supplier, Installer, and Contractor to review proper hardware installation methods and the procedures for receiving and handling hardware. At completion of installation, provide written certification that hardware items were applied according to conference recommendations and to finish hardware specifications. H DELIVERY,STORAGE & HANDLING A. One complete shipment of door hardware as detailed in approved Door Hardware Schedule Shop Drawings to be inventoried on site and upon receipt of material be secure in lock-up room provided with shelving for door hardware. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. C. Deliver permanent keys and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference" COORDINATION A. Templates: Door Hardware Supplier to provide and distribute to the parties involved for templating for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard, electrified and DOOR HARDWARE

265 access control door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements WARRANTY A. See Section Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. D. Special Warranty Periods: 1. Seven years for bored latches and locksets. 2. Ten years for manual door closers MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Service 1. Any special tools required for installation shall be turned over to owner at project closeout in duplicate. Security or electrical products shall be covered by maintenance contracts previously arranged with owner. B. Extra Materials 1. Any products which remain after substantial completion shall be turned over to owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE 2.02 General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3. A. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated for named products listed in Hardware Sets. 1. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified and access control hardware function, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated. B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule HINGES AND PIVOTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Hinges: a. Hager Companies (HA). b. McKinney Products (MC). c. Stanley Hardware (ST). B. Standards: BHMA Certified products complying with the following: 1. Butts and Hinges: BHMA A Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA A C. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required: D. Maximum Door Size (inches) 1. 36" by 86" by 1 3/4", Hinge height, 4 1/2", standard wt 0.134, heavy wt DOOR HARDWARE

266 2. <36 by 120" by 1 3/4", Hinge height, 5", standard wt , heavy wt E. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing hinges. 2. Interior Doors: Heavy weight, ball bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight. F. Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule or on Drawings: 1. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the following applications: a. Out-swinging exterior doors. b. Out-swinging access controlled doors DOOR BOLTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Flush Bolts: a. McKinney Products (MC). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Trimco Manufacturing (TR). B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A C. Surface Bolts: BHMA Certified Grade 1. D. Provide bolts with top rod of sufficient length to allow bolt location approximately six feet from the floor regardless if detailed as such in hardware sets. Furnish dust proof strikes for bottom bolts. Surface bolts to be 8 in length, unless otherwise noted and U.L. listed for labeled fire doors. E. Bolt Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts to comply with labeled fire door requirements, and as follows: 1. Mortise Flush Bolts: Minimum 3/4-inch throw LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Mechanical Bored Locks and Latches: a. Best Access Systems (BE) - 93K Series b. Corbin Russwin Hardware (CR) - CL3300 Series. c. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 10-Line Series. d. Schlage (SC) - ND Series e. Yale Security Group (YA) LN Series. B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A C. Bored Locks: BHMA Certified Grade 1, Series D. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule comply with the following: 1. Bored Locks: BHMA A E. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts to comply with labeled fire door requirements, and as follows: 1. Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch latchbolt throw. 2. Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch bolt throw. F. Backset: 2-3/4 inches unless otherwise indicated CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. Key all cylinders as directed by the owner during the keying conference. DOOR HARDWARE

267 B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Cylinders: BHMA A C. Cylinder Grade: BHMA Certified Grade 1. D. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the following: 1. Removable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key, and for use with only the core manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware. E. Construction Keying: Comply with the following: 1. Construction Master keying: Provide temporary construction master keyed cylinders as required by the contractor to maintain adequate security during the construction period. Provide construction master keys in quantity as required by project Contractor. F. Keys: Provide nickel-silver keys complying with the following: 1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and as directed by Owner. 2. Quantity: Provide the following: a. Cylinder Change Keys (Per Key Set): Three. b. Master Keys (Per Level): Five (if required). G. Key Registration List: Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative for lock cylinders CLOSERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one the following: 1. Surface-Mounted Closers (Standard Duty): BHMA Certified Grade 1. a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (CR) - DC3000 Series. b. LCN Door Closers (LC) Series. c. Norton Door Controls (NO) Series. d. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) Series. e. Yale Security Group (YA) Series. B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Closers: BHMA A C. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide non-handed, factory-sized closers adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. D. Closer Options: As indicated in hardware sets, provide door closer options including: delayed action, hold open arms, extra duty parallel arms, positive stop/hold open arms, compression stop/hold open arms, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates. Through bolt type mounting is required as indicated in the door hardware sets OPERATING AND PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Metal Protective Trim Units: a. McKinney Products (MC). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Trimco Manufacturing (TR). B. Standard: Comply with BHMA A C. Materials: Fabricate protection plates from the following: 1. Brass/Bronze and Stainless Steel:.050 inches thick, beveled four sides (B4E) with countersunk screw holes. D. Push-Pull Design: 1" Round with 10" Centers. Provide 90 degree offset pulls at exterior openings. E. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in door hardware sets. DOOR HARDWARE

268 F. Furnish protection plates sized 1-1/2 inches less than door width (LDW) on push side and 1 inch less door width on pull side by height specified in door hardware sets STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Stops and Holders: a. McKinney Products (MC). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Trimco Manufacturing (TR). B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A Combination Overhead Holders and Stops: BHMA A Door Silencers: BHMA A C. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA Certified Grade 1. D. Combination Overhead Stops and Holders: Certified BHMA Grade Rixson Hardware (RX) - 1 Concealed and 9 Surface Series. 2. Sargent Hardware (SA) Concealed and 500 Surface Series. E. Floor Stops: For doors, unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. 1. Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead stops. F. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum diameter 1/2 inch fabricated for drilled-in application to frame. Provide (3) per single door and (2) per paired door frame if applied gasketing is not specified in Hardware Sets FABRICATIONS A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended FINISHES A. Standard: Comply with BHMA A B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware. C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. D. BHMA Designations: Comply with base material and finish requirements indicated by the following: 1. BHMA 600: Primed for painting, over steel base metal. 2. BHMA 626: Satin chromium plated over nickel, over brass or bronze base metal. 3. BHMA 628: Satin aluminum, clear anodized, over aluminum base metal. 4. BHMA 630: Satin stainless steel, over stainless-steel base metal. 5. BHMA 652: Satin chromium plated over nickel, over steel base metal. 6. BHMA 689: Aluminum painted, over any base metal. E. DOOR HARDWARE

269 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing PREPARATION A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series. B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames." 3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. C. Provide and coordinate concealed wood blocking for wall mount stops as detailed in Door Hardware Schedule. D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." E. Test and adjust all hardware for quiet,smooth operation,free from sticking,binding,or rattling. Adjust closers after balancing of HVAC system.adjust closers to meet required opening force criteria as set forth by handicapped codes FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Contractor shall comply with AIA A section which reads as follows: "The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters." B. Field Inspection: Supplier and Door Hardware Manufacturer will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted ADJUSTMENT A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. DOOR HARDWARE

270 1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish and provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes HARDWARE SETS- A. The hardware sets listed below represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. B. SET #1 - Aluminum office door 1. Doors: 110 a. 3 Hvy Wgt Hinges T4A /2 X 4 1/2 26D MC b. 1 Deadlock MS 1850S 28 AR c. 1 Exit Indicator AR d. 1 Mortise Cylinder SC 41 26D SA e. 1 Offset Push/Pull BF x width req'd US32D RO f. 1 PA Closer - Stop Arm 1431 PS EN SA Weatherstripoing to be provided with doors from Aluminum Door Supplier C. SET #2 - Aluminum Office Pair 1. Doors: 105 a. 6 Hvy Wgt Hinges 662HD UL 79" 26D MC b. 2 Flush Bolts -Mtl Door 555 US26D RO c. 1 Deadlock MS1850S 28 AR d. 1 Exit Indicator AR e. 2 Mortise Cylinder SC 41 26D SA f. 2 Offset Push/Pull BF15747 x width req'd US32D RO g. 2 PA Closer - Stop Arm 1432 PS EN SA h. 1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO NOTE: weatherstrip by door mfg. D. SET #3 - Storeroom - Wall Stop 1. Doors: 113, 120 a. 3 PB Hinges T /2 X 4 1/2 NRP 26D MC b. 1 Storeroom Lock 28 SC 10G04 LL 26D SA c. 1 Concave Wall Bumper 409 US32D RO d. 3 Silencer-Metal Frame 608 Grey RO E. SET #4 - Storeroom Pair OH NRP 1. Doors: 107 a. 6 PB Hinges NRP T /2 X 4 1/2 NRP 26D MC b. 2 Flush Bolts - Metal Door 555 US26D RO c. 1 Storeroom Lock 28 SC 10G04 LL 26D SA d. 2 Overhead Stop RX e. 1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO f. 1 Overlapping T Astragal 355 CS x Height Required PE g. 2 Silencer-Metal Frame 608 Grey RO DOOR HARDWARE

271 F. SET #5 - Office Wall Stop 1. Doors: 112 a. 3 PB Hinges T /2 X 4 1/2 NRP 26D MC b. 1 Office Lock 28 SC 10G05 LL 26D SA c. 1 Concave Wall Bumper 409 US32D RO G. SET #6 - Office OH Stop 1. Doors: 111, 114 a. 3 PB Hinges T /2 X 4 1/2 NRP 26D MC b. 1 Office Lock 28 SC 10G05 LL 26D SA c. 1 Overhead Stop RX d. 3 Silencer-Metal Frame 608 GREY RO Note: silencers not required at 111. Seals provided by aluminum frame manufacturer. H. SET #7 - Classroom OH Stop 1. Doors: 119 a. 3 PB Hinges T /2 X 4 1/2 NRP 26D MC b. 1 Classroom Lock 28 SC 10G37 LL 26D SA c. 1 Overhead Stop RX I. SET #8 - Overhaed Door and Auto Sliders 1. Doors: 101A, 101B, 102, 114A a. Mortise Cylinder SC41 26D SA Note: All other hardware to be provided with the doors by the door manufacturer. END OF SECTION DOOR HARDWARE

272 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass. B. Plastic glazing film. C. Glazing compounds and accessories RELATED REQUIREMENTS SECTION GLAZING A. Section Joint Sealers: Sealant and back-up material. B. Section Aluminum-Framed Storefronts. C. Section Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories: Mirrors REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 16 CFR Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition. B. ANSI Z American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings, Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; C. ASTM C Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers; D. ASTM C Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; E. ASTM C Standard Specification for Flat Glass; F. ASTM C Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass--Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass; G. ASTM C Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass; H. ASTM E Standard Test Method for Accelerated Weathering of Sealed Insulating Glass Units; I. ASTM E Standard Specification for the Classification of the Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units; J. ASTM E Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation; K. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; L. GANA (SM) - FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; M. SIGMA TM Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units; Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association; PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide glass and glazing materials for continuity of building enclosure vapor retarder and air barrier: 1. In conjunction with vapor retarder and joint sealer materials described in other sections. 2. To utilize the inner pane of multiple pane sealed units for the continuity of the air barrier and vapor retarder seal. 3. To maintain a continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout the glazed assembly from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant. B. Select type and thickness of exterior glass to withstand dead loads and wind loads acting normal to plane of glass at design pressures calculated in accordance with 2009 International Building code. 1. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E 1300 to determine glass type and thickness. GLAZING

273 2. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with full recovery of glazing materials. 3. Thicknesses listed are minimum SUBMITTALS A. See Section Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors. D. Samples: Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size of glass and plastic units, showing coloration and design. E. Certificates: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. For solar-control low-e coated glass, provide documentation demonstrating that manufacturer of coated glass is certified by coating manufacturer. G. Source LImitations for Glass Sputter-Coated with Solar-Control Low-E Coatings: Where solar-control low-e coatings of a primary glass manufacturer that has established a certified fabricator program is specifed, obtain sputter-coated solar-control low-e glass in fabricated units from a manufacturer that is certifed by coated-glass manufacturer QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and FGMA Sealant Manual for glazing installation methods. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience MOCK-UP A. Provide mockup of storefront including glass and air barrier and vapor retarder seal. B. Locate where directed. C. Mockup may remain as part of the Work PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. When required by convene at an appropriate time before starting work of this section FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds WARRANTY A. See Section Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Laminated Glass: Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for delamination, including replacement of failed units. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GLAZING TYPES 2.02 GLASS MATERIALS GLAZING

274 A. Float Glass Manufacturers: 1. AGC Flat Glass North America, Inc: 2. Pilkington North America Inc: 3. PPG Industries, Inc: 4. TGP, Technical Glass Products, 5. Substitutions: Refer to Section Product Requirements. B. Float Glass: All glazing is to be float glass unless otherwise indicated. 1. Annealed Type: ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select). 2. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C Tinted Types: Color and performance characteristics as indicated. 4. Thicknesses: As indicated; for exterior glazing comply with specified requirements for wind load design regardless of specified thickness. C. Clear Float Glass: Clear, annealed. 1. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select) SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Guardian Industries Corporation: 2. Viracon, Apogee Enterprises, Inc: 3. PPG Industries, Inc.] 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section Product Requirements. B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated. 1. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners. 3. Edge Seal: Glass to elastomer with supplementary silicone sealant. 4. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air. C. Insulated Glass Units (Type Solarban 60 XL (2) Starphire): Double pane with glass to elastomer edge seal with the following properties. 1. Visible Light Transmission: 73% 2. Total Solar Energy Transmittance: 38% 3. U-Value Winter Nightime: U-Value Summer Daytime: Shading Coefficient: Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Comply with ASTM E 774 and E 773, Class CBA. 8. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air. 9. Total unit thickness of 1 inch minimum. D. Insulated Glass Units (Type Guardian, Sun-Guard SN-68): Double pane with glass to elastomer edge seal with the following properties. 1. Visible Light Transmission: 68% 2. Total Solar Energy Transmittance: 32% 3. U-Value Winter Nightime: U-Value Summer Daytime: Shading Coefficient: Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Comply with ASTM E 774 and E 773, Class CBA. 8. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air. 9. Total unit thickness of 1 inch minimum PLASTIC FILMS A. Manufacturers: Subject to complianc with the documents, acceptable manfacturers are but not limited to: 1. CPFilms, Inc: GLAZING

275 2. 3M Window Film: 3. Substitutions: Refer to Section Product Requirements. B. Plastic Film: polyester type, 3 to 3.5 mils thick, visible light transmittance of 28 percent, shading coefficient of.55 percent GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Manufacturers: 1. Pecora Corporation: 2. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: 3. Substitutions: Refer to Section Product Requirements. B. Polyurethane Sealant: Single component, chemical curing, non-staining, non-bleeding; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; Shore A Hardness Range 20 to 35; color as selected GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I. Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I. Minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face. C. Glazing Tape (interior): Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to 15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; black color. 1. Manufacturers: a. Pecora Corporation: b. Saint-Gobain Performance Plastics: c. Substitutions: Refer to Section Product Requirements. D. Glazing Gaskets (exterior): Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM C 864 Option I; color. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. D. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C 1193 and FGMA Sealant Manual INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR/INTERIOR DRY METHOD (GASKET GLAZING) A. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. B. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to attain full contact. C. Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous contact INSTALLATION - PLASTIC FILM A. Install plastic film with adhesive, applied in accordance with film manufacturer's instructions. GLAZING

276 B. Place without air bubbles, creases or visible distortion. C. Fit tight to glass perimeter with razor cut edge MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Glass and Glazing product manufacturers to provide field surveillance of the installation of their products. B. Monitor and report installation procedures and unacceptable conditions CLEANING A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after Work is complete. C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces PROTECTION A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units SCHEDULE A. Metal-Framed Storefronts and Curtain Wall: thicknesses required to comply with performance requirements, exterior dry method. B. Aluminum Entrances: low-e tint, exterior wet/dry method with compound. END OF SECTION GLAZING

277 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal stud wall framing. B. Acoustic insulation. C. Gypsum sheathing. D. Cementitious backing board. E. Gypsum wallboard. F. Glass mat faced gypsum board. G. Joint treatment and accessories RELATED REQUIREMENTS SECTION GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Section Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Exterior wind-load-bearing metal stud framing. B. Section Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood blocking for support of wall-mounted equipment. C. Section Non-Structural Metal Framing REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AISI SG North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members; American Iron and Steel Institute; 2001 with 2004 supplement. (replaced SG-971) B. ANSI A American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units; 1999 (R2005). C. ANSI A American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units; 1999 (R2005). D. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; E. ASTM C 475/C 475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2002 (Reapproved 2007). F. ASTM C Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; G. ASTM C Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; H. ASTM C Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; I. ASTM C Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; J. ASTM C Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; K. ASTM C Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base; L. ASTM C 1177/C 1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing; GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

278 M. ASTM C Standard Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cement Substrate Sheets; N. ASTM C 1396/C 1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2006a. O. ASTM C 1658/C 1658M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Panels; P. ASTM D Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2000 (Reapproved 2005). Q. ASTM E 72 - Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction; R. GA Application of Gypsum Board to Form Curved Surfaces; Gypsum Association; S. GA Fire Resistance Design Manual; Gypsum Association; SUBMITTALS A. See Section Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on gypsum board, glass mat faced gypsum board, and accessories. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors, showing compliance with requirements. D. Test Reports: For all stud framing products that do not comply with ASTM C 645 or C 754, provide independent laboratory reports showing maximum stud heights at required spacings and deflections. E. Samples: Prepare up to 4' x 4' mockups of gypsum board finished with proposed texture application, illustrating finished color and texture QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform in accordance with ASTM C 840. Comply with requirements of GA-600 for fire-rated assemblies. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and finishing, with minimum 5 years of documented experience. C. Single-Source Responsibility for Steel Framing: Obtain steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. D. Single-Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board and other panel products from a single manufacturer. E. Single-Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer. F. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-resistance-rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, provide gypsum board assemblies that comply with the following requirements: G. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As indicated by GA File Numbers in GA-600 "Fire Resistance Design Manual" or design designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listing of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. H. Gypsum board assemblies indicated are identical to assemblies tested for fire resistance according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. I. Deflection and Firestop Track: Top runner provided in fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated is labeled and listed by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. J. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

279 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F. For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 deg F for 48 hours before application and continuously after until dry. Do not exceed 95 deg F when using temporary heat sources. C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to dry joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C 840 and GA METAL FRAMING MATERIALS A. Subject to compliance with the specifications manufacturer's are, but not limited to the following: B. Manufacturers - Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories: 1. Clark Western Building Systems: 2. Dietrich Metal Framing: 3. Delta Metal Products Inc.: 4. Substitutions: See Section Product Requirements. C. Metal Framing Connectors and Accessories: 1. Same manufacturer as framing. D. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C 754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf. 1. Exception: The minimum metal thickness and section properties requirements of ASTM C 645 are waived provided steel of 40 ksi minimum yield strength is used, the metal is continuously dimpled, the effective thickness is at least twice the base metal thickness, and maximum stud heights are determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E 72 using assemblies specified by ASTM C Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces. 3. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs. 4. Ceiling Channels: C shaped. 5. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch. E. Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C 754 and specified performance requirements. F. Partition Head to Structure Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that accommodate deflection using slotted holes, screws and anti-friction bushings, preventing rotation of studs while maintaining structural performance of partition. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

280 1. Structural Performance: Maintain lateral load resistance and vertical movement capacity required by applicable code, when evaluated in accordance with AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. 2. Material: ASTM A 653/A 653M steel sheet, SS Grade 50/340, with G60/Z180 hot dipped galvanized coating STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS A. General: Provide steel framing members complying with the following requirements: 1. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G 40 (ASTM A 653M, Z 90) hot-dip galvanized coating. B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 3/16-inch-wide minimum lip (return), and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth: 1. Thickness:.0179 inches unless otherwise noted. 2. Depth: 3-5/8 inches unless otherwise indicated. C. Deflection Track: Manufacturer's standard top runner with slotted holes, complying with the requirements of ASTM C 645 and with 2-inch- deep flanges. D. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat shaped, depth and minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal as follows: 1. Thickness: inch, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Depth: 7/8 inch. E. Furring Brackets: Serrated-arm type, adjustable, fabricated from corrosion-resistant steel sheet complying with ASTM C 645, minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal of inch, designed for screw attachment to steel studs and steel rigid furring channels used for furring. F. Steel Resilient Furring Channels: Manufacturer's standard product designed to reduce sound transmission, fabricated from steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653 or ASTM A 568 to form 1/2-inch- deep channel of the following configuration: 1. Single-Leg Configuration: Asymmetric-shaped channel with face connected to a single flange by a single-slotted leg (web). G. Steel Channel Bridging: Cold-rolled steel, inch minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and 7/16-inch- wide flanges, 1-1/2 inches deep, 475 lb/1000 feet, unless otherwise indicated. H. Steel Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing complying with ASTM A 653 or ASTM A 568, length and width as required, and with a minimum base metal (uncoated) thickness as follows: 1. Thickness: inch. I. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications indicated STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS A. General: Provide components complying with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Wire Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, inch thick. 2. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, inch diameter. 3. Hanger Rods: Mild steel and zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint. 4. Flat Hangers: Mild steel and zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint. 5. Angle-Type Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide, formed from inchthick galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G 90 (ASTM A 653M, Z 180) coating designation, with bolted connections and 5/16-inch diameter bolts. B. Channels: Cold-rolled steel, inch minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and 7/16-inchwide flanges, and as follows: GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

281 1. Carrying Channels: 1-1/2 inches deep, 475 lb/1000 feet, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Furring Channels: 3/4 inch deep, 300 lb/1000 feet, unless otherwise indicated. a. Finish: zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint. C. Steel Studs for Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 3/16-inch- wide minimum lip (return), and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth: 1. Thickness: As indicated. 2. Protective Coating: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant coating. D. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat shaped, depth of 7/8 inch, and minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal as follows: 1. Thickness: inch, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant coating. E. Steel Resilient Furring Channels: Manufacturer's standard product designed to reduce sound transmission, fabricated from steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653 (ASTM A 653M) or ASTM A 568 (ASTM A 568M) to form 1/2-inch-deep channel of the following configuration: 1. Single- or Double-Leg Configuration: Asymmetric-shaped channel with face connected to a single flange by a single-slotted leg (web) or hat-shaped channel, with 1-1/2-inch- (38.1-mm-) wide face connected to flanges by double-slotted or expanded-metal legs (webs). F. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645, manufacturer's standard direct-hung grid suspension system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock to form a modular supporting network BOARD MATERIALS A. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board: 1. American Gypsum: 2. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC: 3. National Gypsum Company: 4. USG Corporation: 5. Substitutions: See Section Product Requirements. B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Glass-mat-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C 1658/C 1658M, suitable for paint finish, of the same core type and thickness may be substituted for paper-faced board. 3. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed. 4. Thickness: a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch. b. Multi-Layer Assemblies: Thicknesses as indicated on drawings. 5. Paper-Faced Products: a. American Gypsum; EagleRoc Regular Gypsum Wallboard and FireBloc Type X Gypsum Wallboard. b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; ToughRock Gypsum Wallboard. c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand Gypsum Wallboard. d. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Gypsum Panels. e. Substitutions: See Section Product Requirements. 6. Glass-Mat-Faced Products: a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensArmor Plus. b. Substitutions: See Section Product Requirements. C. Backing Board For Wet Areas: 1. Application: Surfaces behind tile in wet areas including kitchen counters and backsplashes. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

282 3. ANSI Cement-Based Board: Non-gypsum-based; aggregated Portland cement panels with glass fiber mesh embedded in front and back surfaces complying with ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C a. Thickness: 1/2 inch. b. Products: 1) National Gypsum Company; PermaBase Brand Cement Board. 2) National Gypsum Company; PermaBase Flex Brand Cement Board. 3) USG Corporation; Durock Brand Cement Board. 4) Substitutions: See Section Product Requirements. D. Ceiling Board: Special sag-resistant gypsum ceiling board as defined in ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3. Edges: Tapered. 4. Products: a. American Gypsum; Interior Ceiling Board. b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; ToughRock CD Ceiling Board. c. National Gypsum Company; High Strength Brand Ceiling Board. d. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Sag-Resistant Interior Gypsum Ceiling Board. E. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Fire Resistant Type: Complying with Type X requirements; UL or WH rated. a. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X. b. Application: Where required for fire-rated assemblies, unless otherwise indicated. c. Thickness: 5/8 inch. d. Edges: Tapered. 2. Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Fiber Panel: USG Fiberock Very High Impact, Abuse Resistant Gypsum Fiber Panel. a. Application: minimum 4' tall at high traffic areas such as corridor walls, laundry rooms and common spaces. b. Core Type: Type X, as indicated. c. Thickness: 5/8 inch. d. Edges: Tapered. F. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; ends square cut. 1. Application: Hard ceilings in restrooms, kitchens and other wet areas. 2. Core Type: Regular and Type X, as indicated. 3. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 4. Edges: Tapered FIBERGLASS REINFORCED BOARD MATERIALS A. Fiberglass Mat Faced Board: Comply with performance requirements of ASTM C 1396/C 1396M for water-resistant gypsum backing board, ASTM C 1177/C for sheathing and ASTM C472 and ASTM E72 for physical properties. Surface designed to resist growth of mold and mildew, per ASTM D Application: Behind kitchen counters. 2. Product: DensGlass Gold manufactured by Georgia-Pacific. 3. Fire-Resistant Type: Type X core, thickness 5/8 inch ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. Thickness: 3 inch. B. Acoustical Sealant 1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following requirements: a. Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

283 according to ASTM E 90. b. United States Gypsum Co. advertises that its acoustical sealant has flame-spread and smoke-developed ratings of less than 25 per ASTM E 84. Insert this requirement above if required for sealant by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound. 3. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, acoustical sealants that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: 1) PL Acoustical Sealant; ChemRex, Inc.; Contech Brands. 2) AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corp. 3) SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; United States Gypsum Co. b. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: 1) BA-98; Pecora Corp. 2) Tremco Acoustical Sealant; Tremco, Inc. C. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C 1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance. 2. Special Shapes: In addition to conventional cornerbead and control joints, provide U-bead at exposed panel edges. D. Joint Materials: ASTM C 475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. 1. Setting-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged, job-mixed, chemical-hardening powder products formulated for uses indicated. 2. Where setting-type joint compounds are indicated as a taping compound only or for taping and filling only, use formulation that is compatible with other joint compounds applied over it. a. For prefilling gypsum board joints, use formulation recommended by gypsum board manufacturer. b. For filling joints and treating fasteners of water-resistant gypsum backing board behind base for ceramic tile, use formulation recommended by gypsum board manufacturer. c. For topping compound, use sandable formulation. 3. Drying-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged vinyl-based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use. a. Ready-Mixed Formulation: Factory-mixed product. 1) Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and face flanges of trim accessories. 2) Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats. 4. E. Textured Finish Materials: Latex-based compound; plain. F. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0.03 inch In Thickness, to Wood Members, and to Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1002; self-piercing tapping type; cadmium-plated for exterior locations. G. Screws: ASTM C 1002; self-piercing tapping type; cadmium-plated for exterior locations. H. Screws: ASTM C 954; steel drill screws for application of gypsum board to loadbearing steel studs. I. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket insulation produced by combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type I (blankets without membrane facing). 1. Mineral-Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. J. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place. K. Aluminum reglets: 1. Install regletes of size and type indicated in documents. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

284 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C 754 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated. 1. Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 1/ Laterally brace entire suspension system. 3. Install bracing as required at exterior locations to resist wind uplift. C. Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center. 1. Extend partition framing to structure or as indicated. 2. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach top runner to structure, maintain clearance between top of studs and structure, and connect studs to track using specified mechanical devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; verify free movement of top of stud connections; do not leave studs unattached to track. D. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not less than double studs at jambs. 1. Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated or, if none indicated, as required for door openings. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing re-quired above door heads. E. Standard Wall Furring: Install at concrete, masonry, and existing walls scheduled to receive gypsum board, not more than 4 inches from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 24 inches on center. 1. Orientation: Vertical. 2. Spacing: At 16 inches on center. F. Acoustic Furring: Install resilient channels at maximum 24 inches on center. Locate joints over framing members. G. Furring for Fire Ratings: Install as required for fire resistance ratings indicated and to GA-600 requirements. H. Blocking: Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, toilet accessories, and hardware. Comply with Section for wood blocking ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Place one bead continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framing members. 2. Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board. 3. In non-fire-rated construction, seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, and rough-in boxes BOARD AND GLASS MAT FACED BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 840 and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. 1. Exception: Tapered edges to receive joint treatment at right angles to framing. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

285 C. Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of assembly listing. D. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216. E. Install sound-attenuation blankets, where indicated, prior to installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. F. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. G. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp panels. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. H. Locate both edge or end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Avoid joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings where possible. I. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. J. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. K. Spot grout hollow metal door frames for solid-core wood doors, hollow metal doors, and doors over 32 inches wide. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip and immediately insert gypsum panels into frames. L. Form control and expansion joints at locations indicated and as detailed, with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels, as well as supporting framing behind gypsum panels. M. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases that are braced internally. 1. Except where concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant. N. Where STC-rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, openings, and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant including a bead at both faces of the partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's recommendations for location of edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. O. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. for vertical applications. 2. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches o.c. P. Cementitious Backing Board: Install over steel framing members where indicated, in accordance with ANSI A and manufacturer's instructions. Q. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of all gypsum board. R. Curved Surfaces: Apply gypsum board to curved substrates in accordance with GA-226. S. Moisture Protection: Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with sealant. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

286 3.05 GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS 3.06 A. Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard panels as follows: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing), unless parallel application is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies. Use maximum-length panels to minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally. 3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 4. On corridor partitions, apply very hi impact resistant gypsum board on lower 8 where not covered by lockers. B. Multilayer Application on Ceilings: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers prior to applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply gypsum wallboard face layers in same sequence. Offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members, unless otherwise indicated. C. Multilayer Application on Partitions/Walls: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and gypsum wallboard face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 1. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members. D. Acoustical Tile Base: Where gypsum panels form the base for adhesively applied acoustical tile, install gypsum wallboard panels with tapered edges taped and finished to produce a flat surface. E. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports as follows: 1. Fasten with screws. F. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Apply base layers of gypsum panels and face layer to base layers as follows: 1. Fasten both base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. G. Direct-Bonding to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations, and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set. H. Exterior Soffits and Ceilings: Apply exterior gypsum soffit board panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered over supports. 1. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) open space where panels abut other construction or structural penetrations. 2. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws. 3. Fill gap with sealant to keep insects from entering above ceiling areas INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same fasteners used to fasten gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to accessory manufac-turer's directions for type, length, and spacing of fasteners. B. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated. 1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet long. 2. At the heads and sills of all cased, door and window openings. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

287 C. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. D. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated JOINT TREATMENT A. Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use paper joint tape, bedded with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound and finished with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound. B. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C 840, as follows: 1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed construction. C. Finish gypsum board in scheduled areas in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C 840 and as scheduled below. 1. Above Finished Ceilings Concealed From View: Level Utility Areas and Areas Behind Cabinetry: Level Walls to Receive Textured Wall Finish: Level 3. D. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. E. Fill and finish joints and corners of cementitious backing board as recommended by manufacturer TEXTURE FINISH A. Apply finish texture coating by means of spraying apparatus in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to match approved sample. B. Texture Required: light orange peel, verify finish with Architect and Owner. C. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes according to texture finish manufacturer's instructions. Apply primer only to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. D. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray as recommended by texture finish manufacturer to prevent damage. E. Texture locations: Apply texture to new partitions in apartments and on existing concrete plank ceilings in apartments and where indicated TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction FINISH LEVEL SCHEDULE A. Level 1: Above finished ceilings concealed from view B. Level 2: Utility areas and areas behind cabinetry. C. Level 3: Walls scheduled to receive textured wall finish FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Above-Ceiling Observation: Architect will conduct an above-ceiling observation prior to installation of gypsum board ceilings and report any deficiencies in the Work observed. Do not proceed with installation of gypsum board to ceiling support framing until deficiencies have been corrected. 1. Notify Architect one week in advance of the date and the time when the Project, or part of the Project, will be ready for an above-ceiling observation. 2. Prior to notifying Architect, complete the following in areas to receive gypsum board ceilings: GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

288 a. Installation of 80 percent of lighting fixtures, powered for operation. b. Installation, insulation, and leak and pressure testing of water piping systems. c. Installation of Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing systems. d. Installation of sprinkler piping. e. Installation of mechanical system controls. f. Installation of ceiling support framing CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure gypsum board assemblies are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

289 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tile for floor applications. B. Tile for wall applications. C. Marble thresholds. D. Ceramic accessories. E. Ceramic trim RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section Joint Sealers. SECTION CERAMIC TILING B. Section Gypsum Board Assemblies: Installation of tile backer board REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series/A American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile (Compendium); ANSI A108.1a - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; ANSI A108.1b - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (R2005). 3. ANSI A108.1c - Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (R2005). 4. ANSI A American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 1999 (R2005). 5. ANSI A American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (R2005). 6. ANSI A American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy; 1999 (R2005). 7. ANSI A American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout; 1999 (R2005). 8. ANSI A American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 1999 (R2005). 9. ANSI A American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework; 1999 (R2005). B. TCA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation; Tile Council of North America, Inc.; 2007/ ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers SUBMITTALS A. See Section Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories. Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives. CERAMIC TILING

290 C. Tile Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual tiles or sections of tiles showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type and composition of tile indicated. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection. D. Grout Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual sections of grout showing the full range of colors available for each type of grout indicated. E. Tile Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual tiles or sections of tiles showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type and composition of tile indicated. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection. F. Grout Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual sections of grout showing the full range of colors available for each type of grout indicated. G. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. H. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of TCA Handbook and ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series on site. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in this section, with minimum 5 years of documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of 5 years of documented experience. D. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of tile from one source with resources to provide products from the same production run for each contiguous area of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. E. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer. F. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from one source and by a single manufacturer for each product: 1.07 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Joint sealants. B. Waterproofing. C. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028: 1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6. D. Load-Bearing Performance: For ceramic tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide installations rated for the following load-bearing performance level based on testing assemblies according to ASTM C 627 that are representative of those indicated for this Project: 1. Extra Heavy: Passes cycles 1 through Heavy: Passes cycles 1 through Moderate: Passes cycles 1 through MOCK-UP A. See Section Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up. B. Construct tile mock-up where indicated by Architect, incorporating all components specified for the location. 1. Mock-up to be sized to exhibit tile pattern and colors selected. CERAMIC TILING

291 2. Approved mock-up may remain as part of the Work PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. If required by Architect convene at an apprporiate time before starting work of this section DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages. B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other causes in accordance wtih manufacturer's instructions. C FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install adhesives in an unventilated environment. B. Do not install tile until construction in spaces is completed and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 10 sq. ft of each size, color, and surface finish of tile specified. Include appropriate proportion of trim units. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TILE A. Manufacturers: All products of each type by the same manufacturer. Manufacturers are, but not limited to the following: 1. American Olean: 2. Interceramic 3. Dal-Tile: 4. Substitutions: See Section Product Requirements TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Ceramic Trim: Matching bullnose ceramic shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile. 1. Applications: Use in the following locations: a. Open Edges: Bullnose. b. Inside Corners: Jointed. c. Floor to Wall Joints: Cove base. 2. Manufacturer: Same as for tile. B. Thresholds: Marble, white or gray, honed finish; 2 inches wide by full width of wall or frame opening; 1/2 inch thick; beveled one long edge with radiused corners on top side; without holes, cracks, or open seams. 1. Applications: Provide at the following locations: a. At doorways where tile terminates. b. At open edges of floor tile where adjacent finish is a different height. c. At floor material changes where adjacent finish is a different height. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive tile. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are CERAMIC TILING

292 dust-free, and are ready to receive tile. C. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of setting materials to sub-floor surfaces. D. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer. E. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. F. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage. B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone and are incompatible with tile-setting materials by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush. D. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with dry-set or latex-portland cement mortars that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for installations indicated. E. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone and are incompatible with tile-setting materials by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush. 1. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding. F. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample submittals, verify that tile has been blended in the factory and packaged so tile units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. G. Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instructions INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install tile and thresholds and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1 through A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCA Handbook recommendations. B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor joints. D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed. F. Install thresholds at locations specified. G. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. H. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. I. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. J. Grout tile joints. K. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes. CERAMIC TILING

293 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean tile and grout surfaces PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation SCHEDULE A. Kitchen walls: 1. Tile: American Olean. a. Solare Glass Mosaics b. Size: Brickwork 2" X 1". c. Water Absorption: ASTM C373 result <0.01% d. Breaking Strength: ASTM C648 result >400 lbs e. Scratch Hardness: MOHS result 7.0 f. Chemical Resistance: ASTM C650 result Resistant g. Pattern: Pattern and Layout as indicated in Running Bond 2. Color: As selected from manufacturers standard colors. 3. Setting Bed and Grout: a. Fast-setting latex hydraulic mortar Grani/Rapid by Mapei Corp., ANSI A118.4 b. Polymer-modified sanded grout Ker 700 by Mapei Corp.; ANSI A Installation method: TCA W244C-09. B. Kitchen walls: 1. Tile: Interceramics. a. IC Brites b. Size: Brickwork 3" X 6". c. Water Absorption: ASTM C373 result <20% d. Breaking Strength: ASTM C648 result >90 lbs e. Pattern: Pattern and Layout as indicated. 2. Color: As selected from color groups 1 and Setting Bed and Grout: a. Fast-setting latex hydraulic mortar Grani/Rapid by Mapei Corp., ANSI A118.4 b. Polymer-modified sanded grout Ker 700 by Mapei Corp.; ANSI A Installation method: TCA W244C-09. C. Kitchen Floors: 1. Tile: American Olean a. Urban Tones Glazed Porcelain Tile b. Size: Field Tile 12" x 12" c. Size: Cove Base 6" x 12" d. Water Absorption: ASTM C373 result <0.5% e. Breaking Strength: ASTM C648 result >300 lbs f. Scratch Hardness: MOHS result 8.0 g. Chemical Resistance: ASTM C650 result Resistant 2. Color: As selected from manufacturers standard colors. 3. Setting Bed and Grout: a. Fast-setting latex hydraulic mortar Grani/Rapid by Mapei Corp., ANSI A118.4 b. Polymer-modified sanded grout Ker 700 by Mapei Corp.; ANSI A Installation method: TCA F END OF SECTION CERAMIC TILING

294 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B. Acoustical units RELATED REQUIREMENTS SECTION ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS A. Section Fire Detection and Alarm: Fire alarm components in ceiling system. B. Section Air Outlets and Inlets: Air diffusion devices in ceiling. C. Section Interior Lighting: Light fixtures in ceiling system REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; B. ASTM C 636/C 636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels; C. ASTM E Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; SUBMITTALS A. See Section Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components. C. Samples: Submit two samples 4x8 inch in size illustrating material and finish of acoustical units. D. Samples: Submit two samples each,12 long, of suspension system main runner for each color and system type required 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Source Limitations for Ceiling Units: Obtain each acoustical ceiling panel from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. D. Source Limitations for Suspension System: Obtain each suspension system from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. 1. Obtain both acoustical ceiling panels and suspension system from the same manufacturer. E. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system components (if any), and partition system (if any). F. Preinstallation Conference: If required by Architect Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

295 A. Deliver acoustical panels and suspension system components to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. B. Install acoustical units after interior wet work is dry WARRANTY A. Manufacturers standard 10-year warranty PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Subject to compliance with specification acceptable manufacturers are but not limited to the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: 2. USG: 3. Substitutions: See Section Product Requirements. B. Acoustical Panels Type SAT-1: Square Lay-in, Type XX, Form 3, Pattern E, with the following characteristics: 1. VOC: No-Added Formaldehyde -free of formaldehyde-based resins. 2. Size: 24 x 24 inches. 3. Thickness: 5/8 inches. 4. Composition: BioAcoustic with DuraBrite acoustically transparent membrane. 5. Light Reflectance: 88 percent, determined as specified in ASTM E NRC Range:.85, determined as specified in ASTM E Articulation Class (AC): 180, determined as specified in ASTM E Edge: Square. 9. Surface Color: White. 10. Recycled Content: 23%. 11. Surface texture: Medium. 12. Dimensional Stability: Standard 13. Flame Spread: ASTM E 1264; Class A (UL) 14. Product: Tierra by Armstrong. 15. Ceiling grid: 15/16" Prelude XL 2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S) A. Manufacturers: 1. Same as for acoustical units. 2. Substitutions: See Section Product Requirements. B. Suspension Systems - General: ASTM C 635; die cut and interlocking components, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips as required. C. Exposed Steel Suspension System: Formed steel, commercial quality cold rolled; heavy-duty. 1. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch wide face. ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

296 2. Construction: Double web. 3. Finish: White painted. 4. Product: Prelude XL by Armstrong ACCESSORIES A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application and ceiling system flatness requirement specified. B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid. 1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of grid. 2. At ceiling clouds install Armstrong Channel Moulding C. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636, ASTM E 580, and manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section. B. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum deflection of 1:360. C. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan. D. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. E. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. F. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. G. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure; that are appropriate for substrate; and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. H. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; and provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. I. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. J. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. K. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. L. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or support components independently. M. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners. N. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other interruptions. 1. Use longest practical lengths. 2. Overlap and rivet corners. ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

297 3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces. D. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete. E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents. F. Cutting Acoustical Units: 1. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim. 2. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges. 3. Double cut and field paint exposed reveal edges. G. Where round obstructions occur, provide preformed closures to match perimeter molding TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees. END OF SECTION ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

298 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient sheet flooring. B. Resilient tile flooring. C. Resilient base. D. Installation accessories RELATED REQUIREMENTS SECTION RESILIENT FLOORING A. Section Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete slabs and floors REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM F Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring; B. ASTM F Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile; C. ASTM F Standard Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing; D. ASTM F Standard Specification for Rubber Floor Tile; E. ASTM F Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; SUBMITTALS A. See Section Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions. C. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for OCO Architects's initial selection. D. Verification Samples: Submit two samples, 4x4 inchs in size illustrating color and pattern for each resilient flooring product specified. E. Certification: Prior to installation of flooring, submit written certification by flooring manufacturer and adhesive manufacturer that condition of sub-floor is acceptable. F. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing. G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for SAHA's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section Product Requirements, for additional provisions DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F. B. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 55 degrees F EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section Product Requirements, for additional provisions. RESILIENT FLOORING

299 B. Provide 50 sq ft of flooring, 25 lineal feet of base, of each type and color specified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET FLOORING A. Vinyl Plank Flooring Type RV: Color and pattern throughout wear layer thickness, with backing, and: 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM 1700, Class 3, Type B, with Class A fibrous backing. 2. Wear Layer Thickness:.020 inch minimum. 3. Construction: Luxury Vinyl Plank with micro bevel edges 4. Total Thickness:.100 inch minimum. 5. Sizes: 3" x (12", 24", 36" and 48") 6. Adhesives: Mannington V-82 or V 95 as recommended by manufacturer. 7. Heat Stability: passes ASTM F Stain & Chemical stability: passes ASTM F HUD/FHA requirements: Exceeds. 10. Coefficient of friction: meets or exceeds ADA guidelines of NBS smoke chamber test: <450 passes, ASTM E Heat welded seams. 13. Manufacturers: a. Mannington; Product Nature's paths select. b. Substitutions: See Section Product Requirements. B. Vinyl Welding Rod: Solid vinyl bead produced by manufacturer of vinyl flooring for heat welding seams, in color matching field color. C. Transition strips: Metal or vinyl as recommended by manufacturer TILE FLOORING A. Vinyl Composition Tile: All materials shall be 100% asbestos free. Guarantee furnished at completion shall contain a statement to this affect. 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F 1066, of Class corresponding to type specified. 2. Size: 12 x 12 inch. 3. Thickness: inch. 4. Pattern: Marbleized. 5. Color: Up to four colors selected from the manufacturers standards and arranged in a geometric pattern. 6. Manufacturers: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Product Standard Excelon: b. Mannington Mills, Inc; Product Designer Essentials: c. Tarkett Inc: RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base: ASTM F 1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove, and as follows: 1. Height: 4 inch. 2. Thickness: inch thick. 3. Finish: Matte. 4. Length: Roll. 5. Color: Color as selected from manufacturer's standards. 6. Accessories: Premolded external corners and end stops. 7. Manufacturers: a. Burke Flooring: b. Johnsonite, Inc: c. Roppe Corp: ACCESSORIES A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer. RESILIENT FLOORING

300 B. Primers and Adhesives: Armstrong S-89 or Henry 130. C. Moldings, Transition and Edge Strips: Metal. D. Filler for Coved Base: Plastic. E. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive resilient flooring. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base. C. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances which would impair bonding of adhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces. D. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are dry enough and ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity in accordance with ASTM F 710; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. E. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location PREPARATION A. Prepare sub-floor surfaces as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. C. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. D. Clean substrate INSTALLATION A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. D. Fit joints tightly. E. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. F. Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under centerline of door. G. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated. H. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints TILE FLOORING A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed, unless manufacturer's instructions say otherwise. C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. D. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. RESILIENT FLOORING

301 E. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern. F. Install tile to basket weave pattern or patterns indicated. Allow minimum 1/2 full size tile width at room or area perimeter. G. Where floor finishes are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under centerline of door. H. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. I. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated. Before installation of flooring, secure metal strips with stainless steel screws. J. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. K. At movable partitions, install flooring under partitions without interrupting floor pattern. L. Install feature strips and floor markings where indicated. Fit joints tightly RESILIENT BASE A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints. B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use premolded units. C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Clean floor in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to prepare for sealing and waxing. AHISD will seal and was flooring PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing resilient products: 1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by resilient product manufacturers. 2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. 3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by flooring manufacturer. 4. Damp-mop floor to remove marks and soil. B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by flooring manufacturer. 1. Cover products installed on floor surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for Substantial Completion. 2. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over floor surfaces. Place plywood or hardboard panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. C. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation. END OF SECTION RESILIENT FLOORING

302 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING A. Prefabricated rubber sport flooring, adhesively installed. B. Interlocking, loose-laid rubber tile. C. Accessories REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers--Tension; 2006a. B. ASTM D Standard Test Method for Rubber Property--Durometer Hardness; C. ASTM F Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring; SUBMITTALS A. See Section Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed data sheets for products specified. C. Selection Samples: Manufacturer's color charts for flooring materials specified, indicating full range of colors and textures available. D. Verification Samples: Actual flooring material specified, not less than 12 in square, mounted on solid backing. E. Adhesive product data sheets and manufacturers certificate indicating approval for the proposed application. F. Maintenance Data: For resilient products to include in maintenance manuals QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer must have a minimum of 10 years experience in the manufacturing of prefabricated rubber sport flooring. B. Engage experienced installers who are trained and approved by flooring manufacturer for installation of prefabricated rubber sport flooring. Installer must have 3 years minimum experience installing prefabricated rubber sport flooring in installations of similar type and scope DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store the material in the original packaging with the labels intact in a controlled environment of a minimum temperature of 55 F and under 50% relative humidity. Protect work until accepted by owner. B. Store materials in dry and clean location until needed for installation. During installation, handle in a manner that will prevent marring and soiling of finished surfaces WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Warranty Period: One year from date of substantial completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING

303 2.01 PREFABRICATED RUBBER SPORTS FLOOR A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to: 1. Mondo; Ramflex, 3/8" thick, 36" x 36" tiles 2. Flexco; Tuflex Force, 3/8" thick, 27" x 27" tiles 3. Substitutions: See Section Product Requirements. B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard selection. C. Transition and Reducer strips: Manufacturers standard strips manufactured of same materials and properties of rubber sport flooring PREFABRICATED RUBBER FLOOR INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Rubber sport flooring adhesive to be two part polyurethane adhesive suitable for adherence of a sheet good to asphalt, concrete or urethane substrate. Adhesive to be supplied or approved/recommended by rubber sport flooring manufacturer. B. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by prefabricated rubber sport flooring manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Comply with prefabricated rubber sport flooring manufacturers written instruction applicable to products and application indicated. D. Rubber Tile Flooring: Virgin rubber material formed into square tiles with invisible interlocking tabs, free-laid without adhesive. 1. Thickness: Minimum 1/4 in. 2. Size: Nominal 24 in square. 3. Tensile Strength: Minimum 150 psi, per ASTM D Hardness: Minimum 55, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2240 using Type A durometer. 5. Surface Texture: Smooth. 6. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standards ACCESSORIES PART 3 A. Leveling Compound: Latex-modified cement formulation as recommended by flooring manufacturer for substrate conditions. B. Adhesive: Water-resistant type recommended by flooring manufacturer for project conditions. EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for conditions detrimental to installation of athletic flooring. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of athletic flooring to substrate. C. Ensure that substrates are dry and exhibit neutral alkalinity. Moisture vapor emission tests (Calcium chloride tests in accordance with ASTM F ) are mandatory on various area of the sub-floor prior to the beginning of the installation. D. Concrete: Verify that slab substrates are acceptable for installation of resilient flooring, in accordance with ASTM F 710. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of athletic flooring to substrate. RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING

304 3.02 PREPARATION A. Concrete: Use leveling compound as necessary to achieve a minimum substrate flatness of plus or minus 1/8 inch within 10 ft radius. B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes and other defects with patching compound. C. Clean floor and apply and float feathering compound to leave smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until the feathering compound has cured. D. Sub-floor is to be prepared as per manufacturer s recommendations. E. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. Do not use curing compound. F. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. G. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected INSTALLATION A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions. B. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations and approved shop drawings. C. Prefabricated Rubber Sport Flooring: 1. Cut and adjust sport flooring prior to adhesion. 2. All edges of the sheet goods must be straight-edged before adjusting the seams. 3. Cut and adjust sport flooring prior to adhesion. 4. Mix adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 5. Hold all seams in place with suitable weights for a minimum of 12 hours. 6. Immediately remove any adhesive from flooring surface, using chemical recommended by flooring manufacturer. 7. Scribe, cut, and fit rubber sport flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and nosings. 8. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on rubber sport flooring as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. 9. Install transition/reducer strips at locations where rubber sport flooring is not level with surrounding/adjacent flooring and where recommended or required by rubber sport flooring manufacturer. Locations include but are not limited to door thresholds. D. Rubber Tile Flooring: 1. Lay out center lines in spaces to receive tile flooring, based on location of principal walls. Start tile installation from center, and adjust as necessary to avoid tiles less than one-half width at perimeter. 2. Lay tiles square with room axis, matching for color and pattern by selecting from cartons and mixing as recommended by manufacturer CLEANING A. Clean flooring using methods recommended by manufacturer PROTECTION RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING

305 A. Wait 72 hours after the installation before the initial cleaning of the surface. B. Clean sport flooring with materials and methods recommended in writing by the manufacturer. END OF SECTION Protect sport flooring from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. A. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over surfaces. Place hardboard or plywood panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING

306 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Refinishing existing terrazzo flooring RELATED REQUIREMENTS SECTION REFINISHING EXISTING TERRAZZO FLOORING A. Section Joint Sealers: Joint between terrazzo base and wall surface REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NTMA (SPECS) - Terrazzo Specifications; The National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association, Inc.; current edition located at SUBMITTALS A. See Section Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for sealer and stripper; include printed copy of current NTMA recommendations for the type of terrazzo involved QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with NTMA recommendations as posted on their web site at B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with not fewer than 5 years of documented experience MOCK-UP A. Refinish section of terrazzo flooring illustrating appearance of finished work. Size of mock-up to be 3' x 3' minimum. B. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work FIELD CONDITIONS A. Provide ambient lighting level of 50 ft candles, measured at floor surface. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCESSORIES A. Cleaner: Neutralizing liquid type, ph of 7 to 10. B. Sealer: Colorless, non-yellowing, penetrating liquid type, ph of 7 to 10; not detrimental to terrazzo components. Provide manufactured by. C. Terrazzo Patch/Filler: polyester type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing terrazzo is ready to be refinished PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of foreign matter. B. Chemically Strip the topical sealer off the floor 1. Spread stripper over the floor. 2. Scrub Sealer off floor using floor scrubbers. REFINISHING EXISTING TERRAZZO FLOORING

307 3. Extract all water, Stripper & Sealer C. Fill holes near door using polyester fill. D. Hone damage out of floor 1. Wet honing process using marble honing diamonds. 2. Extract slurry created through the wet honing process SURFACE REFINISHING A. Polish floor 1. Polish the floor with floor scrubbers, red pad & marble polishing powder. 2. Extract water and wet polishing powder. B. Seal with floor with penetrating Impregnating sealer 1. Apply sealer to floor. 2. Buff excess off floor using floor scrubbers and white pad CLEANING A. Scrub and clean terrazzo surfaces with cleaner in accordance with NTMA instructions. Let dry. B. Immediately after terrazzo has dried, apply sealer in accordance with NTMA instructions and let dry. C. Seal and polish surfaces in accordance with NTMA instructions PROTECTION A. Do not permit construction traffic over finished terrazzo surfaces. B. Protect surrounding areas and materials from damage. END OF SECTION REFINISHING EXISTING TERRAZZO FLOORING

308 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints and stains. SECTION PAINTING AND COATING C. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless otherwise indicated, including the following: D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3. Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of equipment. 5. Floors, unless specifically so indicated. 6. Glass. 7. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits. E. See Schedule - All exposed to view surfaces to be finished unless noted as "Natural", "Unfinished", "Unpainted" RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition. B. ASTM D 16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications; C. ASTM D Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood-Base Materials; D. NACE (IMP) - Industrial Maintenance Painting; NACE International; Edition date unknown. E. SSPC (PM1) - Good Painting Practice: SSPC Painting Manual, Vol. 1; Society for Protective Coatings; Fourth Edition DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ASTM D 16 for interpretation of terms used in this section SUBMITTALS A. See Section Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products, including VOC content. C. Samples: Submit two paper chip samples, x inch in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified, with minimum three years documented experience. PAINTING AND COATING

309 B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified approved by manufacturer REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating requirements for products and finishes MOCK-UP A. See Section Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up. B. Provide panel, 4 feet long by 4 feet wide, illustrating each coating color, texture, and finish. C. Provide door and frame assembly illustrating paint coating color, texture, and finish. D. Locate where directed. E. Mock-up may remain as part of the work DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Supply 1 gallon of each color; store where directed. C. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no exceptions. B. Paints: 1. Base Manufacturer: Sherwin Williams Paints. 2. Duron, Inc: 3. Glidden Professional: 4. Benjamin Moore & Co: 5. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc: PAINTING AND COATING

310 C. Transparent Finishes: 1. Base Manufacturer: Sherwin Williams Paints. 2. Duron, Inc: 3. ICI Paints North America: 4. Benjamin Moore & Co: 5. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc: D. Stains: 1. Base Manufacturer: Sherwin Williams Paints. 2. Duron, Inc: 3. ICI Paints North America: 4. Benjamin Moore & Co: 5. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc: E. Primer Sealers: 1. Base Manufacturer: Sherwin Williams Paints. 2. Duron, Inc: 3. ICI Paints North America: 4. Benjamin Moore & Co: 5. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc: F. Block Fillers: 1. Base Manufacturer: Sherwin Williams Paints. 2. Duron, Inc: 3. ICI Paints North America: 4. Benjamin Moore & Co: 5. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc: G. Substitutions: See Section Product Requirements PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating. 1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 2. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. 3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. B. Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer. C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following: a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings. 2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR A. Paint WE-OP-3L - Wood & Hardie Board Balcony treatments, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of latex primer sealer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel;. B. Paint ME-OP-3L - Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of latex primer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel;. PAINTING AND COATING

311 C. Paint ME-OP-2L - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Latex, 2 Coat: 1. Touch-up with rust-inhibitive primer recommended by top coat manufacturer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel;. D. Paint MgE-OP-3L - Galvanized Metals, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat galvanize primer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR A. Paint WI-OP-3L - Wood, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of latex primer sealer. 2. Eggshell: Two coats of latex enamel;. B. Paint WI-TR-V - Wood, Transparent, Varnish, No Stain: 1. One coat sealer. 2. Satin: Two coats of varnish;. C. Paint WI-TR-VS - Wood, Transparent, Varnish, Stain: 1. Filler coat (for open grained wood only). 2. One coat of stain;. 3. One coat sealer;. 4. Satin: One coat of varnish;. D. Paint CI-OP-3L - Concrete/Masonry, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of block filler minimum, apply at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled.. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; ProMar200 B31 W200 Series. E. Paint MI-OP-2L - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Latex, 2 Coat: 1. Touch-up with latex primer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel;. F. Paint GI-OP-3LA - Gypsum Board/Plaster, Latex-Acrylic, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of latex primer sealer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex-acrylic enamel; ProMar200 B31 W200 Series ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically indicated or not; commercial quality. B. Patching Material: Latex filler. C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. D. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. 3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D PAINTING AND COATING

312 E. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over substrates primed by others PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. D. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects. E. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat. F. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. G. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry. H. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. I. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. J. Corroded Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Prepare using at least SSPC-PC 2 (hand tool cleaning) or SSPC-SP 3 (power tool cleaning) followed by SSPC-SP 1 (solvent cleaning). K. Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs. L. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item. M. Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation. N. Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried; sand lightly between coats. Prime concealed surfaces with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with thinner. O. Exterior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking compound after prime coat has been applied. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation. P. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces. PAINTING AND COATING

313 3.03 APPLICATION A. Exterior Wood to Receive Opaque Finish: If final painting must be delayed more than 2 weeks after installation of woodwork, apply primer within 2 weeks and final coating within 4 weeks. B. General: Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; provide thickness of paint to meet recommendations for institutional uses. Use applicatiors and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Do not paint over dire, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 2. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 3. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installaiton of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanent fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 4. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. 5. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. C. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. D. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 3. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. E. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer. G. First paragraph below is an example of painting requirements for mechanical and electrical work. Revise to suit Project. H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. I. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. K. Delete transparent finishes below if not applicable. Indicate locations in finish schedules. PAINTING AND COATING

314 L. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. 1. Provide satin finish for final coats. M. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Refer to Section and Section for schedule of color coding of equipment, duct work, piping, and conduit. B. Paint shop-primed equipment, where indicated. C. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. D. Finish equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed duct work in utility areas in colors according to the color coding scheme indicated; or as directed by Architect. E. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection CLEANING A. At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish and other discarded paint and paint related materials from Project site. Remove any materials that may constitute a fire hazard PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. 1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P SCHEDULE - SURFACES TO BE FINISHED A. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically noted. 2. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels. B. Paint the surfaces described below under Schedule - Paint Systems. C. Mechanical and Electrical: Use paint systems defined for the substrates to be finished. 1. Paint all insulated and exposed pipes occurring in finished areas to match background surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Paint all equipment, including that which is factory-finished, exposed to weather or to view on the roof and outdoors. 3. Paint shop-primed items occurring in finished areas. 4. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces. 5. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels. PAINTING AND COATING

315 3.09 SCHEDULE - PAINT SYSTEMS A. Concrete, Concrete Block, Brick Masonry: Finish all surfaces exposed to view, except where noted otherwise. 1. Interior: CI-OP-3L, semi-gloss. B. Gypsum Board: Finish all surfaces exposed to view. 1. Interior Ceilings and Bulkheads: GI-OP-3A, semi gloss. 2. Interior Walls: GI-OP-3A, semi-gloss. C. Plaster: Finish all surfaces exposed to view. 1. Exterior Soffits: GE-OP-3A, flat. D. Wood: Finish all surfaces exposed to view, except where noted otherwise or as natural. 1. Interior trim and frames: WI-OP-3A, semi-gloss. E. Wood Cabinets: Factory finish all exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. F. Wood Doors: WI-TR-VS. G. Steel Doors and Frames: Finish all surfaces exposed to view; MI-OP-3A, semi-gloss. H. Steel Fabrications: Finish all surfaces exposed to view. 1. Exterior: ME-OP-3A, semi-gloss; finish all surfaces, including concealed surfaces, before installation. 2. Interior: MI-OP-3L,semi-gloss. I. Galvanized Steel: Finish all surfaces exposed to view. J. Shop-Primed Metal Items: Finish all surfaces exposed to view. 1. Finish the following items: a. Exposed surfaces of lintels. b. Exposed surfaces of steel stairs and railings. c. Mechanical equipment. d. Electrical equipment. END OF SECTION PAINTING AND COATING

316 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following miscellaneous specialties: 1. Front loading horizontal mailboxes SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of miscellaneous specialty indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation of miscellaneous specialties where required to indicate conformance with documents or as requested by Architect. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work or other drawings required. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts or sections of actual units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of miscellaneous specialty indicated. D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the products furnished comply with requirements. E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the Quality Assurance article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names of architects and owners and other information specified QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage and experienced Installer who has completed installations similar in scope to the extent indicated for this Project and with a record of successful performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of miscellaneous specialty though one source from a single manufacturer unless otherwise directed by the Architect in writing. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section Project Management and Coordination DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver miscellaneous specialties including components and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, vandalism, theft and other causes. B. Handle miscellaneous specialties to avoid damage in any way PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions in areas of installation by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating units without field measurements. Coordinate supports, adjacent construction, and fixture locations to ensure actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES

317 B. Environmental Limitations: When specified by manufacturer do not install miscellaneous specialties until ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Before installation of miscellaneous specialties ensure that manufacturer s installation requirements have been met. D. Postinstallation Period: Maintain climate, access, protection and other criteria recommended by the manufacturer COORDINATION A. Coordinate miscellaneous specialties with other work. Items to coordinate include but are not limited to: prevention of interference with clearances required for access by disabled persons, proper installation, adjustment, operation and compatibility with substrates WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements to the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to those indicated in the Miscellaneous Specialty Schedule at the end of Part MATERIALS A. Materials as indicated in Miscellaneous Specialty Schedule. Item listed is a basis of design and any item submitted must either meet or exceed requirements based on specified item, including but not limited to dimension, color selection and materials comprising the item MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTY SCHEDULE A Series Horizontal Front Loading Mailbox by AF Florence Manufacturing Company: 1. Mailboxes a. Configuration: 202 openings as indicated b. Finish: Anodized Aluminum, metallic finish 2. Parcel Boxes a. Configuration: 8 openings as indicated PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, structural support, anchorage, substrates and conditions with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation, operation and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Unless otherwise directed by manufacturer in writing install Miscellaneous Specialties level, plumb, square and true to line ADJUSTING AND CLEANING MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES

318 A. Adjust and clean miscellaneous specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Inspect miscellaneous specialties for damaged or defective items. Promptly replace damaged or defective items. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure Miscellaneous Specialties are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES

319 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Portable fire extinguishers SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection specialties. 1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer. B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers." C. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide extinguishers listed and labeled by FM. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Portable Fire Extinguishers: a. Amerex Corporation. b. Ansul Incorporated. c. Badger; Div. of Figgie Fire Protection Systems. d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. e. Fire-End & Croker Corporation. f. General Fire Extinguisher Corporation. g. J.L. Industries, Inc. h. Kidde: Walter Kidde, The Fire Extinguisher Co. i. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. j. Modern Metal Products; Div. of Technico. k. Moon/American, Inc. l. Pem All; Div. of Pem Systems, Inc. m. Potter-Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc. n. Samson Products, Inc. o. Watrous; Div. of American Specialties, Inc. 2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in the Fire-Protection Cabinet Schedule at the end of Part PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, in enameled-steel container. FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

320 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure extinguisher, of sizes required for types and capacities of extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. 1. Provide brackets for extinguishers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable blocking where extinguishers are to be installed. B. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing fire-protection specialties. B. Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fasten mounting brackets to structure, square and plumb. END OF SECTION FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

321 SECTION WINDOW SHADES 1.01 PART 1 GENERAL 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Drawings and general provisions of hte Contract, including General and Supplementary conditions and Division 1 Specification Sectoins, apply to this section. 1. Section Rough Carpentry: Blocking for support of window shade hardware. 2. Section Joint Sealers: Sealants for perimeter of shade system. 3. Section Gypsum Board Assemblies: Suspended gypsum board ceilings to contain recessed window shade pockets. 4. Section Acoustical Ceilings: Suspended acoustical panel ceilings to contain recessed window shade pockets REFERENCES A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. B. NFPA Fire Tests for Flame-Resistant Textiles and Films. C. GREENGUARD Environmental Institute Children & Schools D. US Green Building Council SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section Submittal Procedures: B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product specified, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Installation and maintenance instructions. 3. Styles, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles, features, finishes and operating instructions. 4. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 5. Mounting details and installation methods. a. Typical wiring diagrams including integration of motor controllers with building management system, audiovisual and lighting control systems as applicable. 6. Shop Drawings: Plans, elevations, sections, product details, installation details, operational clearances, wiring diagrams and relationship to adjacent work. 7. Window Treatment Schedule: For all roller shades. Use same room designations as indicated on the Drawings, field verified window dimensions, quantities, type of shade, controls, fabric, and color, and include opening sizes and key to typical mounting details. 8. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of shade cloth options and aluminum finish color samples representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. 9. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of shade components, unassembled, demonstrating compliance with specified requirements. Shade fabric sample and aluminum finish sample as selected, representing actual product, color, and patterns. Mark face of material to indicate interior faces. 10. Maintenance Data: Methods for maintaining roller shades, precautions regarding cleaning materials and methods, instructions for operating hardware and controls. 11. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single manufacturer with a minimum of twenty years experience in manufacturing products comparable to those specified in this section. WINDOW SHADES

322 B. NFPA Flame-Test: Passes NFPA 701. Materials tested shall be identical to products proposed for use. 1. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up of one of each type roller shade assembly specified for evaluation of mounting, appearance and accessories. a. Locate mock-up in window(s) designated by Architect. b. Do not proceed with remaining work until mock-up is accepted by Architect DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver window shades until building is enclosed and construction within spaces where shades will be installed is substantially complete. B. Deliver products in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with labels intact. C. Label containers and shades according to Window Shade Schedule. D. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation SEQUENCING A. Ensure that locating templates and other information required for installation of products of this section are furnished to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress. B. Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Install roller shades after finish work and ambient temperature, humidity and ventilation conditions are maintained at levels recommended for project upon completion WARRANTY A. Hardware and Shade Fabric: Draper's standard twenty-five year limited warranty. B. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to the compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that my be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Draper SW 2000 Flex Shades. B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section C. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install roller shades level, plumb, square, and true. Allow proper clearances for window operation hardware TESTING AND DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate operation of shades to Owner's designated representatives PROTECTION WINDOW SHADES

323 A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion SCHEDULES A. Refer to Drawings for shade types and locations. END OF SECTION WINDOW SHADES

324 SECTION HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Pipe, and equipment hangers, supports, and associated anchors. B. Sleeves and seals. C. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks RELATED WORK A. Section Hangers and Support for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. B. Section Plumbing Piping Insulation. C. Section Plumbing Equipment Insulation. D. Section Fire Protection and Wet Pipe Sprinkler System. E. Section Plumbing System. F. Section Above Ground Hydronic Piping. G. Section Refrigerant Piping 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME B Power Piping. B. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. C. NFPA 14 - Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supports for Sprinkler Piping: In conformance with NFPA 13. B. Supports for Standpipes: In conformance with NFPA SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division One. B. Indicate hanger and support framing and attachment methods. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger. HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

325 D. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods; cast iron roll and stand for pipe sizes 6 inches and over. E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook. F. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll. G. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. H. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. I. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support. J. Roof Pipe Supports and Hangers: Galvanized Steel Channel System as manufactured by Portable Pipe Hangers, Inc. or approved equal. For pipes 2-1/2 and smaller Type PP10 with roller For pipes 3 through 8 Type PS For multiple pipes Type PSE - Custom K. Copper Pipe Support and Hangers: Electro-galvanized with thermoplastic elastomer cushions; Unistrut Cush-A-Clamp or equal. Hangers: Plastic coated; Unistrut or equal. L. For installation of protective shields refer to specification section M. Shields for Vertical Copper Pipe Risers: Sheet lead. N. Pipe Rough-In Supports in Walls/Chases: Provide preformed plastic pipe supports, Sioux Chief Pipe Titan hold rite or equal HANGER RODS A. Galvanized Hanger Rods: Threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded INSERTS A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods FLASHING A. Metal Flashing: 20 gage galvanized steel. B. Lead Flashing: 4 lb./sq. ft. sheet lead for waterproofing; 1 lb./sq. ft. sheet lead for soundproofing. C. Caps: Steel, 20 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements. D. Coordinate with roofing contractor/architect for type of flashing on metal roofs EQUIPMENT CURBS A. Fabricate curbs of hot dipped galvanized steel SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: Form with 18 gage galvanized steel, tack welded to HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

326 form a uniform sleeve. B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Form with steel pipe, schedule 40. C. Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fireproofing: Prefabricated fire rated steel sleeves including seals, UL listed. D. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel. E. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel. F. Fire Stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible, U.L. listed. G. Caulk: Paintable 25-year acrylic sealant. H. Pipe Alignment Guides: Factory fabricated, of cast semi-steel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting of bolted, two-section outer cylinder and base with two-section guiding spider that bolts tightly to pipe. Length of guides shall be as recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel FABRICATION A. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. B. Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe. C. Design roof supports without roof penetrations, flashing or damage to the roofing material FINISH A. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSERTS A. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. Coordinate with structural engineer for placement of inserts. B. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. C. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, provide inserts to be flush with slab surface. D. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide thru-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab. Verify with structural engineer prior to start of work PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal piping as follows: PIPE SIZE MAX. HANGER SPACING HANGER DIAMETER (Steel Pipe) 1/2 to 1-1/4 inch 7-0 3/8" 1-1/2 to 3 inch 10'-0" 3/8" 4 to 6 inch 10'-0" 1/2" HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

327 8 to 10 inch 10'-0" 5/8" 12 to 14 inch 10'-0" 3/4" 15 inch and over 10'-0" 7/8" (Copper Pipe) 1/2 to 1-1/4 inch 5'-0" 3/8" 1-1/2 to 2-1/2 inch 8'-0" 3/8" 3 to 4 inch 10'-0" 3/8" 6 to 8 inch 10'-0" 1/2" (Cast Iron) 2 to 3 inch 5'-0" 3/8" 4 to 6 inch 10'-0" 1/2" 8 to 10 inch 10'-0" 5/8" 12 to 14 inch 10'-0" 3/4" 15 inch and over 10'-0" 7/8" (PVC Pipe) 1-1/2 to 4 inch 4'-0" 3/8" 6 to 8 inch 4'-0" 1/2" 10 and over 4'-0" 5/8" B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. C. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow and at the vertical horizontal transition. D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers. F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub. G. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers. H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. I. Install hangers with nut at base and above hanger; tighten upper nut to hanger after final installation adjustments. J. Portable pipe hanger systems shall be installed per manufactures instructions Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements. A. Clamps: Attach galvanized clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.9. B. Saddles: Install galvanized protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe insulation. C. Shields: Install protective shields MSS Type 40 on cold and chilled water piping that has vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees and shall have dimensions in inches not less than the following: NPS LENGTH THICKNESS 1/4 THROUGH 3-1/ & THROUGH THROUGH HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

328 D. Piping 2 and larger provide galvanized sheet metal shields with calcium silicate at hangers/supports. E. Insert material shall be at least as long as the protective shield. F. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install where indicated, with insulation of same thickness as piping EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide equipment bases of concrete. B. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. C. Construct support of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed FLASHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counter flashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs. B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 8 inches minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked one inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and caulk, metal counter flash and seal. C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches clear on sides with minimum 36 x 36 inch sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device. D. Seal floor shower mop sink and all other drains watertight to adjacent materials. E. Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 8 inches minimum high above roofing surface. Contact architect for all flashing details and roof construction. Seal penetrations watertight SLEEVES A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. B. Extend sleeves through floors minimum one inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves full depth with fire rated thermfiber and 3M caulking and provide floor plate. C. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with U.L. listed fire stopping insulation and caulk seal air tight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. D. Fire protection sleeves may be flush with floor of stairways. END OF SECTION HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

329 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section , are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document SCOPE Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use Refer to Architectural Sections for additional requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 VALVE AND PIPE IDENTIFICATION A. Valves: 1. All valves shall be identified with a 1-1/2" diameter brass disc wired onto the handle. The disc shall be stamped with 1/2" high depressed black filled identifying numbers. These numbers shall be numerically sequenced for all valves on the job. 2. The number and description indicating make, size, model number and service of each valve shall be listed in proper operational sequence, properly typewritten. Three copies to be turned over to Owner at completion. 3. Tags shall be fastened with approved meter seal and 4 ply smooth copper wire. Tags and fastenings shall be manufactured by the Seton Name Plate Company or approved equal. 4. All valves shall be numbered serially with all valves of any one system and/or trade grouped together. B. Pipe Marking: 1. All interior visible piping located in accessible spaces such as above accessible ceilings, equipment rooms, attic space, under floor spaces, etc., shall be identified with all temperature pipe markers as manufactured by W.H. Brady Company, 431 West Rock Ave., New Haven, Connecticut, or approved equal. 2. All exterior visible piping shall be identified with UV and acid resistant outdoor grade acrylic plastic markers as manufactured by Set Mark distributed by Seton nameplate company. Factory location 20 Thompson Road, Branford, Connecticut, or approved equal. 3. Generally, markers shall be located on each side of each partition, on each side of each tee, on each side of each valve and/or valve group, on each side of each piece of equipment, and, for straight runs, at equally spaced intervals not to exceed 75 feet. In congested area, marks shall be placed on each pipe at the points where it enters and leaves the area and at the point of connection of each piece of equipment and automatic control valve. All markers shall have directional arrows. 4. Markers shall be installed after final painting of all piping and equipment and in such a manner that they are visible from the normal maintenance position. Manufacturer's installation instructions shall be closely followed. 5. Markers shall be colored as indicated below per ANSI/OSHA Standards: IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING AND EQUIPMENT

330 C. Pipe Painting: SYSTEM COLOR LEGEND Sanitary Sewer Green Vent Sanitary Sewer Domestic Water Green Domestic Water Domestic Hot Water Yellow Domestic Hot Supply Water Supply Domestic Hot Water Yellow Domestic Hot 1. All piping exposed to view shall be painted as indicated or as directed by the Architect in the field. Confirm all color selections with Architect prior to installation. 2. The entire fire protection piping system shall be painted red. 3. All piping located in mechanical rooms and exterior piping shall be painted as indicated below: System Sanitary Sewer Waste and Vent Domestic Cold Water Domestic Hot Water Supply and Return Color Light Gray Dark Blue Orange PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 All labeling equipment shall be installed as per manufacturers printed installation instructions All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Contractors price shall include all items required as per manufacturers' requirements All piping shall be cleaned of rust, dirt, oil and all other contaminants prior to painting. Install primer and a quality latex paint over all surfaces of pipe. END OF SECTION IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING AND EQUIPMENT

331 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section , are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document SCOPE A. Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. B. Work specified elsewhere WARRANTY 1. Basic materials and methods. 2. Piping systems. 3. Air distribution equipment. A. Warrant the Work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming materials and workmanship. B. Defects shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Mildewing. 2. Peeling, cracking, and blistering. 3. Condensation on exterior surfaces SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance, fabrication procedures, product variations, and accessories DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. DELIVERY: Deliver undamaged materials in the manufacturer's unopened containers clearly labeled with flame and smoke ratings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 It is the intent of these specifications to secure superior quality workmanship resulting in an absolutely satisfactory installation of insulation from the standpoint of both function and appearance. Particular attention shall be given to valves, fittings, pumps, etc., requiring low temperature insulation to insure full thickness of insulation and proper application of the vapor seal. All flaps of vapor barrier jackets and/or canvas covering must be neatly and securely smoothed and sealed down The type of insulation and its installation shall be in strict accordance with these specifications for each service, and the application technique shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. All insulation types, PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION

332 together with adhesives and finishes shall be submitted and approved before any insulation is installed A sample quantity of each type insulation and each type application shall be installed and approval secured prior to proceeding with the main body of the work. Condensation caused by improper installation of insulation shall be corrected by Installing Contractor. Any damage caused by condensation shall be made good at no cost to the Owner or Architect/Engineer Glass fiber materials as manufactured by Owens/Corning, PPG, CSG, or Johns Manville will be acceptable, if they comply with the specifications All insulation shall have composite (insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere the facing or jacket to insulation) fire and smoke hazard as tested by Procedure ASTM E084, NFPA 255 and UL 723 not exceeding: Flame Spread 25 Smoke Developed Accessories, such as adhesives, mastics and cements shall have the same component ratings as listed above All products or their shipping cartons shall have a label affixed, indicating flame and smoke ratings do not exceed the above requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 All insulation shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and printed installation instructions All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturers requirements. END OF SECTION PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION

333 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section , are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document SCOPE A. Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. B. Furnish and install piping insulation to: 1. Interior domestic hot and cold water piping. 2. Exterior domestic cold water piping. 3. Condensate drainage piping. 4. All pipes subject to freezing conditions shall be insulated. C. Work specified elsewhere. 1. Painting. 2. Pipe hangers and supports. D. For insulation purpose piping is defined as the complete piping system including supplies and returns, pipes, valves, automatic control valve bodies, fittings, flanges, strainers, thermometer well, unions, reducing stations, and orifice assemblies WARRANTY A. Warrant the Work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming materials or workmanship. B. Defects shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Mildewing. 2. Peeling, cracking, and blistering. 3. Condensation on exterior surfaces SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance, fabrication procedures, project variations, and accessories DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. DELIVERY: Deliver undamaged materials in the manufacturer's unopened containers. Containers shall be clearly labeled with the insulation's flame and smoke ratings. PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

334 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 It is the intent of these specifications to secure superior quality workmanship resulting in an absolutely satisfactory installation of insulation from the standpoint of both function and appearance. Particular attention shall be given to valves, fittings, pumps, etc., requiring low temperature insulation to insure full thickness of insulation and proper application of the vapor seal. All flaps of vapor barrier jackets and/or canvas covering must be neatly and securely smoothed and sealed down The type of insulation and its installation shall be in strict accordance with these specifications for each service, and the application technique shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. All insulation types, together with adhesives and finishes shall be submitted and approved prior to installation A sample quantity of each type of insulation and each type application shall be installed and approval secured prior to proceeding with the main body of the work. Condensation caused by improper installation of insulation shall be corrected by Installing Contractor. Any damage caused by condensation shall be made good at no cost to the Owner or Architect/Engineer All insulation shall have composite (insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere the facing or jacket to insulation) fire and smoke hazard as tested by Procedure ASTM E084, NFPA 255 and UL 723 not exceeding: Flame Spread 25 Smoke Developed Accessories, such as adhesives, mastics and cements shall have the same component ratings as listed above All products or their shipping cartons shall have a label affixed, indicating flame and smoke ratings do not exceed the above requirements APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Calcium silicate materials shall be as manufactured by Johns Manville. B. Glass fiber materials shall be as manufactured by Johns Manville or Owens-Corning and shall have the same thermal properties, density, fire rating, vapor barrier, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer. C. Adhesives shall be as manufactured by Childers, Foster, HB Fuller or Armstrong, and shall have the same adhesive properties, fire rating, vapor seal, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer. D. Armaflex elastomeric cellular thermal insulation by Armstrong. E. Phenolic foam insulation shall be as manufactured by Kooltherm Insulation (Koolphen). F. Metal jacketing and fitting covers shall be as manufactured by Childers or RPR Products MATERIALS A. INTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPE: provide fiberglass pipe insulation with all service jackets with self sealing lap joint. B. EXTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPE: Provide elastomeric cellular thermal, or preformed phenolic foam pipe insulation with secured metal jacketing. C. DRAIN BODIES AND DOWN SPOUTS: Insulate horizontal roof drain down spouts, underside of roof drain bodies, chilled water waste lines from drinking fountain to junction with main waste stacks, and PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

335 branch lines including traps and exposed underside of floor drains receiving cooling coil condensate, same as water piping where exposed to building occupant view. When concealed, insulation may be same as specified for external duct wrap. D. CONDENSATE DRAINAGE PIPING: Fire resistant fiberglass insulation; insulation not required when piping is exposed on roof. E. METAL JACKETING: Utilize Childers Strap-On jacketing. Provide preformed fitting covers for all elbows and tees. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 All insulation shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and printed installation instructions, including high density inserts at all hangers and pipe supports to prevent compression of insulation All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturers requirements Pipes located outdoors or in tunnels shall be insulated same as concealed piping; and in addition shall have a jacket of inch thick, smooth aluminum with longitudinal modified Pittsburg Z-Lock seam and 2 inch overlap. Jacketing shall be easily removed and replaced without damage. All butt joints shall be sealed with gray silicone. Galvanized banding is not acceptable All insulated piping located over driveways shall have an aluminum shield permanently banded over insulation to protect it from damage from car antennas WATER PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. The insulation shall be applied to clean, dry pipes with all joints firmly butted together. Where piping is interrupted by fittings, flanges, valves or hangers and at intervals not to exceed 25 feet on straight runs, an isolating seal shall be formed between the vapor barrier jacket and the bare pipe. The seal shall be by the applications of adhesive to the exposed insulation joint faces, carried continuously down to and along 4 inches of pipe and up to and along 2 inches of jacket. B. Pipe fittings and valves shall be insulated with pre-molded or shop fabricated glass fiber covers finished with two brush coats of vapor barrier mastic reinforced with glass fabric. C. All under lap surfaces shall be clean and free of dust, etc. before the SSL is sealed. These laps shall be firmly rubbed to insure a positive seal. A brush coat of vapor retarder shall be applied to all edges of the vapor barrier jacket FIRE RATED INSULATION A. All pipe penetrations through walls and concrete floors shall be fire rated by applying USG Thermafiber in the space between the concrete and the pipe. B. The fire rating shall be additionally sealed by using 3M brand model CP 25 or 303 fire barrier caulk and putty. C. All fire rating material shall be insulated in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

336 PART 4 - SCHEDULES 4.01 LOW TEMPERATURE SURFACES MINIMUM INSULATION THICKNESS BASED ON FIBERGLASS A. Exposed exterior domestic water pipe: 1½ inch B. Interior domestic cold water pipe exposed to freezing temperatures: 1 inch C. Condensate drain lines: ¾ inch D. Drains receiving condensate: 1 inch E. Concealed horizontal leader from roof drain: 1½ inch blanket wrap Exposed horizontal leader from roof drain: 1 inch thick rigid with all service jackets 4.02 HIGH TEMPERATURE SURFACES MINIMUM INSULATION THICKNESS A. Hot Water Piping: (1) Operating temperature 105 F or less: 1 inch (2) Operating temperature higher than 105 F 1 inch and pipe size 1½ inch or smaller (3) Operating temperature higher than 105 F 2 inch and pipe size more than 1½ inch B. Domestic Hot Water and Hot Water Circulating Piping 1 inch END OF SECTION PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

337 SECTION PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe and pipe fittings. B. Valves. C. Sanitary sewer piping system. D. Domestic water piping system. E. Excavation and backfill RELATED SECTIONS A. Section Hangers and Support for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. B. Section Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping. C. Section Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. D. Section Plumbing Piping Insulation. E. Section Plumbing Specialties. F. Section Plumbing Equipment. G. Section Plumbing Fixtures REFERENCES A. ANSI B Power Piping. B. ANSI B Building Service Piping. C. ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. D. ASME Sec. 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications. E. ASME B Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25, 125, 250 and 800. F. ASME B Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. G. ASME B Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Class 125 and 250. H. ASME B Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings I. ASTM A47 - Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. J. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless. K. ASTM A74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. L. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal. PLUMBING PIPING

338 M. ASTM B42 - Seamless Copper Pipe. N. ASTM B306 - Copper Drainage Tube (DWV). O. ASTM D Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40, 80, and 120. P. ASTM D Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR). Q. ASTM D Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. R. ASTM D Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. S. ASTM D Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. T. ASTM D Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) Pipe, Fittings, Solvent Cements and Adhesives for Potable Hot Water Systems. U. ASTM F493 - Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. V. AWWA C111- Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. W. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains. X. CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems. Y. CISPI Joints for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division One. B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, Pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Division One. B. Record actual locations of valves OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Division One. B. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating cast or marked on valve body. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code and applicable state labor regulations. C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME Sec 9. D. Foreign pipe, fittings or valves are unacceptable. E. Piping shall be labeled along entire length indicating size, class, material specification, manufacturers name and country of origin. PLUMBING PIPING

339 1.08 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum 5 years documented experience and must be a domestic manufacturer. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform Work in accordance with plumbing and building codes having jurisdiction. B. Conform to applicable codes for the provision and installation of all required backflow prevention devices. C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of installation of backflow prevention devices. D. No PVC pipe or fittings will be allowed for any areas where pipe is to penetrate a fire rated assembly or to be installed in a return air plenum unless the entire length of all such piping is encased within a minimum 2 hour fire rated enclosure DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Division One. B. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. E. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. Tape will not be allowed as an acceptable end cover EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Division One. B. Provide two repacking kits for each size valve. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SANITARY SOIL, WASTE AND VENT PIPING, WITHIN BUILDING, ABOVE GRADE A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785/D 2665 schedule Fittings: PVC, ASTM D 3311/D 2665 drainage pattern, with bell and spigot ends to be furnished by the same manufacturer as pipe or approved equal. 2. Joints: ASTM D 2855, solvent weld with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, WITHIN BUILDING, ABOVE GRADE A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast bronze, or ASTM B wrought copper alloy. 2. Joints: ASTM B 32, solder. PLUMBING PIPING

340 2.03 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. This section shall govern for all excavation and soil testing for the construction and laying of all sewers. B. Excavation: 1. Excavate trenches for underground piping to the required depth to ensure 2 foot minimum coverage over piping unless noted otherwise. 2. The bottom of the trench or excavation shall be cut to a uniform grade. 3. Should rock be encountered, excavate 6 inches below grade, fill with bedding material and temp to existing density. 4. Coordinate alignment of pipe trenches to avoid obstructions. Assure that proposed routing of pipe will not interfere with building foundation before any trenching has begun. Should conflicts occur, contact Architect/Engineer before proceeding. C. Backfill: 1. Backfill shall not be placed until the work has been inspected, tested and approved. Complete backfill to the surface of natural ground or to the lines and grades indicated on drawings. Use 6 inch stabilized sand bed with 4 inch stabilized sand cover around each pipe and select fill up to finished surface or grade. 2. Compacting Backfill: Place material in uniform layers of 8 inches maximum, loose measure and compact to not less than 95% of maximum soil density as determined by ASTM D-698 Standard Proctor. 3. Restoration: Compact backfill, where trenching or excavation is required in improved areas such as pavements, walks and similar areas, to a condition equal to the adjacent undisturbed earth and restore surface of the area to the condition existing prior to trenching or excavating operation. 4. A clay fill trench plug extending 3 feet inside the building line and 5 feet outside the building line shall be placed to completely surround utility lines passing beneath the foundation and grade beam. The materials shall consist of on-site soils with a plasticity index (PI) between 30 and 40 percent compacted to at least 95 percent of the Standard Proctor and maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D FLANGES, UNIONS AND COUPLINGS A. Pipe size 2 inches and under: 1. Ferrous pipe: ANSI B16.39, 150 psig malleable iron threaded unions. 2. Copper tube and pipe: 150 psig bronze unions with soldered ends. 3. Ferrous pipe: ANSI B16.5, 150 psig forged steel flanges; screwed neck, 1/16" thick preformed neoprene gaskets. B. Pipe size 2-1/2 inches and larger: 1. Ferrous pipe: 150 psig forged steel slip-on flanges; weld neck, 1/16" thick preformed neoprene gaskets. 2. Copper tube and pipe: 150 psig slip-on bronze flanges; 1/16" thick preformed neoprene gaskets. C. Dielectric Connections: 1. Pipe size 2 inches and under: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. 2. Pipe size 2-1/2 inch and larger: flange, connection as above, with water impervious isolation barrier. D. Mechanical Couplings: 1. Grooved mechanical pipe couplings, fittings, valves and other grooved components may be used as an option to soldered or braised methods. Fittings shall be cast of bronze for copper tubing systems. All grooved components shall be of one domestic manufacturer, and conform to local code approval PLUMBING PIPING

341 2.05 GATE VALVES and/or as listed by ANSI-B-31, B-31.3M B-31.9, ASME, UL/ULC, FM, IAPMO OR BOCA. Grooved end manufacturer to be ISO-9001 certified. Grooved couplings shall meet the requirements of ASTM F Manufacturer shall be Victaulic or approved equal. A. Manufacturers: 1. Nibco No. T-111 up to 2-1/2"; F-617-O 3" and over. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Crane No. 428 up to 2-1/2"; 465-1/2 3" and over. b. Stockham No. B-100 up to 2-1/2"; G-623 3" and over. c. Grinnell No up to 2-1/2"; 6020A 3" and over. B. Up to and including 2-1/2" Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, solid wedge threaded ends. C. Over 3" Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, solid wedge, flanged ends. D. Provide bronze tee or cast iron square nut operator for all valves installed below ground. 1. Valves 2-1/2" and smaller shall be equipped with ASTM B62 solid red bronze tee securely affixed to the valve stem. 2. Valves 3" and larger shall be equipped with a standard 2" square combination nut/socket securely affixed to the valve stem. 3. Provide owner with two extended tee handle operating wrenches for each type of valve head installed BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Nibco No. T Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Crane No B b. Stockham Model S-216BR-1R-T c. Grinnell No B. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze two 600 PSI piece body full port, stainless steel ball and stem, Teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle and balancing stops, threaded ends with union. C. Ball valves used for balancing shall have memory stops SWING CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Nibco No. T-413-B up to 2-1/2"; F-918 3" and over. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Crane No. 37 up to 2-1/2"; 372 3" and over. b. Stockham No. B-319; up to 2-1/2"; G931 3" and over. c. Grinnell No up to 2-1/2"; 6300A 3" and over. B. Up to and including 2-1/2 Inches: Bronze swing disc, screwed ends. C. Over 2-1/2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends. Include outside lever and adjustable weight where required for quiet operation. PLUMBING PIPING

342 2.08 SPRING LOADED (SILENT) CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Nibco No. W Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Grinnell No. 402 B. Iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, renewable composition disc, screwed, wafer, or flanged ends SOLDER A. 95.5% tin, 4% copper, 0.5% silver. B. Lead free, antimony free, zinc-free. C. Silvabrite 100, by Engelhard Corporation or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Coordinate and verify excavations under provisions of Division Two. B. Verify that all excavations are to the required grade, dry, and not over-excavated PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale, oil and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. D. Install, clean bank sand backfill in trench to a minimum of 6 inches below pipe, and to cover all piping a minimum of 12 inches above pipe INSTALLATION A. Install all materials in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. B. All exposed sewer and water pipe in toilet rooms or other finished areas of the building shall be chromium plated. C. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. D. Route piping in orderly manner, parallel and perpendicular to building column grid lines, unless indicated otherwise on drawings, and maintain gradients. E. Install piping to conserve building space and not conflict with other trades or interfere with intended use of space. F. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. G. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. PLUMBING PIPING

343 H. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Valves installed beyond reasonable reach shall be provided with chain operator. I. Provide access doors where valves and operable fittings are not exposed. Access doors shall be of approved types set in locations pre-approved by submittal to the Architect. J. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 2 feet of cover, or maximum depth of frost penetration, which ever is the greater. K. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. L. Provide encasement for and support of utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies. M. Gate valves installed below grade shall be covered with an adjustable cast iron roadway box extended to grade. Cover shall be cast iron with 'water' cast on top and set flush to finished paving or 2" above finished earthen grade. Box shall be supported from undisturbed soil or concrete base and shall not introduce any stress to piping under all traffic conditions. N. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories not pre-finished, ready for finish painting. O. Excavate in accordance with Division 22. P. Backfill in accordance with Division 22. Q. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream. R. Maintain uniformity in the installation of piping materials and joining methods. Do not mix materials types. S. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. T. Solder joints shall be wiped clean at each joint, remove excess metal while molten and flux residue when cooled. U. No PVC pipe or fittings will be allowed for any areas where pipe is installed in return air plenum unless the entire length of all such piping is encased within a minimum 2 hour fire rated enclosure. V. Provide minimum 18 gauge copper tracer wire laid six inches directly above all underground non-metallic pipe. W. Installations of thermoplastic piping systems shall be in strict conformity to the manufacturers published instructions. Under ground drainage pipe installations shall be in conformity to ASTM D X. Installation of solvent cement joints for PVC piping shall be in strict conformity to the requirements outlined in ASTM D Y. Waste nipple from wall to tapped tee shall be schedule 40 threaded galvanized steel pipe or brass or copper with threaded adapter. Z. Provide approved PVC slip by cast iron no hub adaptor at each transition from underground PVC piping to above ground cast iron pipe using heavy duty wide bodied no hub couplings as specified elsewhere in this section. Transition shall be made as close as possible to floor for sanitary DWV piping systems and at test tee minimum 12 in. A.F.F. for storm drainage piping. Support vertical cast iron pipe from floor anchors using riser clamp and galvanized all thread rod as specified in section AA. Provide bracing to prevent axial movement for all storm drainage piping above ground floor. Provide restraints for all drainage piping at al changes in direction and at all diameter changes greater than two pipe sizes. Braces blocks, rodding and other permanent methods as prescribed by cast iron soil pipe institute. PLUMBING PIPING

344 BB. All grooved components (couplings, fittings, valves, gaskets and specialties) shall be of one domestic manufacturer. CC. Grooved manufacturer shall provide on-site training for contractor s field personnel by a factory trained representative in the proper use of grooving tools, application of groove, and product installation. Factory trained representative shall periodically visit the job site and inspect installation. Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products APPLICATION A. Install union downstream of all valves at equipment or apparatus connections. B. Install male adapters each side of threaded valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters to tube prior to make-up of threaded connections. C. Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate all equipment items, distinct parts of systems, or vertical risers. D. Each plumbing fixture shall have a shut-off valve on each hot water and cold water supply line. E. Each plumbing water rough-in stub out shall be fitted with a shut off valve. F. Install globe, ball or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or balancing (manual flow control) services. G. Ball valves installed in insulated piping shall be fitted with extended lever operators of sufficient length to raise handle above the insulation jacket material. Where valve is used for throttling service valve handle shall be equipped with adjustable memory stop device. H. Provide spring loaded, non-slam, check valves on discharge of water pumps ERECTION TOLERANCES A. All drainage lines in the building shall have 1/4 inch to the foot fall where possible and not less than 1/8 inch to the foot fall toward the main sewer. Pipe must be so laid that the slope will be uniform and continuous. Permission shall be secured from the Architect and Engineer before proceeding with any Work where existing conditions prevent the installation at minimum grade specified. B. Slope all water piping and arrange to drain at low points. Provide loose key operated, polished chrome, sill cock flush to wall where fixture stop will not suffice for this requirement DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Prior to starting work, all domestic water systems shall be complete, thoroughly flushed clean and free of all foreign matter or erection residue. B. Ensure PH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). C. On building side of the main shut off valve, provide a 3/4" connection through which chlorine can be introduced into the water piping D. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, in sufficient quantity to obtain 50 to 80 mg/l residual free chlorine solution throughout the entire domestic water piping systems. E. Bleed water from outlets as required to ensure complete distribution and test for disinfectant residual at a minimum 15 percent of total outlets. F. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. G. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/l, repeat treatment. PLUMBING PIPING

345 H. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/l. I. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 5 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Provide new sanitary and storm sewer services connecting to existing building services or utility lines as shown on the drawings. B. Before commencing work, field verify invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover as required. C. Provide new domestic water service connecting to existing building services or utility lines as shown on plans. Assure connections are in compliance with requirements of the jurisdiction having authority. D. Extension of services to the building shall be fabricated from the same materials as the utility service lines or those materials specified herein. E. Should points of connection vary from those indicated on the drawings contractor shall properly allow for this in the actual connections field fabricated RODDING SEWERS A. All sanitary soil and waste lines, both in the building and out, shall be rodded out after completion of the installation. B. This Work shall be done, as part of the contract, to make certain that all lines are clear, and any obstruction that may be discovered shall be removed immediately. Rodding shall be accomplished by utilizing a rotary cutter, which shall be full size of pipe being cleaned TESTING OF PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS A. During the progress of the work and upon completion, tests shall be made as specified herein and as required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction, including Inspectors, Owner or Architect. The Architect or duly authorized Construction Inspector shall be notified in writing at least 2 working days prior to each test or other Specification requirement which requires action on the part of the Construction Inspector. B. Tests shall be conducted as part of this work and shall include all necessary instruments, equipment, apparatus, and service as required to perform the tests with qualified personnel. Submit proposed test procedures, recording forms, and test equipment for approval prior to the execution of testing. C. Tests shall be performed before piping of various systems have been covered or furred-in. For insulated piping systems testing shall be accomplished prior to the application of insulation. D. All piping systems shall be tested and proved absolutely tight for a period of not less than 24 hours. Tests shall be witnessed by the Architect or an authorized representative and pronounced satisfactory before pressure is removed or any water drawn off. E. Leaks, damage or defects discovered or resulting from test shall be repaired or replaced to a like new condition. Leaking pipe joints, or defective pipe, shall be removed and replaced with acceptable materials. Test shall be repeated after repairs are completed and shall continue until such time as the entire test period expires without the discovery of any leaks. F. Wherever conditions permit, each piping system shall thereafter be subjected to its normal operating pressure and temperature for a period of no less than five 5 days. During that period, it shall be kept under the most careful observation. The piping systems must demonstrate the propriety of their installation by remaining absolutely tight during this period. PLUMBING PIPING

346 G. Domestic Water: 1. Pressure test at one and one half times the normal working pressure or 125 psig, which ever is the greater, for 24 hours. H. Sanitary Soil, Waste and Vents and Storm Sewer: 1. After the rough-in soil, waste and vent and other parts of the sanitary sewer including branch laterals have been set from the lowest level, at point of connection to existing utility lines, to above the floor line, all outlets shall be temporarily plugged or capped, except as are required for testing as described herein. Ground work shall not permit the backfill of trenches to cover any joints until the completion of testing. Back fill shall be limited to mid sections of full joints of piping only. For pipe in ground the piping shall be readied as described herein and filled with water to a verifiable and visible level to 10' above the lowest portions of the system being tested. 2. On multi-level buildings only one floor level shall be tested at a time. Each floor shall be tested from a level below the structure of the floor, or the outlet of the building in the case of the lowest level, to a level of 12 inches above the floor immediately above the floor being tested, or the top of the highest vent in the case of the highest building level. The pipes for the level being tested shall be filled with water to a verifiable and visible level as described above and be allowed to remain so for 24 hours. If after 24 hours the level of the water has been lowered by leakage, the leaks must be found and stopped, and the water level shall again be raised to the level described, and the test repeated until, after a 24 hour retention period, there shall be no perceptible lowering of the water level in the system being tested. 3. Should the completion of these tests leave any reasonable question or doubt of the integrity of the installation, additional tests including peppermint smoke, or other measures shall be performed to demonstrate the reliability of these systems to the complete satisfaction of the Owner's duly authorized representative. Such tests shall be conducted and completed before any joints in plumbing are concealed or made inaccessible COMPLETE FUNCTIONING OF WORK A. All work fairly implied as essential to the complete functioning of the systems shown on the Drawings and Specification shall be completed as part of the work of this Division unless specifically stated otherwise. It is the intention of the Drawings and Specification to establish the type and function of systems but not to set forth each item essential to the functioning of any system. In case of doubt as to the work intended or in the event of amplification or clarification thereof, the Contractor shall call upon the Architect for Supplementary Instructions and Drawings, etc. END OF SECTION PLUMBING PIPING

347 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Cleanouts. B. Water hammer arrestors. C. Thermostatic mixing valves. D. Hose bibbs hydrants RELATED WORK SECTION PLUMBING SPECIALTIES A. Section Hangers and Support for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. B. Section Plumbing Piping. C. Section Plumbing Equipment. D. Section Plumbing Fixtures REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASSE Backflow Preventers with Immediate Atmospheric Vent. B. ANSI/ASSE Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers. C. ANSI/ASSE Backflow Preventers, Reduced Pressure Principle. D. ANSI/ASSE Wall Hydrants, Frost Proof Automatic Draining Anti-Backflow Types. E. ANSI A Floor Drains. F. ANSI A Roof Drains. G. ANSI A Water Hammer Arresters. H. PDI WH-201 Water Hammer Arresters I. AWWA C506 - Backflow Prevention Devices - Reduced Pressure Principle and Double Check Valve Types QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by same manufacturer throughout SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division One. B. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division One. C. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

348 D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and support requirements PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Division One. B. Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts, and backflow preventers OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Division One. B. Operation Data: Indicate frequency of treatment required for interceptors. C. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Division One. B. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Division One. B. Provide two loose keys for hose bibbs and spare hose end vacuum breakers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - CLEANOUTS A. J.R. Smith B. Zurn. C. Mifab. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One. E. Cleanouts 1. Exterior Surfaced Areas: Square cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover. 2. Exterior Unsurfaced Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketted cover. 3. Interior Finished Floor Areas: Galvanized cast iron, two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and adjustable nickel-bronze strainer, round with scoriated cover in service areas and round with depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas. 4. Interior Finished Wall Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketted cover, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw. 5. Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas: Calked or threaded type. Provide bolted stack cleanouts on vertical rainwater leaders ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - HOSE BIBBS/HYDRANTS A. Woodford. B. Zurn. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

349 C. Mifab. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One. E. HOSE BIBBS/HYDRANTS 1. Bronze or brass, replaceable hexagonal disc, hose thread spout, [chrome plated where exposed] to interior and [to exterior] with lockshield and removable key, integral vacuum breaker in conformance with ANSI/ASSE Wall Hydrant: ANSI/ASSE 1019; non-freeze, self-draining type with chrome plated lockable recessed box hose thread spout, lockshield and removable key, and vacuum breaker. 3. Floor Hydrant: ANSI/ASSE 1019; chrome plated lockable recessed box, hose thread spout, lockshield and removable key, and vacuum breaker RECESSED VALVE BOX A. Manufacturers: 1. Guy Grey. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 3. Washing Machine: Plastic preformed rough-in box with brass long shank valves with wheel handles, socket for waste, slip in finishing cover. 4. Refrigerator: Plastic preformed rough-in box with brass valves with wheel handle, slip in finishing cover ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. P.P.P. B. J.R. Smith. C. Zurn. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One. E. WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS 1. ANSI A ; sized in accordance with PDI WH-201, precharged suitable for operation in temperature range -100 to 300 degrees F (-73 to 149 degrees C) and maximum 250 psig (1700 kpa) working pressure ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES A. Powers B. Leonard C. Lawler D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One. E. Thermostatic Mixing Valves 1. Provide thermostatic mixing valve, with check valve, volume control shut-off valve on outlet, stem type thermometer on outlet, strainer stop check on inlet, mounted in lockable cabinet of 16 gage (1.5 mm) prime coated steel. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

350 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate cutting forming of floor construction to receive drains to required invert elevations INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to permit intended performance. B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade. D. Pipe relief from back flow preventer to nearest drain. END OF SECTION PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

351 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION PLUMBING FIXTURES A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section , are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document SCOPE Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. A. WORK INCLUDED: Include the following Work in addition to items normally part of this Section: 1. Plumbing fixtures. 2. Drains and cleanouts. B. WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: 1.03 WARRANTY 1. Piping systems. 2. Pipe valves and fittings. 3. Plumbing systems testing. A. Warrant the Work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming materials and workmanship. B. Defects shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Noisy operation. 2. Noticeable deterioration of finish. 3. Leakage of water SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance, fabrication procedures, product variations, and accessories. C. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS: Provide pre-printed operating and maintenance instructions for each item specified. Instruct and demonstrate the proper operation and maintenance to the Owner's designated representative DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. DELIVERY: Deliver clearly labeled, undamaged materials in the manufacturers' unopened containers. B. TIMING AND COORDINATION: Deliver materials to allow for minimum storage time at the project site. Coordinate delivery with the scheduled time of installation. PLUMBING FIXTURES

352 C. STORAGE: Store materials in a clean, dry location, protected from weather and abuse FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Confirm and field coordinate that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top lavatories and sinks. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. PLUMBING FIXTURES: 1. GENERAL: Provide plumbing fixtures as specified on drawings. The approved equal products manufacturers are as follows: a. Mop sinks: Stern-Williams, Fiat b. Faucets: American Standard, Kohler, Eljer. c. Faucets: Chicago, T&S Brass, Zurn d. Faucets: Moen, Delta Commercial, Speakman e. Floor drains and roof drains: Zurn, J.R. Smith, Mifab, Josam and Wade. f. Trap Primers: PPP inc. (All brass construction). Sioux Chief. 2. CHAIR CARRIERS: ANSI/ASME A ; Adjustable cast iron frame, integral drain hub and vent, adjustable spud, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs with nuts and washers. As manufactured by Zurn, J. R. Smith, Josam or Wade. 3. DRINKING FOUNTAIN & URINAL WALL SUPPORTS: ANSI/ASME A ; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs for fixture hanger, bearing studs. As manufactured by Zurn, J. R. Smith, Josam or Wade. 4. TRAPS, STOPS AND RISERS: Heavy pattern as manufactured by McGuire, Chicago or Zurn. B. CLEANOUTS: 1. GENERAL: Provide cleanouts as shown on Drawings and as required by the city building code. 2. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Zurn, J. R. Smith, Mifab, Josam and Wade. 3. TYPES: a. FINISHED FLOOR CLEANOUTS: Provide cast iron, adjustable floor level assembly with round nickel bronze top and gasket cover. b. RESILIENT OR TILE FINISHED FLOOR CLEANOUTS: Provide cast iron, adjustable assembly with round nickel-bronze top with gasketed water tight cover and depressed top to receive flooring finish material. c. DRY WALL CLEANOUTS: Provide cast iron tee and counter sink bronze plug with square nickel bronze frame and stainless steel cover. d. Provide membrane clamp rings for slab on grade cleanouts. e. All cleanouts shall have tapered bronze plugs. f. All cleanouts outside of building on grade shall be set in a 18" x 18" x 4" thick concrete pad. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. EXAMINATION OF CONDITIONS: Examine conditions affecting this Work. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the proper authority and do not proceed until those conditions have been corrected. Commencing Work implies acceptance of existing conditions as satisfactory to the outcome of this Work INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures in locations and heights as shown on Drawings or as directed by the Architect. PLUMBING FIXTURES

353 B. Install materials plumb, level, securely, and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. All rough-in pipe openings, for final connections with all supply waste soil and vent systems shall be closed with caps or plugs during early stages of construction and installation. Tape shall not be considered sufficient protection. D. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in schedule for particular fixtures. E. Provide gate valves in piping serving batteries of fixtures. Label stops "Hot" and "Cold." Valves to be located above accessible ceiling. If ceiling are not accessible, provide access panels of adequate size to make valves fully accessible. F. Plumbing fixtures shall be supported by a concealed chair carrier where required to properly support the fixture specified. All carriers to be securely mounted, bolted and checked prior to concealment. G. Caulk around fixtures with best grade white silicone caulking. Do not use grout. H. All handles on supply and drainage fittings or other brass items shall be properly lined up and adjusted. Fittings shall not be left in any haphazard manner. I. All fixtures shall have individual chrome plated loose key cutoff stops on supply lines. Where same are not specified as a part of the fixture trim, they shall be installed as close to fixtures as possible in the hot and cold water supply. J. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. K. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and escutcheons. L. Hot and cold water riser air chambers: Provide air chambers for hot and/or cold water riser located at the rough-in tee at all fixtures. The air chamber shall be of the same materials and the next larger diameter than the required rough-in supply pipe and a minimum of 24" tall. The contractor may install water hammer arrestors in lieu of air chambers. Water hammer arrestors shall be PDI Certified and sized and placed as recommended by manufacture. Provide an accessible isolation valve and proper access to arrestor for replacement INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and installation ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Division One. B. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of Division One. B. At completion clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. PLUMBING FIXTURES

354 3.06 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Division One. B. Do not permit use of fixtures ADA ACCESSIBLE FIXTURES A. Install fixtures to heights, indicated on architectural drawings. B. Handicapped fixtures shall be installed to required heights, shall be of types suitable for, and supplied with controls properly installed, to comply with requirements as directed by ADA Accessibility of Federal Registry, Part III, Department of Justice 28 CFR 36 and comply with all state and local ADA Code requirements. C. Exposed accessible sink or lavatory p-trap and angle valve assemblies shall be insulated with the fully molded, Truebro, Handi Lav-guard insulation kit. Provide the proper model for fixtures specified. All kits shall be White or as selected by Architect. D. Wall mounted drinking fountains and coolers which protrude into passages or corridor space, whether single or paired with adjacent accessible fixture, shall be supplied with skirt or apron to lower the underside clearance of non-accessible fixture equal to that required for accessible fixture. END OF SECTION PLUMBING FIXTURES

355 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all Work herein. B. The Contract Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the systems. If any departure from the Contract Drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of such departures and the reasons therefore, shall be submitted to the Architect for approval as soon as practicable. No such departures shall be made without the prior written approval of the Architect. C. Notwithstanding any reference in the Specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction by name, make or catalog number, such reference shall not be construed as limiting competition; and the Contractor, in such cases, may at his option use any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction which in the judgment of the Architect, expressed in writing, is equal to that specified SCOPE OF WORK A. The Work included under this Contract consists of the furnishing and installation of all equipment and material necessary and required to form the complete and functioning systems in all of its various phases, all as shown on the accompanying Drawings and/or described in these Specifications. The contractor shall review all pertinent drawings, including those of other contracts prior to commencement of Work. B. This Division requires the furnishing and installing of all items Specified herein, indicated on the Drawings or reasonably inferred as necessary for safe and proper operation; including every article, device or accessory (whether or not specifically called for by item) reasonably necessary to facilitate each system's functioning as indicated by the design and the equipment specified. Elements of the work include, but are not limited to, materials, labor, supervision, transportation, storage, equipment, utilities, all required permits, licenses and inspections. All work performed under this Section shall be in accordance with the Project Manual, Drawings and Specifications and is subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract. C. The approximate locations of Mechanical (HVAC) items are indicated on the Drawings. These Drawings are not intended to give complete and accurate details in regard to location of outlets, apparatus, etc. Exact locations are to be determined by actual measurements at the building, and will in all cases be subject to the Review of the Owner or Engineer, who reserves the right to make any reasonable changes in the locations indicated without additional cost to the Owner. D. Items specifically mentioned in the Specifications but not shown on the Drawings and/or items shown on Drawings but not specifically mentioned in the Specifications shall be installed by the Contractor under the appropriate section of work as if they were both specified and shown. E. All discrepancies between the Contract Documents and actual job-site conditions shall be reported to the Owner or Engineer so that they will be resolved prior to the bidding, where this cannot be done at least 7 working days prior to bid; the greater or more costly of the discrepancy shall be bid. All labor and materials required to perform the work described shall be included as part of this Contract. F. It is the intention of this Section of the Specifications to outline minimum requirements to furnish the Owner with a turn-key and fully operating system in cooperation with other trades. G. It is the intent of the above "Scope" to give the Contractor a general outline of the extent of the Work involved; however, it is not intended to include each and every item required for the Work. Anything omitted from the "Scope" but shown on the Drawings, or specified later, or necessary for a complete and functioning heating, ventilating and air conditioning system shall be considered a part of the overall BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

356 "Scope". H. The Contractor shall rough-in fixtures and equipment furnished by others from rough-in and placement drawings furnished by others. The Contractor shall make final connection to fixtures and equipment furnished by others SCHEMATIC NATURE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The contract documents are schematic in nature in that they are only to establish scope and a minimum level of quality. They are not to be used as actual working construction drawings. The actual working construction drawings shall be the approved shop drawings. B. All duct or pipe or equipment locations as indicated on the documents do not indicate every transition, offset, or exact location. All transitions, offsets clearances and exact locations shall be established by actual field measurements, coordination with the structural, architectural and reflected ceiling plans, and other trades. Submit shop drawings for approval. C. All transitions, offsets and relocations as required by actual field conditions shall be performed by the contractor at no additional cost to the owner. D. Additional coordination with electrical contractor may be required to allow adequate clearances of electrical equipment, fixtures and associated appurtenances. Contractor to notify Architect and Engineer of unresolved clearances, conflicts or equipment locations SITE VISIT AND FAMILIARIZATION A. Before submitting a bid, it will be necessary for each Contractor whose work is involved to visit the site and ascertain for himself the conditions to be met therein in installing his work and make due provision for same in his bid. It will be assumed that this Contractor in submitting his bid has visited the premises and that his bid covers all work necessary to properly install the equipment shown. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with this requirement shall not be considered justification for the omission or faulty installation of any work covered by these Specifications and Drawings. B. Understand the existing utilities from which services will be supplied; verify locations of utility services, and determine requirements for connections. C. Determine in advance that equipment and materials proposed for installation fit into the confines indicated WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Finish painting is specified. Prime and protective painting are included in the work of this Division. B. Owner and General Contractor furnished equipment shall be properly connected to Mechanical (HVAC) systems. C. Furnishing and installing all required Mechanical (HVAC) equipment control relays and electrical interlock devices, conduit, wire and J-boxes are included in the Work of this Division PERMITS, TESTS, INSPECTIONS A. Arrange and pay for all permits, fees, tests, and all inspections as required by governmental authorities DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. The date of final acceptance shall be the date of owner occupancy, or the date all punch list items have been completed or final payment has been received. Refer to Division One for additional requirements. B. The date of final acceptance shall be documented in writing and signed by the architect, owner and contractor. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

357 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification. B. Deliver products to the project at such time as the project is ready to receive the equipment, pipe or duct properly protected from incidental damage and weather damage. C. Damaged equipment, duct or pipe shall be promptly removed from the site and new, undamaged equipment, pipe and duct shall be installed in its place promptly with no additional charge to the Owner NOISE AND VIBRATION A. The heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems, and the component parts there of, shall be guaranteed to operate without objectionable noise and vibration. B. Provide foundations, supports and isolators as specified or indicated, properly adjusted to prevent transmission of vibration to the Building structure, piping and other items. C. Carefully fabricate ductwork and fittings with smooth interior finish to prevent turbulence and generation or regeneration of noise. D. All equipment shall be selected to operate with minimum of noise and vibration. If, in the opinion of the Architect, objectionable noise or vibration is produced or transmitted to or through the building structure by equipment, piping, ducts or other parts of the Work, the Contractor shall rectify such conditions without extra cost to the Owner APPLICABLE CODES A. Obtain all required permits and inspections for all work required by the Contract Documents and pay all required fees in connection thereof. B. Arrange with the serving utility companies for the connection of all required utilities and pay all charges, meter charges, connection fees and inspection fees, if required. C. Comply with all applicable codes, specifications, local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and the applicable requirements which includes and is not limited to the following nationally accepted codes and standards: 1. Air Moving & Conditioning Association, AMCA. 2. American Standards Association, ASA. 3. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc., ASHRAE. 4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers, ASME. 5. American Society of Plumbing Engineers, ASPE. 6. American Society of Testing Materials, ASTM. 7. American Water Works Association, AWWA. 8. National Bureau of Standards, NBS. 9. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA. 10. Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, SMACNA. 11. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., UL. 12. International Energy Conservation Code, IECC. 13. International Fire Code. 14. International Gas Code. D. Where differences existing between the Contract Documents and applicable state or city building codes, state and local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and the applicable requirements of the listed nationally accepted codes and standards, the more stringent or costly application shall govern. Promptly notify the Engineer in writing of all differences. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

358 E. When directed in writing by the Engineer, remove all work installed that does not comply with the Contract Documents and applicable state or city building codes, state and local ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations and the applicable requirements of the above listed nationally accepted codes and standards, correct the deficiencies, and complete the work at no additional cost to the Owner DEFINITIONS AND SYMBOLS A. General Explanation: A substantial amount of construction and Specification language constitutes definitions for terms found in other Contract Documents, including Drawings which must be recognized as diagrammatic and schematic in nature and not completely descriptive of requirements indicated thereon. Certain terms used in Contract Documents are defined generally in this article, unless defined otherwise in Division 1. B. Definitions and explanations of this Section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general for work to the extent not stated more explicitly in another provision of the Contract Documents. C. Indicated: The term "Indicated" is a cross-reference to details, notes or schedules on the Drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications and to similar means of recording requirements in Contract Documents. Where such terms as "Shown", "Noted", "Scheduled", "Specified" and "Detailed" are used in lieu of "Indicated", it is for the purpose of helping the reader locate cross-reference material, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically shown. D. Directed: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "Directed", "Requested", "Accepted", and "Permitted" mean by the Architect or Engineer. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend the Architect's or Engineer's responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction supervision. E. Reviewed: Where used in conjunction with the Engineer's response to submittals, requests for information, applications, inquiries, reports and claims by the Contractor the meaning of the term "Reviewed" will be held to limitations of Architect's and Engineer's responsibilities and duties as specified in the General and Supplemental Conditions. In no case will "Reviewed" by Engineer be interpreted as a release of the Contractor from responsibility to fulfill the terms and requirements of the Contract Documents. F. Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Furnish" is used to mean supply and deliver to the project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, etc., as applicable in each instance. G. Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Install" is used to describe operations at the project site including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance. H. Provide: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "Provide" is used to mean "Furnish and Install", complete and ready for intended use, as applicable in each instance. I. Installer: Entity (person or firm) engaged by the Contractor or its subcontractor or Sub-contractor for performance of a particular unit of work at the project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protection, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance. It is a general requirement that such entities (Installers) be expert in the operations they are engaged to perform. J. Imperative Language: Used generally in Specifications. Except as otherwise indicated, requirements expressed imperatively are to be performed by the Contractor. For clarity of reading at certain locations, contrasting subjective language is used to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or when so noted by other identified installers or entities. K. Minimum Quality/Quantity: In every instance, the quality level or quantity shown or specified is intended as minimum quality level or quantity of work to be performed or provided. Except as otherwise specifically indicated, the actual work may either comply exactly with that minimum (within specified tolerances), or may exceed that minimum within reasonable tolerance limits. In complying with requirements, indicated or BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

359 scheduled numeric values are either minimums or maximums as noted or as appropriate for the context of the requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to Owner or Engineer via a request for information (RFI) for decision before proceeding. L. Abbreviations and Symbols: The language of Specifications and other Contract Documents including Drawings is of an abbreviated type in certain instances, and implies words and meanings which will be appropriately interpreted. Actual word abbreviations of a self explanatory nature have been included in text of Specifications and Drawings. Specific abbreviations and symbols have been established, principally for lengthy technical terminology and primarily in conjunction with coordination of Specification requirements with notations on Drawings and in Schedules. These are frequently defined in Section at first instance of use or on a Legend and Symbol Drawing. Trade and industry association names and titles of generally recognized industry standards are frequently abbreviated. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words will be interpreted as singular where applicable and where full context of Contract Documents so indicate. Except as otherwise indicated, graphic symbols and abbreviations used on Drawings and in Specifications are those recognized in construction industry for indicated purposes. Where not otherwise noted symbols and abbreviations are defined by 1993 ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook, chapter 34 "Abbreviations and Symbols", ASME and ASPE published standards DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. These Specifications are intended to supplement the Drawings and it will not be the province of the Specifications to mention any part of the work which the Drawings are competent to fully explain in every particular and such omission is not to relieve the Contractor from carrying out portions indicated on the Drawings only. B. Should items be required by these Specifications and not indicated on the Drawings, they are to be supplied even if of such nature that they could have been indicated thereon. In case of disagreement between Drawings and Specifications, or within either Drawings or Specifications, the better quality or greater quantity of work shall be estimated and the matter referred to the Architect or Engineer for review with a request for information and clarification at least 7 working days prior to bid opening date for issuance of an addendum. C. The listing of product manufacturers, materials and methods in the various sections of the Specifications, and indicated on the Drawings, is intended to establish a standard of quality only. It is not the intention of the Owner or Engineer to discriminate against any product, material or method that is equal to the standards as indicated and/or specified, nor is it intended to preclude open, competitive bidding. The fact that a specific manufacturer is listed as an acceptable manufacturer should not be interpreted to mean that the manufacturers' standard product will meet the requirements of the project design, Drawings, Specifications and space constraints. D. The Architect or Engineer and Owner shall be the sole judge of quality and equivalence of equipment, materials and methods. E. Products by other reliable manufacturers, other materials, and other methods, will be accepted as outlined, provided they have equal capacity, construction, and performance. However, under no circumstances shall any substitution by made without the written permission of the Architect or Engineer and Owner. Request for prior approval must be made in writing 10 days prior to the bid date without fail. F. Wherever a definite product, material or method is specified and there is not a statement that another product, material or method will be acceptable, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that the specified product, material or method is the only one that shall be used without prior approval. G. Wherever a definite material or manufacturer's product is specified and the Specification states that products of similar design and equal construction from the specified list of manufacturers may be substituted, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that products of manufacturers that are specified are the only products that will be acceptable and that products of other manufacturers will not be considered for substitution without approval. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

360 H. Wherever a definite product, material or method is specified and there is a statement that "OR EQUAL" product, material or method will be acceptable, it is the intention of the Owner or Engineer that the specified product, material or method or an "OR EQUAL" product, material or method may be used if it complies with the specifications and is submitted for review to the Engineer as outline herein. I. Where permission to use substituted or alternative equipment on the project is granted by the Owner or Engineer in writing, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor or Subcontractor involved to verify that the equipment will fit in the space available which includes allowances for all required Code and maintenance clearances, and to coordinate all equipment structural support, plumbing and electrical requirements and provisions with the Mechanical (HVAC) Design Documents and all other trades, including Division 26. J. Changes in architectural, structural, electrical, mechanical, and plumbing requirements for the substitution shall be the responsibility of the bidder wishing to make the substitution. This shall include the cost of redesign by the affected designer(s). Any additional cost incurred by affected subcontractors shall be the responsibility of this bidder and not the owner. K. If any request for a substitution of product, material or method is rejected, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. L. The Owner or Engineer will investigate all requests for substitutions when submitted in accordance with above and if accepted, will issue a letter allowing the substitutions. M. Where equipment other than that used in the design as specified or shown on the Drawings is substituted (either from an approved manufacturers list or by submittal review), it shall be the responsibility of the substituting Contractor to coordinate space requirements, building provisions and connection requirements with his trades and all other trades and pay all additional costs to other trades, the Owner, the Architect or Engineer, if any, due to the substitutions SUBMITTALS A. Coordinate with Division 1 for submittal timetable requirements, unless noted otherwise within thirty (30) days after the Contract is awarded the Contractor shall submit a minimum of eight (8) complete bound sets of shop drawings and complete data covering each item of equipment or material. The first submittal of each item requiring a submittal must be received by the Architect or Engineer within the above thirty day period. The Architect or Engineer shall not be responsible for any delays or costs incurred due to excessive shop drawing review time for submittals received after the thirty (30) day time limit. The Architect and Engineer will retain one (1) copy each of all shop drawings for their files. Where full size drawings are involved, submit one (1) print and one (1) reproducible sepia or mylar in lieu of eight (8) sets. All literature pertaining to an item subject to Shop Drawing submittal shall be submitted at one time. A submittal shall not contain information from more than one Specification section, but may have a section subdivided into items or equipment as listed in each section. The Contractor may elect to submit each item or type of equipment separately. Each submittal shall include the following items enclosed in a suitable binder: 1. A cover sheet with the names and addresses of the Project, Architect, MEP Engineer, General Contractor and the Subcontractor making the submittal. The cover sheet shall also contain the section number covering the item or items submitted and the item nomenclature or description. 2. An index page with a listing of all data included in the Submittal. 3. A list of variations page with a listing all variations, including unfurnished or additional required accessories, items or other features, between the submitted equipment and the specified equipment. If there are no variations, then this page shall state "NO VARIATIONS". Where variations affect the work of other Contractors, then the Contractor shall certify on this page that these variations have been fully coordinated with the affected Contractors and that all expenses associated with the variations will be paid by the submitting Contractor. This page will be signed by the submitting Contractor. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

361 4. Equipment information including manufacturer's name and designation, size, performance and capacity data as applicable. All applicable Listings, Labels, Approvals and Standards shall be clearly indicated. 5. Dimensional data and scaled drawings as applicable to show that the submitted equipment will fit the space available with all required Code and maintenance clearances clearly indicated and labeled at a minimum scale of 1/4" = 1'-0", as required to demonstrate that the alternate or substituted product will fit in the space available. 6. Identification of each item of material or equipment matching that indicated on the Drawings. 7. Sufficient pictorial, descriptive and diagrammatic data on each item to show its conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Any options or special requirements or accessories shall be so indicated. All applicable information shall be clearly indicated with arrows or another approved method. 8. Additional information as required in other Sections of this Division. 9. Certification by the General Contractor and Subcontractor that the material submitted is in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, signed and dated in long hand. Submittals that do not comply with the above requirements shall be returned to the Contractor and shall be marked "REVISE AND RESUBMIT". B. Refer to Division 1 for additional information on shop drawings and submittals. C. Equipment and materials submittals and shop drawings will be reviewed for compliance with design concept only. It will be assumed that the submitting Contractor has verified that all items submitted can be installed in the space allotted. Review of shop drawings and submittals shall not be considered as a verification or guarantee of measurements or building conditions. D. Where shop drawings and submittals are marked "REVIEWED", the review of the submittal does not indicate that submittals have been checked in detail nor does it in any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to furnish material and perform work as required by the Contract Documents. E. Shop drawings shall be reviewed and returned to the Contractor with one of the following categories indicated: 1. REVIEWED: Contractor need take no further submittal action, shall include this submittal in the O&M manual and may order the equipment submitted on. 2. REVIEWED AS NOTED: Contractor shall submit a letter verifying that required exceptions to the submittal have been received and complied with including additional accessories or coordination action as noted, and shall include this submittal and compliance letter in the O&M manual. The contractor may order the equipment submitted on at the time of the returned submittal providing the Contractor complies with the exceptions noted. 3. NOT APPROVED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is not approved, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment that is not approved. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. 4. REVISE AND RESUBMIT: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked revise and resubmit, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or provide as noted on previous shop drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment marked revise and resubmit. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. 5. CONTRACTOR S CERTIFICATION REQUIRED: Contractor shall resubmit submittal on material, equipment or method of installation. The Contractor s stamp is required stating the submittal meets all conditions of the contract documents. The stamp shall be signed by the General Contractor. The submittal will not be reviewed if the stamp is not placed and signed on all shop drawings. 6. MANUFACTURER NOT AS SPECIFIED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked manufacturer not as specified, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the specifications. Contractor shall not order equipment where submittal is marked manufacturer not as specified. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

362 F. Materials and equipment which are purchased or installed without shop drawing review shall be at the risk of the Contractor and the cost for removal and replacement of such materials and equipment and related work which is judged unsatisfactory by the Owner or Engineer for any reason shall be at the expense of the Contractor. The responsible Contractor shall remove the material and equipment noted above and replace with specified equipment or material at his own expense when directed in writing by the Architect or Engineer. G. Shop Drawing Submittals shall be complete and checked prior to submission to the Engineer for review. H. Submittals are required for, but not limited to, the following items: 1. Pipe Material and Specialties. 2. Pipe Fabrication Drawings. 3. Basic Materials. 4. HVAC Pipe and Duct Insulation. 5. Portable Pipe Hanger and Equipment Supports. 6. Duct Specialties. 7. Duct Fabrication Drawings. 8. Air Distribution Devices. 9. Fire Dampers and Fire Smoke Dampers. 10. Temperature Controls and Control Sequences. 11. Test, Adjust and Balance Reports. 12. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Contractor Qualifications. 13. Coordination Drawings. I. Refer to other Division 23 sections for additional shop drawing requirements. Provide samples of actual materials and/or equipment to be used on the Project upon request of the Owner or Engineer COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare coordination drawings to a scale of 1/4"=1'-0" or larger; detailing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following: 1. Indicate the proposed locations of pipe, duct, equipment, and other materials. Include the following: a. Wall and type locations. b. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation. c. Locations of light fixtures and sprinkler heads. d. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube removal, filter removal, and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. e. Equipment connections and support details. f. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. g. Routing of storm and sanitary sewer piping. h. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. i. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. j. Valve stem movement. k. Structural floor, wall and roof opening sizes and details. 2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. 3. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. 4. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air distribution devices, light fixtures, communication systems components, and other ceiling-mounted items. B. This Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all items that will affect the installation of the work of this Division. This coordination shall include, but not be limited to: voltage, ampacity, capacity, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

363 electrical and piping connections, space requirements, sequence of construction, building requirements and special conditions. C. By submitting shop drawings on the project, this Contractor is indicating that all necessary coordination has been completed and that the systems, products and equipment submitted can be installed in the building and will operate as specified and intended, in full coordination with all other Contractors and Subcontractors RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Special Project Requirements, in addition to the requirements specified in Division 23, indicate the following installed conditions: 1. Duct mains and branches, size and location, for both exterior and interior; locations of dampers, fire dampers, duct access panels, and other control devices; filters, fuel fired heaters, fan coils, condensing units, and roof-top A/C units requiring periodic maintenance or repair. 2. Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located (i.e., traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc.). Valve location diagrams, complete with valve tag chart. Indicate actual inverts and horizontal locations of underground piping. 3. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines. 4. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed. 5. Contract Modifications, actual equipment and materials installed. B. Engage the services of a Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer registered in the state in which the project is located as specified herein to record the locations and invert elevations of underground installations. C. The Contractor shall maintain a set of clearly marked black line record "AS-BUILT" prints on the job site on which he shall mark all work details, alterations to meet site conditions and changes made by "Change Order" notices. These shall be kept available for inspection by the Owner, Architect or Engineer at all times. D. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements concerning record drawings. If the Contractor does not keep an accurate set of as-built drawings, the pay request may be altered or delayed at the request of the Architect. Mark the drawings with a colored pencil. Delivery of as-built prints and reproducibles is a condition of final acceptance. E. The record prints shall be updated on a daily basis and shall indicate accurate dimensions for all buried or concealed work, precise locations of all concealed pipe or duct, locations of all concealed valves, controls and devices and any deviations from the work shown on the Construction Documents which are required for coordination. All dimensions shall include at least two dimensions to permanent structure points. F. Submit three prints of the tracings for approval. Make corrections to tracings as directed and delivered "Auto Positive Tracings" to the architect. "As-Built" drawings shall be furnished in addition to shop drawings. G. When the option described in paragraph F., above is not exercised then upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall transfer all marks from the submit a set of clear concise set of reproducible record "AS- BUILT" drawings and shall submit the reproducible drawings with corrections made by a competent draftsman and three (3) sets of black line prints to the Architect or Engineer for review prior to scheduling the final inspection at the completion of the work. The reproducible record "AS-BUILT" drawings shall have the Engineers Name and Seal removed or blanked out and shall be clearly marked and signed on each sheet as follows: BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

364 CERTIFIED RECORD DRAWINGS DATE: 1.16 OPERATING MANUALS (NAME OF GENERAL CONTRACTOR) BY: (SIGNATURE) (NAME OF SUBCONTRACTOR) BY: (SIGNATURE) A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1 and in addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, include the following information for equipment items: 1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts. 2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. 4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules CERTIFICATIONS AND TEST REPORTS A. Submit a detailed schedule for completion and testing of each system indicating scheduled dates for completion of system installation and outlining tests to be performed and schedule date for each test. This detailed completion and test schedule shall be submittal at least 90 days before the projected Project completion date. B. Test result reporting forms shall be submitted for review no later than the date of the detailed schedule submitted. C. Submit 4 copies of all certifications and test reports to the Architect or Engineer for review adequately in advance of completion of the Work to allow for remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems. D. Certifications and test reports to be submitted shall include, but not be limited to those items outlined in Section of Division MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Coordinate with Division 1 for maintenance manual requirements, unless noted otherwise bind together in D ring type binders by National model no or equal, binders shall be large enough to allow ¼ of spare capacity. Three (3) sets of all approved shop drawing submittals, fabrication drawings, bulletins, maintenance instructions, operating instructions and parts exploded views and lists for each and every piece of equipment furnished under this Specification. All sections shall be typed and indexed into sections and labeled for easy reference and shall utilize the individual specification section numbers shown in the Mechanical Specifications as an organization guideline. Bulletins containing information about equipment that is not installed on the project shall be properly marked up or stripped and reassembled. All pertinent information required by the Owner for proper operation and maintenance of BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

365 equipment supplied by Division 23 shall be clearly and legibly set forth in memoranda that shall, likewise, be bound with bulletins. B. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Special Project Conditions, in addition to the requirements specified in Division 23, include the following information for equipment items: 1. Identifying names, name tags designations and locations for all equipment. 2. Valve tag lists with valve number, type, color coding, location and function. 3. Reviewed shop drawing submittals with exceptions noted compliance letter. 4. Fabrication drawings. 5. Equipment and device bulletins and data sheets clearly highlighted to show equipment installed on the project and including performance curves and data as applicable, i.e., description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and model numbers of replacement parts. 6. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 7. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions, servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 8. Equipment and motor name plate data. 9. Wiring diagrams. 10. Exploded parts views and parts lists for all equipment and devices. 11. Color coding charts for all painted equipment and conduit. 12. Location and listing of all spare parts and special keys and tools furnished to the Owner. 13. Furnish recommended lubrication schedule for all required lubrication points with listing of type and approximate amount of lubricant required. C. Refer to Division 1 for additional information on Operating and Maintenance Manuals. D. Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be turned over to the Owner or Engineer a minimum of 14 working days prior to the beginning of the operator training period OPERATOR TRAINING A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of factory trained specialists to instruct the Owner's operating personnel. The Owner's operator training shall include 12 hours of on site training in three 4 hour shifts. B. Before proceeding with the instruction of Owner Personnel, prepare a typed outline in triplicate, listing the subjects that will be covered in this instruction, and submit the outline for review by the Owner. At the conclusion of the instruction period obtain the signature of each person being instructed on each copy of the reviewed outline to signify that he has a proper understanding of the operation and maintenance of the systems and resubmit the signed outlines. C. Refer to other Division 23 Sections for additional Operator Training requirements FINAL COMPLETION A. At the completion of the work, all equipment and systems shall be tested and faulty equipment and material shall be repaired or replaced. Refer to Sections of Division 23 for additional requirements. B. Clean and adjust all air distribution devices and replace all air filters immediately prior to final acceptance. C. Touch up and/or refinish all scratched equipment and devices immediately prior to final acceptance. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

366 1.21 CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE A. Use of the HVAC systems to provide temporary service during construction period will not be allowed without permission from the Owner in writing and if granted shall not be cause warranty period to start, except as defined below. B. Contractor shall guarantee to keep the entire installation in repair and perfect working order for a period of one year after its completion and final acceptance, and shall furnish free of additional cost to the Owner all materials and labor necessary to comply with the above guarantee throughout the year beginning from the date of issue of Substantial Completion, Beneficial Occupancy by the Owner or the Certificate of Final Payment as agreed upon by all parties. C. This guarantee shall not include cleaning or changing filters except as required by testing, adjusting and balancing. D. All air conditioning compressors shall have parts and labor guarantees for a period of not less than 5 years beyond the date of final acceptance. E. Refer to Sections in Division 23 for additional guarantee or warranty requirements TRANSFER OF ELECTRONIC FILES A. Project documents are not intended or represented to be suitable for reuse by Architect/Owner or others on extensions of this project or on any other project. Any such reuse or modification without written verification or adaptation by Engineer, as appropriate for the specific purpose intended, will be at Architect/Owner s risk and without liability or legal exposure to Engineer or its consultants from all claims, damages, losses and expense, including attorney s fees arising out of or resulting thereof. B. Because data stored in electric media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently, or otherwise without authorization of the data s creator, the party receiving the electronic files agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within sixty (60) days of receipt, after which time the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred to be acceptable. Any errors detected within the sixty (60) day acceptance period will be corrected by the party delivering the electronic files. Engineer is not responsible for maintaining documents stored in electronic media format after acceptance by the Architect/Owner. C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, Engineer makes no representations as to the long term compatibility, usability or readability of documents resulting from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used by Engineer at the beginning of the Project. D. Any reuse or modifications will be Contractor s sole risk and without liability or legal exposure to Architect, Engineer or any consultant. E. The Texas Board of Architectural Examiners (TBAE) has stated that it is in violation of Texas law for persons other than the Architect of record to revise the Architectural drawings without the Architect s written consent. It is agreed that MEP hard copy or computer-generated documents will not be issued to any other party except directly to the Architect/Owner. The contract documents are contractually copyrighted and cannot be used for any other project or purpose except as specifically indicated in AIA B-141 Standard Form of Agreement Between Architect and Owner. If the client, Architect/Owner, or developer of the project requires electronic media for record purposes, then an AutoCAD based compact disc ( CD ) will be prepared. The CD will be submitted with all title block references intact and will be formatted in a plot format to permit the end user to only view and plot the drawings. Revisions will not be permitted in this configuration. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

367 F. At the Architect/Owner s request, Engineer will prepare one CD of electronic media to assist the contractor in the preparation of submittals. The Engineer will prepare and submit the CD to the Architect/Owner for distribution to the contractor. All copies of the CD will be reproduced for a cost of reproduction fee of Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per CD. The CD will be prepared and all title blocks, names and dates will be removed. The CD will be prepared in a.dwg format to permit the end user to revise the drawings. G. This Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per CD cost of reproduction will be paid directly from the Contractor to the Engineer. The CD will be prepared only after receipt of the Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00). The Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per CD cost of reproduction is to only recover the cost of the manhours necessary to reproduce the documents. It is not a contractual agreement between the Contractor and Engineer to provide any engineering services, nor any other service. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials and equipment manufactured by a domestic United States manufacturer. B. Access Doors: Provide access doors as required for access to equipment, valves, controls, cleanouts and other apparatus where concealed. Access doors shall have concealed hinges and screw driver cam locks. C. All access panels located in wet areas such as restrooms, locker rooms, shower rooms, kitchen and any other wet areas shall be constructed of stainless steel. D. Access Doors: shall be as follows: 1. Plastic Surfaces: Milcor Style K. 2. Ceramic Tile Surface: Milcor Style M. 3. Drywall Surfaces: Milcor Style DW. 4. Install panels only in locations approved by the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ROUGH-IN A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected via reviewed submittals. B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 48 for additional rough-in requirements MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of mechanical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements: 1. Coordinate mechanical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components. 2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. 4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. 5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. 6. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

368 7. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. 8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with architectural action markings on submittal, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, resolve conflicts and route proposed solution to the Architect for review. 9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces. 10. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location and label. 11. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified. 12. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope. 13. Provide roof curbs for all roof mounted equipment. Coordinate with roof construction for pitched roof. Provide roof curb to match roof slope. Refer to architectural drawings and details. 14. The equipment to be furnished under this Specification shall be essentially the standard product of the manufacturer. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required, these units shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the system need not be the product of the same manufacturer. 15. The architectural and structural features of the building and the space limitations shall be considered in selection of all equipment. No equipment shall be furnished which will not suit the arrangement and space limitations indicated. 16. Lubrication: Prior to start-up, check and properly lubricate all bearings as recommended by the manufacturer. 17. Where the word "Concealed" is used in these Specifications in connection with insulating, painting, piping, ducts, etc., it shall be understood to mean hidden from sight as in chases, furred spaces or suspended ceilings. "Exposed" shall be understood to mean the opposite of concealed. 18. Identification of Mechanical Equipment: a. Mechanical equipment shall be identified by means of nameplates permanently attached to the equipment. Nameplates shall be engraved laminated plastic or etched metal. Shop drawings shall include dimensions and lettering format for approval. Attachments shall be with escutcheon pins, self-tapping screws, or machine screws. b. Tags shall be attached to all valves, including control valves, with nonferrous chain. Tags shall be brass and at least 1-1/2 inches in diameter. Nameplate and tag symbols shall correspond to the identification symbols on the temperature control submittal and the "as-built" drawings CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent installations. B. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to: 1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. 2. Remove and replace defective Work. 3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. 5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures. 6. Upon written instructions from the Engineer, uncover and restore Work to provide for Engineer/Owner's observation of concealed Work, without additional cost to the Owner. 7. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials matching existing materials and experienced Installers. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified for the original installation and experienced Installers; refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched; Refer to Section "DEFINITIONS" for definition of "Installer." BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

369 C. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of mechanical piping, mechanical ducts and HVAC units, and other mechanical items made obsolete by the new Work. D. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed. E. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas WORK SEQUENCE, TIMING, COORDINATION WITH OWNER A. The Owner will cooperate with the Contractor, however, the following provisions must be observed: 1. A meeting will be held at the project site, prior to any construction, between the Owner's Representative, the General Contractor, the Sub-Contractors and the Engineer to discuss Contractor's employee parking space, access, storage of equipment or materials, and use of the Owner's facilities or utilities. The Owner's decisions regarding such matters shall be final. 2. During the construction of this project, normal facility activities will continue in existing buildings until renovated areas are completed. Plumbing, fire protection, lighting, electrical, communications, heating, air conditioning, and ventilation systems will have to be maintained in service within the occupied spaces of the existing building DEMOLITION AND WORK WITHIN EXISTING BUILDINGS A. In the preparation of these documents every effort has been made to show the approximate locations of, and connections to the existing piping, duct, equipment and other apparatus related to this phase of the work. However, this Contractor shall be responsible for verifying all of the above information. This Contractor shall visit the existing site to inspect the facilities and related areas. This Contractor shall inspect and verify all details and requirements of all the Contract Documents, prior to the submission of a proposal. All discrepancies between the Contract Documents and actual job-site conditions shall be resolved by his contractor, who shall produce drawings that shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review. All labor and materials required to perform the work described shall be apart of this Contract. B. All equipment and/or systems noted on the Drawings "To Remain" shall be inspected and tested on site to certify its working condition. A written report on the condition of all equipment to remain, including a copy of the test results and recommended remedial actions and costs shall be made by this Contractor to the Architect/Engineer for review. C. All equipment and/or systems noted on the Drawings "To Be Removed" shall be removed including, associated pipe and duct pipe and duct hangers and/or line supports. Where duct or pipe is to be capped for future or end of line use, it shall be properly tagged with its function or service appropriately identified. Where existing equipment is to be removed or relocated and has an electric motor or connection, the Electrical Contractor shall disconnect motor or connection, remove wiring to a safe point and this Contractor shall remove or relocate motor or connection along with the equipment. D. During the construction and remodeling, portions of the Project shall remain in service. Construction equipment, material tools, extension cords, etc., shall be arranged so as to present minimum hazard or interruption to the occupants of the building. None of the construction work shall interfere with the proper operation of the existing facility or be so conducted as to cause harm or danger to persons on the premises. All fire exits, stairs or corridors required for proper access, circulation or exit shall remain clear of equipment, materials or debris. The General Contractor shall maintain barricades, other separations in corridors and other spaces where work is conducted. E. Certain work during the demolition phase of construction may require overtime or night time shifts or temporary evacuation of the occupants. Coordinate and schedule all proposed down time at least seventy-two (72) hours in advance in writing. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

370 F. Any salvageable equipment as determined by the Owner, shall be delivered to the Owner, and placed in storage at the location of his choice. All other debris shall be removed from the site immediately. G. Equipment, piping or other potential hazards to the working occupants of the building shall not be left overnight outside of the designated working or construction area. H. Make every effort to minimize damage to the existing building and the owner's property. Repair, patch or replace as required any damage that might occur as a result of work at the site. Care shall be taken to minimize interference with the Owner's activities during construction and to keep construction disrupted areas to a minimum. Corporate with the Owner and other trades in scheduling and performance of the work. I. Include in the contract price all rerouting of existing pipe, duct, etc., and the reconnecting of the existing equipment as necessitated by field conditions to allow the installation of the new systems regardless of whether or not such rerouting, reconnecting or relocating is shown on the drawings. Furnish all temporary pipe, duct, controls, etc., as required to maintain heating, cooling, and ventilation services for the existing areas with a minimum of interruption. J. All existing pipe, duct, materials, equipment, controls and appurtenances not included in the remodel or alteration areas are to remain in place. K. Pipe, duct, equipment and controls serving mechanical and owner's equipment, etc., which is to remain but which is served by pipe, duct, equipment and controls that are disturbed by the remodeling work, shall be reconnected in such a manner as to leave this equipment in proper operating condition. L. It is the intention of this Section of the Specifications to outline minimum requirements to furnish the Owner with a turn-key and operating system in cooperation with other trades with a minimum of disruption or downtime. M. Refer to Architectural "Demolition and/or Alteration" plans for actual location of walls, ceiling, etc., being removed and/or remodeled. END OF SECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

371 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Mechanical demolition. SECTION MECHANICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING B. The drawings do not show all demolition work required. The contractor shall make himself familiar with the required scope of work to accomplish the work required by these documents. All demolition work implied or required shall be included in the scope of this contract. C. Outages of services as required by the new installation will be permitted but only at a time approved by the Owner. The contractor shall allow the Owner 2 weeks in order to schedule required outages. The time allowed for outages will not be during normal working hours unless otherwise approved by the Owner. All costs of outages, including overtime charges, shall be included in the contract amount RELATED SECTIONS A. Section Demolition and Structure Moving WORK SEQUENCE, TIMING, COORDINATION WITH OWNER A. The Owner will corporate with the Contractor, however, the following provisions must be observed: 1. During the construction of this project, normal facility activities will continue in existing buildings until new buildings or renovated areas are completed. Plumbing, fire protection, lighting, electrical, communications, heating, air conditioning, and ventilation systems will have to be maintained in service within the occupied spaces of the existing building. 2. A meeting will be held at the project site, prior to any construction, between the Owner's Representative, the General Contractor, the Sub-Contractors and the Engineer to discuss Contractor's employee parking space, access, storage of equipment or materials, and use of the Owner's facilities or utilities. The Owner's decisions regarding such matters shall be final DEMOLITION AND WORK WITHIN EXISTING BUILDINGS A. In the preparation of these documents every effort has been made to show the approximate locations of, and connections to the existing piping, duct, equipment and other apparatus related to this phase of the work. However, this Contractor shall be responsible for verifying all of the above information. This Contractor shall visit the existing site to inspect the facilities and related areas. This Contractor shall inspect and verify all details and requirements of all the Contract Documents, prior to the submission of a proposal. All discrepancies between the Contract Documents and actual job-site conditions shall be resolved by his contractor, who shall produce drawings which shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review. All labor and materials required to perform the work described shall be apart of this Contract. B. All equipment and/or systems noted on the Drawings "To Remain" shall be inspected and tested on site to certify its working condition. A written report on the condition of all equipment to remain, including a copy of the test results and recommended remedial actions and costs shall be made by this Contractor to the Architect/Engineer for review. C. All equipment and/or systems noted on the Drawings "To Be Removed" should be removed including, associated pipe and duct pipe and duct hangers and/or line supports. Where duct or pipe is to be capped for future or end of line use, it shall be properly tagged with its function or service appropriately MECHANICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING

372 identified. Where existing equipment is to be removed or relocated and has an electric motor or connection, the Electrical Contractor shall disconnect motor or connection, remove wiring to a safe point and this Contractor shall remove or relocate motor or connection along with the equipment. D. During the construction and remodeling, portions of the Project shall remain in service. Construction equipment, material tools, extension cords, etc., shall be arranged so as to present minimum hazard or interruption to the occupants of the building. None of the construction work shall interfere with the proper operation of the existing facility or be so conducted as to cause harm or danger to persons on the premises. All fire exits, stairs or corridors required for proper access, circulation or exit shall remain clear of equipment, materials or debris. The General Contractor shall maintain barricades, other separations in corridors and other spaces where work is conducted. E. Certain work during the demolition and construction phases of construction may require overtime or night time shifts or temporary evacuation of the occupants. Coordinate and schedule all proposed down time with the Project Administrator at least seventy-two (72) hours in advance in writing. F. Any salvageable equipment as determined by the Owner, shall be delivered to the Owner, and placed in storage at the location of his choice. All other debris shall be removed from the site immediately. G. Equipment, piping or other potential hazards to the occupants of the building shall not be left overnight outside of the designated working or construction area. H. Make every effort to minimize damage to the existing building and the owner's property. Repair, patch or replace as required any damage which might occur as a result of work at the site. Care shall be taken to minimize interference with the Owner's activities during construction and to keep construction disrupted areas to a minimum. Corporate with the Owner and other trades in scheduling and performance of the work. I. Include in the contract price all rerouting of existing pipe, duct, etc., and the reconnecting of the existing equipment as necessitated by field conditions to allow the installation of the new systems regardless of whether or not such rerouting, reconnecting or relocating is shown on the drawings. Furnish all temporary pipe, duct, controls, etc., as required to maintain heating, cooling, and ventilation services for the existing areas with a minimum of interruption. J. All existing pipe, duct, materials, equipment, controls and appurtenances not included in the remodel or alteration areas are to remain in place. K. Pipe, duct, equipment and controls serving mechanical and owner's equipment, etc., which is to remain but which is served by pipe, duct, equipment and controls that are disturbed by the remodeling work, shall be reconnected in such a manner as to leave this equipment in proper operating condition. L. No portion of the fire protection systems shall be turned off, modified or changed in any way without the express knowledge and written permission of the Owner's representative in order to protect systems that shall remain in service. M. It is the intention of this Section of the Specifications to outline minimum requirements to furnish the Owner with a turn-key and operating system in cooperation with other trades with a minimum of disruption or downtime. N. Refer to Architectural "Demolition and/or Alteration" plans for actual location of walls, ceiling, etc., being removed and/or remodeled. MECHANICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING

373 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual Sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Field verify measurements and piping arrangements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify that abandoned piping and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. C. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents. Report discrepancies to Owner before disturbing existing installation. D. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions PREPARATION A. Disconnect mechanical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal. B. Coordinate utility service outages with Utility Company. C. Provide temporary connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment, use personnel experienced in such operations. D. Existing Service: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from Owner at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. E. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is accepted. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Notify Owner and local fire service at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING MECHANICAL WORK A. Demolish and extend existing mechanical work under provisions of Division 02 and this Section. B. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. C. Remove abandoned piping to source of supply. D. Remove exposed abandoned piping systems, including abandoned systems above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut systems flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. E. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. F. Maintain access to existing installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panels as appropriate. G. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing installations, or as specified. MECHANICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING

374 3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIR A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused INSTALLATION A. Install relocated materials and equipment under the provisions of Division REMOVAL OF MATERIALS A. The contractor shall modify, remove, and/or relocate all materials and items so indicated on the drawings or required by the installation of new facilities. All removals and/or dismantling shall be conducted in a manner as to produce maximum salvage. Salvage materials shall remain the property of the Owner, and shall be delivered to such destination as directed by the Owner. Materials and/or items scheduled for relocation and which are damaged during dismantling or reassembly operations shall be repaired and restored to good operative condition. The contractor may, at his discretion and upon the approval of the Owner, substitute new materials and/or items of like design and quality in lieu of materials and/or items to be relocated. B. All items which are to be relocated shall be carefully removed in reverse to original assembly or placement and protected until relocated. The contractor shall clean and repair and provide all new materials, fittings, and appurtenances required to complete the relocations and to restore to good operative order. All relocations shall be performed by workmen skilled in the work and in accordance with standard practice of the trades involved. C. When items scheduled for relocation are found to be in damaged condition before work has been started on dismantling, the contractor shall call the attention of the Owner to such items and receive further instructions before removal. Items damaged in repositioning operations are the contractor's responsibility and shall be repaired or replaced by the contractor as approved by the Owner, at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Service lines and wiring to items to be removed, salvaged, or relocated shall be removed to points indicated on the drawings, specified, or acceptable to the Owner. Service lines and wiring not scheduled for reuse shall be removed to the points at which reuse is to be continued or service is to remain. Such services shall be sealed, capped, or otherwise tied-off or disconnected in a safe manner acceptable to the Owner. All disconnections or connections into the existing facilities shall be done in such a manner as to result in minimum interruption of services to adjacent occupied areas. Services to existing areas or facilities which must remain in operation during the construction period shall not be interrupted without prior specific approval of the Owner as hereinbefore specified. E. Certain work during the demolition phase of construction may require overtime or nighttime shifts or temporary evacuation of the occupants. Coordinate and schedule all proposed down time with the Owner's Representative at least 72 hours in advance. F. Make every effort to minimize damage to the existing building and the Owner's property. Repair, patch, or replace as required any damage which might occur as a result of work at the site. Care shall be taken to minimize interference with the Owner's activities during construction. Cooperate with the Owner and other trades in scheduling and performance of the work. G. Include in the contract price all rerouting of existing conduits, wiring, outlet boxes, fixtures, etc., and the reconnecting of existing fixtures as necessitated by field conditions to allow the installation of the new systems. Furnish all temporary conduit, wiring, boxes, etc., as required to maintain lighting and power service for the existing areas with a minimum of interruption. Remove wire and conduit back to nearest accessible active junction box and extend to existing homeruns as required. MECHANICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING

375 H. The contractor shall be responsible for loss or damage to the existing facilities caused by him and his workmen, and shall be responsible for repairing such loss or damage. The contractor shall send proper notices, make necessary arrangements, and perform other services required for the care, protection and in-service maintenance of all electrical services for the new and existing facilities. The contractor shall erect temporary barricades, with necessary safety devices, as required to protect personnel from injury, removing all such temporary protection upon completion of the work. I. Where existing construction is removed to provide working and extension access to existing utilities, contractor shall remove doors, piping, conduit, outlet boxes, wiring, light fixtures, air conditioning ductwork and equipment, etc., to provide this access and shall reinstall same upon completion of work in the areas affected. J. Where partitions, walls, floors, or ceilings of existing construction are being removed, all contractors shall remove and reinstall in locations approved by the Architect all devices required for the operation of the various systems installed in the existing construction. END OF SECTION MECHANICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING

376 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section , are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document RELATED DOCUMENTS Approved submittal date on equipment installed, to accomplish the test procedures, outlined under Services of the Contractor of this Section, will be provided by the Contractor DESCRIPTION A. The TAB of the air conditioning systems will be performed by an impartial technical firm whose operations are limited only to the field of professional TAB. The TAB work will be done under the direct supervision of a qualified engineer employed by the TAB firm. B. The TAB firm will be responsible for inspecting, adjusting, balancing, and logging the date on the performance of fans, dampers in the duct system, and air distribution devices. The Contractor and the various subcontractors of the equipment installed shall cooperate with the TAB firm to furnish necessary data on the design and proper applications of the system components and provide labor and material required to eliminate deficiencies or malperformance QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ACCEPTABLE TEST AND BALANCE: 1. Aerodynamics Inspecting of Texas, LLC 2. Advanced Air Systems 3. Engineered Air Balance 4. PHI Service Co. 5. Testing Specialties, INC. B. QUALIFICATIONS OF CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL: Submit evidence to show that the personnel who shall be in charge of correcting deficiencies for balancing the systems are qualified. The Owner and Engineer reserve the right to require that the originally approved personnel be replaced with other qualified personnel if, in the Owner and Engineer's opinion, the original personnel are not qualified to properly place the system in condition for balancing. C. QUALIFICATIONS OF TAB FIRM PERSONNEL: 1. A minimum of one registered Professional Engineer licensed in the State, is required to be in permanent employment of the firm. 2. Personnel used on the jobsite shall be either Professional Engineers or technicians, who shall have been permanent, full time employees of the firm for a minimum of six months prior to the start of Work for that specified project. 3. Evidence shall be submitted to show that the personnel who actually balance the systems are qualified. Evidence showing that the personnel have passed the tests required by the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) shall be required. D. CALIBRATION LIST: Submit to the Engineer for approval, a list of the gauges, thermometers, velometer, and other balancing devices to be used in balancing the system. Submit evidence to show that the balancing devices are properly calibrated before proceeding with system balancing. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

377 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SERVICES OF THE CONTRACTOR A. The Drawings and specifications have indicated valves, dampers, and miscellaneous adjustment devices for the purpose of adjustment to obtain optimum operating conditions, install these devices in a manner that leaves them accessible, provide access as requested by the TAB firm. B. Have systems complete and in operational readiness prior to notifying the TAB firm that the project is ready for their services, and certify in writing to the Construction Manager that such a condition exists. C. As a part of the Work of this Section, make changes in the sheaves, belts, and dampers or the addition of dampers required for correct balance of the new work as required by the TAB firm, at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Fully examine the existing system to be balanced, to determine whether or not sufficient volume dampers, balancing valves, thermometers, gauges, pressure and temperature taps, means of reading static pressure and total pressure in duct systems, means of determining water flow, and other means of taking data needed for proper water and air balancing are existing. Submit to the Engineer in writing a listing of omitted items considered necessary to balance existing systems. Submit the list and proposal as a cost add item. E. Verify that fresh air louvers are free of blockage, coils are clean and fresh air ducts to each air handling unit has individually adjustable volume regulating dampers. F. Provide, correct, repair, or replace deficient items or conditions found during the testing, adjusting, and balancing period. G. In order that systems may be properly tested, balanced, and adjusted as specified, operate the systems at no expense to the Owner for the length of time necessary to properly verify their completion and readiness for TAB period. H. Project Contract completion schedules shall provide time for allowances to permit the successful completion of TAB services to Owner's final inspection and acceptance. Complete, operational readiness, prior to commencement of TAB services, shall include the following services of the Contractor: 1. Construction status of building shall permit the closing of doors, window, ceilings installed and penetrations complete, to obtain project operating conditions. 2. AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS: a. Verify installation for conformity to design. Supply, return, and exhaust ducts terminated and pressure tested for leakage as specified. b. Volume and fire dampers properly located and functional. Dampers serving requirements of minimum and maximum outside air, return and relief shall provide tight closure and full opening, smooth and free operation. c. Supply, return, exhaust and transfer grilles, registers and diffusers. d. Air handling systems, units and associated apparatus, such as heating and cooling coils, filter sections, access doors, etc., shall be blanked and sealed to eliminate excessive bypass or leakage of air. e. Fans (supply and exhaust) operating and verified for freedom from vibrations, proper fan rotation and belt tension; overload heater elements shall be of proper size and rating; record motor amperage and voltage and verify that these functions do not exceed nameplate ratings. f. Furnish or revise fan drives or motors as necessary to attain the specified air volumes. 3. WATER CIRCULATING SYSTEMS: a. Position valves pertinent to system design and require operation to permit full flow of water through system components. Operate hydronic systems under full flow conditions until TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

378 circulating water is clean. Remove and clean strainers as required during this cycle of operation. b. Record each existing pump motor amperage and voltage, for retrofit. Readings shall not exceed nameplate rating. c. Verify, on new equipment, electrical starter overload heater elements to be of proper size and rating. d. Ensure that water circulating systems shall be full of water and free of air; expansion tanks set for proper water level, and air vents installed at high points of systems and operating freely. Advise Owner of deficiencies. e. Check and set operating temperatures of heat exchangers to design requirements. 4. AUTOMATIC CONTROLS: a. Verify that control components are installed in accordance with project documents and functional, electrical interlocks, damper sequences, air and water resets, fire and freeze stats. b. Controlling instruments shall be functional and set for design operating conditions. Factory precalibration of room thermostats and pneumatic equipment will not be acceptable. c. The temperature regulation shall be adjusted for proper relationship between the controlling instruments and calibrated by the TAB Contractor. Advise Owner of deficiencies or malfunctions SERVICES OF THE TAB FIRM A. The TAB firm will act as liaison between the Owner, Engineer, and the Contractor and inspect the installation of mechanical piping system, sheet metal work, temperature controls and other component parts of the heating, air conditioning and ventilating systems being retrofitted, repaired, or added under this Contract. The reinspection of the Work will cover that part related to proper arrangement and adequate provision for the testing and balancing and will be done when the Work is 80 percent complete. B. Upon completion of the installation and start-up of the mechanical equipment, to check, adjust, and balance system components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space in the building. Prepare and submit to the Owner complete reports on the balance and operations of the systems. C. Measurements and recorded readings of air, water, and electricity that appear in the reports will be done by the permanently employed technicians or engineers of the TAB firm. D. Make an inspection in the building during the opposite season from that in which the initial adjustments were made. At the time, make necessary modifications to the initial adjustments required to produce optimum operation of system components to affect the proper conditions as indicated on the Drawings. At time of opposite season check-out, the Owner's representative will be notified before readings or adjustments are made. E. In fan systems, the air quantities indicated on the Drawings may be varied as required to secure a maximum temperature variation of two degrees within each separately controlled space, but the total air quantity indicated for each zone must be obtained. It shall be the obligation of the Contractor to furnish or revise fan drive and motors if necessary, without cost to the Owner, to attain the specified air volumes. F. The various existing water circulating systems shall be cleaned, filled, purged of air, and put into operation before hydronic balancing PROFESSIONAL REPORT A. Before the final acceptance of the report is made, the TAB firm will furnish the Owner the following data to be approved by the Owner and Engineer: 1. Summary of main supply, return and exhaust duct pitot tube traverses and fan settings indicating minimum value required to achieve specified air volumes. 2. A listing of the measured air quantities at each outlet corresponding to the temperature tabulation as developed by the Engineer and TAB firm. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

379 3. Air quantities at each return and exhaust air handling device. 4. Static pressure readings entering and leaving each supply fan, exhaust fan, filter, coil, balancing dampers and other components of the systems included in the retrofit Work. These readings will be related to performance curves in terms of the CFM handled if available. 5. Motor current readings at each equipment motor on load side of capacitors. The voltages at the time of the reading shall be listed. 6. The final report shall certify test methods and instrumentation used, final velocity reading obtained, temperatures, pressure drops, RPM of equipment, amperage of motors, air balancing problems encountered, recommendations and uncompleted punch list items. The test results will be recorded on standard forms. 7. A summary of actual operating conditions shall be included with each system outlining normal and ventilation cycles of operation. the final report will act as a reference of actual operating conditions for the Owner's operating personnel BALANCING AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM A. GENERAL: 1. Place all equipment into full operation, and shall continue the operating during each working day of balancing and testing. If the air conditioning system is balanced during Off-Peak cooling season Balancing Contractor shall return to rebalance air side system as required to put system in proper balance at that time. 2. The Contractor shall submit detailed balancing and recording forms for approval. After the approval by the Architect, prepare complete set of forms for recording test data on each system. All Work shall be done under the supervision of a Registered Professional Engineer. All instruments used shall be accurately calibrated to within 1% of scale and maintained in good working order. 3. Upon completion of the balancing and testing, the Balancing Contractor shall compile the test data in report forms, and forward five copies to the Architect for evaluation. 4. The final report shall contain logged results of all tests, including such data as: a. Tabulation of air volume at each outlet. b. Outside dry bulb and wet bulb temperature. c. Inside dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures in each conditioned space room or area. d. Actual fan capacities and static pressures. Motor current and voltage readings at each fan. B. AIR SYSTEMS: Perform the following operations as applicable to system balance and test: 1. Check fan rotation. 2. Check filters (balancing shall be done with clean filters). 3. Test and adjust blower rpm to design requirements. 4. Test and record motor full load amperes. 5. Test and record system static pressures, suction and discharge. 6. Test and adjust system for design cfm, return air and outside air (+2%). Change-out fan sheaves as required to balance system. 7. Test and record entering air temperatures, db and wb. 8. Test and record leaving air temperatures, db and wb. 9. Adjust all zones to design cfm (+2%). 10. Test and adjust each diffuser, grille, and register to within 5% of design. C. AIR DUCT LEAKAGE: (From SMACNA Duct Standards 3rd Edition) Test all ductwork (designed to handle over 1000 CFM) as follows: 1. Test apparatus The test apparatus shall consist of: a. A source of high pressure air--a portable rotary blower or a tank type vacuum cleaner. b. A flow measuring device consisting of straightening vanes and an orifice plate mounted in a straight tube with properly located pressure taps. Each orifice assembly shall be accurately calibrated with its own calibration curve. Pressure and flow readings shall be taken with U- tube manometers. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

380 2. Test Procedures a. Test for audible leaks as follows: 1) Close off and seal all openings in the duct section to be tested. Connect the test apparatus to the duct by means of a section of flexible duct. 2) Start the blower with its control damper closed. 3) Gradually open the inlet damper until the duct pressure reaches 1.2 times the standard designed duct operating pressure. 4) Survey all joint for audible leaks. Mark each leak and repair after shutting down blower. Do not apply a retest until sealants have set. b. After all audible leaks have been sealed, the remaining leakage should be measured with the orifice section of the test apparatus as follows: 1) Start blower and open damper until pressure in duct reaches 25% in excess of designed duct operating pressure. 2) Read the pressure differential across the orifice on manometer No. 2. If there is no leakage, the pressure differential will be zero. 3) Total allowable leakage shall not exceed one (1) percent of the total system design air flow rate. When partial sections of the duct system are tested, the summation of the leakage for all sections shall not exceed the total allowable leakage. 4) Even though a system may pass the measured leakage test, a concentration of leakage at one point may result in a noisy leak which, must be corrected. D. DX SYSTEMS: 1. Test and record suction and discharge pressures at each compressor and record ambient air temperature entering the condensing coils. 2. Test and record unit full load amps and voltage. 3. Test and record staging and unloading of unit required by sequence of operation or drawing schedule. E. Automatic temperature controls shall be calibrated and all thermostats and dampers, adjusted so that the control system is in proper operating condition, subject to the approval of the Architect. F. The Air Balance Contractor shall report to Engineer all air distribution devices or other equipment that operate noisily so that corrective measures may be implemented by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner or Architect/Engineer. END OF SECTION TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

381 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Ductwork system insulation RELATED SECTIONS SECTION DUCT INSULATION A. Section Basic Materials and Methods 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer s Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects with mechanical insulations similar to that required for this project. B. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method. 1. Exception: Outdoor mechanical insulation may have flame spread index of 75 and smoke developed index of 150. C. Duct and plenum insulation shall comply with minimum R-value requirements of 2009 International Energy Conservation Code. D. Adhesive and other material shall comply with NFPA and NBFU Standards No. 90A and 90B SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance, fabrication procedures, product variations, and accessories DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in unopened containers with manufacturer s stamp, clearly labeled with flame and smoke rating, affixed showing fire hazard indexes of products. B. Protect insulation against dirt, water and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged or wet insulation; remove from project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. The type of insulation and its installation shall be in strict accordance with these specifications for each service, and the application technique shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. All insulation types, together with adhesives and finishes shall be submitted and approved before any insulation is installed. B. A sample quantity of each type of insulation and each type of application shall be installed and approval secured prior to proceeding with the main body of the work. DUCT INSULATION

382 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Glass fiber materials shall be as manufactured by Knauf, Certain-Teed, Johns-Manville or Owens- Corning and shall have the same thermal properties, density, fire rating, vapor barrier, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer. B. Adhesives shall be as manufactured by Minnesota Mining, Arabol, Benjamin-Foster, Armstrong or Insulmastic, Inc., and shall have the same adhesive properties, fire rating, vapor seal, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer. C. Ceramic fiber materials shall be as manufactured by Primer Refractories, A.P. Green Refractories or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All insulation shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and printed installation instructions. B. All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturer's requirements EXTERNAL DUCT INSULATION A. Fasten all longitudinal and circumferential laps with outward clinching staples 3" on center. On rectangular ducts over 24" wide apply as above and hold insulation in place on bottom side with mechanical pins and clips on 12" centers. B. Seal all joints, fastener penetrations and other breaks in vapor barrier with 3 inch wide strips of white glass fabric embedded between two coats of vapor barrier mastic, Childers CP-30 or approved equal. C. All external duct insulation shall be Johns Manville Type 75 fiberglass duct wrap insulation with reinforced aluminum facing or approved equal. D. External duct wrap is required on all outside air ducts and supply air ducts that are not internally insulated. Duct wrap shall be provided as follows: 1. 1½ thick, 1.0 PCF density minimum when ducts are located in conditioned spaces thick with a minimum installed R-value of 6 when ducts are located in unconditioned spaces, such as ceiling plenum space DUCT LINER A. Duct liner shall be kept clean and dry during transportation, storage and installation. Care should be taken to protect the liner from exposure to the elements or damage from mechanical abuse. B. All portions of duct designed to receive duct liner shall be completely covered with liner as specified. The smooth, black, acrylic-coated surfaces with flexible glass cloth reinforcement shall face the airstream. All duct liner shall be cut to assure tight, overlapped corner joints. The top pieces shall be supported by the sidepieces. Duct liner shall be installed following the guidelines in the NAIMA Duct Liner Installation Standard. C. The duct liner shall be tested according to erosion test method in UL 181 and shall be guaranteed to withstand velocities in the duct system up to 5000 fpm without surface erosion. D. Duct liner shall be adhered to the sheet metal with full coverage of an approved adhesive that conforms to ASTM C 916, and all exposed leading edges and transverse joints shall be coated with Permacote factory-applied or field-applied edge coating and shall be neatly butted without gaps. Shop DUCT INSULATION

383 or field cuts shall be liberally coated with Johns Manville SuperSeal duct butter and Edge Treatment or approved adhesive. E. Metal nosings shall be securely installed over transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream at forward discharge and at any point where lined duct is preceded by unlined duct. F. When velocity exceeds 4000 fpm (20.3 m/sec), use metal nosing on every leading edge. Nosing may be formed on duct or be channel or zee attached by screws, rivets or welds. G. The liner shall further be secured with Graham welding pins and washers on not more than 18 inch centers both vertical and horizontal surfaces, and the pins and washers shall be pointed up with adhesive. H. Duct liner shall be Johns Manville Linacoustic RC fiberglass duct liner with factory-applied edge coating or approved equal. The liner shall meet the Life Safety Standards as established by NFPA 90A and 90B, FHC 25/50 and Limited Combustibility and the air stream surface coating should contain an immobilized, EPA-registered, anti microbial agent so it will not support microbial growth as tested in accordance with ASTM G21 and G22. The duct liner shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 1071, with an NRC not less than.70 as tested per ASTM C 423 using a Type A mounting, and a thermal conductivity no higher than.25 BTU in/(hr ft 2 F) at 75 F mean temperature. I. Duct liner is required on all return air ductwork, return air boots and supply air ductwork downstream of the terminal units. Duct liner shall be provided as follows: 1. 1 Thick, 1.5 PCF density minimum when ducts are located in conditioned spaces ½ Thick with a minimum installed R-value of 6 when ducts are located in unconditioned spaces, such as ceiling plenum space Thick with a minimum installed R-value of 8 when ducts are located outdoors. J. Line supply and return ductwork at connection of HVAC unit to a point of 15 feet upstream and downstream of the equipment with Johns Manville, Linacoustic RC with an R-value of 5 or approved equal for thermal insulation and noise control. The liner shall meet the safety standards as indicated above with NRC not less than 0.75 as tested per ASTM C423 using a type A mounting and thermal conductivity no higher than 0.24 BTU in/(hr ft 2 F) at 75 F mean temperature. Attach with full cov er coat of cement, duct dimensions up to 16 inches, provide stick clips or screws and cap for dimension over 16 inches, space 16 inches o.c. maximum. Provide sheet metal liner cap over all leading edges of internal insulation exposed to air stream AIR DEVICE AND MISCELLANEOUS DUCT INSULATION A. The backside of all supply air devices shall be insulated with taped and sealed 1½ inch thick external duct wrap. B. The contractor shall install an additional layer of 1½ inch thick external fiberglass duct wrap on any portion of the supply air, return air, outside air, or exhaust air system that has condensation forming during any period of operation. The insulation shall be taped and sealed and located until all evidence of the condensation had been eliminated at no additional cost to the owner. END OF SECTION DUCT INSULATION

384 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION HVAC PIPING INSULATION A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein. B. The Basic Materials and Methods, Section , are included as a part of this Section as though written in full in this document SCOPE A. Scope of the Work shall include the furnishing and complete installation of the equipment covered by this Section, with all auxiliaries, ready for owner's use. B. Furnish and install piping insulation to: 1. Chilled water and heating hot water piping. 2. Condensate drainage piping. 3. All pipes subject to freezing conditions shall be insulated. C. Work specified elsewhere. 1. Painting. 2. Pipe hangers and supports. D. For insulation purpose piping is defined as the complete piping system including supplies and returns, pipes, valves, automatic control valve bodies, fittings, flanges, strainers, thermometer well, unions, reducing stations, and orifice assemblies WARRANTY A. Warrant the Work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming materials or workmanship. B. Defects shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Mildewing. 2. Peeling, cracking, and blistering. 3. Condensation on exterior surfaces SUBMITTALS A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Indicate size, material, and finish. Show locations and installation procedures. Include details of joints, attachments, and clearances. B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit schedules, charts, literature, and illustrations to indicate the performance, fabrication procedures, project variations, and accessories DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. DELIVERY: Deliver undamaged materials in the manufacturer's unopened containers. Containers shall be clearly labeled with the insulation's flame and smoke ratings. HVAC PIPING INSULATION

385 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 It is the intent of these specifications to secure superior quality workmanship resulting in an absolutely satisfactory installation of insulation from the standpoint of both function and appearance. Particular attention shall be given to valves, fittings, pumps, etc., requiring low temperature insulation to insure full thickness of insulation and proper application of the vapor seal. All flaps of vapor barrier jackets and/or canvas covering must be neatly and securely smoothed and sealed down The type of insulation and its installation shall be in strict accordance with these specifications for each service, and the application technique shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. All insulation types, together with adhesives and finishes shall be submitted and approved prior to installation A sample quantity of each type of insulation and each type application shall be installed and approval secured prior to proceeding with the main body of the work. Condensation caused by improper installation of insulation shall be corrected by Installing Contractor. Any damage caused by condensation shall be made good at no cost to the Owner or Architect/Engineer All insulation shall have composite (insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere the facing or jacket to insulation) fire and smoke hazard as tested by Procedure ASTM E084, NFPA 255 and UL 723 not exceeding: Flame Spread 25 Smoke Developed Accessories, such as adhesives, mastics and cements shall have the same component ratings as listed above All products or their shipping cartons shall have a label affixed, indicating flame and smoke ratings do not exceed the above requirements APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Calcium silicate materials shall be as manufactured by Johns Manville. B. Glass fiber materials shall be as manufactured by Johns Manville or Owens-Corning and shall have the same thermal properties, density, fire rating, vapor barrier, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer. C. Adhesives shall be as manufactured by Childers, Foster, HB Fuller or Armstrong, and shall have the same adhesive properties, fire rating, vapor seal, etc., as the types specified herein, subject to review by the Engineer. D. Armaflex elastomeric cellular thermal insulation by Armstrong. E. Phenolic foam insulation shall be as manufactured by Kooltherm Insulation (Koolphen). F. Metal jacketing and fitting covers shall be as manufactured by Childers or RPR Products MATERIALS A. CHILLED WATER AND HEATING HOT WATER PIPE: Provide fiberglass pipe insulation with ASJ- SSL jacket or phenolic foam with ASJ and all joints sealed. B. CONDENSATE DRAINAGE PIPING: Fire resistant fiberglass insulation; insulation not required when piping is exposed on roof. C. METAL JACKETING: Utilize Childers Strap-On jacketing. Provide preformed fitting covers for all elbows and tees. HVAC PIPING INSULATION

386 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 All insulation shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and printed installation instructions, including high density inserts at all hangers and pipe supports to prevent compression of insulation All items required for a complete and proper installation are not necessarily indicated on the plans or in the specifications. Provide all items required as per manufacturers requirements Pipes located outdoors or in tunnels shall be insulated same as concealed piping; and in addition shall have a jacket of inch thick, smooth aluminum with longitudinal modified Pittsburg Z-Lock seam and 2 inch overlap. Jacketing shall be easily removed and replaced without damage. All butt joints shall be sealed with gray silicone. Galvanized banding is not acceptable All insulated piping located over driveways shall have an aluminum shield permanently banded over insulation to protect it from damage from car antennas WATER PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. The insulation shall be applied to clean, dry pipes with all joints firmly butted together. Where piping is interrupted by fittings, flanges, valves or hangers and at intervals not to exceed 25 feet on straight runs, an isolating seal shall be formed between the vapor barrier jacket and the bare pipe. The seal shall be by the applications of adhesive to the exposed insulation joint faces, carried continuously down to and along 4 inches of pipe and up to and along 2 inches of jacket. B. Pipe fittings and valves shall be insulated with pre-molded or shop fabricated glass fiber covers finished with two brush coats of vapor barrier mastic reinforced with glass fabric. C. All under lap surfaces shall be clean and free of dust, etc. before the SSL is sealed. These laps shall be firmly rubbed to insure a positive seal. A brush coat of vapor retarder shall be applied to all edges of the vapor barrier jacket FIRE RATED INSULATION A. All pipe penetrations through walls and concrete floors shall be fire rated by applying USG Thermafiber in the space between the concrete and the pipe. B. The fire rating shall be additionally sealed by using 3M brand model CP 25 or 303 fire barrier caulk and putty. C. All fire rating material shall be insulated in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. PART 4 - SCHEDULES 4.01 LOW TEMPERATURE SURFACES MINIMUM INSULATION THICKNESS BASED ON FIBERGLASS A. Condensate drain lines: ¾ inch B. Drains receiving condensate: 1 inch C. Chilled Water Piping: (1) Located outdoors: 2 inch (2) Located indoors: (a) 4 inch and smaller: 1½ inch (b) Larger than 4 inch: 2 inch HVAC PIPING INSULATION

387 4.02 HIGH TEMPERATURE SURFACES MINIMUM INSULATION THICKNESS A. Hot Water Piping: (1) Operating temperature 105 F or less: 1 inch (2) Operating temperature higher than 105 F 1 inch and pipe size 1½ inch or smaller (3) Operating temperature higher than 105 F 2 inch and pipe size more than 1½ inch END OF SECTION HVAC PIPING INSULATION

388 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Low pressure ductwork. B. Duct cleaning RELATED SECTIONS SECTION METAL DUCTWORK Division 9 - Finishes: Weld priming, weather resistant, paint or coating. A. Section Basic Material and Methods. B. Section Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. C. Section Duct Insulation. D. Section Ductwork Accessories. E. Section Air Distribution Devices QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of metal ductwork products of types, materials and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Installer s Qualifications: Firms with least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with metal ductwork systems similar to that required for project. C. Codes and Standards: 1. SMACNA Standards: Comply with latest SMACNA s HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork. 2. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with ASHRAE Handbook, Equipment Volume, Chapter 1 Duct Construction, for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork. 3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems, NFPA 90B Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems, and NFPA 96 Standard. 4. IECC 2000: Comply with 2000 International Energy Conservation Code GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. Extent of metal ductwork is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by requirements of this section SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings, duct fabrication standards and product data under provisions of Division One. B. Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gauges, sizes, welds, and configuration prior to start of work. C. The contract documents are schematic in nature and are to be used only for design intent. The contractor shall prepare sheet metal shop drawings, fully detailed and drawn to scale, indicating all METAL DUCTWORK

389 structural conditions, all plumbing pipe and light fixture coordination, and all offsets and transitions as required to permit the duct to fit in the space allocated and built. All duct revisions required as a result of the contractor not preparing fully detailed shop drawings will be performed at no additional cost DEFINITIONS A. Duct Sizes: Inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain indicated clear size inside lining. Where offsets or transitions are required, the duct shall be the equivalent size based on constant friction rate. B. Low Pressure: Low pressure ductwork shall be rated for an operating pressure of 2. Low pressure ductwork shall be defined as all return, exhaust, and outside air ducts, all supply ductwork associated with constant volume air handling units with a scheduled external static pressure of less than 2, and all supply ductwork downstream of terminal units in variable volume systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTWORK MATERIALS A. Exposed Ductwork Materials: Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view in occupied spaces, provide materials which are free from visual imperfections including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains and discolorations, and other imperfections, including those which would impair painting. B. Sheet Metal.: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, lockforming quality, with G 90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A 525; and mill phosphatized for exposed locations. C. Stainless Steel Sheet: Where indicated, provide stainless steel complying with ASTM A167; Type 316; with No. 4 finish where exposed to view in occupied spaces, No. 1 finish elsewhere. Protect finished surfaces with mill-applied adhesive protective paper, maintained through fabrication and installation. D. Aluminum Sheet: Where indicated, provide aluminum sheet complying with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS A. General: Non combustible and conforming to UL 181, Class 1 air duct materials. B. Flexible Ducts: Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. Type 3M or approved equal, corrosive resistant galvanized steel formed and mechanically locked to inner fabric with 1 thick insulation when flexible ducts are located in conditioned spaces and with R-5 insulation when located in unconditioned spaces. Flexible duct shall have reinforced metalized outer jacket comply with UL 181, Class 1 air duct. C. Sealants: Hard-Cast iron grip or approved equal, non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive and shall not be a solvent curing product. Sealants shall be compatible with mating materials, liquid used alone or with tape or heavy mastic. D. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork. 1. For exposed stainless steel ductwork, provide matching stainless steel support materials. 2. For aluminum ductwork, provide aluminum support materials LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK A. Fabricate and support in accordance with latest SMACNA Duct Construction Standards and ASHRAE handbooks, except as indicated. Provide duct material, gauges, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. METAL DUCTWORK

390 B. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by approved shop drawings. Obtain engineer s approval prior to using round duct in lieu of rectangular duct. C. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide airfoil-turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. D. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible. Divergence upstream of equipment shall not exceed 30 degrees; convergence downstream shall not exceed 45 degrees. E. Use crimp joints with bead for joining round duct sizes 6 inch smaller with crimp in direction of airflow. F. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Obtain manufacturer's inspection and acceptance of fabrication and installation of ductwork at beginning of installation. B. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring. C. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. D. Connect diffusers or troffer boots to low pressure ducts with 6 feet maximum, 4 feet minimum, length of flexible duct. Hold in place with strap or clamp. E. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. F. The interior surface of all ductwork shall be smooth. No sheet metal parts, tabs, angles, or anything else may project into the ducts for any reason, except as specified to be so. All seams and joints shall be external. G. Where ducts pass through floors, provide structural angles for duct support. Where ducts pass through walls in exposed areas, install suitable sheet metal escutcheons as closers. H. All angles shall be carried around all four sides of the duct or group of ducts. Angles shall overlap corners and be welded or riveted. I. All ductwork shall be fabricated in a manner to prevent the seams or joints being cut for the installation of grilles, registers, or ceiling outlets. J. All duct hangers shall be attached to building structure. Cutting slots in roof or floor decking for hanger straps to be cast in concrete is not acceptable INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Maximum Length: For any duct run using flexible ductwork, do not exceed 6'-0" extended length. METAL DUCTWORK

391 B. Installation: Install in accordance with Section III of SMACNA s, HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible DUCTWORK APPLICATION SCHEDULE AIR SYSTEM Low Pressure Supply Return and Relief General Exhaust MATERIAL Steel, Aluminum Steel, Aluminum Steel, Aluminum 3.04 DUCTWORK HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. All ductwork shall be properly suspended or supported from the building structure. Hangers shall be galvanized steel straps or hot-dipped galvanized rod with threads pointed after installation. Strap hanger shall be attached to the bottom of the ductwork, provide a minimum of two screws one at the bottom and one in the side of each strap on metal ductwork. The spacing, size and installation of hangers shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the latest SMACNA edition. B. All duct risers shall be supported by angles or channels secured to the sides of the ducts at each floor with sheet metal screws or rivets. The floor supports may also be secured to ducts by rods, angles or flat bar to the duct joint or reinforcing. Structural steel supports for duct risers shall be provided under this Division AIR DUCT LEAKAGE: (From SMACNA Duct Standards Latest Edition) Test all ductwork (designed to handle over 1000 CFM) as follows: A. Test apparatus The test apparatus shall consist of: 1. A source of high pressure air--a portable rotary blower or a tank type vacuum cleaner. 2. A flow measuring device consisting of straightening vanes and an orifice plate mounted in a straight tube with properly located pressure taps. Each orifice assembly shall be accurately calibrated with its own calibration curve. Pressure and flow readings shall be taken with U-tube manometers. B. Test Procedures 1. Test for audible leaks as follows: 2. Close off and seal all openings in the duct section to be tested. Connect the test apparatus to the duct by means of a section of flexible duct. a. Start the blower with its control damper closed. b. Gradually open the inlet damper until the duct pressure reaches 1.5 times the standard designed duct operating pressure. c. Survey all joint for audible leaks. Mark each leak and repair after shutting down blower. Do not apply a retest until sealants have set. 3. After all audible leaks have been sealed, the remaining leakage should be measured with the orifice section of the test apparatus as follows: a. Start blower and open damper until pressure in duct reaches 50% in excess of designed duct operating pressure. b. Read the pressure differential across the orifice on manometer No. 2. If there is no leakage, the pressure differential will be zero. c. Total allowable leakage shall not exceed one (1) percent of the total system design air flow rate. When partial sections of the duct system are tested, the summation of the leakage for all sections shall not exceed the total allowable leakage. d. Even though a system may pass the measured leakage test, a concentration of leakage at METAL DUCTWORK

392 one point may result in a noisy leak which, must be corrected. 4. Test Witness a. Air duct leakage test shall be witnessed by Owner/Engineer. b. The Architect or duly authorized construction inspector shall be notified in writing at least 2 working days prior to each test DUCT SYSTEM CLEANING A. Duct system cleaning shall be performed in accordance with the current published standards of ASHRAE and NADCA. B. Duct system cleaning method used shall incorporate the use of vacuum collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. A vacuum device shall be connected to the downstream end of the section being cleaned through a predetermined opening. The vacuum collection device must be of sufficient power to render all areas being cleaned under negative pressure, such that containment of debris and the protection of the indoor environment is assured. C. All vacuum devices exhausting air inside the building shall be equipped with HEPA filters (minimum efficiency), including hand-held vacuums and wet-vacuums. D. All vacuum devices exhausting air outside the facility shall be equipped with Particulate Collection including adequate filtration to contain debris removed from the HVAC system. Such devices shall exhaust in a manner that will not allow contaminants to re-enter the facility. Release of debris outdoors must not violate any outdoor environmental standards, codes or regulations. E. Fibrous glass thermal or acoustical insulation elements present in any equipment or ductwork shall be thoroughly cleaned with HEPA vacuuming equipment, while the HVAC system is under constant negative pressure, and not permitted to get wet in accordance with applicable NADCA and NAIMA standards and recommendations. F. Duct cleaning method used shall not damage the integrity of the ductwork, nor damage porous surface materials such as liners inside the ductwork or system components. G. Replace the fiberglass material if there is any evidence of damage, deterioration, delamination, friable material, mold or fungus growth, or moisture such that fibrous glass materials cannot be restored by cleaning or resurfacing with an acceptable insulation repair coating. H. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint deterioration. I. Strip protective paper from stainless ductwork surfaces, and repair finish wherever it has been damaged. J. Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air distribution devices at time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent entrance of dust and debris until time connections are to be completed. K. Cleaning Report: Contractor shall provide a report to the Owner indicating the completion of duct cleaning per specification and areas of the duct system found to be damaged and/or in need of repair DUCT JOINTS AND SEAMS A. Seal all non-welded duct joints with duct sealant as indicated. END OF SECTION METAL DUCTWORK

393 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Volume control dampers. B. Round Duct Taps. C. Fire dampers. D. Combination fire and smoke dampers. E. Back draft dampers. F. Air turning devices. G. Flexible duct connections. H. Duct access doors. I. Duct test holes RELATED WORK A. Section Metal Ductwork REFERENCES SECTION DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES A. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. B. SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards. C. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service. D. UL Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division One. B. Provide shop drawings for shop fabricated assemblies indicated, including volume control dampers duct access doors duct test holes. Provide product data for hardware used. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Division 1, for fire dampers and combination fire and smoke dampers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated. B. Fabricate splitter dampers of material same gauge as duct to 24 inches size in either direction, and two gauges heavier for sizes over 24 inches. DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

394 C. Fabricate splitter dampers of double thickness sheet metal to streamline shape. Secure blade with continuous hinge or rod. Operate with minimum 1/2 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint, action flanged bushing, with set screw. D. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 9-1/2 x 24 inch. E. Fabricate multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 12 x 72 inch. 1. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware. 2. On outside air, return air, and all other dampers required to be low leakage type, provide galvanized blades and frames, seven inches wide maximum, with replaceable vinyl, EPDM, silicone rubber seals on blade edges and stainless steel side seals. Provide blades in a double sheet corrugated type construction for extra strength. Provide hat channel shape frames for strength and blade linkage enclosure to keep linkage out of the air stream. Construction leakage not to exceed 1/2%, based on 2,000 fpm and 4 inch static pressure. F. Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings. G. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends. H. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters ROUND DUCT TAPS A. Taps to trunk duct for round flexible duct shall be spin-in fitting with locking quadrant butterfly damper, model no. FLD-B03 by Flexmaster or approved equal ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FIRE DAMPERS AND COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS A. Greenheck B. Louvers and Dampers Inc. C. Ruskin. D. Nailor Industries FIRE DAMPERS A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555, and as indicated. B. Provide curtain type dampers of galvanized steel with interlocking blades. Provide stainless steel closure springs and latches for horizontal installations. Configure with blades out of air stream. C. Fabricate multiple blade fire dampers per U.L. with 16 gauge minimum galvanized steel frame and blades, oil-impregnated bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, 1/8 x 1/2 inch plated steel concealed linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade stops, and lock. D. Fusible links, UL 33, shall separate at 160 degrees F. Provide adjustable link straps for combination fire/balancing dampers COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555, and as indicated. DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

395 B. Provide factory sleeve for each damper. Install damper operator on exterior of sleeve and link to damper operating shaft. C. Fabricate with multiple blades with 16 gauge galvanized steel frame and blades, oil-impregnated bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, stainless steel jamb seals, 1/8 x 1/2 inch plated steel concealed linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade stops, and lock, and 1/2 inch actuator shaft. 1. Operators shall be spring return electric type suitable to operate on 120 V AC, 60 cycle. 2. Operators shall be UL listed and labeled SMOKE DAMPERS A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555, and as indicated. B. Motorized Smoke Dampers: multi-blade type, normally open with power on, close automatically when power is interrupted, UL-listed and labeled damper and damper operator ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - BACKDRAFT DAMPERS A. Greenheck B. American Warming and Vent. C. Louvers and Dampers Inc. D. Ruskin. E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One BACKDRAFT DAMPERS. A. Gravity back draft dampers, size 18 x 18 inches or smaller, furnished with air moving equipment, may be air moving equipment manufacturers standard construction. B. Fabricate multi-blade, parallel action gravity balanced back draft dampers of 16 gauge galvanized steel, or extruded aluminum, with blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in rattle-free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - AIR TURNING DEVICES A. Young Regulator. B. Titus. C. Tuttle and Bailey. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One AIR TURNING DEVICES A. On duct sizes less than 12 x 12, multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel or aluminum construction; with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps. B. Multi-blade device with radius blades attached to pivoting frame and bracket, steel or aluminum construction, with worm drive mechanism with 18 inch long removable key operator. DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

396 2.11 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Metaledge. B. Ventglass. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS TO AIR MOVING EQUIPMENT A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated. B. UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 20 oz per sq yd, approximately 6 inches wide, crimped into metal edging strip ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Greenheck B. American Warming and Vent. C. Ruskin. D. Titus. E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division One DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards and as indicated. B. Review locations prior to fabrication. C. Fabricate rigid and close-fitting doors of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum one inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover. Insulation shall be replaceable without field cutting or patching. D. Access doors smaller than 12 inches square may be secured with sash locks. E. Provide two hinges and two sash locks for sizes up to 18 inches square, three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles for sizes up to 24 x 48 inches. Provide an additional hinge for larger sizes. F. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable DUCT TEST HOLES A. Cut or drill temporary test holes in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps. B. Permanent test holes shall be factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation. DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

397 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Balancing Dampers 1. Provide at points on low pressure supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts and as required for air balancing. Use splitter dampers only where indicated. 2. All regulators mounted on externally insulated ductwork shall have 16 gauge elevated platforms at least 1/8 inch higher than the thickness of the insulation. Damper shaft shall have Ventlock No. 607 bearing mounted on ductwork within elevated platform. If duct is inaccessible the operating handle shall be extended and the regulator installed on the face of the wall or ceiling. Where regulators are exposed in finished parts of the building, they shall be flush type, Ventlock No All regulators shall be manufactured by Ventlock, or approved equal. 3. All dampers in lined ductwork shall have bushing to prevent damper damage to liner. C. Provide fire dampers at locations indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components, and where required by authorities having jurisdiction. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges. D. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to authorities having jurisdiction and Owner's representative. E. Provide back draft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated. F. Provide flexible duct connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment. Provide at least one inch slack at all flexible duct connections. G. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and as indicated. H. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. END OF SECTION DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

398 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Ceiling air diffusers. B. Wall registers and grilles. C. Louvers. SECTION AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES D. Other air devices indicated on drawings and schedules RELATED SECTIONS A. Section Basic Materials and Methods B. Section Testing, Adjusting and Balancing C. Section Metal Ductwork D. Section Ductwork Accessories 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air distribution devices of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Codes and Standards: 1. ARI Compliance: Test and rate air distribution devices in accordance with ARI 650 "Standard for Air Outlets and Inlets". 2. ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate air distribution devices in accordance with ASHRAE 70 "Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets". 3. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate louvers in accordance with AMCA 500 "Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters". 4. AMCA Seal: Provide louvers bearing AMCA Certified Rating Seal. 5. NFPA Compliance: Install air distribution devices in accordance with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air distribution devices including the following: 1. Schedule of air distribution devices indicating drawing designation, room location, number furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished. 2. Data sheet for each type of air distribution devices, and accessory furnished; indicating construction, finish, and mounting details. 3. Performance data for each type of air distribution devices furnished, including aspiration ability, temperature and velocity traverses; throw and drop; and noise criteria ratings. Indicate selections on data. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawing for each type of air distribution devices, indicating materials and methods of assembly of components. AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES

399 C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data, including cleaning instructions for finishes, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements of Division PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver air distribution devices wrapped in factory-fabricated fiber-board type containers. Identify on outside of container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices. B. Store air distribution devices in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work traffic. Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping WARRANTY A. Warrant the installation of the Work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from defective or nonconforming workmanship. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Titus Company B. Metalaire Industries, Inc. C. Nailor Industries D. Krueger E. Price F. Substitutions under provisions of Division One GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. Unless otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer s standard air devices when shown of size, shape, capacity, type and accessories indicated on drawings and schedules, constructed of materials and components as indicated and as required for complete installation and proper air distribution. B. Provide air devices that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device and listed in manufacturer s current data. C. Unless noted otherwise on drawings, the finish shall be #26 white. The finish shall be an anodic acrylic paint, baked at 315 F for 30 minutes. The pencil hardness must be HB to H. The paint must pass a 100 hour ASTM D117 Corrosive Environments Salt Spray Test without creepage, blistering, or deterioration of film. The paint must pass a 250 hour ASTM-870 Water Immersion Test. The paint must also pass the ASTM D-2794 Reverse Impact Cracking Test with a 50 inch pound force applied. D. Provide air device with border styles that are compatible with adjacent ceiling or wall system, and that are specially manufactured to fit into the wall construction or ceiling module with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to architectural construction drawings and specifications for types of wall construction and ceiling systems. E. Provide integral volume damper with roll formed steel blades where indicated on drawings or schedules. Dampers shall be opposed blade design with a screw driver slot or a concealed lever operator for adjustment through the face of the air device. AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES

400 F. Air devices designated for fire rated systems shall be pre-assembled with UL classified radiation damper and thermal blanket. Fire rated air devices shall be shipped completely assembled; one assembly per carton, Each assembly shall be enclosed in plastic shrink wrap with installation instructions LOUVERS A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard louvers where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation. B. Provide louvers that have minimum free area, and maximum pressure drop of each type as listed in manufacturer's current data, complying with louver schedule. C. Provide louvers with frame and sill styles that are compatible with adjacent substrate, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into construction openings with accurate fit and adequate support, for weatherproof installation. Refer to architectural construction drawings and specifications for types of substrate. D. Louvers shall be constructed of aluminum extrusions, ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5. Weld units or use stainless steel fasteners. E. Louver Screens: On inside face of exterior louvers, provide 1/2" square mesh anodized aluminum wire bird screens mounted in removable extruded aluminum frames. F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Ruskin Manufacturing Company 2. Greenheck Company 3. Louvers and Dampers, Inc. 4. Substitutions under provisions of Division One. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 All interior surfaces of all air devices shall be painted flat black See floor plans for type, neck size and CFM of air for all air distribution devices Install all air distribution devices as detailed on plans and in accordance with manufacturer s recommendations. END OF SECTION AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES

401 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tests B. Inspections C. Submittals D. Project Coordination 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. General Conditions B. Supplementary Conditions C. Division One 1.03 COOPERATION WITH TRADES: SECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS A. Cooperation with trades of adjacent, related, or affected materials or operations, shall be considered a part of this work in order to affect timely and accurate placing of work and bring together in proper and correct sequence, the work of such trades REFERENCES A. National Electrical Code (NEC) B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) D. Insulated Cable Engineer's Association (ICEA). E. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). F. Institute of Electrical and Electronic's Engineers (IEEE). G. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). H. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). I. International Energy Conservation Code (IECC) COMPLETE FUNCTIONING OF WORK: A. All work fairly implied as essential to the complete functioning of the electrical systems shown on the Drawings and Specifications shall be completed as part of the work of this Division unless specifically stated otherwise. It is the intention of the Drawings and Specifications to establish the types of the systems, but not set forth each item essential to the functioning of the system. In case of doubt as to the work intended, or in the event of amplification or clarification thereof, the Contractor shall call upon the Architect for supplementary instructions, Drawings, etc. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

402 B. Contractor shall review all pertinent Drawings and adjust his work to all conditions shown there on. Discrepancies between Plans, Specifications, and actual field conditions shall be brought to the prompt attention of the Architect. 1. Approximate location of transformers, feeders, branch circuits, outlets, lighting and power panels, outlets for special systems, etc., are indicated on the Drawings. However, the Drawings, do not give complete and accurate detailed locations of such outlets, conduit runs, etc., and exact locations must be determined by actual field measurement. Such locations will, at all times, be subject to the approval of the Architect. 2. Communicate with the Architect and secure his approval of any outlet (light fixture, receptacle, switch, etc.) location about which there may be the least question. Outlets obviously placed in a location not suitable to the finished room or without specific approval, shall be removed and relocated when so directed by the Architect. Location of light fixtures shall be coordinated with reflected ceiling plans. C. Additional coordination with mechanical contractor may be required to allow adequate clearances of mechanical equipment, fixtures and associated appurtenances. Contractor to notify Architect and Engineer of unresolved clearances, conflicts or equipment locations SCHEMATIC NATURE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The contract documents are schematic in nature in that they are only to establish scope and a minimum level of quality. They are not to be used as actual working construction drawings. The actual working construction drawings shall be the approved shop drawings CONTRACTOR S QUALIFICATIONS A. An approved contractor for the work under this division shall be: 1. A specialist in this field and have the personnel, experience, training, and skill, and the organization to provide a practical working system. 2. Able to furnish evidence of having contracted for and installed not less than 3 systems of comparable size and type that have served their Owners satisfactorily for not less than 3 years. 3. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. Persons performing electrical work shall be required to be licensed. Onsite supervision, journeyman shall have minimum of journeyman license. Helpers, apprentices shall have minimum of apprentice license DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. The date of final acceptance shall be the date of owner occupancy, or the date all punch list items have been completed or final payment has been received. Refer to Division One for additional requirements. B. The date of final acceptance shall be documented in writing and signed by the architect, owner and contractor DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification. B. Deliver products to the project at such time as the project is ready to receive the equipment, pipe or duct properly protected from incidental damage and weather damage. C. Damaged equipment shall be promptly removed from the site and new, undamaged equipment shall be installed in its place promptly with no additional charge to the Owner SUBMITTALS BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

403 A. Coordinate with Division 1 for submittal timetable requirements, unless noted otherwise within thirty (30) days after the Contract is awarded the Contractor shall submit a minimum of eight (8) complete bound sets of shop drawings and complete data covering each item of equipment or material. The first submittal of each item requiring a submittal must be received by the Architect or Engineer within the above thirty day period. The Architect or Engineer shall not be responsible for any delays or costs incurred due to excessive shop drawing review time for submittals received after the thirty (30) day time limit. The Architect and Engineer will retain one (1) copy each of all shop drawings for their files. Where full size drawings are involved, submit one (1) print and one (1) reproducible sepia or vellum in lieu of eight (8) sets. All literature pertaining to an item subject to Shop Drawing submittal shall be submitted at one time. A submittal shall not contain information from more than one Specification section, but may have a section subdivided into items or equipment as listed in each section. The Contractor may elect to submit each item or type of equipment separately. Each submittal shall include the following items enclosed in a suitable binder: 1. A cover sheet with the names and addresses of the Project, Architect, MEP Engineer, General Contractor and the Subcontractor making the submittal. The cover sheet shall also contain the section number covering the item or items submitted and the item nomenclature or description. 2. An index page with a listing of all data included in the Submittal. 3. A list of variations page with a listing all variations, including unfurnished or additional required accessories, items or other features, between the submitted equipment and the specified equipment. If there are no variations, then this page shall state "NO VARIATIONS". Where variations affect the work of other Contractors, then the Contractor shall certify on this page that these variations have been fully coordinated with the affected Contractors and that all expenses associated with the variations will be paid by the submitting Contractor. This page will be signed by the submitting Contractor. 4. Equipment information including manufacturer's name and designation, size, performance and capacity data as applicable. All applicable Listings, Labels, Approvals and Standards shall be clearly indicated. 5. Dimensional data and scaled drawings as applicable to show that the submitted equipment will fit the space available with all required Code and maintenance clearances clearly indicated and labeled at a minimum scale of 1/4" = 1'-0", as required to demonstrate that the alternate or substituted product will fit in the space available. 6. Identification of each item of material or equipment matching that indicated on the Drawings. 7. Sufficient pictorial, descriptive and diagrammatic data on each item to show its conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Any options or special requirements or accessories shall be so indicated. All applicable information shall be clearly indicated with arrows or another approved method. 8. Additional information as required in other Sections of this Division. 9. Certification by the General Contractor and Subcontractor that the material submitted is in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, signed and dated in long hand. Submittals that do not comply with the above requirements shall be returned to the Contractor and shall be marked "REVISE AND RESUBMIT". B. Refer to Division 1 for additional information on shop drawings and submittals. C. Equipment and materials submittals and shop drawings will be reviewed for compliance with design concept only. It will be assumed that the submitting Contractor has verified that all items submitted can be installed in the space allotted. Review of shop drawings and submittals shall not be considered as a verification or guarantee of measurements or building conditions. D. Where shop drawings and submittals are marked "REVIEWED", the review of the submittal does not indicate that submittals have been checked in detail nor does it in any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to furnish material and perform work as required by the Contract Documents. E. Shop drawings shall be reviewed and returned to the Contractor with one of the following categories indicated: 1. REVIEWED: Contractor need take no further submittal action, shall include this submittal in the O&M manual and may order the equipment submitted on. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

404 2. REVIEWED AS NOTED: Contractor shall submit a letter verifying that required exceptions to the submittal have been received and complied with including additional accessories or coordination action as noted, and shall include this submittal and compliance letter in the O&M manual. The contractor may order the equipment submitted on at the time of the returned submittal providing the Contractor complies with the exceptions noted. 3. NOT APPROVED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is not approved, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment that is not approved. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. 4. REVISE AND RESUBMIT: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked revise and resubmit, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the Specifications and/or provide as noted on previous shop drawings. Contractor shall not order equipment marked revise and resubmit. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. 5. CONTRACTOR S CERTIFICATION REQUIRED: Contractor shall resubmit submittal on material, equipment or method of installation. The Contractor s stamp is required stating the submittal meets all conditions of the contract documents. The stamp shall be signed by the General Contractor. The submittal will not be reviewed if the stamp is not placed and signed on all shop drawings. 6. MANUFACTURER NOT AS SPECIFIED: Contractor shall resubmit new submittal on material, equipment or method of installation when the alternate or substitute is marked manufacturer not as specified, the Contractor will automatically be required to furnish the product, material or method named in the specifications. Contractor shall not order equipment where submittal is marked manufacturer not as specified. Repetitive requests for substitutions will not be considered. F. Materials and equipment which are purchased or installed without shop drawing review shall be at the risk of the Contractor and the cost for removal and replacement of such materials and equipment and related work which is judged unsatisfactory by the Owner or Engineer for any reason shall be at the expense of the Contractor. The responsible Contractor shall remove the material and equipment noted above and replace with specified equipment or material at his own expense when directed in writing by the Architect or Engineer. G. Shop Drawing Submittals shall be complete and checked prior to submission to the Engineer for review. H. Furnish detailed shop drawings, descriptive literature, physical data and a specification critique for each section indicating "compliance" and/or "variations" for the following items: Lighting and Appliance Panelboards Heavy Duty Disconnect Switches Lighting Fixtures Lighting Control System Wiring Devices and Plates Conduit and Fittings Wire Switchboards Technology Wiring I. Refer to each specification section for additional requirements OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1 and in addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, include the following information for equipment items: 1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

405 2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. 4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules RECORD DRAWINGS A. Maintain a continuous record during the course of construction of all changes and deviations in the work from the contract drawings. Upon completion of the work, purchase a set of "Auto Positive Tracings" on vellum and make corrections as required to reflect the electrical systems as installed. Location and size of all conduit shall be accurately shown to dimension. Submit three prints of the tracings for approval. Make corrections to tracings as directed and deliver "Auto Positive Tracings" to the Architect. Record drawings shall be furnished in addition to shop drawings. Symbols on the Record drawings shall correspond to the identification symbols on the contract drawings and equipment identification plates and tags. B. The Contractor shall maintain a set of clearly marked black line record "AS-BUILT" prints on the job site on which he shall mark all work details, alterations to meet site conditions and changes made by "Change Order" notices. These shall be kept available for inspection by the Owner, Architect or Engineer at all times. C. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements concerning record drawings. If the Contractor does not keep an accurate set of as-built drawings, the pay request may be altered or delayed at the request of the Architect. Mark the drawings with a colored pencil. Delivery of as-built prints and reproducibles is a condition of final acceptance. D. The record prints shall be updated on a daily basis and shall indicate accurate dimensions for all buried or concealed work, precise locations of all concealed pipe or duct, locations of all concealed valves, controls and devices and any deviations from the work shown on the Construction Documents which are required for coordination. All dimensions shall include at least two dimensions to permanent structure points. E. Submit three prints of the tracings for approval. Make corrections to tracings as directed and delivered "Auto Positive Tracings" to the architect. "As-Built" drawings shall be furnished in addition to shop drawings. F. When the option described in paragraph F., above is not exercised then upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall transfer all marks from the submit a set of clear concise set of reproducible record "AS-BUILT" drawings and shall submit the reproducible drawings with corrections made by a competent draftsman and three (3) sets of black line prints to the Architect or Engineer for review prior to scheduling the final inspection at the completion of the work. The reproducible record "AS-BUILT" drawings shall have the Engineers Name and Seal removed or blanked out and shall be clearly marked and signed on each sheet as follows: CERTIFIED RECORD DRAWINGS DATE: (NAME OF GENERAL CONTRACTOR) BY: (SIGNATURE) (NAME OF SUBCONTRACTOR) BY: (SIGNATURE) BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

406 1.13 CERTIFICATIONS AND TEST REPORTS A. Submit a detailed schedule for completion and testing of each system indicating scheduled dates for completion of system installation and outlining tests to be performed and schedule date for each test. This detailed completion and test schedule shall be submittal at least 90 days before the projected Project completion date. B. Test result reporting forms shall be submitted for review no later than the date of the detailed schedule submitted. C. Submit 4 copies of all certifications and test reports to the Architect or Engineer for review adequately in advance of completion of the Work to allow for remedial action as required to correct deficiencies discovered in equipment and systems. D. Certifications and test reports to be submitted shall include, but not be limited to those items outlined in Section of Division MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Coordinate with Division 1 for maintenance manual requirements, unless noted otherwise bind together in D ring type binders by National model no or equal, binders shall be large enough to allow ¼ of spare capacity. Three (3) sets of all approved shop drawing submittals, fabrication drawings, bulletins, maintenance instructions, operating instructions and parts exploded views and lists for each and every piece of equipment furnished under this Specification. All sections shall be typed and indexed into sections and labeled for easy reference and shall utilize the individual specification section numbers shown in the Electrical Specifications as an organization guideline. Bulletins containing information about equipment that is not installed on the project shall be properly marked up or stripped and reassembled. All pertinent information required by the Owner for proper operation and maintenance of equipment supplied by Division 16 shall be clearly and legibly set forth in memoranda that shall, likewise, be bound with bulletins. B. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Special Project Conditions, in addition to the requirements specified in Division 16, include the following information for equipment items: 1. Identifying names, name tags designations and locations for all equipment. 2. Fault Current calculations and Coordination Study. 3. Reviewed shop drawing submittals with exceptions noted compliance letter. 4. Fabrication drawings. 5. Equipment and device bulletins and data sheets clearly highlighted to show equipment installed on the project and including performance curves and data as applicable, i.e., description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and model numbers of replacement parts. 6. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 7. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions, servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 8. Equipment name plate data. 9. Wiring diagrams. 10. Exploded parts views and parts lists for all equipment and devices. 11. Color coding charts for all painted equipment and conduit. 12. Location and listing of all spare parts and special keys and tools furnished to the Owner. 13. Furnish recommended lubrication schedule for all required lubrication points with listing of type and approximate amount of lubricant required. C. Refer to Division 1 for additional information on Operating and Maintenance Manuals. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

407 D. Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be turned over to the Owner or Engineer a minimum of 14 working days prior to the beginning of the operator training period OPERATOR TRAINING A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of factory trained specialists to instruct the Owner's operating personnel. The Owner's operator training shall include 12 hours of on site training in three 4 hour shifts. B. Before proceeding with the instruction of Owner Personnel, prepare a typed outline in triplicate, listing the subjects that will be covered in this instruction, and submit the outline for review by the Owner. At the conclusion of the instruction period obtain the signature of each person being instructed on each copy of the reviewed outline to signify that he has a proper understanding of the operation and maintenance of the systems and resubmit the signed outlines. C. Refer to other Division 16 Sections for additional Operator Training requirements SITE VISITATION A. Visit the site of the proposed construction in order to fully understand the facilities, difficulties and restriction attending the execution of the work. B. Before submitting a bid, it will be necessary for each Contractor whose work is involved to visit the site and ascertain for himself the conditions to be met therein in installing his work and make due provision for same in his bid. It will be assumed that this Contractor in submitting his bid has visited the premises and that his bid covers all work necessary to properly install the equipment shown. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with this requirement shall not be considered justification for the omission or faulty installation of any work covered by these Specifications and Drawings. C. Understand the existing utilities from which services will be supplied; verify locations of utility services, and determine requirements for connections. D. Determine in advance that equipment and materials proposed for installation fit into the confines indicated WARRANTY A. The undertaking of the work described in this Division shall be considered equivalent to the issuance, as part of this work, of a specific guarantee extending one year beyond the date of completion of work and acceptance by Owner, against defects in materials and workmanship. Materials, appliances and labor necessary to effect repairs and replacement so as to maintain said work in good functioning order shall be provided as required. Replacements necessitated by normal wear in use or by Owner's abuse are not included under this guarantee TRANSFER OF ELECTRONIC FILES A. Project documents are not intended or represented to be suitable for reuse by Architect/Owner or others on extensions of this project or on any other project. Any such reuse or modification without written verification or adaptation by Engineer, as appropriate for the specific purpose intended, will be at Architect/Owner s risk and without liability or legal exposure to Engineer or its consultants from all claims, damages, losses and expense, including attorney s fees arising out of or resulting thereof. B. Because data stored in electric media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently, or otherwise without authorization of the data s creator, the party receiving the electronic files agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within sixty (60) days of receipt, after which time the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred to be acceptable. Any errors detected within the sixty (60) day acceptance period will be corrected by the party delivering the electronic files. Engineer is not responsible for maintaining documents stored in electronic media format after acceptance by the Architect/Owner. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

408 C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, Engineer makes no representations as to the long term compatibility, usability or readability of documents resulting from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used by Engineer at the beginning of the Project. D. Any reuse or modifications will be Contractor s sole risk and without liability or legal exposure to Architect, Engineer or any consultant. E. The Texas Board of Architectural Examiners (TBAE) has stated that it is in violation of Texas law for persons other than the Architect of record to revise the Architectural drawings without the Architect s written consent. It is agreed that MEP hard copy or computer-generated documents will not be issued to any other party except directly to the Architect/Owner. The contract documents are contractually copyrighted and cannot be used for any other project or purpose except as specifically indicated in AIA B-141 Standard Form of Agreement Between Architect and Owner. If the client, Architect/Owner, or developer of the project requires electronic media for record purposes, then an AutoCAD based compact disc ( CD ) will be prepared. The CD will be submitted with all title block references intact and will be formatted in a plot format to permit the end user to only view and plot the drawings. Revisions will not be permitted in this configuration. F. At the Architect/Owner s request, Engineer will prepare one CD of electronic media to assist the contractor in the preparation of submittals. The Engineer will prepare and submit the CD to the Architect/Owner for distribution to the contractor. All copies of the CD will be reproduced for a cost of reproduction fee of Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per CD. The CD will be prepared and all title blocks, names and dates will be removed. The CD will be prepared in a.dwg format to permit the end user to revise the drawings. G. This Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per CD cost of reproduction will be paid directly from the Contractor to the Engineer. The CD will be prepared only after receipt of the Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00). The Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) per CD cost of reproduction is to only recover the cost of the manhours necessary to reproduce the documents. It is not a contractual agreement between the Contractor and Engineer to provide any engineering services, nor any other service. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The names and manufacturers and model numbers have been used in the Contract documents to establish types of equipment and standards of quality. Where more than one manufacturer is named for a specific item of equipment, only one of the specified manufacturers will be considered for approval. Where only one manufacturer is mentioned with the phrase "or approved equal", Contractor may submit an alternate manufacturer for consideration, provided the following conditions are met: 1. Submit alternate equipment with complete descriptive data in shop drawing form. Provide sample of equipment upon request for review by Architect. Samples will be returned if requested in writing. 2. Alternate equipment must be equal from the standpoint of materials, construction and performance. 3. Alternate submittal must be presented to the Engineer/Architect ten (10) days prior to bid date for approval. B. The Architect and Engineer shall be the sole judge of quality and equivalence of equipment, materials and methods All materials and products used on this project shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

409 2.03 ACCESS DOORS A. Wherever access is required in walls or ceilings to concealed junction boxes, pull boxes, equipment, etc., installed under this Division, furnish a hinged access door and frame with flush latch handle to another Division for installation. Doors shall be as follows: 1. Plaster Surfaces: Milcor Style K. 2. Ceramic Tile Surfaces: Milcor Style M. 3. Drywall Surfaces: Milcor Style DW. 4. Install panels only in locations approved by the Architect EQUIPMENT PADS A. Unless noted otherwise 4" high concrete pads for floor mounted equipment shall be installed under Division 3. Pads shall conform to the shape of the equipment with a minimum of 3" margin at equipment supports. Top and sides of pads shall be troweled to a smooth finish, equal to floor. External corners shall be bullnosed to a 3/4" radius, unless shown otherwise ESCUTCHEONS A. Provide heavy chrome or nickel plated plates, of approved pattern, on conduit passing through walls, floors and ceilings in finished areas. Where conduit passes through a sleeve, no point of the conduit shall touch the building construction. Caulk around such conduit with sufficient layers of two hour rated firesafing by Thermafiber 4.0 P.C.F. density, U.S.G. fire test 4/11/78 and seal off openings between conduit and sleeves with non-hardening mastic prior to application of escutcheon plate. Escutcheons shall be Gravler Sure-Lock, or approved equal SPACE LIMITATIONS A. Equipment shall be chosen which shall properly fit into the physical space provided and shown on the drawings, allowing ample room for access, servicing, removal and replacement of parts, etc. Adequate space shall be allowed for clearances in accordance with Code requirements. Physical dimensions and arrangement of equipment shall be subject to the approval of the Architect PAINTING A. All factory assembled equipment for electrical work, except light fixtures, that normally is delivered with a factory applied finish shall be delivered with a hard surface factory applied finish such as baked-on machinery enamel which will not require additional field painting. The finish shall consist of not less than 2 coats of medium gray color paint USA No. 61 Munsell Notation 8-3G, 6. 10/0.54 enamel. This Contractor shall protect this finish from damage due to construction operations until acceptance of the building. He shall be responsible for satisfactorily restoring any such finishes or replacing equipment that becomes stained or damaged ELECTRICAL SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION A. Conduit Systems: Provide adequate marking of major conduit which is exposed or concealed in accessible spaces to distinguish each run as either a power or signal/communication conduit. Except as otherwise indicated, use orange banding with black lettering. Provide self-adhesive or snap-on type plastic markers. Indicate voltage for that raceway. Locate markers at ends of conduit runs, on pull boxes, on junction boxes, near switches and other control devices, near items of equipment served by the conductors, at points where conduit passes through walls or floors, or enters non-accessible construction and at spacings of not more than 50 feet along each run of conduit. Switch-leg conduit and short branches for power connections do not have to be marked, except where conduit is larger than ¾ inch. Branch circuit conduits, junction boxes and pull boxes shall be marked with a permanent marker indicating panel name and branch circuit numbers. B. Underground Cable Identification: Bury a continuous, preprinted, bright colored plastic ribbon cable BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

410 marker with each underground cable (or group of cables), regardless of whether conductors are in conduit, duct bank, or direct buried. Locate each directly over cables, 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. C. Identification of Equipment: 1. All major equipment shall have a manufacturer s label identifying the manufacturer s address, equipment model and serial numbers, equipment size, and other pertinent data. Care shall be taken not to obliterate this nameplate in any way. 2. A black-white-black laminated plastic engraved identifying nameplate shall be secured by stainless steel screws to each automatic transfer switch, switchboard, distribution panel, motor control center, motor starter panels and panelboards. a. Identifying nameplates shall have ¼ inch high engraved letters and shall contain the following information: 1) Name 2) Voltage 3) Phase 4) 3 or 4 wire, and 5) Where it is fed from. b. An example of a panelboard nameplate is: Center Panel 1HB 480/277 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire Center Fed from DP2 c. An example of an automatic transfer switch nameplate is: Center ATS #2 480/277 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 4 pole Center Fed from MSB and DPE 3. Each feeder device in a switchboard, distribution panel, and motor control center device shall have a nameplate showing the load served in ½ inch high engraved letters. 4. A black-white-black laminated plastic engraved identifying nameplate shall be secured by screws to each safety switch, disconnect switch, individual motor starter, enclosed circuit breaker, wireway, and terminal cabinet. a. Identifying nameplates shall have ¼ inch high engraved letters and shall indicate the equipment served. b. An example if a disconnect switch is: AHU Cardholders and directory cards shall be furnished for circuit identification in panelboards. Cardholder shall be located on inside of panel door and shall be in a metal frame with clear plastic front. Circuit lists shall be typewritten. Circuit descriptions shall include location and name of each item of equipment served. Spares and spaces shall be written in erasable pencil for future use. Circuit directory shall show the room served by each circuit. The final graphs/signage room numbers shall be used. Do not use Architectural numbering on plans. 6. Prohibited Markings: Markings which are intended to identify the manufacturer, vendor, or other source from which the material has been obtained are prohibited for installation within public, tenant, or common areas within the project. Also, prohibited are materials or devices which bear evidence that markings or insignias have been removed. Certification, testing (example, Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.), and approval labels are exceptions to this requirement. 7. Warning Signs: Provide warning signs where there is hazardous exposure associated with access to or operation of electrical facilities. Provide text of sufficient clarity and lettering of sufficient size to convey adequate information at each location; mount permanently in an appropriate and effective location. Comply with recognized industry standards for color and design. 8. Operational Tags: Where needed for proper and adequate information on operation and maintenance of electrical system, provide tags of plasticized card stock, either preprinted or hand printed. Tags shall convey the message, example: DO NOT OPEN THIS SWITCH WHEN BURNER IS OPERATING. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

411 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING A. Trenching and backfilling and other earthwork operations required to install the facilities specified herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of Division 2 (95% of maximum standard density). Where trenching or excavation is required in improved areas, the backfill shall be compacted to a condition equal to that of adjacent undisturbed earth and the surface of the area restored to the condition existing prior to trenching or excavating operations. Provide a minimum of 3 of sand underneath all conduits. The plans indicate information pertaining to surface and sub-surface obstructions; however, this information is not guaranteed. Should obstructions be encountered whether or not shown, the Contractor shall alter routing of new work, reroute existing lines, remove obstructions where permitted, or otherwise perform whatever work is necessary to satisfy the purpose of new work and leave existing surfaces and structures in a satisfactory and serviceable condition. All work shall comply with OSHA Standards WORKMANSHIP AND CONCEALMENT A. The work of this Section shall be performed by workman skilled in their trade. Installation shall be consistent in completeness whether concealed or exposed. Each item of electrical work shall be concealed in walls, chases, under floors and above ceilings except: 1. Where shown to be exposed. 2. Where exposure is necessary to the proper function SLEEVES, CUTTING AND PATCHING A. This section shall be responsible for placing sleeves for all conduit passing through walls, partitions, sound walls, beams, floors, roof, etc. Sleeves through below-grade walls shall use water-tight fitting manufactured by O.Z. Gendey. B. All cutting and patching will be done under another Division, but this Section will be responsible for timely performance of this work and layout of holes and setting sleeves. C. All un-used sleeves shall be sealed with 2 hour UL approved fire sealant manufactured by 3M or approved equal. D. Refer to for additional requirements ELECTRICAL GEAR A. Install all electrical equipment in accordance with the National Electrical Code and as shown on the drawings. B. Lighting contractors, time clocks, disconnect switches, etc. mounted in mechanical/electrical rooms shall be mounted at a working height not requiring a ladder, when wall space is available. Installation of these devices at greater elevations shall be approved by the Engineer. Contractor shall provide a coordination sketch of each mechanical/electrical room noting locations and mounting heights of all electrical devices(note bottom and top elevations) shown to be installed. Sketches shall be provided to the Engineer for review, and the general contractor for coordination with other trades working in these rooms CLEANING A. Clean lighting fixtures and equipment. B. Touch-up and refinish scratches and marred surfaces on panels, switches, starters, and transformers. BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

412 3.06 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Tests and inspection requirements shall be coordinated with Division I. B. Date for final acceptance test shall be sufficiently in advance of completion date of contract to permit alterations or adjustments necessary to achieve proper functioning of equipment prior to contract completion date. C. Conduct re-tests as directed by Architect on portions of work or equipment altered or adjusted as determined to be necessary by final acceptance test. No resultant delay or consumption of time as a result of such necessary re-test beyond contract completion date shall relieve Contractor of his responsibility under contract. D. Put circuits and equipment into service under normal conditions, collectively and separately, as may be required to determine satisfactory operation. Demonstrate equipment to operate in accordance with requirements of these specifications. Perform tests in the presence of Architect. Furnish instruments and personnel required for tests. E. Final Inspection: 1. At the time designated by the Architect, the entire system shall be inspected by the Architect and Engineer. The contractor or his representative shall be present at this inspection. 2. Panelboards, switches, fixtures, etc., shall be cleaned and in operating condition. 3. Certificates and documents required hereinbefore shall be in order and presented to the Architect prior to inspection. 4. Panel covers, junction box covers, etc., shall be removed for visual inspection of the wire, bus bars, etc. 5. After the inspection, any items which are noted as needing to be changed or corrected in order to comply with these specifications and the drawings shall be accomplished without delay. END OF SECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

413 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION DEMOLITION WORK A. The drawings do not show all demolition work required. The contractor shall make himself familiar with the required scope of work to accomplish the work required by these documents. All demolition work implied or required shall be included in the scope of this contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DEMOLITION WORK A. The contractor shall be responsible for loss or damage to the existing facilities caused by him and his workmen, and shall be responsible for repairing such loss or damage. The contractor shall send proper notices, make necessary arrangements, and perform other services required for the care, protection and in-service maintenance of all electrical services for the new and existing facilities. The contractor shall erect temporary barricades, with necessary safety devices, as required to protect personnel from injury, removing all such temporary protection upon completion of the work. B. The contractor shall provide temporary or new services to all existing facilities as required to maintain their proper operation when normal services are disrupted as a result of the work being accomplished under this project. C. Where existing construction is removed to provide working and extension access to existing utilities, contractor shall remove doors, piping, conduit, outlet boxes, wiring, light fixtures, air conditioning ductwork and equipment, etc., to provide this access and shall reinstall same upon completion of work in the areas affected. D. Where partitions, walls, floors, or ceilings of existing construction are being removed, all contractors shall remove and reinstall in locations approved by the Architect all devices required for the operation of the various systems installed in the existing construction. E. Outages of services as required by the new installation will be permitted but only at a time approved by the Owner. The contractor shall allow the Owner 2 weeks in order to schedule required outages. The time allowed for outages will not be during normal working hours unless otherwise approved by the Owner. All costs of outages, including overtime charges, shall be included in the contract amount. F. The contractor shall modify, remove, and/or relocate all materials and items so indicated on the drawings or required by the installation of new facilities. All removals and/or dismantling shall be conducted in a manner as to produce maximum salvage. Salvage materials shall remain the property of the Owner, and shall be delivered to such destination as directed by the Owner. Materials and/or items scheduled for relocation and which are damaged during dismantling or reassembly operations shall be repaired and restored to good operative condition. The contractor may, at his discretion and upon the approval of the Owner, substitute new materials and/or items of like design and quality in lieu of materials and/or items to be relocated. G. All items which are to be relocated shall be carefully removed in reverse to original assembly or placement and protected until relocated. The contractor shall clean and repair and provide all new materials, fittings, and appurtenances required to complete the relocations and to restore to good operative order. All relocations shall be performed by workmen skilled in the work and in accordance with standard practice of the trades involved. DEMOLITION WORK

414 H. When items scheduled for relocation are found to be in damaged condition before work has been started on dismantling, the contractor shall call the attention of the Owner to such items and receive further instructions before removal. Items damaged in repositioning operations are the contractor's responsibility and shall be repaired or replaced by the contractor as approved by the Owner, at no additional cost to the Owner. I. Service lines and wiring to items to be removed, salvaged, or relocated shall be removed to points indicated on the drawings, specified, or acceptable to the Owner. Service lines and wiring not scheduled for reuse shall be removed to the points at which reuse is to be continued or service is to remain. Such services shall be sealed, capped, or otherwise tied-off or disconnected in a safe manner acceptable to the Owner. All disconnections or connections into the existing facilities shall be done in such a manner as to result in minimum interruption of services to adjacent occupied areas. Services to existing areas or facilities which must remain in operation during the construction period shall not be interrupted without prior specific approval of the Owner as hereinbefore specified. J. During the construction and remodeling, portions of the project shall remain in service. Construction equipment, materials, tools, extension cords, etc., shall be arranged so as to present minimum hazard or interruption to the occupants of the building. K. Certain work during the demolition phase of construction may require overtime or nighttime shifts or temporary evacuation of the occupants. Coordinate and schedule all proposed down time with the Owner's Representative at least 72 hours in advance. L. Make every effort to minimize damage to the existing building and the Owner's property. Repair, patch, or replace as required any damage which might occur as a result of work at the site. Care shall be taken to minimize interference with the Owner's activities during construction. Cooperate with the Owner and other trades in scheduling and performance of the work. M. Include in the contract price all rerouting of existing conduits, wiring, outlet boxes, fixtures, etc., and the reconnecting of existing fixtures as necessitated by field conditions to allow the installation of the new systems. Furnish all temporary conduit, wiring, boxes, etc., as required to maintain lighting and power service for the existing areas with a minimum of interruption. Remove wire and conduit back to nearest accessible active junction box and extend to existing homeruns as required. N. All existing lighting fixtures, switches, outlets, speakers, materials, equipment and appurtenances not included in the remodel or alteration areas are to remain in place and shall remain in service. O. Electrical equipment, outlets, speakers, circuits to mechanical and building systems equipment, etc., which are to remain but which are served by conduit and/or circuiting that is disturbed by the remodeling work, shall be reconnected in such as manner as to leave it in proper operating condition. P. Existing branch circuit wiring which is to be removed, shall be pulled from the raceways and the empty conduit shall be removed to a point of permanent concealment. Q. Existing lighting fixtures shown to be removed and indicated to be reused, shall be cleaned, repaired, relamped and provided with such new accessories as may be needed for the proper installation in their new locations. R. New circuiting indicated to be connected to existing panels shall be connected to "spares" and/or "released" breakers as applicable, or new breakers provided where space is available. Contractor shall verify the existing panel load and feeder capacity prior to adding any additional loads. S. Within the remodeled or alteration areas where existing ceilings are being removed and new ceiling are installed, all existing lighting fixtures, other ceiling mounted devices and their appurtenances shall be removed and reinstalled into the new ceiling, unless otherwise shown or specified. T. Within the remodeled or alteration areas where existing walls are being removed, all existing lighting fixtures, switches, receptacles, other materials and equipment and their appurtenances shall be removed, where required by the remodel work either shown or specified. DEMOLITION WORK

415 U. Refer to Architectural "Demolition" and "Alteration" plans for actual location of walls, ceilings, etc. being removed and/or remodeled. END OF SECTION DEMOLITION WORK

416 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE SECTION WIRE, CABLE AND RELATED MATERIALS A. Provide 600 volt building wire, cable and connectors and 300 volt wire, cable and connectors. B. WORK INCLUDED: Include the following Work in addition to items normally part of this Section. 1. Wiring for lighting and power. 2. Automatic Control Wiring. 3. Connection of equipment shown. 4. Fire Alarm System C. WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: 1. Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning equipment. 2. Structured cabling system. 3. Coaxial cables 1.02 STANDARDS A. UL83 B. ASTM B-3 C. All wire cable and connectors shall be UL approved ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. 600 VOLT WIRE AND CABLE 1. Southwire 2. General Cable 3. Essex 4. Cerro 5. American Insulated Wire Corporation 6. Pyrotenax (MI) B. 300 VOLT WIRE AND CABLE 1. Westpenn 2. Beldon 3. Alpha C. FLEXIBLE CABLE SYSTEMS 1. AFC Modular Cable Systems D. CONNECTORS 1. AMP 2. Burndy 3. Ideal 4. 3M 5. O.Z. Gedney WIRE, CABLE, AND RELATED MATERIALS

417 6. Thomas & Betts 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings shall include, but not limited to: 1. Cutsheets of wire, cable and connectors to indicate the performance, fabrication procedures, product variations, and accessories REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH: A. National Electrical Code. B. Local, municipal, or state codes that have jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRING A. All wire shall be new and continuous without weld, splice, or joints throughout its length. It must be uniform in cross-section, free from flaws, scales and other imperfections. B. WIRE MATERIAL: Soft drawn, annealed, 98% pure copper, with tin coating. Aluminum wiring is not acceptable. C. TYPES: 1. Provide type THHN/THWN insulation for all buried feeders and service entrance conductors. 2. Provide type THHN/THWN insulation for all branch circuits and above grade feeders. 3. All wire No. 8 and larger shall be stranded. All wire No. 10 and smaller shall be stranded or solid. 4. Provide type "XHHW" or other 90 degrees insulation wiring for branch circuit wiring installed through continuous rows of fluorescent fixture bodies. 5. All 300-volt cable including but not limited to telephone, fire alarm, data, CATV and security shall be UL listed for use in return air plenums. D. CONDUCTOR SIZES 1. Feeder conductors shall be sized for a maximum of 2% drop in rated voltage at scheduled load. 2. Branch circuit conductors shall be sized for a maximum 3% drop in the rated voltage to the longest outlet on the circuit. 3. Minimum wire shall be No. 12, unless otherwise shown on Drawings or required by Code. E. COLOR CODING: No. 6 or larger shall use tape for color coding. No. 8 and smaller wire shall be color coded in accordance with the governing authority requirements or as follows: 2.02 GROUNDING 120/208 VOLT 277/480 VOLT 120/240 VOLT NEUTRAL: White Neutral: Gray Neutral: White PHASE A: Black Phase A: Brown Phase A: Black PHASE B: Red Phase B: Purple Phase B: Orange PHASE C: Blue Phase C: Yellow Phase C: Blue GROUND: Green Ground: Green Ground: Green Permanently connect all conduit work, motors, starters, and other electrical equipment to grounding system in accordance with the National Electrical Code. WIRE, CABLE, AND RELATED MATERIALS

418 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WIRE A. Do not pull wire into conduit until Work of an injurious nature is completed. Where two or more circuits run to a single outlet box, each circuit shall be properly tagged. Wyreze or approved equal may be used as a lubricant where necessary. B. Splices shall be fully made up in outlet boxes with compression crimp-on type splice connectors. C. Joints and splices will not be permitted in service entrance or in feeders. Joints in branch circuits will be permitted where branch circuits divide, and then shall consist of one through-circuit to which the branch shall be spliced. Joints shall not be left for the fixture hanger to make. Connect joints and splices with Buchanan Series "2000" solderless connectors complete with insulating caps or properly sized wire nuts. D. All stranded conductors shall be furnished with lugs or connectors. E. Connectors furnished with circuit breakers or switches shall be suitable for copper wire termination. F. Sta-Cons shall be used to terminate stranded conductors on all switches and receptacles. G. Metal Clad Cable - Type MC 1. Allowed for fixture whips in lengths not exceeding 6. H. Armored Cable - Type AC 1. Not Allowed. I. All stranded #10 and small conductors shall be terminated with an approved solderless terminal if the device or light fixture does not have provisions for clamp type securing of the conductor. J. The jacket for all travelers used on 3-way and 4-way switches shall be pink BALANCING SYSTEM The load on each distribution and lighting panel shall be balanced to within 10% by proper arrangement of branch circuits on the different phase legs. Provide written documentation showing results. Submit with O & M manuals LOW VOLTAGE WIRING A. Low voltage wiring shall be plenum rated. All wiring in mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, drywall ceiling, inaccessible areas, underground, plaster ceiling, inside concealed walls areas exposed to occupant view, and other areas subject to physical damage shall be run in conduit. B. Low voltage wiring shall be routed in separate raceways from power wiring systems. C. Sleeves shall be placed in the forms of concrete, masonry and fire rated walls, floor slabs and beams, for the passage of wiring. Sleeves should be set in place a sufficient time ahead of the concrete work so as not to delay the work. Sleeves shall be rigid galvanized steel CABLE SUPPORTS A. Provide cable supports in all vertical raceways in accordance with Article of the NEC. WIRE, CABLE, AND RELATED MATERIALS

419 3.05 DEFECTS A. Defects shall include, but are not to limited to, the following: 1. Tripping circuit breakers under normal operation. 2. Improperly connected equipment. 3. Damaged, torn, or skinned insulation. END OF SECTION WIRE, CABLE, AND RELATED MATERIALS

420 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION GROUNDING A. The requirements of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to all work herein SCOPE A. WORK COMBINED WITH OTHER SECTIONS: Combine the work specified herein with the following Sections to form a single responsibility for the Work: 1. Electrical. 2. Basic materials and methods. B. Provide electrical service, equipment and wiring device grounding as shown, scheduled and as specified. C. The types of grounding include, but not limited to, the grounding bonding of all equipment devices, building steel piping, and as required by the National Electrical Code, Local Inspection Department and Power Company STANDARDS A. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NFPA-70) B. Local municipal and State codes that have jurisdiction. C. NECA 1.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES A. Provide grounding products manufactured by Copperweld and Cadweld SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings shall include, but not limited to the following: 1. Cut sheets of ground rods, clamps and connectors. 2. Grounding system diagram. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. GENERAL: Provide all materials required to construct a complete grounded electrical system. B. GROUND RODS: Ground rods shall be 3/4" inch diameter by 10 feet long construction with copper jacket and a steel core. C. CLAMPS: Ground clamps shall be copper except for steel or iron pipes in which the clamps shall be galvanized iron. D. CONDUCTORS: Conductors shall be connected by means of an approved pressure connector or clamp. GROUNDING

421 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. GENERAL: Install grounding system as shown and specified to ensure a properly grounded system. B. BUILDING STEEL AND PIPING SYSTEM: Install a bonding jumper between building steel and metallic piping systems to bond them to the electrical grounding system. C. NEUTRAL: The neutral shall be grounded only at the service entrance and other separately derived systems. The neutral shall be kept separate from the grounding system and shall not be used as a ground. D. GROUNDING SEPARATELY DERIVED ALTERNATING CURRENT SYSTEM 1. TRANSFORMERS: The center point (neutral) of each wye connected transformer shall be bonded to the case and a grounding electrode conductor shall be connected to a ground rod or building steel. 2. STANDBY EMERGENCY GENERATOR: The generator neutral shall be bonded to the generator when a 4 pole switched neutral automatic transfer switch is specified. E. GROUNDING CONDUCTOR: A grounding conductor and metallic conduit system shall bond all equipment served by the electrical system. Provide a flexible bonding jumper for isolated metallic piping and ductwork and around expansion fittings and joints. F. CONDUIT GROUNDING BUSHING: Conduit terminating in equipment that has a ground bus such as switchboards, panelboards, etc., shall have grounding bushings installed. Ground each conduit by means of a grounding bushing and to the ground bus in the equipment. G. MOTORS: The frame of all motors shall be grounded. H. SPECIAL GROUNDING: Provide a #6 AWG copper grounding conductor for each telephone board, television system, etc. Terminate the grounding conductor on ground bus and to the building electrical grounding system. Refer to (d) and (d) of the NEC. I. REMOTE PANELBOARDS: Provide a grounding electrode conductor all remote panels as required by the NEC and shown on drawings. J. LIGHTING FIXTURES: Flexible fixture whips containing a green grounding conductor shall be used to connect light fixtures. Flexible fixture whips shall not exceed ten feet. K. RECEPTACLES: All receptacles shall be grounded using the branch circuit grounding conductor. Receptacles shall use an approved grounding yoke TESTING: Perform a ground resistance test using a biddle analog or digital portable earth/ground resistance tester. The system resistance shall not exceed 5 OHMS. Provide additional electrodes as required (refer to of the NEC or the most current edition ). Test shall not be conducted following wet weather. Provide personal instruments to conduct these tests and submit certified test for review. Test shall be verified by Engineer. END OF SECTION GROUNDING

422 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE SECTION RACEWAYS A. Provide electrical raceways and fittings as shown, scheduled and specified. B. The types of raceways and fittings required are as follows: 1. Rigid hot-dipped galvanized steel conduit (RGS) 2. Intermediate hot-dipped galvanized steel conduit (IMC) 3. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) 4. PVC 5. Flexible metal conduit 6. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit (non-metallic is not acceptable) 7. PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit 1.02 STANDARDS A. ANSI, C80.1 & C80.3 B. NEMA FB-1 C. NEMA TC3 D. UL, 6, 797 & ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Raceways 1. Allied 2. Triangle 3. Republic 3. Carlon 4. Wheatland Tube 5. Cantex 6. Western Tube 7. Robroy Industries B. Fittings 1. Appleton 2. Crouse Hinds 3. Steel City 4. O.Z. Gedney 5. Carlon 6. Raco, Inc SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawing shall include but not be limited to: 1. Cutsheets for raceways and fitting. RACEWAYS

423 1.05 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH: A. National Electrical Code. B. Local, municipal, or state codes that have jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PROVIDE CONDUIT AS FOLLOWS: A. Except as noted or otherwise specified, all wiring shall be installed in galvanized rigid steel, rigid aluminum conduit or electrical steel tube (EMT) of the proper size to contain the number of conductors required in accordance with the latest edition of the N.E.C. Where conduit sizes are shown on the drawings, these shall take preference. Contractor shall epoxy coat galvanized rigid steel conduit for use in natatoriums. B. EMT in sizes up to 4 inches when concealed or not exposed to damage and located indoors only. C. PVC coated rigid galvanized steel shall be used for all penetrations of slab on grade. D. Rigid galvanized steel where embedded in concrete or masonry construction, mechanical yard or in exterior/interior applications where subject to damage. E. Rigid aluminum shall be used in exterior applications. (i.e. roof, top of canopies) F. Carlon Schedule 40 PVC may be utilized underground, in or below slab where shown on the construction documents. G. MINIMUM SIZE: All homeruns shall be 3/4" minimum H. PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit shall be coated inside and outside. I. PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit shall be used at cooling towers, corrosive areas and pool pump rooms. J. Fixture whips: Refer to for additional information. K. Flexible metal shall be used for connecting rotating equipment installed in conditioned spaces. L. Sealtite shall be used for connecting rotating equipment installed in non-conditioned spaces and outside. M. Bear the stamped approval of the UL and be approved by the Architect and Engineer Branch circuits run underground shall be run in Carlon Schedule 40 PVC conduit. Install ground wire in accordance with NEC table FITTINGS A. Couplings for rigid steel or intermediate conduit shall be hot dipped galvanized steel. Set screw type is not acceptable. B. Steel or malleable iron fittings shall be used on all other raceway types except for PVC. C. EMT systems shall utilize steel insulated throat, set screw connectors and steel set screw couplings in all indoor conditioned spaces. EMT system shall utilize steel insulated throat, threadless, watertight compression type connectors and steel threadless watertight compression type coupling in all non- RACEWAYS

424 conditioned spaces. D. Coupling and connectors accessories and fittings for PVC coated rigid galvanized steel shall be PVC coated. E. Metal sealtite fittings shall be steel. Plastic is not acceptable. F. Provide nylon bushing on end of all low voltage cabling system conduits (sleeves, rough-ins, etc.). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUIT A. GENERAL The Drawings are diagrammatic, and are intended to show the general location of outlets, devices, fixtures, and arrangement and control of circuits. The Contractor shall determine exact locations by actual measurement of the building or by reference to the Architectural Drawings. B. Of such size, and so installed that conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive strain. C. Where entering panels, pull boxes, junction boxes, or outlet boxes, shall be secured in place with lock nuts inside and outside, and insulated bushings inside. D. Have Red seal type VCC or approved equal cable supports in risers, as required by N.E.C. E. Have ends reamed after cutting and application of die. F. Keep conduit corked and dry during construction, and swab out before conductors are pulled. G. Have bends and offsets made with approved tools. Bends or offsets in which the pipe is crushed or deformed shall not be installed. H. Where not embedded in concrete or masonry, be firmly secured by approved clamps, half-straps or hangers. I. Have O.Z. Gedney or approved equal expansion fittings where crossing building expansion joints. J. EXPANSION JOINTS: Make provision for expansion and shifting of metal or PVC conduits where risers occur from underground. K. Except in the mechanical equipment rooms, run conduit concealed, and by the shortest practicable route between outlets. Install risers, drops, and offsets necessary to avoid conflict with ductwork, piping, structural members, and similar items. L. Install exposed conduit in mechanical rooms, and elsewhere as indicated, parallel to horizontal and vertical lines of walls, ceilings, and floors. M. In general, fluorescent fixtures in finished areas having suspended acoustical ceilings shall be connected to outlet boxes of lighting grid by flexible metal conduit; length not to exceed ten feet. N. Outlet boxes in partitions shall never be set back to back. They shall be offset to prevent undue noise transmission from room to room. O. Concealed conduit shall run in as direct manner as possible using long bends. Exposed conduit shall be run parallel with or at right angles to the lines of the building; and all bends shall be made with standard conduit elbows or conduit benders. Not more than equivalent of four quarter bends shall be used in any run between terminals and cabinet, of between outlet or junction boxes. Approved condulets shall be used in lieu of conduit elbows where ease of installation and appearance warrants RACEWAYS

425 their use and approved by the engineer. Conduit joints shall be made with approved couplings and unions. P. Conduits shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and from outlets to cabinets, junction or pull boxes and shall be electrically continuous throughout. Terminals of all conduits shall be provided with double lock nuts and bushing or terminated on conduit hubs. Use of running threads is prohibited. Q. Each entire conduit system shall be installed complete before any conductors are drawn in. Every run of conduit shall be finished before covering up to guard against obstructions and omissions. R. Sleeves shall be placed in the forms of concrete, masonry and fire rated walls, floor slabs and beams, for the passage of conduits. Sleeves should be set in place a sufficient time ahead of the concrete work so as not to delay the work. Sleeves shall be rigid galvanized steel and set to extend 4 above slab. S. All pipe penetrations through walls and concrete floors shall be fire rated by applying USG Thermafiber in the space between the concrete and the pipe. The fire rating shall be additionally sealed by using 3M brand model CP 25 or 303 fire barrier caulk and putty. All fire rating material shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. T. All conduit shall be cleaned and swabbed to remove all foreign matter and moisture prior to pulling wire and cable. All boxes in which conduits terminate shall be cleaned of all concrete mortar and other foreign matter. U. Provide #30 nylon pulling line in all conduits in which permanent wiring is not installed. V. All conduit shall be securely fastened and supported using hot galvanized malleable iron one-hole pipe straps, clamps, hanger or other means approved by the engineer. Supports shall be as required by NEC Table (B)(2). Tie wire shall not be used as support or securing means. Support conduit independently of ceiling hanger wire. Use all thread rods to support outlet boxes, junction boxes and conduit. W. When PVC conduit is routed underground, all stub-up's and 90 elbows shall be PVC coated rigid galvanized steel. Use PVC coated rigid galvanized steel when penetrating concrete on grade. X. Route all conduit above grade unless otherwise noted on the construction documents. Y. Contact the Architect and Engineer for an installation review before covering any below grade or above grade conduit. Z. All new outlets shall be flush mounted. In remodeled areas where wall construction prohibits flush mounting, provide wiremold 2400 series. Verify exact location and routing with architect before installation. AA. Contractor shall not penetrate water proof barriers without using proper fitting to maintain barriers. This shall include exterior walls and slabs. Coordinate with Architect for proper methods FITTINGS A. Install approved expansion fitting in all conduit runs in excess of 150 feet or when crossing building expansion joints CONDUIT CORROSION PROTECTION A. Branch circuit conduits installed in concrete slabs on fill or grade shall be positioned in a manner to ensure complete concrete cover. In no case shall such conduits be exposed below or above the slab surfaces, or penetrate the waterproof membrane. B. At locations where metallic conduits pass through slabs on grade or transitions below grade, PVC RACEWAYS

426 coated rigid galvanized conduit shall be used OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Provide an approved galvanized outlet box with adequate volume for number of conductors installed. B. Provide standard galvanized switch boxes of the required number of gangs. Switch boxes where conduit is exposed shall be handy boxes or approved equal. C. Outlet boxes for receptacles shall be similar to Universal with suitable raised cover. Receptacle boxes where conduit is exposed shall be handy boxes or approved equal. D. Weatherproof boxes shall be FS or FD. Provide these boxes in all non-conditioned areas, exterior areas and natatoriums. E. Outdoor boxes shall be NEMA 3R, with conduit connections made by Myers Hubs. F. See notes and details on Drawings for special box requirements. G. Provide junction boxes required to facilitate installation of the various conduit systems. Provide support boxes required for risers, each complete with approved cable supports as described elsewhere in this Division. H. Outlet boxes for drywall shall be standard galvanized 4" square boxes with the appropriate device cover. I. Provide floor outlet fittings for telephone to match fittings for duplex floor receptacles. J. Provide 3-1/2 deep gangable masonry boxes in all masonry wall (CMU). Steel City GW-135-G or approved equal. K. Provide shallow 4 x4 boxes in all demountable partitions. L. Metallic boxes located in fire rated walls or partitions shall be separated by a minimum horizontal distance of 24 in. This minimum separation distance between metallic boxes may be reduced when Wall Opening Protective Materials (CLIV) are installed according to the requirements of their Classification. Metallic boxes shall not be installed on opposite side of walls or partitions of staggered stud construction unless Wall Opening Protective Materials are installed with the metallic boxes in accordance with Classification requirements for the protective materials THRU-WALL SEALS A. Provide O.Z. Gedney Thru-wall seals for all conduits passing through concrete structure below grade, above grade, and floor penetrations below grade. These prevent moisture from entering the building. B. Straight sleeves are not acceptable PULL BOXES A. Pull boxes shall be provided for conduit systems as required and shall be constructed of galvanized steel of not less than gauge and size specified by National Electrical Code. B. Where two or more feeders pass through a common pull box, they shall be tagged to indicate clearly their electrical characteristics, circuit number, and panel designation WIREWAYS A. Wireways shall be installed as indicated or required and locations shall be coordinated with architect. RACEWAYS

427 B. Wireways shall be made of not less than 16-gauge sheet steel for 4 inch and 6 inch square sizes and 14 gauge steel for 8 inch and 12 inch square sizes. Couplings end plates, and knockouts shall be furnished as required. Each section of wireways shall be rigidly supported. C. Wiring in wireways shall be neatly bundled, tied and suitably tagged. D. The finish shall be ANSI-49 gray epoxy paint applied by a cathodic electrodeposition paint process over a corrosion resistant phosphate preparation for NEMA 1 wireways. Provide galvanized steel for NEMA 3R wireways. NEMA 3R wireways and auxiliary gutters are for horizontal mounting only. END OF SECTION RACEWAYS

428 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE SECTION PANELBOARDS A. Provide panelboards as shown, scheduled and as specified herein. B. The types of panelboards include: 1. Lighting and appliance panelboards. 2. Power distribution panelboards STANDARDS A. Products shall be designed, manufactured, tested and installed in compliance with applicable standards. B. Products shall conform to all applicable UL standards and shall be UL-labeled ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide one of the following manufacturers: 1. General Electric Company 2. Square D Company 3. Siemens 4. Eaton 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Cutsheets of all enclosures, circuit breakers, fusible switches, bussing, rating, schedules and all accessories clearly labeled REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH: 1. National Electrical Code. 2. Local, municipal, or state codes that have jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. General Furnish and install power distribution, lighting and appliance panelboards as indicated in the panelboard schedule and as shown on the plans. Power distribution panelboards shall be equipped with fusible switches or circuit breakers as shown on the schedule. Panelboards shall be equipped with thermal-magnetic, molded case circuit breakers of frame and trip ratings as shown on the schedule. B. Busing Assembly and Temperature Rise PANELBOARDS

429 Panelboard bus structure and main lugs or main breaker shall have current ratings as shown on the panelboard schedule. Such ratings shall be established by heat rise tests with maximum hot spot temperature on any connector or bus bar not to exceed 50ºC. rise above 40ºC ambient. Heat rise test shall be conducted in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 67. The use of conductor dimensions will not be accepted in lieu of actual heat tests. All current carrying parts of the bus shall be tin or silver plated copper. 1. Bus structure shall be insulated. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breakers shall be distributed phase or phase sequence type and shall accept bolt-on circuit breakers for lighting and appliance panelboards. Provide a bare uninsulated and/or insulated ground bus and full size neutral bus as required and indicated in each panelboard enclosure. C. 240 Volt Lighting and Appliance Panelboard Main breakers shall be vertically mounted. Horizontally mounted main breakers are not acceptable. Circuit breakers shall be bolt-on thermal-magnetic, molded case circuit breakers. Breakers shall be 1, 2, or 3 pole with an integral crossbar to assure simultaneous opening of all poles in multiple circuit breakers. Breakers shall have an overcenter, trip-free, toggle-type operating mechanism with quickmake, quick-break action and positive handle indication. Handles shall have "ON", "OFF" and "TRIPPED" positions. Circuit breakers shall be UL listed in accordance with UL standard 489 and shall be rated 240 volts ac maximum with continuous current rating as noted on the plans. Branch circuit breakers feeding convenience outlets shall have sensitive instantaneous trip settings of not more than 10 times the trip settings of the breaker to prevent repeated arcing short resulting from frayed appliance cords. Single pole 15 and 20 ampere circuit breakers shall be UL listed as "Switching Breakers" at 120V ac and carry the SWD marking. UL Class A ground fault circuit protection shall be provided on all receptacle circuits serving wet areas and on all 120V ac branch circuits as specified on the plans or panelboard schedule. This protection shall be an integral part of the branch circuit breaker which also provides overload and short circuit protection for branch circuit wiring. Tripping of a branch circuit breaker containing ground fault circuit interruption shall not disturb the feeder circuit to the panelboard. A single pole circuit breaker with integral ground fault circuit interruption shall require no more panelboard branch circuit space than a conventional circuit breaker. Circuit breakers shall be rated 10,000 AIC at 240V unless otherwise noted on plans. Provide double sized neutral bus with panels served from a non-linear transformer or when indicated on drawings. This shall be a UL approved assembly. D. Cabinets and Fronts The panelboard bus assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet with multiple knockouts. The rigidity and gauge of steel to be as specified in UL Standard 50 for cabinets. Wiring gutter space shall be in accordance with UL Standard 67 for panelboards. The box shall be fabricated from galvanized steel or equivalent rust resistant steel. Provide stainless steel front cover for all panels located in all Arts, Kitchens and Life Skills rooms. All NEMA-1 lighting and receptacle panels shall have hinged front covers. The front cover shall have a door with hinges, latch and a lock. The hinged front covers shall allow full access to the circuit breaker gutter area without having to remove the entire front cover. All panelboard lock shall be keyed alike. Circuit breaker and fusible distribution panels shall have four-piece trims. A circuit directory frame and card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure where installed indoors unless otherwise noted. Provide NEMA 3R enclosure where installed outside or in a sprinkled area. PANELBOARDS

430 E. Safety Barrier The distribution panelboard interior assembly shall be dead front with panelboard front removed. Main lugs or main breakers shall have barriers on five sides. The barrier in front of the main lugs shall be hinged to a fixed part of the interior. The end of the bus structure opposite the mains shall have barriers. F. Integrated Equipment Short Circuit Rating Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater than the integrated equipment rating shown on the panelboard schedule or on the plans. This rating shall be established by testing with the over-current devices mounted in the panelboard. The short circuit tests on the over-current devices and on the panelboard structure shall be made simultaneously by connecting the fault to each over-current device with the panelboard connected to its rated voltage source. Method of testing shall be per Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 67. The source shall be capable of supplying the specified panelboard short circuit current or greater. Testing of panelboard over-current devices for short circuit rating only while individually mounted is not acceptable. Also, testing of the bus structure alone is not acceptable. Panelboards shall be marked with their maximum short circuit current rating at the supply voltage and shall be UL listed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install panelboards, including electrical connections, in accordance with manufacturers written instructions, NEC and recognized industry practices. B. Housekeeping Pads: Mount floor mounted panelboards on 4 inch high concrete housekeeping pads. C. Fuses: Install fuses of the rating and class as shown in each fusible distribution panel scheduled on drawings. D. Conduits: Stub up three one inch conduits to an accessible location above the ceiling for each recessed panelboard IDENTIFICATION A. Nameplate: Each panelboard shall have an engraved bakelite nameplate. Nameplates shall be white with black letters and show panel designation. Nameplates shall be attached with stainless steel screws. B. Directory Card: Place a neat, carefully typewritten directory card identifying the load served by each branch circuit in the frame on the panel door, under a clear plastic cover. Spares and spaces shall be written with erasable pencil for future use. C. Replacement Components: Where circuit breakers or fuses are applied in compliance with the series combination ratings marked on the equipment by the manufacturers, the equipment enclosure(s) shall be legibly marked in the field to indicate the equipment has been applied with a series combination rating. The marking shall be readily visible and state "caution - Series Rated System." (NEC ). Nameplate shall also identify replacement components. END OF SECTION PANELBOARDS

431 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE SECTION WIRING DEVICES A. Provide wiring devices as shown; scheduled, required and as specified. B. The types of wiring devices required include: 1. Receptacles 2. Switches 3. Coverplates 1.02 STANDARDS A. NEMA WD-1 B. NEMA WD-5 C. UL D. Federal Spec WC-596-F and WS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Leviton Manufacturing B. Hubbell C. Pass & Seymour 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings shall include but not limited to: 1. Cut sheets of all devices indicating NEMA configuration, rating, materials, color, and all accessories. 2. Cut sheets of all coverplates indicating materials, color and any engraving specified on drawing or in the specifications REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH: A. National Electrical Code. B. Local, municipal, or state codes that have jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. GENERAL 1. Provide factory assemble wiring devices with the rating type and color as required and specified for the service indicated. 2. Provide matching one-piece multiple gang plates where switches are ganged. Provide wall plates for each receptacle furnished. WIRING DEVICES

432 2.02 SWITCHES 3. Architect reserves the right to select wiring device styles and colors to match wall finish. 4. Wall plates shall be of same manufacturer as devices. A. Provide specification grade Ivory toggle switches where indicated on the Drawings. Provide "Red" switches for switching emergency lighting circuits where switching is indicated. Coordinate exact locations with architect. B. Wall switches shall be 20 amp, volt and shall be Leviton, Hubbell or P&S as follows: 1. SINGLE POLE SWITCHES: Leviton , Hubbell HBL 1221, P&S PS20AC1 2. DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES: Leviton , Hubbell HBL 1222, P&S PS20AC2 3. THREE WAY SWITCHES: Leviton , Hubbell HBL 1223, P&S PS20AC3 4. FOUR WAY SWITCHES: Leviton , Hubbell HBL 1224, P&S PS20AC4 5. MOMENTARY CONTACT SWITCHES: Leviton 1257, Hubbell HBL 1557, P&S THREE POSITION, TWO CIRCUIT MAINTAINED CONTACT SWITCHES: Leviton 1285, Hubbell HBL 1385, P&S KEY TYPE LOCKABLE CORBIN STYLE: Leviton KL with 2KL key or P&S PS20AC1-KL with 4609 key for each switch, Hubbel #HBL 1221-RKL. C. Dimmers: Provide Lutron Nova "T" series or Leviton or as shown on drawings. Wall box dimmers shall be sized to handle the load. Where fluorescent dimming ballasts are to be used, coordinate wall box dimmer with ballast manufacturer. D. Light Handle Switches: Provide Leviton L-LHC, Hubbell HBL1221-IL, P&S PS20AC1-ISL lighted handles to switch emergency lights were noted on the drawings RECEPTACLES A. Provide specification grade Ivory receptacles where indicated on the Drawings. Provide "Red" receptacles for receptacles on emergency power. Coordinate exact location with architect. B. Receptacles shall be Leviton, Hubbell or Pass & Seymour as follows: 1. Duplex 20A-125V-self grounding: (Nema configuration 5-20R): Leviton 5362, Hubbell HBL5362, P&S 5362A 2. Simplex 20A-125V-Self Grounding: (Nema configuration 5-20R): Leviton 5361, Hubbell HBL5361, P&S Isolated ground duplex, 20A-125V: (Orange, Nema configuration 5-20R) Leviton 5362IG, Hubbell IG5362, P&S IG Clock hanger receptacle 15A-125V: (Brown with stainless steel plate with hanger, Nema configuration 5-15R). Leviton 5361-CH, Hubbell 5235, P&S S3733-SS 5. Ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) receptacle 20A-125V; (Nema Configuration 5-20R, shall incorporate features which will lock-out or render the device incapable of being reset if ground fault protection is compromised, with "Feed through" connectors capable of protecting connected downstream receptacles on a single circuit, and of being installed in a 2-3/4" deep outlet box without adapter, Leviton 8899, P & S Tamper resistant receptacles 20A-125V (Nema configuration 5-20R): Leviton 8300-SG, Hubbell HBL8300SG, P&S TR63-H. 7. Surge Protection Duplex Receptacles 20A-125V, (Nema 5-20R) Hospital grade to include LED light and audible alarm: WIRING DEVICES

433 Leviton 8380, Hubbell HBL 8362SA, P&S 8300SP 8. Equipment receptacles shall be coordinated with owner/manufacturer requirements and the correct and appropriate receptacle and coverplate shall be installed Floor boxes shall be cast iron as manufactured by Hubbell or equal by Wiremold and as indicated below: A. Slab at grade (dual level, fully adjustable type 1). 1. Single gang: #B-2436 w/#sb-3083 carpet flange. 2. Two gang: #B-4233 w/#sb-3084 carpet flange. 3. Three gang: #B-4333 w/#sb-3085 carpet flange. B. Slab above grade (shallow, semi-adjustable, type II) 1. Single gang: #B-2414 w/#sb-3083 carpet flange. 2. Two gang: #B-4214 w/#sb-3084 carpet flange. 3. Three gang: #B-4314 w/#sb-3085 carpet flange. C. Cover plates shall have brass finish as follows: 1. #S-3825 for duplex flap for duplex receptacles. 2. #S-2425 for data/communications PVC floor boxes manufactured by Wiremold shall be as follows: A. Provide #881 dual service PVC floor box with divider and 897CTC cover PLATES A. Furnish and install plates on all outlet boxes. Oversize (Jumbo) plates are not acceptable. B. Plates shall be 302/304 smooth stainless steel. C. Provide Taymac Bell, Carlon or Leviton NEMA 3R weatherproof coverplates on all exterior wiring devices. Enclosure shall be suitable for wet locations when in use. D. Plates shall be Leviton, Pass & Seymour or Hubbell 302/304 smooth stainless steel on all receptacles 30 amps and larger Fire rated poke through devices shall be as follows: A. Flush fire rated poke through devices shall be Wiremold RC2001 Series (black) with pre-wired 20A, 125V duplex receptacle and (4) individual openings for telephone, signal or Category 5 data cables. B. Poke through devices with above floor service fittings shall be Wiremold RC700 Series with (1) 20A, 125V duplex receptacle and telephone data cover plate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WIRING DEVICE MOUNTING HEIGHTS A. Unless noted to the contrary on plans, or directed otherwise during the progress of the Work, wiring devices shall be set as follows: 1. Switches 42" above finished floor. 2. Wall mounted receptacles shall be installed vertically at 15 inches to the bottom outlet above finished floor unless otherwise noted or as required by local codes. 3. Wall telephone outlets shall be mounted 15 inches to the bottom above finished floor unless otherwise noted. Mount even with wall mounted receptacles. WIRING DEVICES

434 4. At locations above counters, set devices at 6 inches above to the centerline counter tops, verify exact mounting height with the architect INSTALLATION (Refer to for outlet box specifications.) A. Wall switches shall be set in a suitable steel box and shall be installed on the strike side of the door as finally hung, whether so indicated on the Drawings or not. B. Receptacles shall be installed in a suitable steel box. C. The Architect reserves the right to relocate wiring device up to a distance of 5 feet from the location shown, before rough-in, without additional cost. D. Provide multi-gang device covers at locations where devices gang together. E. Device locations are indicated schematically on the drawings along with the type and mounting height. Final locations and mounting heights shall be coordinated with the Architect on the jobsite, and with shop drawings of equipment; including equipment to be furnished and installed by the Owner. Devices installed in walls covered with vinyl, fabric wallpaper or other special finishes shall be coordinated and verified with the Architect on the job-site. F. Stranded wire termination to switches, receptacles, devices and miscellaneous control devices shall be with an approved solderless terminal if clamp type securing is not possible (i.e. Sta-Con crimp on fork tongue connectors; Burndy Type TP-F). G. Provide keyed switches in all common areas not monitored by the faculty (i.e. gym, corridors, cafeteria, commons natatoriums). END OF SECTION WIRING DEVICES

435 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE SECTION SAFETY AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Provide safety and disconnect switches as shown, scheduled and as specified herein STANDARDS A. Products shall be designed, manufactured, tested and installed in compliance with applicable standards. 1. NEMA KS1 - Enclosed switches 2. Federal specification W-S-865C-Heavy duty switches B. Products shall conform all applicable UL standards, including UL98 (standard for safety, enclosed and dead front switches) and shall be UL-labeled ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide one of the following manufacturers: 1. General Electric Company 2. Square D Company 3. Siemens 4. Eaton 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Cutsheets of switches with ratings, physical dimensions and all accessories clearly labeled REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH: 1. National Electrical Code. 2. Local, municipal, or state codes that have jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Furnish and install heavy duty type safety switches with the number of switched poles as indicated on the plans and specifications. All safety switches shall be NEMA Heavy Duty Type HD, and Underwriters Laboratories listed MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. Switch Interior All switches shall have switch blades that are fully visible in the "OFF" position when the door is open. Switches shall have removable arc suppressor where necessary, to permit easy access to line side lugs. Lugs shall be front removable and UL listed for 60ºC and 75ºC copper or aluminum cables. All switches blades and contacts shall be plated copper. Adjust fuse block to accept Class J fuses. B. Switch Mechanism Switches shall have a quick-make and quick-break operating handle and mechanism, which shall be SAFETY AND DISCONNECT SWITCH

436 an integral part of the box, not the cover. Padlocking provisions shall be provided for locking in the "OFF" position with at least three padlocks. Switches shall have a dual cover interlock to prevent unauthorized opening of the switch door when the handle is in the "ON" position, and to prevent closing of the switch mechanism with the door open. A means shall be provided to permit authorized personnel to release the interlock for inspection purposes. Handle position shall indicate if switch is "ON" or "OFF". C. Neutral Provide a solid neutral with the safety switch where a neutral is present in the circuit. D. Ratings Switches shall be horsepower rated for ac and/or dc as indicated by the plans. The fused switches shall have Class R rejection fuse clips or adjusted for Class J fuses. UL listed short circuit ratings of the switches, when equipped with Class R fuses, shall be 200,000 symmetrical amperes. E. Enclosures 1. Indoor switches shall be furnished in NEMA 1 enclosures. 2. Outdoor switches, switches located in wet areas or sprinkled areas shall be furnished in NEMA 3R enclosures. 3. Switches installed in wet areas such as cooling tower areas shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel or fiberglass reinforced polyester. 4. Switches installed in kitchens shall be stainless steel. 5. Switches installed in areas of a corrosive nature and subjected to salt air shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel or fiberglass reinforced polyester. F. Service Entrance Switch shall be suitable for use as service entrance equipment when installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install safety and disconnect switches, including electrical connections, and fuses in accordance with manufacturer s written instructions, NEC and recognized industry practices. B. Location: Install switches within sight of controllers. C. Hubs: Provide bolt-on hubs for rainproof or wet area applications IDENTIFICATION A. Nameplate: Each disconnect switch shall have an engraved bakelite nameplate. Nameplates shall be white with black letters and show equipment served. Nameplates shall be attached with stainless steel screws. END OF SECTION SAFETY AND DISCONNECT SWITCH

437 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE SECTION LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Furnish and install general and emergency lighting fixtures as noted on the drawings. Fixtures shall be completely wired with lamps installed and shall be in perfect operating condition at the time of substantial completion. B. The types of lighting fixtures required for this project include: 1. Fluorescent 2. Incandescent and 3. High-Intensity-Discharge (HID) 1.02 STANDARDS A. All fixtures shall conform to all applicable UL standards and shall be UL label including damp and wet location ratings. B. All fluorescent ballast shall comply with certified ballast manufacture (CBM) standard and CBM labeled. C. NFPA 101 D. ANSI C82.1 E. NEMA-LE F. IEEE Publication 587 Category "A" (Electronic Ballast) 1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide lighting fixtures produced by manufacturers as shown and scheduled. B. BALLAST: 1. Provide one of the following manufacturers a. Advance Transformer Company b. Universal Lighting Technologies c. Osram Sylvania C. LAMPS: 1. Provide one of the following manufacturers a. General Electric Company b. Osram Sylvania c. North American Philips 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings shall include a brochure with a separate cut sheet for each fixture type arranged in alphabetical order with fixture and all accessories/options clearly labeled. Provide performance data for each fixture. Provide an independent test lab report for each fixture if requested by the Architect/Engineer. B. Provide ballast and lamp data brochures indicating which lamp and ballast (if required) will be used in each fixture type. LIGHTING FIXTURES

438 C. Furnish air handling and heat removal data for light fixtures specified with these requirements REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH: 1. National Electrical Code. 2. Local, municipal, or state codes that have jurisdiction. 3. UL fire resistance directory. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. General: Provide the size, type and rating of each light fixture shown and scheduled. All light fixtures shall complete with reflectors, lens, trim rings, flanges, lamps, lamp holders, ballast, starters, fuses, wiring, earthquake clips, etc. to provide a complete functioning light fixture. B. Lighting Fixture Types: 1. Fluorescent Fixtures a. Fixture ballast and lamp holders shall be pre-wired and installed. Fixture shall be equipped with a top access plate with knockouts for conduit entry. Fixture shall also include knockouts at each end plate for conduit entry. b. Provide disconnect switch as required by the 2008 National Electrical Code. c. Fixtures shall be cold roll steel finished using a multistage iron phosphate pretreatment to ensure maximum bonding and rust inhibitor. Finish shall be a lighting grade, baked white enamel finish with a minimum reflectance of 85%. d. Door frame shall be heavy gauge flush white steel or aluminum and hinged from one side and use a positive spring action latch on the other side for latching. e. Any lamp shall be easily replaced without removing another lamp. f. Fixtures installed in continuous rows shall utilize nipples or other accessories such as snap together plug in connectors supplied by the fixture manufacturer. g. Provide battery ballast for emergency light fixtures. 2. Incandescent Fixtures a. Fixtures shall be pre-wired equipped with frame in kit and an integral thermal protection required by UL for recessed fixtures. b. Provide appropriate trim rings for recessed mounted fixtures compatible with the ceiling in which the fixture is installed. c. All lamps shall be inside frosted unless otherwise noted or scheduled. 3. High Intensity Discharge Fixtures (HID) a. Fixtures shall be pre-wired with frame-in kit and integral thermal protection required by UL for recessed fixtures. Ballast shall be encased and potted and mounted on the frame-in kit. b. Provide remote ballast mounted on a separate mounting plate where indicated or scheduled. Ballast shall include a splice box. c. Provide a heat resistant glass shield below the lamp to contain lamp glass envelope and ARC tube to prevent them from falling to the floor and causing damage to life and property. Lamp rated for open fixtures may be used in lieu of glass shield if approved by the engineer. d. Provide a fuse and fuse holder installed on the line side of each ballast to prevent branch circuit from tripping due to faulty ballast. The fuse and fuse holder shall be mounted in a junction box for recessed fixtures and in the base of all poles. The fuse holder shall be waterproof when installed in damp or wet locations. Fuse size and type shall be as recommended by ballast manufacturer. 4. Exit signs a. Exit signs shall meet all federal, state and local codes. b. Provide fire alarm interface relay when required to flash exit signs. c. Provide battery packs for emergency operation when specified. LIGHTING FIXTURES

439 2.02 BALLASTS - COORDINATE WITH LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE A. Fluorescent 1. High efficiency electronic ballast shall be high power factor (98% minimum), operate lamp at 40 KHz, less than 10% total harmonic content, NORMAL BALLAST FACTOR (.88), crest factor less than 1.7, parallel lamp configuration universal voltage, multi-lamp, class "P" thermally protected, sound "A" rating, encased and potted and 0ºF minimum starting temperature. Provide 5 year warranty parts and labor. Ballast shall be Osram Sylvania QHE series or approved equal by Universal Lighting Technologies or Advance Transformer Company. 2. All outdoor ballast unless otherwise noted shall be high power factor, rapid start, class P thermally protected, encased and potted, sound rating B and a 0ºF temperature rating. Ballast shall be CBM certified by an ETL and UL approved. 3. Provide suitable dimming ballast where indicated. 4. Compact fluorescent ballast shall be electronic, shall have circuitry designed to shut down the system reliably and safely when lamps have reached their end of life, high power factor, sound rating A and UL approved. Provide 5-year warranty, parts and labor LAMPS COORDINATE WITH LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE A. F032T8 fluorescent lamps shall be 24,000 hours 3,500ºK, 32 watt and low mercury. Life rating is based on 3 hours/start. B. All incandescent lamps shall be inside frosted, extended life rated for 2500 hours unless otherwise noted. 130 volt lamps may be used to provide extended life. C. All HID lamps shall be base up, base down, horizontal, or universal burn as indicated or specified. D. All compact fluorescent (T5 and smaller diameter) lamps shall be 3500ºK and 4-pin 2.04 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT BATTERY BALLAST A. Provide Bodine #B50 emergency battery ballast for emergency light fixtures using T8 or T12 lamps in 9 or 10 foot ceiling. B. Provide Bodine #B30 Emergency Ballast for emergency light fixtures using T8 lamps in ceiling heights greater than 12 feet. C. Provide Bodine #B84C emergency battery ballast for emergency light fixtures using compact fluorescent lamps. D. Provide unswitched hot leg. Hot leg shall originate from the same branch circuit as required in NEC article (F) SPARE LAMPS A. Provide 5% spare lamps, minimum of 3 of each type. B. Ship lamps to the Owner in original cartons (loose lamps are not acceptable). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATIONS A. General 1. Install the type of light fixture where shown and indicated in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Provide earthquake clips on all recessed lay-in light fixtures as required by building code. 3. Adjust all adjustable light fixtures, as directed by the Architect. LIGHTING FIXTURES

440 4. Provide safety chains and wire guards for light fixtures located in gymnasium, multi-purpose rooms, play areas, etc. B. Coordination 1. The contractor shall verify the type of fixtures with the ceiling types as indicated on the drawings. Any discrepancies shall immediately be brought to the architect's attention before the contractor places his order and accepts delivery. Fixtures shall fit exact in the type of ceiling scheduled. Provide plaster frames, trim rings and other accessories required for a correct fit. 2. Provide supports attached to structural member to support fixtures when the ceiling system cannot maintain support. Provide separate supports for all recessed ceiling mounted HID fixtures. 3. Refer to architectural reflected ceiling plan for the exact location of all light fixtures. Notify the architect for any discrepancies or conflicts with structural, architectural, mechanical piping or ductwork before installation. C. Mounting 1. Provide support channels to support outlet boxes used support surface mounted light fixtures such as exit signs or downlights. 2. Pendant or surface mounted fixture shall be provided with required mounting devices and accessories, including hickeys and stud-extensions, ball-aligners, canopies and stems. Locations of fixtures in mechanical areas shall be coordinated with mechanical contractor. Mounting stems of pendant fixtures shall be of the correct length to uniformly maintain the fixture heights shown on the drawings or established in the field. The allowable variation tolerance in mounting individual fixtures shall not exceed 1/4 inch and shall not vary more than 1/2 inch from the floor mounting height shown on the Drawings. Fixtures hung in continuous runs shall be installed absolutely level and in line with each other. Hanging devices shall comply with Code requirements. Fixtures shall employ single - not twin - stem hangers unless otherwise noted. 3. All structure mounted fixtures (i.e. bracket mounted, pipe mounted and surface mounted) shall be provided with cables of suitable size and weight to support the weight of the fixture. Cables shall be fastened around or fastened to the housing of the fixture. On pendant fixtures, one safety cable of suitable size and weight to support the weight of the fixture assembly shall connect the top of the pendant to the supporting structure by means of welding or bolting, and one safety cable shall connect the housing of the fixture to the bottom of the pendant. Where more than one pendant per fixture occurs, only one pendant must be cabled. Track fixtures for pendant mounted track shall also be supplied with clip-on safety cables of suitable size and weight to support the weight of the fixture. D. Electrical Connection 1. All light fixtures installed in an accessible suspended ceiling shall be connected from a branch circuit junction box using 1/2" flexible metal conduit or MC cable fixture pigtails not exceeding 8'- 0". All fixtures must be grounded by using a grounding conductor. Fixture to fixture wiring of fixtures installed in an accessible ceiling is not permitted. Fixture whips shall not lay-on ceiling tile or grid. Provide caddy clips to provide additional support. E. Fire Rated Ceiling 1. Provide fire rated canopy or enclosure for all fixtures recessed in a fire rated ceiling. The fire rated canopy or enclosure shall be as required by the UL design number listed in the UL fire resistance directory. Refer to architectural drawing for the UL design number. Coordinate with ceiling installer and manufacturer. F. Air Handling Fixtures 1. Install all air handling light fixtures with return air slot in the open position, if it is to be as an air handling fixture. Coordinate with mechanical contractor FINAL INSPECTION A. Remove all plastic and protective coating from all fixtures. Fixtures shall be thoroughly cleaned. Replace any damaged fixture or fixture parts including reflectors, louvers, lens and metal parts that show signs of corrosion. LIGHTING FIXTURES

441 B. All final incandescent lamps used during construction shall be replaced with new lamps. Replace all other defective ballast, lamps or discolored lamps, showing signs of excessive usage. C. Demonstrate proper operation of all fixtures and controls. END OF SECTION LIGHTING FIXTURES

442 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK SECTION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS WORK A. The entire drawing and specification package apply to the work specified in the telecommunications sections of the specifications, and shall be complied with in every respect. The Contract Documents are comprised of the drawings and specifications. The Contractor shall examine these Contract Documents, and coordinate required work indicated in each SCOPE OF WORK A. The work covered by the specifications includes furnishing materials, labor, transportation, tools, permits, fees, utilities, and incidentals necessary for the complete installation of work required in the Contract Drawings. B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to provide an extension of the existing installation, complete in every respect. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordination and proper relation of his work to the building structure and to the work of all trades. The Contractor shall visit the premises and thoroughly familiarize himself with the existing site conditions, details of the work and the working conditions, and verify dimensions in the field. The Contractor shall advise the Engineer of any discrepancy prior to bidding. The submission of bids shall be deemed evidence of the Contractor's site visit; coordination of existing conditions, and include consideration for existing conditions DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. The drawings and these specifications are complementary to each other, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by both. B. If variations or departures from the drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of such departures and the reasons therefore shall be submitted to the Engineer for review. No departures shall be made without prior written acceptance of the Engineer. C. Should the drawings or specifications disagree in themselves or with their counterpart, the better quality or greater quantity of work or materials shall be estimated upon, and unless otherwise directed by the Engineer in writing, shall be performed or furnished. In case the specifications should not fully agree with the Schedules, the latter shall govern. Figures indicated on drawings govern scale measurements and large scale details govern small scale drawings. D. Items specifically mentioned in the specifications but not shown on the drawings and/or items shown on the drawings but not specifically mentioned in the specifications shall be installed by the Contractor under the appropriate section of work as if they were both specified and shown CODES AND STANDARDS A. All work shall comply with the applicable articles of the National Electrical Code, the National Electrical Safety Code, the National Fire Codes (published by National Fire Protection Association), and City Codes and Ordinances, as well as any other authorities that may have lawful jurisdiction pertaining to the work specified. None of the terms or provisions of this specification shall be construed as waiving any of the rules, regulations, or requirements of these authorities. B. In any instance where these Specifications call for materials for construction of a better quality or larger size than required by the codes, the provisions of these Specifications shall take precedence. The codes shall govern in case of direct conflict between the Codes and the Drawings. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS WORK

443 1.05 UTILITIES A. The Contract Documents reflect the general location and routing for all telecommunications services known to exist on this project BUILDING CONSTRUCTION AND LAYOUT OF WORK A. General: It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to consult the Engineering Drawings and Details so as to thoroughly familiarize himself with the type and quality of construction to be provided on this project. B. The drawings are diagrammatic in nature and do not show every connection in detail or every line or conduit in its exact location. These details are subject to the requirements of all codes and ordinances as well as all structural and architectural conditions. The Contractor shall carefully investigate structural and finish conditions and shall coordinate the separate trades in order to avoid interference between the various phases of work. Work shall be laid out so that it will be concealed in furred chases unless specifically noted or indicated to be exposed. Work shall be installed to avoid crippling of structural members; therefore, inserts to accommodate conduit hangers shall be set before concrete is poured, and proper openings through floors, walls, beams, etc. shall be provided as hereinafter specified or as otherwise indicated or required before concrete is poured. All work shall be run parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building unless otherwise noted. C. The approximate location of equipment items is indicated on the drawings. Exact locations are to be determined by coordination of dimensions from approved equipment submittals and site-verified field measurements and will in all cases be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The Engineer reserves the right to make any reasonable changes in the indicated locations prior to installation for no additional cost. D. In areas of existing special ceiling construction the removal and restoration must be carefully planned such that the existing condition of the ceilings is maintained. It may be necessary for the Contractor to procure a Subcontractor familiar with this work to achieve this requirement. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS A. Materials, in general, shall conform to the National Electrical Code requirements and shall be listed, inspected, and approved by the Underwriters Laboratories and shall bear the UL label where labeling service is available. The label or listing of the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. will be accepted as evidence that the materials or equipment conform to the applicable standards of that agency. In lieu of this listing, the Contractor may submit a statement from a nationally recognized, adequately equipped testing agency, indicating that the items have been tested in accordance with required procedures, and that the materials and equipment comply with all Contract requirements STANDARD PRODUCTS A. Materials and equipment shall be the standard catalog products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of products conforming to these specifications, and shall essentially duplicate materials and equipment that have been in satisfactory use at least two (2) years prior to bid opening. Where custom or special items are required, these shall be fully described using drawings, material lists, etc., which fully describe in detail the item proposed for use on this project MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. The Contractor is responsible for furnishing the proper telecommunications equipment and/or material and for seeing it is installed as intended by the manufacturer. The Contractor shall, wherever necessary, request advice and supervisory assistance from equipment manufacturers as required for the proper installation, operation, or start-up. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of any conflict between the Contract Documents and the manufacturer's recommendations and shall obtain from the Engineer instructions/direction before proceeding with the work. The Contractor shall pay for all costs resulting from deficiencies created by installation not in accordance with the manufacturer's GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS WORK

444 recommendations or the instructions of the Engineer RUST PREVENTION A. Metallic materials shall be protected against corrosion. Exposed metallic parts of equipment exposed to the elements shall be given a rust inhibiting treatment and standard finish by the manufacturer. Components such as boxes, bodies, fittings, guards, and miscellaneous parts shall be protected in accordance with the ASTM A123 or A153, except where other equivalent protective treatment is specifically approved in writing STORAGE AT SITE A. The Contractor shall not receive material or equipment at the job site until ready for installation or until there is suitable space provided to properly protect equipment from rust, weather, humidity, dust, or physical damage CONDITION OF MATERIALS A. All materials required for the installation of the telecommunications systems shall be new and unused. Any material or equipment damaged in transit from the factory, during delivery to premises, while in storage on premises, while being erected and installed, or while being tested, until time of final acceptance, shall be replaced by this Contractor without extra cost to Owner NAMEPLATES A. Factory assembled components and equipment shall be provided with embossed nameplates, securely attached to the equipment with rivets or screws. Nameplates will have information required to specifically identify the equipment in the future such as the manufacturer's name, address, catalog number, serial number, etc. All data on nameplates shall be legible at the time of final inspection. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The specifications contain the names of manufacturers which are considered acceptable based on the quality of the product. B. Where acceptable manufacturers are listed, only products of those manufacturers may be provided. Additionally, the product must meet all the detailed requirements of the specifications. C. If no manufacturer s name is mentioned, the Contractor shall provide equipment and material which meet the specifications. D. The drawings represent the manufacturer s equipment scheduled. The listing of acceptable manufacturers in the specifications is not intended to imply that equipment of these other manufacturers will fit in the space provided or have the same electrical, structural or other requirements as the equipment scheduled. The Contractor must ensure that the equipment provided will meet all project requirements prior to submitting data on that equipment SPACE AND EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENT A. Equipment and components shall be installed in a manner to permit access to parts requiring service. Telecommunications equipment shall be installed in such a manner as to allow removal for service without disassembly of adjacent equipment. B. Large equipment or apparatus which is to be installed in the building, and which is too large to permit access through stairways, doorways, or shafts shall be brought to the job and placed in the space before the enclosing structure is completed. Following placement in the space, such apparatus shall be thoroughly protected from damage. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS WORK

445 C. Equipment shall have working clearances as required by applicable codes and standards SUBMITTAL AND REVIEW OF MATERIALS A. After the Contract is awarded, but prior to proceeding with the Work, the Contractor shall obtain, check, certify, and submit complete Shop Drawings and Brochures from Manufacturers, Suppliers, Vendors, etc., for all materials and equipment specified herein. Submit Shop Drawings and Brochures in sufficient time so as not to impede the progress of work. Three weeks will be required for the processing of Shop Drawings and Brochures in the Engineer s office, exclusive of transmittal time. This time shall be considered by the Contractor when scheduling submittal data. After the Contract is awarded, the Contractor will advise the Engineer in writing of the schedule for submission of shop drawings and product data and the persons authorized to sign submittal data on behalf of the Company. B. The Engineer s review of Shop Drawings and Brochures shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for dimensions, errors that may be contained therein, or deviations from Contract Document requirements. It shall be clearly understood that the Engineer s noting some errors but overlooking others does not grant the Contractor permission to proceed in error. Regardless of any information contained in the Shop Drawings, the requirements of the Contract Documents shall govern and are not waived or superseded in any way by the submittal data review. C. Before submission of Shop Drawings and Brochures, the Contractor shall certify that each Shop Drawing and each item of material or equipment complies with the Contract Documents for this Project. Such certification shall be made by the Owner, a Partner, a Corporate Officer of the Contractor, or by a person duly authorized to sign for the Contractor. Unless so certified, Shop Drawings and/or Brochures will be returned for resubmittal. Certifications shall be in the form of rubber stamp impressions or typed letter which states: I hereby certify that this Shop Drawing and/or brochure and the equipment and material shown on this Shop Drawing and/or Brochure complies in all aspects (except as noted*) with the requirements of the Contract Documents for this Project. I further certify that all data shown herein as to performance, dimensions, construction, materials, and other pertinent items are true and correct. Name of Contractor Signed Position Date *Refer to exception requirements herein. D. Each Shop Drawing shall indicate in the lower right hand corner and each Brochure shall indicate on the front cover the following: Title of the Sheet or Brochure; name and location of the building; names of the Engineer, Contractor, Manufacturer, Supplier, Vendor, etc., the date of submittal; and the date of each correction and revision. So far as is practical, each Shop Drawing and/or Brochure shall bear a crossreference note to the sheet number or numbers of the Contract Drawings and Specifications showing the same work. Shop Drawings and Brochures shall be prepared as follows: 1. Shop Drawings: Drawings shall be newly prepared and not reproduced from the Contract Documents, drawn to a scale that can be easily read and shall contain sufficient plans, elevations, sections, and isometrics to describe clearly the items in question. Drawings shall be prepared by a draftsman skilled in this type of work. All equipment layouts and similar Shop Drawings shall be drawn to at least 1/4-inch = 1'-0" scale. 2. All Shop Drawings shall indicate the equipment actually purchased. The elevation, location, support points, load imposed on the structure at support and anchor points, shall be indicated. All beam penetrations and slab penetrations shall be indicated and sized and shall be coordinated. All Design Drawing space allocations shall be maintained, such as ceiling height, chase walls, equipment room GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS WORK

446 size, etc., unless proper written authorization is required from the Engineer to change them. All associated equipment shall be coordinated and clearly shown on the Shop Drawings. 3. Brochures: Brochures submitted to the Engineer shall be published by the Manufacturers and shall contain complete and detailed engineering and dimensional information to show that the equipment will fit into the allotted space. 4. Brochures submitted shall contain only information which is relevant to the particular equipment or materials to be furnished. Do not submit catalogs that describe several different items other than those items to be used unless all irrelevant information is marked out or relevant information is clearly marked. E. The submittal format shall follow the Specifications format with a submittal required for each required section. The submittal shall be contained in a three-ring hard back binder. Copies of each submittal shall be three-hole punched and arranged (or folded if required) for the Engineer s filing convenience. Provide one copy of updated TABLE OF CONTENTS and progressive-tabbed index sheets also for the Engineer s filing convenience. F. Submittal data for each section must be complete. Partial submittals will not be reviewed. To the greatest extent possible all sections shall be submitted with the first submission. No more than three additional submissions will be allowed to complete the submittal package. G. Unless a greater number is indicated within Division One of these specifications, submit six (6) copies of all Brochures for review. Submit one (1) reproducible and one (1) blueprint of shop drawings for review. Comments will be made on the reproducible to facilitate copying. H. Any submittal that is disapproved must be resubmitted within two (2) weeks following notification of such disapproval. If no satisfactory material is submitted within the two-week period, the Engineer reserves the right to require the Contractor to furnish items exactly as described in the Contract Documents. I. No allowances will be made for submittals which are not made in a timely fashion or which are turned down because they do not meet the specifications. Should delivery problems arise due to the above, affecting the completion time of the project, the Contractor will furnish and install acceptable alternates until the proper materials arrive and then replace the alternate materials with the approved materials, all at no cost to the Owner. If the Contractor is not able to furnish an acceptable alternate until the proper materials arrive, he will assume all costs for furnishing and installing all alternates as directed by the Engineer and/or will pay a suitable penalty for the inconvenience experienced by the Owner. This penalty will be set by the Owner based on the particular circumstances SUPERVISION A. A competent certified foreman or superintendent, approved by the Engineer, shall be maintained at the project site to receive instructions and to act for the Contractor. Once this superintendent has been approved, no change shall be made without approval of the Owner or his authorized representative. The Owner and his authorized representative shall have the right to observe the work at any time. The Contractor shall have a representative present when his work is being observed, and he shall give assistance as required CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Where it is necessary to cut through walls, floors, or ceilings to permit installation of work under this section of the Contract, or to repair any defects that may appear, up to the expiration of guarantee period, such cutting shall be done under the supervision of the Engineer. The Contractor shall not be permitted to cut or modify any structural members without the written permission of the Engineer. B. Patching of all openings and repairing of any damage to the work of other trades occasioned by cutting operations, or occasioned by the failure of any part of work installed under this Contract, shall be performed by the trade whose work is involved, and shall be paid for by the Contractor. C. Openings cut through exterior walls or roofs shall be provided with suitable covers to protect the property or materials involved. Openings cut through walls below grade shall be properly protected to prevent GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS WORK

447 entrance of water or other foreign elements. Openings cut between fire zones or plenums shall be sealed to maintain the fire integrity of the wall or floor. Conduits and cable tray through plenum wall shall be sealed using materials complying with UL 1479, NEC , and NEC 800-3(C), and shall be UL classified HOISTING, SCAFFOLDING, AND TRANSPORTATION A. Provide hoisting and scaffolding facilities as required to set materials and equipment in place CLEANING A. The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulations of waste material or rubbish. Debris shall be removed from the site and from any street or alley adjacent to the site. B. At completion of the project, the Contractor shall remove all tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials. Contractor shall leave the area "broom clean". Before final acceptance, vacuum all panels, cabinets, racks and other equipment enclosures. Wipe clean all fixture lenses and reflectors, all panelboard and switchboard interior and exterior surfaces, being careful to remove all stray paint, construction materials, dust, and particles. Touch-up all marred surfaces to restore existing conditions to those provided by the manufacturer CONDUIT SLEEVES A. Where conduits pass through walls or floors not on fill, galvanized sheet metal sleeves shall be provided and shall be sealed to prevent air and noise transmission. In walls, they shall be flush with each finished surface. In pipe chases, they shall extend 1-1/2 inches above floor slab and be cemented in a water tight manner. Size of these sleeves shall be at least 1/2 inch greater than outside diameter of the conduit. B. For conduits passing through outside walls, provide and install galvanized steel sleeves having an inside diameter at least 4 inches greater than the outside diameter of contained conduit. Where these occur in walls having a waterproof coating applied, the sleeves shall have welded flanges to build into waterproofing. When conduits are installed, the annular space between pipe and sleeve shall be effectively sealed, using shredded lead hammered in place or an approved mastic sealer. C. Pipe and duct sleeves, pitch pockets, and flashings compatible with the roofing installation shall be provided for roof penetrations GROUNDING A. Ground buses shall be provided in each Telecommunications room by Division 16 Contractor unless noted on Contract Drawings. B. Telecommunications grounding system shall be a single point grounding from the building entrance electrical ground to each Telecommunications room. This Grounding system shall be provided by Division 16 Contractor unless notes on Contract Drawings. C. All Conduit systems, cabinets racks, cable trays, protector blocks, SCTP patch panels and/or miscellaneous equipment, etc. shall be grounded by being connected to the common telecommunications grounding system. The conductors shall be a # 6awg solid with a green jacket 3.10 RECEDENCE OF WORK 1. This Contract includes many different systems furnished and installed by different trades. All trades shall coordinate their work with that of all other trades so that it may be installed in the most direct and workmanlike manner without hindering or handicapping other trades. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS WORK

448 3.11 RECORD DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall keep a set of Drawings on the job, noting daily all changes made in these Drawings in connection with the final installation, including exact dimensioned locations of all new and uncovered existing active and inactive utilities outside the building, and shall turn over a clean, neatly marked set of mylar reproducible Drawings showing "as-installed" work to the Engineer for delivery to the Owner. All underground utilities, services, and systems shall be accurately located by the Contractor and dimensioned on the "as-installed" Drawings OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. The Contractor shall furnish indexed operating and maintenance manuals with complete technical data for each system, piece of equipment, and material installed under this Contract. B. Two (2) copies of the manual, bound in hardback binders or an approved equivalent, shall be provided. One copy shall be completed and delivered to the Engineer prior to the time that system and equipment tests are performed. The second copy shall be delivered prior to final acceptance. C. The manual shall include the following information 1. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Manufacturer's local representative and/or distributor's name and address. 3. Manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions. 4. Manufacturer's internal wiring diagrams. 5. Contractor's installation wiring diagrams. 6. Replacement part number listings and descriptions. 7. Framed operating instructions, when required, in individual Specification sections. 8. Warranties and guarantees. D. The manuals shall be identified on the cover as "Operating and Maintenance Manual" with additional cover display of the name and location of project, the Owner, the Engineers, the General Contractor, and the Subcontractors installing equipment represented in the brochure. E. The manual shall have a Table of Contents and shall be grouped in sections according to the sections of Division 27. Each section shall have a copy of the pages of the Specifications covered within the section. Sections shall be organized as follows: 1. Each section in the manual shall identify the grouping of all literature required for the system or equipment included. 2. The contents of each section shall be arranged in the following sequence: First, the approved engineering submittals with complete performance and technical data; second, the manufacturer's installation brochure; third, the manufacturer's operating and maintenance brochure; fourth, the manufacturer's installation wiring diagram; fifth, the Contractor's field wiring diagram, if different; and sixth, the manufacturer's brochure listing replacement part numbers and description. 3. Provide a final section entitled, "Warranties and Guarantees", for all equipment, etc EXISTING FACILITIES 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for loss or damage to the existing facilities and shall be responsible for repairing or replacing such loss or damage. The Contractor shall send proper notices and receive written permission from the Owner to enter existing areas. Before beginning work in existing areas, the Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and perform other services required for the care, protection, and in-service maintenance of all electrical, communication, plumbing, heating, air condition, and ventilating services for new and existing facilities. The Contractor shall erect temporary barricades with necessary safety devices to protect personnel from injury, removing all such temporary protection upon completion of the work. 2. The Contractor shall provide temporary or new services to existing facilities as required to maintain their proper operation when normal services are disrupted as a result of the work being accomplished under this project. 3. Where existing construction is removed to provide working and extension access to existing utilities, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS WORK

449 the Contractor shall remove doors, piping, conduit, outlet boxes, wiring, light fixtures, air condition ductwork, and equipment, etc. to provide this access and shall reinstall same upon completion of work. 4. Where partitions, walls, floors, or ceilings of existing construction are indicated to be removed, the Contractor shall remove and reinstall in locations approved by the Engineer all devices required for the operation of the electrical systems installed in the existing construction. This is to include, but is not limited to, temperature control system devices, electrical switches, relays, fixtures, piping, conduit, etc DEMOLITION AND RELOCATION 3.15 OUTAGES 1. The Contractor shall modify, remove, and relocate all materials and items so indicated on the drawings or required by the installation of new facilities. All removals and/or dismantling shall be conducted in a manner as to produce maximum salvage. Salvage materials shall remain as directed by the Owner. Materials and items scheduled for relocation and which are damaged during dismantling or reassembly operations shall be repaired and restored to the approval of the Owner. The Contractor may substitute new materials and items of like design and quality in lieu of materials and items to be relocated, if approved by the Owner. 2. All items scheduled for relocation and/or reuse shall be inspected by the Contractor and the Owner or his authorized representative. A written report of the condition of each item shall be made and provided to the Engineer. Where items scheduled for relocation and/or reuse are considered unsuitable for reuse, the Contractor shall so notify the Engineer and await reinstallation instructions before proceeding with removal. Items damaged in reinstallation shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor as directed by the Owner at not additional cost to the Owner or the Engineer. 3. All items which are to be relocated shall be carefully removed in reverse to original assembly or placement and protected until relocated. The Contractor shall clean, repair, and provide all new materials, fittings, and appurtenances required to complete the relocation and to restore the items to good operative order. All relocations shall be performed by workmen skilled in the work ad in accordance with standard practice of the trades involved. 4. Service lines and wiring to items to be removed, salvaged, or relocated shall be removed to points as indicated on the drawings, specified, or acceptable to the Owner. Service lines and wiring not scheduled for reuse shall be removed to the points at which reuse is to be continued or service is to remain. Such services shall be sealed, capped, or otherwise tied off or connections into the existing facilities in such a manner as to result in minimum interruption of services to adjacent occupied areas. Services to existing areas or facilities which must remain in operation during the construction period shall not be interrupted without prior specific written approval of the Engineer. 1. Outages of services as required by the project will be permitted, but only at a time approved by the Owner. The Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing two (2) weeks in advance of the requested outage in order to schedule required outages. No outages shall be taken unless written approval has first been received from the Owner. The time allowed for outages will not be during normal working hours unless otherwise approved by the Owner. All costs of outages, including overtime charges, shall be included in the Contract amount. END OF SECTION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS WORK

450 SECTION PART 1 GENERAL STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM 1.01 SUMMARY 1. This section identifies the technical design, specifications, and requirements for a Structured Cabling System. 2. The Communications Contractor shall familiarize himself and all of his employees assigned to this project with all the requirements of this section. 3. Contractors shall be Certified installers and authorized to provide all applicable certifications and warranties prior to submitting a proposal. 4. The Contractor shall provide a minimum 20-year system and application warranty on all parts and labor. (This section covered in detail under Warranty Section of this specification) 5. In the installation of this work, the Contractor shall comply in every way with the requirements of local and City laws, ordinances, and rules. The laws of the State of Texas, The National Board of Fire Underwriters, the National Electrical Code and the National Electrical Safety Code. If, in the opinion of the Contractor, there is anything in the plans or specifications that shall not strictly comply with the above laws, ordinances, and rules, the matter shall be referred in writing to the attention of DBR Engineering Consultants, Inc. for a decision before proceeding with that part of the work. No change in the plans or in the specifications shall be made without full consent in writing from DBR. 6. The Contractor shall ensure that all installation work areas are secure and made safe in accordance with Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) regulations. 7. The Contractor shall promptly correct all system defects for which the Contractor is responsible REFERENCED STANDARDS (EIA/TIA) 568A Electronic Industries Association/Telecommunications Industry Association Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standards. EIA/TIA-569-Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces. ANSI/TIA/EIA-570 Standard, Residential and Light Commercial Building Wiring Standard. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606 Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings. EIA/TIA-TSB67-Transmission Performance Specifications for Field Testing of Unshielded Twisted Pair Cabling Systems, October EIA/TIA-TSB72-Centralized Optical Fiber Cabling Guidelines, October EIA/TIA-TSB75-Additional Horizontal Cabling Practices for Open Offices. International Standards Organization/International Electrotechnical Commission (ISO/IEC) DIS 11801, January 6, Underwriters Laboratories (UL ) Cable Certification and Follow Up Program. Underwriter Laboratories (UL ) 1863 Communications Circuits Accessories National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM). National Electric Code (NEC). National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 802 Series. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) X3T9.5 Requirements for UTP at 100 Mbps. ANSI/TIA/EIA-607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications. ICEA S ICEA Standard for Fiber Optic Premise Distribution Cable. ICEA S ICEA Standard for Communications Wire and Cable for Wiring of Premises. FCC Part 15, Rules and Regulations: Radio Frequency Devices. FCC Part 76, Rules and Regulations: Cable Television Services. NCTA-02 (National Cable Television Association) 1989, 2nd Edition: Recommended Practices for Measurements on Cable Television Systems. STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM

451 1.03 GENERAL PRACTICE 1. The Contractor shall provide all materials, equipment and labor necessary for a complete Structured Cabling System. To include all screws, anchors, clamps, tie wraps, distribution rings, J-hooks, miscellaneous grounding and support hardware, etc., necessary to facilitate the proper installation and support of the Structural Cabling System. 2. The Contractor shall furnish any special installation equipment or tools necessary to complete the installation properly. This may include tools for terminating cables, testing and splicing equipment for copper/fiber cables, communication devices, jack stands for cable reels, or cable wrenches. 3. All work shall be done in a thorough and conscientious manner according to industry standards and shall be subject to inspection and acceptance. Work that is deemed sub-standard or not to industry standards shall be subject to replacement or repair at no additional cost to the Owner, General Contractor or DBR. 4. The Contractor shall accept the cable as good and assume all liability for the replacement of the cable should it be found defective at a later date. 5. The Contractor shall seal all conduit and sleeve penetrations where cable has been installed with intumescent re-enterable duct sealant or intumescent flame retardent putty. 6. Any pulling compound or lubricant used in cable installation shall not deteriorate the insulation or conductor(s). Pulling lubricants if used shall be of a type that is approved by the cable manufacturer. END OF SECTION STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM

452 SECTION PART 1 GENERAL COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT ROOM A. SUMMARY 1. Description of Work: This section describes the work in general to furnish and install hardware in a Communication Equipment Room. 2. Related Work: This section is Division 27 specification and as such will be taken as an integral part of other Division 27 sections, including Section General Requirements for Telecommunications Work. B. REFERENCE STANDARDS 1. Refer to Section Part 1.2 C. SUBMITTALS 1. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section Submit manufacturer s installation instructions. 3. Submit manufacturer s descriptive literature and maintenance and repair data. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS The products of the manufacturers listed below are of acceptable quality and may be substituted for the item scheduled, provided the substituted manufacturer s device complies with all physical and performance characteristics of the scheduled device. Performance characteristics are those scheduled on the drawings or listed in the scheduled manufacturer s literature for the device scheduled. Refer to specification Section for additional requirements. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Panduit 2. Substitutions: Items of same function and performance are acceptable in conformance with Section B. GENERAL MATERIALS 1. All indoor cabling installed shall comply with Article 800 of the (NEC) National Electrical Code for use as a plenum cable and have the appropriate (UL) Underwriters Laboratories Listed type markings i.g. (CMP). 2. All components and mounting hardware installed shall be (UL) Underwriters Laboratories Listed 1863 as communications circuit accessories. 3. Voice Connecting Blocks: The voice connecting blocks shall be category 5e (110) style blocks and shall be used for all indoor category 5e four (4) pair UTP cable and category 5e backbone cable on Panduit part number P110KB1004Y(or equivalent). PART 3 EXECUTION A. INSTALLATION 1. Contractor shall use Velcro tie wraps in all closets, cabinets, and rack locations. 2. Plywood Backboards: Plywood backboards shall be 3/4" AB quality or equivalent. a. Plywood shall be painted on front, back and sides with two coats of fire retardant paint. b. Plywood shall be secured to wall with minimum 1/4" fasteners (flat head type) every 30 on center along all four sides. END OF SECTION COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT ROOM

453 PART 1 - GENERAL SECTION BACKBONE CABLING REQUIREMENTS A. SUMMARY 1. Description of Work: This section describes the work in general to furnish and install backbone cable where indicated on the Contract Drawings. 2. Related Work: This section is Division 27 specification and as such will be taken as an integral part of other Division 27 sections, including Section General Requirements for Telecommunications Work. B. REFERENCE STANDARDS 1. Refer to Section Part 1.2 C. SUBMITTALS 1. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section Submit manufacturer s installation instructions. 3. Submit manufacturer s descriptive literature and maintenance and repair data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS The products of the manufacturers listed below are of acceptable quality and may not be substituted. Refer to specification Section for additional requirements. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Panduit 2. Wiremold 3. Siemon 4. Commscope 5. Comtran 6. Essex B. GENERAL MATERIALS 1. Voice Backbone Cable: The voice backbone cable shall be a category 3 UTP, 100ohm24awg, plenum 100 pair and meet or exceed all transmission characteristic set forth in ISO/IEC and ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A, (Comtran or equivalent). PART 3 - EXECUTION A. INSTALLATION 1. Indoor Copper Backbone Cable: The indoor copper backbone cable shall be a plenum rated UTP Category 3 cable, unless otherwise specified., a. The cable shall be installed in a physical star topology originating in the entrance facility or (MDF) main distribution frame location and extending to each (IDF) intermediate distribution frame location in a contiguous home run. Under no circumstances shall splices or cross connects be allowed except when a (CP) consolidation point is directly specified on the drawings. b. The cable shall be supported above the suspended ceiling in the same manner and with the same requirements as the horizontal station cables. They shall be supported with J-hoods every four to five feet, dressed, bundled and loosely tie wrapped in place. In no case shall any cable be attached to any conduit, pipe, ceiling grid support or associated clamps and brackets. The cable shall have a minimum of 12 inches of space in all directions from fluorescent lights and electrical conduits. c. The Contractor shall provide a ten foot service loop at each termination point for all copper backbone cables. The loop shall be located overhead of ladder racks or ceiling grid and shall be neatly bundled, dressed, Velcro tie wrapped and supported with J-Hooks or D- Rings. BACKBONE CABLING REQUIREMENTS

454 2. Category 3 Backbone Cable Terminations: Category 3 backbone cable termination shall comply with chapter through of the National Electrical Code utilizing 110 style protector modules. Each cable shall be terminated utilizing the standard ICEA Tip and Ring color code. a. Contractor shall maintain pair twists as close as possible to point of terminations. b. Contractor shall remove all excess gel from cables before any terminations are performed. c. Contractor shall install the appropriate quantity of C5 clips on all 110 blocks to facilitate cross connections. d. Contractor shall provide all grounding requirements per manufacturers guidelines and ANSI/TIA/EAI 607 standards. END OF SECTION BACKBONE CABLING REQUIREMENTS

455 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY SECTION HORIZONTAL CABLING REQUIREMENTS 1. Description of Work: This section describes the work in general to furnish and install a horizontal cable system where indicated on the Contract Drawings. 2. Related Work: This section is Division 27 specification and as such will be taken as an integral part of other Division 27 sections, including Section General Requirements for Telecommunications Work REFERENCE STANDARDS 1. Refer to Section Part SUBMITTALS 1. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section Submit manufacturer s installation instructions. 3. Submit manufacturer s descriptive literature and maintenance and repair data. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS The products of the manufacturers listed below are of acceptable quality and may not be substituted. Refer to specification Section for additional requirements. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Panduit 2. Commscope 3. Comtran 4. Belden 5. Essex 2.02 GENERAL MATERIALS 1. Category five (5e) Voice Cable: The category 5e voice cable shall be a four pair UTP 100ohm 24 awg solid conductor cable with white jacketing and meet or exceed all transmission characteristics specified in amendment TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 of TIA/EIA; Telecommunications Industry Association; Electronic Industry Association 568-B. Requirements are specified to frequency limit of 350MHz. (Panduit part number PUP5504WH-U). 2. Voice Outlet Connector: The voice outlet connector shall be Panduit, White with a T568B wiring scheme, (part number CJ66UWH). 3. Telecommunications Faceplates: The telecommunications faceplate shall be a sing-gang, Panduit, white, faceplate, (Part number CFP1WH ). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION 1. Performance specifications for cable and connecting hardware are based on proper installation practices. If recommended cabling precautions and installation methods are not followed, cabling components shall not perform to specifications. These performance deficiencies may be apparent on initial installation or may show up through reduced performance over time. Therefore it is imperative that the Contractor pay strict attention to all cabling guidelines and methods outlined in this section. HORIZONTAL CABLING REQUIREMENTS

456 2. Physical Topology: The horizontal cabling shall be installed in a star topology with each four pair cable extending from a telecommunications outlet location to a telecommunications closet. Under no circumstances shall splices or bridged taps be permitted. 3. Bend Radius: The Contractor shall ensure that horizontal cable bend radii are no less than four times the cable diameter for copper cabling and ten times the diameter for Fiber Optic Cabling. 4. Maximum Pull Force: The maximum pull force guideline for four-pair horizontal UTP cables is 25 pounds. 5. Horizontal Cable Spans: The Contractor shall support all cables installed every four to five feet with J-hooks. The cables shall then be secured to the J-hooks using tie-wraps. 6. Cable Stress: The Contractor shall avoid tightly cinched cable bundles, twisting or knotting of cable and jacket deformation during installation. 7. Cable Length: All horizontal cables regardless of media type shall not exceed 295 feet from the telecommunications outlet in the work area to the telecommunications closet. The combined length of jumpers or patch cords and equipment cables in the telecommunications closet and the work area shall not exceed 33 feet. 8. Cable Routing and Pathway: 1. Horizontal Cable: a. The horizontal cable shall be routed down the left or right side of hallways and placed in J-hooks that are structurally independent of the suspended ceiling, its framework, or supports. b. J-hooks shall be installed every four to five feet with at least 3 inches of clear vertical space above the ceiling tiles and support channels. c. A separate J-hook shall be provided for each cable type (data, voice and video). d. Contractor shall ensure that no J-hook is shared by two or more cables providing different services. e. The horizontal cable shall enter and exit hallways at 90 degree angles and continue to be supported by J-hooks every four to five feet throughout the horizontal run. 2. Locate telecommunications pathways and spaces away from sources of electromagnetic interference such as fluorescent lights, electrical power wiring and transformers, radio frequency (RF) sources and transmitters, large motors and generators, induction heaters arc welders, X-ray equipment and copiers. 3. Maintain a minimum clearance of 24 inches between electrical power cables and telecommunications cables and cross over at 90 degree angle, whenever possible. 4. Avoid running telecommunications cables parallel to electrical power conduits whenever possible. 5. Maintain a minimum separation of 10 feet from electrical power lines and/or distribution panels that carry voltages of greater than 480Vrms. 6. The horizontal cable shall not exceed a 40 percent fill capacity for any one conduit, cable tray, J-hook or any other support device present in the structured cabling system. 9. Cable Dressing: Telecommunications cabling shall be dressed and neatly bundled and tiewraps installed loosely around cable bundles. In no case shall any cable be attached to any conduit, pipe or associated supporting clamp or bracket CABLE TERMINATIONS 1. Category 5e Voice Terminations: Category 5e terminations shall comply with all TIA/EIA-568-B standards utilizing a T568B wiring configuration. Each category 5e cable shall be terminated at the outlet location on a Panduit RJ11 connector and at the equipment cabinet location on a category 5e 110 block. a. Contractor shall maintain pair twists as close as possible to the point of termination, not to exceed 0.5 inches. b. Contractor shall strip back only as much jacket as is required to terminate individual pairs. c. Contractor shall provide one foot of slack on every category five cable at the Telecommunications outlet location. d. Contractor shall use Velcro tie wraps in all closets, cabinets, and rack locations. END OF SECTION HORIZONTAL CABLING REQUIREMENTS

457 SECTION PART 1 GENERAL TESTING, IDENTIFICATION AND ADMINISTRATION 1.01 SUMMARY 1. Description of Work: This section describes the work in general to furnish testing, identification, and administration documentation. 2. Related Work: This section is Division 27 specification and as such will be taken as an integral part of other Division 27 sections, including Section General Requirements for Telecommunications Work REFERENCE STANDARDS 1. Refer to Section Part SUBMITTALS 1. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section Submit manufacturer s installation instructions. 3. Submit manufacturer s descriptive literature and maintenance and repair data. PART 2 - LABELING AND DOCUMENTATION 2.01 LABELING REQUIREMENTS 1. An effective labeling system is crucial to the efficient operation and maintenance of a structured cabling system therefore, it is the Contractor s responsibility to label all cables, telecommunications outlets, CATV/video outlets, patch panels, 110 punchdown blocks, fiber optic cable enclosures communications cabinets, racks and closets, with a permanent machine driven label system. 2. Voice Copper Four Pair Cables: Cables shall be labeled a maximum of 12 inches from end of cable. At the outlet end, the cable shall be labeled with the telecom room number, patch panel number and corresponding port number. At the telecom room end, the cable shall be labeled with room number and outlet number it serves. 3. Copper Tie Cables: Cables shall be labeled a maximum of 12 inches from end of cable with the telecom room destination Punch Down Blocks: The 110 punch down blocks shall be labeled on the manufacturer s provided label strips with the circuit identification number in sequential order. PART 3 - TESTING AND CERTIFICATION 3.01 CATEGORY 5e CABLES 1. The Contractor shall perform a basic link acceptance test on 100% of all Category 5e cables with a ANSI/TIA/EIA-TSB67, UL Certified Level 2E test set with the nominal velocity of propagation (NVP) properly set for the type of cable being tested and no more than (2m) 6.5 feet of field test cords on each end. 2. The Contractor shall use the autotest feature on the test set with the following performance tests selected as defined in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A-5 and TSB Wire map. 2. Length. 3. Next loss (pair-to-pair) and (power sum). 4. ELFEXT loss (pair-to-pair) and (power sum). 5. Return loss. 6. Propagation delay. 7. Attenuation. 8. Delay skew. TESTING, IDENTIFICATION, AND ADMINISTRATION

458 3. A field tester that report a PASS result for each of the parameters listed in the previous slides shall be saved and submitted for warranty. 4. A field tester that reports a PASS*, FAIL result for any of the parameters listed in the previous slides, shall not be saved into the tester and shall not be submitted for warranty. PART 4 DOCUMENTATION 4.01 DOCUMENTATION 1. The Contractor shall, during the course of the installation, maintain and update a full set of record drawings. These drawings shall indicate all cable pathways and distribution components, (i.e., telecommunications closets, equipment closets, cabinets, racks, punch down blocks, consolidation points, outlets, taps), and any other active or passive device installed by the Contractor. 2. The Contractor shall obtain a full set of record drawings in electronic format either by or CD Rom, on which the Contractor will transfer all installation components mentioned above and supply the School District with the updated CD Rom. The Contractor will not be given a final completion until this CD Rom is turned over to Architect. 3. Test results, horizontal cable records, backbone cable records, connecting hardware records and connecting hardware position records will be provided by the Contractor in CD Rom format prior to final completion. END OF SECTION TESTING, IDENTIFICATION, AND ADMINISTRATION

459 SECTION PART 1 GENERAL CUTOVER AND TRAINING 1.01 SUMMARY A. Description of Work: This section describes the work in general for cutover and training. B. Related Work: This section is Division 27 specification and as such will be taken as an integral part of other Division 27 sections, including Section General Requirements for Telecommunications Work REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Refer to Section Part 1.2 PART 2 OUTAGES A. Outages of services as required by the project will be permitted, but only at a time approved by the Owner. The Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing (2) two weeks in advance of the requested outage in order to schedule required outage. No outages shall be taken unless written approval has first been received from the Owner. The time allowed for outages will not be during normal working hours unless otherwise approved by the Owner. All costs of outages, including overtime charges, shall be included in the Contract amount. PART 3 TRAINING A. No Training Required. END OF SECTION CUTOVER AND TRAINING

460 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY SECTION SUPPORT AND WARRANTY 1. Description of Work: This section describes the warranty that shall be provided upon completion of this project. 2. Related Work: This section is Division 27 specification and as such will be taken as an integral part of other Division 27 sections, including Section General Requirements for Telecommunications Work. PART 7 WARRANTY 7.01 WARRANTY 1. This will be a 1-year Cat. 5e System Link performance assurance and product warranty for telecommunications cabling systems issued by the Panduit Company. 2. As an authorized Panduit installer it is the Contractor s responsibility to install all cabling and hardware associated with the structured cabling system in accordance with the manufacturer s guidelines. It is also the Contractor s responsibility to provide all documentation and test results in a timely and professional manner to facilitate the warranty process. 3. The Contractor will provide, in addition to the Panduit Company warranty, a workmanship warranty issued for a period of at least 1 year from the awarded Contract. END OF SECTION SUPPORT AND WARRANTY

461 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Trim existing trees to remain. SECTION LANDSCAPE PROTECTION B. Install landscape protection and institute landscape protection program. C. RELATED SECTIONS 1. Section Landscaping: Requirements for landscape installation. D. QUALITY CONTROL 1. Engage and pay for the services of an Arborist acceptable to the Architect to : a. Survey the condition of existing trees and other landscape materials at the site indicated to remain. Before mobilization at the site, document condition of landscape materials with photographs which include readily identifiable objects which indicate the size of the landscape materials in height and width of canopy. b. Inspect landscape protection barriers before commencement of demolition and excavation activities. c. Observe excavation in the vicinity of existing trees from commencement until conclusion. Direct excavation which occurs near major root systems. Direct relocation of roots, and installation of temporary tree vent systems as required to ensure vigor and good health of trees. Prescribe additional measures or protection required to provide optimal growth conditions at the construction site. d. Periodically inspect the construction site for possibly dangerous or damaging practices occurring or developing at the site. Inform Contractor of such conditions and develop plan to repair damage that has occurred and prevent further damage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Tree wound paint: TREEHEAL manufactured by FlintKote. B. Tree Armor: 1. Wood: SPFA utility grade, 2 x Wire: Annealed steel wire, 16 gage minimum. 3. Fencing a. Fencing Fabric: 4'-0" high international orange colored polypropylene netting of pattern acceptable to Architect. b. Fence Posts: Hot rolled steel channel posts, 2 lbs. per linear foot; baked enamel finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 LANDSCAPE MATERIAL PROTECTION A. Erect fencing and armor protection prior to beginning any clearing, demolition or construction activity, and unless otherwise instructed, maintain in place until construction is completed. B. Protect tree trunk with tree armor to a height of 8' or to the limits of lower branching (when exposed to construction activity within the drip line) with 2 x 4's butted side to side completely around trunk. Wire wrap, do not nail, around trees. C. Remove landscape protection barricade at commencement of finish grading. Remove tree armor immediately prior to Substantial Completion. D. Prohibit earth stockpiling, material storage, vehicle parking and traffic within drip line of trees. E. Prohibit dumping of refuse, chemicals, other materials, and puddling or running water which may injure plant growth including root systems. LANDSCAPE PROTECTION

462 F. Prohibit unnecessary cutting, breaking, and skinning of branches and roots. G. Prohibit skinning and bruising of bark. H. Prohibit fires, high heat, and smoke adjacent to landscape materials. I. EXCAVATION AROUND TREES 1. Excavate within dripline to trees only where required and when absolutely necessary. Any excavation within the dripline of trees shall be under the direction of the Arborist. Arborist shall be at the site at all times while excavation is occurring within the dripline. 2. Where excavating for new construction is required within dripline of trees, hand excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow tine spading forks and comb soil to expose roots. Relocate roots back into backfill areas wherever possible. If large main lateral roots are encountered, expose beyond excavation limits as required to bend and relocate without breaking. 3. If root relocation is not practical, clean cut roots using sharp ax approximately 3 inches back from new construction. 4. Where existing grade is above new finish grade, carefully excavate within the dripline to the new finish grade. Carefully hand excavate an additional 8" below the finish grade. Use narrow tine spading forks to comb the soil to expose the roots, and prune the exposed root structure as recommended by the Arborist. Keep the exposed roots damp. Treat the cut roots as specified and as recommended by the Arborist. After pruning and treatment of the root structure is complete, backfill to finish grade with 8" of approved plant mix. 5. Temporarily support and protect roots against damage until permanently relocated and covered with recommended landscape material. J. PRUNING 1. Except where indicated to be removed, trim and protect existing trees against damage. All pruning is to done under the direct supervision of the Arborist. 2. Prune back all damaged and dead tree branches, branches required to provide access to the Work and exposed roots. Cleanly cut all ragged wounds. Prune live oak and red oak trees during the months of July and August only. 3. Where roots have been severely cut or lost prune corresponding tree branches to compensate. 4. Cut branches and roots with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop. 5. Paint cuts over 1/2 inch in size with tree wound paint. K. REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT OF LANDSCAPE MATERIALS 1. Repair or replace landscape materials damaged or destroyed by construction operations. 2. Make repairs promptly after damage occurs to prevent progressive deterioration. 3. Remove and replace dead and damaged landscape materials which are determined by Architect to be incapable of restoration to normal growth pattern. 4. Replace landscape materials so damaged in the opinion of the Architect that the character of the existing material has been lost. Replace with landscape materials of the same species of equal or greater size and character at no additional cost to Owner regardless of expense to the Contractor. Architect shall be the sole judge of the quality and acceptability of replacement material. 5. Replacement material shall be guaranteed for 24 full months from time of replacement. END OF SECTION LANDSCAPE PROTECTION

463 Villa Tranchese Renovations OWNER LOGO OWNER GROUP San Antonio Housing Authority 818 South Flores San Antonio, TX voice: TTY: Board of Commisioners Lourdes M. Castro Ramirez Ramiro Cavazos Brian Herman, PhD Rebecca Galvan Richard Gambitta, PhD Yolanda Hotman Stella Burciaga Molina PROJECT TEAM Architect OCO Architects, Inc. 114 E. Cevallos San Antonio, TX voice: fax: Structural Alpha Building Corporation 436 Breesport San Antonio, TX voice: fax: Mechanical/Electrical/Plumbing DBR Engineering Consultants 8626 Tesoro Drive, Suite 702 San Antonio, TX voice: fax: Chief Executive Officer Chairman Vice-Chair Commisioner Commisioner Commisioner Commisioner PROJECT SUMMARY: SQUARE FOOTAGE Area of Renovations to Ground Floor: 9,047 SQ.FT. San Antonio Housing Authority 307 Marshall Street, San Antonio, TX Construction Documents Set 06/18/10 CODE INFORMATION: OCCUPANCY TYPE: TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION: AUTOMATIC SPRINKLED: Residential - R2 II b No 2009 International Building Code with local amendments 2009 International Residential Code with local amendments 2009 International Existing Building Code with local amendments 2009 International Mechanical Code with local amendments 2009 International Plumbing Code with local amendments 2009 International Fuel Gas Code with local amendments 2009 International Fire Code with local amendments 2009 International Energy Conservation Code with local amendments 2008 National Electric Code with local amendments INDEX OF DRAWINGS Sheet A-0.0 A-0.1 A-0.2 A-0.3 A-1.0 A-2.0 A-2.1A A-2.1B A-2.1C A-2.1D A-6.0 A-6.1 A-7.0 A-7.1 A-7.2 A-8.0 A-9.0 E-0.0 E-1.1 E-2.1 E-3.1 E-4.1 M-0.0 M-1.1 M-2.1 M-3.1 P-0.0 P-2.1 S-1.0 S-2.0 S-2.1 S-3.0 S-4.0 T-1.1 Drawing List Sheet Name COVER SHEET ADA ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS ADA ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS CODE PLAN, WALL TYPES, ABBREVIATIONS & SYMBOLS DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN GROUND FLOOR PLAN ENLARGED LOBBY FLOOR PLANS ENLARGED COMMUNITY AREAS ENLARGED SOUTH ENTRANCE CANOPY ENLARGED NORTH ENTRANCE CANOPY DOOR & ROOM FINISH SCHEDULES, MILLWORK DETAILS WINDOW SCHEDULE & DETAILS INTERIOR ELEVATIONS INTERIOR ELEVATIONS INTERIOR ELEVATIONS REFLECTED CEILING PLAN & DETAILS FURNITURE & FINISH PLAN ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS & ABBREVIATIONS ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLAN LIGHTING PLAN POWER PLAN ONE-LINE DIAGRAM MECHANICAL SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS MECHANICAL DEMOLITION PLAN MECHANICAL NEW WORK PLAN MECHANICAL SCHEDULES AND DETAILS PLUMBING SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS AND SCHEDULES PLUMBING PLAN STRUCTURAL AND SPECIAL INSPECTION NOTES FOUNDATION FRAMING PLAN ROOF FRAMING PLAN SECTIONS AND DETAILS STEEL SECTIONS AND DETAILS TECHNOLOGY FLOOR PLAN 1001 Villa Tranchese Renovations SITE VICINITY MAP SITE LOCATION MAP LIST OF ALTERNATES Alternative No. 1 - DEDUCT - Plastic laminate countertops on 3/4" plywood, in lieu of Solid Surfacing Material (Corian, Price Group 3), at HOA 111 and Kitchen 114. Alternative No. 2 - DEDUCT - VCT in lieu of Resilient Vinyl flooring, designated RV. Alternative No. 3 - DEDUCT - Delete refinishing of Terazzo flooring.

464 36" MIN. CLEAR. 2'-0". 60" MIN. 4.3 ACCESSIBLE ROUTE TAS SECTIONS LOCATION A. At least one accessible routeshall be provided from public transportation stops, accessible parking and loading zones, and public streets or sidewalks to the accessible building entrance. TAS SECTIONS PASSING SPACE A. If an accessible route is less than 60" in width, then passing spacesof at least 60" x 60" shall be provided at 200' max. spacing. TAS SECTIONS SLOPE A. Running slope shall not exceed 1:20 (If slope exceed 1:20, refer to section 4.8). B. Cross slope shall not exceed 1: PROTRUDING OBJECTS (REF: DET. 5.2 & 5.3) TAS SECTIONS GENERAL A. Objects projecting from walls (for example, telephones) with their leading edges between 27"-80" above the finished floor shall protrude no more than 4" into walks, halls, corridors, passageways, or aisles. Objects mounted with their leading edges at or below 27" above finished floor may protrude any amount. Free-standing objects mounted on posts or pylons may overhang 12" maximum from 27"-80" above the ground or finished floor. Protruding objects shall not reduce the clear width of an accessible route or maneuvering space. 4.5 GROUND AND FLOOR SURFACES (REF: DET. 5.1) TAS SECTIONS CHANGES IN LEVEL A. changes in level up to 1/4" may be vertical and without edge treatment. B. Changes in level between 1/4" and 1/2" shall be beveled with a slope no greater than 1:2. TAS SECTIONS GRATINGS A. If Gratings are located in walking surface or along accessible routes, then they shall have spaces no greater than 1/2" wide in one direction. B. If gratings have elongated openings, then they shall be placed so that the long dimension is perpendicular to the dominant direction of travel. 80" MIN. 1/4" MAX. STAIRS 4" MAX 27" MAX. DET /4" -1/2" CLEAR WIDTH DET. 5.2 DET PARKING AND PASSENGER LOADING ZONES TAS SECTIONS PARKING SPACES Surface slope shall not exceed 1:50 in all directions. HS POST SIGN SIDEWALK 5'-0" TYPICAL 1 2 8'-0" TYPICAL 8'-0" AT VAN (ONE REQUIRED) SEE SITE PLAN FOR LOCATION TAS SECTIONS SIGNAGE A. Characters and symbols on such signs shall be located 60" minimum above ground. B. Signage located within an accessible route shall be located 80" min. above the walking surface. TAS SECTIONS PASSENGER LOADING ZONE A. Passagener loading zones shall provide an access aisle at least 60" wide and 20 ft long adjacent and parallel to the vehicle pull-up space. If there are curbs between the access aisle and the vehicle pull-up space, then a curb ramp complying with 4.7 shall be provided. Vehicle standing spaces and access aisles shall be level with surface slopes not exceeding 1:50 in all directions. 240" MIN. AUTO ACCESS AISLE AT AUTOMOBILE PASSENGER LOADING ZONES 156" MIN. ANY AMOUNT 27" MAX. FACE OF CURB OR SIDEWALK OR PAINT STRIPE PAVING FLUSH WITH SIDEWALK OR PROVIDE CURB RAMP 6'-0" LONG CONCRETE WHEELSTOP (ONLY WHEN PAVEMENT IS FLUSH WITH WALK) STANDARD HANDICAPPED SYMBOL 4" PAINTED LINES TYPICAL 288" MIN. 36" MIN. AUTO DISABLED SIGN 36" MIN. TABLE 2 TOTAL PARKING IN LOT 1 to to to to to to 200 If X is less than 48" then the slope of the flared sides shall not exceed 1:12 Detectable warnings on walking surfaces. Detectable warnings shall consist of raised truncated domes with a diameter of nominal 0.9 in (23mm), a height of nominal 0.2 in (5 mm) and a center-to-center spacing of nominal 2.35 in (60 mm) and shall contrast visually with adjoining surfaces, either light-ondark, or dark-on-light. Armor-Tile or equivilant. Install with 4" border. 4" REQ. MIN. NUMBER OF ACCESSIBLE SPACES TOTAL PARKING IN LOT 4.7 CURB RAMPS (REF: DET. 3.1) TAS SECTIONS DIAGONAL CURB RAMPS A. If diagonal curb ramps have returned curbs or other wheel edges, such edges shall be parallel to the direction of pedestrian flow. The bottom edge of diagonal curb ramps shall have a 48" minimum clear space. If diagonal curb ramps are provided at marked crossings, the 48" clear space shall be within the markings. If diagonal curb ramps have flared sides, they shall also have at least a 24" long segment of straight curb located on each side of the curb ramp and within the marked crossing. TAS SECTIONS ISLANDS A. Any raised islands in crossings shall be cut through level with the street or curb ramps at both ends and a level area at least 48" long between the curb ramp in the part of the island intersected by the crossing. 4" RAMPS X 4" 4" 36" MIN. 4" 4" 1 10 Ramps shall have detectable warnings and shall have a light reflective value that significantly contracts with the adjoining pedestrian routes. 4" 4" 60" MIN. 12 MAX. 4" Adjoining slope shall not exceed 1:20 Flared side Detail 3.1 4" Detail 3.2 4" SLOPE MAXIMUM RISE 1:12 TO <1:16 30" 1:16 TO <1:20 30" CROSS SLOPE SHALL NOTE EXVEED 1:50 TAS SECTIONS SLOPE AND RISE A. The least possible slope shall be used for any ramp. The maximum slope of a ramp in new construction shall be 1:12. The maximum rise for any run shall be 30". TAS SECTIONS CLEAR WIDTH A. The minimum clear width of a ramp 30 ft or less in length shall be 36". Ramps more than 30 ft. in length shall have a minimum clear width of 44". TAS SECTIONS LANDINGS A. Level landings required at top and bottom of each run, with the following features: 1. Minimum Width: Equal to width of ramp 2. Length: Minumum 60" clear 3. Landing provided for change in direction shall be 60" W x 60"D clear TAS SECTIONS HANDRAILS A. Height: 34-38" above ramp surface B. The clear space between the handrail and the wall shall be 1-1/2". TAS SECTIONS EDGE PROTECTION A. Ramps and landings with drop offs shall have curbs, walls, railings, or projecting surfaces that prevent slipping off the ramp. Curbs shall be a minimum of 2" high. 4.9 STAIRS TAS SECTIONS TREADS AND RISERS Open risers are not permitted MIN. 2 1/2" Ø SCHED. 40 GALVANIZED 3000 PSI CONCRETE NOTE: RESERVED FOR THE DISABLED VAN ACCESSIBLE 1' - 0" 3" 2' - 3" 60" MIN. 2' - 6" 80" MAX. PROVIDE ONE SIGN AT EACH DISABLED (DESIGNATED) PARKING SPACE 1 1/2" Ø STEEL PIPE HANDRAIL 34"-38" 1' - 0" 7" MAX. 1' - 0" REQ. MIN. NUMBER OF ACCESSIBLE SPACES % OF TOTAL 20 PLUS 1 FOR EACH 100 OVER 1000 The material used to provide contrast shall be an integral part of the walking surface. WIDTH OF SIDEWALK 4" 1' - 0" 11" TYP. PROVIDE NON-SLIP TOOLED JOINTS AT EACH STEP RUN. FINISH GRADE AT LAST TREAD TO BE FLUSH. Detectable warnings on walking surfaces. Detectable warnings shall consist of raised truncated domes with a diameter of nominal 0.9 in (23 mm), a height of nominal 0.2 in (5mm) and a center-tocenter spacing of nominal 2.35 in (60mm) and shall contrast visually with adjoining surfaces, either light-on-dark, or dark-on-light. Armor-Tile or equivilant. Install with 4" border. 1" 1' - 0" 1" 34"-38" LANDING ELEVATIONS 12" MIN. 12" MIN. WALL 4.13 DOORS SLOPE SLOPE SLOPE LANDING VERTICAL GUARD RAIL 12" MIN. 12" MIN. LANDING SLOPE RAILING WITH EXTENDED PLATFORM LEVEL LANDING RISE SLOPE CURB RAMP SURFACE OF RAMP HORIZONTAL PROJECTION OR RUN MAXIMUM RISE LANDING LANDING LANDING SECTIONS NOTE RE: SECTIONS X= 36" MIN IF RAMP IS LESS THAN 30' IN LENGTH X= 44" MIN IF RAMP IS GREATER THAN 30' IN LENGTH NOTE RE: H1 HANDRAIL HEIGHT (TO TOP) GRADES K THRU 5 OR 6-34" GRADES 6 THRU 8 OR 9-34" GRADES 9 OR 10 THRU 12-34" NOTE: COORDINATE HEIGHT W/ REQUIRED BUILDING CODE MOUNTING HEIGHTS LEVEL LANDING MAX. HORIZONTAL PROJECTION 1:12 TO < 1:16 30" 30' 1:16 TO < 1:20 30" 40' CROSS SLOPE SHALL NOT EXCEED 1:50 LONG DIMENSION PERP. TO ROUTE OF TRAVEL GRATING ORIENTATION SIDEWALKS & RAMPS (SLOPES, EDGE PROTECTION, HANDRAIL EXTENSIONS, AND GRATING) PREDOMINANT DIR. OF TRAFFIC GRATINGS 12" MIN. BOTH SIDES UNLESS BUTTING WALL ONE SIDE TAS SECTIONS MANEUVERING CLEARANCES AT DOORS A. Provide level and clear maneuvering area at doors as follows: Front approach pull side- 18" min. beside strike edge Front approach push side-0" beside strike edge 12" if door has both a closer and a latch Hinge side approach pull side- 60" min. width; 36" min. beside strike edge Hinge side approach push side- 42" min. width 48" min. width if door has both a closer and latch Latch side approach pull side- 48" min. width and 24" min. beside strike edge 54" min. width if door has closer Latch side approach push side- 42" min. width and 24" min. beside strike edge 48" min. width if door has closer TAS SECTIONS THRESHOLDS AT DOORWAYS A. Maximum threshold height: 1/2" (3/4" at exterior sliding doors). Raised thresholds and floor level changes shall be beveled with a slope no greater than 1:2. TAS SECTIONS DOOR OPENING FORCE A. The maximum force for pushing or pulling open a door shall be as follows: 1. Fire doors shall have the minimum opening force allowable by the appropriate administrative authority. 2. Other doors a. Exterior hinged doors: no requirement. b. Interior hinged doors: 5.0 lbf. c. Sliding or folding doors: 5.0 lbf. < 27" 12" MIN. 12" MIN. 12" MIN. 12" MIN. < 27" H1 H1 H1 These forces do not apply to the force required to retract latch bolts or disengage the devices that may hold the door in a closed position. 34"-38" 1 1/2" MAX. 1 1/2" 4" 12" 2" MIN. X MIN. INSIDE CURB X MIN. CLEAR X MIN. CLEAR 36" MIN. CLEAR 1 1/2" ø STEEL PIPE ADJACENT SURFACE BOT. RAMPS ONLY PULL SIDE 60" MIN. PULL SIDE PUSH SIDE NOTE: X=12 IN (305 MM) IF DOOR HAS BOTH A CLOSER AND A LATCH (a) FRONT APPROACHES SWINGING DOORS NOTE: X= 36 IN (915 MM) MINIMUM IF Y = 60" IN (1525 MM); X= 42 IN (1065 MM) MINIMUM IF Y= 54 IN (1370 MM) NOTE: PULL SIDE Y= 48" MIN. NOTE: (b) HINGE SIDE APPROACHES SWINGING DOORS Y= 54 IN (1370 MM) MINIMUM IF DOOR HAS CLOSER NOTE: (c) LATCH SIDE APPROACHES - SWINGING DOORS NOTE: 4.15 DRINKING FOUNTAINS 4.16 WATER CLOSETS PUSH SIDE Y= 48 IN (1220 MM) MINIMUM IF DOOR HAS BOTH A CLOSER AND A LATCH PUSH SIDE Y= 48 IN (1220 MM) MINIMUM IF DOOR HAS BOTH A CLOSER ALL DOORS IN ALCOVES SHALL COMPLY WITH THE CLEARANCE FOR FRONT APPROACHES FIG. 25 MANEUVERING CLEARANCES AT DOORS DETAIL 11.1 DETAIL 11.2 DETAIL 11.3 TAS SECTIONS , FLUSH CONTROLS (REFERENCE DETAIL ) TOILET PARTITION AS SPEC MM 17" - 19" TOILET PAPER DISPENSER 1220 MM 8" MIN. 6" MAX. A. Controls shall be 44" maximum above the finish floor. 33"-36" 9" MIN. 1. Controls for flush valves shall be mounted on the wide side of toilet areas. 2. Controls shall be hand operated or automatic 3. The force required to activate controls shall be greater than 5 lbf. 28" Preferred 19" MIN. 27" MIN. GRAB BAR TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER TO BE WITHIN 12" OF THE FRONT EDGE OF THE WATER CLOSET DETAIL DETAIL TOILET STALLS 18" MIN. 24" PREFERRED X 24" MIN. 610 MM 36" MAX. 12" MAX. 3' - 6" 17"-19" 48" MIN. 36" MAX. 5'-0" CLR. HC W/C CENTER LINE OF FLUSH VALVE TOILET PARTITION AS SPEC. GRAB BAR 3' - 0" TAS SECTIONS SIZE AND ARRANGEMENT (REFERENCE DETAIL ) A. Toilet stalls may be arranged to provide either a left or a right handed approach. Accessible toilet stalls shall have the following dimensions: Y 30" MIN. 44" MAX. 1. 'Standard' Accessible Stall 60" minimum width. 59" minimum depth, with floor mounted water closet 56" minimum depth, with wall mounted water closet Door: outward swinging (if door swings into stall, depth shall be increased by 36" 2. 'Alternate A' Accessible Stall (required when more than 6 stalls provided, permitted in lieu of standard stall in certain alterations) 36" minimum width 69" minimum depth, with floor mounted water closet 66" minimum depth with wall mounted water closet Door: outward swinging 3. 'Alternate B' Accessible Stall (permitted in lieu of standard stall only in certain alterations) 48" minimum width 54" minimum depth Door: outward swinging 48" MIN. 6" MAX MM Y= 42" MIN. X 1065 MM 24" MIN 610 MM 48" MIN. 30" MIN. 17"-19" 5'-0" CLR. 54" 1370 MM 33"-36" Y= 42" MIN. 24" MAX. 1' - 0" 4' - 10" 30" MIN MM 36" MIN 36" MIN. 18" MIN 18" MIN CLEAR FLOOR SPACE LAVATORY CLEAR FLOOR SPACE STANDARD STALL (END OF ROW) 4.18 URINALS 66" MIN CLEAR FLOOR SPACE 48" MIN 48" MIN 1' - 6" 60" MIN LAVATORY CLEAR FLOOR SPACE AT WATER CLOSETS CLEARANCES INDICATED ARE MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR ACCESSIBILITY. REFER TO TOILET ROOMS AND LAVATORY DETAILS FOR MOUNTING HEIGHTS. NOTE: FLOOR PLANS MAY BE FLIPPED AND ROTATED FOR SIMILAR CONDITIONS (RE: PLAN SHEETS) 1' - 6" 36" MIN 18" MIN 18" MIN 56" MIN. W. WALL MOUNTED W.C. DETAIL ALTERNATE DOOR LOCATION CLEAR FLOOR SPACE STANDARD STALL TAS SECTIONS TOE CLEARANCES A. In 'Standard' accessible stalls, the front partition and at least one side partition shall provide a toe clearance of at least 9" above the floor. B. If the depth of the stall is greater than 60", the toe clearance is not required. 59" MIN. W. FLR. MOUNTED W.C. 59" MIN. 42" MIN. TAS SECTIONS GRAB BARS (REFERENCE DETAILS , , AND ) A. Grab Bars mounted 33" - 36" above the floor, shall be provided as follows: 1. 'Standard' Accessible Stall: One 40" side wall grab bar (on near wall) and one rear wall grab bar. 2. 'Alternate A' Accessible Stall: 42" side wall grab bar each side. 3. 'Alternate B' Accessible Stall: One 42" side wall grab bar (on near wall), one rear wall grab bar. 4. Side Wall Grab Bar: Minimum length as indicated, mounted 12" maximum off rear wall. 5. Rear Wall Grab Bar: Minimum length 36", 12" minimum each side of water closet centerline. TAS SECTIONS CLEAR FLOOR SPACE (REFERENCE DETAIL ) A. A clear floor space 30" wide by 48" deep minimum shall be provided in front of urinal to allow frontal approach. 1. This space shall adjoin or overlap an accessible route. 2. Urinal shield that do not extend beyond the front edge of the urinal rim may be provided with 29" clearance between them. 32" MIN 4" MAX 12" MAX. 3. Urinals installed in alcoves deeper than 24" require a maneuvering area of at least 36" minimum wide. 6" MAX. 36" MIN. 56" MIN 4" MAX 32" MIN 5' - 0" 60" MIN 36" MIN 1' - 6" 42" MIN 1' - 6" 60" MIN 6" MAX 12" MAX 42" MIN LATCH 52" MIN 56" MIN 56" MIN W. WALL MOUNTED W.C. 59" MIN. W. FLR. MOUNTED W.C. APPROACH ONLY, OTHER APPROACHES 48" MIN. Villa Tranchese Renovations REVISIONS DATE: Issue Date DRAWN BY: Author CHECKED BY: Checker PROJECT NUMBER: 1001 San Antonio Housing Authority 307 Marshall Street, San Antonio, TX SHEET NAME ADA ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS SHEET NUMBER 1 ADA #1 1/4" = 1'-0" A-0.1

465 TAS SECTIONS FLUSH CONTROLS (REFERENCE DETAIL ) A. Controls: Re: TAS SECTIONS FLUSH CONTROLS 4.20 BATHTUBS 4.24 SINKS SIGNAGE 14 " ELONGATED RIM 17" MAX. 44" MAX. Detail Detail LAVATORIES & MIRRORS 2' - 6" 48" MIN. TAS SECTION MIRRORS (REFERENCE DETAIL ) A. Mirrors shall be mounted with the bottom edge of the reflecting surface 40" maximum above the finish floor. H.C. ACCESSIBLE MOUNTING HEIGHTS FOR ADULTS RESTROOMS: WATER CLOSET TO TOP OF SEAT 17" TO 19" URINAL MAXIMUM TO BASIN OPENING 17" GRAB BARS TO TOP 33" TO 36" LAVATORIES: FRONT APPROACH: MIN. KNEE CLEARANCE 29" MAX. TO TOP 34" MAX. TO FAUCETS FROM FRONT OF LAV. 20" LAVATORIES: SIDE APPROACH: MAX. TO TOP 34" MAX. TO FAUCETS FROM FRONT OF LAV. 20" MIRRORS MAX TO BOTTOM OF REFLECTIVE SURFACE 40" SHELVES AND DISPENSERS MAX. HEIGHT TO CONTROLLING DEVICE: FRONT APPROACH 48" SIDE APPROACH 54" DRINKING FOUNTAINS: MAX. TO LOW SPOUT 36" MAX. TO HIGH SPOUT 40" SWITCHES AND CONTROLS: FRONTAL APPROACH MAX. 48" SIDE APPROACH MAX. 54" TELEPHONES MAX. TO TOP OF DEVICE: FRONTAL APPROACH MAX. 48" SIDE APPROACH MAX. 54" H.C. ACCESSIBLE MOUNTING HEIGHTS FOR GRADE 6-9 RESTROOMS: WATER CLOSET TO TOP OF SEAT 15" - 17" URINAL MAXIMUM TO BASIN OPENING 16" GRAB BARS TO TOP 30" - 32" LAVATORIES: FRONT APPROACH: MIN. KNEE CLEARANCE 28" MAX. TO TOP 32" MAX. TO FAUCETS FROM FRONT OF LAV. 20" LAVATORIES: SIDE APPROACH: MAX. TO TOP 34" MAX. TO FAUCETS FROM FRONT OF LAV. 18" MIRRORS MAX. TO BOTTOM OF REFLECTIVE SURFACE 37" SHELVES AND DISPENSERS MAX. HEIGHT TO CONTROLLING DEVICE FRONTAL APPROACH 45" SIDE APPROACH 51" DRINKING FOUNTAINS: MAX. TO LOW SPOUT 34" MAX. TO HIGH SPOUT 38" SWITCHES AND CONTROLS: FRONTAL APPROACH MAX. 45" SIDE APPROACH MAX. 51" TELEPHONES MAX. TO TOP OF DEVICE: FRONTAL APPROACH MAX. 45" SIDE APPROACH MAX. 51" H.C. ACCESSIBLE MOUNTING HEIGHTS FOR GRADE K-6 RESTROOMS: 1' - 2" WATER CLOSET TO TOP OF SEAT 14" - 15" URINAL MAXIMUM TO BASIN OPENING 14" GRAB BARS TO TOP 28" - 30" LAVATORIES: FRONT APPROACH: MIN. KNEE CLEARANCE 26" MAX. TO TOP 30" MAX. TO FAUCETS FROM FRONT OF LAV. 18" LAVATORIES: SIDE APPROACH: MAX. TO TOP 32" MAX. TO FAUCETS FROM FRONT OF LAV. 16" MIRRORS MAX. TO BOTTOM OF REFLECTIVE SURFACE 34" SHELVES AND DISPENSERS MAX. HEIGHT TO CONTROLLING DEVICE FRONTAL APPROACH 42" SIDE APPROACH 48" DRINKING FOUNTAINS: TAS SECTION FLOOR SPACE A. Clear floor space shall be provided in front of bathtubs as follows: 30" wide x 60" long beside the bathtub for side approach 48" wide x 60" long beside the bathtub for front approach with seat at head of tub- 30" wide x 75" long beside tub TAS SECTION SEAT A. An in-tub seat or a seat at the head end of the tub shall be provided. Seats shall be mounted securely and shall not slip during use. TAS SECTION GRAB BARS A. Heights permitted: 1. With in Tub Seat: Control wall: 24" long minimum, from outside wall, 33"- 36" above floor Back wall: 2 bars, 24" long minimum, 12" maximum from foot end, 24" maximum from head end; one 33"- 36" above floor, one 9" above tub Head wall: 12" minimum, from outside wall, 33" - 36" above floor 2. With Seat at Head of Tub: Control Wall: 24" long minimum, from outside wall, 33" - 36" above floor Back wall: 2 bars, 48" long minimum from foot end, 15" maximum from head end; one 33" - 36" above floor, one 9" above the tub Head Wall: none TAS SECTION SHOWER UNIT A. A shower spray unit with a hose at least 60" long shall be provided SHOWER STALLS TAS SECTION SIZE AND CLEARANCES A. Shower stalls shall be either 36" x 36" clear inside dimension or 30" min. x 60" min. clear inside dimension TAS SECTION SEAT A. Seat is required in 36" x 36" stalls, and shall have the following features: 1. Shall be 17"-19" above bathroom floor 2. Shall extend the full depth of the stall 3. Shall be located on the wall opposite control wall 4. Maximum space between wall and seat edge shall be 1-1/2" 5. Shall project 16" maximum into stall width, except at the rear 15" maximum of the stall, where the seat may project 23" TAS SECTION GRAB BARS A. Grab bars shall be mounted 33"-36" above floor TAS SECTION CONTROLS A. All shower controls shall be located 38" minimum and 48" maximum above the floor TAS SECTION SHOWER UNIT A. A shower spray unit with a hose at least 60" long that can be used both as a fixed shower head and as a hand held shower shall be provided. The mounting device shall comply with the requirements for Forward Reach TAS SECTION CURBS A. If provided, curbs on transfer showers shall be no higher than 1/2" roll-in showers shall not have curbs 14" - 15" SEAT WALL BACK CLEAR FLOOR SPACE 4' - 0" SHOWER STALL GRAB BAR 1' - 6" SHOWER SEAT 3' - 0" 3' - 0" CONTROL AREA 33"-36" 1 1/2" MAX. 1 1/2" MAX. 15" MAX 16" MAX FULL DEPTH SHOWER SEAT DETAIL OF STALL SHOWER SPRAY UNIT SHALL HAVE A HOSE AT LEAST 60" LONG AND CAN BE USED BOTH AS FIXED SHOWER HEAD AND AS HAND-HELD SHOWER 1' - 6" 33"-36" CONTROL AREA SHOWER HEAD TO BE HAND HELD MODEL WITH 48" LONG HOSE 38" MAX. 48" MAX. TAS SECTION EXPOSED PIPES AND SURFACES A. Hot water and drain pipes under sinks shall be insulated or otherwise configured to protext against contract. B. There shall be no sharp or abrasive surfaces under sinks. 8" MIN. 6" MAX. 30" MIN. 17" MIN. 19" MAX. 48" MIN. 17" MIN. Detail Detail TAS SECTION DEPTH (REFERENCE DETAIL 14.1) A. Storage areas may be 36" in depth or less. If more than 36" in depth then area must allow 60" diameter of clear floor space for turning. TAS SECTION CLEAR FLOOR SPACE: (REFERENCE DETAIL 14.2) TAS SECTION HEIGHT (REFERENCE DETAIL 14.3 AND 14.4) A. Where a forward reach is required, accessible storage spaces shall be 48" maximum and 15" minimum above the floor. If the forward reach is over an obstruction (with knee space equal to or greater than reach distance) 20"-25" deep, the maximum height shall be 44"; if the obstruction is less than 20", maximum height shall be 48" B. Where a side reach is provided, accessible storage spaces shall be 54" maximum and 9" minimum above the floor. Maximum high and 24" maximum deep. C. Clothes rods or shelves shall be a maximum 54" above floor where a side reach is required. D. Where the distance from the wheelchair to the clothes rod or shelf exceeds 10" (as at closets with inaccessible doors) the following criteria shall be met: 1. Shelves: Reach: 21" maximum; height: 48" maximum, 9" minimum. 2. Clothes rods: reach 21" maximum; height: 48" maximum. TAS SECTION , HARDWARE A. Hardware for accessible storage facilities shall be operable with one hand and shall not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist. B. The force required to activate the hardware shall be no greater than 5 lbf 36" 9" MIN. 21" MAX ANY AMOUNT Detail 14.1 Detail " MIN. 48" MAX Detail 14.3 Detail GRAB BARS 27" MIN. 29" MIN. TAS SECTION SIZE AND SPACING A. Diameter or width of gripping surface shall be 1-1/4" to 1-1/2", or the shape shall provide on equivalent gripping surface. 1. The space between grab bars and adjacent walls shall be 1-1/2" TAS SECTION ELIMINATING HAZARDS A. Grab bars and adjacent wall surfaces shall be free of sharp or abrasive surfaces. 34" MAX. B. Edges shall have a radius of 1/8" minimum CONTROLS AND OPERATING MECHANISMS 40" MAX. 60" 48" MAX 60" R 30" MIN. 21" MAX TAS SECTION RAISED AND BRAILLE CHARACTERS AND PICTOGRAMS A. Letter and numerals shall be raised 1/32", upper case, sans serif and shall be accompainied by grade 2 Braille. 1. Raised character height: 5/8" minimum, 2" high maximum. 2. Pictograms shall be accompanied by the equivalent verbal description placed directly below the pictogram. 3. The border dimension of the pictogram shall be 6" minimum. TAS SECTION FINISH AND CONTRAST A. The character and background of the signs shall be eggshell, matte, or other non-glare finish. Characters and symbols shall contrast with their background (either light characters on a dark background or dark characters on a light background). TAS SECTION MOUNTING LOCATION AND HEIGHT (REFERENCE DETAIL 16.3) A. Where permanent identification is provided for rooms and spaces, signs shall be installed on the wall adjacent to the latch side of the door. B. Where there is no wall space to the latch side of the door, including at double-leaf doors, signs shall be placed on the nearest adjacent wall. C. Mounting height shall be 60" above the finished floor to the centerline of the sign. D. Mounting location for such signage shall be so that a person may approach within 3" of signage without encountering protruding objects or standing within the swing of a door. X International Symbol of Accessibilty Y Detail 16.1 Detail 16.2 Light switch, Thermostats, Etc. 5' - 0" (FRONT) 48" MAX (SIDE) 54" PUBLIC TELPHONES 15" MIN. Detail 16.3 Letter & numbers on signs shall have a width to height ratio of between 3:5 & 1:1 and a stroke- width to height ratio between 1:5 & 1:10. Letters and numbers shall be raised 1/32", upper case, sans serif or simple serif type and shall be accompanied with grade 2 Braille, raised characters shall be at least 5/8" high, but no higher than 2". 8" MAX. Convenience Outlets Data, Tel., Etc. TAS SECTION 4.1.3(17)(B) - WHERE APPLICABLE A. All telephones required to be accessible shall be equipped with a volume control. B. In addition, 25%, but never less than one, of all other public telephones provided shall be equipped with a volume control and shall be dispersed all type of telephones, including closed circuit telephones, throughout the building or facility. C. Signage displaying the International Symbol of Access for Hearing Loss shall be provided at each telephone equipped with a volume control. TAS SECTION MOUNTING HEIGHT (REFERENCE DETAIL 17.1) A. The highest operable part of the telephone shall be 48" maximum above the floor where a forward reach is required, and 54" maximum where a side reach is required. B. If the forward reach is over an obstruction (with knee space equal to or greater than reach distance) 20"-25" deep the maximum height shall be 44", if the obstruction is less than 20", maximum height shall be 48" C. Maximum height shall be 46" for side reach over an obstruction 34" maximum high and 24" maximum deep. 54" MAX. 27" MAX SEATING AND TABLES 30" MIN. Detail " MIN. TAS SECTION SEATING A. If seating spaces for people in wheelchairs are provided at fixed tables or counters, clear floor space of 30" x 48" shall be provided. Floor space shall not overlap required knee space by more than 19" 10" MAX. Villa Tranchese Renovations San Antonio Housing Authority 307 Marshall Street, San Antonio, TX MAX. TO LOW SPOUT 32" MAX. TO HIGH SPOUT 36" SWITCHES AND CONTROLS: FRONTAL APPROACH MAX. 42" SIDE APPROACH MAX. 48" TELEPHONES MAX. TO TOP OF DEVICE: TAS SECTION HEIGHT (refer to detail 16.3) A. Front approach - 48" max. to 15" min. B. Side approach - 54" max. to 9" min., except per below. C. Electrical & communication system recepticals shall be mounted no less than 15" above the floor. TAS SECTION KNEE SPACE B. If seating for people in wheelchairs is provided at fixed tables or counters, knee space at least 27" high, 30" wide and 19" deep shall be provided. TAS SECTION HEIGHT OF TABLES OR COUNTER C. The tops of accessible tables and counters shall be 28" minimum, and 34" maximum, above the finished floor. FRONTAL APPROACH MAX. 42" SIDE APPROACH MAX. 48" DRESSING AND FITTING ROOMS REVISIONS TAS SECTION BENCH A. Every accessible dressing room shall have a 24"x48" bench fixed to the wall along the larger dimension. The bench shall be mounted 17" to 19" above the finish floor. TAS SECTION MIRROR A. A full-length mirror, measuring at least 18" wide by 54" high, shall be mounted in a position affording a view to a person on the bench as well as to a person in a standing position. DATE: Issue Date DRAWN BY: Author CHECKED BY: Checker PROJECT NUMBER: ADA #2 1/4" = 1'-0" SHEET NAME ADA ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS SHEET NUMBER A-0.2

466 OCCUPANCY TYPE: TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION: AUTOMATIC SPRINKLED: Residential - R2 II b No 2009 International Building Code with local amendments 2009 International Fuel Gas Code with local amendments 2009 International Residential Code with local amendments 2009 International Fire Code with local amendments 2009 International Existing Building Code with local amendments 2009 International Energy Conservation Code with local amendments 2009 International Mechanical Code with local amendments 2008 National Electric Code with local amendments 2009 International Plumbing Code with local amendments Exit 72" Provided Exit Width North Vestibule 26 Occupants 6" Required Exit Width 36" Provided Exit Width General Notes: 1. All rooms shall have room number signage. A room number list will be provide by the Owner for rooms that get room number and room name on signage. Exterior Stairs 26 Occupants 6" Required Exit Width 36" Provided Exit Width NO WORK THIS AREA NO WORK THIS AREA Mech. Conf. Corridor Exit Fitness Room NO WORK THIS AREA Offices Elevators Entry Lobby South Vestibule Stairs Dining Room Corridor Kitchen Exit J Game Room Exterior Stairs 26 Occupants 6" Required Exit Width 36" Provided Exit Width Offices 96" Provided Exit Width N MAXIMUM OCCUPANT LOAD PER FLOOR = 76 (15,133 SF / 200 square feet per occupant) TOTAL SQUARE FEET OF GROUND FLOOR RENOVATION: 9,047 S.F. PLAN NORTH 3 Level One - Code Analysis Plan 1/16" = 1'-0" ABBREV. DESCRIPTION ABBREV. DESCRIPTION ARCHITECTURAL MATERIAL SYMBOLS GENERAL NOTES A/C AIR CONDITIONING ACOUS ACOUSTICAL AD AREA DRAIN ADJ ADJUSTABLE AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR ALT ALTERNATIVE ALUM ALUMINUM ARCH ARCHITECT(URAL) ASPH ASPHALT BD BLDG BLK BLKG BM BSMT BW CLO CLG CLR CM CMU COL CONC CONT CONST CORR CT CTR CTSK CU FT D DIA DIM DISP DN DR DET DWG E EA EDF EIFS EJ EL ELECT ELEV EQ EQUIP EW EWC EXH EXIST EXP EXT FHC FIN FIXT FL FLASH FL.D. FLEX FLUOR FT GA GAL GC GI GRD GYP BD GWB HB HDW HM HORIZ HT HVAC ID INFO INSUL INT BOARD BUILDING BLOCK BLOCKING BEAM BASEMENT BOTH WAYS CLOSET CEILING CLEAR(ANCE) CENTIMETER CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT COLUMN CONCRETE CONTINUOUS CONSTRUCTION CORRIDOR CERAMIC TILE CENTER COUNTERSUNK CUBIC FOOT DEPTH DIAMETER DIMENSION DISPENSER DOWN DOOR DETAIL DRAWING EAST EACH ELECTRIC DRINKING FOUNTAIN EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEM EXPANSION JOINT ELEVATION ELECTRICAL ELEVATOR EQUAL EQUIPMENT EACH WAY ELECTRIC WATER COOLER EXHAUST EXISTING EXPANSION EXTERIOR FIRE HOSE CABINET FINISH(ED) FIXTURE FLOOR FLASHING FLOOR DRAIN FLEXIBLE FLUORESCENT FEET GAUGE GALVANIZED GENERAL CONTRACTOR GALVANIZED IRON GRADE GYPSUM WALLBOARD GYPSUM WALLBOARD HOSE BIBB HARDWARE HOLLOW METAL HORIZONTAL HEIGHT HEATING, VENTILATING, & AIR CONDITIONING INSIDE DIAMETER INFORMATION INSULATION INTERIOR JAN JT LAM LAV LH LT MAS MAT MAX MECH MEP MET MFG MFR MIN MISC N NIC NO OR # NRC NTS OA OC OH OD OPP HD OPNG OPP PART PCF PLAS PLA PSF PSI PTD PVC PLYWD PNL R R/A REINF. REQ'D RD RE REBAR RES RH RM S SCHED SHT SIM SPEC SQ SS STC STD STL STRUCT T TOC THK TOS T/R TYP UL VCT VERT VEST VWC JANITOR JOINT LAMINATE LAVATORY LEFT HAND LIGHT MASONRY MATERIAL MAXIMUM MECHANICAL MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL & PLUMBING METAL MANUFACTURING MANUFACTURER MINIMUM MISCELLANEOUS NORTH NOT IN CONTRACT NUMBER NOISE REDUCTION COEFFICIENT NOT TO SCALE OUTSIDE AIR ON CENTER OVERHEAD OUTSIDE DIAMETER OPPOSITE HAND OPENING OPPOSITE PARTITION POUNDS PER CUBIC FOOT PLASTER PLASTIC POUNDS PER SQUARE FOOT POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH PAINTED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PLYWOOD PANEL RADIUS, STAIR RISER RETURN AIR REINFORCED, REINFORCING REQUIRED ROOF DRAIN REFER TO REINFORCING BAR RESILIENT RIGHT HAND ROOM SOUTH SCHEDULED, SCHEDULE SHEET SIMILAR SPECIFICATIONS SQUARE STAINLESS STEEL SOUND TRA STANDARD STEEL STRUCTURE STAIR TREAD TOP OF CURB ELEVATION THICK(NESS) TOP OF SLAB, TOP OF STEEL TOILET ROOM TYPICAL UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORIES VINYL COMPOSITION TILE VERTICAL VESTIBULE VINYL WALLC W WEST, WIDTH, WIDE W/ WITH WC WATER CLOSET WD WOOD EARTH, COMPACT FILL SAND/MORTAR/PLASTER/ CUT STONE FILL/GRAVEL CONCRETE COMMON/FACE BRICK CONCRETE BLOCK RUBBLE/STONE ALUMINUM STEEL/OTHER METALS BLOCKING (NON- CONTINUIOUS) BLOCKING (CONTINUIOUS) FINISHED WOOD PLYWOOD GLASS BATT/LOOSE FILL INSULATION RIGID INSULATION GYPSUM WALLBOARD STUCCO 1. THE INTENT OF THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS IS TO PROVIDE FOR A WATERTIGHT & WEATHERTIGHT BUILDING. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW ALL DETAILS RELATING TO THIS INTENT AND BY BIDDING OR ENTERING INTO THIS CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT WARRANTS FOR ONE FULL YEAR THE ADEQUANY OF THESE DETAILS. SHOULD THE CONTRACTOR TAKE EXCEPTION TO THESE DETAILS, HE SHALL NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT PRIOR TO BIDDING. ANY DEVIATION FROM THIS GENERAL INTENT SHOULD BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ARECHITECT FOR CLARIFICATION 2. THE INTENT OF THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS IS TO PROVIDE FOR A PLUMB, LEVEL AND SQUARE STRUCTURE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. ANY DEVIATION FROM THIS GENERAL INTENT SHOULD BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ARCHITECT FOR CLARIFICATION 3. THE BUILDING SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED IN FULL COMPLIANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE CODES, ORDINANCES AND REGULATIONS AS WELL AS THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. ANY CODE DEFECIENCIES IN THE DRAWINGS RECOGNIZED BY THE CONTRACTOR SHOULD BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ARCHITECT FOR CLARIFICATION. 4. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE ACCURATE PLACEMENT OF THE BUILDING ON THE SITE AND VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND EXISTING CONDITIONS. DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN DRAWINGS AND ACTUAL SITE CONDITIONS SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ARCHITECT BEFORE BIDDING THE PROJECT OR THE COMMENCEMENT OF WORK. THE OWNER SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR CHANGES TO THE WORK DUE TO THE FAILURE OF THE CONTRACTOR TO FAMILARIZE HIMSELF WITH EXISTING CONDITIONS. 5. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS: ALL DIMENSIONS SHALL HAVE PREFERANCE OVER SCALE AND BE FIELD VERIFIED AND COORDINATED WITH WORK OF ALL TRADES. IF NO DIMENSIONS ARE GIVEN OR DISCREPANCIES FOUND, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT FOR CLARIFICATION BEFORE BIDDING OR COMMENCING THE WORK. 6. DETAILS ARE INTENDED TO SHOW METHOD AND MANNER OF ACCOMPLISHING WORK. MINOR MODIFICATIONS MAY BE REQUIRED TO SUIT JOB DIMENSIONS OR CONDITIONS, ALL INCLUDED AS PART OF THE WORK. 7. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL PERMITS AND INSPECTION NECESSARY FOR THE PROPER EXECUTION OF THE WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE CODES AND GOVERNING REGULATIONS. 8. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THE SIZES AND LOCATIONS OF ALL MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT PADS AND BASES, AS WELL AS POWER, WATER AND DRAIN REQUIREMENTS FOR SUCH EQUIPMENT WITH EQUIPMENT MFG. DEVIATION OF THE BEFOREMENTIONED REQUIREMENTS SHOULD BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ARCHITECT FOR CLARIFICATION. 9. ALL WALL WIDTHS ARE SHOWN AND DIMENSIONED WITH NOMINAL DIMENSIONS. (I.E. 8" CMU= 7 5/8"). DIMENSIONS FOR FRAMED WALLS ARE SHOWN TO FACE OF STUDS AND/OR FACE OF BLOCK ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING SYMBOLS # A-#.# X # A-#.# # A-X.X INTERIOR OR EXTERIOR ELEVATION STRUCTURAL COLUMN(S) DETAIL CALL-OUT SECTION MARKER X # # FE WINDOW TYPE WALL TYPE REVISION TAG FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET AND FIRE EXTINGUISHER. COORDINATE FINAL LOCATION WITH FIRE MARCHALL OR FIRE DEPARTMENT INSPECTOR. EXPANSION JOINT/CONTROL JOINT 3' - 8" WALL TYPE GM4.2 Maple Plywood Cap with 1x4 Maple Edge Trim, Stained and finished. 5/8" Type 'X' Gyp. Board on each side of 3-5/8" metal 16" oc. Sound attenuation batts Base as scheduled Ceiling as scheduled Existing metal studs, and Gyp. board at room side Where Wallpaper and Gyp. board are Corridor or Public side of existing wall: Install new 5/8" Type 'X' Gyp. Bd. over existing metal studs. Finish wall as scheduled. NOTE: 1. SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND SHEET A-9.0 FOR WOOD PANELING & GYP. REGLET REVEAL PATTERN LOCATIONS. 2. INSTALL CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARD BEHIND CABINETS AND BACKSPLASH AT KITCHEN. 3. INSTALL ABUSE RESISTANT GYP. BD. TO 8'0" A.F.F. AT CORRIDORS. New sound attenuation batts, full height of wall Base as scheduled 7' - 0" 6" - TYP. CEILING AS SCHEDULED REF. PLAN WALL TYPE GM4.1 TYP /8" Type 'X' Gyp. Board on 3-5/8" metal 16" oc. Mailboxes, Ref. Int. Elev's Metal Framing to support 16" OC Base as scheduled Metal Stud 48" OC, Staggered- Typical Ceiling as scheduled 5/8" Type 'X' Gyp. Board on each side of 3-5/8" metal 16" oc. NOTE: 1. SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND SHEET A-9.0 FOR WOOD PANELING & GYP. REGLET REVEAL PATTERN LOCATIONS. 2. INSTALL CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARD BEHIND CABINETS AND BACKSPLASH AT KITCHEN. 3. INSTALL ABUSE RESISTANT GYP. BD. TO 8'0" A.F.F. AT CORRIDORS. Sound attenuation batts, full height of wall Base as scheduled Villa Tranchese Renovations REVISIONS DATE: Issue Date DRAWN BY: Author CHECKED BY: Checker PROJECT NUMBER: 1001 San Antonio Housing Authority 307 Marshall Street, San Antonio, TX YD YARD PLASTIC STONE ROOM NAME ### ROOM NAME/NUMBER WALL TYPE G2 WALL TYPE GM4 SHEET NAME CODE PLAN, WALL TYPES, ABBREVIATIONS & SYMBOLS SHEET NUMBER 2 ABBREVIATIONS LEGENDS AND SYMBOLS 12" = 1'-0" 1 Wall Types 1/2" = 1'-0" A-0.3

467 5 LEGEND EXISTING TO BE DEMOLISHED EXISTING TO REMAIN NO WORK THIS AREA DEMOLISH CONC. FLATWORK KEY NOTE DESIGNATION ON PLAN, REFER TO DEMOLITION SCHEDULE Mark GENERAL DEMOLITION KEY NOTES Work Description 1 Remove flooring and base in this room. Prepare to receive new base and flooring as scheduled. 2 Remove ceiling in this room. 3 Remove wall finishes in this room (vinyl wallcovering, wood wainscot, ceramic tile, etc). Remove one layer GWB at corridor or public side of wall. Ref Wall Type "G2" on floor plan for locations. 4 Remove plumbing fixture and cap line, refer to MEP drawings. 5 Remove accordian partition and partition track in its entirety. 6 Salvage (2) wall mounted display cases at front entrance; re-install at North wall of Dining Room. 7 Remove cabinetry or shelving. At Game Room 110, clean, repair and re-seal brick wall finish where shelving has been removed. 8 Existing Ice Maker to remain. 9 Salvage existing Ref/Frzr, turn over to Owner. 10 Salvage existing Mailboxes, turn over to Owner. 11 Remove existing door in its entirety. Refer to Floor Plan for new door location. 12 Existing terrazzo flooring to remain, typical. Protect during construction. 13 Remove existing wood bench. Salvage and turn over to Owner. 14 Remove existing concrete flatwork to accomodate new construction. Refer to Structural Drawings. 15 Remove existing concrete columns and canopy structure at South Entrance. Ref: Structural Drawings. 16 Cut back existing polycarbonate canopy structure 6'-9" to column line "G". Ref: structural Drawings. 17 Remove existing pantry closet in its entirety. 18 Remove existing double oven; terminate connections and turn appliances over to Owner. 19 Remove existing closets in their entirety, including flooring, walls to structure above and ceiling. 20 Remove existing wall in their entirety, from floor to overhead structure. Ref. new work for extents of new construction in this area. 21 Remove existing cased opening. Ref. new work for extents of new construction in this area. 22 Remove existing wall construction to 9'-0" above finished floor. Patch and repair GWB and metal studs as required for installation of new storefront window system in existing wall. Ref. New Work. 23 Remove portion of existing storefront window system in order to accomodate new Airlock Vestibule construction. Refer to drawings and coordinate with new work in this area. 24 Remove existing furr down above kitchen cabinets. 25 Cut opening in wall for new door. Refer to new work for door sizes. 26 Remove existing door in its entirety and infill with new wall construction to match adjacent wall. 28 Remove top layer of GWB at this side of wall, including wood paneling and vinyl wallcovering wall finish. Make a clean cut line 6" above the existing ceiling. Ref. floor plan for new wall type "G2" to replace one layer GWB on existing metal studs. 29 Remove existing draperies in this room and turn over to owner. 30 Wall-mounted flat screen television to remain; remove and protect throughout construction duration and re-install. 31 Existing brick wall finish to remain, protect throughout construction duration. E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 E10 E11 E12 E13 E A.1 8 A NO WORK THIS AREA NO WORK THIS AREA NO WORK THIS AREA NO WORK THIS AREA NO WORK THIS AREA NO WORK THIS AREA NO WORK THIS AREA B C D E Villa Tranchese Renovations San Antonio Housing Authority 307 Marshall Street, San Antonio, TX F REVISIONS 16 G N DATE: Issue Date DRAWN BY: Author CHECKED BY: Checker PROJECT NUMBER: 1001 PLAN NORTH SHEET NAME DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN 1 Level 1 - Demolition Floor Plan SHEET NUMBER 1/8" = 1'-0" A-1.0

468 A-2.1D 4 A-2.1D 3 1 A-2.1D E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 E10 E11 E12 E13 E14 D E F North Vestibule 102 E D A.1 N A NO WORK THIS AREA NO WORK THIS AREA 1 A-2.1A G2 Hall G2 2 A G2 G2 Hall 129 Mech. Rm. 132 Staff Conf. 131 Storage 127B Storage 127A 1 7 Property Mgr A-7.1 Fitness Room 119 Office 126 Office 125 Hall G2 A-7.0 G2 G2 G2 3 Ref. 24" Counter GM4 G Mailboxes Women 118 Network Rm. G2 58 Mailboxes GM A Mailboxes Total (+ 8 Parcel Boxes) 10 GM4 Office G2 6 12" Shelv. Jan " Deep Counter GM4.2 5 A-7.0 Waiting 122 Men 116 Hall Parcel 69 Mailboxes GM4 Mail Room 121 GM4.1 GM4.2 Office 123 GM4.1 GM4.2 G2 G2 Rear Entry Lobby 11 C G2 100A 10 A-7.0 B D.S. Splashblock 7 G2 101A.. Elevator 103 Entry Lobby 100 South Vestibule 3 A-2.1C 9 A G2 101 A G2 G2 G2 101B... G2 B Stairs G2 104 Jan. 106 G2 C H D.S. Splashblock 5 A-2.1D GM4 105 G2 G2 E.4 E.6 F.4 G 3 4 A Dining Room 105 GM4 GM4 GM Ice 114A G2 G2 Ref A GM4 GM4 Storage 107 Hall 108 GM4 Kitchen 114 Dw. A-7.2 Mech. Rm. 5 A G2 109 G2 Oven G2 J 110 GM4 GM Kitchen Vest. A Pantry A " Wire Shelv. Built-In Shelv. GM4 Built-In Shelv. GM4 Game Room 110 Ref. GM4 112 GM4 GM4 M 2 6 GM4 GM4 1 A A K H.O.A. 111 L Tall Cabinets 1 A-2.1B B C D E F Villa Tranchese Renovations San Antonio Housing Authority 307 Marshall Street, San Antonio, TX E A-2.1C N 4 A-2.1C PLAN NORTH 1 Level 1 - Floor Plan 1/8" = 1'-0" REVISIONS DATE: Issue Date DRAWN BY: Author CHECKED BY: Checker PROJECT NUMBER: 1001 SHEET NAME GROUND FLOOR PLAN SHEET NUMBER A-2.0

469 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 E F 102 E A.1 D North Vestibule 102 D VCT A Women 118 Men A-2.1D N TERR 9 G2 Jan. G2 Mech. Rm. 132 G2 Rear Entry Lobby 100A A G2 G2 106 EXIST RV Jan. 2 A EXIST 117 EXIST EXIST G2 G2 EXIST EXIST RV G2 Hall 130 G2 EXIST Staff Conf. 131 Refr/Frzr 24" Deep Countertop GM4 1' - 6" 8' - 4 1/8" 7 5 A Fitness Room ' - 9 1/2" G 16' - 0" 1' - 3 1/2" FRF 75 Mailboxes G2 2' - 11" 2' - 9 1/8" 7' - 7" 1' - 5" G2 Hall 115 Network Rm Mailboxes 8 A RV RV CONC 12" SHELV. 5 A " Deep Countertop Mail Room 121 RV 202 Mailboxes Total (+ 8 Parcel Boxes) 8 Parcel Boxes 69 Mailboxes 2' - 3 1/2" GM4 5' /4" 2' - 0" GM4 7' - 0" GM4.1 5" GM4 RV TERR G2 4' - 0" (7''-0" High Half Wall) GM4.2 GM4.1 4' - 3 1/2" TERR 14' - 7 5/8" G A-7.0 BENCH 7 Elevator 103 G2 Entry Lobby G2 Stairs 104 EXIST TERR G2 GM4 B C G2 119 RV RV 1 Hall RV G2 G2 Hall G2 G2 RV EXIST 129 A G2 Storage 127B Property Mgr. 127 Storage 127A 128 Office 126 Office 125 G2 Office 124 GM4.2 Wire 36" o.c. 3'-8" High Half Wall RV Waiting 122 TERR Office 123 TERR RV EXISTING AREAWAY C B 3 A-2.1C TERR VCT 101A 100 South Vestibule 101 A TERR VCT 101B B C H 105 D E E.4 E Villa Tranchese Renovations San Antonio Housing Authority 307 Marshall Street, San Antonio, TX F 5 A-2.1D F.4 REVISIONS Enlarged Plan of Lobby 1 1/4" = 1'-0" G N PLAN NORTH DATE: Issue Date DRAWN BY: Author CHECKED BY: Checker PROJECT NUMBER: 1001 SHEET NAME ENLARGED LOBBY FLOOR PLANS SHEET NUMBER A-2.1A

470 E9 E10 E11 E12 E13 A G2 G2 18' - 4" 3' - 6" 6' - 4" 10" 3' - 0" 4' - 8" GM4 TERR 1' - 0" GM4 Ice Dw. Oven Ref. Kitchen 114 CFT " Deep Counter A G2 A Support Post Below 42" Island 2' - 1" 6' - 4" 13' - 0" G2 GM4 GM4 24" Deep Counter 2' - 9 1/2" 6' - 0 1/2" 4' - 6" 3' - 6" 5' - 1" +/- 2' - 1" G2 2' - 5 5/8" 6' - 5" 3' - 7 1/2" GM4 2' - 4" 1' - 3 1/2" 11 A-7.2 Pantry Kitchen Vest. 113 New through-wall vent for combination microwave/ vent hood; ref Mep. GM4 4 1/2" 112 4' - 5" 3' - 2" Tall Cabinets A GM4 GM4 GM4 Ref. CFT " Deep Counter M RF GM4 5' /32" H.O.A A B 105 GM4 Dining Room A TERR GM4 107 EXIST G2 Storage 107 GM4 Hall 108 Mech. Rm. 109 RF TERR 5 A-7.2 5' - 1" 1' - 9" G2 TERR 110 Built-in Shelving 1' - 4" 12" Wire Shelving, (5) tiers high RF J GM4 1' - 10" GM4 Built-in Shelving 11' - 3" 9' - 5" Game Room 110 GM4 3' - 3" GM A K L Tall Cabinets C D E E.4 Villa Tranchese Renovations San Antonio Housing Authority 307 Marshall Street, San Antonio, TX E.6 F REVISIONS N DATE: Issue Date DRAWN BY: Author CHECKED BY: Checker 1 Enlarged Plan of Community Areas 1/4" = 1'-0" PLAN NORTH PROJECT NUMBER: 1001 SHEET NAME ENLARGED COMMUNITY AREAS SHEET NUMBER A-2.1B

471 E.4 Existing concrete beam Level 2 114' - 8" Reglet, saw cut into beam Galv. Metal Flashing Secure With Metal Cleat and Set in Cont. Sealant in Reglet Galv. Counter Flashing Lap Over "Z" Trim Secured to Metal Roof E.6 7 1/2" 2 1/2" 2-1/2" Dia. Coring through Second Floor Beam to accommodate Elect. Conduit & condensate Piping; Ref. MEP. Outside closure Z trim set in sealant tape Berridge Zee Lock standing seam metal roof Steel Channel, Ref. Struct. Steel Clip Angle, Ref. Struct. Steel Beam, Ref. Struct. 'J' Closure trim at perimeter, typ. Berridge Zee Lock Standing seam metal roof F Berridge Zee Lock Standing Seam Roof Steel Channel, Ref. Struct. - Painted. 5" Half round single bead Gutter with screen and one gutter expansion jointpainted finish. Free hanging strap with factory 32" o.c. (aligned with metal roof standing seams) - Finish shall match gutter. 4" Steel Tube, Ref. Struct- Painted. 1" E7 7.5 E8 8.5 E9 3 A-2.1C Polycarbonate Roof on Steel Tree Column Structure, Ref. Struct. dwg's for design & extent of new work. Structural Standing Seam Metal Roof New Reglet saw-cut into existing concrete beam Level 2 114' - 8" 1" 2" 4" Light gauge metal 24" o.c., span between beams to support soffit panels. Metal Soffit Panels: 10" flat panel with concealed fasteners; painted finish. MBCI Artisan L-10 or equal. Metal J-Bead Trim at perimeter, typical. Existing Concrete Beam- Painted. Storefront as scheduled Metal Soffit Panels: 12" flat panel w/ concealed fasteners; painted finish. MBCI Artisan L-10 or equal. 4" Light gauge metal 24" O.C., spans between beams to support soffit panels. Sealant Aluminum Break Metal Secure to Structure Storefront Head Receptor Column (beyond)- Ref. Struct.; Painted finish. 2" Steel Channel, Ref. Struct.- painted. Steel Beam, Ref. Struct.- painted Aluminum Storefront and Glazing as Spec. 8 1/2" Beam end cap, painted. Steel Beams, Ref. Struct.- Painted Finish. Steel Column, Ref. Struct.- Painted Finish. 7" 5" Round Downspout with elbow and 24" extension, typ. Level 1 100' - 0" Gutter 32" o.c.; aligned with standing seams at roof. 5" half round gutter & screen, with one gutter expansion joint. 7 Enlarged Roof and Flashing Detail 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 6 Enlarged Roof and Soffit Detail 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 5 Enlarged Gutter Detail 1 1/2" = 1'-0" Steel structure, painted- typical. New automatic entry doors as scheduled. 7.5 Berridge Zee Lock standing seam metal roof Flashing with drip edge NEW CANOPY CONSTRUCTION (Demolish existing canopy back to Column Line 'G'.) G EXISTING CANOPY CONSTRUCTION TO REMAIN 4 South Entrance Canopy Elevation 1/4" = 1'-0" Closure Angles Set Between Channels (Cut Around Channel Profile), Ref. Struct. - Paint exposed faces. Clip Angles Set Between Channels, Paint exposed faces. Steel Beam, Ref. Struct. - Paint exposed faces. Joint and Joint Sealant New Structured Polycarbonate Panel Assembly, match existing as closely as possible. 4" 3" Existing Structured Polycarbonate Panel Assembly Existing 2" tube steel Purlins - Paint. E7 5' - 6" C 11' - 6" E8 11' - 6" 5' - 6" C E9 E.4 Provide a 1 1/2"x1 1/2"x1/8" Aluminum Vertical Angle Against Building From Underside of Roof to Bottom of Tube Beam. Secure to Stucture and Seal Against Bldg. with Sealant. 9 4" 2 1/2" 2 1/2" Enlarged Roof Detail 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 1" 7 A-2.1C Steel Channels to Overhang Tube Beam by 4" At Ends, Ref. Struct. 4" Light gauge metal 24" o.c., span between beams to support soffit panels. Metal Soffit Panels: 10" flat panel with concealed fasteners; painted finish. MBCI Artisan L-10 or equal. Metal J-Bead Trim at perimeter, typical. E.4 E.6 F F.4 2-1/2" Coring through Second Floor Beam to accommodate Elect. Conduit & Condensate Piping; Ref. MEP. Reglet cut into Existing Concrete Beam Berridge Zee Lock Standing Seam Roof New 2" tube steel purlins, Ref. Struct.- painted finish. New Tube steel beam, Ref. Struct.- painted finish. New steel erection plate welded inside of tube, Ref. Struct.- painted finish. New Tube steel beam, Ref. Struct.- painted finish. 4" Channels, Painted where exposed. Steel Beam, Ref. Struct.- painted where exposed. Metal Soffit Panels: 10" flat panel w/ concealed fasteners; painted finish. MBCI Artisan L-10 or equal. 5 5" Half Round Gutter & Screen A-2.1D with one gutter expansion joint. 8 Enlarged Connection Detail at New Canopy 1 1/2" = 1'-0" NEW CANOPY CONSTRUCTION DEMO EXISTING CANOPY CONSTRUCTION BACK TO COLUMN LINE 'G'. REF DETAIL 8/A2.1C G Existing Tube Steel Beam - Paint. Existing Tree Column - Paint. EXISTING CANOPY CONSTRUCTION 8 A-2.1C 9 A-2.1C 5 A-2.1D E7 E8 E9 NEW STANDING SEAM SHED ROOF NEW CANOPY STRUCTURE (Match Existing) Existing is demolished back to column line 'G' Ref. Detail 8/A2.1C 2" / 1'-0" E.4 E.6 F F.4 G Existing Areaway B D.S. Splashblock 1/2" Drop 100A.. A NEW FLATWORK TRANSITION SLAB South Vestibule 101 SLOPE 1" 100B... 1/2" Drop PIPE HANDRAIL B D.S. Splashblock 5 A-2.1D 15' - 0" 8' - 4 1/2" 7' - 7" 8' - 4" 15' - 11" 23' - 4 1/2" E.6 F F.4 Villa Tranchese Renovations San Antonio Housing Authority 307 Marshall Street, San Antonio, TX Slope 2:12 EXISTING CANOPY STRUCTURE 6 A-2.1C Light, Ref. Elec. Storefront as sched. Column, Ref. Struct.- Painted. New Canopy Tree Column, Ref. Struct.- Painted. 5" Round Downspout with elbow & 24" extension SLOPE 1" New Transition Slab Existing Pier, Ref. Struct. New Grade Beam, Ref. Struct. New Grade Beam (beyond), Ref. Struct.; Ties into existing piers. 5 A-2.1C 8' - 3" Bottom of Steel NEW SIDEWALK EXISTING SIDEWALK 1-1/2" Dia. Steel Pipe Handrail and Posts, 34" High- Painted. Existing Canopy Tree Column Existing Concrete Flatwork 1" Joint with Expansion Filler New Conc. Flatwork Existing Grade Beam (beyond). Existing Piers Level 1 100' - 0" NOTE: Re-paint existing steel canopy structure to match new steel canopy structure Roof Plan - South Entrance Vestibule 3 South Airlock Vestibule PLAN NORTH Enlarged Plan of South Airlock Vestibule 2 1 1/4" = 1'-0" 1/8" = 1'-0" 1/4" = 1'-0" 3 A-2.1C N E7 5' - 6" 11' - 6" 11' - 6" 5' - 6" 7.5 E A-2.1C 34' - 0" VERIFY E9 G N PLAN NORTH REVISIONS DATE: Issue Date DRAWN BY: Author CHECKED BY: Checker PROJECT NUMBER: 1001 SHEET NAME ENLARGED SOUTH ENTRANCE CANOPY SHEET NUMBER A-2.1C

472 A E8 Existing Concrete Beam, Patch & Repair as Required to Accomodate New Construction, Apply Paint Finish E7 Existing Concrete Beam - Painted Level 2 114' - 8" Flash and Counter Flashing over Existing Beam and Columns, Re: Details 6 and 7 on this Sheet. Level 2 114' - 8" Reglet saw-cut into Existing Concrete Beam 9" Galv. Metal Flashing Secure with Metal Cleats and Set Into Sealant Bead in Reglet Peel & Stick Waterproof sheet flashing Wall construction: Galv. sheet metal Peel & Stick Waterproof sheet flashing 5/8" DensDeck Sheathing, R13 Insulation 3-5/8" metal 16" OC. NOTE: paint entire inside face wall assembly 10" 1' - 1 1/4" 1' - 0" 5" 8' - 4 1/2" E8 16' - 9" 8' - 4 1/2" Structured Polycarbonate Panel Roof Assembly, Match Existing 5" Level 2 114' - 8" 1' - 0" New Storefront as Scheduled Existing Concrete Column, Painted 2-1/2" dia. hole, cored through existing beam to accommodate electrical conduit, ref. MEP. Galv. Sheet Metal Flashing & Counter-flashing, Secure with Metal Cleats 9" 1' - 1" 7 1/2" 2 1/2" 7' - 3" 3 North Airlock Vestibule Elevation 1/4" = 1'-0" Pair of 6'-0" Automatic Sliders. See Window Type "F", Sheet 6.1 or Door Type "AS", Sheet 6.0. Level 1 100' - 0" Base flashing, Flash into Existing Roof and to Existing Concrete Parapet. 12' - 5" Steel Tree Column to Match Existing, Ref: Structural Drawings - Painted Existing Storefront. Install translucent film at inside face, Top pane of glass, typical - Ref. Window schedule. Cant Strip, set in continuous bed of sealant 3' - 10" 1 1/2" Dia. Steel Pipe Handrail and Posts, Painted 1' - 4" Slope 2' - 10" Top of Handrail New Concrete Flatwork Level 1 100' - 0" Slope E7 E8 Concrete Beam Re: Structural Existing Roof Drain Existing Concrete Canopy Structure 1" Metal Subgirt, 16 24" o.c. Metal Soffit Panels: 10" flat panel w/ concealed fasteners; painted finish. MBCI Artisan L-10 or equal. Existing Concrete Beam - Painted Existing Concrete Column beyond Sealant Reglet saw-cut into Existing Concrete Beam Flashing & Counter-Flashing Peel & Stick Waterproof sheet flashing Wall construction: Galv. sheet metal Peel & Stick Waterproof sheet flashing 5/8" DensDeck Sheathing, R13 Insulation 3-5/8" metal 16" OC. NOTE: paint entire inside face of wall assembly. 6 Enlarged Roof Detail 'A' South Entrance Canopy 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 5 1/2" = 1'-0" A 9" 1' - 1 1/4" 1' - 1" Level 2 114' - 8" Reglet cut into Existing Concrete Beam 2-1/2" Coring through Second Floor Beam to accommodate Elect. Conduit & Condensate Piping; Ref. MEP. New wall construction to enclose vestibule Existing Concrete Canopy Structure A.1 A 6 A-2.1D Level 2 114' - 8" 2 Roof Plan - North Airlock Vestibule 1/4" = 1'-0" 4 A-2.1D Existing Concrete Canopy 6 A-2.1D Sim 7 A-2.1D New Roof Infill A.1 A Villa Tranchese Renovations San Antonio Housing Authority 307 Marshall Street, San Antonio, TX Galv. Sheet Metal Flashing & Counter-flashing 2-1/2" dia. hole, cored through existing beam to accommodate electrical conduit, ref. MEP. Base flashing 10" Existing Concrete Column, painted. Storefront as sched. Shallow Junction Box Light, Ref. Elec. Escutcheon trim plate Metal Soffit Panels: 10" flat panel w/ concealed fasteners; painted finish. MBCI Artisan L-10 or equal, on 1" Metal Subgirt, 16 24" o.c. E7 17' - 0" VERIFY E8 Existing Storefront. Install translucent film at inside face, Top pane of glass, typical - Ref. Window schedule. New Airlock Vestibule 1/2" drop at threshold Existing concrete column beyond- Painted, typical. A.1 REVISIONS Cant Strip, set in continuous bed of sealant Slope Level 1 100' - 0" 1/2" Drop North Vestibule 102 7' - 1 1/2" VERIFY A DATE: Issue Date DRAWN BY: Author CHECKED BY: Checker PROJECT NUMBER: 1001 Existing flatwork, Ref. Plan SHEET NAME Existing Concrete Canopy Structure Slope new concrete transition slab to match existing New Grade Beam, Ref. Struct., tied to existing piers ENLARGED NORTH ENTRANCE CANOPY SHEET NUMBER 1" Metal Subgirt, 16 24" o.c. Metal Soffit Panels: 10" flat panel w/ concealed fasteners; painted finish. MBCI Artisan L-10 or equal. 7 Enlarged Roof Detail 'B' 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 4 North Airlock Vestibule Enlarged Plan - North Airlock Vestibule 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 1/4" = 1'-0" A-2.1D

473 FIN. FLOOR MATERIALS LEGEND AL Aluminum GL Glass WD Flush wood, Solid core door HM Hollow metal NOTES 1. Install tempered or safety glass where required by code. 2. For aluminum door frames: See Window Types, Sheet A6.1. Fixed Sidelite REF. SCHEDULE Door Operator Bar Automatic Slider Door 2AS Automatic Slider Door Fixed Sidelite 6" REF. SCHEDULE Number Type Mat'l Width Height THK REF. SCHED. Door Operator Bar Automatic Sliding Door AS Fixed Sidelite Panel 2' - 7" 4' - 11" 6" SEE SCHEDULE SEE SCHEDULE ROLLING COUNTER SHUTTER CS DOOR SCHEDULE Frame Type SEE SCHEDULE Mat'l SEE SCHEDULE 2FL Frame Head Frame Jamb SEE SCHEDULE SEE SCHEDULE FL Frame Sill Hard ware Set SEE SCHEDULE 6" 6" 6" 6" 2GL Door Remarks / Notes 101A AS AL/GL 4' - 0" 8' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" A AL 32/A6.1 30/A6.1 25/A6.1 8 Automatic Slider 101B AS AL/GL 4' - 0" 8' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" A AL 32/A6.1 30/A6.1 25/A6.1 8 Automatic Slider 102 2AS AL/GL 6' - 0" 7' - 11" 0' - 1 3/4" F AL 32/A6.1 30/A6.1 25/A6.1 8 Automatic Slider 105 2GL AL/GL 6' - 0" 8' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" H AL 28/A6.1 28/A Sim FL WD 6' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 2" 2 HM 24/A6.1 24/A Verify height with existing conditions 110 GL AL/GL 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" J AL 28/A6.1 28/A Sim. 111 FL WD 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" K AL 28/A6.1 28/A Sim. 112 FL WD 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" M AL 28/A6.1 27/A Sim. 113 FL WD 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" 1 HM 24/A6.1 24/A FL WD 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" 1 HM 24/A6.1 24/A A CS AL 6' - 4" 4' - 4" 0' - 1 3/4" /A /A6.1 8 Rolling Counter Shutter 119 FL WD 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" G AL 28/A6.1 28/A Sim. 120 FL WD 3' - 0" 7' - 0" 0' - 1 3/4" 1 HM 24/A6.1 24/A DOOR TYPES 1/4" = 1'-0" 1' - 6" 8" 6" 1' - 0" SEE SCHEDULE 6" 6" GL 1' - 6" 8" 6" 1' - 0" Room Number Room Name Floor Finish GROUND FLOOR ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE Base North South East West Finish Wall Wall Wall Wall Ceiling Finish Ceiling Height Remarks 100 Entry Lobby TERR RB / LAM WD / PT PT / STF WD / PT PT ACT/ GYP VARIES 2, 3 100A Rear Entry TERR RB / LAM PT / STF WD / PT PT PT ACT/ GYP VARIES 2, 3 Lobby 101 South VCT -- STF / PT STF / PT STF / PT STF / PT SOF VARIES 5, 6 Vestibule 102 North VCT -- STF / PT STF / PT STF / PT STF / PT SOF 8'-0" 5 Vestibule 103 Elevator Existing Existing Existing Existing Existing Existing Existing Stairs Existing Existing Existing Existing Existing Existing Existing Dining Room TERR RB / LAM BRK PT / STF WD/PT/STF WD/BRK/PT ACT/ GYP VARIES 2, Storage Existing RB PT PT PT PT Existing Hall TERR RB PT STF STF -- ACT 11'-0" Mech. Rm. Existing Existing Existing Existing Existing Existing Existing Game Room RV RB PT / STF BRK BRK STF / PT ACT/ GYP VARIES 2, H.O.A. RV RB BRK STF / PT BRK STF / PT ACT/ GYP VARIES 2, 3, Kitchen Vest. CFT CT PT PT PT/STF -- ACT 11'-0" 113 Pantry CFT CT PT PT PT PT ACT 9'-0" 114 Kitchen CFT CT PT/ CT PT/ CT PT/ CT PT/ CT GYP 9'-0" Hall RV RB PT PT -- PT ACT 9'-0" Men Existing Existing Existing Existing Existing Existing Existing Jan. Existing Existing Existing Existing Existing Existing Existing Women Existing Existing Existing Existing Existing Existing Existing Fitness Room FRF RB PT PT PT PT ACT 11'-0" 120 Network Rm. CONC RB PT PT PT PT GYP 9'-0" 121 Mail Room RV RB PT PT -- PT ACT 9'-0" Waiting RV RB PT PT PT PT ACT 9'-0" 123 Office RV RB PT PT PT PT ACT 9'-0" 124 Office RV RB PT PT PT PT ACT 9'-0" 125 Office RV RB PT PT PT PT ACT 9'-0" 126 Office RV RB PT PT PT PT ACT 9'-0" 127 Property Mgr. RV RB PT PT PT PT ACT 9'-0" 127A Storage RV RB PT PT PT PT Existing B Storage RV RB PT PT PT PT Existing Hall RV RB PT / STF PT ACT 9'-0" Hall RV RB PT PT / STF -- PT ACT 11'-0" Hall RV RB PT -- PT PT ACT 9'-0" Staff Conf. Existing RB PT PT PT PT ACT 9'-0" 132 Mech. Rm. Existing Existing Existing Existing Existing Existing Existing -- 3' - 4" 2" 3' - 0" 2" 6' - 4" 2" 6' - 0" 2" 2" 2" 7' - 0" 10 8' - 0" 4" 1' - 11" 1" 2' - 3" 1" 2' - 4" Wood Wall Paneling Detail 3/4" = 1'-0" 1' - 6" 1' - 6" 1' - 6" 1' - 6" 1' - 8 1/2" 0' - 3 1/2" 1' - 0" 0' - 3" NOTES: 1. WOOD SHALL BE TREATED TO ACHIEVE CLASS 'A' FIRE RATING AT LOBBY 100 & 100A. 2. EXTEND ALL EXISTING PULL STATIONS, ELECTRICAL OUTLETS, ALARM BOXES, ETC. TO FRONT OF WOOD PANELING, TYPICAL. GYP. WALL- PAINTED 1/2" MAPLE PLYWOOD, STAINED & FINISHED. ATTACH TO WALL WITH CONSTRUCTION ADHESIVE AND/OR INVISIBLE TOE NAILS. 11 A-6.0 1" METALLIC LAMINATE REVEAL GYP. BOARD ON METAL STUD WALL CONSTRUCTION AS SCHED. 11 A-6.0 1" METALLIC LAMINATE REVEAL METALLIC LAMINATE BASE, ADHERED TO WALL. GLOSS PAINTED FINISH 1/4" PLYWOOD BACK FIXED 3/4" PLYWOOD SHELVES WITH 1X2 HARDWOOD EDGE, TYPICAL 1X3 HARDWOOD CLEATS SECURED TO WALL WITH 1/4" TOGGLE 24" O.C. AT CMU OR 16" O.C. AT STUD WALLS. RECESS SCREWS & CAULK HOLES TO ACHIEVE SMOOTH FINISH. 1X3 WOOD STILES LET INTO SHELVES AT 36" O.C. MAX. 3/4" PLYWOOD BOTTOM 2X4 WOOD FRAMING BASE AS SCHEDULED 7' - 6" 5' - 0" 2' - 6" 2' - 0" 1' - 8" 0' - 4" 3 1/2" 1' - 2 1/2" 1' - 2" 1' - 2" 1' - 2" 1' - 3" 1' - 3" 1' - 0 1/2" 1' - 2" NOTE: WOOD SHALL BE TREATED TO ACHIEVE CLASS 'A' FIRE RATING AT LOBBY 100 & 100A. 2' - 0" 1/2" 1 1/2" 1" Enlarged Reveal Detail at Wood Wall Paneling 11 3" = 1'-0" 9 Millwork Section: Bench at Lobby 3/4" = 1'-0" 1/2" MAPLE PLYWOOD, STAINED & FINISHED. CONSTRUCTION ADHESIVE METALLIC LAMINATE ADHERED TO WALL 1" REVEAL NOTE: WOOD SHALL BE TREATED TO ACHIEVE CLASS 'A' FIRE RATING AT LOBBY 100 & 100A. GYP. BOARD ON METAL STUD WALL CONSTRUCTION AS SCHED. 3/4" MAPLE PLYWOOD TOP, SIDES AND BOTTOM- STAINED AND FINISHED 1X3 SOLID MAPLE EDGING, DOVETAILED INTO BENCH TOP. EASE EDGES, STAIN & FINISH. 2X4 WOOD FRAMING METALLIC LAMINATE BASE, ADHERED TO FACE. 3/4" MAPLE PLYWOOD TOP, SIDES AND BOTTOM 3/4" MDF DOORS WITH MAPLE VENEER AND 3/16" MAPLE EDGEBAND K&V #255 STANDARDS WITH #243 SHELF SUPPORTS 3/4" MAPLE PLYWOOD FIXED SHELF WITH 1X2 HARDWOOD EDGE 1/4" MAPLE PLYWOOD BACK 3/4" MAPLE PLYWOOD ADJUSTABLE SHELVES WITH 1X2 HARDWOOD EDGE 2X4 WOOD FRAMING 1" REGLET REVEAL JOINT, REF. INTERIOR ELEVATIONS. 3' - 8" SEE ELEVATIONS 2' - 0" SEE ELEVATIONS 8 2' - 6" 1/4" MAPLE PLYWOOD BACK LET INTO BOTTOM OF CABINET 1' - 0" CLEAR DOOR FRAME TYPE 1/4" = 1'-0" 2'-4" MIN. CLR. Millwork Section: Computer Workstations 3/4" = 1'-0" 2'-4" MIN. CLR. MAPLE PLYWOOD CAP, STAINED AND FINISHED. 7' - 2" MAPLE EDGE TRIM- EASED EDGES, STAINED AND FINISHED. WALL CONSTRUCTION AS SCHED. 3" BLACK WIRE 3'-0" o.c. WITH REMOVABLE COVER PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" PLYWOOD COUNTERTOP WITH INTEGRALLY COVED 4" BACKSPLASH 1X3 WOOD FRAMING 11 GA. WORKSTATION BRACKET - 18" X 3'-0" o.c., MAXIMUM. BASE AS SCHEDULED SECURE UPPER CABINET TO WALL WITH A MINIMUM OF 3 EQUALLY SPACED SCREWS 3/4" MAPLE PLYWOOD TOP, BOTTOM AND SIDES 3/4" MAPLE PLYWOOD ADJUSTABLE SHELVES 3/4" MDF DOOR WITH MAPLE VENEER AND 3/16" MAPLE EDGEBAND FULL HEIGHT TILE BACKSPLASH 3" BLACK WIRE 3'-0" o.c. WITH REMOVABLE COVER PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" PLYWOOD COUNTERTOP, CONTINUOUS BEAD OF SEALANT AT BACKSPLASH 1X3 WOOD FRAMING 11 GA. WORKSTATION BRACKET - 18" X 3'-0" o.c., MAXIMUM. BASE AS SCHEDULED 7 SEE ELEVATIONS SEE ELEVATIONS SEE ELEVATIONS 1 SEE ELEVATIONS 7' - 2" FULL HEIGHT TILE BACKSPLASH, TYPICAL- REF. ELEVATIONS. 1X3 WOOD FRAMING BASE AS SCHEDULED 1/4" MAPLE PLYWOOD BACK LET INTO BOTTOM OF CABINET FULL HEIGHT TILE BACKSPLASH (INTEGRAL COVED 4" P.LAM. BACKSPLASH AT FITNESS RM. 119) 1/4" DUST COVER 1/4" MAPLE PLYWOOD BACK 3/4" MAPLE PLYWOOD FIXED SHELF AND 1X2 MAPLE CLEATS 2X4 WOOD FRAMING 2 0' - 6" MAX. 1' - 0" CLEAR 1' - 0" 2' - 0" 1' - 10" 2' - 0" Millwork Section: Accessible Sink 3/4" = 1'-0" 0' - 0 3/4" 0' - 8" MIN. 0' - 9" MIN. 0' - 0 3/4" 0' - 3" PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" PLYWOOD COUNTERTOP w/ FULL HEIGHT BACKSPLASH AND RETURN, CONT. BEAD OF SEALANT AT BACKSPLASH 3/4" MAPLE PLYWOOD 1X2 WOOD FRAMING 3/4" REMOVABLE MAPLE PLYWOOD PANEL 1X3 WOOD FRAMING SECURE UPPER CABINET TO WALL WITH A MINIMUM OF 3 EQUALLY SPACED ANCHORS 3/4" MAPLE PLYWOOD TOP, BOTTOM AND SIDES 3/4" MAPLE PLYWOOD ADJUSTABLE SHELVES UPPER CABINETS WHERE SHOWN IN ELEVATION 3/4" MDF DOOR WITH MAPLE VENEER AND 3/16" MAPLE EDGEBAND BACKSPLASH AND RETURN PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" PLYWOOD COUNTERTOP WITH CONT. BEAD OF SEALANT AT BACKSPLASH 1X3 WOOD FRAMING 3/4" MAPLE DRAWER FRONT 3/4" MDF DOOR WITH MAPLE VENEER AND 3/16" EDGEBAND 3/4" MAPLE PLYWOOD BOTTOM BASE AS SCHEDULED 0' - 6" SEE H.C. SCHEDULE 0' - 0 1/4" 0' - 1 1/2" 0' - 0 1/4" VARIES 0' - 1 1/2" 1' - 6" FINISH LEGEND: 1' - 0" 6" FLOORING: CONC SEALED CONCRETE CFT CERAMIC FLOOR TILE, 12" SQUARE Product: American Olean, Urban Tones Series. VCT VINYL COMPOSITION TILE Single color of tile; no pattern. RV RESILIENT VINYL PLANK FLOORING Product: Mannington, Nature's Paths Select, Luxury Vinyl Plank FRF FITNESS ROOM FLOORING, 18" SQUARE RUBBER FLOOR TILE Product: Flexco, Series: Evolving Styles, 18"x18" Tile;.100" thickness. TERR EXISTING TERAZZO - Refinished. EXIST EXISTING TO REMAIN BASE: RB RUBBER BASE LAM METALLIC LAMINATE BASE (At Wood Wall Paneling) CT COVED CERAMIC TILE BASE, 6" x 12" American Olean, Urban Tones Series (To match floor tile). EXIST EXISTING TO REMAIN WALLS: PT PAINTED FINISH WD WOOD PANELING Product: Maple plywood, stained & sealed. See Interior Elevations & Finish Plan A9.0 for extents of work. BRK Existing brick wall finish (to remain) - protect during construction. CT CERAMIC WALL TILE BACKSPLASH Products: Interceramic IC Brites, 3"x6" size glazed porcelain tile, and American Olean, Solare Glass Mosaics, 2"x1" size. See 2/A6.0 for pattern. STF STOREFRONT GLAZING SYSTEM EXIST EXISTING TO REMAIN CEILING: ACT 2'x2' SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE GYP GYPSUM BOARD, PAINTED. SOF 10" SOFFIT PANELS, GLOSS PAINTED FINISH. CABINETS: WD SOLID WOOD CABINETS COUNTERTOPS: LAM PLASTIC LAMINATE Product: Wilsonart Premium Laminate, w/ 'Aeon' Enhanced Performance. Color: As selected by architect from mfgr's full range of patterns. REVEALS IN WOOD PANELING: METALLIC LAMINATE Product: Wilsonart, Decorative Metals Plastic Laminate Color: #6311 Silver Stria (Run grain vertically) Alternative No. 1 - DEDUCT - Plastic laminate countertops on 3/4" plywood, in lieu of Solid Surfacing Material (Corian, Price Group 3), at HOA 111 and Kitchen 114. Alternative No. 2 - DEDUCT - VCT in lieu of Resilient Vinyl flooring, designated RV. Alternative No. 3 - DEDUCT - Delete refinishing of Terazzo flooring. 3'-0" AFF Line of Upper Cabinets, Above. Glazed Porcelain Tile, 3" x 6", Running Bond Pattern Glass Mosaic Tile, 1" x 2", Running Bond Pattern Countertop GENERAL NOTES: 1. ALL HOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAMES TO BE PAINTED. 2. ALL EXISTING DOORS AND DOOR FRAMES THAT REMAIN SHALL BE RE-PAINTED. 3. INSTALL CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARD BEHIND CABINETS AND BACKSPLASH AT KITCHEN. 4. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WITH THE M.E.P. DRAWINGS AND SHALL THICKEN WALLS AS REQUIRED TO INSTALL M.E.P. ITEMS CALLED FOR. VERIFY WITH THE ARCHITECT THICKENED WALLS THAT MAY EFFECT HANDICAPPED ACCESS REQUIREMENTS. 5. SEAL ALL GAPS BTWN MEP SYSTEMS WHERE THEY PENETRATE WALLS, FLOORS, CEILINGS, FIRE ASSEMBLIES, AND ROOFING. 6. SEE REFLECTED CEILING PLANS WHERE CEILING HEIGHTS VARY, SHEET A REVIEW INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR SPECIAL CONDITIONS RELATING TO FINISHES. 8. REFER TO RCP, SHEET A8.0 FOR ROLLER BLIND SCHEDULE. 9. ALL COLORS SHALL BE AS SELECTED BY ARCHITECT. 10. PROVIDE MANUFACTURER STANDARD TRANSITION STRIPS FOR ALL FLOORING MATERIALS. PROVIDE MARBLE THRESHOLD FOR CERAMIC TILE TRANSITION. FINISH SCHEDULE REMARKS: 1. OWNER IS INSTALLING NEW ELEVATORS. SCHEDULE AND COORDINATE WORK AT THIS AREA WITH THE OWNER. 2. INSTALL WOOD PANELING WAINSCOT, 7'-0" HIGH, ON ALL FREESTANDING MONUMENTAL COLUMNS, TYPICAL THIS ROOM. REFER TO INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AND FINISH PLAN, SHEET A REFER TO INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR SPECIAL CONDITIONS AT WALL FINISHES. 4. SEE 2/A6.0 FOR BACKSPLASH TILE PATTERN. 5. PAINT ALL EXPOSED STEEL AT NORTH AIRLOCK VESTIBULE, SOUTH AIRLOCK VESTIBULE, AND SOUTH ENTRANCE CANOPY. 6. RE-PAINT EXISTING STEEL CANOPY SUPPORT STRUCTURE AT SOUTH ENTRANCE (REF. SHEET A2.1C). INTENT IS TO ACHIEVE A SEAMLESS APPEARANCE BETWEEN OLD AND NEW. 2'-10" AFF 1' - 0" 8" 1' - 8" 1' - 6" 6" 2' - 0" Line of Upper Cabinets, Above. Glazed Porcelain Tile, 3" x 6", Running Bond Pattern Glass Mosaic Tile, 1" x 2", Running Bond Pattern Countertop Villa Tranchese Renovations REVISIONS DATE: Issue Date DRAWN BY: Author CHECKED BY: Checker PROJECT NUMBER: 1001 SHEET NAME SHEET NUMBER San Antonio Housing Authority 307 Marshall Street, San Antonio, TX DOOR & ROOM FINISH SCHEDULES, MILLWORK DETAILS 6 Millwork Section: Built-In Shelving 5 Millwork Section: Tall Cabinets Millwork Section Millwork Section 4 3 3/4" = 1'-0" 3/4" = 1'-0" 3/4" = 1'-0" 3/4" = 1'-0" 2 Tile Pattern at Backsplash 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 2'-6" AFF A-6.0

474 4" NOTES: 1. NEW STOREFRONT PROFILE SHALL MATCH EXISTING. 2. INSTALL TEMPERED OR SAFETY GLASS IN AREAS REQ'D BY CODE. 3. SET WINDOW SUBSILLS, HEAD AND JAMB RECEPTORS IN CONTINUOUS BED OF SEALANT. 4. TURN SUBSILLS AND FLASHING MEMBRANE 6" UP AT JAMBS TO FORM END DAMS. 5. INSTALL ONE WINDOW FOR ARCHITECT'S INSPECTION BEFORE PROCEEDING. 6. FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS PRIOR TO FABRICATION OR INSTALLATION. 33 6" Head/Sill Transom 3" = 1'-0" 4" STEEL STRUCTURE - REFER TO STRUCTURAL SEALANT AND BACKER ROD AT BOTH SIDES, TYP. SHIM AS REQUIRED DOOR OPERATOR BAR 28 4" 1 3/4" Storefront Door Jamb Sidelite 3" = 1'-0" DOOR AS SCHEDULED 5/8" GYP. BD. ON METAL 16" O.C. SEALANT AND BACKER ROD AT BOTH SIDES, TYP. SHIM AS REQUIRED 24 Head/Jamb Detail 3" = 1'-0" 5/8" GYP. BD. METAL STUDS AT 16" O.C., TYP. METAL BOX STUD BEAM TYPICAL AT HEADER, PROVIDE DBL STUDS AT JAMB, TYP. SEALANT AT BOTH SIDES, TYP. FRAME AS SCHEDULED DOOR AS SCHEDULED /4" 4" Storefront Head Detail 3" = 1'-0" STEEL BEAM - REFER TO STRUCTURAL SHIM AS NEEDED BACKER ROD AND SELANT AT BOTH SIDES HEAD GLAZING /4" 4" Storefront Head Receptor Detail 3" = 1'-0" LINE OF EXISTING CONCRETE STRUCTURE OR STEEL BEAM HEAD RECEPTOR HEAD GLAZING 6" LINE OF STEEL OR EXISTING CONCRETE STRUCTURE- VERIFY IN FIELD. DOOR OPERATOR BAR DOOR AND FRAME AS SCHEDULED 4" 1 3/4" 5/8" GYP. BD. AT BOTH SIDES OF METAL 16" O.C. DOUBLE STUDS AT JAMB, TYP. 1 3/4" CORNER BEADS, TYP AT BOTH SIDES 5/8" GYP. BD. AT BOTH SIDES OF METAL 16" O.C. DOUBLE STUDS AT JAMB, TYP. 4" GLAZING JAMB 1 3/4" 4" CORNER GUARDS, TYP. 4" 32 Sliding Door System Head Detail 3" = 1'-0" 4" STEEL OR EXISTING CONCRETE - VERIFY SEALANT AT BOTH SIDES, TYP. SHIM AS NEEDED 1 3/4" 27 4" Int Storefront Door Jamb Interior 3" = 1'-0" EXISTING GYP. BD. WALL SEALANT AND BACKER ROD AT BOTH SIDES, TYP. SHIM AS REQUIRED DOOR AND FRAME AS SCHEDULED 23 Storefront Jamb Gyp. Bd 3" = 1'-0" SEALANT AT BOTH SIDES, TYP. STOREFRONT SYSTEM AS SPECIFIED 4" 20 Storefront Jamb Gyp. Bd. 3" = 1'-0" 1 3/4" SEALANT AT BOTH SIDES, TYP. STOREFRONT SYSTEM AS SPECIFIED EXISTING CONCRETE STRUCTURE 16 Storefront Center Mullion Detail 3" = 1'-0" 1 3/4" LINE OF EXISTING CONCRETE STRUCTURE OR STEEL TUBE COLUMN JAMB GLAZING SHIM AS NEEDED 4" 31 Sliding Door Sidelite Jamb Detail 3" = 1'-0" 4" JAMB 1/4" GLASS JAMB RECEPTOR LINE OF WALL BEYOND ROLLING COUNTER SHUTTER TRACK ROLLING COUNTER SHUTTER AS SCHED. 1' - 0" KITCHEN /4" 1 3/4" SLIDING GLASS DOOR AS SPECIFIED SEALANT AT BOTH SIDES, TYP. SHIM AS REQUIRED 4" /4" Storefront Door Jamb Interior 3" = 1'-0" ALTERNATE 4" METAL STUD BRACING TO 48" O.C. 4" METAL STUDS AT 16" O.C. TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK (TYP) 19 Storefront Jamb Concrete or Brick 3" = 1'-0" 4" BACKER ROD AND CONTINUOS BEAD OF SEALANT AT BOTH SIDES 15 Storefront Jamb Receptor Detail 3" = 1'-0" STOREFRONT SYSTEM SLIDING DOOR AS SCHEDULED 4" GLAZING 34 COUNTERTOP 1X2 MAPLE TRIM - STAINED AND FINISHED WALL CONSTRUCTION AS SCHEDULED Rolling Counter Shutter Sill Detail 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 4' - 10" 7 A-2.1D 15' - 8" 6' - 0" CABINET AS SCHEDULED 4' - 10" 3' - 0" Sliding Door System Jamb Detail 3" = 1'-0" Sliding Glass Door Threshold Detail 3" = 1'-0" 27 A-6.1 APPLY TRANSLUCENT FILM TO INTERIOR FACE OF GLAZING 4" 22 A-6.1 5' - 2 1/32" 3' - 0" 1' /32" 26 A-6.1 DOOR AS SCHED. 4" 5' - 6" 2' - 6" 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 11' - 0" SLIDING GLASS SYSTEM DOOR AS SCHEDULED METAL THRESHOLD SET IN BED OF SEALANT 23 A-6.1 SIM 19 A-6.1 SIM Sliding Door System Sill Detail 25 3" = 1'-0" 22 A-6.1 7' - 4" 3' - 8" 3' - 8" 2' - 6" 5' - 6" 8' - 0" 3' - 0" 11' - 0" 19 A A-6.1 SET SUBSILL IN BED OF SEALANT CONCRETE SLAB - REFER TO STRUCTURAL 22 A ' - 0" 3' - 1" 3' - 0" 3' - 11" 28 A-6.1 DOOR AS SCHED. 22 2' - 6" 5' - 6" 8' - 0" 3' - 0" 11' - 0" 1 3/4" Storefront Head Interior 3" = 1'-0" 19 A A-6.1 4" 22 A-6.1 7' - 3" 1' - 6" 3' - 0" 2' - 9" DOOR AS SCHED. 28 A-6.1 CEILING AS SCHEDULED AT BOTH SIDES 2' - 6" 5' - 6" SEALANT AT BOTH SIDES STOREFRONT SYSTEM AS SPECIFIED 1/4" GLAZING 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 11' - 0" 19 A A /4" 8' - 2" 22 A-6.1 1' - 1" 3' - 0" 3' - 0" 1' - 1" 28 A-6.1 DOOR AS SCHEDULED 4" Interior Storefront Sill Detail 3" = 1'-0" 5' - 6" 2' - 6" 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 11' - 0" 1/4" GLASS SILL CONTINUOUS BEAD OF SEALANT FLOOR FINISH AS SCHEDULED SHIM AS NEEDED 19 A A-6.1 4' - 4" 22 A /4" SIM 14 Storefront SubSill Detail 3" = 1'-0" 4' - 4" 16' - 0" 3' - 0" DOOR AS SCHED. 28 A-6.1 4' - 4" SILL SET SUBSILL IN BED OF SEALANT CONTINUOUS BEAD OF SEALANT AT BOTH SIDES EXISTING CONCRETE SLAB 2' - 6" 4' - 6" 2' - 0" 7' - 0" 9' - 0" Villa Tranchese Renovations San Antonio Housing Authority 307 Marshall Street, San Antonio, TX A A A A A A-6.1 SIM STAINED PLYWOOD PANELS 13 N 1/4" = 1'-0" TYPE: EXISTING STOREFRONT FRAME: EXISTING ALUMINUM GLASS: EXISTING GLASS 12 M 1/4" = 1'-0" TYPE: 4" STOREFRONT FRAME: ALUMINUM GLASS: 1/4" CLEAR GLASS 11 L 1/4" = 1'-0" TYPE: 4" STOREFRONT FRAME: ALUMINUM GLASS: 1/4" CLEAR GLASS 10 K 1/4" = 1'-0" TYPE: 4" STOREFRONT FRAME: ALUMINUM GLASS: 1/4" CLEAR GLASS 9 J 1/4" = 1'-0" TYPE: 4" STOREFRONT FRAME: ALUMINUM GLASS: 1/4" CLEAR GLASS 8 H 1/4" = 1'-0" TYPE: 4" STOREFRONT FRAME: ALUMINUM GLASS: 1/4" CLEAR GLASS 7 G 1/4" = 1'-0" TYPE: 4" STOREFRONT FRAME: ALUMINUM GLASS: 1/4" CLEAR GLASS 31 A A-6.1 3' - 0" 25 A ' - 0" Verify 29 A-6.1 6' - 0" 3' - 0" 5' - 1" 2' - 8" 6" 7' - 9" 8' - 3" Verify DOOR OPERATOR BAR FIXED PANEL SIDELITES AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOORS 15 A A-6.1 1' - 3" 14 A-6.1 2' - 6" 5' - 5" 4" 8' - 3" 17 A A A-6.1 5' - 8" 4" 2' - 6" 5' - 5" 8' - 3" 15 A A A-6.1 5' - 0" 5' - 6" 2' - 6" 3' - 0" 8' - 0" 11' - 0" 9' /16" 15 A ' - 0" 2' - 7" 14 A-6.1 8' - 0" 17 A A-6.1 1' - 5" 3' - 0" 5' - 6" 2' - 6" 11' - 0" DOOR OPERATOR BAR FIXED PANEL SIDELITE 31 A-6.1 AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR 4' - 1 3/4" 25 A-6.1 4' - 0" 29 A ' - 7" 6' - 3 1/2" 30 A A A-6.1 SIM 4' - 0" 32 A-6.1 4' - 1 3/4" 2' - 7" 4' - 11" 1' - 10" 7' - 6" 6" 9' - 10" STOREFRONT SYSTEM DOOR OPERATOR BAR FIXED PANEL SIDELITE AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR REVISIONS DATE: Issue Date DRAWN BY: Author CHECKED BY: Checker PROJECT NUMBER: 1001 SHEET NAME WINDOW SCHEDULE & DETAILS SHEET NUMBER 6 F 1/4" = 1'-0" TYPE: SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM FRAME:ALUMINUM GLASS: 1" TINTED LOW-E SYSTEM 5 E 1/4" = 1'-0" TYPE: 4" STOREFRONT FRAME: ALUMINUM GLASS: 1" TINTED LOW-E SYSTEM 4 D 1/4" = 1'-0" TYPE: 4" STOREFRONT FRAME:ALUMINUM GLASS: 1" TINTED LOW-E SYSTEM 3 C 1/4" = 1'-0" TYPE: 4" STOREFRONT FRAME:ALUMINUM GLASS: 1" TINTED LOW-E SYSTEM 2 B 1/4" = 1'-0" TYPE: 4" STOREFRONT FRAME:ALUMINUM GLASS: 1" TINTED LOW-E SYSTEM 1 A 1/4" = 1'-0" TYPE: SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM WITH STOREFRONT TRANSOM FRAME: ALUMINUM GLASS: 1" TINTED LOW-E SYSTEM A-6.1

475 Painted gyp. board, color by architect. C.J. 1" GYP. REVEAL PATTERN- PAINTED, TYP. C.J. C.J. LINE OF FURR DOWN, REF. RCP. 10 A-6.0 1' - 8" 1' - 8" 10 A-6.0 Stained plywood paneling, treated for Class 'A' fire rating Lights, Ref. Elec. 1" Gyp. Reveal Pattern - Painted, Typical. Existing door & frame, painted. INTERIOR ELEVATION NOTES: 1. PROVIDE STAINED MAPLE ON ALL EXPOSED SURFACES AND EDGES OF CASEWORK, ENDS, ETC., UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 2. WHERE NEW MAPLE PLYWOOD WALL PANELING IS TO BE INSTALLED, EXTEND ALL EXISTING PULL STATIONS, ELECTRICAL OUTLETS, ALARM PANELS, ETC. TO OUTSIDE FACE OF NEW WALL FINISH. 3. EXPOSED WALL UNDER COUNTERS TO RECEIVE FINISH AS SCHED. OPEN TO BEYOND MAILBOXES BEYOND 7' - 0" 2' - 3" 2' - 3" 1" 1" 1" 7' - 0" WOOD PANELING 9 A-6.0 5' - 6" Top of Fixture 2' - 4" 2' - 3" 1' - 11" 1" 1" 7' - 0" WOOD PANELING 4. ALL SHELVES IN CABINETS AND BOOKCASES SHALL BE ADJUSTABLE, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 5. FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS PRIOR TO FABRICATING MILLWORK IN ORDER TO ASSURE PROPER FIT WITH BUILDING CONDITIONS. 6. MODIFY MILLWORK/CASEWORK AS REQUIRED FOR COLUMN BUMP- OUT AND FURRING TO CONCEAL CONDUITS, PIPES, ETC., RE: ARCHITECTURAL, STRUCTURAL, AND MEP DRAWINGS FOR POTENTIAL LOCATIONS. 7. PROVIDE CONTROL JOINTS AS SHOWN, AND AS SPECIFIED, MAX. 30' OC. LOW WALL WITH WOOD CAP BASE AS SCHED., TYP. EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME- PAINTED (BEYOND). LOW WALL WITH 1" GYP. REVEAL PATTERN Stained plywood paneling, treated for Class 'A' fire rating Wood bench Elevator controls and existing plaque; relocate to front of wood paneling. New Elevators (N.I.C.); coordinate work with owner. 4" 8. REFER TO SHEETS A0.1 AND A0.2 FOR ADA COMPLIANCE DETAILS, NOTES & MOUNTING HEIGHTS. 9. ALL COLORS SHALL BE AS SELECTED BY ARCHITECT. NEW TRANSLUCENT FILM AT INTERIOR FACE OF GLAZING, REF. WINDOW SCHEDULE 11 Entry Lobby Looking West 1/4" = 1'-0" 10 Entry Lobby - Looking North 1/4" = 1'-0" EXISTING AUTOMATIC SLIDER DOOR AND STOREFRONT SYSTEM Painted gyp. board, color by architect. GYP. WALL BOARD WITH 1" REGLET REVEAL PATTERN- PAINTED, TYP. Stained plywood paneling, treated for Class 'A' fire rating 1" GYP. BOARD REVEAL PATTERN, PAINTED- TYPICAL. LINE OF FURR DOWN, REF. RCP Painted gyp. bd. GYP. BOARD- PAINTED. 1" Gyp. Board Reglet Reveal- Painted, Typ. 10 A A-6.0 7' - 0" 2' - 3" 1" 2' - 3" 2' - 3" 1" 2' - 3" 1" 2' - 3" 2' - 3" 1" 1" 7' - 0" 2' - 0" 2' - 4" 1" 1" 2' - 3" 1' - 11" 4" 7' - 0" 1" WOOD PANELING 1" 2' - 3" 2' - 3" 1" 1" 2' - 3" 7' - 0" PLYOOD PANEL 9 A-6.0 2' - 0" BENCH Existing fire cabinet to remain 2' - 4" 1" 1" 2' - 3" 1' - 11" 4" 7' - 0" PLYWOOD PANEL BASE AS SCHED. Base as sched. 9 Rear Entry Lobby 100A - Looking North Rear Entry Lobby 100A - Looking South 8 1/4" = 1'-0" 1/4" = 1'-0" Metallic laminate base at wood paneling. Elevator controls; relocate to front of wood paneling. New Elevators (N.I.C.); coordinate work with owner. BASE AS SCHED. STAINED PLYWOOD PANELING, TREATED FOR CLASS 'A' FIRE RATING. METALLIC LAMINATE BASE AT WOOD PANELING. 7 Entry Lobby 100 / 100A - Looking East 1/4" = 1'-0" NEW DOOR AND STOREFRONT SYSTEM AS SCHEDULED EXISTING BRICK TO REMAIN LINE OF FURR DOWN, REF. RCP EXISTING DOOR & FRAME, PAINTED, TYP. 1" GYP. REVEAL PATTERN- PAINTED, TYP. 1" GYP. REVEAL PATTERN- PAINTED, TYPICAL CEILING AS SCHED. 1" GYP. REGLET REVEAL PATTERN- PAINTED, TYP. 6 7' - 0" 5' - 1" 2' - 10" VERIFY Hall 115, Looking South 1/4" = 1'-0" 4' - 0" C.J. C.J. 8 PARCEL BOXES 4' - 8" NEW DOOR & FRAME AS SCHED. EXISTING DOOR & FRAME- PAINTED, TYPICAL. BASE AS SCHED. FRONT-LOADING PARCEL BOXES AS SPEC'D 1" 1" 2' - 3" 1" 2' - 3" 2' - 3" 7' - 0" EXISTING DOOR & STOREFRONT SYSTEM. PAINTED GYP. BOARD 1" GYP. REVEAL PATTERN- PAINTED, TYP. 5 GYP BD.- PAINTED. BASE AS SCHED. Hall 115, Looking North 1/4" = 1'-0" 2' - 3" 2' - 3" 2' - 3" 1" 1" 7' - 0" 1" EXISTING DOOR & STOREFRONT SYSTEM. Villa Tranchese Renovations San Antonio Housing Authority 307 Marshall Street, San Antonio, TX " 1" 1" 2' - 3" 2' - 3" 2' - 3" 7' - 0" OPEN TO BEYOND 1" 1" 2' - 3" 1" 2' - 3" 2' - 3" 7' - 0" BASE AS SCHED. BASE AS SCHED. 1" GYP. REVEAL PATTERN- PAINTED, TYPICAL 4 Hall Looking East 1/4" = 1'-0" CEILING AS SCHED. 1" GYP. REVEAL PATTERN- PAINTED, TYP. EXISTING DOORS AND FRAMES - PAINTED. 3 Hall Looking South 1/4" = 1'-0" C.J. C.J. PAINTED GYP. BOARD 1" GYP. REVEAL PATTERN- PAINTED, TYP. NEW DOOR & STOREFRONT SYSTEM AS SCHED. PAINTED GYP. BOARD 1" GYP. REVEALS, TYP. EXISTING DOOR & FRAME- PAINTED, TYPIACL. REVISIONS OPEN TO BEYOND 1" 1" 1" 2' - 3" 2' - 3" 7' - 0" 1" 1" 2' - 3" 1" 2' - 3" OPEN TO HALLWAY BEYOND LOW WALL WITH STAINED WOOD CAP 8 A-6.0 1" DATE: Issue Date DRAWN BY: Author CHECKED BY: Checker PROJECT NUMBER: ' - 3" 2' - 3" 2' - 3" 3' - 8" SHEET NAME INTERIOR ELEVATIONS EXIST. WATER FOUNTAIN TO REMAIN. EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME- PAINTED, TYP. BASE AS SCHED. BASE AS SCHED., TYP. SHEET NUMBER BASE AS SCHED. 2 Hall Looking West Hall Looking North 1 1/4" = 1'-0" 1/4" = 1'-0" A-7.0

476 NEW CEILING & LIGHTING AS SCHED. PAINTED GYP. BOARD 4' - 0" INTERIOR ELEVATION NOTES: 3' - 8" 1' - 2" 2' - 6" 8 A-6.0 NEW CEILING AND LIGHT FIXTURES OPEN TO BEYOND LOW WALL WITH WOOD CAP PLASTIC LAMINATE COUNTERTOP, 4" BACKSPLASH & RETURNS WORKSTATION 3' OC, MAX. BASE AS SCHED. PLASTIC LAMINATE COUNTERTOP, BACKSPLASH & RETURNS 7' - 0" 2' - 3" 2' - 3" 2' - 3" 1" 1" 1" C.J. 7' - 6" 75 MAILBOXES 2' - 10" 2' - 3" NEW CEILING & LIGHTING AS SCHED. PAINTED GYP. BD. 1" REVEAL PATTERN- PAINTED, TYP. FRONT-LOADING MAILBOXES AS SPEC'D VERIFY 5' - 1" 5' - 1" 2' - 10" 2' - 3" VERIFY 1" GYP. REVEAL PATTERN- PAINTED, TYP. 58 MAILBOXES 69 MAILBOXES 7' - 0" FRONT-LOADING MAILBOXES AS SPEC'D 1. PROVIDE STAINED MAPLE ON ALL EXPOSED SURFACES AND EDGES OF CASEWORK, ENDS, ETC., UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 2. WHERE NEW MAPLE PLYWOOD WALL PANELING IS TO BE INSTALLED, EXTEND ALL EXISTING PULL STATIONS, ELECTRICAL OUTLETS, ALARM PANELS, ETC. TO OUTSIDE FACE OF NEW WALL FINISH. 3. EXPOSED WALL UNDER COUNTERS TO RECEIVE FINISH AS SCHED. 4. ALL SHELVES IN CABINETS AND BOOKCASES SHALL BE ADJUSTABLE, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 5. FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS PRIOR TO FABRICATING MILLWORK IN ORDER TO ASSURE PROPER FIT WITH BUILDING CONDITIONS. 6. MODIFY MILLWORK/CASEWORK AS REQUIRED FOR COLUMN BUMP- OUT AND FURRING TO CONCEAL CONDUITS, PIPES, ETC., RE: ARCHITECTURAL, STRUCTURAL, AND MEP DRAWINGS FOR POTENTIAL LOCATIONS. 7. PROVIDE CONTROL JOINTS AS SHOWN, AND AS SPECIFIED, MAX. 30' OC. 15' - 0" 8 A-6.0 BASE AS SCHED. 1 1/8" 5' - 9" 2' - 0" 7' - 0" BASE AS SCHED. 8. REFER TO SHEETS A0.1 AND A0.2 FOR ADA COMPLIANCE DETAILS, NOTES & MOUNTING HEIGHTS. 10 Mail Room Looking South 9 Mail Room Looking West Mail Room Looking North 1/4" = 1'-0" 8 1/4" = 1'-0" 1/4" = 1'-0" 9. ALL COLORS SHALL BE AS SELECTED BY ARCHITECT. 3 A-6.0 SIM NEW CEILING FANS, REF. ELEC. PAINTED GYP. BD. PAINTED GYP BD UPPER CABINETS WITH (2) ADJ. SHELVES PLASTIC LAMINATE COUNTERTOP, INTEGRAL 4" BACKSPLASH AND RETURNS BASE CABINET W/ (1) SHELF BASE AS SCHED. 7' - 0" 2' - 6" 1' - 6" 3' - 0" 8' - 3" 2' - 6" 2' - 9" 3' - 0" 1 1/8" SPACER REF 2' - 6" 2' - 9" 6' - 0" 1' - 0" EXISTING DOORS AND FRAMES - PAINT, TYP. BASE AS SCHED. C.J. C.J. Level 1 100' - 0" NEW STOREFRONT SYSTEM AS SCHED. STAINED PLYWOOD PANELS IN STOREFRONT FRAME BASE AS SCHED. REF. CEILING FAN - REFER TO MEP REMOVE PAINTED FINISH FROM TOP AND BOTTOM PANES OF EXISTING STOREFRONT. APPLY TRANSLUCENT WINDOW FILM TO INTERIOR FACE OF GLASS. BASE AS SCHED. 5' - 3" 7 Fitness Room Looking West 6 Fitness Room Looking South Fitness Room Looking North 5 1/4" = 1'-0" 1/4" = 1'-0" 1/4" = 1'-0" COLUMN- PAINTED. NEW CEILING AND LIGHT AS SCHED. 4 7' - 0" Dining Room Looking North 1/4" = 1'-0" EXISTING BRICK WALL FINISH NEW CEILING FAN, REF. MEP 7' - 0" PAINT EXISTING DISPLAY CASES, SALVAGED AND RELOCATED FROM LOBBY EXISTING STOREFRONT WINDOW SYSTEMS BASE AS SCHED. Level 1 100' - 0" 3 NEW CEILING AS SCHED. EXISTING WALL MOUNT TELEVISION TO REMAIN EXISTING TELEVISION Dining Room Looking West 1/4" = 1'-0" EXISTING BRICK WALL FINISH EXISTING STOREFRONT WINDOW SYSTEM 7' - 0" PLYWOOD PANEL STAINED PLYWOOD PANELING, WRAP COLUMN. 1" 2' - 4" 1" 1' - 11" 2' - 3" 4" NEW STOREFRONT DOOR AND GLAZING AS SCHED. PAINTED GYP. BD. 7' - 0" PLYWOOD PANEL 10 A-6.0 EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME - PAINTED STAINED PLYWOOD PANELING WITH 1" REVEALS METALLIC LAMINATE BASE AT WOOD PANELING Level 1 100' - 0" Villa Tranchese Renovations San Antonio Housing Authority 307 Marshall Street, San Antonio, TX NEW CEILING AND LIGHT AS SCHED. NEW CEILING FAN - REF. MEP EXISTING STOREFRONT WINDOW SYSTEMS NEW CEILING AND LIGHT FIXTURES AS SCHED. PAINTED GYP. BD. 10 A-6.0 TYP. NEW DOOR & STOREFRONT SYSTEM AS SCHED. BEYOND WRAP EXISTING COLUMN WITH STAINED PLYWOOD PANELING STAINED PLYWOOD PANELING C.J. C.J. COLUMN- PAINTED. BASE AS SCHED. 7' - 0" PLYWOOD PANEL 1" 2' - 4" 1" 2' - 3" 4" 1' - 11" METALLIC LAMINATE BASE AT WOOD PANELING 34 A-6.1 DOORS AS. SCHED. WRAP EXISTING COLUMN WITH STAINED PLYWOOD PANELING ROLLING COUNTER SHUTTER 7' - 0" PLYWOOD PANEL Level 1 100' - 0" REVISIONS DATE: Issue Date DRAWN BY: Author CHECKED BY: Checker 2 Dining Room Looking South 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 Dining Room Looking East 1/4" = 1'-0" SERVING COUNTER PROJECT NUMBER: 1001 SHEET NAME INTERIOR ELEVATIONS SHEET NUMBER A-7.1

477 INTERIOR ELEVATION NOTES: 1. PROVIDE STAINED MAPLE ON ALL EXPOSED SURFACES AND EDGES OF CASEWORK, ENDS, ETC., UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 2. WHERE NEW MAPLE PLYWOOD WALL PANELING IS TO BE INSTALLED, EXTEND ALL EXISTING PULL STATIONS, ELECTRICAL OUTLETS, ALARM PANELS, ETC. TO OUTSIDE FACE OF NEW WALL FINISH. 6' - 0" 3' - 0" 3' - 0" 3. EXPOSED WALL UNDER COUNTERS TO RECEIVE FINISH AS SCHED. 4. ALL SHELVES IN CABINETS AND BOOKCASES SHALL BE ADJUSTABLE, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 2' - 3" 2' - 3" 2' - 3" 1" 1" 1" 7' - 0" 8' - 0" 3' - 0" 1' - 6" 3' - 6" SIM. 3 A-6.0 Counter shutter housing Upper Cabinets with (3) Adjustable Shelves Tile backsplash and Returns, ref. 2/A6.0 Plastic Laminate Countertop with cont. bead of Sealant at backsplash Corner Cabinet Base cabinets with (4) Drawers Rolling counter shutter housing Aluminum wall track for rolling counter shutter 42" high Upper Cabinets with (3) Adjustable Shelves Tile backsplash, Ref. 2/A6.0 Plastic Laminate Countertop with cont. bead of Sealant at backsplash Corner cabinet Base cabinets with (1) Shelf C.J. 3 A-6.0 SIM. C.J. 4' - 0" 3' - 0" 7' - 0" Door and frame as sched. Refrigerator beyond Existing Window 42" high Upper Cabinets with (3) Adjustable Shelves Tile backsplash, Ref. 2/A6.0 Plastic Laminate Countertop with cont. bead of Sealant at backsplash 4' - 6" 3' - 6" Exist. ICE 1' - 6" REF. 2' - 10" C.J. 7 A-6.0 H/C Sink C.J. 3 A-6.0 2" DW 3' - 6" 1' - 6" 3' - 0" 8' - 0" Dbl. Oven Painted Gyp. Board Existing door, paint frame. 24" deep cabinet abv. ovens. 5. FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS PRIOR TO FABRICATING MILLWORK IN ORDER TO ASSURE PROPER FIT WITH BUILDING CONDITIONS. 6. MODIFY MILLWORK/CASEWORK AS REQUIRED FOR COLUMN BUMP- OUT AND FURRING TO CONCEAL CONDUITS, PIPES, ETC., RE: ARCHITECTURAL, STRUCTURAL, AND MEP DRAWINGS FOR POTENTIAL LOCATIONS. 7. PROVIDE CONTROL JOINTS AS SHOWN, AND AS SPECIFIED, MAX. 30' OC. 8. REFER TO SHEETS A0.1 AND A0.2 FOR ADA COMPLIANCE DETAILS, NOTES & MOUNTING HEIGHTS. 9. ALL COLORS SHALL BE AS SELECTED BY ARCHITECT. 1" gyp. reveal reglets- painted. Base as sched. Door and Frame as sched. 2' - 0" 2' - 0" 1' - 9" 5' - 9" 2' - 6" 2' - 6" 5' - 0" Base as sched. Base cabinets with (1) Shelf Removable Maple kickplate, stained & finished. 16 Kitchen Looking South 1/4" = 1'-0" 15 Kitchen - Looking West 1/4" = 1'-0" 14 Kitchen Looking North 1/4" = 1'-0" Existing storefront window Upper Cabinet above Microwave with (1) Adjustable Shelf Microwave/Vent Hood Tile backsplash, Ref. 2/A6.0 Plastic Laminate Countertop with cont. bead of Sealant at backsplash Corner Cabinet 9' - 6" 3' - 6" 3' - 0" 3' - 0" 2' - 0" Range Kitchen Island 3' - 0" 3' - 0" 6' - 0" 4' - 0" 0' - 1 1/2" 2' - 6" Light, Ref. Elec. Plastic Laminate Countertop 0' - 2 1/2" Apron (2'-3" Min.) Counter Shutter Housing 2' - 10" 2-1/2" Maple Apron 4" Maple Support Post w/ Base as sched. Base Cabinets with (1) Shelf, and Finished Backs. Painted gyp bd. 42" high Upper Cabinets with (3) Adjustable Shelves Tile backsplash, Ref. 2/A6.0 Plastic Laminate Countertop with cont. bead of Sealant at backsplash Base cabinets with (1) Shelf 8' - 0" 2' - 10" 1' - 8" 3' - 6" Double Oven 6' - 0" 2' - 3" 1' - 3" 2' - 6" 3 A-6.0 Range 3" FILLER 2' - 3" 1' - 0" 2' - 6" 6' - 1 1/4" 1 1/4" FILLER 3' - 6" 2' - 0" 2' - 10" Microwave/Vent Hood, Ref. MEP for venting to exterior Light, Ref. Elec. (centered on island) Kitchen Island 2-1/2" Maple Apron Line of base cabinet beyond, with finished back panel. 4" Maple Support Post w/ Base as sched. Corner Cabinet Counter shutter housing Light, Ref. Elec. Plastic Laminate Countertop 2' - 10" 0' - 2 1/2" Apron 0' - 1 1/2" 2' - 6" 2'-3" Min. 2-1/2" Maple Apron 2' - 0" 4" Maple Support Post w/ Stained maple Base. Base Cabinets with (1) Shelf, and Finished Backs. 3' - 0" 3' - 0" 3' - 6" 5' - 2" Gyp. Surround at tall cabinet Tall cabinet 9' - 6" Gyp. board- painted. 5 A-6.0 4' - 0" Base as Sched. Finished wood cabinet end panel Microwave/Vent hood 7' - 6" 8" 8' - 2" Ceiling as Sched. Painted gyp bd. wall finish Storefront Window System as scheduled Door as scheduled 5/8" Gyp. on 3-5/8" metal stud construction for header and wall surround at tall cabinets. Tall Cabinet Base as Sched. 6' - 6" 1' - 0" 1' - 3" 1' - 0" 1' - 3" 2' - 0" 8' - 6" Ceiling as Sched. Adjustable Wire Shelving, (5) tiers high Base as Sched. 13 Kitchen Island, Looking South 1/4" = 1'-0" 6' - 6" 1' - 0" 1' - 3" 1' - 0" 1' - 3" 2' - 0" 6' - 0" Ceiling as Sched. Adjustable Wire Shelving, (5) tiers high Base as Sched. Gyp. Furr Down, Ref. Ceiling Plan Painted Gyp. Board Ceiling Fan, Ref. Elec. New Door & Storefront System as sched. Wood wall paneling with reveal pattern as shown Metallic laminate base at wood paneling 12 Kitchen Looking East 1/4" = 1'-0" 10 A-6.0 2' - 4" 2' - 3" 1' - 11" 1" 1" 7' - 0" 4" PLYWOOD PANEL Ceiling as sched. Painted Gyp. Board 42" high Upper Cabinets with (3) Adjustable Shelves Tile backsplash, Ref. 2/A6.0 Plastic Laminate Countertop with cont. bead of Sealant at backsplash Base cabinet with (3) Drawers Base as sched. 8' - 0" 3' - 6" 2' - 0" 2' - 6" 11 Kitchen Vestibule Looking North Kitchen Vestibule Looking East 10 1/4" = 1'-0" 1/4" = 1'-0" 4' - 6" 2' - 3" 2' - 3" 4 A-6.0 3' - 0" 4' - 6" 1' - 6" 3' - 2 1/2" REF. 8' - 0" Base as sched. New door & storefront system as sched. 2' - 3" 2' - 3" 1" 1" 1" CEILING AS SCHED. 1" GYP. REVEAL PATTERN- PAINTED, TYP. EXISTING DOOR & FRAME- PAINTED. EXIST. WATER FOUNTAIN TO REMAIN. Villa Tranchese Renovations San Antonio Housing Authority 307 Marshall Street, San Antonio, TX BASE AS SCHED. Pantry Looking East 9 Pantry Looking South H.O.A Looking South 8 7 1/4" = 1'-0" 1/4" = 1'-0" 1/4" = 1'-0" 6 H.O.A Looking West 1/4" = 1'-0" 5 Hall Looking North 1/4" = 1'-0" Radius Furr-Down Ref: Ceiling Plan 5 A-6.0 Existing Storefront Window System Tall Cabinet Existing Storefront. Window System Ceiling Fan Re: Elect. Radius Furr-Down Ref: Ceiling Plan Light, Ref. Elec. Existing Storefront Window System New Door & Storefront System as Sched. 5' - 0" 2' - 6" 2' - 6" 7 A-8.0 9' - 0" 3' - 0" 3' - 0" 3' - 0" New Door & Storefront System as sched. Gyp. Furr Down, Ref. Ceiling Plan Painted Gyp. Board Ceiling Fan, Ref. Elec. REVISIONS 6 A-6.0 DATE: Issue Date 7' - 6" 6' - 0" Bottom of Fixture 6' - 0" Bottom of Fixture 8' - 0" 2' - 3" 2' - 3" 2' - 3" 1" 1" 1" 7' - 0" 8' - 0" 7' - 0" 2' - 3" 2' - 3" 2' - 3" 1" 1" 1" 1" 2' - 4" 1" 2' - 3" 4" 1' - 11" 7' - 0" PLYWOOD PANEL DRAWN BY: Author CHECKED BY: Checker PROJECT NUMBER: 1001 SHEET NAME INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 4' - 0" Existing Brick to Remain 4 Game Room Looking East Game Room Looking South 3 1/4" = 1'-0" 1/4" = 1'-0" Light Fixt. Re: Elect. Existing Brick to Remain Built-in Shelving 1" Gyp. Bd. Reveal Pattern- Painted, typ. Base as sched. 1" Gyp. Bd. Reveal Pattern- Painted, typ. Built-in Shelving 2 Game Room Looking West 1/4" = 1'-0" Base as sched. 1 1/4" = 1'-0" 6 A-6.0 Game Room Looking North Wood wall paneling with reveal pattern as shown to wrap column Metallic laminate base 10 A-6.0 SHEET NUMBER A-7.2

478 F 5/8" Gyp Board on 3-5/8" Metal Stud Bracing Suspended Acoustic Ceiling, as Sched. 5/8" Gyp Board on 6" Metal Studs Corner Bead, typical. 8 6" TYP. 4" Existing Concrete Beam Existing Storefront Window New Roller Blind w/ optional fascia, painted finish. 9'-4" 9'-0" Existing Brick Typical Roller Shade Installation Detail 1/2" = 1'-0" ROLLER SHADE SCHEDULE MARK: WINDOW SIZE QUANTITY: (Width x Height): RS-1 3'-0" x 11'-0" Ten (10) Each RS-2 20'-8" x 11'-0" Two (2) Each RS-3 18'-4" x 11'-0" One (1) Each RS-4 5'-0" x 11'-0" One (1) Each RS-5 15'-6" x 11'-0" One (1) Each RS-6 3'-2" x 11'-0" One (1) Each RS-7 3'-0" x 5'-8" One (1) Each NOTES: 1. Verify window sizes in field prior to roller shade manufacture or installation. 2. Roller shades are manual operation. 3. Provide Optional Fascia, gloss painted finish, at all shades. Ref detal 9/A8.0. REFLECTED CEILING PLAN LEGEND GYP. BD. (PAINT) 2x2 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL LAY-IN CEILING SYSTEM (SAP-1 OR SAP-1A METAL CEILING / SOFFIT PANEL HVAC CEILING REGISTERS RE: MEP DRAWINGS EXIT LIGHTS, REF: MEP LIGHTING, REF: MEP PLAN AND SCHEDULE 4 A-2.1D E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 E10 E11 E12 E13 E14 15 SOFFIT PANELS A.1 NO WORK THIS AREA NO WORK THIS AREA EXISTING TO REMAIN EXISTING TO REMAIN 11' - 0" 9' - 0" EXISTING TO REMAIN 9' - 0" 9' - 0" 9' - 0" 11' - 0" EXISTING CEILING TO REMAIN EXISTING CEILING TO REMAIN 9' - 0" 9' - 0" 9' - 0" EXISTING CEILING TO REMAIN 5 A-8.0 9' - 0" 9' - 0" 9' - 0" 11' - 0" Exposed structure, Painted. 9 A-2.1C Structured Polycarbonate Panel Roofing System C.J. 3' - 2" C.J. 9' - 6" 11' - 0" EXISTING TO REMAIN 11' - 0" EQ. EQ. SOFFIT PANELS 11' - 0" EXISTING TO REMAIN EXISTING TO REMAIN 3' - 0" 5' - 0" 3' - 0" RS-1 RS-1 RS-1 RS-1 RS-1 RS-7 C.J. C.J. 11' - 0" 6" TYP. 2' - 9" 9' - 4" 6 A-8.0 9' - 4" 3 A-8.0 1' - 9" 2 A ' - 0" 9' - 6" 43' - 0" 17' - 0" 4' - 2" 17' - 0" 1' - 9" RS-2 C.J. C.J. C.J. 9' - 6" C.J. C.J. C.J. 11' - 0" C.J. C.J. 6" TYP. RS-2 1' - 4" 1' - 4" 19' - 0" 15' - 10" 19' - 0" 8 A-8.0 TYP. 9' - 4" 9' - 4" 11' - 0" 4 A-8.0 2' - 5" C.J. C.J. 4' - 3" RS-3 4' - 6" 5' - 6" 3' - 3" 4' - 0" EXISTING TO REMAIN C.J. 6' - 6" 6' - 6" 4' - 1" Pendants centered over island EXISTING TO REMAIN 11' - 0" 9' - 0" RS-1 11' - 0" 9' - 0" 8' - 0" 2' - 7" 5' - 2" RS-4 7' - 10" 7 A-8.0 RS-5 RS-6 R 3' - 0" 11' - 0" 11' - 0" 3' - 0" 4' - 4" 7' - 4" RS-1 9' - 0" 9' - 0" 9' - 0" RS-1 RS-1 RS-1 A B C D E E.4 E.6 F F.4 G Villa Tranchese Renovations San Antonio Housing Authority 307 Marshall Street, San Antonio, TX N A-2.1C 1 Level 1 - Reflected Ceiling Plan 1/8" = 1'-0" PLAN NORTH 9" B E11 E10 E10 REVISIONS 11'-0" 8'-0" 6" 3' - 0" SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC CEILING 5/8" GYP. BD ON 3-5/8" METAL 16" o.c.; LAY OUT STUDS IN RADIUS AS SHOWN ON PLAN. CORNER BEAD, TYP. 5/8" GYP. BD SOFFIT ON 3-5/8" METAL 16" o.c. 11'-0" 9'-4" 4" 1' - 8" 6" 6" 5/8" GYP. BD. ON BOTH SIDES OF 6" METAL STUD AT 16" O.C. SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC CEILING, TYP. 2' - 6" 6" 2" SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKET 11'-0" SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC CEILING 9'-0" 5/8" GYP. BD. ON BOTH SIDES OF 6" 16" O.C. CORNER BEAD, TYP. 5/8" GYP BD ON 3-5/8" METAL STUDS 5/8" GYP BD ON 6" METAL 16" O.C. SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC CEILING, AS SCHEDULED CORNER BEAD, TYPICAL 11'-0" REF RCP 9'-4" 9'-0" SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKET GYP CEILING AS SCHED. ROLLING COUNTER SHUTTER HOUSING SHUTTER TRACK, MOUNTED TO WALL BEYOND 11'-0" 9'-6" 6" 1' - 6" 6" 4' - 0" SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC CEILING 5/8" GYP. BD. ON 2-1/2" 16" O.C. CORNER BEAD, TYP. LINE OF GYP. FURR DOWN BEYOND 5/8" GYP. BD. ON 3-5/8" STUDS LIGHT FIXTURE AS SCHED. 9'-6" 9'-4" 9'-0" 4" 6" EQUAL EQUAL LIGHT FIXTURE AS SCHED. SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC CEILING 5/8" GYP. BD ON BOTH SIDES OF 6" 16" O.C. CORNER BEAD ON BOTH SIDES, TYP. 5/8" GYP. BD ON BOTH SIDES OF 3-5/8" STUDS DATE: Issue Date DRAWN BY: Author CHECKED BY: Checker PROJECT NUMBER: 1001 SHEET NAME REFLECTED CEILING PLAN & DETAILS SHEET NUMBER 7 Softit Detail at Game Room 1/2" = 1'-0" 6 RCP Detail at Coffered Ceiling 1/2" = 1'-0" 5 RCP Detail at Mail Room 1/2" = 1'-0" 4 RCP Detail at Rolling Counter Shutter 1/2" = 1'-0" 3 RCP Detail at Coffered Ceiling 1/2" = 1'-0" 2 RCP Detail at Coffered Ceiling 1/2" = 1'-0" A-8.0

479 LEGEND: VCT CFT VINYL COMPOSITION TILE CERAMIC FLOOR TILE GENERAL NOTES: 1. REFER TO FINISH SCHEDULE, SHEET A6.0, FOR COLOR AND/OR PRODUCT SELECTIONS. 2. REVIEW INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR SPECIAL CONDITIONS RELATING TO FINISHES. RV FRF TERR RESILIENT VINYL FLOORING FITNESS ROOM FLOORING RE-FINISH EXISTING TERRAZZO 3. REFER TO RCP, SHEET A8.0 FOR ROLLER BLIND SCHEDULE. 4. ALL COLORS SHALL BE AS SELECTED BY ARCHITECT. 5. PROVIDE MANUFACTURER STANDARD TRANSITION STRIPS FOR ALL FLOORING MATERIALS. PROVIDE MARBLE THRESHOLD FOR CERAMIC TILE TRANSITION. EXIST EXISTING TO REMAIN WOOD WALL PANELING REF: DETAIL 10/A6.0 AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS North Vestibule 102 VCT NO WORK THIS AREA NO WORK THIS AREA EXIST. EXIST. EXIST. EXIST. EXIST. EXIST. RV RV Hall 130 Hall 129 Mech. Rm. Staff Conf EXIST. CONC. EXIST. VCT Storage 127B Storage 127A Ref. Property Mgr. 127 RV Fitness Room 119 FRF Network Rm. 119 RV 120 Office 126 Office Mailboxes Hall 128 Women EXIST. 118 RV 58 Mailboxes 202 Mailboxes Total (+ 8 Parcel Boxes) Office " Shelv. Mail Room 121 Jan. 117 Computer Stations Waiting 122 Men 116 Hall Parcel 69 Mailboxes RV Office 123 EXIST. RV Rear Entry Lobby 100A Built-in Bench Note: Install 4'-0" portion of Resilient Vinyl Flooring over existing terrazzo. Mfgr. transition strip to existing terrazzo in Lobby. D.S. Splashblock TERR N.I.C. Elevator 103 Entry Lobby 100 VCT South Vestibule 101 TERR Stairs 104 Jan. 106 EXIST. D.S. Splashblock 105 Dining Room 105 TERR A 107 Ice Ref. Storage 107 Hall 108 Kitchen CFT EXIST. CONC. 114 Dw. Mech. Rm. TERR EXIST. CONC. 109 Oven 110 Kitchen Vest Ref. 112 Pantry 113 Game Room RV RV H.O.A. 111 Villa Tranchese Renovations San Antonio Housing Authority 307 Marshall Street, San Antonio, TX REVISIONS N 1 Level 1 - Furniture and Floor Pattern Plan 1/8" = 1'-0" PLAN NORTH DATE: Issue Date DRAWN BY: Author CHECKED BY: Checker PROJECT NUMBER: 1001 SHEET NAME FURNITURE & FINISH PLAN SHEET NUMBER A-9.0

480

481 C E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 E10 E11 E12 E13 E REFER TO ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION SCOPE A.1 F e e e e 1 EXISTING F e 4 3 e e e e e e e 6 7 e A e e e e e e e e e e e e EXISTING e e e C e 1 NO WORK THIS AREA B C 3 e e S e e e e e e e e e e e REFER TO ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION SCOPE e e e e e e e e e FACP e e 5 4 S e S F e e e e 2 2 e e e e e e e e F e D E E.4 E.6 F F.4 Villa Tranchese Renovations San Antonio Housing Authority 307 Marshall Street, San Antonio, TX G GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES: ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION SCOPE: ELECTRICAL DEMO KEYED NOTES: A. GENERAL: EXCEPT FOR ITEMS OR MATERIALS INDICATED TO BE REUSED, SALVAGED, REINSTALLED, OR OTHERWISE INDICATED TO REMAIN OWNER'S PROPERTY, REMOVE DEMOLISHED MATERIALS FROM PROJECT SITE AND LEGALLY DISPOSE OF THEM IN AN EPA-APPROVED LANDFILL. DO NOT ALLOW DEMOLISHED MATERIALS TO ACCUMULATE ON- SITE REMOVE FROM OWNER OCCUPIED AREAS DAILY. REMOVE AND TRANSPORT DEBRIS IN A MANNER THAT WILL PREVENT SPILLAGE ON ADJACENT SURFACES AND AREAS. B. TRACE CIRCUITS FEEDING EXISTING TO-REMAIN PORTIONS OF THE BUILDING. DO NOT DEMOLISH CIRCUITS IN THESE AREAS. IF CIRCUITS ARE IN BOTH "TO REMAIN" AND "TO BE REMOVED" AREAS, DEMOLISH BACK TO NEAREST TO-REMAIN J-BOX. C. DEMOLISH AND REMOVE EXISTING CONSTRUCTION ONLY TO THE EXTENT REQUIRED BY NEW CONSTRUCTION AND AS INDICATED.. D. REMOVED AND SALVAGED ITEMS: CLEAN SALVAGED ITEMS, PACK OR CRATE ITEMS AFTER CLEANING. IDENTIFY CONTENTS OF CONTAINERS. STORE ITEMS IN A SECURE AREA UNTIL DELIVERY TO OWNER. TRANSPORT ITEMS TO OWNER'S STORAGE AREA DESIGNATED BY OWNER. PROTECT ITEMS FROM DAMAGE DURING TRANSPORT AND STORAGE. E. REMOVED AND REINSTALLED ITEMS: CLEAN AND REPAIR ITEMS TO FUNCTIONAL CONDITION ADEQUATE FOR INTENDED REUSE. PAINT EQUIPMENT TO MATCH NEW EQUIPMENT. PACK OR CRATE ITEMS AFTER CLEANING AND REPAIRING. IDENTIFY CONTENTS OF CONTAINERS. PROTECT ITEMS FROM DAMAGE DURING TRANSPORT AND STORAGE. REINSTALL ITEMS IN LOCATIONS INDICATED. COMPLY WITH INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR NEW MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT. PROVIDE CONNECTIONS, SUPPORTS, AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS NECESSARY TO MAKE ITEM FUNCTIONAL FOR USE INDICATED. F. EXISTING ITEMS TO REMAIN: PROTECT CONSTRUCTION INDICATED TO REMAIN AGAINST DAMAGE AND SOILING DURING SELECTIVE DEMOLITION. WHEN PERMITTED BY ARCHITECT, ITEMS MAY BE REMOVED TO A SUITABLE, PROTECTED STORAGE LOCATION DURING SELECTIVE DEMOLITION AND REINSTALLED IN THEIR ORIGINAL LOCATIONS AFTER SELECTIVE DEMOLITION OPERATIONS ARE COMPLETE. G. COORDINATE ALL DEMO ACTIVITIES WITH OWNER AND ARCHITECT AND PROVIDE 10 DAYS NOTICE FOR ANY TYPE OF POWER OUTAGES. H. "REMOVE CONNECTION" INDICATES REMOVAL OF ALL ASSOCIATED WIRE, CONDUCT, DISCONNECTS, AND SUPPORTS BACK TO SOURCE. 1 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLAN 1/8" = 1'-0" 1. REMOVE EXISTING LIGHTING TO ACCOMMODATE ARCHITECTURAL DEMOLITION. MAINTAIN EXISTING BRANCH CIRCUIT AND CONTROLS SERVING EXISTING LIGHTING FOR RECONNECTION TO NEW LIGHTING. PREPARE BRANCH CIRCUIT FOR RE-CONNECTION OF NEW LIGHTS.. 2. ALL RECEPTACLES, DATA, INTERCOMM, ETC, DENOTED WITH AN "e" SUBSCRIPT SHALL REMAIN. NOT ALL EXISTING DEVICES MAY BE SHOWN ON THIS DRAWING. REMOVE ALL RECEPTACLES, DATA DROPS, INTERCOMM, ETC, INCLUDING WIRE, CONDUIT BACK TO SOURCE TO ACCOMMODATE ARCHITECTURAL DEMOLITION. MAINTAIN REMAINING BRANCH CIRCUIT IN AREAS NOT AFFECTED BY ARCHITECTURAL DEMOLITION. 3. REMOVE EXISTING DATA DEVICES TO ACCOMMODATE ARCHITECTURAL DEMOLITION. PROVIDE BLANK COVERPLATE FOR EMPTY J-BOXES. COIL CABLING TO AN ACCESSIBLE LOCATION ABOVE NEW CEILING AND LABEL. 4. EXISTING FIRE ALARM DEVICES AND PULL STATIONS IN RENOVATED AREAS TO REMAIN AND SHALL BE PROTECTED DURING RENOVATION. ALL CEILING FIRE ALARM DEVICES SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH TEMPORARY SUPPORT AND PLASTIC COVER DURING DEMOLITION OF CEILINGS. DEVICES ARE TO BE RE INSTALLED ONCE NEW CEILING HAS BEEN INSTALLED.PROVIDE TEMPORARY RESISTORS TO SILENCE TROUBLE ALARM AND RECALCULATE E.O.L. 5. EXISTING SECURITY CAMERAS AND CABLING WILL REMAIN (REMOVED AND RE- INSTALLED IN LOCATION) AND SHALL BE PROTECTED DURING DEMOLITION. 6. EXISTING MECHINCAL EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN. MAINTAIN EXISTING ELECTRICAL CONNECTION REMOVE EXISTING ELECTRICAL PANELBOARD. CIRCUIT TRACE AND LABEL EXISTING BRANCH CIRCUITS PRIOR TO DEMOLITION. PROTECT BRANCH CIRCUITS NOT AFFECTED BY RENOVATION AND PREPARE FOR EXTENSION/RETERMINATION IN NEW PANELBOARD. REMOVE EXTERIOR CANOPY LIGHT FIXTURES TO ACCOMMODATE ARCHITECTURAL DEMOLITION. MAIN CIRCUIT AND CONTROLS TO EXISTING LIGHTING IN TO RE MAIN CANOPY. PREPARE CIRCUIT AND CONTROL FOR EXTENSION TO NEW FIXTURES IN NEW CANOPY. REMOVE AND RE-INSTALL CEILING MOUNTED SECURITY CAMERAS TO ACCOMODATE ARCHITECTURAL REMODEL AND CEILING WORK. PROTECT CAMERAS FROM DAMAGE DURING DEMOLITION. EXISTING CIRCUIT SERVING SLIDING DOORS TO REMAIN. MAINTAIN AND PROTECT DURING CONSTRUCTION. EXISTING FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL(FACP) TO REMAIN. MAINTAIN AND PROTECT DURING CONSTRUCTION. REMOVE ALL EXISTING RECEPTACLE DEVICES ON THIS FACE OF KITCHEN WALL, BACK BOW TO REMAIN. PROVIDE A BLANK COVER FACE FOR EXISTNG BACK BOXES. REMOVE KITCHEN FLOORBOX, PATCH AND REPAIR EXISTING SLAB. E N G I N E E R I N G C O N S U L T A N T S 8626 Tesoro Drive Suite 702 San Antonio, Texas p f TBPE FIRM REGISTRATION NO DBR Project Number ZM IV EZ MT REVISIONS DATE: 06/18/2010 DRAWN BY: DBR CHECKED BY: DBR PROJECT NUMBER: 1001 SHEET NAME ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLAN SHEET NUMBER E1.1

482 K F K 3 K F K E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 E10 E11 E12 E13 E14 15 F5 3 Hall 129 K F5E X1 X2 F5E X1 Mech. Room 132 F5E 1 Hall 130 F5 F1 Staff OC Conference F1 1 1 F5 9 F10E 1 4 F3 4 F3 F 3 3 F5 Property F1 Manager OC F1 F1 3 Women Men F3 F3 Fitness Room OC 1 1 Hall F3E F3 F5E X1 F 3 3 Janitor 117 Hall 1 51 F5E F1E Server OC F4 F4 Mail Room F4E F4E F1E 3 F5 3 F1E 2 X1 1 OC 3 Office 126 OC Waiting F1 F1E Office Office Office F1 OC F1 F1 OC F1 F1 OC F F10E 8 K F1 K 7 North Vestibule 7 F2E 102 F2 X1 F1 F1E F1 1 F4E F4 F4 F4 X1 F9 F4 F4E F4 F4 1 Entry Lobby 100 F4 F4 F4 F4 F1E F1 F1E F1E F1 X1 Rear Entry Lobby 100A South Vestibule 101 X1 6 F7E 6 F7E 6 6 F7 F7 F7 F7 F9 F2 F2E F Stairs 104 Janitor F4 F4 F4 F3 F3 F4 F OC F4 OC 2 F3 F3E F3 F3 F3 F4 F3 1 2 Dining Room 2 OC 105 OC F4 F3E F3 F3E F3 F3 F3 4 F4 4 OC 1 OC 2 F4 2 F3 F3E F3 F3E F3 1 F3E F3 F3 F3 X1 9 F10E 3 X1 F4 F4 F4 F4 OC F4 2 F6 F6 F6 1 F4 F4 F4 F4 Storage Mech. Room F Hall 108 F4 8 F10E F4 F4 F1E X2 1 F X1 3 F3 Kitchen Vest. 112 Pantry F F1 F4 F4 F3 Game Room 110 F3E 1 F8 F8 4 F1 OC 2 OC 2 F3 4 OC F3 2 H.O.A 111 F1 F3 4 1 F3E F3 A.1 A B C D E E.4 E.6 F F.4 G Villa Tranchese Renovations San Antonio Housing Authority 307 Marshall Street, San Antonio, TX GENERAL LIGHTING NOTES: 1. WHEN LOCATING SYSTEMS NEXT TO DOORS, LOCATE 8 INCHES OFF DOOR JAMB TO CENTER OF DEVICE. WHEN MULTIPLE DEVICES ARE TOGETHER, STACK BUT NO MORE THAN 72 INCHES AFF. COORDINATE SWITCH LOCATIONS IN ROOMS WITH ARCHITECT AND OTHER DEVICES (THERMOSTATS, FIRE ALARM, AND CALL BUTTONS). 3. MINIMUM CIRCUIT SIZE IS 2 #12 AND 1 #12 GROUND IN 3/4 CONDUIT. MAXIMUM FIXTURE WHIP LENGTH FROM ANY J-BOX 6 FEET. LIGHTING CIRCUITS JOINTS SHALL BE MADE UP IN OVERHEAD J-BOXES SECURED TO STRUCTURE WITH LIGHTING WHIPS FROM THE J-BOXES. FIXTURES DESIGNED TO BE QUICK-CLIPPED TOGETHER SHALL BE CONNECTED AS PER MANUFACTURER. 4. COORDINATE LIGHT LOCATIONS WITH OTHER CEILING ITEMS OR JOIST ITEMS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. LIGHT LOCATIONS TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER AIR DEVICES. 1 LIGHTING PLAN 1/8" = 1'-0" ELECTRICAL KEYED NOTES: RECONNECT NEW LIGHT FIXTURES TO EXISTING BRANCH CIRCUIT SERVING DEMOLISHED LIGHT FIXTURES IN THIS AREA. EXTEND BRANCH CIRCUIT AND CONTROLS FROM NEAREST "TO REMAIN" JUNCTION BOX. PROVIDE DUAL TECHNOLOGY SENSOR PER DETAIL 1/E4.1 FOR AUTOMATIC SHUT OFF OF LIGHT FIXTURES IN THIS SPACE UTILIZE EXISTING CONTROLS FOR LOCAL OVERRIDE. PROVIDE NEW LIGHT SWITCH AND REWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS IN THIS AREA AS INDICATED. FURNISH AND INSTALL "GLOBAL INDUSTRIAL 60" WHITE DOWNDRAFT "653106"" CEILING FAN. PROVIDE WITH CEILING JUNCTION BOX AND WITH "VARIABLE SPEED SWITCH CONTROL 4 FANS-REVERSIBLE". ALL FANS IN SAME TO BE SERVED FROM THE SAME FAN SWITCH. FANS TO BE SERVED FROM FROM SAME CIRCUIT AS ADJACENTLIGHT FIXTURES, PROVIDE (3) #12AWG. IN A 3/4" CONDUIT. REVISIONS 5. PROVIDE SECONDARY SUPPORT WIRES FROM ALL FOUR (4) CORNERS OF THE LAY-IN FIXTURES TO THE STRUCTURE ABOVE. DO NOT SUPPORT FIXTURES FROM CEILING GRID WIRE SUPPORTS, PIPING, CONDUIT, SIDE WALLS, OR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT. CEILING SPECIFICATIONS DO NOT SUPERCEDE THIS REQUIREMENT. 7. FIXTURES WITH E SUFFIX AND ALL EXIT SIGNS SHALL HAVE BATTERY BACK-UPS. 8. FIRESTOP ALL CONDUIT PENETRATIONS IN RATED WALLS. SEE ARCHITECTURAL FOR WALL RATINGS. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR DAMAGE TO SHEET ROCK AND REPAIR. PROVIDE FIRE RATED SLEEVES IN ALL FLOOR PENETRATIONS. 9. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY FIXTURE VOLTAGE PRIOR TO INSTALLING ANY RELOCATED FIXTURE. COORDINATE WITH RCP FOR FIXTURE LOCATIONS. 10. ALL RELOCATED FIXTURES SHALL BE CLEANED AND RELAMPED. 12. PROVIDE AN EXTRA UNSWITCHED HOT LEG FOR EXITS LIGHTS, AND EMERGENCY LIGHTS CIRCUIT NEW VESTIBULE 'F2' AND 'F2E' LIGTH FIXTURES FROM SAME CIRCUIT AS 'F1E' IN "ENTRY LOBBY 100". PROVIDE (3) #12AWG IN A 3/4" CONDUIT. CIRCUIT NEW EXTERIOR CANOPY LIGHT FIXTURE TO SAME EXISTING CIRCUIT AND CONTROLS AS EXISTING EXTERIOR LIGHT FIXTURES. EXTEND BRANCH CIRCUITS AS REQUIRED, PROVIDE (3) #12AWG IN A 3/4" CONDUIT. FIXTURES TO BE MOUNTED FACING "UP" AND BE MOUNTED ON NEW CANOPY STRUCTURE. COORDIANTE EXACT LOCATION WITH ARCHITECT. CIRCUIT NEW VESTIBULE 'F2' AND 'F2E' LIGHT FIXTURES FROM SAME CIRCUIT AS 'F1E' IN "REAR ENTRY LOBBY 100A". PROVIDE (3) #12AWG IN A 3/4" CONDUIT. CIRCUIT NEW EXTERIOR WALL MOUNT LIGHT FIXTURE TO EXISTING EXTERIOR CANOPY LIGHT FIXTURES. PROVIDE (3) #12AWG IN A 3/4" CONDUIT. CIRCUIT NEW EXTERIOR WALL MOUNT LIGHT FIXTURE TO EXISTING INTERIOR LIGHT FIXTURES AS SHOWN. PROVIDE (3) #12AWG IN A 3/4" CONDUIT. WALL MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURE TO BE MOUNTED AT 7'-0" TO CENTER OF FIXTURE, COORDINATE EXACT MOUNTING HEIGHT WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. E N G I N E E R I N G C O N S U L T A N T S 8626 Tesoro Drive Suite 702 San Antonio, Texas p f TBPE FIRM REGISTRATION NO DBR Project Number DATE: 06/18/2010 DRAWN BY: DBR CHECKED BY: DBR PROJECT NUMBER: 1001 SHEET NAME LIGHTING PLAN SHEET NUMBER E2.1 ZM IV EZ MT

483 C Ref E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 E10 E11 E12 E13 E14 15 S e e F F e e e S F Hall 130 Mech. Room 132 e e e AC +42" Staff e Conference 131 AC AC e LC-29 Fitness Room LC Women 118 Hall V S V 128 e LC-35 S LC-37 F e e e e LC-33 LC-39 e e V e Janitor 117 Hall 51 Server 120 LC Mail Room 121 e Men 116 S S F F EXISTING e e FACP F North S Vestibule V 102 V J Rear Entry Lobby 100A S S e 1 LC-41 e Entry Lobby 100 F e S Elevator 103 S V Stairs 104 Janitor 106 S V EXISTING e e e e e e e e e e GFCI e e S e 2 e S e e e S S V F e e LA-35 Dining Room V CLG. 105 S F 9 CLG. TV e e e e C e e e S J F e LA-51 LA-45 LA-47 3 AC LA Ref 6 +42" Storage 107 V S Hall 108 LA-71 LA-69 GD V 3 AC S LA-63 LA-49 H V F DW LA e +42" LA-73 5 Mech. Room 109 e DO +60" LA-61 e 5 AC +42" LA-53,55 LA-57,59 V Pantry V 113 LA-67 e e LA-43 S F S S Kitchen Vest. 112 H.O.A 111 AC Game Room 110 F LA-39 LA-41 A.1 A B C D E e e Property Manager 127 GENERAL POWER NOTES: e e e Office 126 A. ALL EXISTING RECEPTACLES TO SERVED FROM THIER EXISTING CIRCUITS, ONLY NEW RECEPTACLES, LOADS, TO RECEIVE NEW CIRCUITS. e Office 125 B. WHEN LOCATING SYSTEMS NEXT TO DOORS, LOCATE 8 INCHES OFF DOOR JAMB TO CENTER OF DEVICE. WHEN MULTIPLE DEVICES ARE TOGETHER, STACK BUT NO MORE THAN 72 INCHES AFF. C. MINIMUM CIRCUIT SIZE IS 2 #12 AND 1 #12 GROUND IN 3/4 CONDUIT FOR INDIVIDUAL CIRCUITS, 3/4 CONDUIT FOR MULTIPLE CIRCUITS. ALL CONDUCTORS SHALL BE 75 DEGREE (MINIMUM) COPPER THHN, COLOR CODED AS PER NEC AND LOCAL AMENDMENTS WITH SIZE, TEMPERATURE, AND VOLTAGE PERMANENTLY PRINTED ON THE JACKET. ALL JOINTS SHALL BE MADE UP USING SELF LOCKING, TWIST-ON, COLOR CODED, SQUARE WIRE SPRING GRAB, LONG SKIRT, WIRE CONNECTORS WITH SWEPT WINGS. D. COORDINATE RECEPTACLE LOCATIONS WITH MILLWORK AND COUNTERS. DO NOT LOCATE RECEPTACLES BEHIND DRAWERS OR HIDDEN IN MILLWORK UNLESS SPECIFICALLY DIRECTED BY OWNER/ARCHITECT. REVIEW ARCHITECTURAL ELEVATIONS PRIOR TO RECEPTACLE ROUGH-INS. SEE ARCH. ELEVATIONS IN BREAKROOMS FOR APPLIANCES AND RECEPTACLE MOUNTING LOCATIONS. e e Office 124 e e Waiting 122 e e Office e e WP GFCI 10 LC-30 1 J 11 V F S South Vestibule POWER PLAN 1/8" = 1'-0" J 1 e 8 S F e S V V S LA-37 ELECTRICAL KEYED NOTES: FURNISH AND INSTALL NEW ABOVE CEILING JUNCTION BOX TO SERVE NEW ELECTRICAL SLIDING DOORS. ROUTE CONDUIT EXPOSED, AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE SUPPORTED FROM STRUCTURE FROM ACCESIBLE CEILING IN ADJACENT SPACE. NEW SURFACE MOUNTED RECEPTACLE TO BE SERVED FROM EXISTING CIRCUIT AS SHOWN. SWITCH TO CONTROL GARBGE DISPOSER. COORDINATE EXACT SWITCH LOCATION WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. ALL RECEPTACLES LOCATED "KITCHEN 114" TO BE GFCI PROTECTED. NO EXCEPTIONS. COORDINATE NEMA RECEPTACLE TYPE WITH OVEN RANGE SPECIFACTIONS. COORDINATE RECEPTACLE MOUNTING HEIGHT WITH EQUIPMENT. E.4 E.6 F F.4 G Villa Tranchese Renovations REVISIONS San Antonio Housing Authority 307 Marshall Street, San Antonio, TX E. MOUNT RECEPTACLES 18 AFF, 6 ABOVE BACKSPLASH AT COUNTERS, 48 IN TOILET ROOMS, AT EQUIPMENT ROUGH-IN LOCATIONS FOR APPLIANCES, AND 96 FOR TV'S. PROVIDE GFI RECEPTACLES AT ALL SINKS, EXTERIOR RECEPTACLES, AND UNDERCOUNTER EQUIPMENT. F. ALL EQUIPMENT SHALL HAVE A LOCAL DISCONNECTING MEANS, EITHER CORDED PLUG AND RECEPTACLE OR SWITCHED DISCONNECT. VERIFY FROM EQUIPMENT SUBMITTED OR RELOCATED IF DIRECT CONNECT OR RECEPTACLE. IF DIRECT CONNECT, PROVIDE SWITCH AS PER NEC OTHERWISE, PROVIDE RECEPTACLE, CORD PLUG AS REQUIRED BY EQUIPMENT SUBMITTAL. G. FIRESTOP ALL CONDUIT PENETRATIONS IN RATED WALLS. SEE ARCHITECTURAL FOR WALL RATINGS. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR DAMAGE TO SHEET ROCK AND REPAIR. PROVIDE FIRE RATED SLEEVES IN ALL FLOOR PENETRATIONS. H. CONNECT NO MORE THAN 5 RECEPTACLES TO ANY EXISTING CIRCUIT. VERIFY AND TRACE RECEPTACLE COUNT PRIOR TO CONNECTING TO EXISTING CIRCUITS FURNISH AND INSTALL JUNCTION BOX AND WALL SWITCH FOR ROLLING SHUTTER. COORDINATE EXACT SWITCH LOCATION WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. CONTRACTOR TO LOWER EXISTING RECEPTACLE TO 18" AFF. PATCH AND REPAIR WALL TO MATCH EXISTING. EXISTING CIRCUIT TO REMAIN. PROVIDE (3) #12 AWG. IN A 3/4" CONDUIT. CONTRACTOR TO RE-ROUTE EXISTING COAXIL CABLE FROM ABOVE AND DROP CABLE THROUGH CEILING DOWN WALL AT LOCATION SHOWN. CABLE TO EXTEND TO 5'-0" AFF. MOUNT NEW CEILING FLUSH MOUNTED COAXIL OUTLIT ADJACENT TO COLUMN. REPLACE EXISTING EXTERIOR RECEPTACLE WITH NEW WEATHER-PROOF, GFCI RECEPTACLE IN SAME LOCATION. REUSE EXISTING BACKBOX AND CIRCUIT. FIRE ALARM PULL STATION TO BE MOUNTED ON DOOR FRAME WITH WIRING TO BE ROUTED IN DOOR FRAMING. ROUTE CONDUIT FROM TOP OF DOOR FRAME EXPOSED, AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE SUPPORTED FROM STRUCTURE FROM ADJACENT CEILING IN ADJACENT SPACE. DATE: 06/18/2010 DRAWN BY: DBR CHECKED BY: DBR PROJECT NUMBER: 1001 I. PROVIDE/INSTALL SHALLOW JUNCTION BOXES FOR ALL DEVICES IN FURRED WALLS. APPLIES TO ALL POWER SHEETS. SHEET NAME J. PROVIDE COMBINATION DATA AND POWER PLATES IN SPLIT BOXES. POWER PLAN K. CONRACTOR SHALL CONNECT ALL NEW FIRE ALARM DEVICES TO EXISTING PYROTRONICS FACP LOCATED IN "ENTRY LOBBY 100". PROVIDE/INSTALL ALL NECESSARY EXPANSION MODULES AND RELAYS. L. ALL CONDUIT SHALL BE INSTALLED AS CONCEALED AS POSSIBLE. NEW CONDUITS REQUIRED TO BE SURFACE MOUNTED ON EXISTING CMU WALLS SHALL BE PAINTED TO MATCH EXISTING WALL. APPLIES TO LIGHTING PLAN E2.1 AS WELL. E N G I N E E R I N G C O N S U L T A N T S 8626 Tesoro Drive Suite 702 San Antonio, Texas p f TBPE FIRM REGISTRATION NO DBR Project Number SHEET NUMBER E3.1 ZM IV EZ MT

484 TYPE LAMPS MANUF. CATALOG No. MOUNTING VOLTAGE INPUT W REMARKS # TYPE F1 LITHONIA 2RT2B 232 MVOLT GEB10IS F1E LITHONIA 2RT2B 232 MVOLT GEB10IS EL GRID OR GYP. GRID OR GYP. 2 28W - F32T8 4100K. SEE REMARKS MVOLT W - F32T8 4100K MVOLT 56 F2 LITHONIA VW 2 32 MVOLT GEB10IS SURFACE 2 28W - F32T8 4100K. MVOLT 56 F2E LITHONIA VW 2 32 MVOLT GEB10IS ELDW SURFACE 2 28W - F32T8 4100K MVOLT 56 F3 LITHONIA 2RT2B 232 MVOLT GEB10IS F3E LITHONIA 2RT2B 232 MVOLT GEB10IS EL LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE GRID OR GYP. GRID OR GYP. 3 28W - F32T8 4100K. MVOLT W - F32T8 4100K MVOLT 56 F4 GOTHAM AF 42 TRT 8CB MVOLT GEB10IS RECESSED 1 42W TRT PROVIDE "PHILIPS MODEL # " 28W, T8 LONG LIFE LAMP(TYPIPCAL FOR ALL 28W T8 LAMP FIXTURES) SAME AS 'F1', PROVIDE W/ EMERGENCY BALLAST(NOMINAL 1400 LUMENS) 1'x4' SURFACE DAMP LOCATIONWRAPAROUND SAME AS 'F2', PROVIDE W/ EMERGENCY BATTERY PACK(NOMINAL 300 LUMENS) 2'x4' LENSED TROFFER WITH 28W LAMPS SAME AS 'F3', PROVIDE W/ EMERGENCY BATTERY PACK(NOMINAL 1400 LUMENS) 8" RECESSED FIXTURE. DAMP LOCATION LISTED. NOTES: THHN IN EMT SERVICE FEEDER SCHEDULE MARK CONDUIT CONDUCTORS /2" Conduit 2 - #12 and 1 - #12 Ground /4" Conduit 2 - #10 and 1 - #10 Ground /4" Conduit 2 - #8 and 1 - #8 Ground /4" Conduit 2 - #6 and 1 - #8 Ground " Conduit 2 - #4 and 1 - #8 Ground /4" Conduit 2 - #2 and 1 - #6 Ground /2" Conduit 3 - #12 and 1 - #12 Ground /4" Conduit 3 - #10 and 1 - #10 Ground /4" Conduit 3 - #8 and 1 - #8 Ground /4" Conduit 3 - #6 and 1 - #8 Ground " Conduit 3 - #4 and 1 - #8 Ground /4" Conduit 3 - #2 and 1 - #6 Ground /4" Conduit 4 - #12 and 1 - #12 Ground /4" Conduit 4 - #10 and 1 - #10 Ground /4" Conduit 4 - #8 and 1 - #8 Ground " Conduit 4 - #6 and 1 - #8 Ground /4" Conduit 4 - #4 and 1 - #8 Ground /4" Conduit 4 - #2 and 1 - #6 Ground F4E GOTHAM AF 42 TRT 8CB MVOLT GEB10IS EL RECESSED 1 42W TRT F5 LITHONIA 2RT2B 217 MVOLT GEB10IS F5E GRID OR GYP. LITHONIA 2RT2B 217 MVOLT GEB10IS EL GRID OR 2 F17W T8 GYP. 2 F17W T8 MVOLT 34 MVOLT F6 EUREKA SC 24" XCF.SP.13 PENDANT 2 13W TRT F7 ELLIPTIPAR F 162 H242 S V0 0 CANOPY 2 42W TRT " RECESSED FIXTURE. DAMP LOCATION LISTED. BATTERY BALLAST 2'x2' LENSED TROFFER SAME AS F5' WITH EMERGENCY BATTERY PACK TO BE MOUNTED ABOVE KITCHEN COUNTER, VERIFY EXACT MOUNTING HEIGHT ABOVE COUNTER PRIOR TO ORDERING STEM LENGTH UPLIGHT FIXTURE TO BE MOUNTED ON CANOPY SY /4" Conduit 4 - #12 and 1 - #8 Ground SY /4" Conduit 4 - #10 and 1 - #8 Ground SY /4" Conduit 4 - #8 and 1 - #8 Ground SY " Conduit 4 - #6 and 1 - #8 Ground SY /4" Conduit 4 - #4 and 1 - #8 Ground SY /4" Conduit 4 - #2 and 1 - #6 Ground SY " Conduit 4 - #1/0 and 1 - #6 Ground SY " Conduit 4 - #2/0 and 1 - #4 Ground SY " Conduit 4 - #3/0 and 1 - #4 Ground SY /2" Conduit 4 - #4/0 and 1 - #2 Ground SY " Conduit 4 - #250 kcmil and 1 - #2 Ground Notes Lighting Class Panelboard 10,000 AIC Rating Existing X New 120/208 Volt,3-Phase,4-Wire MCB AMP MCB X Single Mounting 1 Section X MLO 225 AMP BUS (Copper) Double X Surface 1 -Nema Rating ISO. GRND. BUS Feed - Thru Flush Load (VA) ,824 N.E.C. (2005) EXISTING LOAD EXISTING LOAD EXISTING LOAD EXISTING LOAD EXISTING LOAD EXISTING LOAD EXISTING LOAD EXISTING LOAD EXISTING LOAD EXISTING LOAD EXISTING LOAD EXISTING LOAD EXISTING LOAD - REFRIGATOR RECPTACLES SERVER QUAD COMPUTERS COMPUTERS RECPTACLES SLIDING DOORS Subtotal Load Type (R) Recept (K) Kitchen (C) Cooling (H) Heating (F) Fans (M) Misc. Description LC Type Wire CB CKT CKT PH # # CB Wire Type Description Load (VA) Notes R 12 20/1 1 A 2 30/1 10 R EXISTING LOAD 2160 R 12 20/1 3 B 4 20/1 12 R EXISTING LOAD 1440 R 12 20/1 5 C 6 20/1 12 R EXISTING LOAD 1440 R 12 20/1 7 A 8 20/1 12 R EXISTING LOAD 1440 R 12 20/1 9 B 10 20/1 12 R EXISTING LOAD 1440 R 12 20/1 11 C 12 20/1 12 R EXISTING LOAD 1440 R 12 20/1 13 A 14 20/1 12 R EXISTING LOAD 1440 R 12 20/1 15 B 16 20/1 12 R EXISTING LOAD 1440 R 12 20/1 17 C 18 20/1 12 R EXISTING LOAD 1440 R 12 20/1 19 A 20 20/1 12 R EXISTING LOAD 1440 R 12 20/1 21 B 22 20/1 12 R EXISTING LOAD 1440 R 12 20/1 23 C 24 20/1 12 R EXISTING LOAD 1440 R 10 30/2 25 A 26 30/2 10 R EXISTING LOAD 1872 R B R M 12 20/1 29 C 30 20/1 12 M SLIDING DOORS 400 M 12 20/1 31 A 32 20/1 SPARE M 12 20/1 33 B 34 20/1 SPARE M 12 20/1 35 C 36 20/1 SPARE M 12 20/1 37 A 38 20/1 SPARE M 12 20/1 39 B 40 20/1 SPARE M 12 20/1 41 C 42 20/1 SPARE Subtotal 22,144 Conn. Fct. Diversity N.E.C. (2005) Conn. Fct. Diversity 42,768 26, (a) (L) Lighting 0 125% % 0 (EL) Ext. Ltg % 0 0 0% (E) Elevators 0 100% 0 0 0% 0 (WH) Water Ht % % (MT) Lrg. Mot % 0 4, % 4,200 (SP) Sub Panel 0 100% 0 Total Connected Load = 46,968 VA = AMPS Total Load (Diversified)= 30,584 VA = 85.0 AMPS F7E ELLIPTIPAR F 162 H242 S V0 0 EM CANOPY 2 42W TRT F8 D'AC d5292-1n WO PC PENDANT 1 60W INCAND F9 D'AC d1410 1N WS WALL 1 75W INCAND F10E KENALL H612ED PP DB 32P EL WALL 1 32W PLT X1 LITHONIA LQM W 1R 277 EL N X2 LITHONIA LQM W 2R 277 EL N CEILING OR BACK - LED CEILING OR BACK LED SAME AS 'F7', MODIFIED W/ INTEGRAL EMERGENCY BODINE "BDL940" BATTERY PACK. TEST BUTTON TO BE INSIDE REFLECTOR HEAD PROVIDE W/ STANDARD CEILING JUNCTION BOX. COORDINATE BOTTO OF FIXTURE TO FLOOR W/ ARCHITECT PRIOR TO ORDERING ADA WALL SCONE, COORDINATE MOUNTING HEIGHT WITH ARCHITECT EMERGENCY EXTERIOR WITH EMERGENCY BATTERY PACK. MOUNT AT 8'-6". SINGLE FACE, UNIVERSAL NOUNTING EXIT SIGN DOUBLE FACE, UNIVERSAL MOUNTING EXIT SIGN ELECTRICAL LOAD ANALYSIS - "EXISTING MAIN SWITCHBOARD" 208 / 120, 3 -PHASE, 4 -WIRE DESCRIPTION NEC KVA LOADS EXISTING: EXISTING MAIN SWITCHBOARD 2822 AMPS 1.25% LOADS ADDED: RECEPTACLE & LIGHTING 26,226 VA 26.2 TOTAL = TOTAL AMPS: SERVICE SIZE: SPARE AMPACITY: Lighting Class Panelboard LA 10,000 AIC Rating Existing X New 120/208 Volt,3-Phase,4-Wire MCB AMP MCB X Single Mounting 2 Section X MLO 225 AMP BUS (Copper) Double X Surface 1 -Nema Rating ISO. GRND. BUS Feed - Thru Flush Notes Load (VA) Description Wire CB CKT CKT PH # # CB Wire Type Description Load (VA) Notes 1440 EXISTING LOAD R 12 20/1 1 A 2 20/1 12 R EXISTING LOAD EXISTING LOAD R 12 20/1 3 B 4 20/1 12 R EXISTING LOAD EXISTING LOAD R 12 20/1 5 C 6 20/1 12 R EXISTING LOAD EXISTING LOAD R 12 20/1 7 A 8 20/1 12 R EXISTING LOAD EXISTING LOAD R 12 20/1 9 B 10 20/1 12 R EXISTING LOAD EXISTING LOAD R 12 20/1 11 C 12 20/1 12 R EXISTING LOAD EXISTING LOAD R 12 20/1 13 A 14 20/1 12 R EXISTING LOAD EXISTING LOAD R 12 20/1 15 B 16 30/2 10 R EXISTING LOAD 3120 EXISTING LOAD R 10 30/1 17 C R EXISTING LOAD R 12 20/1 19 A 20 30/1 10 R EXISTING LOAD 2160 EXISTING LOAD R 10 30/1 21 B 22 30/1 10 R EXISTING LOAD EXISTING LOAD R 12 20/1 23 C 24 20/1 12 R EXISTING LOAD EXISTING LOAD R 10 30/1 25 A 26 70/3 4 R EXISTING LOAD 5040 EXISTING LOAD R 4 70/2 27 B R R C R EXISTING LOAD R 4 70/2 31 A 32 40/2 8 R EXISTING LOAD R B R RECEPTACLES M 12 20/1 35 C 36 50/3 8 R EXISTING LOAD RECEPTACLES M 12 20/1 37 A R RECEPTACLES M 12 20/1 39 B R RECEPTACLES M 12 20/1 41 C 42 20/1 SPARE REFRIGATOR M 12 20/1 43 A 44 SPARE REFRIGATOR M 12 20/1 45 B 46 SPARE GARBGE DISPOSER M 12 20/1 47 C 48 SPARE ,306 N.E.C. (2005) DISH WASHER ICE MACHINE DOUBLE OVEN - M 12 20/1 49 A 50 M 12 20/1 51 B 52 M 8 40/2 53 C 54 M A 56 20/1 OVEN RANGE M 8 40/2 57 B 58 20/1 SPARE - M C 60 20/1 SPARE MICROWAVE M 12 20/1 61 A 62 20/1 SPARE RECEPTACLES M 12 20/1 63 B 64 20/1 SPARE RECEPTACLES M 12 20/1 65 C 66 20/1 SPARE RECEPTACLES M 12 20/1 67 A 68 20/1 SPARE ROLLING SHUTTER M 12 20/1 69 B 70 20/1 SPARE RECEPTACLES M 12 20/1 71 C 72 20/1 SPARE RECEPTACLES M 12 20/1 73 A 74 20/1 SPARE SPARE 20/1 75 B 76 20/1 SPARE SPARE 20/1 77 C 78 20/1 SPARE SPARE 20/1 79 A 80 20/1 SPARE SPARE 20/1 81 B 82 20/1 SPARE SPARE 20/1 83 C 84 20/1 SPARE Subtotal Subtotal Load Type Conn. Fct. Diversity N.E.C. (2005) Conn. (R) Recept. 68,112 39, (a) (L) Lighting 0 (K) Kitchen 0 100% 0 (EL) Ext. Ltg. 0 (C) Cooling 0 0% (E) Elevators 0 (H) Heating 0 0% 0 (WH) Water Ht. 0 (F) Fans 0 100% (MT) Lrg. Mot. 0 (M) Misc. 22, % 22,026 (SP) Sub Panel 0 Total Connected Load = 90,138 VA = AMPS Total Load (Diversified)= 61,082 VA = AMPS 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 20/1 SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE Fct. 125% 125% 100% 100% 125% 100% 50,832 Diversity

485

486 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 E10 E11 E12 E13 E14 15 A.1 A T T T B C D E 1 1 T 1 1 E.4 E.6 F F.4 G Villa Tranchese Renovations San Antonio Housing Authority 307 Marshall Street, San Antonio, TX MECHANICAL DEMOLITION PLAN 1/8" = 1'-0" A. GENERAL MECHANICAL NOTES: THE DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC AND INDICATE THE GENERAL LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT, DUCTS, AND GRILLES ETC. IT IS THE INTENT OF THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS THAT COMPLETE MECHANICAL SYSTEMS BE FURNISHED, INSTALLED, TESTED AND READY FOR OPERATION WHETHER OR NOT EVERY ITEM OF EQUIPMENT, ACCESSORY, DEVICE, ETC. IS SHOWN. REFERENCE SHALL BE MADE TO THE FULL DRAWING PACKAGE INCLUDING ARCHITECTURAL, STRUCTURAL, ELECTRICAL, AND PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR COORDINATION AND POTENTIAL CONFLICTS. THE MECHANICAL SUBCONTRACTOR SHALL, WITHOUT EXTRA CHARGE, MAKE REASONABLE MODIFICATIONS IN THE LAYOUT AS NEEDED TO PREVENT CONFLICTS WITH OTHER TRADES, OR FOR PROPER EXECUTION OF THE WORK. FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS BEFORE FABRICATING DUCTWORK. REVISIONS 1 MECHANICAL KEYED NOTES - DEMOLITION : REMOVE EXISTING SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION PRIOR TO REMOVAL. CONTRACTOR SHALL MEASURE AND RECORD AIRFLOW FOR EACH DEVICE PRIOR TO REMOVAL. TYPCICAL. DATE: 06/18/2010 DRAWN BY: DBR 2 3 EXISTING CEILING MOUNTED EXHAUST FAN, CONTROL AND DUCTWORK TO REMAIN. EXISTING CHILLED WATER MULTI-ZONE AIR HANDLING UNIT TO REMAIN. CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE ALL EXISTING CHILLED WATER PIPE INSULATION FOR REPLACEMENT. CHECKED BY: DBR PROJECT NUMBER: EXISTING SPACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR TO REMAIN. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY EXACT LOCATION. REMOVE EXISTING WALL MOUNTED EXHAUST FAN, FAN LOUVER AND WALL SWITCH. ARCHITECT TO PATCH WALL OPENING. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION PRIOR TO REMOVAL. REMOVE EXISTING RETURN AIR DIFFUSER AND REINSTALL IN NEW WALL. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION PRIOR TO REMOVAL. CONTRACTOR SHALL MEASURE AND RECORD AIRFLOW FOR EACH DEVICE PRIOR TO REMOVAL. REMOVE EXISTING RETURN AIR DIFFUSER TO REMAIN. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION. E N G I N E E R I N G C O N S U L T A N T S 8626 Tesoro Drive Suite 702 San Antonio, Texas p f TBPE FIRM REGISTRATION NO DBR Project Number SHEET NAME MECHANICAL DEMOLITION PLAN SHEET NUMBER M1.1 ZM IV EZ MT

487 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 E10 E11 E12 E13 E14 15 Hall 130 Hall Mech. Room A 10" Ø 290 CFM 3 A 10" Ø 290 CFM A 3 3 Staff A Conference Fitness Room " Ø 290 CFM T 10" Ø 290 CFM 3 Mail Room 121 Hall Office Waiting Property Manager Office Office Men 116 Women Janitor Hall 51 Server 120 8" Ø A 200 CFM 1 3 Office 123 A North Vestibule Rear Entry Lobby 100A Janitor A 12" Ø CFM Stairs 104 8" Ø Elevator 200 CFM 103 D 230 CFM D Entry Lobby " Ø 12" Ø A A 400 CFM 400 CFM South Vestibule A 12" Ø 395 CFM 12" Ø A 395 CFM A A A 12" Ø 395 CFM 2 2 A 12" Ø 395 CFM Dining Room " Ø 12" Ø A 350 CFM 350 CFM T " Ø 12" Ø A 350 CFM 350 CFM A 12" Ø 450 CFM Storage Hall 108 Mech. Room " Ø A 250 CFM A 6 2 Kitchen Vest. 112 Pantry " Ø 385 CFM A 6" Ø B 120 CFM 12" Ø A 400 CFM 3 H.O.A T T Game Room " Ø 385 CFM A A 12" Ø 400 CFM 12" Ø 385 CFM A.1 A B C D E E.4 E.6 F F.4 G Villa Tranchese Renovations San Antonio Housing Authority 307 Marshall Street, San Antonio, TX MECHANICAL NEW WORK PLAN 1/8" = 1'-0" A. GENERAL MECHANICAL NOTES: THE DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC AND INDICATE THE GENERAL LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT, DUCTS, AND GRILLES ETC. IT IS THE INTENT OF THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS THAT COMPLETE MECHANICAL SYSTEMS BE FURNISHED, INSTALLED, TESTED AND READY FOR OPERATION WHETHER OR NOT EVERY ITEM OF EQUIPMENT, ACCESSORY, DEVICE, ETC. IS SHOWN. REFERENCE SHALL BE MADE TO THE FULL DRAWING PACKAGE INCLUDING ARCHITECTURAL, STRUCTURAL, ELECTRICAL, AND PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR COORDINATION AND POTENTIAL CONFLICTS. THE MECHANICAL SUBCONTRACTOR SHALL, WITHOUT EXTRA CHARGE, MAKE REASONABLE MODIFICATIONS IN THE LAYOUT AS NEEDED TO PREVENT CONFLICTS WITH OTHER TRADES, OR FOR PROPER EXECUTION OF THE WORK. FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS BEFORE FABRICATING DUCTWORK. REVISIONS MECHANICAL KEYED NOTES: CONTRACTOR SHALL REVAMP EXISTING CHILLED WATER MULTI-ZONE UNIT AS FOLLOWS: CLEAN CONDENSATE DRAIN PANS AND CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING; THOROUGHLY CLEAN COILS AND CABINET INTERIOR; REPLACE AND LUBRICATE BEARINGS; CLEAN AND DYNAMICALLY BALANCE BLOWER WHEELS; REPLACE BLOWER MOTOR WITH HORSEPOWER INDICATED; PROVIDE NEW ADJUSTABLE SHEAVES FOR BLOWER DRIVE; PROVIDE NEW FAN DRIVE BELTS AND A COMPLETE SET OF SPARE BELTS. VISUALLY INSPECT ALL COMPONENTS OF AIR HANDLING UNIT STRUCTURE, CABINET PANELS, COILS, AND BLOWERS. PROVIDE NEW PIPE INSULATION FOR CHILLED WATER SUPPLY AND RETURN PIPING. REPORT TO OWNER AND ENGINEER ANY RECOMMENDED MAINTENANCE BEYOND THE SCOPE OUTLINED ABOVE. PROVIDE NEW SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER AS SCHEDULE. DIFFUSER SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A NECK SIZED FOR THE "MEASURED AND RECORDED" AIRFLOW RECORDED BEFORE REMOVAL OF EXISTING DIFFUSERS. LOCATE NEW DIFFUSER ALIGNED IN CEILING NEAR LOCATION INDICATED. CONTRACTOR SHALL EXTEND BRANCH DUCT AS REQUIRED TO RECONNECT TO EXISTING MAIN. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION OF MAIN PRIOR TO CONNECTION. PROVIDE NEW SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER AS SCHEDULE. WHERE POSSIBLE CONTRACTOR SHALL EXTEND BRANCH DUCT OR REUSE EXISTING TAP AT MAIN. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION OF MAIN PRIOR TO CONNECTION. EXISTING RETURN AIR DUCTWORK IN WALL TO REMAIN. EXISTING RETURN AIR GRILLES SHALL BE RELOCATED TO NEW WALL. EXTEND DUCTWORK AS REQUIRED TO CONNECT TO EXISTING RETURN MAIN. ROUTE 12"x4" VENT FROM MICROWAVE FAN TO EXTERIOR. TERMINATE WITH WALL CAP. COODINATE EXACT CONNECTION TYPE AND ROUTING. VERIFY EXACT APPLIANCE TYPE AND LOCATION WITH ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. E N G I N E E R I N G C O N S U L T A N T S 8626 Tesoro Drive Suite 702 San Antonio, Texas p f TBPE FIRM REGISTRATION NO DBR Project Number DATE: 06/18/2010 DRAWN BY: DBR CHECKED BY: DBR PROJECT NUMBER: 1001 SHEET NAME MECHANICAL NEW WORK PLAN SHEET NUMBER M2.1 ZM IV EZ MT

488

489

490 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 E10 E11 E12 E13 E14 15 North Vestibule 102 IMB-1 A.1 Space 9 Space 10 Space 11 Space 50 Space 12 Space 13 Space 47 Space 48 Space Mech. Room 132 Staff Conference 131 IMB-1 10 Fitness Room 119 Women Hall 51 Mail Room 121 Janitor 117 Men Rear Entry Lobby 100A Elevator 103 Entry Lobby 100 Space 36 Janitor 106 Stairs 104 Dining Room /2" Storage 107 SK-1 1/2" 3/4" 1 1/2" 7 2" /2" 5 6 Mech. Room Kitchen Vest. 112 Pantry 113 IMB-1 H.O.A 111 A B C Space 8 Space 5 Space 6 Hall 129 Hall Game Room 110 D E Space 2 Space 4 Space 3 Property Manager 127 Office 126 Office 125 Waiting 122 Office 123 Office 124 South Vestibule 101 E.4 E.6 F F PLUMBING PLAN PLUMBING GENERAL NOTES: # PLUMBING KEYED NOTES: ALL PIPE PASSING THROUGH FIRE RATED WALLS OR FLOOR SLABS SHALL BE 1 CONNECT 1/2"CW, 1/2"HW, 1 1/2" VENT AND 2" WASTE TO SK-1. 1/8" = 1'-0" SUPPORTED AT PENETRATION AND OPENINGS SHALL BE SEALED WITH APPROVED, NON-HARDENING, FIRE STOP MATERIALS AS SPECIFIED OR REQUIRED. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WITH THE STRUCTURAL CONDITIONS AT THE SITE AND PROVIDE PROPER ROUGH-IN CONNECTIONS REQUIRED WITHOUT DAMAGE TO STRUCTURE. WHERE STRUCTURAL MODIFICATIONS ARE NECESSARY, CONTRACTOR SHALL FIRST RECEIVE WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ARCHITECT AND STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR FIELD COORDINATING LOCATIONS AND ELEVATIONS OF ALL PLUMBING PIPING WITH OTHER TRADES PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. CORRECTIONS OR RELOCATIONS DUE TO MISALIGNED PIPE SHALL BE PERFORMED IN A TIMELY MANNER AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO OWNER. DO NOT SCALE THE PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR ROUGH-IN WORK. CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER TO THE DIMENSIONED ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS TO FIELD DETERMINE EXACT LOCATIONS OF PLUMBING ROUGH-IN WORK. SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING 2" AND SMALLER SHALL HAVE A UNIFORM MINIMUM CONTINUOUS SLOPE OF 1/4 INCH PER FOOT OF RUN. DRAINAGE PIPING OF 3" SIZE AND LARGER SHALL SLOPE MINIMUM 1/8 INCH PER FOOT OF RUN. SLOPE ALL VENT PIPING MINIMUM 6" PER 100 FEET OF RUN BACK TO DRAIN /2"CW DOWN TO IMB-1. CONNECT NEW 1/2"HW TO EXISTING HOT WATER PIPING IN THIS VICINITY. CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY LOCATION PRIOR TO ANY CONSTRUCTION. CONNECT NEW 3/4" CW LINE TO EXISTING COLD WATER PIPING IN THIS VICINITY. CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY LOCATION PRIOR TO ANY CONSTRUCTION. CONNECT NEW 1/2"CW LINE TO EXISTING COLD WATER PIPING IN THIS VICINITY. CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY LOCATION PRIOR TO ANY CONSTRUCTION. EXISTING CW, HWR AND HW IN THIS VICINITY. CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY SIZE AND LOCATION PRIOR TO ANY CONSTRUCTION. CONNECT NEW 2" SANITARY SEWER PIPING TO EXISTING SANITARY SEWER PIPING IN THIS VICINITY. CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY SIZE AND LOCATION PRIOR TO ANY CONSTRUCTION. G Villa Tranchese Renovations San Antonio Housing Authority 307 Marshall Street, San Antonio, TX PROVIDE AND INSTALL CLEANOUTS AT EACH CHANGE OF DIRECTION OF THE BUILDING SANITARY DRAIN, AT MINIMUM 75' INTERVALS ALONG STRAIGHT RUNS OF MAIN DRAIN AND BRANCHES, AT EACH HORIZONTAL CHANGE OF DIRECTION IN SOIL OR WASTE PIPES GREATER THAN 45 DEGREES, AT END OF INDIVIDUAL BRANCH DRAINS LONGER THAN 5'. PROVIDE CLEANOUTS IN ACCORD WITH UNIFORM PLUMBING CODE. PROVIDE FITTINGS FOR SANITARY DRAIN WASTE AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS IN COMPLIANCE WITH UNIFORM PLUMBING CODE. INSTALL EACH WATER HEATER AND ALL PLUMBING EQUIPMENT WITH ADEQUATE CLEARANCES FOR ACCESS BY SERVICE PERSONNEL AND WITH PROPER ORIENTATION FOR ELEMENT REMOVALS/REPLACEMENTS CONNECT NEW 1 1/2" VENT PIPING TO EXISTING VENT PIPING IN THIS VICINITY. CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY LOCATION PRIOR TO ANY CONSTRUCTION. EXISTING SANITARY SEWER PIPING IN THIS VICINITY. CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY LOCATION PRIOR TO ANY CONSTRUCTION. ROUTE 1/2" COLD WATER LINE TO JAN 117 AND CONNECT TO EXISTING COLD WATER LINE OVERHEAD. PROVIDE CUT OFF VALVE TO NEW COLD WATER BRANCH SERVING ICE MAKER. EXISTING PLUMBING FIXTURES TO REMAIN PROVIDE ISOLATING BALL VALVES FOR ALL BRANCHES OFF DOMESTIC WATER MAINS. ALL PLUMBING SYSTEM VALVES SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACES. WHERE CEILING IS NOT ACCESSIBLE, OR SPACE IS CONFLICTING, VALVES SHALL BE INSTALLED IN PARTITIONS OR PIPE CHASES. PROVIDE APPROVED PAINTED STEEL HINGED ACCESS PANELS IN LOCATIONS PRE-APPROVED BY THE ARCHITECT. PROVIDE STAINLESS STEEL ACCESS DOORS FOR SHOWER, LOCKER AND LOCKER TOILET ROOM PANELS. REVISIONS THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR FIELD COORDINATING LOCATIONS OF ALL SANITARY VENTS UP THROUGH ROOF TO MAINTAIN MINIMUM 15'-0" CLEARANCE TO ANY BUILDING OUTDOOR AIR INLET. THE LOCATION OF EXISTING UTILITIES SHOWN ON DRAWINGS ARE APPROXIMATE ONLY. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THE ACTUAL LOCATIONS, INVERTS AND SIZES AT SITE WHETHER SHOWN OR NOT. DATE: 06/18/2010 DRAWN BY: Author THE CONTRACTOR SHALL EXERCISE CAUTION WHEN SAW-CUTTING, TRENCHING AND EXCAVATING EXISTING CONCRETE SLABS AND SHALL IMMEDIATELY NOTIFY THE ENGINEER OF ANY CONFLICTS OR UNKNOWN UTILITIES WHICH MAY BE ENCOUNTERED. CHECKED BY: Checker PROJECT NUMBER: 1001 ANY EXISTING MEP UTILITIES IN CONFLICT WITH NEW CONSTRUCTION OR NEW UTILITIES, SHALL BE REROUTED AS APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR A.D.A. PLUMBING FIXTURES AND STANDARD MOUNTING HEIGHTS. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE TRAP PRIMERS TO ALL FLOOR DRAINS. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE ALL PIPING ROUTING ABOVE CEILING/OVERHEAD WITH MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS BEFORE INSTALLING. ALL VALVES SHALL BE INSTALLED NO HIGHER THAT 2'-0" ABOVE CEILING. ACCESS DOORS TO BE INSTALLED AT ALL HARD CEILING LOCATIONS.. E N G I N E E R I N G C O N S U L T A N T S 8626 Tesoro Drive Suite 702 San Antonio, Texas p f TBPE FIRM REGISTRATION NO DBR Project Number ZM IV EZ MT SHEET NAME Plumbing Plan SHEET NUMBER P2.1

491 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS STRUCTURAL NOTES Required Verification and Inspection CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION 1. Inspection of reinforcing steel, including prestressing tendons and placement. 2. Inspection of reinforcing steel welding in accordance with IBC Table , Item 5b. 3. Inspection of bolts to be installed in concrete prior to and during placement of concrete where allowable loads have been increased or where strength design is used. 6. At the time fresh concrete is sampled to fabricate specimens for strength tests, perform slump and air content tests and detemine the temperature of the concrete. 7. Inspection of concrete and shotcrete placement for proper application techniques. 9. Inspection of prestressed concrete: a. Application of prestressing forces. b. Grouting of bonded prestressing tendons in the seismic-force-resisting system. SPECIAL INSPECTIONS NOTES: TESTING & INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION (INCLUDING SPECIAL INSPECTIONS) Frequency of Verification and Inspection Periodic Continuous 4. Inspection of anchors installed in hardened concrete. Periodic 5. Verify use of required design mix. 8. Inspection for maintenance of special curing temperature and techniques. 10. Erection of precast concrete members. 11. Verification of in-situ concrete strength, prior to stressing of tendons in posttensioned concrete and prior to removal of shores and forms from beams and structural slabs. 12. Inspect formwork for shape, location and dimensions of the concrete member being formed. SP-1 Periodic Continuous Continuous Periodic N/A Periodic IBC Section and Reference Standard IBC SPECIAL INSPECTION WORK IS NOT INCLUDED IN THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER'S SCOPE OF SERVICES. THE OWNER WILL ENGAGE A TESTING AGENCY TO CONDUCT SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS REQUIRED BY AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION AS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE OWNER. ALL INSPECTION REPORTS SHALL BE COPIED TO THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER, SO THAT A FINAL LETTER OF COMPLIANCE MAY BE PROVIDED TO THE OWNER OR BUILDING AUTHORITY. SPECIAL INSPECTION SHALL INCLUDE: SITE PREPARATION (NOT REQUIRED) PIER FOUNDATION (NOT REQUIRED) CONCRETE WOOD (NOT REQUIRED) STEEL MASONRY I (NOT REQUIRED) MASONRY II (NOT REQUIRED) N/A N/A N/A IBC 1913; ACI 318: 3.5, ; Concrete and Concrete Reinforcement Notes on construction documents and specification Section AWS D1.4; ACI 318: 3.5.2; Concrete and Concrete Reinforcement Notes on construction documents and specification Section IBC , ; ACI 318: 8.1.3, ; Project Specification Section IBC ; ACI 318: 3.8.6, 8.1.3, ; Project Specification Section IBC , and ; ACI 318: Ch. 4, Concrete and Concrete Reinforcement Notes on construction documents and specification Section IBC ; ASTM C172, C31; ACI 318: 5.6, 5.8; Concrete and Concrete Reinforcement Notes on construction documents and Project Specification Section IBC , , ; ACI 318: 5.9, 5.10; Project Specification Section IBC ; ACI 318: ; Concrete and Concrete Reinforcement Notes on construction documents and Project Specification Section ACI 318: 18.20, ; Post- Tensioned Notes on construction documents and project specifications ACI 318: CH. 16; Structural Notes on construction documents and Project Specification Section ACI 318: 6.2; Post-Tensioned Notes on construction documents and project specifications ACI 318: 6.1.1; Details on construction documents and Project Specification Section * Inspector Qualifications Qualifications based on ASTM E329 CWI or Associate CWI Technician trained in field of work and has at least one year experience Technician trained in field of work and has at least one year experience * * * * * * Qualifications based on ASTM C1077 Qualifications based on ASTM C1077 Qualifications based on ASTM C1077 Qualifications based on ASTM C1077 Qualifications based on ASTM C1077 Qualifications based on ASTM C1077 Required Verification and Inspection STEEL CONSTRUCTION 1. Material verification of high strength bolts, nuts & washers: a. Identification markings to conform to ASTM standards specified in the approved construction documents. Frequency of Verification and Inspection Periodic b. Manufacturer's certificate of compliance required. Periodic 2. Inspection of high-strength bolting: a. Bearing-type connections Periodic b. Pretensioned and slip-critical joints using turn-of-nut with matchmarking, twist-off bolt or direct tension indicator methods of installation. c. Pretensioned and slip-critical joints using turn-of-nut without matchmarking or calibrated wrench methods of installation. 3. Material verification of structural steel and cold-formed steel deck: a. For structural steel, identification markings to conform to AISC 360. b. For other steel, identification markings to conform to ASTM standards specified in the approved construction documents. 4. Material verification of weld filler material a. Identification markings to conform to AWS specification in approved construction documents. b. Manufacturer's certificate of compliance required. 5. Inspection of welding: a. Structural Steel and Cold-Formed Steel Deck: N/A Periodic Periodic 1) Complete and partial penetration grove welds. Continuous 2) Multipass fillet welds. N/A 3) Single-pass fillet welds > 5/16" N/A 5) Single-pass fillet welds _ < 5/16" N/A 6) Floor and Roof deck welds. N/A b. Reinforcing Steel 1) Verification of weldability of reinforcing steel other than ASTM A706. TESTING & INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR STEEL CONSTRUCTION (INCLUDING SPECIAL INSPECTIONS) N/A N/A 3) Shear reinforcement. N/A 4) Other reinforcement steel. N/A Periodic a. Details such as bracing and stiffening. Periodic b. Member locations. Periodic c. Application of joint detail at each connection. Periodic IBC Section and Reference Standard IBC INSPECTION OF FABRICATORS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL IBC Fabrication and Implementation Procedures Periodic c. Manufacturer's certified mill test reports. Periodic 4) Plug and Slot Welds 2) Reinforcing steel-resisting flexural and axial forces in intermediate and special moment frames, and boundary elements of special structural walls of concrete and shear reinforcement. 6. Inspection of steel frame joint details for compliance: The special inspector shall verify that the fabricator maintains detailed fabrication and quality control procedures that provide a basis for inspection control of the workmanshop and the fabricator's ability to conform to approved construction documents and referenced standards. The special inspector shall review the procedures for completeness and adequacy relative to the code requirements for the fabricator's scope of work. Exception: Special inspections shall not be required where the work is performed on the premises of a fabricator that is enrolled in a nationally accepted inspections program acceptable to the registered design professional in charge. At the completion of fabrication, the approved fabricator shall submit a certificate of compliance to the building official upon request and to the registered design professional in responsible charge stating that the work was performed in accordance with the approved construction documents. N/A Periodic Periodic AISC 360, Section A3.3; Structural Steel Notes on construction documents IBC ; AISC 360, Section M2.5; Structural Steel Notes on construction documents and specification Section AISC 360, Section M5.5 and Applicable ASTM Material Standards; Structural Steel Notes on construction documents and specification Section AISC 360, Section A3.5 and Applicable AWS A5 Documents; Structural Steel Notes on construction documents and specification Section IBC ; AWS D1.1; Structural Steel Notes on construction documents and specification Section AWS D1.3; Metal Deck Notes on construction documents and Specification Section AWS D1.4; ACI 318: 3.5.2; Concrete and Concrete Reinforcement Notes on construction documents and specification Section IBC , Structural Steel Notes on construction documents and specification Section Periodic IBC , Inspector Qualifications CWI / Associate/ Technical Graduate AWS or CRSI CWI / Associate/ Technical Graduate, AWS or CRSI CWI / Associate/ Technical Graduate, AWS or CRSI CWI / Associate/ Technical Graduate, AWS or CRSI CWI and ASNT CWI and ASNT or Licensed Engineer CWI / Associate/ Technician trained in field of work and has at least one year experience Projects of Complex Joint Details: Associate CWI Projects of Relatively Simple Details: Technician trained in field of work and has at least one year experience CWI, ASNT, Licensed Engineer GENERAL: N-1 GN-2 GN-3 GN-4 GN-5 GN-6 GN-7 GN-8 GN-9 GN-10 GN-11 GN-12 GN-13 GN-14 GN-15 GN-16 GN-17 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE: 2009 EDITION. THE DETAILS DESIGNATED AS "TYPICAL DETAILS", APPLY GENERALLY TO THE DRAWINGS IN ALL AREAS WHERE CONDITIONS ARE SIMILAR TO THOSE DESCRIBED IN DETAILS. VERIFY REQUIREMENTS OF OTHER TRADES (MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING ETC.) PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH FABRICATION OR INSTALLATION OF MATERIALS. THE CONTRACTOR AND FABRICATOR SHALL VERIFY ALL QUANTITIES, DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS THOROUGHLY WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND THEN NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES OR INCONSISTENCIES BEFORE SUBMITTING SHOP DRAWINGS AND PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS FOR DIMENSIONS. COMPLETED SHOP DRAWINGS SHALL BE PROVIDED, AS SPECIFIED, FOR ALL FABRICATED ITEMS AND SHALL BE REVIEWED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO FABRICATION. STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCED FOR SHOP DRAWINGS. USE OF STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS WITHOUT PERMISSION IS GROUNDS FOR REJECTION OF SHOP DRAWINGS. THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER WILL REVIEW SHOP DRAWINGS FOR THE LIMITED PURPOSE OF CHECKING FOR CONFORMANCE WITH INFORMATION GIVEN AND THE DESIGN CONCEPT EXPRESSED IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THEREFORE, ALL CLOUDED DIMENSIONS, INDICATED ON ANY SHOP DRAWINGS, THAT ARE RELATIVE TO EXISTING STRUCTURES SHALL BE VERIFIED BY THE CONTRACTOR AND FABRICATOR. AS A MINIMUM, THE FOLLOWING SHOP DRAWINGS SHALL BE SUBMITTED: A. CONCRETE MIX DESIGN FOR EACH TYPE OF CONCRETE TO BE USED. B. CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL SHOP DRAWINGS INCLUDING PLACEMENT DRAWINGS AND CUT SHEETS. C. STRUCTURAL STEEL SHOP DRAWINGS. D. CARTON FORMS SHOP DRAWINGS NOT PREVIOUSLY REVIEWED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RETURNED WITHOUT REVIEW BY STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. STRUCTURAL ENGINEER DOES NOT BEAR ANY RESPONSIBILITY TO THE STRUCTURAL MEMBERS BUILT WITHOUT APPROVED SHOP DRAWINGS. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL INSPECT JOB FOR COMPLETION BEFORE SCHEDULING ANY OBSERVATION. SEE ARCH'L. AND MEP DRAWINGS FOR LOCATIONS AND SIZES OF SLAB OPENINGS, SLEEVES, INSERTS, ANCHORS AND BOLTS REQUIRED BY VARIOUS TRADES. ALL PLUMBING CONDUITS AT FOUNDATION SHOULD HAVE FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS TO SUSTAIN A MAXIMUM DIFFERENTIAL MOVEMENT OF 1 INCH. THE STRUCTURE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO RESIST DESIGN LOADS ONLY AS A COMPLETED STRUCTURE. CONTRACTOR SHALL CONSIDER ALL CONSTRUCTION LOADS APPLIED TO THE PARTIALLY COMPLETED STRUCTURE UNTIL ALL PERMANENT CONNECTIONS ARE MADE, AND ENCLOSED PERMANENTLY AS PER CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. TEMPORARY BRACING SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR IN ALL DIRECTIONS. WHEN REQUIRED, BY THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS OR THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE CALCULATIONS SEALED BY A LICENSED STRUCTURAL ENGINEER IN THE STATE OF TEXAS WHICH VERIFY THE MEANS OF STRUCTURALLY MAINTAINING THE INTEGRITY OF THE COMPLETED PORTION OF THE STRUCTURE. CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS SHALL NOT BE STORED ON FLOORS OR ROOFS IN EXCESS OF THE DESIGN LOADS. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO ENFORCE THIS REQUIREMENT. IMPACT LOADS SHALL BE PREVENTED WHEN PLACING MATERIALS ON FLOORS OR ROOFS. ALL EXPOSED MISCELLANEOUS STEEL AND LINTEL ANGLES SHALL BE CLEANED AND GALVANIZED. APPLY ZINC COATING BY THE HOT-DIP PROCESS AND ACCORDING TO A.S.T.M. A123. WHEN APPLICABLE FIELD WELDS, BOLTED CONNECTIONS AND ABRADED AREAS SHALL BE CLEANED AND "TOUCHED UP" WITH GALVANIZING REPAIR PAINT IN ACCORDANCE WITH A.S.T.M. A780. THE GALVANIZING REPAIR PAINT SHALL HAVE A HIGH ZINC-DUST CONTENT WITH DRY FILM CONTAINING NO LESS THAN 95% ZINC-DUST BY WEIGHT, AND COMPLYING WITH THE DOD-P-21035A OR SSPC-PAINT 20. CONTRACTOR TO INCLUDE 200 POUNDS OF MISC. STEEL (STRUCTURAL STEEL, REINFORCING STEEL, LIGHT GAGE STEEL, AND MISC. STEEL) IN HIS BID PRICE FOR INSTALLATION PER DESIGN TEAM MEMBERS. THIS ALLOWANCE SHOULD INCLUDE LABOR DURING ANYTIME OF CONSTRUCTION. THE ENGINEER SHALL NOT HAVE CONTROL OF, AND SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR, CONSTRUCTION MEANS, METHODS, TECHNIQUES, SEQUENCES, OR PROCEDURES, FOR SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS IN CONNECTION WITH THE WORK, FOR THE ACTS OR OMISSIONS OF THE CONTRACTOR, SUBCONTRACTOR, OR ANY OTHER PERSONS PERFORMING ANY OF THE WORK, OR FOR THE FAILURE OF ANY OF THEM TO CARRY OUT THE WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. PERIODIC SITE OBSERVATIONS BY FIELD REPRESENTATIVES OF ALPHA CONSULTING ENGINEERS, INC. ARE SOLELY FOR THE PURPOSE OF DETERMINING IF THE WORK OF THE CONTRACTOR IS PROCEEDING IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE STRUCTURAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THESE LIMITED SITE OBSERVATIONS ARE NOT INTENDED TO BE A CHECK OF THE QUALITY OR QUANTITY OF THE WORK, BUT RATHER PERIODIC IN AN EFFORT TO INFORM THE OWNER OF DEFECTS AND DEFICIENCIES IN THE WORK OF THE CONTRACTOR. ASSUMPTIONS HAVE BEEN MADE BY THIS OFFICE REGARDING EXISTING CONDITIONS. ACTUAL CONDITIONS MAY VARY FROM THOSE ASSUMED. THE CONTRACTOR IS TO REPORT ANY SUCH DISCREPANCIES TO THE ENGINEER FOR POSSIBLE MODIFICATIONS NEEDED TO THE CONTRACT DRAWINGS. PROTECT ALL REMAINING EXISTING STRUCTURES. ANY DAMAGE TO AN EXISTING STRUCTURE SHALL BE REPAIRED TO EQUIVALENT OR BETTER CONDITION. SCHEDULE OF SITE OBSERVATIONS BY ENGINEER: SO-1 SO-2 NOTE: ALL STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS OF THE NEW CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE OBSERVED BY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER'S REPRESENTATIVE DURING THE CONSTRUCTION PHASE, SO THAT A FINAL LETTER OF COMPLIANCE CAN BE PROVIDED TO THE OWNER AND/OR BUILDING AUTHORITY. PRIOR TO THE BEGINNING OF CONSTRUCTION, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ARRANGE A MEETING WITH THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER TO SET UP A SCHEDULE FOR THE FOLLOWING OBSERVATIONS, NOT TO EXCEED THE SPECIFIED NUMBER OF VISITS: A. CONCRETE: FOR EACH CONCRETE POUR UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE BY THE ENGINEER. SEE NOTE 5 OF CONCRETE AND CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT - ONE VISIT. B. STRUCTURAL STEEL: BEFORE CONNECTIONS AND STRUCTURAL MEMBERS ARE HIDDEN BY INSTALLATION OF ARCHITECTURAL FINISHES - ONE VISIT. C. PRECAST EARTH RETAINER: AFTER ALL RETAINERS ARE INSTALLED PROPERLY AND ALL JOINTS (TOP & SIDES) ARE GROUTED BUT BEFORE BACKFILLING. D. NOTIFY ARCHITECT AT LEAST 24 HOURS BEFORE EACH SITE OBSERVATION IS REQUIRED TO ALLOW TIME FOR ARRANGEMENTS TO BE MADE WITH ENGINEER FOR SITE OBSERVATION. THESE STRUCTURAL OBSERVATIONS ARE THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER AND DOES NOT INCLUDE OR WAIVE THE RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE SPECIAL INSPECTIONS REQUIRED BY CHAPTER 17 OF THE 2009 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE. SPECIAL INSPECTION SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR WHO SHALL BE HIRED BY OWNER TO MEET CHAPTER 17 OF IBC DESIGN LOADS: CONCRETE AND CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT: CN-1 CN-2 CN-3 CN-4 CN-5 CN-6 CN-7 CN-8 CN-9 CN-10 CN-11 CN-12 CN-13 CN-14 CN-15 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CODE APPLICABLE EDITION OF "BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE (ACI 318)", THE AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE. ALL CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE NEW DOMESTIC DEFORMED BILLET STEEL, CONFORMING TO ASTM A 615, GRADE 60, EXCEPT WELDABLE REBARS ASTM A706, GR. 60, WELDED WIRE FABRIC SHALL COMFORM TO ASTM A185, GRADE 70 DETAIL REINFORCING BARS AND PROVIDE BAR SUPPORTS AND SPACERS IN ACCORDANCE WITH ACI 315. ALL REINFORCING SHALL BE PROPERLY CHAIRED AND TIED PER ACI 315 (SP66) AND CRSI (PLACING REINFORCING BARS) PRIOR TO PLACING CONCRETE. PLACEMENT OF ALL REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE OBSERVED BY THE ENGINEER PRIOR TO CONCRETE PLACEMENT UNLESS APPROVED OTHERWISE. ALL CONCRETE SHALL BE NORMAL WEIGHT STONE AGGREGATE CONCRETE UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. AGGREGATE SHALL MEET ASTM C33 REQUIREMENTS, AND SHALL BE 3/4" TO 1 1/2" NOMINAL AGGREGATE SIZE. PROVIDE WATER REDUCING ADMIXTURES AS REQUIRED TO IMPROVE WORKABILITY. MAX. SLUMP SHALL NOT EXCEED 5 INCHES. PLASTIC CONCRETE TEMPERATURE SHALL NOT EXCEED 90 DEGREES PRIOR TO PLACEMENT. ALL CONCRETE SHALL BE CURED FOR A MINIMUM OF 7 DAYS USING MOIST CURING PROCEDURES, OR CURING COMPOUNDS WHICH WILL NOT INTERFERE WITH THE BONDING OF FINISH TILE FLOORS. MAXIMUM AMOUNT OF FLY ASH SHALL NOT EXCEED 25% OF CEMENT BY WEIGHT. MINIMUM CONCRETE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH WHEN TESTED AT 28 DAYS SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS: o BEAMS AND JOISTS... 4,000 PSI PROVIDE A SET OF FOUR CYLINDERS IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM C 31 TO BE TAKEN BY AN INDEPENDENT TESTING LAB AT THE FOLLOWING FREQUENCY FOR EACH TEST OF EACH CLASS OF CONCRETE: A. ONCE EACH DAY A GIVEN CLASS IS PLACED, NOR LESS THAN B. ONCE FOR EACH 150 YD^3 OF EACH CLASS PLACED EACH DAY, NOR LESS THAN C. ONCE FOR EACH 5,000 FT^2 OF SLAB OR WALL SURFACE AREA PLACED EACH DAY. REPORT COMPRESSION TEST RESULTS TO THE ENGINEER WITHIN 24 HOURS. NO SUBSEQUENT CONSTRUCTION WILL BE ALLOWED UNTIL CONCRETE HAS CURED A MINIMUM OF 7 DAYS AT A TEMPERATURE OF 50 F OR ABOVE. PORTLAND CEMENT SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM - C150, TYPE 1. NO WELDING OF REINFORCING BARS OR TORCHING TO BEND REINFORCING BARS SHALL BE ALLOWED WITHOUT THE SPECIFIC APPROVAL OF THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. CONCRETE COVER SHOULD BE AS FOLLOWS: A. FOOTINGS AND OTHER PRINCIPAL STRUCTURAL MEMBERS IN WHICH CONCRETE IS CAST AGAINST AND PERMANENTLY EXPOSED TO EARTH - 3 INCHES. B. WHERE CONCRETE SURFACES, AFTER REMOVAL OF FORMS, ARE EXPOSED TO WEATHER OR EARTH: o BARS 3/4" AND LARGER IN DIAMETER...2 INCHES o BARS SMALLER THAN 5/8" IN DIAMETER...1 1/2 INCHES C. WHERE SURFACES ARE NOT DIRECTLY EXPOSED TO WEATHER OR EARTH: o SLAB ON GRADE (FROM TOP OF SLAB)...1 1/2 INCHES o SLABS, WALLS, JOISTS No. 14 AND No. 18 BARS...1 1/2 INCHES No. 11 BARS AND SMALLER...3/4 INCHES o BEAMS, COLUMNS PRIMARY REINF., TIES, STIRRUPS, SPIRALS...1 1/2 INCHES MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL CONDUIT IN BEAMS SHALL RUN UNDER TOP LAYER OF REINFORCEMENT OR WIRE MESH. PROVIDE A MINIMUM OF 1 1/2" CLEAR BETWEEN CONDUIT AND PARALLEL REINFORCING. DO NOT "BUNDLE" CONDUITS. CONDUITS SHALL BE PLACED BELOW SLAB REINFORCMENT. SET AND BUILD INTO FORM WORK ANCHORAGE DEVICES AND OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMS REQUIRED FOR OTHER WORK THAT IS ATTACHED TO OR SUPPORTED BY CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. REBAR PROJECTING FROM CONCRETE SHALL BE SECURED IN PLACE PRIOR TO PLACING CONCRETE. IF NOT SHOWN ON PLAN, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT A PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION JOINT LAYOUT FOR REVIEW. AT SUSPENDED SLAB AND BEAMS, FORM SIDES AND SOFFITS OF ALL SLABS AND BEAMS AND REMOVE FORMS. USE PRECAST CONCRETE "EARTH RETAINERS" AS SHOWN ON DETAILS TO PROVIDE AIR SPACE UNDER GRADE BEAMS AS SHOWN ON DETAILS. PRECAST EARTH RETAINERS SHALL BE 1 1/2" THICK AND REINFORCED WITH 6x6-W1.4xW1.4 W.W.F. RETAINERS SHALL BE OF CONVENIENT LENGTH, PLANT OR JOB CAST IN CAREFULLY CONSTRUCTED CASTING BEDS OR MONOLITHICALLY POURED. INSTALL RETAINERS AGAINST BEAM FACES ON A 1 TO 12 SLOPE. GROUT ALL JOINTS TO SEAL OFF. STRUCTURAL STEEL: SS-1 SS-2 SS-3 SS-4 SS-5 SS-6 STRUCTURAL STEEL SHALL CONFORM TO THE 2005 "SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS" OF THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, AISC WELDING: CODE APPLICABLE EDITION OF THE STRUCTURAL WELDING CODE - STEEL, AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS D1.1 AND AWS D1.3). VERIFY THE EXACT SIZE AND LOCATION OF ALL FLOOR AND ROOF OPENINGS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS AND COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO FABRICATION OF MATERIALS. STEEL SHALL BE MEET THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS: WIDE FLANGES...ASTM A992 Gr. 50 OTHER ROLLED SHAPES, PLATES,BARS...ASTM A36 PIPE (Fy 35ksi)...ASTM A53 Gr. B TUBE (Fy 46ksi)...ASTM A500 Gr. B STEEL SHALL BE CLEANED PER SSPC-SP2. STEEL SHALL BE PAINTED WITH ONE SHOP COAT OF RED OXIDE PRIMER, MINIMUM OF 1.5 MILS (DRY FILM THICKNESS). DO NOT PAINT STRUCTURAL STEEL AND ANCHOR RODS THAT ARE TO BE EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE OR TO RECEIVE FIREPROOFING. WELDING SHALL BE PERFORMED BY WELDERS HOLDING VALID CERTIFICATES, IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 4 OF THE AWSD1.1 "STRUCTURAL WELDING CODE- STEEL", AND HAVING CURRENT EXPERIENCE IN THE TYPE OF WELDS AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. ALL WELDS SHALL BE PERFORMED USING E70XX SERIES LOW HYDROGEN RODS. ALL WELDS SHALL BE VISUALLY INSPECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTIONS 6.5 AND 6.9 OF THE AWSD1.1 "STRUCTURAL WELDING CODE-STEEL". VISUAL INSPECTIONS OF WELDS SHALL BE PERFORMED BY AN INDEPENDENT TESTING AGENCY. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, ALL WELDS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS ARE SHOWN AS SHOP WELDS. CONTRACTOR MAY SHOP WELD OR FIELD WELD AT HIS DISCRETION. C o n s u l t i n g E n g i n e e r s, I n c. STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS HWY. 281 N., SUITE 200 SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS TEL: (210) Villa Tranchese Renovations San Antonio Housing Authority 307 Marshall Street, San Antonio, TX SP-2 SP-3 SP-4 SP-5 INSPECTOR QUALIFICATIONS: QUALIFICATIONS LISTED IN THE TESTING & INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS TABLES ARE RECOMMENDATIONS OF THE LOCAL MEMBERS OF THE TEXAS COUNCIL OF ENGINEERING LABORATORIES. IT IS ALSO RECOMMENDED THAT THE SPECIAL INSPECTORS SHOULD BE EMPLOYED BY AN AGENCY ACCREDITED BY ANY NATIONALLY RECOGNIZED ACCREDITING BODY SUCH AS AASHTO, A2LA, NVLAP, ICC ETC. DEFINITIONS: ADSC-IAFD - ADSC: THE INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF FOUNDATION DRILLING ASNT - AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING ASTM - AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS AWS - AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY CWI - CERTIFIED WELDING INSPECTOR CRSI - CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL INSTITUTE PCI - PRECAST/PRESTRESSED CONCRETE INSTITUTE PTI - POST-TENSIONING INSTITUTE TESTING AND INSPECTION DIRECTED BY ASTM E329 GUIDELINES WHERE NOTED * ON THE TESTING & INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS TABLES. SPECIAL INSPECTOR CANNOT BE AN EMPLOYEE OF THE CONTRACTOR. DL-1 DL-2 DL-3 DL-4 DL-5 DL-6 DL-7 DL-8 DEAD LOADS INCLUDE THE WEIGHT OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS INCORPORATED INTO THE BUILDING, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WALLS, FLOORS, ROOFS, CEILINGS, STAIRWAYS, BUILT-IN PARTITIONS, FINISHES, CLADDING AND OTHER SIMILARLY INCORPORATED ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL ITEMS, AND FIXED SERVICE EQUIPMENT. ALL DEAD LOADS ARE CONSIDERED PERMANENT LOADS. DEAD LOADS FOR MECHANICAL UNITS ARE BASED ON THE WEIGHTS OF EQUIPMENT, AS INDICATED ON THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS (INCLUDING THE WEIGHT OF CONCRETE PADS, WHERE INDICATED). ANY CHANGES IN TYPE, SIZE, LOCATION OR NUMBER OF PIECES OF EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE REPORTED TO THE ARCHITECT FOR VERIFICATION OF THE ADEQUACY OF SUPPORTING MEMBERS PRIOR TO THE PLACEMENT OF SUCH EQUIPMENT. UNIFORM DESIGN LIVE LOADING IS AS FOLLOWS: o ROOF...20 PSF o LOBBIES & FIRST FLOOR CORRIDORS PSF ROOF LIVE LOADS MAY BE REDUCED AS ALLOWED BY BUILDING CODE. SNOW LOAD: o GROUND SNOW LOAD, Pg...5 PSF WIND LOADS: o BASIC WIND SPEED, V3S...90 MPH o IMPORTANCE FACTOR, Iw o EXPOSURE CATEGORY..."B" o FOR COMPONENTS AND CLADDING, USE APPLICABLE INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS. EARTHQUAKE DESIGN DATA: o SEISMIC IMPORTANCE FACTOR IE o SEISMIC USE GROUP...I o MAPPED SPECTRAL RESPONSE ACCELERATIONS: SS g S g o SITE CLASS "C" o SPECTRAL RESPONSE COEFFICIENTS SDS g SD g o BASIC SEISMIC FORCE RESISTING SYSTEM- STRUCTURAL STEEL SYSTEM NOT SPECIFICALLY DETAILED FOR SEISMIC RESISTANCE o DESIGN BASE SHEAR, V = N/A o SEISMIC RESPONSE COEFFICIENT, Cs = N/A o SEISMIC MODIFICATION FACTOR, R = 3 o ANALYSIS PROCEDURE-STATIC SIMPLIFIED ANALYSIS. UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED, THERE ARE NO PROVISIONS FOR FUTURE FLOORS, ROOFS OR OTHER LOADS. SS-7 SS-8 SS-9 SS-10 SS-11 SS-12 BOLTED BEAM CONNECTIONS SHALL BE SIMPLE FRAMED SHEAR CONNECTIONS USING A.S.T.M. A325X BOLTS AND SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE "SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURAL JOINTS USING A.S.T.M. A325 OR A490 BOLTS." JOINT TYPES FOR SIMPLE FRAMED SHEAR CONNECTIONS SHALL BE "SNUG- TIGHTENED JOINTS" AND SHALL BE INSTALLED AND VISUALLY INSPECTED PER SECTIONS 8.1 AND 9.1 RESPECTIVELY OF THE "SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURAL JOINTS USING ASTM A325 OR A490 BOLTS." VISUAL INSPECTION OF BOLTED CONNECTIONS SHALL BE PERFORMED BY AN INDEPENDENT TESTING AGENCY. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE IN THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THE CONNECTIONS MUST BE DESIGNED TO SUPPORT ONE-HALF THE TOTAL UNIFORM LOAD CAPACITY SHOWN IN THE "ALLOWABLE UNIFORM LOAD TABLES", SHOWN IN PART 2 OF THE AISC MANUAL OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION. DIRECT TENSION INDICATOR (DTI) BOLTS SHALL BE PERMITTED. THE STEEL FABRICATOR SHALL PROVIDE CONNECTION DESIGN CALCULATIONS SEALED AND SIGNED BY A REGISTERED ENGINEER LICENSED IN THE STATE OF TEXAS FOR ALL CONNECTIONS DETAILED BY OTHERWISE ON THE STRUCTURAL STEEL SHOP DRAWINGS. IN FRAMED BEAM CONNECTIONS, WELDS MAY BE SUBSTITUTED FOR BOLTED CONNECTIONS IN ACCORDANCE WITH TABLE III, PART 4 OF THE AISC MANUAL OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION. TO OBTAIN AN ALL WELDED CONNECTION IT IS RECOMMENDED SUCH CONNECTIONS BE CHOSEN FROM TABLE IV, PART 4 OF THE AISC MANUAL OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW SHOP AND FIELD WELD REQUIREMENTS FOR COMPATIBILITY WITH THE CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE. PROPOSED REVISIONS FROM SHOP TO FIELD WELDS OR FROM FIELD TO SHOP WELDS SHALL BE IDENTIFIED BY THE CONTRACTOR ON THE SHOP DRAWINGS. DRY PACK SHALL BE 5,000 PSI FIVE STAR NON-SHRINK GROUT OR EQUIVALENT. INSTALL DRY PACK UNDER BEARING PLATES BEFORE FRAMING MEMBER IS INSTALLED. AT COLUMNS, INSTALL DRY PACK UNDER BASE PLATES AFTER COLUMN HAS BEEN PLUMBED BUT PRIOR TO FLOOR OR ROOF INSTALLATION. NO MECHANICAL UNITS (SUCH AS A/C UNITS, HEATER UNITS, ETC.) ARE TO BE HUNG FROM STRUCTURE WITHOUT THE ENGINEER'S APPROVAL, UNLESS SHOWN ON THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE PROTECTION FOR ALL EXISTING CONSTRUCTION DURING ALL FIELD WELDING OPERATIONS. A FIRE EXTINGUISHER SHALL BE ON THE JOB SITE AND IN THE IMMEDIATE WORKING AREA OF ALL FIELD WELDING. REVISIONS DATE: DRAWN BY: PD, MD CHECKED BY : SST PROJECT NUMBER: 1001 SHEET NAME STRUCTURAL & SPECIAL INSPECTION NOTES SHEET NUMBER S-1.0

492 E7 7.5 E E9 E7 E8 17' - 0" 17' - 0" 5' - 6" 11' - 6" 11' - 6" 5' - 6" E 7 S-3.0 E X I S T I N G B U I L D I NG 7 S-3.0 O.H. Sim FIN. FLR. EL. = (MATCH EXISTING) 5" THICK CONCRETE SLAB REINF. w / 12"o.c. EACH WAY. LOCATE REINF. 1 1/2" CLEAR FROM BOTTOM OF SLAB U.N.O. 4" 17' - 0" 4 S-3.0 4" EXISTING 12"x12" CONCRETE COLUMN (TYP.) E.4 E.6 F F.4 20' - 10" 15' - 0" 8' - 4 1/2" 7' - 7" 8' - 4" 10 S-3.0 Sim FIN. FLR. EL. = (MATCH EXISTING) 5" THICK CONCRETE SLAB REINF. w / 12"o.c. EACH WAY. LOCATE REINF. 1 1/2" CLEAR FROM BOTTOM OF SLAB U.N.O. C1 C1 6 S-3.0 SLOPE 1" 15 S-3.0 1/2" DROP SLOPE 9 S S-3.0 DEMOLISH EXIST. STOOP, COLUMN, SLAB & CANOPY SLOPE 1" 6 S-4.0 C1 C1 8 S S S-3.0 Sim A.1 A 1 7' - 1 1/2" 12 S S-3.0 C2 1/2" DROP EXISTING COLUMNS E X I S T I N G B U I L D I N G C2 12 S S-3.0 Sim EXISTING STOOP SLAB AND SIDEWALK TO BE DEMOLISHED FOUNDATION FRAMING PLAN FOR NORTH ENTRY SCALE : 1/4" = 1'-0" FOUNDATION PLAN NOTE: 1. REF. DETAIL 3/S-3.0 FOR TYPICAL CORNER BARS. C o n s u l t i n g E n g i n e e r s, I n c. STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS HWY. 281 N., SUITE 200 SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS TEL: (210) G EXISTING COLUMN 11 S-3.0 E X I S T I N G Mk STEEL COLUMN SCHEDULE Base Size Plate Details C1 HSS5X5X3/8 11X11X3/4 2/S-3.0 C2 HSS5X5X3/16 11X11X3/4 2/S-3.0 Villa Tranchese Renovations San Antonio Housing Authority 307 Marshall Street, San Antonio, TX EXISTING COLUMN 1 S-2.0 REVISIONS DATE: DRAWN BY: PD, MD CHECKED BY : SST PROJECT NUMBER: 1001 SHEET NAME FOUNDATION FRAMING PLANS 2 FOUNDATION FRAMING PLAN FOR SOUTH ENTRY SCALE : 1/4" = 1'-0" KEYPLAN SCALE : 1" = 30'-0" 2 S-2.0 SHEET NUMBER S-2.0

493 E7 7.5 E E9 17' - 0" 17' - 0" 11' - 6" 11' - 6" E X I S T I N G B U I L D I NG E 4 S S-4.0 E.4 C4X7.2 7' - 8" 7' - 8" 7' - 8" E.6 F F.4 20' - 10" 15' - 0" 8' - 4 1/2" 7' - 7" 8' - 4" 2' - 3" 3 S-4.0 Sim HSS9X5X1/4 SLOPE HSS9X5X1/4 HSS9X5X1/4 HSS9X5X1/4 HSS10X4X3/16 C4X7.2 HSS9X5X1/4 C4X7.2 C4X7.2 HSS9X5X1/4 C4X7.2 HSS4X4X3/16 HSS6X3X3/16 HSS6X3X3/16 HSS14X4X1/4 HSS6X3X3/16 HSS9X5X1/4 HSS9X5X1/4 HSS10X4X3/16 SLOPE HSS9X5X1/4 HSS9X5X1/4 6 S S-4.0 C o n s u l t i n g E n g i n e e r s, I n c. STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS HWY. 281 N., SUITE 200 SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS TEL: (210) HSS6X3X3/16 1'-9" o.c. G (MATCH EXIST.) 5 S-4.0 EXISTING CANOPY FRAMING Villa Tranchese Renovations San Antonio Housing Authority 307 Marshall Street, San Antonio, TX REVISIONS DATE: DRAWN BY: PD, MD CHECKED BY : SST PROJECT NUMBER: ROOF FRAMING PLAN FOR SOUTH ENTRY SCALE : 1/4" = 1'-0" SHEET NAME ROOF FRAMING PLAN SHEET NUMBER S-2.1

494 1 EARTH RETAINER SCHEDULE BLOCK THICKNESS 1 1/2" 2 1/2" 3 1/2" FORMED SURFACE, (TYP.) CONT. GROUT TOP AND SIDE (TYP.) REFER TO NOTE CN- 15 ON SHEET S-1.0 "1A" REF. UNDERFLOOR GRADING PLAN FOR ELEVATION PRECAST CONC. EARTH RETAINER 12 SCHEDULED 1 X X X X X VOID SPACE UP TO 12" VOID BETWEEN 13" TO 24" VOID BETWEEN 25" TO 36" VOID FORMED SOFFIT MIN. 1' - 0" 6" (TYP.) 6" NOTES: GROUT, SEE 1/S-3.0 6". EARTH RETAINER, SEE 1/S-3.0 1/2". X X DETAIL "1A" SCALE : 1 1/2" = 1'-0" MIN. CONCRETE COVER AS REQ'D PER NOTE CN-11 ON SHEET S-1.0 SCHEDULED BEAM REINFORCING CONT. 3/4" x 3/4" CHAMFER 1. PRECAST CONCRETE EARTH RETAINERS SHALL BE 1 1/2" THICK (MIN.), REINFORCED WITH 6x6-W1.4xW1.4 W.W.F. CONCRETE STRENGTH SHALL BE 3000 PSI MIN. 2. CONCRETE EARTH RETAINERS SHALL BE APPROXIMATELY 3'-0" LONG. SHORTER EARTH RETAINERS SHALL BE SAW-CUT TO LENGTH. DO NOT JACK HAMMER RETAINERS TO LENGTH. 3. REFER TO NOTES SO-2C AND CN-15 ON SHEET S-1.0 FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. TYP. BEAM FOUNDATIONS W/ CRAWL SPACE SCALE : 3/4" = 1'-0" 3/4". TYP. U.N.O. STEEL COLUMN, SEE PLAN 3/16 3/4" BASE PLATE w/ (4) 3/4" DIA. x 8" H.C.A. (U.N.O. ON SCHEDULE) 1 1/2" (TYP.) (TYP. INTERIOR) 3" TYP. U.N.O. EDGE OF SLAB EDGE OF SLAB (TYP. EXTERIOR) (TYP. CORNER) TYP. COLUMN BASE PLATE DTL. SCALE : 3/4" = 1'-0" CORNERS 2 3 SCALE : 1/2" = 1'-0" " T " INTERSECTIONS PROVIDE CORNER BARS AT ALL EXTERIOR CORNERS OF GRADE SUPPORTED BEAMS AND AT ENDS OF ALL INTERIOR GRADE BEAMS. BARS SHALL BE SAME SIZE AS BEAM REINFORCING AND SHALL LAP 40 BAR DIAMETERS WITH BEAM REINFORCING. GRADE BEAM AND SLAB REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE CONTINUOUS WITH 40 BAR DIAMETER (NOT LESS THAN 18 INCHES) LAP AT ALL SPLICES. TYPICAL CORNER BAR DETAIL AT GRADE SUPPORTED FOUNDATION EXISTING FLATWORK (REMOVE AS REQUIRED TO INSTALL TRANSITION SLAB) 4 12" 1' - 1 1/2" (2) #5 NOTE: 6" LUG AND 5" CONC. SLAB ARE NOT REQUIRED WHERE FLAT WORK DOES NOT ABUT STOOPS OR ENTRIES. COORD. W/ ARCH. & CVIL DWGS. 6" 10" SEE CIVIL AND ARCH DWGS. SLOPE 1/4" / FT. SLAB AND REINF, SEE PLAN APPLY BOND BREAKER PRIOR TO POURING TRANSITION SLAB TO PREVENT BONDING 5 S-3.0 8" 1/2" DROP 6" LUG END OF STOOP OR BUILDING LINE 1' - 0" TRANSITION SLAB SECTION SCALE : 1/2" = 1'-0" WALL SYSTEM, REF. ARCH. 1/2" DIA. SMOOTH DOWEL x 1'-0" LG. GREASE OR CAP ONE END TO PREVENT BOND 1' - 6" C o n s u l t i n g E n g i n e e r s, I n c. TOOLED JOINT FLAT WORK, REF. ARCH. 1' - 2" #3 18"o.c. (2) #4 TOP & BOTT. 6" 10" MATCH WIDTH OF FLAT WORK, REF. ARCH. 12"o.c. (TYP.) 5" CONC. SLAB 4" 1" CL. 4" COLLAPSIBLE CARTON FORM APPLY BOND BREAKER TO PREVENT BONDING 10" 6" F.F. EL. SEE PLAN 2' - 10" 8" REF. 1/S-3.0 1' - 0" #4 12" o.c. 2'-0" 2'-0" SLOPE KEYWAY F.F. EL. SEE PLAN FLOOR SLAB, SEE PLAN 9" MIN. CLR. SPACE (TYP.) 6" 6" 6" 1' - 0" PROJ. 12" o.c. x 1'-6" LG. DRILL & EPOXY INTO EXISTING BEAM CHIP OUT EXIST. AND ADD (2) 2x6 KEYWAYS. DO NOT CUT REINFORCING (TYP.) EXISTING BEAM (COL. AT SIM.) (2) #6 x 1'-8" LG. DRIL AND EPOXY INTO EXISTING BEAM (TOP & BOTT.) (TYP.) WALL / WINDOW SYSTEM, REF. ARCH. FLATWORK (2) #5 TOP, (2) #7 BOTT. #3 12" o.c. (TYP.) 1' - 0" 2' - 10" F.F. EL. SEE PLAN WALL SYSTEM, SEE ARCH. SLOPE (2) #5 TOP, (2) #7 BOTTOM, # 3 12"o.c. 1/2" DROP 1' - 0" 2" 2' - 10" 9" CLEAR FIN. FLR. STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS HWY. 281 N., SUITE 200 SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS TEL: (210) SECTION SCALE : 1/2" = 1'-0" SECTION SECTION SECTION 6 SCALE : 1/2" = 1'-0" 7 SCALE : 1/2" = 1'-0" 8 SCALE : 1/2" = 1'-0" 9 SECTION SCALE : 1/2" = 1'-0" E8 1 S-4.0 EXISTING CONCRETE CANOPY A 10 F.F. EL. SEE PLAN REF. 1/S-3.0 2' - 10" SECTION SCALE : 1/2" = 1'-0" 1' - 0" NOTE: 6" LUG AND 5" CONC. SLAB ARE NOT REQUIRED WHERE FLAT WORK DOES NOT ABUT STOOPS OR ENTRIES. COORD. W/ ARCH. & CVIL DWGS. 6" 10" REF. CIVIL & ARCH. DWGS. 5 S-3.0 6" LUG END OF STOOP OR BUILDING LINE APPLY BOND BREAKER, REF. 4/S EXIST. GRADE BEAM 4" 6" 1' - 3" AIR SPAC. SECTION SCALE : 1/2" = 1'-0" 1'-4" 1'-4" 4" SIDEWALK PAVING 4x6 KEYWAY EXIST. PIER 8" 10" (4) #7 TOP & BOTT. #3 12" o.c. 1'-0" +/- "D" (3) #4 x 5'-0" LONG, CENTERED OVER CANOPY SUPPORT BEAM TRANSITION SLAB, SEE 15/S-3.0 WALL SYSTEM, REF. ARCH. 2' - 3" PRECAST EARTH RETAINER, SEE 1/S-3.0 FIN. FLR. E7 1' - 0" (2) #6 TOP AND BOTT., #3 12"o.c. NOTE: PRECAST EARTH RETAINERS NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY. FIN. FLR. 1' - 6" (2) #7 6'-6" 1'-0" 10" (4) #3 TIES 1 1/2" CLEAN PIER SURFACE AND APPLY BONDING AGENT IMMEDIATELY PRIOR TO BEAM CONCRETE PLACEMENT 6" 6" EXISTING 12" x 12" COLUMN CORE DRILL (2) 1 1/2" DIA. HOLES THRU EXISTING COLUMN. INSERT REINF. STEEL AND GROUT SOLIDLY W/ EPOXY GROUT BEAM TOP REINF. (2) #6 x 1'-8" LG. EPOXY GROUTED INTO EXISTING PIER EXISTING PIER FIN. FLR. BEAM REINF., REF. 12/S-3.0 SECTION SECTION SECTION 12 SCALE : 1/2" = 1'-0" 13 SCALE : 1/2" = 1'-0" 14 SCALE : 3/4" = 1'-0" EXISTING COLUMN (2) #7 DOWELS x 2'-6" LG. NOTE: PRECAST EARTH RETAINER NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY 8" 4" x 6" KEYWAY INTO EXISTING COLUMN, DO NOT CUT REINFORCING (TYP.) Villa Tranchese Renovations San Antonio Housing Authority SLOPE 1/4" / FT. SEE 6/S-3.0 FIN. FLR. 1'-0" +/- 4" 6" MIN. 1' - 2" 307 Marshall Street, San Antonio, TX " APPLY BOND BREAKER, REF. 4/S-3.0 SEE 4/S-3.0 FOR TYPICAL NOTES. SLAB AND REINF, SEE PLAN (2) #6 TOP, (3) #9 BOTT., #3 12"o.c. 1' - 0" TRANSITION SLAB SECTION SCALE : 1/2" = 1'-0" 2' - 10" TOP OF BEAM TO MATCH ADJACENT EXISTING CANOPY BEAM CARTON VOID FORMS OVER BEAM BOTTOM OF TRANSITION SLAB (BEYOND) SECTION SCALE : 1/2" = 1'-0" CANOPY SUPPORT BEAM CUT OFF EXISTING PIER EXISTING PIER SEE 11/S-3.0 FOR CONNECTION TO EXISTING PIER REVISIONS DATE: DRAWN BY: PD, MD CHECKED BY : SST PROJECT NUMBER: 1001 SHEET NAME SECTIONS AND DETAILS SHEET NUMBER S-3.0

495 E.6 F A.1 EXISTING CONCRETE BEAM SEE PLAN SEE PLAN EXISTING CONCRETE CANOPY 1/4" THICK STIFF. PLATE CENTERED OVER HSS9, (TYP.) CONT. C4, SEE PLAN ROOFING, SEE ARCH. BOTT. OF CANOPY 8'-5" A.F.F. (CONTRACTOR VERIFY) TYP. 1/2" L3X3X3/16 W/ 7/16" DIA. HOLE FOR 3/8" DIA. HILTI KWIK-BOLT 3 W/ 2 1/2" EMBEDMENT (TYP.) L3x3x1/4 CLIP ANGLE W/ (2) 1/2" DIA. HILTI KWIK BOLT 3 W/ 4 3/4" EMBED, TYP. EA. SIDE OF BEAM SEAL 12" 2" END OF HSS9 ROOF BEAM CONT. HSS4x4x3/16 (COPE ENDS AND WELD TO EDGE L4X4'S) REF. ARCH 8' - 2" FIELD VERIFY (MATCH EXISTING) E.8 2' - 4 1/2" 2' - 4 1/2" 8' - 2" FIELD VERIFY (MATCH EXISTING) HSS5x5 EQUAL EQUAL WALL SYSTEM, REF. ARCH. HSS9x5, WITH 1/4" CLOSURE PLATES, WELD ALL AROUND AND GROUND SMOOTH (TYP.) SEE PLAN REF. ARCH. BOTT. OF HSS9 8'-3" TO FIN. FLR. 1/4" THK. CLOSURE PLATE HSS14X4X1/4 1'-9" o.c. (TYP.) SECTION SECTION 1 SCALE : 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 2 SCALE : 3/4" = 1'-0" PIECE OF HSS9 WELDED ALL AROUND TO CONT. HSS9. 6' - 5" HSS10x4, SEE PLAN 3/8" STEEL PLATE W4X13 BEAM W6X12 BEAM C o n s u l t i n g E n g i n e e r s, I n c. STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS HWY. 281 N., SUITE 200 SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS TEL: (210) W4X13 BEAM 11' - 10" FIELD VERIFY (MATCH EXISTING) 3' - 6 1/2" 3' - 6 1/2" W6X20 HSS8X8X1/4 3' - 10" R = 19'-0" L4x4x1/4 BETWEEN C4 4" 8.5 L4X3X1/4 (L.L.V.) BETWEEN C4 C4 PURLIN (BEYOND) EXISTING CONCRETE BEAM (1) 3/4" DIA. HILTI KWIK BOLT 3 W/ 4 3/4" EMBED 2 12 BENT PLATE 4X4X1/4 WELDED TO EDGE BEAM (COPE TO FIT EDGE ANGLE) NEW HSS2, SEE PLAN REMOVE EXIST. NEW CANOPY G 4" EXIST. CANOPY EXIST. HSS2 EXIST. HSS6 1' - 7" (FIELD VERIFY) NEW SIDEWALK SLAB 1'-0" MIN. 2' - 6" (MATCH EXISTING) 1 1/2" TYP. 1" NON- SHRINK GROUT HSS10X10X1/4 BASEPLATE 7/8" x 1'-6" x 1'-6" W/ (4) 7/8" DIA. x 1'-10" COVER COLUMN, BASEPLATE & ANCHOR BOLTS W/ MASTIC BELOW GRADE ONLY (TYP.) HSS9, SEE PLAN HSS5 COLUMN W/ 1/4" THICK CAP PLATE SEAL (2) 1/2" DIA. HILTI KWIK BOLT 3 W/ 4 3/4" EMBED. HSS9x5, REF. 2/S-4.0 4A S-4.0 OUTSIDE FACE OF EDGE BEAM "4A" SECTION CONT. L4X3X1/4 BENT PLATE 4X4X1/4 CLIP L3X3X1/4 SECTION SECTION SECTION SECTION 3 SCALE : 3/4" = 1'-0" 4 SCALE : 3/4" = 1'-0" 5 SCALE : 3/4" = 1'-0" 6 SCALE : 1/2" = 1'-0" TYP. NEW HSS14, SEE PLAN EXISTING HSS PL. 1/2"x1"x4" ERECTION PLATE WELDED INSIDE OF EXIST. HSS EXIST. TREE COL. SUPPORT FRAMING ' - 0" NEW 24" X 30" CONCRETE BEAM 8" COLLAPSIBLE CARTON FORM Villa Tranchese Renovations San Antonio Housing Authority 307 Marshall Street, San Antonio, TX REVISIONS DATE: DRAWN BY: PD, MD CHECKED BY : SST PROJECT NUMBER: 1001 SHEET NAME STEEL SECTIONS AND DETAILS SHEET NUMBER S-4.0

496